00 General Catalogue 201617

PagineIniziali 00_GB_Layout 1 31/03/16 13:44 Pagina 1
MOTOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION 0

M
cir
Head office |
Via Don E. Mazza, 12
24020 Gorle, Bergamo, Italy
Tel. +39 035 4282111 CONTROL AND SIGNALLING 0
Fax +39 035 4282200 Pu
an
info@LovatoElectric.com sw
Sales department |
Tel. +39 035 4282354
Fax +39 035 4282400
sales@LovatoElectric.com
CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND ISOLATION 1
Sw
Technical support and customer care | di
Tel. +39 035 4282422
Fax +39 035 4282295
service@LovatoElectric.com
AUTOMATION AND CONTROL 1

Ti
ENERGY MANAGEMENT 2
M
in
an
tra
INDEX|
RUN
MON
P
STO
ENT
01 02 03 04 05 06
Motor protection Contactors Motor protection Electromechanical Soft starters Variable speed
circuit breakers relays starters and drives
enclosures
07 08 09 10
Pushbuttons Signal towers Limit, micro and Rotary cam
and selector and beacons foot switches switches
switches
R1
0, 0,
0,
LE
H
RA
EAE
G
K
LR
T 0,
0,
0,0 t(sec
0,0
T
I
TR SE
(7) RE
13
5 1,
3
1 2 O reesn
ma
2,
1 0,
tx
0,2 In(A In0,x

oreest
au tx1 reesn
ma
ST Inx tx
TE In1x
OIN
T
C
In0,x
I FU
roeest
au tx1
(7)
ON 5
13 Inx
reesn
In1x
3 ma
In1x
5.10 L
A
C
IE
nT
1
CN2 14
(8) IN
S tx
A1 6 In0,x
4 roeest
au tx1
2
Inx
24V A2 reesn
ma In1x Inx
tx
OFF
0Hz
50/6 In0,x
oreest
au tx1
0 Inx
In1x
In0,x
ctor
conta
lar
Modu
2
11 12 13 14 15 16
Switch Fuse holders and Miniature and Surge protection Modular Earth leakage
disconnectors fuses residual circuit devices contactors relays
breakers
17 18 19 20 21 22
Time relays Protection relays Level controls Micro PLCs Switching Automatic
power supplies battery chargers
23 24 25 26 27 28
Metering Power factor Automatic Engine and Software and Expansion
instruments controllers and transfer switch generator applications modules and
and current thyristor controllers controllers accessories
transformers modules
NEW PRODUCTS|2016|17
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT 40–80A CONTACTORS IN AC3

BREAKERS UP TO 100A
Available versions with rotary actuator and push button The new contactors have a small footprint: 55mm for
actuator, magnetic release for starters only and fuse the three-pole versions and 73mm for the four-pole
control function. 45mm wide up to 40A rated current. versions. Rated thermal current (lth) from 70 to 115A,
Accessories include front-mount and side-mount power terminals with double lug clamp and 4-terminal
auxiliary contacts, trip signalling contacts, supply coil. Available with two types of coil, AC or AC/DC with
connection busbars and a wide variety of enclosures. electronic control and wide supply voltage range
(e.g. a single coil covers 100–250VAC/DC), low power
consumption, only closes at
correct supply voltage, with built-
in noise filter. Also available in
specific versions for DC load
switching.
40–50kvar CONTACTORS FOR ADLX SERIES SOFT STARTERS

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
Specific new contactors for controlling PFC capacitors This new series complements the soft starter range with
are available with 40kvar, 45kvar or 50kvar ratings at two-phase control starters from 30 to 320A, featuring
400V and a very small footprint (55mm wide). integrated bypass and a very small
The double lug clamp terminals enable easy connection footprint. Equipped with icon
of cables even when multiple connections are required. display and NFC connectivity for
easy and immediate
configuration, they are suitable for
simple applications thanks to the
installation wizard, or for
applications requiring maximum
performance in terms of motor
control and protection. Available
in 400 and 600V versions.
VLB SERIES VARIABLE SPEED SIGNAL TOWERS Ø45mm AND

DRIVES MULTICOLOURED Ø70mm
Three-phase power input 400–480VAC, power ratings The Ø45 mm towers are supplied fully assembled with
from 0.4kW to 30kW, small footprint with “book” format: the possibility of up to three light modules
the VLB series is ideal for lifting and a sound module. Perfect for mounting
systems and pump/fan on small machines, their high brightness
management, owing to specific LED circuit ensures long-life illumination
integrated features such as S-curve, and low power consumption.
PID and quadratic torque control. The new Ø70mm multicoloured
Programming, monitoring and light modules are supplied up to
diagnostics from PC via USB or Wi-Fi. three different colours per model.
A RS485 communication port with In the event of two or more
integrated Modbus-RTU and alarms, the multicoloured module
supplied EMC filter are also standard lights up in alternating colours
equipment. Modules are available to corresponding to the event.
equip the drive with the most
common fieldbus systems, including
PROFIBUS and CANopen.
PLATINUM SERIES NEW GX SERIES ROTARY

COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES CAM SWITCHES
The Platinum series also includes the following Our range of cam switches has been further expanded
products: to include 20A AC1 ON/OFF switches with panel
- continuous or pulse-tone monoblock buzzers mounting by means of a threaded ring (with Ø22mm
- monoblock potentiometers drilled hole) and snap-on fitting. Quick and easy
- USB and RJ45 communication interfaces installation are the main benefits of these switches.
- monoblock LED pilot lights with IP66, IP67 or IP69K The switch is available with knob or key control.
protection (Nema 4X)
- adapter for DIN rail mounting
- protective shrouds.
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS FOR GA SERIES 160A SWITCH

PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS DISCONNECTORS AND 48x48mm
DOOR COUPLING HANDLE
The switch disconnector range is further boosted by the
introduction of compact versions (54mm wide) rated for GA series switch disconnectors are now available up to
40A at 1000VDC and 32A at 1200V in the category 160A AC21A. At 70mm wide, its small size enables it to
DC21B. These switch disconnectors are supplied with a be fitted inside electrical panels with limited space.
handle for direct control and include bridges for Available in three-pole and four-pole versions and with
connecting the poles in series. There are also versions IP65 plastic enclosure in 0-1 and 1-0-2 configurations.
with IP65 plastic enclosure. The range of door coupling handles for GA series switch
disconnectors now includes a version with 48x48mm
front plate.
UL489 MINIATURE CIRCUIT CLASS B RESIDUAL CURRENT

BREAKERS (MCB) CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MCBs compliant with the UL489 standard are ideal for In addition to tripping under the same conditions as for
manufacturers of electrical machinery or appliances types AC and A, these RCCBs also trip due to high-
destined for the North American market. They comply frequency leakage currents up to 1000Hz and direct
with the IEC/EN60947-2 standard and can therefore be currents. They are particularly suitable in installations
used in global markets. The range covers rated currents with variable speed drives, UPS systems and for electric
from 1 to 63A and trip curves C and D. The operating vehicle charging stations.
voltage for appliances up to 32A is 277V for the 1-pole
versions and 480Y/277V for the 2-pole
and 3-pole versions. Above 32A, the
operating voltage becomes 120V for
the 1-pole versions and 240V for the
2-pole and 3-pole versions.
NEW PRODUCTS|2016|17
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE MODULAR CONTACTORS AND

ADD-ON BLOCKS SOCKETS
A new line of residual current device add-on blocks Two new modular contactor models with 32A current
connectable to miniature circuit breakers, available in 2, rating in two-pole or three/four-pole versions.
3 and 4-pole versions for 30 or 300mA residual currents. Considerable space saving (1 module for two-pole
All models are type A for sinusoidal alternating currents versions and 2 modules for three/four-pole versions).
and pulsating direct currents. Available in manually operated versions with Ith rated
The rated current is 40A or 63A. current of 20 or 32A.
Fast and functional MCB fitting in compliance with The modular sockets provide a power source near to or
IEC/EN60009-1 requirements. inside electrical panels. Suitable for 10/16A standard
Schuko Italian or German plugs. Also compatible with
standard French plugs
without ground
connection.
FLOAT SWITCHES 48VDC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

AND REDUNDANT MODULES
Available in grey water and dirty water versions. All are Our range of switching power supplies has been
equipped with internal changeover contact, which is extensively enhanced with 48VDC versions
actuated based on liquid level. High quality 3x1 type (single-phase from 30 to 480W, two-phase 100W and
cables (3 wires of 1mm2 cross-section area) allow the three-phase from 240 to 960W) and redundant
filling and emptying function to be selected when modules. The modules are used for redundant
wiring the switch. Excellent mechanical and chemical connection of two or more power supplies, to increase
resistance and first-rate reliability. Available in versions the reliability of the DC power supply.
with PVC or Neoprene cable in lengths of 3, 5, 10, 15 The redundant modules ensure perfect isolation
and 20m. The patented version for dirty water between the various connected power supplies.
consists of two watertight chambers that are
insulated from each other by closed-cell foam
material, providing a further protective barrier
against infiltration and high thermal
insulation.
BCG SERIES AUTOMATIC ENERGY METERS

COMMUNICATING BATTERY
CHARGERS
The new communicating version BCG battery chargers The range of DME energy meters for three-phase
incorporate essential features for applications where the systems has been extended with three new models.
charge state of the connected battery needs to be The CT-connection DME D330 and direct-connection
constantly controlled. In the event of an AC power DME D301 up to 63A have an onboard RS485 port that
failure, the battery chargers are able to maintain active allows them to be integrated into a network of power
communication by drawing power from the battery, consumption monitoring instruments by means of
thus ensuring constant supervision even in supervision software.
emergencies. They are equipped with a RS485 serial The user interface of the DME D305 model features a
communication port backlight icon display for electrical measurements and
and can be programmed scrolling text for describing
wirelessly using NFC configuration parameters and
technology. user-customizable alarm
messages.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ATL SERIES AUTOMATIC TRANSFER

SWITCH CONTROLLERS
Our line of current transformers has been enhanced ATL 800 controls load switching between two sources,
with new solid-core and split-core types. whereas ATL 900 can manage three power sources and
The new solid-core transformers are available up to two tie breakers and is therefore ideal for advanced
3000A and are designated as precision transformers due applications. The current measuring inputs on ATL 900
to their 0.5S accuracy class. We have also extended our define the switching threshold based on the absorbed
split-core transformer offering with compact models power. The two models have a built-in RS485 port and
and current ratings from 100A to 500A. can manage a third control device with tie-breaker or
They are supplied pre-wired with a 1m cable. non-priority load management function. Closed-
transition transfer switching. The
integrated PLC logic enables the
switching logics to be
customized.
Can also be programmed
wirelessly using NFC technology.
DUAL POWER SUPPLY MODULE GENERATING SET

CONTROLLERS
Automatic switching is now more reliable than ever RGK4... is a compact stand-alone controller featuring an
thanks to the dual power supply module. The device has icon display with intuitive interface. The gen set can be
two inputs (Line 1 and Line 2) and is able to verify the activated locally or by remote control. When the gen set
applied voltages, identifying which one is more suitable is not in operation, the controller can be switched off
for connecting to the module’s output. Ideal for without physically removing the battery power supply.
supplying changeover switche disconnectors and RGK4... is also available with a three-position key for
motorised circuit breakers. local or remote shutdown and starting.
The two single-phase voltage inputs are independent, RGK 610 is an AMF (Automatic Mains Failure) controller
insulated and each capable of supplying the internal that is expandable by means of EXP series modules.
measuring circuit. Further checks are USB, RS232 or RS485
carried out on the output voltage, communication ports can be
enabling the correct operation of incorporated by adding an
the device to be verified. In the EXP expansion module.
event of a fault, the red LED will light
up and voltage will be no longer
available at the output terminals.
SOFTWARE and APP: SYNERGY GATEWAY AND 3G MODEM

CLOUD, XPRESS and NFC
The Synergy software is now available in the Cloud The Internet connectivity of LOVATO Electric products is
version! Multi-channel connections, data collation in now enhanced by the availability of the RS485-Ethernet
SQL database and multi-user access via Web browser to gateway (EXC CON 01) and 3G modem (EXC M3G 01).
live pages or tables without having to install special These devices enable the RS485 network over which
software. Easy monitoring of the main electrical LOVATO Electric products (such as a multimeter) are
parameters of LOVATO Electric devices. The XPRESS connected to interface with a LAN and a
software can be used to configure all recent 3G wireless network respectively.
LOVATO Electric devices equipped with a This makes it possible to create a
communication port, particularly using the connection with a
CX 01 (USB) and CX 02 (Wi-Fi) dongles. software, app or
The NFC app enables program capable of
LOVATO Electric devices to collating the measured
be programmed using data.
smartphones and tablets
by means of Android NFC
technology.
I N T E R N AT I O N A L GERMANY | •
PRESENCE| LOVATO Electric GmbH
www.LovatoElectric.de
The presence of LOVATO Electric in the
major world markets is the result of its ITALY | • UK | •
ongoing strategy of internationalisation.
LOVATO Electric S.p.A. LOVATO Electric LTD
LOVATO Electric Italy distributes its products
www.LovatoElectric.com www.Lovato.co.uk
worldwide to over 100 countries through its
foreign subsidiaries and importer network.
FRANCE | •
LOVATO Electric SAS
www.LovatoElectric.fr
CANADA | •
LOVATO Electric Corp.
www.Lovato.ca
USA | •
LOVATO Electric Inc.
www.LovatoUsa.com
90 | IMPORTERS
13 | FOREIGN
SUBSIDIARIES
• | POLAND
LOVATO Electric SP.Z O.O.
www.LovatoElectric.pl
100 | COUNTRIES
• | CZECH REPUBLIC • | RUSSIA

LOVATO Electric S.R.O. OOO LOVATO Electric
www.LovatoElectric.cz www.LovatoElectric.ru
• | ROMANIA CHINA | •
LOVATO Electric SRL LOVATO Electric
www.LovatoElectric.ro (SHANGHAI) CO LTD
www.LovatoElectric.cn
• | SPAIN • | TURKEY • | UNITED ARAB EMIRATES

LOVATO Electric S.L.U. LOVATO Elektrik LTD LOVATO Electric ME FZE
www.LovatoElectric.es www.LovatoElectric.com.tr www.LovatoElectric.ae
A LONG TRADITION
OF STYLE |
We have been managing energy since 1922, to the present day, in which electronics and
1922 led by the same family for four generations, automation go hand in hand.
from the early days of electrical engineering Italian design has always been our hallmark
and an ever-present requirement in the
daily work of our designers, researchers and
engineering experts.
Our company mission has always been the
same: to create innovative and reliable
products, offering services that exceed
customer expectations.
innovation and reliability
Italian design
T H E F O U N D AT I O N S O N
W H I C H W E A R E B U I LT |
Quality is a keyword in every market, especially The second issue is safety, a primary
ours.That is why we have always made quality consideration in any workplace, which is why
a top priority, such that in 1992 we were one we are certified to OHSAS 18001.
of the first companies in Italy to certify our
OHSAS 18001
management system according to the
ISO 9001 standard.
ISO 9001 These days, quality is a broad concept
that embraces many issues. We have identified
two issues that are central to our business. The
first is environmental management and we
have aligned our corresponding system with
the ISO 14001 standard in order to protect and
sustain the environment in which we live.
ISO 14001
KEY COMPONENTS
OF OUR SUCC ESS |
Products that are designed for the most diverse Behind our products there is a solid, flexible
applications and installed all over the world and innovative organisation with cutting-edge
need to meet high standards of reliability. production facilities, where robotics and
automation ensure that we can consistently
replicate the desired results. Our testing
laboratory is authorised to issue ACAE/LOVAG
certificates, accredited to EN ISO/IEC 17025
and qualified to conduct tests according to
national and international standards.
Our technical support service helps customers
to select the right products and commission
them, in addition to offering after-sales
advice.
LOVAG certified
laboratory
technical support
C U T T I N G - E D G E L A B O R AT O R Y |
MAIN TESTS PERFORMED:

• Making and breaking capacities
• Short-circuit with comparator system
• Temperature rise
• Thermal protection functionality
• Verification of dielectric properties
• Verification of terminals mechanical
properties
• Verification of IK code degree of protection
(impact withstand)
• Verification of IP code degree of protection
(ingress protection against water jets)
• Shock and vibration withstand
• Electrical and mechanical durability
• Low current-low voltage contact
functionality
• Ambient simulation in climatic chamber
• Glow-wire ignitability of insulating parts
• Immunity to conducted and radiated
emission fields
• Immunity to surges, fast transients / bursts
and electrostatic discharges.
EXPERIENCE AND EXPERTISE|
To meet the growing demand for technical

training of industrial automation and
energy management professionals, LOVATO
Electric provides a high-profile programme
of courses through the LOVATO Academy.
The curriculum includes courses on micro
PLCs, energy management and motor
starting and control technologies.
energy management
LOVATO Academy
A training area equipped with the latest LOVATO Academy offers free live seminars
audiovisual technology and interactive that are streamed worldwide and simply
training benches provides the perfect setting require an Internet connection to participate. free live
for understanding the true potential of our There is even a LOVATO Electric channel on seminars
products and software during both function YouTube, complete with video tutorials that
programming and simulation phases. demonstrate how to configure and use our
video tutorials
Training is also available over the Internet: products by means of practical examples.
interactive training benches

Page 1-4 Page 1-4 Page 1-4
SM1P... SM1R... SM1RM...

• Motor protection • Motor protection • Starter protection (magnetic only)
• Push button control • Rotary knob type • Rotary knob type
• Ranges 0.1...40A (16 choices) • Ranges 0.1...40A (16 choices) • Rated current from 0.16 to 40A
• IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: from • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V:
from 100 to 10kA 100 to 20kA from 100 to 20kA.
• Suitable for mounting in modular panels. • Thermal and magnetic trip indicator
• UL 508 Type E via accessory (certification
obtained for range from 0.1 to 6.5A;
pending for all the other ratings).
Page 1-5 Page 1-5
SM2R... SM3R...
• Motor protection • Motor protection
• Rotary knob type • Rotary knob type
• Ranges 34...63A (2 choices) • Ranges 55...100A (3 choices)
• IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: 50kA • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: 50kA
• UL 508 Type E. • Thermal and magnetic trip indicator
• UL 508 Type E via accessory.
Page 1-5
SM1PF... LOVATO Electric motor protection circuit

• Fuse monitoring function breakers are suitable for new motors with
• Push button control high IE3 efficiency values
• Fixed thermal protection: 0.2A
• Magnetic trip threshold: 1.2A.
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1
Wide adjustment range

0.1 to 100A
IEC breaking capacity Icu 50kA
(400V) up to 100A
Suitable for isolation
Comprehensive line of accessories
Magnetic-only version
Automatic trip indicators
High reliability and accuracy of
tripping.
SEC. - PAGE
Motor protection circuit breakers
Motor protection circuit breakers SM1… up to 40A. Magnetic and thermal protection ........................................................ 1 - 4
Motor protection circuit breakers SM1RM… up to 40A. Magnetic protection ...................................................................... 1 - 4
Motor protection circuit breakers SM2... and SM3... up to 100A. Magnetic and thermal protection ...................................... 1 - 5
SM1PF... breakers. Fuse monitoring function ..................................................................................................................... 1 - 5
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1… ......................................................................................................................... 1 - 6
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2... and SM3... ........................................................................................................ 1 - 8
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 1 - 12
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 1 - 14
Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 1 - 15
P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
IEC ratings
1
Motor protection Starter protection
(magnetic and thermal protection) (magnetic protection)
SM1P... SM1R... SM2R... SM3R... SM1RM...

Rated current 0.1...40A 0.1...40A 34...63A 55…100A 0.1…40A
Thermal protection
Magnetic protection
TRIP position
Phase failure sensitive
Padlockable in O
Choice 230V 400V 440V 500V 690V 230V 400V 440V 500V 690V 230V 400V 440V 500V 690V
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
[A] kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA
0.1...0.16 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
0.16...0.25 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
0.25...0.4 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
0.4...0.63 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
0.63...1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
1...1.6 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
1.6...2.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3 3 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 10
2.5...4 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3 3 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 10
4...6.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3 3 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 4 2 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 4 2
6.3...10 100 100 100 100 25 12.5 25 12.5 3 3 100 100 100 100 42 42 42 42 4 2 100 100 100 100 42 42 42 42 4 2
9...14 100 100 25 12.5 10 5 10 5 3 3 100 100 100 100 42 42 42 42 4 2 100 100 100 100 42 42 42 42 4 2
13...18 100 50 25 12.5 10 5 10 5 3 3 100 100 100 100 10 5 10 5 4 2 100 100 100 100 10 5 10 5 4 2
17...23 50 50 15 5 10 5 10 5 3 2 100 100 50 25 10 5 10 5 4 2 100 100 50 25 10 5 10 5 4 2
20...25 50 50 15 5 10 5 10 5 3 2 100 100 50 25 10 5 10 5 4 2 100 100 50 25 10 5 10 5 4 2
24...32 50 50 10 5 10 5 10 5 3 2 100 100 50 25 10 5 10 5 4 2 100 100 50 25 10 5 10 5 4 2
30...40 20 20 10 5 10 5 10 5 3 2 100 100 20 10 10 5 10 5 4 2 100 100 20 25 10 5 10 5 4 2
34…50 - - - - - - - - - - 100 100 50 50 35 27 10 8 5 5 - - - - - - - - - -
45…63 - - - - - - - - - - 100 100 50 50 35 27 10 8 5 5 - - - - - - - - - -
55…75 - - - - - - - - - - 100 100 50 38 40 30 8 6 5 4 - - - - - - - - - -
70…90 - - - - - - - - - - 100 100 50 38 40 30 8 6 5 4 - - - - - - - - - -
80…100 - - - - - - - - - - 100 100 50 38 40 30 8 6 5 4 - - - - - - - - - -
SM1P... MODULAR SIZE 40A IN 45mm SM1R... TRIP INDICATION UL 508 Type E
– Mounting on front of panels or in – From 0.1A to 40A in a device just – Thermal and magnetic trip – The entire rotary knob type is
modular panels for rapid access to 45mm wide. indication with trip position of knob. certified UL Type E (pending for
buttons, avoiding the opening of the – High short-circuit breaking capacity – Specific optical indication for short- ranges from 6.5 to 40A).
door by non-technical staff. up to 40A. circuit tripping; guarantees – Type E is a specific requirement of
– Auxiliary contacts, indicator – Small, cost-effective starters. maximum safety for operators and the UL standards that requires, of
contacts and releases compatible reliability of the system. short-circuit protection devices,
with modular panels. 45mm (1.77”) – Auxiliary trip indication contacts increased terminal isolation
with ability to distinguish overload distances and strict breaking
from short circuit. capacity tests.
– Eliminates the need for further
short-circuit protection devices
upstream of the motor protection.
SM1... HIGH-PERFORMANCE
PLASTICS
– IEC/EN 60335-compliant plastics for
domestic and similar applications.
Can be used in catering equipment.
– EN 45545-compliant plastics: fire
behaviour and emissions of fumes.
Suitable for railway applications.
1-2
UL508 ratings
1
Fuse monitoring Motor protection
(magnetic and thermal protection)
SM1PF... SM1P... SM1R... - SM2R... - SM3R...

0.2A UL508 Manual Motor Controller - Short circuit current in kA UL508 Manual Self
Motor Protection Motor Group Protection Tap Protected Combination
Disconnect Disconnect Motor Conductor Motor Controller
(Type E) Short circuit
Group Motor Installation Protection
Installation current in kA

230V 400V 440V 500V 690V 240V 480V 600V 480V 600V 480V 600V 480Y/277V 600Y/347V 240V 480Y/277V 600Y/347V
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA kA
- - - - - - - - - - 50 50 50 Fuse or CB 50 50 50 50 Fuse or CB 50 50 50 50 50
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 Fuse or CB 50 50 50 50 Fuse or CB 50 50 50 50 50
- - - - - - - - - - 30 30 30 100A Class J 30 30 30 30 Fuse or CB 30 30 30 30 30
- - - - - - - - - - 30 30 30 100A Class J 30 30 30 30 100A Class J
- - - - - - - - - - 30 30 - 100A Class J 30 30 30 30 200A Class J
- - - - - - - - - - 30 30 - 100A Class J 30 30 30 30 200A Class J
- - - - - - - - - - 5 5 - Fuse or CB 30 30 30 30 200A Class J
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50 10 50 10 Fuse or CB 50 10 100 50 -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50 10 50 10 Fuse or CB 50 10 100 50 -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40 10 40 10 Fuse or CB 40 10 100 40 -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40 10 40 10 Fuse or CB 40 10 100 40 -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40 10 40 10 Fuse or CB 40 10 100 40 -
Pending.
ENCLOSURES DOOR COUPLING HANDLES SM1... PADLOCKABILITY
– Various types of plastic enclosures are available for rotating and button- – Padlockable door coupling handles – Padlockability as standard on the
controlled motor protection circuit breakers up to 40A. for the entire rotary knob type. entire rotary knob type and push
– Ideal for small machines and isolated motors. Make systems compliant with safety button-controlled motor protection
– IP65 (UL Type 4X) protection rating and UV-ray resistant. regulations. circuit breaker range. For greater
– Very robust plastics, IK07; pass even the strict UL “ball impact” test. – Tough, easy and quick to install. operator safety during maintenance
– UL-certified. and bypassing of the equipment.
1-3
Motor protection circuit Order code Thermal Short circuit Qty Wt General characteristics
1 breakers SM1… up to 40A. trip breaking per SM1P... and SM1R... are modern circuit breakers with
adjustment capacity pkg thermal and magnetic trip releases and high breaking
Magnetic and thermal range at 400V capacity.
protection Icu Ics Motor control and protection of up to 22kW (400V) are
[A] [kA] [kA] n° [kg] possible by choosing the suitable adjustment range, 0.1 to
40A.
Push button control. The dimensions of SM1P… breakers are compliant with the
SM1P 0016 0.1...0.16 100 100 1 0.280 DIN43880 standard, allowing them to be mounted in all
SM1P 0025 0.16...0.25 100 100 1 0.280 modular enclosures on the market.
A magnetic trip indicator integrated on the SM1R…
SM1P 0040 0.25...0.4 100 100 1 0.280 breakers avoids dangerous closing operations during short-
SM1P 0063 0.4...0.63 100 100 1 0.280 circuit conditions, previously disconnected by the breaker.
SM1P 0100 0.63...1 100 100 5 0.280 SM1R… breakers are Type E-certified according to UL508
(certification obtained for range from 0.1 to 6.5A; pending
SM1P 0160 1...1.6 100 100 5 0.280 for all the other ratings).
SM1P 0250 1.6...2.5 100 100 5 0.350 SM1P… and SM1R… motor protection circuit breakers are
SM1P 0400 2.5...4 100 100 5 0.350 suitable for isolation in accordance with IEC/EN 60947
standards and can be padlocked in OFF position without
SM1P... SM1P 0650 4...6.5 100 100 5 0.350 using accessories.
SM1P 1000 6.3...10 100 100 5 0.350 Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude protection
SM1P 1400 9...14 25 12.5 5 0.350 fuses on the majority of the installations.
SM1P 1800 13...18 25 12.5 5 0.350 Operational characteristics
SM1P 2300 17...23 15 5 1 0.350 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
SM1P 2500 20...25 15 5 1 0.350 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV
– IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz
SM1P 3200 24...32 10 5 1 0.350 – Maximum rated current: 40A
SM1P 4000 30...40 10 5 1 0.350 – Adjustment ranges: 16
Rotary knob type. – IEC breaking capacity: See table on page 1-2
– Heat dissipation per phase: 0.7...3.3W
SM1R 0016 0.1...0.16 100 100 1 0.320 – Magnetic tripping: 13In max.
SM1R 0025 0.16...0.25 100 100 1 0.320 – Tripping class: 10A
SM1R 0040 0.25...0.4 100 100 1 0.320 – Phase failure sensitive
– Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
SM1R 0063 0.4...0.63 100 100 1 0.320 – Electrical life: 100,000 cycles
SM1R...
SM1R 0100 0.63...1 100 100 5 0.320 – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
SM1R 0160 1...1.6 100 100 5 0.320 – Mounting position: Any
– IEC utilisation category: A
SM1R 0250 1.6...2.5 100 100 5 0.320 – Padlocking in OFF: Ø4mm/0.16”
SM1R 0400 2.5...4 100 100 5 0.390 – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
SM1R 0650 4...6.5 100 100 5 0.390
Certifications and compliance
SM1R 1000 6.3...10 100 100 5 0.390 Certifications obtained: cULus.
SM1R 1400 9...14 100 100 5 0.390 SM1R… breakers are Type E-certified
SM1R 1800 13...18 100 100 5 0.390 (Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers) according
to UL508 (certification obtained for range from 0.1 to 6.5A;
SM1R 2300 17...23 50 25 1 0.390 pending for all the other ratings).
SM1R 2500 20...25 50 25 1 0.390 Certifications pending: EAC, CCC.
SM1R 3200 24...32 50 25 1 0.390 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508,
SM1R 4000 30...40 20 10 1 0.390 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Plastic materials compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335
and EN 45545.
Motor protection circuit Order code Rated and Short circuit Qty Wt General characteristics
magnetic breaking per SM1RM… are motor protection circuit breakers with
breakers SM1RM… trip current capacity pkg magnetic tripping only and high breaking capacity.
up to 40A. at 400V They are typically used to protect starters where there is a
thermal relay or other overload protection.
Magnetic protection Rat. Trip. Icu Ics
Starter control and protection of up to 22kW (400V) are
[A] [A] [kA] [kA] n° [kg] possible by choosing the suitable adjustment range, from
Rotary knob type. 0.1 to 40A.
SM1RM 0016 0.16 1.6 100 100 1 0.320 Operational characteristics
SM1RM 0025 0.25 3.2 100 100 1 0.320 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
SM1RM 0040 0.4 5.2 100 100 1 0.320 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV
SM1RM 0063 0.63 8.2 100 100 1 0.320 – Maximum rated current: 40A
SM1RM 0100 1 13 100 100 5 0.320 – IEC breaking capacity: See table on page 1-3
SM1RM 0160 1.6 21 100 100 5 0.320 – Heat dissipation per phase: 0.7...3.3W
– Magnetic tripping: 13In max.
SM1RM 0250 2.5 33 100 100 5 0.320 – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
SM1RM... SM1RM 0400 4 52 100 100 5 0.390 – Electrical life: 100,000 cycles
SM1RM 0650 6.5 85 100 100 5 0.390 – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– Mounting position: Any
SM1RM 1000 10 130 100 100 5 0.390 – IEC utilisation category: A
SM1RM 1400 14 182 100 100 5 0.390 – Padlocking in OFF: Ø4mm
SM1RM 1800 18 234 100 100 5 0.390 – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
SM1RM 2300 23 299 50 25 1 0.390 Certifications and compliance
SM1RM 2500 25 325 50 25 1 0.390 Certifications obtained: cULus.
Certifications pending: EAC, CCC.
SM1RM 3200 32 416 50 25 1 0.390 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2,
SM1RM 4000 40 420 20 25 1 0.390 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Plastic materials compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335
and EN 45545.
Add-on blocks/ Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

1-4 Accessories - page 1-6 and 7 page 1-12 page 1-14 page 1-15
Motor protection circuit Order code Thermal Short circuit Qty Wt General characteristics
breakers SM2... and SM3... trip breaking per SM2R... and SM3R... are modern circuit breakers with 1
adjustment capacity pkg thermal and magnetic trip releases and high breaking
up to 100A. Magnetic and range at 400V capacity.
thermal protection Icu Ics Motor control and protection, up to 45kW (400V) are
[A] [kA] [kA] n° [kg] possible by choosing the suitable adjustment range, up to
100A.
Rotary knob type. SM2R… and SM3R… breakers are Type E-certified
SM2R 5000 34…50 50 50 1 1.000 according to UL508.
SM2R 6300 45…63 50 50 1 1.000 The SM2R… and SM3R… types are suitable for isolation
according to IEC/EN 60947 standards and can be padlocked
Rotary knob type. in OFF position without using accessories.
SM3R 7500 55…75 50 38 1 2.200 SM3… has a trip function which indicates thermal and
SM3R 9000 70…90 50 38 1 2.200 magnetic tripping.
Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude protection
SM3R 9900 80…100 50 38 1 2.200 fuses on the majority of the installations.
Operational characteristics
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
– IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 8kV
– Maximum rated current:
SM2R...
63A (for SM2...); 100A (for SM3...)
– Adjustment ranges: 2 (for SM2...); 3 (for SM3...)
– IEC breaking capacity: See table on page 1-2 and 1-3
– Max. heat dissipation per phase: 7W
– Magnetic tripping: 13In max.
– Tripping class: 10A
– Phase failure sensitive
– Electrical life: 25,000 cycles
– Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– IEC utilisation category: A
– Padlocking in OFF: Ø4mm/0.16”
– IEC degree of protection: IP20 on front.

Certifications obtained: cULus.
SM2… and SM3… circuit breakers are Type E-certified
(Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers) according
to UL508; for Type E certification, SM3 only with
accessory SM3X90 00R.
SM3R... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2,
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
SM1PF... circuit breakers Order code Fixed Short circuit Qty Wt General characteristics
thermal breaking per SM1PF… are breakers with magnetic-thermal tripping
Fuse monitoring function release capacity pkg intended specifically for monitoring the status of fuses.
current at 400V By connecting every phase of the breaker to a fuse, when it
Icu Ics blows, the motor protection breaks.
Through the auxiliary contacts fitted on the motor
[A] [kA] [kA] n° [kg] protection, the blown fuses are signalled electrically.
Push button control.
SM1PF 0020 0.20 100 100 5 0.280 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
– IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV
L1 L2 L3 – Rated current: 0.2A
– Magnetic tripping: 1.2A.
– Electrical life: 100,000 cycles
– Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
SM1PF... – IEC utilisation category: A
– Padlocking in OFF: Ø4mm/0.16”
– IEC degree of protection: IP20.

Certifications obtained: cULus.
Certifications pending: EAC, CCC.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
T1 T2 T3 Plastic materials compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335
and EN 45545.
Add-on blocks/ Accessories - Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

page 1-6 to 1-8 page 1-12 to 1-14 page 1-14 page 1-15 1-5
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1…
Order Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

1 code per ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS
pkg – Connectable to the left side of the breaker or on the front
n° [kg] – Maximum combinations: 3 SM1X… blocks with
6 auxiliary contacts in total of which 1 front block and
Add-on auxiliary contacts. 2 side blocks
SM1X11... SM1X11 20 Front mount 2NO 10 0.016 – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A (5A for
SM1X11 11 Front mount 1NO+1NC 10 0.016 SM1X11...)
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V (300V for
SM1X12 20 Side mount 2NO 1 0.036 SM1X11...)
SM1X12 11 Side mount 1NO+1NC 10 0.016 – Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV (4kV for
SM1X12 02 Side mount 2NC 1 0.036 SM1X11...)
– UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
SM1X13 11 Side mount. Contacts 1 0.036 A600 - Q600 (C300 - R300 for SM1X11...)
for thermal and magnetic – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin
tripping indication – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2
1NO+1NC wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG.
SM1X13 11M Side mount. Contacts 1 0.036 – Screw tightening tool: Phillips 2
SM1X12... SM1X13... for magnetic tripping – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin
indication 1NO+1NC – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 0.5 DIN
Undervoltage trip releases. 46880 modules.
SM1X14 110 110VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.130 UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RELEASES
SM1X14 230 230VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.130 – Snap on to the right side of the breaker
SM1X14 400 400VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.130 – Consumption inrush/holding: 12/3.5VA
– Release voltage: 0.35...0.7Us
SM1X15 110R With early-make contacts 1 0.140 – Operating voltage: 0.85...1.1Us
110VAC 50/60Hz – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin
SM1X15 230R With early-make contacts 1 0.140 – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2
230VAC 50/60Hz wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG.
SM1X15 400R With early-make contacts 1 0.140 – Screw tightening tool: Phillips 2
SM1X14... SM1X16... 400VAC 50/60Hz – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin
SM1X15... – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 1 DIN
Shunt trip releases. 46880 module.
SM1X16 024 24VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.130
SM1X16 110 110VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.130 SHUNT TRIP RELEASES
– Snap on to the right side of the breaker
SM1X16 230 230VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.130 – In-rush consumption: 20VA
SM1X16 400 400VAC 50/60Hz 1 0.130 – Operating voltage: 0.7...1.1Us
Adjuster sealing kit. – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2
wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG.
SM1X18 12 With wire and lead included 1 0.006 – Screw tightening tool: Phillips 2
IP65 (4X) padlockable door coupling handle for SM1R... – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin
SM1X18 200R – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 1
SM1X18 200R Red/yellow complete 1 0.115
with rod length 200mm/7.87” standard DIN 46880 module.
SM1X18B 200R Black complete with rod 1 0.115 TERMINAL BLOCKS FOR BUSBAR SUPPLY
length 200mm/7.87” – Imax 63A
SM1X18 S Support for rod 1 0.030 – Screw tightening tool: Phillips 2
>145mm/5.71” – Maximum tightening torque: 2.3Nm / 20lbin
Phase separation barriers for SM1R… – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum: 4...25mm
2 or 10...4AWG.
SM1X9000R For Type E as per UL508 5 0.016
Three-phase connection busbars 45mm/1.77” spacing. THREE-PHASE CONNECTION BUSBARS
SM1X18B 200R – Imax 63A
11 SMX90 32 For 2 breakers 10 0.028
– SMX90 3... 45mm/1.77” spacing to reduce the width to
11 SMX90 33 For 3 breakers 10 0.050 the minimum
11 SMX90 34 For 4 breakers 10 0.071 – SMX90 4... 54mm/2.13” spacing to consent to fit one
11 SMX90 35 For 5 breakers 10 0.092 side-mount auxiliary contact block on the breaker.
Three-phase connection busbars 54mm/2.13” spacing. Certifications and compliance
11 SMX90 42 For 2 breakers 10 0.031 Certifications obtained: cULus.
11 SMX90 43 For 3 breakers 10 0.056 Certifications pending: EAC, CCC.
11 SMX90 44 For 4 breakers 10 0.081 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
11 SMX90 45 For 5 breakers 10 0.090
Terminal block for busbar supply.
SM1X18 S
11 SMX90 30 For all busbar types 10 0.048
SM1X90 50 For all busbar types 10 0.033
Type E as per UL508
Safety cover.
11 SMX90 31 For unused terminals 10 0.004
Accessories for screw-fixing motor protection.
SM1X89 02 Metal bracket for fixing 10 0.006
SM1… motor protection
with screws
BFX89 01 Universal plastic base 5 0.016
for screw-fixing
SM1X89 02 BFX89 01 SM1… motor protection
Only suitable for SM1R... motor protection circuit breakers
Mounting also possible with side-mount auxiliary contacts SM1X12... and
SM1X13...
Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

1-6 page 1-12 and 13 page 1-14 page 1-15
Order code Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

per RIGID SM1 BREAKER-CONTACTOR CONNECTIONS 1
pkg The SM1X3… connections electrically and mechanically
n° [kg] fasten the motor protection breaker together with the
contactor. This forms a highly compact single-unit starter for
SM1X30... Rigid SM1 breaker-contactor connections. quick installation on a single 35mm DIN rail.
SM1X30 40P For motor protection breaker 10 0.019 The SM1X3… connections can also be mounted in
SM1P... with BG… mini-contactors combination with reversing switches and star-delta starters
SM1X31 41P For motor protection breaker 10 0.035 made with the rigid connections indicated in section 2.
SM1P... with BF09..25A contactors
SURFACE MOUNT ENCLOSURES
SM1X32 41P For motor protection breaker 10 0.045 – Top or bottom entry:
SM1X31... SM1P... with BF26..38A contactors • SM1Z17 01P and SM1Z17 02P 4 M25-threaded
SM1X32... SM1X30 40R For motor protection breaker 10 0.019 knockouts
SM1R... with BG… mini-contactors • SM1Z17 11P and SM1Z17 12P 4 threaded knockout
SM1X31 41R For motor protection breaker 10 0.035 with Ø20.5mm/0.81” or Ø26.5mm/1.04”
SM1R... with BF09..25A contactors • SM1Z17 10R e SM1Z17 15R 4 threaded knockout with
Ø20.5mm/0.81” or Ø26.5mm/1.04”
SM1X31 42R For motor protection breaker 10 0.044 – Possibility of rear entry too
SM1R... with contactors – Protection rating: IP65 (UL Type 4X)
BF09..25D and BF09…25L – Holds a breaker, one front-mount auxiliary contact block
SM1X32 41R For motor protection breaker 10 0.045 and either one shunt or undervoltage release; only for
SM1R... with contactors SM1Z17 10R and SM1Z17 15R, 2 side-mount auxiliary
BF26..38A contact blocks can be fitted as well
Surface mount enclosures IP65 (4X) for SM1P... – The SM1Z17 10R and SM1Z17 15R rotary actuators can
be padlocked with a maximum of 3 padlocks
SM1Z17 01P Width 80mm/3.15” 1 0.235 Ø4...8mm/0.16...0.31”
SM1Z17 02P Width 80mm/3.15”. With button 1 0.275 – Earth/ground terminal included
SM1Z17 01P SM1Z17 02P
for emergency stop – Operating temperature: -25…+60°C
SM1Z17 11P Width 100mm/3.94” 1 0.315 – Storage temperature: -50...+80°C.
SM1Z17 12P Width 100mm/3.94”. With 1 0.345 FLUSH MOUNT ENCLOSURES
button for emergency stop – Holds a SM1P breaker, one front-mount auxiliary contact
Flush mount enclosure IP65 (4X) for SM1P... block and either one shunt or undervoltage release
SM1Z17 05P Width 87mm/3.42” 1 0.205 – Protection rating: IP65 (UL Type 4X)
– Earth/ground terminal included
Surface mount enclosures IP65 (4X) for SM1R... – 70x115mm/2.76x4.53” cutout
SM1Z17 15R With rotary actuator 1 0.350 – Operating temperature: -25…+60°C
red/yellow. Width 100mm/3.94” – Storage temperature: -50...+80°C.
SM1Z17 10R With black rotary actuator 1 0.350
Width 100mm/3.94” ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES
Emergency stop button:
SM1Z17 05P SM1Z17 15R ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS. – Turn to release
For SM1Z...P enclosures. – Red button Ø35mm/1.38”.
SM1X17 40P Emergency stop 1 0.044 Lockable block:
button. IP65 (4X) – Prevents closing operation; 3 padlocks maximum
SM1X17 45P Rubber membrane 1 0.016 Ø4...8mm/0.16...0.31”.
with rim. IP65 (4X)
SM1X17 40P SM1X17 45P STARTER ASSEMBLY ADAPTER PLATES
SM1X17 46P Lockable block. IP65 (4X) 1 0.030 These accessories permit the assembly of starters,
Pilot lights. making slim and compact equipment that’s easy and
23 NEONV V Green 10 0.006 quick to install.
The starter adapter plates install on DIN rail 35mm/1.38”.
23 NEONR V Red 10 0.006
Plastic M25 to ½” NPT entry adapter. Certifications and compliance
11 LM M25 PG16 For enclosures SM1Z17 01P 10 0.009 Certifications obtained: cULus.
SM1X17 46P and SM1Z17 02P Certifications pending: EAC, CCC for rigid connections and
enclosures.
Starter assembly adapter plates. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
11 SMX90 10 Adapter plate for direct starter 1 0.058 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 141.
comprising breaker SM1... and
contactor BG..., BF09A...BF38A
11 SMX90 12 Adapter plate for reversing 1 0.095
switch comprising breaker for
motor protection SM1…
contactors BG..., BF09A...BF38A
11 SMX90 14 Adapter plate for starter 1 0.118
star-delta comprising motor
protection breaker SM1...
and contactors BF09A...BF38A
11 SMX90 10 11 SMX90 12 11 SMX90 18 35mm rail for passage 1 0.025
of wires underneath to
contactor; for SMX90 14
11 SMX90 19 DIN rail extension 1 0.025
35mm/1.38”
Complete with required voltage. Available voltages:
– AC 50/60Hz 24/110/220...240VAC (indicate 220)/ 380...415VAC
(indicate 380).
Complete with rubber membrane.
11 SMX90 14

pages 1-12 and 13 page 1-14 page 1-15 1-7
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2... and SM3...
Order Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

1 code per ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS
pkg – Insert on the top front or snap on the left side of the
n° [kg] breaker
– Maximum combinations: 3 SM1X… blocks with
SM2X11... Add-on auxiliary contacts. 6 auxiliary contacts in total of which 1 front block and
SM2X11 20 Front mount 2NO 10 0.020 2 side blocks
SM2X11 11 Front mount 1NO+1NC 10 0.020 – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith:
10A (5A for SM2X11...)
SM2X11 02 Front mount 2NC 10 0.020 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V (250V for
SM2X12 20 Side mount 2NO 2 0.040 SM2X11...)
SM2X12 11 Side mount 1NO+1NC 10 0.040 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
A600 – Q300 (B300 - R300 for SM1X11...)
SM2X12 02 Side mount 2NC 2 0.040 – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
SM2X13 11 Side mount. 2 0.040 (1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5m or 18...14AWG
Indicator contacts for – Screw tightening tool: Pz 2
thermal and magnetic tripping – Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm / 10bin
SM2X12... SM2X13 11 1NO+1NC – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 0.5 DIN
Undervoltage trip releases. 46880 modules.
SM2X14 230 230VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.100 UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RLEASES
SM2X14 400 400VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.100 – Snap on to the right side of the breaker for motor
SM2X14 440 440VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.100 protection
– Consumption in-rush/holding: 8.5/3VA
Shunt trip releases. – Release voltage: 0.35...0.7Us
SM2X16 024 24VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.100 – Operating limits: 0.85...1.1Us
SM2X16 110 110VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.100 – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
(1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG
SM2X16 230 230VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.100 – Screw tightening tool: Pz 2
SM2X16 400 400VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.100 – Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm / 10lbin
SM2X14... SM2X16... – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 1 DIN
SM2X16 440 440VAC 50/60Hz 5 0.100
46880 module.
Padlockable IP65 (4X) door coupling handle.
SM2X18 200R Red/yellow complete 1 0.115 SHUNT TRIP RELEASES
with rod length 200mm/7.87” – Snap on to the right side of the breaker
SM2X18 B200R Black complete with rod 1 0.115 – In-rush consumption: 20VA
with rod length 200mm/7.87” – Operating limits: 0.85...1.1Us
– Conductor cross section minimum-maximum
Phase separation barriers for SM3R… (1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG
SM3X90 00R For Type E as per UL508 5 0.175 – Screw tightening tool: Pz 2
– Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm / 10lbin
– Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to
1 standard DIN 46880 module.
SM2X18... Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

1-8 page 1-14 page 1-14 page 1-15
Combinations
1
SM1X14...
SM1X12... SM1X15...

SM1X12... SM1R... SM1X11...
SM1X12...
SM1X13 11 SM1X16...
SM1X12...
SM1X13 11M
SM1P... SM1X11...
SM1X13 11 Only suitable for SM1R...

motor protection circuit
breakers
SM1X13 11M
SM1X13 11M
Three-phase connection busbars.
SMX90 30 SMX90 35
SMX90 31
SMX90 34
Three-phase connection busbar,

45mm/1.77” spacing (breakers
without add-on blocks).
SMX90 33
SMX90 32
SMX90 45
SMX90 31
SMX90 30
SMX90 44
SMX90 43
SMX90 42
Three-phase connection busbar,

54mm/2.13” spacing (breakers with
add-on blocks)
Dimensions Wiring diagrams

pages 1-12 and 13 page 1-14 1-9
Combinations
1 Rigid SM1P... breaker - contactor connections.
SM1P... SM1P... SM1P...
SM1X30 40P SM1X31 41P SM1X32 41P
BG...
BF09A...BF25A
BF26A...BF38A
Rigid SM1R... breaker - contactor connections.
SM1R... SM1R... SM1R...
SM1X30 40R SM1X31 41R SM1X32 41R

SM1X31 42R
BG...
BF09...BF25
BF26A...BF38A
For BF09A...BF25A contactors.

For BF09D…BF25D and BF09L…BF25L contactors.
Padlockable door coupling handle.
SM1R...
SM1X18 S
SM1X18 200R
SM1X18B 200R
Mounting also possible with side-mount

auxiliary contacts SM1X12... and SM1X13...

1-10 page 1-12 and 13 page 1-14
Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2... and SM3...
Combinations
Surface mount enclosures for SM1P... Width 80mm. Surface mount enclosures for SM1P... Width 100mm. 1
SM1Z17 02P
SM1Z17 0...
SM1Z17 12P
SM1X14...
SM1X16...
SM1Z17 01P SM1X14...

SM1Z17 11P SM1X16...
SM1X14...
SM1P... SM1X14...
SM1X11...
SM1P...
SM1X11...
SM1X1...
SM1X1...
Flush mount enclosures for SM1P... Width 87mm. Surface mount enclosures for SM1R... Width 100mm.
SM1Z17 05P
SM1X14...
SM1X16...
SM1X14...
SM1P... SM1X11...
Combinations of SM2... and SM3... motor protection circuit breakers
Padlockable door coupling handle.
SM2X14...
SM2X16...
ato
ov
LL
ato
ov
LL
SM2X11...
SM2...
SM3...
SM2... SM2...
SM3... SM3...
SM2X13 11
SM2X18 200R
SM2X12...
SM2X18B 200R
SM2X12...
SM2X12...

pages 1-12, 13 and 14 page 1-14 1-11
Dimensions [mm (in)]
SM1P... with side-mount auxiliary contacts SM1R... with side-mount auxiliary contacts
1 9
80.8 (3.18”) 80.8 (3.18”)
18 9 18
(0.35”) (0.71”) (0.35”) (0.71”)
96.6 (3.92”)
44.4 (1.75)
96.6 (3.92”)
90 (3.54”)
44 (1.73”)
90 (3.54”)
90 (3.54”)
90 (3.54”)
(1.48”)
(1.48”)
37.5
37.5
44.8 5.5 43.6

SM1X14... (0.22”) (1.72”) 5.5 49 (1.93”)
(1.76”) 44.8 SM1X14... (0.22”)
SM1X15... 62.2 (2.45”) (1.76”) SM1X15... 74.5 (2.93)
SM1X12... SM1X16...
69.6 (2.74”) SM1X16... 85.6 (3.37”)
SM1X13... SM1X12...
SM1X13...
SM1P... with BG… mini-contactors SM1P... with BF09 A...BF25 A... contactors SM1P... with BF26 A...BF38 A... contactors
and connection SM1X30 40P and connection SM1X31 41P and connection SM1X32 41P
44.8 75.1 (2.96”)
(1.76”)
161.6 (6.36”)
189.1 (7.44”)
198.1 (7.80”)
SM1X31 41P
SM1X30 40P SM1X32 41P
45 (1.77”) 80.4 (3.16”)

45 (1.77”) 89.8 (3.53”)
SM1R... with BG… mini-contactors SM1R... with BF09 A...BF25 A... contactors SM1R... with BF09 D...BF25 D... contactors
and connection SM1X30 40R and connection SM1X31 41R BF09 L...BF25 L... and connection SM1X31 42R
44.8 91.1 (3.59”) 44.8 91.1 (3.59”)
(1.76”) (1.76”)
161.6 (6.36”)
189.1 (7.44”)
189.3 (7.45”)
SM1X31 41R SM1X31 42R

SM1X30 40R
45 (1.77”) 98.5 (3.88”)
SM1R... with BF26 A...BF38 A... contactors SM1R... padlockable door coupling handle
and connection SM1X32 41R SM1X18 200R or SM1X18B 200R
91.1 (3.59”)
34.3 35
(1.35”) (1.38”)
1...4
(0.04...0.16”) SM1X18 200R
SM1X18B 200R
94.6 (3.72”)
198.1 (7.80”)
SM1X32 41R
65 (2.56”) 5.5 74.5 (2.93”) min. 56 (2.20”) /

(0.22”) max. 212 (8.35”)
45 (1.77”)
1-12
These elements mounted with SM1... breakers These elements mounted with SM1... breakers
without side-mount auxiliary contacts with side-mount auxiliary contacts SMX12... or SMX13 11 1
SMX90 30 SMX90 30
13.5 SMX90 3... 13.5 13.5 SMX90 4... 13.5
(1.14”)
(1.14”)
(1.14”)
(1.14”)
(0.53”) (0.53”) (0.53”) (0.53”)
29
29
29
29
SMX90 31 SMX90 31
Connection busbars – 45mm/1.77” spacing Connection busbars – 54mm/2.13” spacing Terminal block for busbar Safety cover
SMX90 32 - SMX90 33 - SMX90 34 - SMX90 35 SMX90 42 - SMX90 43 - SMX90 44 - SMX90 45 supply SMX90 30 SMX90 31
45 (1.77”) 54 (2.13”)
Enclosures SM1Z17 01P and SM1Z17 02P Enclosures SM1Z17 05P

80 (3.15”) 161.8 (6.37”) 87 (3.42”) 18 (0.71”) 70.5 (2.77”)
132.5 (5.22”)
135 (5.31”)
115.5 (4.54”)
126 (4.96”)
Cutout
42 (1.65”)
M2
5
86 (3.38”)
22 (0.87”)
101 (3.98”)
Enclosures SM1Z17 11P and SM1Z17 12P Enclosures SM1Z17 15R and SM1Z17 10R
100 (3.94”) 175.8 (6.92”) 100 (3.94”) 115 (4.53”)
154 (6.06”)
154 (6.06”)
159 (6.26”)
54 (2.12”) 54 (2.12”)
23.3 (0.92”)
23.3 (0.92”)
115 (4.53”)
137.8 (5.42”)
1-13
SM2... with side-mount auxiliary contacts SM3... with side-mount auxiliary contacts
1 10 148.3 (5.84”)
(0.39”) 17 (0.67”) 122.1 (4.81”) SM2X11...
SM2X11... SM2X14... 138 (5.43”)
20 102.6 (4.04”) SM2X12... 12.5
(0.79”) SM2X16... 128.8 (5.07”) SM2X11...
54.5 (2.14”) SM2X14...
SM2X12... (0.49”) 22.5 (0.88”) 77 (3.03”)
SM2X16...
SM2X12...
SM2X13 11
SM2X12...
75.5 (2.97”) SM2X13 11
140 (5.51”)
130 (5.12”)
125 (4.92”)
45 (1.77”)
89 (3.50”)
155 (6.10”)
165 (6.50”)
116 (4.57”)
150 (5.90”)
45 (1.77”)
89 (3.50”)
9 30 18 7.5
(0.35”) (1.18”) (0.71”) (0.29”) 112.3 (4.42”)
55 (2.16”) 126.3 (4.97”)
SM2X13 11 130.3 (5.13”)
9 30 18 8 (0.31”)
144.6 (5.69”) (0.35”) (1.18”) (0.71”) 138 (5.43”)
70 (2.75”) 152.7 (6.01”)
SMX23 11 169 (6.65”)
SM2... and SM3... padlockable door coupling handle

SM2X18 200R or SM2X18B 200R
34.3 35
(1.35”) (1.38”)
1...4
(0.04...0.16”) SM2X18 200R
SM2X18B 200R
65 (2.56”)
min. 56 (2.20”) /
max. 212 (8.35”)
65 (2.56”)
Wiring diagrams
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CIRCUIT BREAKERS SM1R... - SM2R... - SM3R... SM1RM... SM1PF... For all motor protection
SM1P... circuit breakers
Three-phase Three-phase Three-phase Three-phase Single-phase and DC
LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
ADD-ON BLOCKS
For SM1… types Side mount Side mount undervoltage Side mount shunt trip
Front mount auxiliary contacts auxiliary contacts trip releases release
SM1X11 20 SM1X11 11 SM1X12 11 SM1X12 20 SM1X12 02 SM1X13 11 SM1X13 11M SM1X14... SM1X15... SM1X16...
13 23 13 21 33 41 33 43 31 41 57 65 77 85 D1 D1 O7 C1
U<
U<
14 24 14 22 34 42 34 44 32 42 58 66 78 76 D2 D2 O8 C2
For SM2R… and SM3R types Side mount undervoltage Side mount shunt trip
Front mount auxiliary contacts Side mount auxiliary contacts trip release release
SM2X11 20 SM2X11 11 SM2X11 02 SM2X12 11 SM2X12 20 SM2X12 02 SM2X13 11 SM2X14... SM2X16...
13 23 13 21 11 21 33 41 33 43 31 41 57 65 D1 C1
U<
14 24 14 22 12 22 34 42 34 44 32 42 58 66 D2 C2
1-14
Technical characteristics
TYPE SM1P... SM1R... SM2R... SM3R...

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 1
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 6
Rated frequency: 50/60Hz
Maximum rated current A 40 40 63 100
Number of adjustment ranges No. 16 16 2 3
Total power dissipation W 6…14 6…14 7.1...20 10...38
Magnetic tripping A 13 x In 13 x In 13 x In 13 x In
Mechanical life cycles 100,000 100,000 50,000 50,000
Electrical life (Ie max AC3) cycles 100,000 100,000 25,000 25,000
Maximum terminal tightening torque Nm 2.5...3 2.5...3 4.5 6
lbft 1.8...2.2 1.8...2.2 40 53
Tool PH2 PH2 PZ2 Allen 4mm
Conductor section minimum and
maximum (1 or 2 wires) AWG No. 16…8 16…8 18...3 10...1/0
Flexible without lug mm2 1…10 1…10 0.75...25 10...50
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature operating °C -20...+60 -20...+60 -20...+70 -20...+70
storage °C -50...+80 -50...+80 -50...+80 -50...+80
compensation °C -20...+50 -20...+50 -5...+40 -5...+40
Maximum altitude m 3000
Mounting position Any
Fixing On 35mm DIN rail On 35mm DIN rail
or screw via accessory or screw
E.g. PH = Phillips; PZ = Pozidriv; Allen is metric type.
SM1PF00 20 has a single 0.2A thermal adjustment and magnetic tripping at 6 x In (1.2A).
When fitting more than one breaker side by side, without leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the breaker sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip adjuster must be
positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated motor current.
THERMAL TRIPPING CURVE (AVERAGE TIMES)

Three-phase balanced operation Two-phase operation (phase failure/single phasing)
Opening time [s] Opening time [s]
10000 10000
2h 2h
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100 100
1min 1min
COLD COLD
10 10
HOT HOT
1 1
0.1 0.1
0.01 0.01
0.001 0.001 x Ie [A]

1.05 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 30 40 50 6070 100 x Ie [A] 1.15 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 30 40 50 6070 100
1 1.2 1
Tripping times can have a ±20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve value above.
1-15
Page 2-4 Page 2-8
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS

• IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C: 16 to 1600A • IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C:
• IEC Ie ratings in AC3 440V duty: 6 to 630A 20 to 1600A
• IEC Power ratings in AC3 400V duty: • IEC Power ratings in AC1 400V duty:
2.2 to 335kW 14 to 950kW
• UL/CSA ratings: 3 to 500HP at 480V and 600V • UL/CSA general use: 16 to 1000A
• AC, AC/DC, DC and DC low-consumption coil. • AC, AC/DC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.
Page 2-12 Page 2-13
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS WITH 4 NC POLES

WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POWER POLES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
• IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C: • IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at
20 to 115A 40°C: 25 to 40A
• UL/CSA general use: 20 to 115A • UL/CSA general use: 20 to 55A for 4NC types
• AC, AC/DC, DC and DC low-consumption coil. • Operational current up to 125A
(DC1 at 55°C with 4 NO poles in series) for
photovoltaic applications.
• AC, AC/DC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.
Page 2-14 Page 2-15
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CONTROL RELAYS LOVATO Electric contactors are suitable for
CORRECTION • AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil new motors with high IE3 efficiency values
• With limiting resistors included • Screw or Faston termination
• IEC Power ratings at 400V: 7.5 to 75kvar • 4, 8 or 11 auxiliary contact composition.
• UL/CSA ratings: 9 to 80kvar at 480V;
10 to 100kvar at 600V
• AC coil.
CONTACTORS 2
Three-pole versions up to 630A
in IEC AC3 duty
Four-pole versions up to 1600A
in IEC AC1 duty
Versions for power factor
correction up to 75kvar at 400VAC
Four-pole versions with 2NO+2NC
or 4NC main poles
Versions for photovoltaic
application
Versions with AC, AC/DC or DC
control
Low-consumption versions with
DC control circuit for control relays
and 9-38A contactors in IEC AC3
duty
Extensive choice of add-on blocks
and accessories
Certified by primary international
authorities.
SEC. - PAGE
Contactors
Three-pole ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 4
Four-pole .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 8
Four-pole with 2NO and 2NC poles or 4NC poles ................................................................................................................ 2 - 12
Four-pole with 4NO poles for photovoltaic applications ............................................................................................................ 2 - 13
For power factor correction ............................................................................................................................................... 2 - 14
Control relays .................................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 15
Add-on blocks and accessories
For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................ 2 - 16
For BF series contactors .................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 18
For B series contactors ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 - 26
Spare parts
AC coils for BF series contactors ........................................................................................................................................ 2 - 28
AC/DC and DC coils for BF series contactors ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 29
AC/DC coils for B series contactors .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 30
Main contacts for BF series contactors ............................................................................................................................... 2 - 31
Main contacts and arc chutes for B series contactors ......................................................................................................... 2 - 31
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 2 - 32
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 2 - 44 P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Contactors
BG series 3 poles 4 poles

mini-contactors Ie (AC3) AC DC Ith (AC1) AC DC
BG06 6A –– –– ––
2 BG09 9A 20A
BGF09 9A 20A
BGP09 9A 20A
BG12 12A –– –– ––
• Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four • Three-pole mini-contactors, 6 to 12A IEC AC3
contact points duty / 3 to 7.5HP 480V - 3 to 10HP 600V UL/CSA
• AC and DC versions of same size • Four-pole mini-contactors, 20A IEC AC1 duty
• Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting • Versions with 2NO+2NC main power poles
• Distinct contact status indication • Highly conductive auxiliary contacts
• Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted • Coils with AC or DC supply
• Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep • Low-consumption DC versions
• Positive (force) guided contacts • Screw, faston and rear PCB solder pin
(mechanically-linked per IEC) termination.
BF series 3 poles
contactors Ie AC DC DC AC/DC
AC3
BF09 9A ––
BF12 12A ––
BF18 18A ––
BF25 25A ––
BF26 26A ––
BF32 32A ––
BF38 38A ––
• Three-pole contactors, 9 to 110A IEC AC3 duty / BF40 40A –– ––
5 to 75HP 480V - 7.5 to 100HP 600V UL/CSA BF50 50A –– ––
• Four-pole contactors, 25 to 125A in AC1 duty
• Power factor correction contactors, 7.5 to 75kvar at BF65 65A –– ––
400V IEC / 9 to 80kvar at 480V UL/CSA BF80 80A –– ––
• Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four • Types with 2NO+2NC or 4NC main power poles BF95 95A –– ––
contact points • Types for photovoltaic applications
• Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting • Highly conductive auxiliary contacts BF110 110A –– ––
• Distinct contact status indication • Coils with AC or DC supply
• Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted • Wide-range coils with electronic control for 4 poles
• Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep contactors from 40 to 80A AC3 Ith AC DC DC AC/DC
• Positive (force) guided contacts • Low-consumption versions for control relays and 9- AC1
(mechanically-linked per IEC) 38A contactors in IEC AC3 duty.
BF09 25A ––
BF12 28A –– –– ––
BF18 32A ––
BF26 45A ––
BF38 56A ––
BF40 70A –– –– ––
BF50 90A –– –– ––
BF65 100A –– ––
BF80 115A –– ––
Low-consumption version.
Wide-range coil with electronic control.
B series 3 poles 4 poles

contactors Ie (AC3) AC DC Ith (AC1) AC DC
B115 110A 160A
B145 150A 250A
B180 185A 275A
• 3 frame sizes offering 11 different contactors B250 265A 350A
• Coil operates indifferently on AC or DC supply voltage
• Coil with low in-rush and holding B310 320A 450A
• Coil removable without disconnecting power wiring B400 420A 550A
• Red indicator when contactor is energised B500 520A 700A
• Unique right-angle magnet design - limits contact
bounce B630 630A 800A
• Safety feature prevents contactor to be energised B630 1000 1000A
without arc chute in place and locked B1250 –– 1250A ––
• Convertible auxiliary contact block (2NO + 1NC or
1NO + 2NC), maximum of 4 blocks per contactor B1600 –– 1600A ––
for a total of 12 contacts • Three-pole contactors, 110 to 630A IEC AC3 duty For AC1 / general use duty only.
• Contactor terminals with bolt, washer and nut • Four-pole contactors, 160 to 1600A IEC AC1 duty
• Simple horizontal or vertical interlock • 100 to 500HP 600V UL/CSA
• Positive (force) guided contacts • Coils with AC/DC supply
(mechanically-linked per IEC) • Screw termination.
2-2
Contactors
Contactors BF00, BF09...BF80
THE IDEAL SOLUTION!

4-TERMINAL COIL
A1 A2
45mm WIDE CONTACTORS

Ratings up to 38A - 18.5kW IEC AC3 /
Connecting cables can be coupled to 2
the coil both on the line and load ends
30HP UL - merely 45mm wide: exceptional
of the contactor.
benefit for electric panel dimensions.
ELECTRONIC COIL
55mm WIDE CONTACTORS A1 A2
Contactors from 40 to 80A AC3 can
Up to 80A in AC3 (45kW) with a width of
be equipped with AC/DC electronic coil
just 55mm.
with wide operating range.
Example: single 100 to 250V AC/DC coil.
COILS WITH WIDE
OPERATING RANGE
BF...D contactors are equipped with a wide
BUILT-IN SURGE SUPPRESSOR
operating range coil and are particularly
BF series contactors up to 80A AC3 with voltages in DC
useful in applications subject to
or AC/DC already have a built-in surge suppressor.
considerable voltage variations, such as in
electric traction railway equipment.
LOW-CONSUMPTION COILS
The BF...L contactors feature a 2.4W low consumption.
This characteristic widely allows their direct control by
PLC outputs.
SIDE ADD-ON FOURTH STARTER ASSEMBLY TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY BREAKER-CONTACTOR

POLE Terminals are suitable for every type CONNECTIONS
For the 45A to 115A AC1 of cable: flexible, rigid, according to The rigid
ratings, a side-mount AWG standards and interlocked with connections
fourth power pole can be any type of cable terminal. between breaker
snapped on the three-pole For BF09...BF38 contactors, a single and contactor
contactor. type of screwdriver tightens the allow complete
This solution permits to optimise screws for the power contacts, compact starters to
inventory. auxiliary contacts and coil. be created easily,
quickly and with
The assembly and wiring of less space used in
electromechanical starters is SNAP-ON INSTALLATION the panel.
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK extremely fast and reliable. Versatile It is fitted on a
Smaller-size contactors, electrical and mechanical single DIN rail.
9 to 25A in AC3, can be connecting systems provide easy
mechanically and and foolproof assembly of compact
electrically interlocked with starters.
larger-size contactors,
26 to 38A AC3. IP20 CONNECTION SECURITY
The BFX50 01 and BFX53 01
mechanical interlock comprises EFFORTLESS THERMAL
two built-in NC auxiliary contacts to OVERLOAD RELAY LINK RF38 AND
make the electrical interlock as RF82 TYPES
well.
For BF09...BF38 contactors, the easy

35MM IN RAIL MOUNTING AND access and space for the terminals is
On the contactors, it’s quick and easy
FIXING combined with IP20 protection,
to fit and remove auxiliary contacts
preventing accidental contact with live
and accessories, without using tools;
parts.
the same applies to replacing the coil
in the AC BF09…BF38 contactors.
During the connection of the DOUBLE LUG TERMINALS
thermal overload relay to the 40 to 80A AC3 contactors are
contactor, its auxiliary contact is equipped with double lug terminals for
simultaneously linked to the RUBBER PAD INSERT FOR NO DIN
Contactor mounting on and removal easy, functional access for power
contactor coil terminal rigid RAIL SLIDING
from a 35mm DIN rail are tool-less cables.
connector. It is extremely simple to create star-
operations and are done by simply The complete overload relay fixing
applying pressure on the contactor. delta starters, reversing switches,
is obtained with one single changeovers and arrange parallel
operation and without other supply for several contactors.
connections.
A rubber insert prevents the

contactors from sliding on the
35mm DIN rail even when out of
tolerance or mounted vertically.
2-3
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit
BG06 A...BG12 A BF09 A...BF25 A BF26 A...BF38 A BF40 A...BF80 A BF95...BF110 B115...B180 B250...B400
Three-phase motor control in AC3 duty UL/CSA details

Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 55°C (AC3)
Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings
Ith (AC1) Ie (AC3) Single phase Three phase
AC coil 40°C 55°C 70°C 440V at 55°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V
[A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
11 BG06 01 A 16 14 12 6 1.5 2.2 2.4 2.5 3 3 –– /
1 3 1 11/2 2 3 3
11 BG06 10 A
11 BG09 01 A 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– /
1 2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BG09 10 A
11 BGF09 01 A 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– /
1 2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BGF09 10 A
11 BGP09 01 A 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 –– –– /
1 2 11/2 2 3 5 ––
11 BGP09 10 A
11 BG12 01 A 12 20 18 15 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5 –– /
1 2 11/2 3 3 71/2 10
11 BG12 10 A 12
BF09 01 A 12 25 20 18 9 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.5 –– 3
/4 2 3 3 5 71/2
BF09 10 A 12
BF12 01 A 12 28 23 20 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10 –– 1 2 5 5 71/2 10
BF12 10 A 12
BF18 01 A 12 32 26 23 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 –– 1 3 5 5 10 15
BF18 10 A 12
BF25 01 A 32 26 23 25 7 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 11 –– 2 3 71/2 71/2 15 15
BF25 10 A
BF26 00 A 12 45 36 32 26 7.3 13 14 14 15.6 18.5 –– 2 5 71 / 2 71/2 15 20
BF32 00 A 12 56 45 40 32 8.8 16 17 17 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 10 20 25
BF38 00 A 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 38 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 15 30 30
BF40 00A 70 60 50 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 18 3 71/2 10 15 30 40
BF50 00A 12 90 75 60 50 15 22 30 30 30 37 22 5 10 10 15 30 40
BF65 00A 12 100 80 65 65 18.5 30 37 37 37 45 30 –– –– 20 25 50 60
BF80 00A 115 95 75 80 22 45 45 45 55 75 37 –– –– 25 30 60 75
11 BF95 00 125 100 80 95 27.6 50 55 55 56 74 45 –– –– 30 30 60 75
11 BF110 00 125 100 80 110 33 61 66 70 59 80 45 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B115 00 160 150 110 110 33 61 66 70 80 100 63 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B145 00 250 235 190 150 46 80 88 93 100 120 75 –– –– 50 50 100 125
11 B180 00 275 250 200 185 57 100 108 115 123 144 103 –– –– 60 75 150 150
11 B250 00 350 300 250 265 83 140 155 164 176 212 156 –– –– 75 100 200 250
11 B310 00 450 370 300 320 100 170 188 200 213 256 180 –– –– 100 125 250 300
11 B400 00 550 430 360 420 130 225 247 263 271 352 208 –– –– 125 11 150 11 350 11 400 11
11 B500 00 700 550 500 520 156 290 306 328 367 416 312 –– –– 150 11 200 11 400 11 450 11
11 B630 00 800 640 540 630 198 335 368 368 368 440 368 –– –– 200 250 500 500
11 B630 1000 00 1000 850 700 –– For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8. –– –– –– –– –– ––
11 B1250 24 1250 1050 880 –– For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8. No UL –– –– –– –– ––
11 B1600 24 1600 1360 1120 –– For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8. No UL –– –– –– –– ––
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by 60 (if 60Hz). Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC. Available voltages are:
Standard voltages are as follows: – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: 11 B145L 00 110 220 for contactor B145 without auxiliary contacts, with
Example: 11 BG06 10 A230 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VAC.
230VAC 50/60Hz coil. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
11 BG06 10 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG06 with one NO contact and 460VAC 60Hz Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 110 or
coil. 220-240VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 220.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the Example: 11 B1250 24 110 for contactor B1250, three poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and 110-
digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are: 125VAC 50/60Hz coil.
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) / Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for
440-480V (indicate 440). information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
For voltages 024 / 230 / 400VAC 50-60Hz: 10 pieces/package.
110-125VAC/DC coil. For all other voltages: 1 piece/package.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. Highly conductive auxiliary contact.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
Other voltages available on request. 11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…SL.00 12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…L.00 . details on inside front cover.
Add-on blocks / Accessories Spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
2-4 page 2-16 to 28 pages 2-29 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 page 2-48 to 69
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit

Certifications obtained:
Register of shipping
c
U
L C E C
R
I
L
R 2
u U S A C N O
Type s L A C C A S
BG06 A
B500-B630 BG09 A
B630 1000 B1250-B1600 BG12 A
BGF09 A
UL/CSA UL/CSA Short circuit Type of terminal Incorporated Quantity Weight BGP... A
General Fuse class current RMS auxiliary per
(purpose) use sym. 600VAC contacts pkg BF09 A
[A] Type/[A] [kA] UL/CSA NO NC n° [kg] BF12 A 14
16 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.180 BF18 A
1 –– 10 0.180 BF25 A 14
20 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.180 BF26 A
1 –– 10 0.180 BF32 A
20 K5/30 5 Faston –– 1 10 0.180 BF38 A 14
1 –– 10 0.180 BF40 A
20 K5/30 5 Rear PCB solder pin –– 1 10 0.197 BF50 A
1 –– 10 0.197 BF65 A
20 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.180 BF80 A
1 –– 10 0.180 BF95
25 RK5/60 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.367 BF110
1 ––
0.367 B115
28 RK5/70 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.367 B145
1 ––
0.367 B180
32 RK5/80 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.367 B250
1 ––
0.367 B310
32 RK5/100 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.367 B400
1 ––
0.367 B500
45 RK5/100 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.432 B630
55 RK5/125 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.432 B630 1000
55 RK5/150 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.432 B1250
70 RK5/150 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.000 B1600
90 RK5/200 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.000 Certified products.
100 RK5/225 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.000 UL - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602) for BG…
BF110 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for
115 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.000 BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.360 ( File E93602 – Component - Products having this type of
marking are intended for use as components of complete
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.360 workshop-assembled equipment).
160 RK5/500 5 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.290 BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V,
consult Customer Service for information – see contact details
250 RK5/500 5 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.400 on inside front cover.
UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115…B400 types
275 RK5/500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.400 indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors.
350 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.575 UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500...
B630 1000 and B500 SL... B630 SL types as Industrial Control
450 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.575 Switches.
550 L/800 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.575 CSA - BF09…BF95 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for
Canada only (File 54332).
700 L/1200 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 18.000 In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA
certified as “Elevator Equipment” (File 54332, class 2411).
800 L/1500 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 18.620 See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page
1000 L/1500 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 21.400 2-65 for BF65.
No UL –– –– Screw-nut 2 4 1 48.000 14 This contactor has also achieved CSA elevator equipment certification.
No UL –– –– Screw-nut 2 4 1 50.000
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1,

13 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal. UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; UL 60947-1, UL 60947-4-1,
CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1.
Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335;
for all BF09…BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the
standard product order code.
Example: BF09 10 A230V260 for BF09, three poles, with one
NO contact and 230V 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic
materials.
page 2-16 to 28 pages 2-29 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 page 2-48 to 69 2-5
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit
BG06 D...BG12 D BF09 D...BF25 D BF26 D-BF38 D BF40 E...BF80 E BF95 C...BF110 C B115...B180 B250...B400
BG09 L BF09 L...BF25 L BF26 L-BF38 L
Three-phase motor control UL/CSA details
Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 55°C (AC3) Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings
DC coil DC coil Ith (AC1) Ie (AC3) Single phase Three phase
440V
Low consumption 40°C 55°C 70°C at 55°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V
[A] [A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
11 BG06 01 D –– 16 14 12 6 1.5 2.2 2.4 2.5 3 3 –– 1 3 / 1 11/2 2 3 3
11 BG06 10 D ––
11 BG09 01 D 11 BG09 01 L 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– 1 2 / 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BG09 10 D 11 BG09 10 L
11 BGF09 01 D 11 BGF09 01 L 20 18 15 9 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 2 3 5 5
11 BGF09 10 D 11 BGF09 10 L
11 BGP09 01 D –– 20 18 15 9 2.2 4
4.3
4.5
5
–– –– 1 2 / 11/2 2 3 5
––
11 BGP09 10 D ––
11 BG12 01 D 12 –– 20 18 15 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5 –– 1
/2 11/2 3 3 71/2 10
11 BG12 10 D 12 ––
BF09 01 D 12 BF09 01 L 12 25 20 18 9 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.5 –– 3 4 / 2 3 3 5 71/2
BF09 10 D 12 BF09 10 L 12
BF12 01 D 12 BF12 01 L 12 28 23 20 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10 –– 1 2 5 5 71/2 10
BF12 10 D 12 BF12 10 L 12
BF18 01 D 12 BF18 01 L 12 32 26 23 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 –– 1 3 5 5 10 15
BF18 10 D 12 BF18 10 L 12
BF25 01 D BF25 01 L 32 26 23 25 7 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 11 –– 2 3 71/2 71/2 15 15
BF25 10 D BF25 10 L
BF26 00 D 12 BF26 00 L 12 45 36 32 26 7.3 13 14 14 15.6 18.5 –– 2 5 71/2 71/2 15 20
BF32 00 D 12 BF32 00 L 12 56 45 40 32 8.8 18 17 17 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 10 20 25
BF38 00 D BF38 00 L 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 38 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 –– 3 71/2 10 15 30 30
BF40 00 E –– 70 60 50 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 18 3 71/2 10 15 30 40
BF50 00 E 12 –– 90 75 60 50 15 22 30 30 30 37 22 3 71/2 10 15 30 40
BF65 00 E 12 –– 100 80 65 65 18.5 30 37 37 37 45 30 –– –– 20 25 50 60
BF80 00 E –– 115 95 75 80 22 45 45 45 55 75 37 –– –– 25 30 60 75
11 BF95 C 00 –– 125 100 80 95 27.6 50 55 55 56 74 45 –– –– 30 30 60 75
11 BF110 C 00 –– 125 100 80 110 33 61 66 70 59 80 45 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B115 00 –– 160 150 110 110 33 61 66 70 80 100 63 –– –– 30 40 75 100
11 B145 00 –– 250 235 190 150 46 80 88 93 100 120 75 –– –– 50 50 100 125
11 B180 00 –– 275 250 200 185 57 100 108 115 123 144 103 –– –– 60 75 150 150
11 B250 00 –– 350 300 250 265 83 140 155 164 176 212 156 –– –– 75 100 200 250
11 B310 00 –– 450 370 300 320 100 170 188 200 213 256 180 –– –– 100 125 250 300
11 B400 00 –– 550 430 360 420 130 225 247 263 271 352 208 –– –– 125 11 150 11 350 11 400 11
11 B500 00 –– 700 550 500 520 156 290 306 328 367 416 312 –– –– 150 11 200 11 400 11 450 11
11 B630 00 –– 800 640 540 630 198 335 368 368 368 440 368 –– –– 200 250 500 500
11 B630 1000 00 –– 1000 850 700 –– For AC1/Resisteve duty only, see page 2-8. –– –– –– –– –– ––
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the
For BG09…D 24VDC version complete with built-in surge suppressor, add suffix V120 to the standard digit of the coil voltage.
order code. Standard voltages are:
The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). – AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) /
Standard voltages are as follows: 440-480V (indicate 440).
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V. Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
Example: 11 BG06 10 D012 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 12VDC coil. 110-125VAC/DC coil.
11 BG09 10 D024 V120 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NO contact and 24VDC The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
coil, complete with built-in TVS (diode) suppressor. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
Low-consumption version. Other voltages available on request.
No add-on auxiliary contacts or mechanical interlock can be mounted on BG... type contactors. If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…SL.00 .
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…L.00 .
The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
Standard voltages are as follows: Standard voltages are:
– DC 024 / 048V. – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V
Example: 11 BG09 01 L024 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NC contact and 24VDC indicate 380
low-consumption coil. – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
The contactor coil is controlled electronically; it can have either an AC or a DC supply and has a wide Example: 11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
operating range. 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC.
The order code must be completed with the coil voltage digit. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
The standard voltages are as follows:
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for
– AC/DC 024 = 20...48V; 110 = 60...110V; 230 = 100...250V. information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Highly conductive auxiliary contact.
2-6 page 2-16 to 28 pages 2-29 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 pages 2-48 to 69
Contactors
Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit

c
U
L C E C
R
I 2
u U S A C N
Type s L A C C A
BG06 D
B500-B630 BG09 D
B630 1000 BG12 D
BGF09 D
UL/CSA UL/CSA Short circuit Type of terminal Incorporated Quantity Weight BGP09 D

General Fuse class current RMS auxiliary per
(purpose) use sym. 600VAC contacts pkg BF09 D - BF09 L
BF12 D - BF12 L 14
[A] Type/[A] [kA] UL/CSA NO NC n° [kg] BF18 D - BF18 L
16 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.214 BF25 D - BF25 L 14
1 –– 10 0.214 BF26 D - BF26 L
20 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.214 BF32 D - BF32 L
1 –– 10 0.214 BF38 D - BF38 L 14
20 K5/30 5 Faston –– 1 10 0.210 BF40 E
1 –– 10 0.210 BF50 E
20 K5/30 5 Rear PCB solder pin –– 1 10 0.240 BF65 E
1 –– 10 0.240 BF80 E
20 K5/30 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 10 0.214 BF95 C
1 –– 10 0.214 BF110 C
25 RK5/60 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.494 B115
1 –– 1 0.494 B145
28 RK5/70 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.494 B180
1 –– 1 0.494 B250
32 RK5/80 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.494 B310
1 –– 1 0.494 B400
32 RK5/100 5 Clamp-screw –– 1 1 0.494 B500
1 –– 1 0.494 B630
45 RK5/100 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.559 B630 1000
55 RK5/125 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.559 Certified products.
55 RK5/150 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.559 UL - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110
70 RK5/150 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.050 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for
BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada
90 RK5/200 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.050 ( File E93602 – Component). Products having this type of
100 RK5/225 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.050 workshop-assembled equipment.
115 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.050 BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V,
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.895 on inside front cover.
125 RK5/250 10 Lug-clamp 13 –– –– 1 1.895 UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115…B400 types
indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors.
160 RK5/500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.290 UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500...
B630 1000 and B500 SL... B630 SL types as Industrial Control
250 RK5/500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.400 Switches.
275 RK5/500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 5.400 CSA - BF09…BF95 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for
350 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.635 In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA
450 L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.635 certified as “Elevator Equipment” (File 54332, class 2411).
See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page
500 13 L/800 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 9.635 2-65 for BF65.
700 13 L/1200 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 18.060 14 This contactor has also achieved CSA elevator equipment certification.
800 13 L/1500 11 18 11 Screw-nut –– –– 1 18.620
1000 L/1500 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 21.400 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; UL 60947-1, UL 60947-4-1,
For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used. CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1.
11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only. Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335;
12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact for all BF09…BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the
details on inside front cover.
13 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.
Example: BF09 10 D024 V260 for BF09, three poles, with one
NO contact and 24VDC coil with compliant plastic materials.
page 2-16 to 28 pages 2-29 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-44 page 2-48 to 69 2-7
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit
BG09 T4 A BF09A T4 A...BF18 T4 A BF26 T4 A...BF38 T4 A BF40 T4 A...BF80 T4 A B115 4...B180 4 B250 4...B400 4
Resistive load control UL/CSA details

Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 40°C (AC1) UL/CSA
Ith (AC1) General
AC coil 40°C 55°C 70°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V (purpose) use
[A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [A]
11 BG09 T4 A 20 18 15 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGF09 T4 A 20 18 15 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGP09 T4 A 20 18 15 8 14 14 15 16 –– –– 20
BF09 T4 A 25 20 18 9.5 16 17 18 21 27 –– 25
BF12 T4 A 28 23 20 10 18 19 20 23 32 –– 28
BF18 T4 A 32 26 23 12 21 22 23 26 36 –– 32
BF26 T4 A
45 36 32 17 30 31 33 37 51 –– 45
BF38 T4 A
56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 21 36 38 40 45 62 –– 55
BF40 T4 A 70 60 50 26 46 48 51 58 79 115 70
BF50 T4 A 90 75 60 34 59 61 65 74 102 148 90
BF65 T4 A 100 80 65 38 65 68 72 82 114 165 100
BF80 T4 A 115 95 75 43 76 79 83 95 120 185 115
11 B115 4 00 160 150 110 57 98 107 115 129 173 250 160
11 B145 4 00 250 235 190 91 150 162 180 196 270 390 250
11 B180 4 00 275 250 200 95 160 177 200 213 298 430 275
11 B250 4 00 350 300 250 124 214 234 255 282 380 560 350
11 B310 4 00 450 370 300 158 270 293 325 350 488 700 450
11 B400 4 00 550 430 360 200 345 377 400 452 598 870 550
11 B500 4 00 700 550 500 252 438 478 500 575 755 1100 700
11 B630 4 00 800 640 540 288 500 545 580 655 860 1250 800
11 B630 1000 4 00 1000 850 700 350 600 630 725 750 1000 1600 1000
11 B1250 4 24 1250 1050 880 480 830 900 905 1100 1450 2000 No UL/CSA
11 B1600 4 24 1600 1360 1120 550 950 1000 1160 1200 1650 2500 No UL/CSA
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
Standard voltages are as follows: Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC 50/60 Hz indicate 110 or
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V 220-240VAC 50/60 Hz indicate 220.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: 11 B1250 4 24 110 for contactor B1250, four poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and
Example: 11 BG09 T4 A230 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 230VAC 50/60Hz coil. 110-125VAC/DC 50/60Hz coil.
11 BG09 T4 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 460VAC 60Hz coil. Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V. Consult Customer Service for
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the information; see contact details on inside front cover.
digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are:
Whenever the BF26 T4 or BF38 T4 types need to be mechanically interlocked with either the BFX50 00 or
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) / BFX50 01, the add-on fourth pole of one of the contactors needs to be removed from the right side and
440-480V (indicate 440). fitted on the left side.
Example: 11 B145 4 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
110-125VAC/DC coil. Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. details on inside front cover.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
Other voltages available on request.
If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4SL 00 .
If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4L.00 .
Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
Standard voltages are:
-- AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
-- DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
Example: 11 B145 4L 00 110 C220 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VDC.
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit
IEC utilisation current with poles in parallel

If the poles of the contactors are arranged in parallel, the
operating current is the one indicated in the table multiplied
by the K factor given below, which account for the unequal
distribution of the current in the various poles.
To limit distribution inequality, it is advisable to use
2
paralleling links (see pages 2-16, 2-21 and 2-26).
2 POLES in parallel: K = 1.6

B500 4-B630 4 3 POLES in parallel: K = 2.2
B630 1000 4 B1250-B1600 4 4 POLES in parallel: K = 2.8
UL/CSA Short circuit Type of terminal Incorporated auxiliary Quantity Weight Certifications obtained:
Fuse current RMS contacts per c
class sym. 600VAC pkg U R
L C E C I
Type / [A] [kA] UL/CSA NO NC n° [kg] u U S A C N
K5 / 30 5 Clamp-screw none none 10 0.180 Type s L A C C A
K5 / 30 5 Faston none none 10 0.180 BG09 T4 A
K5 / 30 5 Rear PCB solder pin none none 10 0.197 BGF09 T4 A
RK5 / 60 5 Clamp-screw none none 1 0.367 BGP09 T4 A
RK5 / 70 5 Clamp-screw none none 1 0.367 BF09 T4 A
RK5 / 80 5 Clamp-screw none none 1 0.367 BF12 T4 A 13
RK5 / 100 5 Clamp-screw none none 1 0.508 BF18 T4 A
RK5 / 150 5 Clamp-screw none none 1 0.508 BF26 T4 A 13
RK5 / 150 10 Lug-clamp 11 –– –– 1 1.100 BF38 T4 A 13
RK5 / 200 10 Lug-clamp 11 –– –– 1 1.100 BF40 T4 A
RK5 / 225 10 Lug-clamp 11 –– –– 1 1.100 BF50 T4 A
RK5 / 250 10 Lug-clamp 11 –– –– 1 1.100 BF65 T4 A
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut none none 1 6.220 BF80 T4 A
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut none none 1 6.340 B115 4
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut none none 1 6.340 B145 4
L/800 18 Screw-nut none none 1 11.195 B180 4
L/800 12 18 12 Screw-nut none none 1 11.195 B310 4
–– –– Screw-nut 2 4 1 57.500 B630 1000 4
–– –– Screw-nut 2 4 1 58.400 B1250 4

11 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal. B1600 4

12 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
Certified products.
UL - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110
types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for
( File E93602 – Component). Products having this type of
workshop-assembled equipment.
BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V,
on inside front cover.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for
B500 4... B630 1000 4 and B500 4SL... B630 4SL types as
Industrial Control Switches.
CSA - BF09…BF80 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for
In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA
2-65 for BF65.
13 This contactor has also achieved CSA elevator equipment certification.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; UL 60947-1, UL 60947-4-1,
CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1.
Example: BF09 T4 A230 V260 for BF09, four poles, 230V
50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic materials.
page 2-16 to 28 pages 2-29 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 69 2-9
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit
BG09 T4 D BF09 T4 D-BF18 T4 D BF26 T4 D-BF38 T4 D BF65 T4 E B115 4...B180 4 B250 4...B400 4
BF09 T4 L-BF18 T4 L BF26 T4 L-BF38 T4 L BF80 T4 E
Resistive load control UL/CSA details
Order code IEC operating current Maximum IEC power at 40°C (AC1) UL/CSA
DC coil DC coil Ith (AC1) General
Low consumption 40°C 55°C 70°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V (purpose) use
[A] [A] [A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [A]
11 BG09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGF09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 8 14 14 15 16 22 –– 20
11 BGP09 T4 D –– 20 18 15 8 14
14
15
16
–– –– 20
BF09 T4 D BF09 T4 L 25 20 18 9.5 16 17 18 21 27 –– 25
BF18 T4 D BF18 T4 L 32 26 23 12 21 22 23 26 36 –– 32
BF26 T4 D BF26 T4 L 45 36 32 17 30 31 33 37 51 –– 45
BF38 T4 D BF38 T4 L 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 21 26 38 40 45 62 –– 55
BF65 T4 E –– 100 80 65 38 65 68 72 82 114 165 100
BF80 T4 E –– 115 95 75 43 76 79 83 95 120 185 115
11 B115 4 00 –– 160 150 110 57 98 107 115 129 173 250 160
11 B145 4 00 –– 250 235 190 91 150 162 180 196 270 390 250
11 B180 4 00 –– 275 250 200 95 160 177 200 213 298 430 275
11 B250 4 00 –– 350 300 250 124 214 234 255 282 380 560 350
11 B310 4 00 –– 450 370 300 158 270 293 325 350 488 700 450
11 B400 4 00 –– 550 430 360 200 345 377 400 452 598 870 550
11 B500 4 00 –– 700 550 500 252 438 478 500 575 755 1100 700
11 B630 4 00 –– 800 640 540 288 500 545 580 655 860 1250 800
11 B630 1000 4 00 –– 1000 850 700 350 600 630 725 750 1000 1600 1000
Complete order code with coil voltage digit. If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4SL 00 .
The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4L.00 .
Standard voltages are as follows: Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC.
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220VDC. Standard voltages are:
Example: 11 BG09 T4 D012 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 12VDC coil. – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380
Low consumption version. Complete the order code with coil voltage digit. – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220.
The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Example: 11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with
Standard voltages are as follows: 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC.
– DC 024 / 048V G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted.
Example: BF09 T4 L024 for contactor BF09, four poles, with 24VDC low-consumption coil.
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V consult Customer Service for
The contactor coil is controlled electronically; it can have either an AC or a DC supply and has a wide information; see contact details on inside front cover.
operating range. For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.
Complete the order code only with the digit of the coil voltage.
– AC/DC 024 = 20...48V; 110 = 60...110V; 230 = 100...250V.
The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the
digit of the coil voltage.
-- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415 indicate 380 /
440-480V indicate 440.
Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with
110-125VAC/DC coil.
The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
The 24V voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors.
Other voltages available on request.
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit
IEC utilisation current with poles in parallel

If the poles of the contactors are arranged in parallel, the
operating current is the one indicated in the table multiplied
by the K factor given below, which account for the unequal
distribution of the current in the various poles.
To limit distribution inequality, it is advisable to use
2
paralleling links (see pages 2-16, 2-21 and 2-26).
2 POLES in parallel: K = 1.6

B500 4-B630 4 3 POLES in parallel: K = 2.2
B630 1000 4 4 POLES in parallel: K = 2.8
UL/CSA Fuse Short circuit Type of terminal Incorporated auxiliary Quantity Weight Certifications obtained:
class RMS sym. contacts per c
600VAC pkg U R
L C E C I
Type / [A] [kA] UL/CSA NO NC n° [kg] u U S A C N
K5 / 30 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 10 0.220 Type s L A C C A
K5 / 30 5 Faston –– –– 10 0.220 BG09 T4 D
K5 / 30 5 Rear PCB solder pin –– –– 10 0.242 BGF09 T4 D
RK5 / 60 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.498 BGP09 T4 D
RK5 / 80 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.498 BF09 T4 D - BF09 T4 L
RK5 / 100 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.665 BF18 T4 D - BF18 T4 L
RK5 / 150 5 Clamp-screw –– –– 1 0.665 BF26 T4 D - BF26 T4 L 12
RK5 / 225 10 Lug-clamp 11 –– –– 1 1.150 BF38 T4 D - BF38 T4 L 12
RK5 / 250 10 Lug-clamp 11 –– –– 1 1.150 BF65 T4 E
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 6.220 BF80 T4 E
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 6.340 B115 4
RK5 / 500 10 Screw-nut –– –– 1 6.340 B145 4
L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 11.195 B180 4
L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 11.195 B250 4
L/800 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 11.195 B310 4
L/1200 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 20.910 B400 4
L/1200 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 21.880 B500 4
L/1500 18 Screw-nut –– –– 1 25.600 B630 4
B630 1000 4
No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.

11 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal. Certified products.
UL - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110
types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for
( File E93602 – Component). Products having this type of
BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V,
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172185) for
B500 4... B630 1000 4 and B500 4SL... B630 4SL types as
Industrial Control Switches.
CSA - BF09…BF95 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for
In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA
2-65 for BF65.
12 This contactor has also achieved CSA elevator equipment certification.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; UL 60947-1, UL 60947-4-1,
CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1.
Example: BF09 T4 D024 V260 for BF09, four poles, 24VDC coil
with compliant plastic materials.
page 2-16 to 28 pages 2-29 to 31 pages 2-32 to 38 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 69 2-11
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with control circuit: AC and DC
Mini-contactor Order code IEC rated conventional Qty Wt Operational characteristics

four power poles, free air thermal current Ith per
pkg
2 NO and 2 NC 40°C 55°C 60°C
2 BG series [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Type UL/CSA Protection fuse Conductor
AC COIL. General use IEC gG UL K5 section
Terminals: clamp screw. [A] [A] [A] [mm2] [AWG]
11 BG09 T2 A 20 18 15 1 0.170 BG09...T2 20 20 30 0.75-2.5 18-12
DC COIL.
Terminals: clamp screw.
11 BG09 T2 D 20 18 15 1 0.175 Certifications obtained: CCC, EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers -
Contactors.
11 BG09 T2... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Order code IEC rated conventional Qty Wt Operational characteristics

free air thermal current Ith per Type UL/CSA Protection fuse Conductor
Contactors four power poles, 40°C 55°C 60°C pkg General use IEC gG ULRK5 section
2 NO and 2 NC [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [A] [A] [A] [mm2] [AWG]
BF series AC COIL.
BF09 T2 A 25 20 18 1 0.340 BF09 T2 25 32 60 1-6 16-10
BF18 T2 A 32 26 23 1 0.340 BF18 T2 32 40 80 1-6 16-10
BF26 T2 A 45 36 32 1 0.420 BF26 T2 45 50 100 1.5-10 14-6
BF38 T2 A 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1 0.420 BF38 T2 55 80 150 2.5-16 14-6
BF80 T2 A 115 95 75 1 1.075 BF80 T2 115 115 250 6-50 18-2
DC COIL.
Terminals: clamp screw. Certifications and compliance
BF18 T2 D 32 26 23 1 0.470 Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, RINA; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93602) and CSA certified for
BF26 T2 D 45 36 32 1 0.540 Canada (File 54332), as Motor Controllers - Contactors.
BF38 T2 D 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1 0.540 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
BF09 T2...
BF80 T2 E 115 95 75 1 1.125 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
DC COIL. Low consumption (2.4W). for all BF09…BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the
Terminals: clamp screw. standard product order code.
BF18 T2 L 32 26 23 1 0.470 Example: BF09 T2 A230 V260 for BF09, 2NO+2NC main
BF26 T2 L 45 36 32 1 0.540 poles, 230V 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic materials).
BF38 T2 L 56 (60) 45 (48) 40 (42) 1 0.540
Complete with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit followed
by 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 /110 / 230 / 400V
– AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example:
– 11 BG09 T2 A230 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and 2 poles
NC, with 230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
– 11 BG09 T2 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and
2 poles NC, with 460VAC 60Hz coil.
Complete the order code with coil voltage digit.
-- DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
The BF18-BF26-BF38 T2D types already have a standard supplied built-in
TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
Example:
– 11 BG09 T2 D012 for mini-contactor BG09 T2, 2 poles NO and 2 poles
NC, with 12VDC coil.
Low consumption version with built-in TVS. Complete the order code with
coil voltage digit.
-- DC 024 / 048V.
Example:
– BF18 T2 L024 for contactor BF18 T2, 2 poles NO and 2 poles NC, with
24VDC low-consumption coil, supplied with TVS.
The contactor coil is controlled electronically; it can have either an AC or a
DC supply and has a wide operating range.
– AC/DC 024 = 20...48V; 110 = 60...110V; 230 = 100...250V.
For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork
terminal, must be used.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 2-19.
2-12 page 2-16 to 25 pages 2-29 to 31 pages 2-32 to 33 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 63 and 69
Contactors
Four-pole contactors with control circuit: AC and DC
Contactors four power poles, Order code IEC rated conventional Qty Wt Operational characteristics
4 NC free air thermal current Ith per Type UL/CSA Protection fuse Conductor
40°C 55°C 60°C pkg General use IEC gG ULRK5 section
BF series [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [A] [A] [A] [mm2] [AWG]
AC COIL. 2
BF18 T0 A 32 26 23 1 0.340 BF18 T0 32 40 80 1-6 16-10
BF26 T0 A 45 36 32 1 0.420 BF26 T0 45 50 150 1.5-10 14-6
DC COIL.
Terminals: clamp screw. Certifications and compliance
BF18 T0 D 32 26 23 1 0.470 Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, RINA; UL Listed for USA
BF26 T0 D 45 36 32 1 0.540 and Canada (cULus - File E93602) and CSA certified for
Canada (File 54332), as Motor Controllers - Contactors.
DC COIL. Low consumption (2.4W). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
Terminals: clamp screw. IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
BF18 T0 L 32 26 23 1 0.470 Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN
BF18 T0... 60335; for BF18 and BF26 versions only, add suffix V260
to the standard product order code.
Example: BF18 T0 A230 V260 for BF18, four NC main
poles, 230VAC 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic
materials).
NOTE: The BF18-BF26 T0D and BF18 T0L types have a

standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage
Suppressor).
Contators four NO power Order code Operational current at Qty Wt General characteristics
600V in DC1 55°C with per The contactors are specifically made with magnetic
poles to connect in series 4 poles in series pkg elements in the arc extinction chambers to obtain high
for photovoltaic applications [A] n° [kg]
DC load operational capabilities. They are used to
disconnect and isolate the load between the photovoltaic
BF series AC COIL. panel and the AC/DC inverter.
Terminals: lug clamp. For add-on contact blocks, accessories and spare parts,
BFD80 T4 A 100 1 1.100 consider indications of the corresponding standard
(11 BF80 40…, 11 BF80C 40…, BF50 T4 A... and
11BFD80 40 125 1 1.440 BF50 T4 E...).
AC/DC COIL.
Terminals: lug clamp. Italian Fire Department Directives
BFD80 T4 E 100 1 1.100 These directives provide for an disconnecting device for
all current-carrying elements, that can be operated by
DC COIL. remote control switch, placed in an easily reached and
Terminals: lug clamp. marked position, in order to safely isolate each part of
11BFD80 C 40 125 1 1.910 the installation within the fire system compartment
including the photovoltaic (PV) generator.
Complete with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit followed
As an alternative, the PV generator must be installed,
by 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 /110 / 230 / 400V either externally of the fire system compartment or
– AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / internally but in a dedicated compartment with adequate
575 60 (V). fire-resistant features. For such function, specifically
Example:
– BF18 T0 A230 for contactor BF18 T0, 4 NC power poles, with 230VAC designed contactors for on-load use in IEC DC1 duty up
BFD80 T4 50/60Hz. to 1000VDC are available.
– 11 BFD80 40 024 for contactor BFD80 40, 4 NO power poles, with 24V
50/60Hz for photovoltaic application.
Complete the order code with coil voltage digit. Operational characteristics
-- DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V. Use in IEC DC1 duty
Example:
– BF18 T0 D012 for micro-contactor BF18 T0, 4 NC power poles, with
Type IEC operational voltage Ue
12VDC coil. 400V 600V 800V 1000V
Low-consumption version. Complete the order code with coil voltage digit.
Standard voltages are: IEC max current Ie in DC1 with L/R
-- DC 024 / 048V. 1ms with 4 poles in series
Example:
– BF18 T2 L024 (low-consumption BF18 T2 contactor with 2 NO poles and [A] [A] [A] [A]
2 NC poles supplied at 24VDC).
The contactor coil is controlled electronically; it can have either an AC or a BFD80 T4A... 100 100 76 60
DC supply and has a wide operating range. BFD80 T4E... 100 100 76 60
Standard voltages are: BFD80… 125 125 95 75
– AC/DC 024 = 20...48V; 110 = 60...110V; 230 = 100...250V.
IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 2-19. Wiring scheme
BFD80 40... 4 poles
Compliance
IEC/EN 60947-4-1.
page 2-16 to 25 pages 2-29 and 31 pages 2-32 and 33 page 2-45 pages 2-48 to 63 and 69 2-13
Contactors
Contactors for power factor correction with AC control circuit
BFK contactors (including Order code Maximum IEC operational Qty Wt Operational characteristics
limiting resistors) power at 50°C (AC-6b) per IEC rated IEC - UL/CSA
240V 400V 440V 690V pkg Type operational protection fuse
480V current 440V gG-SC
2 [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] NO n° [kg] [A] [A]
AC COIL.
BFK09 10A 4,5 7,5 9 10 1 10 0.413 BFK09 12 16
BFK12 10A 7 12,5 14 16 1 10 0.413 BFK12 18 25
BFK18 10A 9 15 17 20 1 10 0.413 BFK18 23 40
BFK26 00A 11 20 22 25 – 10 0.472 BFK26 30 40
BFK32 00A 14 25 27,5 30 – 10 0.472 BFK32 36 63
BFK38 00A 17 30 33 36 – 10 0.472 BFK38 43 63
BFK50 00A 22 40 41 46 – 5 1.080 BFK50 58 80
BFK65 00A 26 45 50 56 – 5 1.080 BFK65 65 100
BFK80 00A 30 50 56 65 – 5 1.080 BFK80 75 125
11 BF80K 00 34 60 65 70 – 5 1.470 BF80K 90 125
11 BF110K 00 45 75 80 100 – 5 1.470 BF110K 110 160
BFK...
To use the contactor in the delta, consult our Customer Service office, Ambient operating temperature: 50°C. For ambient
see contact details on front cover. temperatures higher than 50°C and up to 70°C, the
NO auxiliary contacts available. maximum operating power values indicated in the table
The order code must be completed either with the coil voltage digit if must be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference
50/60Hz or with the coil voltage digit followed by the number 60 if 60Hz.
Standard voltages are: between the operating ambient temperature and 50°C.
-- AC 50-60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400VAC E.g.: Using a BFK26 00 contactor at the ambient
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / temperature of 60°C, the maximum operating power
575 60 (V). (at 400V) of the contactor will be equal to 20kvar – 10% =
Example: BFK09 10 A230 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact 18kvar.
and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil.
BFK09 10 A460 60 for contactor BFK09 with one NO Operating cycle: 120 cycles/h
contact and 460VAC 60Hz coil. Electrical life: 400,000 cycles.
Note: the maximum thermal current Ith of the BF110K contactor is 125A.
Add-on auxiliary contacts
The following contact blocks, can be fitted on the BFK
contactors: BFX12..., G418..., G481..., G482... and G218.

Certification obtained: CCC, EAC; UL Listed for USA and
Magnetic Capacitive Switches.
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
for BFK versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard
product order code.
Kit to assemble BFK Order code For contactor Qty Wt General characteristics
contactors per To optimise contactor stock management, a kit is available
pkg to transform normal three-pole contactors into BFK
n° [kg] types for power factor correction. The table to the left
indicates which kits to purchase depending on the standard
11 G460 BF09 10A - BF12 10A - 10 0.072 contactor in stock.
BF18 10A - BF26 00A -
BF32 00A - BF38 00A
BFX10K3 BF50 00A - BF65 00A - 10 0.078
BF80 00A
11 G464 BF80 00 - BF110 00 10 0.080
11 G46...
2-14 page 2-16 to 25 pages 2-28 to 31 pages 2-39 page 2-44 page 2-56 and 57
Contactors
Control relays with control circuit: AC and DC
Control relays Order code Configuration and Quantity Wt Operational characteristics

BG00 type n°of contacts per pkg. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
NO NC n° [kg] – IEC rated conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A
AC COIL.
• BG types: A600-Q600
• BF types: A600-P600
2
11 BG00 40 A 4 0 1 0.170 – Low-consumption version of BG types cannot accept
11 BG00 31 A 3 1 1 0.170 additional contacts.
NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible.
11 BG00 22 A 2 2 1 0.170
Terminals: Faston. Certifications and compliance
11 BGF00 40 A 4 0 1 0.160 Certification obtained: CCC, EAC, UL Listed for USA and
11 BGF00 31 A 3 1 1 0.160 Auxiliary contactors for all; RINA for BF00 types.
11 BG00... 11 BGF00 22 A 2 2 1 0.160 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
DC COIL. IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Terminals: clamp screw. Plastic materials are compliant with standards
IEC/EN 60335; for BF00 version only, add suffix V260 to
11 BG00 40 D 4 0 1 0.175 the standard product order code.
11 BG00 31 D 3 1 1 0.175 Example: BF00 40 A230 V260 for BF00 control relay
11 BG00 22 D 2 2 1 0.175 having 4 NO auxiliary contacts and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil
with compliant plastic materials.
Terminals: Faston.
11 BGF00 40 D 4 0 1 0.165 NOTE: The BF00...D and BF00...L types have a standard
11 BGF00 31 D 3 1 1 0.165 supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor).
11 BGF00 22 D 2 2 1 0.165
DC COIL. Low-consumption (2.3W).
11 BGF00... Terminals: clamp screw.
11 BG00 40 L 4 0 1 0.175
11 BG00 31 L 3 1 1 0.175
11 BG00 22 L 2 2 1 0.175
Terminals: Faston.
11 BGF00 40 L 4 0 1 0.165
11 BGF00 31 L 3 1 1 0.165
11 BGF00 22 L 2 2 1 0.165
Control relays Order code Configuration and Quantity Wt

BF00 type n°of contacts per pkg.
NO NC n° [kg]
AC COIL.
BF00 40 A 4 0 1 0.340
BF00 31 A 3 1 1 0.340
BF00 22 A 2 2 1 0.340
BF00 04 A 0 4 1 0.340
DC COIL.
BF00 40 D 4 0 1 0.470
BF00 31 D 3 1 1 0.470
BF00 22 D 2 2 1 0.470
BF00... A...
BF00 04 D 0 4 1 0.470
DC COIL. Low consumption (2.4W).
BF00 40 L 4 0 1 0.470
BF00 31 L 3 1 1 0.470
BF00 22 L 2 2 1 0.470
BF00 04 L 0 4 1 0.470
The order code must be completed either with the coil voltage digit if
50/60Hz or with the coil voltage digit followed by the number 60 if 60Hz.
-- AC 50760Hz 024 / 048 / 110 - 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 /- 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V).
Example: 11 BG00 40 A230 (auxiliary mini-contactor 4 NO auxiliary
contacts supplied at 230VAC 50/60Hz).
BF00 40 A460 60 (auxiliary contactor with 4 NO auxiliary
BF00... D... contacts supplied at 460VAC 60Hz).
BF00... L... Complete the order code with coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are:
– DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V.
Example: BF00 40 D012 (auxiliary contactor with 4 NO auxiliary
contacts supplied at 12VDC).
Low-consumption version. Complete the order code with coil voltage digit.
– DC 024 / 048V.
Example: 11 BG00 40 L024 (low-consumption auxiliary mini-contactor
with 4 NO auxiliary contacts supplied at 24VDC).
Maximum combinations of add-on blocks are given on page 2-19.
All contacts are highly conductive.
page 2-16 to 25 pages 2-28 and 29 pages 2-32 and 33 page 2-45 pages 2-58 and 69 2-15
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BG series mini-contactors
Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics

qty per
per pkg Type BGX10... BGXF10...
contactor. BGX11...
2 n° n ° [kg] IEC rated conventional free
air thermal current Ith
A 10 10
Auxiliary contacts.
Screw terminals. IEC rated insulation V 690 690
voltage Ui
11 BGX10 02 2NC 1 10 0.021
Terminals Screw M3 Faston
11 BGX10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021 1x6.3mm
11 BGX10... (20-11-02)
11 BGX11 11 11 BGX10 20 2NO 1 10 0.021 2x2.8mm
11 BGX10 04 4NC 1 10 0.028 Width mm 6.9 6.9
11 BGX10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 10 0.028 Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 ––
11 BGX10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028 lbin 7...9 ––
11 BGX10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 10 0.028 Conductor section maximum
11 BGX10 40 4NO 1 10 0.028 (with 1 or 2 cables)
flexible without lug mm2 2.5 2.5
Auxiliary contacts for reversing and changeover assemblies.
Screw terminals. flexible with lug mm2 2.5 2.5
11 BGX10... (40-31-22-13-04) AWG n° 14 14
11 BGX11 22 11 BGX11 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021
11 BGX11 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028 UL/CSA and AC A600 A600
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 DC Q600 Q600
Auxiliary contacts. designation
Faston terminals.
Mechanical life cycles 20 20
11 BGXF10 02 2NC 1 10 0.021 (million)
11 BGXF10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 10 0.021
SM1 breaker - mini-contactor connecting kit
11 BGXF10 20 2NO 1 10 0.021 See page 1-7.
11 BGXF10 04 4NC 1 10 0.028
11 BGXF... 11 BGXF10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 10 0.028 Certifications and compliance
11 BGXF10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 10 0.028
Type UL cULus EAC CCC
11 BGXF10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 10 0.028
11 BGXF10 40 4NO 1 10 0.028 BGX10... ––
Mechanical interlock. BGX11... ––
11 BGX50 00 For BG...A and BG...D 1 10 0.008 BGXF10... –– ––
Quick connect surge suppressors. BGX50 00 –– ––
11 BGX77 048 48VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 BGX7... –– ––
11 BGX77... -
11 BGX78 225 - 11 BGX77 125 48...125VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 BGX80 00 –– –– ––
11 BGX79... 11 BGX77 240 125...240VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.007 G32... –– –– ––
11 BGX78 225 225VDC (Diode) 10 0.007 SMX90... –– –– ––
11 BGX79 048 48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.007
Certified products;
11 BGX79 125 48...125VAC 10 0.007
(Resistor-Capacitor) - UL Recognized for USA only (File E197069) as Panel and
Switchboard Accessories - Component.
11 BGX79 240 125...240VAC 10 0.007 Products having this type of marking are intended
(Resistor-Capacitor) for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
11 BGX79 415 240...415VAC 10 0.007 equipment.
11 BGX50 00 cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as
(Resistor-Capacitor) Auxiliary Devices - Component.
Modular shroud.
11 BGX80 00 IP40 front protection 20 0.006 Compliant with standards: UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14,
IEC/EN 60947-1; IEC/EN 60947-5-1 for auxiliary
Paralleling links. contacts.
11 G323 For 2 poles 10 0.009
11 G324 10 0.009
11 G325 For 4 poles 10 0.014
11 G326 10 0.014
11 SMX90 21 Rigid connecting kits.
11 SMX90 22 11 SMX90 21 Rigid connections for 10 0.040
star-delta starter with
BG... mini-contactors
11 SMX90 22 Rigid connections for 1 0.026
reversing switches with
BG... mini-contactors
Cannot be used with BG...L types.
Cannot be used with BG...D and BG...L types.
Suitable for left-hand mini-contactor only of BGT and BGTP reversing and
BGC changeover assemblies.
The shroud can be used with BG... types with screw termination only and
with no auxiliary contacts, surge suppressor or mechanical interlock
mounted. It raises the front degree of protection of the mini-contactor
when these are used in consumer switchboards.
Cannot be used with BGX80 00 shroud.
Contactors with one NC auxiliary contact, 01 type, are usually used.
The SM1 breaker can be directly fitted with rigid connector; type connection
SM1X30 40P for SM1P... breaker and connection SM1X30 40R for
SM1R... breaker.
The relay cannot be directly mounted on the contator. Use the RF38 type and
the RFX38 04 independent mounting base.

2-16 page 2-39 page 2-46 pages 2-48 to 61 and 69
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BG series mini-contactors
Combinations: mounting position on BG...A and BG...D mini-contactors Combinations: mounting position on BG...L mini-contactors
G326 G326
G325 G325 2
G324 G324
G323 G323
BGX77... BGX77...
BGX78 225 BGX78 225
BGX79... BGX79...
BGX80 00 BGX80 00
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BG...A BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22 BG...L
BG...D
BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
BGX10 20 - BGXF10 20
BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
Not suitable for mini-contactors BG... with auxiliaries contacts BGX10..., surge suppressor BGX7...
and interlock BGX50 00.
Not suitable for BG...D types.
Combinations for reversing and changeover contactors assembled with BG...A and BG...D types
BGX77...
BGX78 225
BGX79...
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40
BG...A BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BG...D BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22
BGX50 00 BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04
BGX77... BGX10 20 - BGXF10 20

BGX78 225 BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40 BGX79... BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31
BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22
BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13
BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04 BGX10 10 - BGXF10 20
BGX11 22 BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11
BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02
BGX11 11
Not suitable for BG...D types.

For left-hand mini-contactor of BGT, BGTP and BGC contactor assemblies only.
See page 4-5.
Connections for reversing contactor assembly Connections for star-delta assembly

SMX90 21
SMX90 22 SMX90 21
BGX50 00
BG...
BG...A
BG...D SMX90 21
SMX90 22

page 2-39 page 2-46 pages 2-48 to 61 and 69 2-17
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for BF series contactors
Order code Characteristics Max qty Qty Wt Operational characteristics for add-on auxiliary contacts
per per Type G418 G484 G218 G482
cont. pkg. G428 BFX10 G481
n° n° [kg] G485
BFX12
2 Auxiliary contacts with front center mounting . G486
Screw terminals. G487
BFX10 02 2NC 1 5 0.030 IEC conventional free A 10 10 10 0,1

air thermal current Ith
BFX10 11 1NO + 1NC 1 5 0.030
IEC rated insulation V 690 690 690 690
BFX10 20 2NO 1 5 0.030 voltage Ui
BFX10... 11 G484 03 3NC 1 5 0.039 Terminals Screw M3.5 M3 –– ––
11 G484 12 1NO + 2NC 1 5 0.039 Width mm 7 7 –– ––
11 G484 21 2NO + 1NC 1 5 0.039 Faston –– –– 1x6.35 1x6.35
11 G484 30 3NO 1 5 0.039 2x2.8 2x2.8
BFX10 04 4NC 1 5 0.048 Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 0.8...1 –– ––
BFX10 13 1NO + 3NC 1 5 0.048 lbin 7...9 7...9 –– ––
BFX10 22 2NO + 2NC 1 5 0.048 Conductor section
BFX10 31 3NO + 1NC 1 5 0.048 maximum with
(1 or 2 cables)
BFX10 40 4NO 1 5 0.048 flexible w/o lug mm2 2.5 2.5 –– ––
11 G484...
BFX10 11 11 1NO+1NC and 1 5 0.048 flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
1EM+1LB
AWG n° 14 14 14 14
Auxiliary contacts with front lateral mounting. Screw terminals.
Terminal protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
11 G418 01 1NC 2 10 0.014 per IEC/EN60529
11 G418 01D 1LB 2 10 0.014 UL/CSA and AC A600 A600 A600 A600
11 G418 10 1NO 2 10 0.014 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 DC P600 Q600 P600 P600
11 G418 10A 1EM 2 10 0.014 designation
Auxiliary contacts with front lateral mounting. Faston terminals . Mechanical life cycles 10
10 10 10
(million)
11 G218 1NO or 1NC reversible 2 10 0.011
BFX10... 11 G481 02 2NC 2 10 0.013 SM1 breaker - contactor connecting kit
11 G481 11 1NO + 1NC 2 10 0.013 See page 1-5.
11 G481 20 2NO 2 10 0.013 Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks
11 G482 Changeover contact 2 10 0.013 See pages 2-19 and 2-22...25.
Adapter for auxiliary contact side mounting. Certifications and compliance
11 G280 for G218 2 10 0.008 Certifications obtained:
11 G419 for G418 2 10 0.010 Type UL cULus CSA EAC CCC
11 G483 for G481 and G482 2 10 0.010
Auxiliary contacts with low side mounting. BFX10... –– ––
Screw terminals. BFX12... –– –– ––
11 G418... 11 G218
BFX12 02 2NC for 2 5 0.044 G218 –– ––
BF00, BF09...BF80 G418..., G428... –– ––
BFX12 11 1NO+1NC for 2 5 0.044 G481... –– ––
BF00, BF09...BF80
G482 –– ––
BFX12 20 2NO for 2 5 0.044
BF00, BF09...BF80 G484... –– ––
11 G428 01 1NC 2 10 0.024 G485... –– ––
11 G428 01D 1LB 2 10 0.024 G486... –– ––
11 G481...
11 G428 10 1NO 2 10 0.024 G487... –– ––
11 G482
11 G428 10A 1EM 2 10 0.024 Certified products; pending for BFX10 1111
- UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices
Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation) - Component.
on energisation for front center mounting
. Products having this type of marking are intended
Screw terminals. for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
11 G485 3 3s 1 1 0.040 cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as
11 G485 6 6s 1 1 0.040 Auxiliary Devices.
CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
11 G485 15 15s 1 5 0.040 motor controllers.
11 G485 30 30s 1 5 0.040
11 G428... BFX12... Add-on auxiliary contacts are compliant with the following
11 G485 60 60s 1 5 0.040 standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
11 G485 120 120s 1 1 0.040 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation)
on de-energisation for front center mounting
. The contacts can also be fitted on B type contactors using the adapter
Screw terminals. G358. See pages 2-26 and 2-28.
11 G486 3 3s 1 1 0.040 Highly conductive contacts.
Normally closed late-break contact.
11 G486 6 6s 1 1 0.040 Normally open early-make contact.
Gold-plated contacts inside tight casing for use in pollutant environments.
11 G486 15 15s 1 5 0.040 The Ith value refers to 125VAC and 30VDC.
11 G486 30 30s 1 5 0.040 IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with insulated Faston
11 G485... terminals.
11 G486... 11 G486 60 60s 1 5 0.040 IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with minimum
0.75mm² conductor section.
11 G487 11 G486 120 120s 1 1 0.040 Designation in DC is Q600 for G418 and G419 types.
11 G487 70ms 1 1 0.040 IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with insulated
Faston terminals.

IEC IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with minimum
1mm² conductor section. Mechanical life is 3 million cycles.

2-18 page 2-40 pagee 2-46 and 47 pages 2-48 to 65 and 69
Contactors
BF00 A, Maximum assembly combination for alternating-current contactors BF00 A, BF09 A...BF110.
Maximum assembly combination for alternating/direct-current contactors BF40 E...BF80 E.
BF09 A...BF80 A, Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF80 C...BF110 C.
BF40 E...BF80 E Front centre mount Front lateral mount Side mount
BF95 C...BF110 C 2
BFX10 02 BFX10 04 G485... G222... BFX50 02 G269 2 G418... G428... BFX12 02

BFX10 11 BFX10 13 G486... G272... BFX50 03 G218 G419+ BFX12 11
G481... G418...
BFX10 20 BFX10 22 G487 G482 G280+ BFX12 20
G218
BFX10 31 G483+ BFX50 00
1 type G481...
BFX10 40 only G483+ BFX50 01

G318... G482
G319 225
G322...
n°of blocks n°of blocks n°of blocks n°of blocks n°of blocks n°of blocks
1 type only 1 type only
Control relay BF00 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
Three poles BF09 A...BF25 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
BF26 A...BF38 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
BF40 A...BF110 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 1
Contactors
OR
OR
OR
OR
+
BF40 E...BF80 E 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 1
BF95 C...-BF110 C 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 ––
Four poles BF09 A...BF25 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 or 2 1 or 2 1
BF26 A...BF38 A 1 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 1
BF40 A...BF80 A 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 1
BF40 E...-BF80 E 1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 or 2 2 2
Cannot be fitted with BFX10… with 4 contacts and G222.
To fit the mechanical interlock, the add-on fourth pole needs to be mounted on the left side of the one of the contactors.
One only side-mount block can be fitted on each contactor whenever the BFX50 0... interlock is mounted.
One BFX10... or delayed G48... contact block can be mounted on the G222 or G272 mechanical latch.
G222 mechanical latch.
G272 mechanical latch.
For BF40 80 code BFX53 00 or BFX53 01.
BF00 D, Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF00 D, BF09 D...BF38 D
Maximum assembly combination for direct-current contactors BF00 L, BF09 L...BF38 L with low absorption
BF09 D...BF38 D,
Front centre mount Front lateral Side mount
BF00 L, mount
BF09 L...BF38 L
BFX10... BFX10... G485... G222... 1 type only BFX50... BFX12...

...02 ...11 ...20 ...04 ...13 ...22 ...31 ....40 G486... ...02 ...03 ...00 ...01
G487
n° of blocks n° of blocks n° of blocks
1 type only 1 type only
Control relay BF00 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BF00 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
Three poles BF09 D-BF25 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BF26 D-BF38 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Contactors
BF09 L-BF25 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
OR
BF26 L-BF38 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
Four poles BF09 D-BF25 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BF26 D-BF38 D –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1 1
BF09 L-BF25 L 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 –– ––
BF26 L-BF38 L –– 1 –– –– –– –– –– 1 1 –– ––
Mounting of BFX50 03 interlock is not possible when BFX10... block with 4 contacts and G222 latch are mounted.
One only side-mount block can be fitted on each contactor whenever the BFX50 0... interlock is mounted.
One BFX10... or delayed G48... contact block can be mounted on the G222 or G272 mechanical latch.
To fit the mechanical interlock, the add-on fourth pole needs to be mounted on the left side of the one of the contactors.
For other assembly combination, consult Customer Service (Tel. 035 4282422; E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com).

pages 2-40 and 41 pagee 2-46 and 47 pages 2-48 to 65 2-19
Contactors
Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics

qty per per Type BFX42 BFX43 BFX50 01
cont. pkg BFXD42
n° n° [kg] IEC conventional A 56 115 10
2 Fourth pole. free air thermal
BFX42 For BF26 A, 1 1 0.100 current Ith
BF32 A, BF38 A IEC rated insulation
BFXD42 For BF26 D, 1 1 0.108 voltage Ui V 690 1000 690
BF32 D, BF38 D, Terminals: Screw M4 M6 M3
BF26 L, BF32 L, BF38 L Width mm 12.5 9.6 7
BFX43 For BF40 A... BF80 A 1 1 0.150 Tightening torque Nm 2.5...3 4...5 0.8...1
and BF40 E...BF80 E
lbin 21.6...26.4 35.4...44.2 7...9
BFX42 Mechanical interlock.
BFXD42 Conductor section
BFX50 00 Side mount for 1 5 0.039 maximum with
BF00, BF09...BF38 1 or 2 cables
BFX50 01 Side mount with 2NC 1 5 0.052 flexible w/o lug mm2 16 35 2.5
contacts for flexible c/w lug mm2 16 35 2.5
BF00, BF09...BF38
AWG n° 6 2 14
BFX50 02 Front mount, low 1 5 0.006
profile for Terminal protection IP20 IP20 IP20
BF00, BF09...BF38 per IEC/EN60529
BFX50 03 Front mount for 1 5 0.023 UL/CSA and AC –– –– A600
BF00, BF09...BF38 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 DC –– –– Q600
designation
BFX89 10 Spacer for interlocking 1 10 0.017
BF09...BF38 AC/DC Mechanical life cycles 10 15 10
with types in DC (million)
BFX50 00 BFX50 01 BFX53 00 Side mount for 1 5 0.039
BFX53 00 BFX53 01 BF40...BF80 A/E Type G222... G272...
BFX53 01 Side mount with 2NC 1 5 0.052 Rated control circuit
contacts for voltage AC (50/60Hz) V 24...415 24...415
BF40...BF80 A/E DC V 12...240 12...240
BFX53 03 Front mount for 1 5 0.034 Power consumption
BF40...BF80 A/E with control: AC VA 40 40
11 G269 2 Front mount for 1 5 0.034 DC W 70 70
BF95...BF110
Minimum energising:
Mechanical latch. Screw terminals drop-out ms 10 10
BFX50 02 BFX50 03 11 G222 For BF00, BF09...BF38 1 1 0.070 pick-up ms 100 200
BFX53 03 11 G272 For BF40...BF110 1 1 0.070 Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 0.8...1
11 G269 2
Manual closing mechanism. lbin 7...9 7...9
11 G454 For BF00, BF09...BF38 1 1 0.021 Conductor section
11 G455 For BF40...BF110 1 1 0.021 Maximum with
Quick connect surge suppressors for BF00A, 1 or 2 cables
BF09A...BF80A contactors. flexible w/o lug mm2 4 4
BFX77 048 48VAC/DC (Varistor) 5 0.012 flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5 2.5
BFX77 125 48...125VAC/DC (Varistor) 5 0.012 AWG n° 14...12 14...12
BFX77 240 125...240VAC/DC (Varistor) 5 0.012 The condition is front IP20 protection.
11 G222... 11 G454 BFX79 048 48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 5 0.012

Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks
11 G272... 11 G455 BFX79 125 48...125VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 5 0.012 See pages 2-19, 2-22...25.
BFX79 240 125...240VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 5 0.012
BFX79 415 240...415VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 5 0.012 Certifications and compliance
Surge suppressor for BF95...BF110 contactors, front mount.
Faston terminals. Type UL cULus CSA EAC
11 G318 48 48VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010
11 G318 125 48...125VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010 BFX42 - BFXD42 - BFXD43 –– ––
11 G318 240 125...240VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010 BFX50... –– ––
BFX77...
11 G318 415 240...415VAC/DC (Varistor) 10 0.010 BFX77... –– ––
BFX79...
11 G319 225 225VDC (Diode) 10 0.010 BFX79... –– ––
11 G322 48 48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.010 G269 2 ––
11 G322 220 48...240VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.010 G222... ––
11 G322 380 240...415VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 10 0.010 G272... ––
Suppressor mounting adapter for G318-G319-G322. Certified products.
- UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices
11 RE244 For 35mm DIN rail 10 0.004 Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended
Different sized contactors can be interlocked. for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
Example: BF09...BF25 with BF26...BF38. equipment.
Replace with the digit of the voltage if 50 or 60Hz and with the letter C cULus - UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602) as
followed by the digit of the voltage if DC.
Magnetic motor controllers.
11 G318... 11 RE244 Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 24 (indicate 24) - 48 (indicate 48) - CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
11 G319 225 110...125 (indicate 110) motor controllers.
11 G322... 220...240 (indicate 220) - 380...415V (indicate 380).
– DC 12 (indicate 12) - 24 (indicate 24) - 48 (indicate 48)
110...125 (indicate 110) - 220...240V (indicate 220). IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

2-20 pages 2-40 and 41 page 2-47 pages 2-48 to 65 and 69
Contactors
Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per
pkg Type G231 G232 G285 G271
n° [kg] G288
Rigid connecting kits for three-pole reversing contactor assembly. Tightening Nm 1.5-1.8 2.5-3 0.8-1 5 2
BFX31 01 For contactors 1 0.052 torque lbin 13.2-18 7-9 7.9 44.3
BF09...BF25 side by side Tool Type PH1 PH2 PH1 Metric
with BFX50 02 and BFX50 03 Allen 4
mechanical interlock
BFX31... BFX31 02 For contactors 1 0.054
BFX32... BF09...BF25side by side Certifications and compliance
with BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 Certifications obtained: GOST for all; UL Listed, for USA
mechanical interlock and Canada (cULus - File E93602), under Magnetic
BFX32 01 For contactors 1 0.060 Motor Controllers for BFX31 01, BFX31 02, BFX32 01,
BF26...BF38 side by side BFX31 31, BFX32 31 and BFX32 32 as rigid kits, G271
with BFX50... and G288 as enlarged terminal kits; EAC for all.
mechanical interlock Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Rigid connecting kits for star-delta starters.
BFX31 31 For contactors BF09...BF25 1 0.058
BFX 80 BFX32 31 For contactors BF26...BF38 1 0.064
BFX32 32 For contactors 1 0.064
BF26...BF38 (L/∆) Y
BF09...BF25 ( )
Sealing cover.
BFX80 Sealing cover 10 0.001
for contactors
BF00 and BF09 ... BF38
Screw fixing adapters for contactors.
BFX89 01 Universal base to screw fix 5 0.016
BF09...BF38
contactors
BFX89 01 BFX89 02
BFX89 02 Screw fixing brackets for 10 0.002
BF09...BF38 contactors
Power terminal shroud.
11 G265 IP20 protection for 3-pole 10 0.015
BF95...BF110 types
Paralleling links.
11 BA135 2 poles for contactors 10 0.001
11 G265 BF09...BF25 types
BF26...BF38 types
BF95...BF110 types
One-pole enlarged terminals.
11 G231 1x6mm2 for contactors 12 0.009
BF09...BF25 types
11 BA135 11 BA435
11 BA235 11 G232 1x16mm2 for contactors 12 0.014
BF26...BF38 types
Three-pole enlarged terminals.
BF95...BF110 types
Four-pole enlarged terminals.
11 G231 11 G285 BF95...BF110 types
11 G232 Auxiliary terminal.
11 G285 For BF95...BF110 types 8 0.009
Marking element for BF00, BF09...BF110 contactors.
BFX30 Blank label for writing 50 0.001
Two pieces are required per contactor.
An additional 1-50mm2 conductor can be fitted in the contactor terminal.
11 G271
11 G288

pages 2-40 and 41 page 2-47 pages 2-48 to 65 2-21
Contactors
Add-on blocks for

AC and AC/DC contactors
Combinations: mounting position on BF00 A and BF09 A-BF110 contactors
2 Table with combinations: See page 2-19.
G222...❷
(for contactors BF00, BF09...BF38)
G272... G454 ❸ (for contactors BF00 A, BF09 A...BF38 A)
(for contactors BF50...BF110)
G485... G455 ❸ (for contactors BF50...BF110)

G486...
G487
BFX10...❷
G484...
BFX10...
G418...
BFX50 00 (for contactors BF00, BF09...BF38)
BFX50 01 (for contactors BF00, BF09...BF38) BF00 A
BFX53 00 (for contactors BF50...BF80) BFX77... BF09 A...BF110
BFX53 01 (for contactors BF50...BF80) (for contactors
BF00, BF09...BF80) G218
BFX79...
(for contactors
BF00, BF09...BF80)
G481...
G482
❶
G419❶
BFX12...
G280❶ BFX50 02
(for contactors BF00 A, BF09 A...BF38 A)
G483❶
BFX50 03
(for contactors BF00 A, BF09 A...BF38 A)
G418...❶ G428...❶
G218❶
G269 2
G481...❶ (for contactors BF50...BF110)
G482❶
Mounting is not possible if front lateral contacts or mechanical interlock BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 are mounted. BF00, BF09...38 cannot be fitted with BFX10 with 4 contacts or G222…
Refer to the diagram below for use with G222… on contactors BF00 A and BF09 A...BF38 A and to the table of combinations on page 2-19.
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the manual closing mechanism G454 or G455 is fitted.
Combinations: mounting position on BF00 A and BF09 A- Combinations: mounting position on BF40 A..80 A, BF40 E...BF80 E,
BF38 A contactors with mechanical latch G222 fitted. BF95...110 contactors with mechanical latch G272 fitted.
Table with combinations: See page 2-19. Table with combinations: See page 2-19.
(for contactors
BFX53 00 BF50...BF80)
(for contactors
BF50...BF80)
BFX53 01
BFX53 03
11 G269 2 ❺
Mounting not possible if front lateral

contacts are fitted.
BFX53 03 for BF40 A...80A, BF40 E...BF80 E
11 G269 2 for BF95...110

2-22 pages 2-40 and 41 page 2-46 and 47 pages 2-48 to 65 and 69
Contactors
Add-on blocks for

DC and DC low consumption contactors
Combinations: mounting position on BF00 and BF09-BF38, D and L versions
Table with combinations: See page 2-19. 2
G485...
G486...
BFX10... G487
BFX10...
G222...❷ G454❸
BF00 D
BF09 D...BF38 D
BF00 L
BF09 L...BF38 L❷
BFX50 02
BFX50 00 BFX12...
BFX50 01
BFX50 03❶
Mounting not possible when the G222 mechanical latch is fitted.

The G222 mechanical latch cannot be fitted on BF26 L - BF38 L four-pole types.
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the G454 manual closing mechanism is fitted.
Combinations: mounting position on BF50 C - BF110 C contactors

with G272 mechanical latch fitted G485...
Table with combinations: See page 2-19. G486...
G487
BFX10...
G484...
BFX10...
G418...
BF95 C...BF110 C
G218
2
27
G
G481...
G482
G318...
G319 225
G322...
G418... G269 2
G218
G481...
G482
No add-on block can be mounted on front when the G455 manual closing mechanism is fitted.
Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts are fitted.

pages 2-40 and 41 page 2-46 and 47 pages 2-48 to 65 and 69 2-23
Contactors
Accessories for
AC, DC and DC low consumption contactors
2 Combinations
G271
BA435
G265
G285
BA235
G232
G231
BA135
BF95...BF110
BF26...BF38
BFX80
BF00
BF09...BF25
Cable Plate
6...50mm2 2,5x9mm (max)
BF95...BF110
Dimensions Technical characteristics

2-24 pages 2-40 and 41 pages 2-48 to 65 and 69
Contactors
Accessories for
AC, DC and DC low consumption contactors
Connections for reversing contactors with contactors BF09...BF25 Connections for reversing contactors with contactors BF09...BF25 and mechanical
interlock BFX50 00 or BFX50 01
2
BFX31 02
BFX31 01
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX50 00
BFX31 01 BFX31 02 BFX50 01
RF38 RF38
Connections for reversing contactors with contactors BF26...BF38 Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF09-BF25 contactors
BFX32 01
BFX50 02
BFX31 31
BFX50 02
BFX50 03
BFX31 31
BFX32 01
BFX50 00
BFX50 01 RF38
RF38
Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 contactors Rigid star-delta starter assembly connecting kits for BF26-BF38 (line-delta) and
BF09-BF25 (star) contactors
BFX32 31
BFX32 32
BFX32 31 BFX32 32
RF38
RF38

page 2-40 page 2-47 pages 2-48...65 2-25
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for B series contactors
Add-on blocks Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts
qty per. per Type G350-G354
contactor pk sg
IEC conventional free-air thermal A 16
n° n° [kg] current Ith
2 Auxiliary contacts. IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Faston terminals. Side mountinge.
Terminals Faston 1-6.35x0.8
11 G350 2NO+1NC or 4 1 0.082 2-2.8x0.8
1NO+2NC reversible
Conductor section maximum
11 G354 1NO+1NC 4 1 0.078 (with 1 or 2 cables)
Adapter. flexible c/w lug mm2 2,5
11 G350 - 11 G354 11 G358 For fitting auxiliary 4 5 0.050 AWG n° 14
contacts BFX10..., UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 AC A600
with 2 contacts, designation
G484..., G485..., DC P600
G486... and G487 Mechanical life (million) cycles 5
on contactors
B115...B630 1000 Type G495
described on p. 2-28
Rated AC control circuit
Mechanical interlock. voltage AC (50/60Hz) V 48...480
11 G355 Side by side 1 1 0.026 DC V 48...480
11 G356 1 One on top of other 1 1 0.120 Power consumption with control in:
11 G358 11 G356 2 One on top of other 1 1 0.126 AC VA 1500
11 G356 3 One on top of other 1 1 0.132 DC W 1100
11 G356 4 One on top of other 1 1 0.140 Minimum energising:
11 G356 5 One on top of other 1 1 0.146 drop-out ms 40
11 G356 6 One on top of other 1 1 0.150 pick-up ms 300
Mechanical latch. Terminals Faston 1-6.3x0.8
11 G495
For B115...B630
1 1 0.795
Type G370-G371
Tightening torque Nm 1
Accessories Order code Characteristics Qty Wt lbin 8.9
per Tool Type PH2
pkg
Conductor section mm² 4
n° [kg] (with 1 or 2 cables) AWG 10
Power terminal protection.
11 G360 For contactor B115 6 0.026 Certifications and compliance
11 G361 For contactors B145-B180 6 0.026 Certifications obtained:
11 G363 For contactors B250-B310-B400 6 0.046 Type UL CSA EAC CCC
11 G360 - 11 G361 - 11 G363
11 G527 For contactor B500 1 0.238
G350
11 G528 For contactor B500 4 1 0.265
G354 ––
11 G529 For contactor B630 1 0.238
G355 –– ––
11 G530 For contactor B630 4 1 0.266
G356 ... –– ––
3 pole star connecting bars.
G360 –– ––
11 BA1595 For contactors B115-B145-B180 1 0.065
G361 –– ––
G362 –– ––
11 BA1846 For contactors B500-B630 1 0.341
11 G527 - 11 G528 - 11 G529 G363 –– ––
2 pole bars for parallel arrangement.
11 G530 G370 –– ––
Certified products.
11 BA1720 For contactors B250-B310-B400 1 0.149 - UL Recognized for USA only (File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices -
11 BA1845 For contactors B500-B630 1 0.322 Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended
Terminal adapter. for use as components of complete workshop-assembled
11 G370 To transform Faston terminals 10 0.003 equipment.
CSA - CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for
of auxiliary contacts and coils motor controllers.
11 G370
into screw terminals
11 G371 To transform both coil 5 0.022 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; add-on
Faston terminals into screw auxiliary contacts also comply with: IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
terminals
Only for B115-B145-B180-B250-B310-B400-B500-B630-B630 1000.
Not suitable for B630 1000-B1250-B1600 .
For use with three-pole B630 1000, consult Customer Service for
11 G371 information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Allowed distances see page 2-68.
For contactors B1250 and B1600, two G356 6 mechanical interlocks are
required.
Replace with the digit of the voltages if 50 or 60 Hz or with the letter C
followed by voltage if DC. The standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 48 - 110...125 (indicate 110) - 220...240 (indicate 220) -
380...415 (indicate 380)
– DC 48 - 110...125 (indicate 110) - 220...240 (indicate 220).
It can be mounted only in contactors if predisposed for it. Consult Customer
Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.

Not suitable for B310 and B310 4.
Provided for one pole terminal only. Example: For three-pole contactors,
purchase 3 pieces for the upper terminals only or 6 pieces for all upper and
lower terminals.
Replace with the required alphanumeric symbol; each package contains 100
pieces of the same symbol.

2-26 pages 2-42 and 43 page 2-47 pages 2-66 to 69
Contactors
Add-on blocks and accessories for B series contactors
Combinations: Mounting position on B115-B630 contactors G527 (for B500 00)

G528 (for B500 4 00)
G529 (for B630 00)
G530 (for B630 4 00)
2
G356...
G370
G371
G363
G355
G350
G354
G360 (for B115)

G361 (for B145-B180)
BA1846
BA1845
B500
B630
BA1720
B250 BA1721
B310
B400
BA1595 BA1594
B115
B145
B180
The add-on auxiliary contact blocks G350 and G354 can be applied to contactors Contact blocks, BFX10 with 2 contacts, G484, G485, G486 and G487 types, can
B115-B630 1000 only up to a maximum of four pieces for each contactor, for a total of be mounted using the G358 adapter, refer to page 2-18 for exact types and
12 contacts. order codes of the blocks.
The contact block G350 provides a 2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC combination depending on A maximum of four adapters can be possibly used per contactor and each
its mounting position; see the drawing delow. The G354 block consists of 1NO+1NC. adapter can hold one BFX10, G484, G485, G486 and G487.
BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 02
53 63
93 01 51 61
54 64
BFX10...
94 02 52 62
G484 30 G484 21 G484 12 G484 03

G484...
53 63 73 53 61 73 53 61 71 51 61 71
G354 G350 G350 G354
G485...
G486...
G487
41 73 73
D
C
B
E
01 13
A
F
G
13
54 64 74 54 62 74 54 62 72 52 62 72
42 74
02 14 74
14
53
113 53
113 81
21
or
or
81
54 21
54 82
G485 ... G486 ... - G487
114
114 22
82
22
G371 G358
61 61 93
121 121 33 57 65 67 55
62
122 62
122 94
34
34
94 122 122
62
62
33
93 121
61 121
61
58 66 68 56 G358
22
82
22 114
82 54 114
21 54
or
or
G358
81
21 113
81 53 113
53
14
74 14 02
74 42
13
73 13 01
73 41
G354 G350 G350 G354 G358

pages 2-42 and 43 page 2-47 pages 2-66 to 69 2-27
Contactors
Spare parts for BF series contactors
AC coils Order code Rated frequency Qty Wt Operational characteristics for BFX91 A, BFX92 A and
and voltage per BFX93 A coils
pkg AC control
[Hz] [V] n° [kg] Rated voltage at 50/60, 60Hz V 12...600
2 For contactors BF00 A-BF09 A-BF12 A-BF18 A-BF25 A. Operating voltage limits
BFX91 A024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.085 50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 80...110
BFX91 A048 48VAC 1 0.085 powered at drop-out % Us 20...55
BFX91 A110 110VAC 1 0.085 60Hz pick-up % Us 85...110
BFX91 A230 230VAC 1 0.085 drop-out % Us 20...55
BFX91 A400 400VAC 1 0.085 60Hz coil pick-up % Us 80...110
BFX91 A024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.085 powered at 60Hz drop-out % Us 20...55
BFX91 A048 60 48VAC 1 0.085 Average coil consumption at 20°C
BFX91 A120 60 120VAC 1 0.085 50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 75
BFX91A... BFX91 A220 60 220VAC 1 0.085 powered at holding VA 9
BFX91 A230 60 230VAC 1 0.085 60Hz in-rush VA 70
BFX91 A460 60 460VAC 1 0.085 holding VA 6.5
BFX91 A575 60 575VAC 1 0.085 60Hz coil in-rush VA 75
For contactors BF26 A-BF32 A-BF38 A. powered at 60Hz holding VA 9
BFX92A 024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.088 Dissipation at 50Hz W 2.5
BFX92A 048 48VAC 1 0.088
BFX92A 110 110VAC 1 0.088 Operational characteristics for BA705 coil
AC control
BFX92A 230 230VAC 1 0.088
Rated voltage at 50/60, 60Hz V 12...600
BFX92A 400 400VAC 1 0.088
Operating voltage limits
BFX92A 024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.088
50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 80...110
BFX92A 048 60 48VAC 1 0.088 powered at drop-out % Us 20...55
BFX92A 120 60 120VAC 1 0.088
60Hz pick-up % Us 85...110
BFX92A 220 60 220VAC 1 0.088
drop-out % Us 40...55
BFX92A 230 60 230VAC 1 0.088
60Hz coil pick-up % Us 80...110
BFX92A 460 60 460VAC 1 0.088 powered at 60Hz
BFX92A... drop-out % Us 20...55
BFX92A 575 60 575VAC 1 0.088
Average coil consumption at 20°C
For contactors BF40 A-BF50 A-BF65 A-BF80 A.
50Hz in-rush VA 220
BFX93 A024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.150
50/60Hz coil holding VA 18
BFX93 A048 48VAC 1 0.150 powered at 60Hz in-rush VA 200
BFX93 A110 110VAC 1 0.150
holding VA 15
BFX93 A230 230VAC 1 0.150
60Hz coil in-rush VA 220
BFX93 A400 400VAC 1 0.150 powered at 60Hz holding VA 18
BFX93 A024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.150
Dissipation at 50Hz W 6
BFX93 A048 60 48VAC 1 0.150
BFX93 A120 60 120VAC 1 0.150
Materials
BFX93 A220 60 220VAC 1 0.150 Class F enamelled copper wire.
BFX93 A230 60 230VAC 1 0.150
BFX93 A460 60 460VAC 1 0.150 Special versions
For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
BFX93 A575 60 575VAC 1 0.150 Service for information; see contact details on inside front
For contactors BF95-BF110. cover.
11 BA705 024 50/60 24VAC 1 0.145
BFX93A... 11 BA705 048 48VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 110 110VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 230 230VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 400 400VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 024 60 60 24VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 048 60 48VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 120 60 120VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 220 60 220VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 230 60 230VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 460 60 460VAC 1 0.145
11 BA705 575 60 575VAC 1 0.145
Four-terminal coil.
11 BA705...
2-28
Contactors
Spare parts for BF series contactors
AC/DC and DC coils Order code Rated Qty Wt Operational characteristics for BFX93 E coil
voltage per AC/DC control
pkg Rated voltage V 20...250
[V] n° [kg] Operating voltage pick-up % Us 80...110
For contactors BF40 E-BF50 E-BF65 E-BF80 E. limits: drop-out % Us 20...25
2
BFX93 E024 20...48V AC/DC 1 0.150 50/60 Hz coil
powered at
BFX93 E110 60...110V AC/DC 1 0.150 or in DC
BFX93 E230 100...250V AC/DC 1 0.150 Average coil in-rush VA/W 60...125/50
For contactors BF95 C...BF110 C. cons. at 20°C holding VA/W 1.7...2.3/1.5
11 BA911 12 12VDC 1 0.380
11 BA911 24 24VDC 1 0.380 Operational characteristics for BA911 coil
DC control
11 BA911 48 48VDC 1 0.380
Rated voltage V 12...600
11 BA911 60 60VDC 1 0.380
Operating voltage pick-up % Us 80...110
11 BA911 110 110VDC 1 0.380
limits: drop-out % Us 10...25
11 BA911 125 125VDC 1 0.380
Average dissipation 20°C W 15
11 BA911 220 220VDC 1 0.380 in-rush/holding
NOTE: No coil replacement for contactors BF00 D, For electronically controlled AC/DC coils 80% of Us min. and 110% of
BFX93 E Us max.
BF09 D-BF38 D, BF00 L, BF09 L-BF38 L, is possible. For electronically controlled AC/DC coils 20% of Us min. and 55% of
Us max.
Materials
Class F enamelled copper wire.
Special versions
For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
Service for information; see contact details on inside front
cover.
11 BA911...
2-29
Contactors
Spare parts for B series contactors
AC/DC coils Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt Operational characteristics

AC 50/60Hz and DC per AC and DC control
pkg For contactor type B115 - B145 - B180
[V] n° [kg] Supply voltage AC and DC
2 Coil for B115-B145-B180 contactors. Rated control V 24...480
11 BA11574 24 24VAC/DC 1 0.800 voltage
11 BA11574 48 48VAC/DC 1 0.800 Operating pick-up % Us 80...110
11 BA11574 60 60VAC/DC 1 0.800 limits drop-out % Us 20...60
11 BA11574 110 110...125VAC/DC 1 0.800 Consumption in-rush VA/W 300
11 BA11574 220 220...240VAC/DC 1 0.800 holding VA/W 10
11 BA11574 380 380...415VAC/DC 1 0.800 Dissipation W 10
11 BA11574 440 440...480VAC/DC 1 0.800
Coil for B250-B310-B400 contactors.
For contactor type B250 - B310 - B400
11 BA1699 24 24VAC/DC 1 1.800
Supply voltage AC and DC
Coil 11 BA1699 48 48VAC/DC 1 1.800
Rated control V 24...480
11 BA1699 60 60VAC/DC 1 1.800 voltage
11 BA1699 110 110...125VAC/DC 1 1.800 Operating pick-up % Us 80...110
11 BA1699 220 220...240VAC/DC 1 1.800 limits drop-out % Us 20...60
11 BA1699 380 380...415VAC/DC 1 1.800 Consumption in-rush VA/W 300
11 BA1699 440 440...480VAC/DC 1 1.800 holding VA/W 10
Coil for B500-B630-B630 1000 contactors. Dissipation W 10
11 BA1800 48 48VAC/DC 1 3.400
Bridge rectifier 11 BA1800 60 60VAC/DC 1 3.400
11 BA1800 110 110...125VAC/DC 1 3.400 For contactor type B500 - B630 -
B630 1000
11 BA1800 220 220...240VAC/DC 1 3.400
Supply voltage AC and DC
11 BA1800 380 380...415VAC/DC 1 3.400
Rated control V 48...480
11 BA1800 440 440...480VAC/DC 1 3.400 voltage
Coil for B1250-B1600 contactors. Operating limits pick-up % Us 80...110
11 BA1800 110 110...125VAC 1 3.400 drop-out % Us 20...60
11 BA1800 220 220...240VAC 1 3.400 Consumption in-rush VA/W 400
holding VA/W 18
Coil protection Order code For contactor Qty Wt Dissipation W 18
per
pkg
n° [kg] For contactor type B1250 - B1600
Bridge rectifier (Faston terminals). Supply voltage AC
11 BA1575 1 B115-B145-B180 1 0.170 Rated control V 110/240
11 BA1700 1 B250-B310-B400 1 0.230 voltage
11 BA1799 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 0.520 Operating pick-up % Us 80...110
B1250-B1600 limits drop-out % Us 20...60
Coil protection. Consumption in-rush VA/W 800
11 BA1553 B115-B145-B180 1 0.042 holding VA/W 45
Coil assembly
11 BA1678 B250-B310-B400 1 0.079 Dissipation W 40
11 BA1803 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 0.164
B1250-B1600 Materials
Class F enamelled copper wire.
Coil assembly
(Coil, rectifier and coil protection). Coil assembly
11 BA1546 B115-B145-B180 1 1.220 Comprises the coil, bridge rectifier, fixed core, coil
11 BA1671 B250-B310-B400 1 2.290 protection, cross piece and fixing screws.
11 BA1796 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 4.650 Special versions
B1250-B1600 For coils with non standard voltages, consult Customer
Available for AC supply only. Service for information; see contact details on inside front
Add the coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are: cover.
- AC/DC 24 - 48 - 60 - 110...125 (indicate 110) - 220...240 (indicate 220) -
380...415 (indicate 380) - 440...480V (indicate 440).
Example: 11 BA1546 110 for B115-B180 contactor coil assembly
suitable for 110-125VAC/DC supply.
Add the coil voltage digit. Standard voltages are:
- AC/DC 48 - 60 - 110...125 - 220...240 - 380...415 - 440...480V.
Example: 11 BA1796 110 for B500-B1600 contactor coil assembly
suitable for 110-125VAC/DC supply.
For B1250 and B1600 only 110...125 and 220...240VAC voltages are available.
When replacing the coil, retrieve the dampers (1 pair for B115...B180 and 2
pairs for B250...B1600) and the fixed core and refit them with the new coil.
2-30
Contactors
Spare parts for B series contactors
Main contacts Order code For contactor Qty Wt Special versions

for BF contactors per For non standard spare contact configurations, contact
pkg Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
n° [kg]
Main contacts.
NOTE: For B1250 and B1600 contactor spares, consult
Customer Service for information; see contact details on
2
3 or 4 pole set complete with screws. inside front cover.
BFX99 026T BF26 1 0.038
BFX99 026F BF26 T4 1 0.051
BFX99... BFX99 032T BF32 1 0.070
BFX99 038T BF38 1 0.070
BFX99 038F BF38 T4 1 0.093
BFX99 040T BF40 1 0.095
BFX99 040F BF40T4 1 0.095
BFX99 050T BF50 1 0.095
BFX99 050F BF50 T4 1 0.095
BFX99 065T BF65 1 0.095
11 G274... - 11 G275... - 11 G276... 11 BFX99 065F BF65 T4 1 0.127
G475 - 11 G476 BFX99 080T BF80 1 0.100
BFX99 080F BF82 T4 1 0.130
11 G475 BF95 1 0.111
11 G476 BF110 1 0.111
Main contacts and arc Order code For contactor Qty Wt

chutes for B contactors per
pkg
n° [kg]
Main contacts.
3 or 4 pole set complete with Allen screws and key for
contact replacement.
11 G380 B115 1 0.440
11 G380 4 B115 4 1 0.580
11 G381 B145 1 0.440
11 G381 4 B145 4 1 0.580
11 G382 B180 1 0.440
11 G382 4 B180 4 1 0.580
11 G383 B250 1 0.770
11 G383 4 B250 4 1 1.030
11 G385 B310 1 0.770
11 G380... - 11 G381... - 11 G382...
11 G383... - 11 G384... - 11 G385... 11 G385 4 B310 4 1 1.030
11 G525... - 11 G526... - 11 G537... 11 G384 B400 1 0.770
11 G384 4 B400 4 1 1.030
11 G525 B500 1 2.520
11 G525 4 B500 4 1 3.360
11 G526 B630 1 2.660
11 G526 4 B630 4 1 3.550
11 G537 B630 1000 1 2.660
11 G537 4 B630 1000 4 1 3.550
11 G538 B1250 24 1 5.040
11 G538 4 B1250 4 24 1 6.720
11 G539 B1600 24 1 5.320
11 G539 4 B1600 4 24 1 7.100
Arc chutes.
11 BA1588 B115-B145-B180 1 0.755
11 BA1589 B115 4-B145 4-B180 4 1 1.000
11 BA1713 B250-B310-B400 1 1.210
11 BA1714 B250 4-B310 4-B400 4 1 1.600
11 BA1838 B500-B630-B630 1000 1 1.910
11 BA1839 B500 4-B630 4- 1 2.490
Arc chute B630 1000 4
2-31
Contactors
BG... MINI-CONTACTORS WITH AC OR DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE

BG... BG... with screw terminals and RF...9 thermal overload relay
44 4.4
”)
44
(0 4
.16
”)
(1.73”)
(0 4
(0.17”) 57
.16
4.4 (1.73”)
57
2 (0.17”) (2.24”)
(2.24”)
(1.97”)
(2.28”)
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
50
58
58
50
(3.71”)
94.2
8.5 34.9 3.2
9.7 34.9 (1.37”)
(0.33”) (0.38”) (1.37”) (0.12”) RF...9
8.5
(0.33”) 7.6
8.5 44 89.2 (0.30”)
(0.33”) (1.73”) (3.51”)
BGP... BGF...
with rear PCB solder pins with Faston terminals
44 4.4 4.4 44
”)
(0 Ø4
(1.73”) (0.17”) (0.17”) (1.73”)
.16
4.4 4.4
(0.17”) (0.17”)
Ø1.4 (0.06”)
58 (2.28”)
(2.09”)
(1.97”)
(1.97”)
(2.28”)
53
50
50
58
8.5 9.7 57
(0.33”) (0.38”) (2.24”) 8.5 9.7 34.9 57
8.5 5.6 (0.33”) (0.38”) (1.37”) (2.24”)
(0.33”) (0.22”) 8.5
(0.33”)
8.5
(0.33”) 8.5
(0.33”)
Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm.
BF... CONTACTORS WITH AC SUPPLY VOLTAGE

BF00 A... BF09 A... - BF12 A... - BF18 A... - BF25 A... three poles with
RF...38 thermal overload relay BF09T... A... - BF12T... A... - BF18T... A... four poles
45 45
(1.77”) (1.77”)
6.2 10.9 80.7 6.2 10.9 80.7
(0 4.2
(0 4.2
”)
”)
(0.24”) (3.18”) (0.24”)
.17
.17
(0.43”) (0.43”) (3.18”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
71
81
(4.96”)
126
35 35
(1.38”) (1.38”)
RF...38
7.9 81.2
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.20”)
(0.57”)
BF26 00A... - BF32 00A... - BF38 00A... three poles with RF...38 thermal overload relay BF26 T...A... - BF38 T...A... four poles
45 61
(1.77”) (2.40”)
7.9 14.6 90 14.6 90
(0 4.2
(0 4.2
”)
”)
(0.31”) (3.54”) 7.9 (0.57”) (3.54”)

.17
.17
(0.57”)
(0.31”)
(3.54”)
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
(3.15”)
90
80
90
80
(5.31”)
134.8
35 35
(1.38”) 15.9 (1.38”)
RF...38 (0.62”)
7.9 81.5
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.21”)
(0.57”)
BF40 00A... - BF50 00A... - BF65 00A... - BF80 00A... BF40 T...A... - BF50 T...A... - BF65 T...A... - BF80 T...A... - BFD80 T4... four poles
three poles with RF82 thermal overload relay
55 (2.16”)
9 18.5 18 9 45 (1.77”) .5 ) 114.6 (4.51”)
45 (1.77”) .5 ) 114.5 (4.51”) (0.71”) (0.35”) Ø4 .18”
(0.35”) (0.73”)
Ø4 .18” (0
(0
110 (4.33”)
125 (4.92”)
136 (5.35”)
110 (4.33”)
125 (4.92”)
136 (5.35”)
194 (7.64”)
BF80T2 82mm/3.23”
2-32
Contactors
BF95 00... - BF110 00... three poles with RF...95 3 thermal relay
75 (2.95”)
14 23.5
113.5 (4.47”)
”)
(0.55”) (0.92”)
(0 6
.24
2
124 (4.88”)
112 (4.41”)
182 (7.16”)
55 (2.16”)
RF...95 3
24.6 16.5 111 (4.37”)

(0.97”) (0.65”)
BF...CONTACTORS WITH DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE Control relays

BF09... - BF12... - BF18... - BF25...D and L BF00...D and BF00...L
three poles with RF...38 thermal overload relay BF09 T... - BF18 T... D and L four poles
45
(1.77”) 45
6.2 10.9 98.5 (1.77”)
(0 4.2
”)
(0.24”)
.17
(0.43”) (3.88”) 10.9 98.5
(0 Ø4.2
(0.43”)
”)
6.2 (3.88”)
.17
(0.24”)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
71
81
(4.96”)
126
35
(1.38”) 35
RF...38 (1.38”)
7.9 81.2
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.20”)
(0.57”)
BF26... - BF32... - BF38... D and L three poles with RF...38 thermal overload relay BF26 T... - BF38 T... D and L four poles
45
(1.77”)
7.9 14.6 90
(0 4.2
”)
(0.31”) (3.54”)
.17
(0.57”)
(3.54”)
(3.15”)
90
80
(5.31”)
134.8
35
(1.38”)
RF...38
7.9 81.5
(0.31”) 14.6 (3.21”)
(0.57”)
BF40 00E... - BF50 00E... - BF65 00E... - BF80 00E... BF65 T4 E... - BF80 T4 E... four poles
three poles with RF82 thermal overload relay
55 (2.16”) 73 (2.87”)
9 18.5 18 9 45 (1.77”) .5 ) 114.6 (4.51”)
45 (1.77”) 114.5 (4.51”)
(0.35”) (0.73”) .5 ) (0.71”) (0.35”) Ø4 .18”
Ø4 .18” (0
(0
110 (4.33”)
125 (4.92”)
136 (5.35”)
110 (4.33”)
125 (4.92”)
136 (5.35”)
194 (7.64”)
2-33
Contactors
BF95C 00... - BF110C 00... three poles with RF...95 3 thermal overload relay
75
(2.95”)
14 23.5 150.5
(0.55”)
”)
(0.92”) (5.92”)
(0 6
.24
2
(4.41”)
(4.88”)
112
124
(7.16”)
182
55
(2.16”)
RF...95 3
24.6 16.5 149.5

(0.97”) (0.65”) (5.88”)
B... CONTACTORS WITH AC OR DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE

B115 - B145 - B180 three poles with RF...200 thermal overload relay
120
(4.72”) 184
40 40 (7.24”)
(1.57”) (1.57”) 4
114
(0.16”)
B (4.49”)
A
(5.90”)
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(4.72”)
170
150
170
150
120
(0 Ø7.5
”)
(12.68”)
.29
322
90
M6 (3.54”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B
B115 M6 15 (0.59”)
B145 M8 20 (0.79”)
B180 M8 20 (0.79”)
M8 56.5
20
(0.79”) (2.22”)
166.1
40 40 (6.54”)
(1.57”) (1.57”)
127.5
(5.02”)
B115 4 - B145 4 - B180 4 four poles
160
(6.30”) 184
40 40 40 (7.24”)
(1.57”) 4
(1.57”) (1.57”) 114
(0.16”)
B (4.49”)
A
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(6.69”)
(5.90”)
(4.72”)
170
150
170
150
120
(0 Ø7.5
”)
.29
130
M6 (5.12”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B
B115 M6 15 (0.59”)
B145 M8 20 (0.79”)
B180 M8 20 (0.79”)
2-34
Contactors
B250 - B310 - B400 three poles with RF...420 thermal overload relay
145
(5.71”)
47.5 47.5
(1.87”) (1.87”) 225
25 (8.86”) 5
(0.98”)
M10X35 144
(5.67”)
(0.20”)
2
(7.09”)
(8.03”)
(7.05”)
(5.51”)
180
204
179
204
140
”)
.39
(0
(14.57”)
0
Ø1
370
M8 110
(4.33”)
25 56.8
M1 (2.24”)
(0.98”) 0
166.1
47.5 47.5 (6.54”)
(1.87”) (1.87”)
145
(5.71”)
B250 4 - B310 4 - B400 4 four poles

192.5
(7.58”)
47.5 47.5 47.5
(1.87”) (1.87”) (1.87”) 225
25 (8.86”) 5
M10X35 144
(0.98”) (0.20”)
(5.67”)
(7.05”)
(8.03”)
(8.03”)
(7.09”)
(5.51”)
179
204
204
180
140
)
9”
0.3
0(
Ø1
M8 157.5
(6.20”)
2-35
Contactors
B500 - B630 three poles
194
(7.64”)
263
65 65 (10.35”)
2 A
(2.56”)
B
(2.56”) 177.5
(6.99”)
6
(0.24”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
(9.05”)
230
170
270
230
C
”)
.47
(0
2
Ø1
150
M10 (5.90”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B C
B500 M10 35 (1.38”) 265 (10.43”)
B630 M12 40 (1.57”) 270 (10.63”)
B500 4 - B630 4 four poles
259
(10.20”)
65 65 65 263
(2.56”) (2.56”) (2.56”) (10.35”)
6
177.5
A B (0.24”)
(6.99”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
230
230
170
270
C
)
7”
.4
(0
2
Ø1
215
M10 (8.46”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A B C
B500 M10 35 (1.38”) 265 (10.43”)
B630 M12 40 (1.57”) 270 (10.63”)
2-36
Contactors
B630 1000 three poles
194
(7.64”)
263
65 65 (10.35”)
60
(2.36”)
(2.56”) (2.56”)
M12 207.6
(8.17”)
6
(0.24”) 2
147.2
(5.79”)
(18.74”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
230
476
270
230
170
)
7”
0.4
2(
Ø1
150
M10 (5.90”)
B630 1000 4 four poles
259
(10.20”) 263
65 65 65 (10.35”)
60 (2.56”) (2.56”) (2.56”) 6
(2.36”) M12 207.6 (0.24”)
(8.17”)
147.2
(5.79”)
(18.74”)
(10.63”)
(9.05”)
(6.69”)
(9.05”)
476
230
270
170
230
”)
.47
(0
2
Ø1
215
M10 (8.46”)
2-37
Contactors
B1250 - B1600 three poles

540
(21.16”)
500
80 (19.68”)
2 (3.15”)
40 130
288
(11.34”) 10
(1.57”) (5.12”) M12
(0.39”)
(14.17”)
(12.60”)
360
320
B1250 4 - B1600 four poles

670
(26.38”)
630
(24.80”)
80
(3.15”) 288
40 130 (11.34”)
(1.57”) M12 10
(5.12”) (0.39”)
(14.17”)
(12.60”)
360
320
B115 - B145 - B180 - B250 - B310 - B400 - B500 - B630 - B630 1000 - B1250 - B1600
10
(0.39”)
Minimum safety distance

from metal parts.
Minimum space needed to replace the coil.
B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500÷B630 1000

A A 120 (4.72”) 145 (5.71”) 170 (6.69”)
B 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 160 (6.30”)
B If dimension B is respected, coil replacement is

possible without removing power wiring.
2-38
Contactors
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
BFK09 10A - BFK12 10A - BFK18 10A BFK26 00A - BFK32 00A - BFK38 00A
10.9 116.6 14.6 125.5
7.9 (0.57”) (4.94”)
6.2
(0.24”)
(0.43”) (4.59”)
(0.31”)
2
(0 Ø4.2
(0 Ø4.2
”)
”)
.17
.17
(4.45”~)
(2.79”)
(3.19”)
(4.84”~)
113~
(3.15”)
(3.54”)
123~
71
81
80
90
35
(1.38”) 35
45 (1.38”)
(1.77”) 45
(1.77”)
BFK50 - BFK65 - BFK80 11 BF80K 00 - 11 BF110K 00
55 (2.16”) 150.5 (5.92”) 23.5

13.9 (0.92”) 148.3
45 1.77”) (0.55”) (5.84”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
.2 )
(0 Ø6
”)
.24
156 (6.14”)
110 (4.33”)
136 (5.35”)
(6.30”~)
160~
(4.41”)
(4.88”)
112
124
55
(2.16”)
75
(2.95”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BG MINI-CONTACTORS

BGX10... - BGXF10... BGX50 00 interlock with BGX10..., BGXF10... contacts BGX77..., BGX78... or BGX79...
auxiliary contacts and BGX77... or BGX78... or BGX79... suppressor suppressor only
88 44
(3.46”) (1.73”) 56 26
6 (2.20”) (1.02”)
44 82 88
(1.73”) (3.23”) (3.46”) (0.24”)
26 26
(1.02”)
(0.94”)
(2.28”)
(1.02”)
23.8
58
(1.18”)
(2.28”)
(1.18”)
(2.28”)
30
58
30
58
7.75
(0.30”) BGX77... - BGX78...
BGX50 00 BGX79...
BGX10... - BGX77...
Valid for BGX11... contacts as well when mounted BGX78... - BGX79...
on left-hand contactor of BGT or BGC assembly BGXF10...
(p. 4-4 and 5).
BGX80 00 shroud Paralleling links

G323, G324 G325, G326
(0.83”)
21
10 12
(0.47”)
(0.92”)
(0.39”) G323 G324 G325 G326

23.5
44 37 9 12
(1.73”) 59 10 37
(2.32”) (1.46”) 12 (1.46”) (0.35”) (0.47”)
(0.39”)
(0.47”)
15 16
(0.59”) (0.63”)
(2.28”)
(1.91”)
48.5
58
BGX80 00
2-39
Contactors
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BF CONTACTORS
Auxiliary contacts BFX10...

w/2 contacts BFX10... w/4 contacts BFX12...
2 21.4
(0.84”) 42.8
(1.68”)
10
29
(1.14”) 36.5
(1.44”)
(1.63”)
41.4
(1.63”)
41.4
G484... G418... G218
28.2 8 8
(1.11”) (0.31”) (0.31”)
36 28 27
(1.42”) (1.10”) (1.06”)
(1.85”)
(1.81”)
(1.60”)
46.9
40.6
46
G481..., G482 G280 with G218 G419, with G418..., G428..., G483 with G481... or G482
8 9.5 9.5
(0.31”) (0.37”) 52.5 57
(2.07”) (0.37”) (2.24”)
10.3 12.3
36 (0.40”)
(1.42”) (0.48”)
(1.74”)
(1.69”)
(2.01”)
44.2
43
51
G485..., G486..., G487 delayed contacts Fourth pole
BFX42 BFXD42
16 16
(0.63”) 84.8 (0.63”) 104
28
(3.34”) (4.09”)
(1.10”)
45.7
(1.80”)
(1.76”)
44.7
(3.54”)
(3.54”)
90
90
15.9 15.9
(0.62”) (0.62”)
BFX43
73 (2.87”)
18 9 114.6 (4.51”)
(0.71”) (0.35”)
136 (5.35”)
125 (4.92”)
Interlocks
BFX50 00, BFX50 01..., BFX53 00, BFX53 01 BFX50 02 BFX50 03
10 90 (3.54”) 15
(0.39”) (0.59”)
31.9
(1.15”)
(1.61”)
41
BFX50 02 BFX50 02
2-40
Contactors
Interlock Surge suppressors

G269 2 G318, G319 225, G322
15 8
(0.59”) (0.31”)
2
31.9 23
(1.15”) (0.90”)
(1.61”)
(1.61”)
41
41
G222, G272 latch G454, G455 manual closing BFX80 sealing cover
45 35
(1.77”)
20 45
(1.77”) 4.5
29.1 (0.18”)
(1.14”) 32.1
(1.57”)
38.7
40
(1.54”)
39.2
Rigid connecting kit Rigid connecting kit
BFX31 01 BFX32 01
(0 4.2
(0 4.2
”)
”)
90 90 100 90
.16
.16
Ø
Ø
(3.54”) (3.54”) (3.94”) (3.54”)
80 (3.15”)
92 (3.62”)
83 (3.27”)
71 (2.79”)
35 35
BFX31 01 (1.38”) BFX32 01
(1.38”)
G231 terminal
1-pole G232 - 1 pole G271, G288 - 3 and 4-poles
66.5❸ 49
33.5 34.5 (2.62”) (1.93”)
10 (1.32”) 12 (1.36”)
(0.98”)
(1.14”)
24.8
(0.39”) (0.47”)
28.9
(0.63”)
(0.67”)
13.6 (0.53”)
16
17
16.5 (0.65”)
11.3
(0.44”)
90mm for G288 add-on block
G285 auxiliary terminal BFX89 01 fixing base BFX89 02

(0.67”)
17.1
25 10 9.7
11.5 (0.98”) 45 Ø4.3 (0.39”) (0.38”)
(0.83”)
(0.45”) (1.77”) 14.5 (0.17”)

21
(0.57”)
Ø4.3
(0.83”)
16 (0.63”)
(0.17”)
21
31.8
(2.95”)
(1.77”)
(3.38”)
(1.25”)
75
45
86
11.6
(0.46”)
Ø4.3
(0.17”)
35
(1.38”) Ø3.5
(0.14”)
2-41
Contactors
ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH B CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts G350, G354 G358 adapter
14.5
111.5
(0.57”)
(4.39”)
2
(2.38”)
60.6
30
(1.18”)
G355 interlocks G356...

15 29.8
(0.59”) (1.17”)
Terminal protection G360, G361
❶
31.9 102 50
(1.25”) (4.01”) (1.97”)
(2.68”)
68
For dimensions, refer to page 2-68.
Terminal protection
G363 G527, G529
35.2 127.5 56.5 185
(1.38”) (5.02”) (2.22”) 167 83
(7.28”) (6.57”) (3.27”)
(4.61”)
(3.81”)
117
96.7
2-42
Contactors
G528, G530
250 167 83
(9.84”) (6.57”) (3.27”)
2
(4.61”)
117
BA1594, BA1720 parallel 2-pole bar G495 mechanical latch
B 5
(0.20”)
D
C
A
E1 E2
85
PARALLEL POLE BAR A B C D (3.35”)
CONTACTOR TYPE A
BA1594 45 (1.77”) 32 (1.26”) Ø14 (0.55”) 16 (0.63”) B115 - B145 - B180 221 (8.70”)
BA1720 53 (2.09”) 50 (1.97”) Ø18 (0.71”) 20 (0.79”) B250 - B400 255 (8.86”)
B500 - B630 300 (11.81”)
BA1845
80 (3.15”)
40
(1.57”) Ø13 (0.51”) 10
(0.39”)
(0.79”)
20
(2.56”)
65
2-43
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC
BG06 A - BG09 A - BGF09 A - BGP09 A - BG12 A BF26 A - BF32 A - BF38 A B1250 24 - B1600 24...
BF09 A - BF12 A - BF18 A - BF25 A BF40 A - BF50 A - BF65 A
...10 ...01 BF80 A - BF95 - BF110
BF115...B630
2 A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5 13 A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5 21 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 The input electronic circuit
of the contactor coil is
A1 1 3 5 A1 designed and tested
according to IEEEC 62.41
standards and can
withstand a 10kV impulse
voltage (1.2/50μs) with 50
Joule energy.
A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22 The use of an auxiliary
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 A2 2 4 6 A2 reduced voltage transformer
T1 T2 T3 is recommended for higher
T1 T2 T3 values.
THREE-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC (AC/DC for BF40E...BF80E)

BG06 D - BG09 D - BGF09 D - BGP09 D - BG12 D BF09 D - BF12 D - BF18 D - BF25 D
BG06 L - BG09 L - BGF09 L - BGP09 L - BG12 L BF09 L - BF12 L - BF18 L - BF25 L
...10 ...01 ...10 ...01
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 21
A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
BF26 D - BF32 D - BF38 D BF40 E - BF50 E - BF65 E

BF26 L - BF32 L - BF38 L BF80 E BF95C - BF110C
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A
BFK26 A - BFK32 A - BFK38 A - BFK50 - BFK65 - BFK80 - 11 BF80K - 11 BF110K
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
A1 13

14
A2
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
Auxiliary contact 13-14 is found on

BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A types only.
2-44
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC
BG09 T4 A - BGF09 T4 A - BGP09 T4 A B1250 4 - B1600 4
BF09 T4 A - BF38 T4 A
BF50 T4 A - BF65 T4 A - BF80 T4 A
BFD80 T4 A - BFD80 40
B115...B630 4 2
L1 L2 L3 L4
L1 L2 L3 L4
A1 1 3 5 7 A1
A2 2 4 6 8 A2
T1 T2 T3 T4
T1 T2 T3 T4
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC (AC/DC for BF40E...BF80E)

BG09 T4 D - BGF09 T4 D - BGP09 T4 D BF09 T4 D - BF38 T4 D BF65 T4 E - BF80 T4 E
BF09 T4 L - BF38 T4 L BFD80C 40
L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4
A1 1 3 5 7 A1 1 3 5 7 A1 1 3 5 7
A2 2 4 6 8 A2 2 4 6 8 A2 2 4 6 8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN AC WITH 2NO AND 2NC POLES WITH NC FOUR-POLES

BG09 T2 A BF09 T2 A - BF18 T2 A - BF26 T2 A - BF38 T2 A BF18 T0 A - BF26 T0 A
BF80 T2 A
1 R1 R3 3 R1 1 3 R3 R1 R3 R5 R7
A1 NO NC NC NO A1 NC NO NO NC A1 NC NC NC NC
A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 R2 2 4 R4 A2 R2 R4 R6 R8
FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS IN DC (AC/DC for BF80T2E) WITH 2NO AND 2NC POLES WITH NC FOUR-POLES
BG09 T2 D BF18 T2 D - BF26 T2 D - BF38 T2 D - BF80 T2 E BF80 T2 E BF18 T0 D - BF26 T0 D
BF18 T2 L - BF26 T2 L - BF38 T2 L BF18 T0 L
1 R1 R3 3 R1 1 3 R3 R1 R3 R5 R7 R1 R3 R5 R7
A1 NO NC NC NO A1 NC NO NO NC A1 NC NC NC NC A1 NC NC NC NC
A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 R2 2 4 R4 A2 R2 R4 R6 R8 A2 R2 R4 R6 R8
CONTROL RELAY IN AC
BG00 40 A - BGF00 40 A BG00 31 A - BGF00 31 A BG00 22 A - BGF00 22 A BF00 04 A
BF00 40 A BF00 31 A BF00 22 A
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1 11 21 31 41
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2 12 22 32 42
CONTROL RELAY IN DC
BG00 40 D - BGF00 40 D BG00 31 D - BGF00 31 D BG00 22 D - BGF00 22 D
BG00 40 L - BGF00 40 L BG00 31 L - BGF00 31 L BG00 22 L - BGF00 22 L
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44
BF00 40 D BF00 31 D BF00 22 D BF00 04 D

BF00 40 L BF00 31 L BF00 22 L BF00 04 L
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 21 31 43 A1 11 21 31 41
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 22 32 44 A2 12 22 32 42
2-45
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR BG MINI-CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts
BGX10 02 BGX10 11 BGX10 20 BGX10 04 BGX10 13 BGX10 22 BGX10 31 BGX10 40
BGXF10 02 BGXF10 11 BGXF10 20 BGXF10 04 BGXF10 13 BGXF10 22 BGXF10 31 BGXF10 40
2 51 61 53 61 53 63 51 61 71 81 53 61 71 81 53 63 71 81 53 63 73 81 53 63 73 83
52 62 54 62 54 64 52 62 72 82 54 62 72 82 54 64 72 82 54 64 74 82 54 64 74 84
Special auxiliary contacts Surge suppressor

BGX11 11 BGX11 22 BGX77... BGX78... BGX79...
51 63 51 61 73 83 ~ + ~
+
–
52 64 52 62 74 84 ~ -- ~
Rigid connections
SMX90 21 SMX90 22
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 11 A1 1 3 5 11
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 12 A2 2 4 6 12
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR BF CONTACTORS

Auxiliary contacts
BFX10 02 BFX10 11 BFX10 20 G484 30 G484 21 G484 12 G484 03
51 61 53 61 53 63 53 63 73 53 61 73 53 61 71 51 61 71
52 62 54 62 54 64 54 64 74 54 62 74 54 62 72 52 62 72
BFX10 04 BFX10 13 BFX10 22 BFX10 31 BFX10 40 BFX10 11 11

51 61 71 81 53 61 71 81 53 61 71 83 53 61 73 83 53 63 73 83 53 61 75 87
52 62 72 82 54 62 72 82 54 62 72 84 54 62 74 84 54 64 74 84 54 62 76 88
Auxiliary contact
G218
02 04 04 02
03
94 01
92 01
92 03
94
91 93 93 91
93 91 91 93
92
01 94
03 94
03 92
01
04 02 02 04
The termination of the G218 auxiliary contact has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting positions.
See the numbering in boldface for a correct interpretation.
2-46
Contactors
Wiring diagrams
Auxiliary contacts
BFX12 02 BFX12 11 BFX12 20 G418 10 G418 10A G418 01 G418 01D
G428 10 G428 10A G428 01 G428 01D
252 262 154 162 154 164 04 08 02 02
281 271 183 171 183 173 93 97 91 91

2
282 272 184

153 172
161 184
153 174
163 94
03 98
07 92
01 96
05
251 261
Mechanical latch
G481 20 G481 11 G481 02 G482 G222... - G272...
NO NO NO NC NC NC
114 124 114 122 112 122 114 111
A1
93 03 93 01 91 01 94 91
A2
94 04 94 02 92 02 92 E1 E2
113 123 113 121 111 121 112
NO NO NO NC NC NC
The termination of the BFX12... / G418... / G481... / G482 auxiliary contacts has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting
positions. See the numbering in boldface when the block is mounted on the left side of the contactor.
4th pole Interlock Delayed auxiliary contacts Surge suppressor

BFX42 BFX50 01 G485... G486... - G487 G318... - BFX77... G319 225 G322... - BFX79...
BFXD42
~ + ~
L4
7 131 131 57 65 67 55
+
–
~ -- ~
8 132 132 58 66 68 56
T4
Rigid connecting kits

BFX31 01 - BFX31 02 - BFX32 01 BFX31 31 - BFX32 31 - BFX32 32
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5
A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6 A2 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR B CONTACTORS

auxiliary contacts Mechanical latch
G350 - G354 G495
G354 G350 G350 G354
A1
41
01 73
13 73
13
42
02 74
14 74
14
53
113 53
113 81
21
or
81
or
54 21
114 54
114 82
22
82
22
61 61 93 A2
E1 E2
121 121 33
62
122 62
122 94
34
03 04
34
94 122
62 122
62
33
93 121
61 121
61 91 92
22
82
22 114
82 54 114
21 54
or
81
or
21 113
81 53 113
53
14
74 14 02
74 42
13
73 13 01
73 41
G354 G350 G350 G354
2-47
Contactors
MOUNTING POSITION OF CONTACTORS

ON VERTICAL PLANE
The performances given in this catalogue have been established with contactors For BF series contactors, this inclination can reach ± 90°, that is with the terminals
mounted on a vertical plane with line terminals facing upwards and load terminals are facing towards left and right.
facing downwards. For BG mini-contactors:
2 All contactors can be mounted with a ± 30° inclination to the – Position A, with coil terminals A1-A2 facing downwards, is not recommended.
vertical axis of the contactor without any derating. – The position with coil terminals A1-A2 facing upwards is not recommended for
mini-contactors with NC contacts.
±30°
0 °
±3
A1
A2
Pos. A
ON VERTICAL PLANE WITH 30° INCLINATION

All contactors can be mounted on a plane which varies in respect to the vertical up This inclination is greater than the one prescribed by main naval registers.
to ± 30° angle.
On the average, a 5% increase of the minimum pick-up voltage in -30° position can
be noted.
ON HORIZONTAL PLANE (FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS)

Considerable performance variations can be noted. The variables which could influence the contactor performance, in addition to the
It is necessary to check the two possible mounting positions: two mounting positions, are:
– when the contactor is energised, the movable equipment moves upwards. – type of contactor
– when the contactor is energised, the movable equipment moves downwards. – type of control
In the first case, it is difficult to close the contactor while in the second, to open it. – contact configuration
– number and type of add-on blocks
– permissible tolerance of auxiliary voltage variation
– ambient temperature.
NOTE: Position B is not recommendable.
Our Customer Service (Tel. 035 4282422;

E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com) can provide further
information concerning operational performance of
contactors mounted on a horizontal plane.
DYNAMIC TYPE TESTS

Our contactors have sustained dynamic testing, with contactor mounting position
rotated ± 22.5° in respect to the three orthogonal axes.
2-48
Contactors
IEC UTILISATION CATEGORY AC3 UL/CSA DUTY FOR AC MOTOR SWITCHING

POLE CHARACTERISTICS MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Squirrel-cage induction motors; breaking at rated motor current. Three-phase AC induction motors; breaking at
rated motor current.
MAXIMUM IEC OPERATIONAL POWER at ambient temperature 55°C. UL/CSA RATINGS at ambient temperature 55°C
2
Contactor IEC operational IEC operational power Maximum horsepower ratings (60Hz)
type current Three phase
(Ue 440V) 220/230V 380/400V 415V 440V 500V 660/690V 1000V 200-208V 240V 480V 600V
[A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
BG06 6 1.5 2.2 2.4 2.5 3 3 -- 1½ 2 3 3
BG09 9 2.2 4.0 4.3 4.5 5 5 -- 2 3 5 5
BG12 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5 -- 3 3 7½ 10
BF09 9 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.5 -- 3 3 5 7½
BF12 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10 -- 5 5 7½ 10
BF18 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 -- 5 5 10 15
BF25 25 7.0 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 18 -- 7½ 7½ 15 15
BF26 26 7.3 13 14 14 15.6 18.5 -- 7½ 7½ 15 20
BF32 32 8.8 16 17 17 20 22 -- 10 10 20 25
BF38 38 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 -- 10 15 30 30
BF40 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 18 10 15 30 40
BF50 50 15 22 30 30 30 37 22 10 15 30 40
BF65 65 18.5 30 37 37 37 45 30 20 25 50 60
BF80 80 22 45 45 45 55 75 37 25 30 60 75
BF95 95 27.6 50 55 55 56 74 45 30 30 60 75
BF110 110 33 61 66 70 59 80 45 30 40 75 100
B115 110 33 61 66 70 80 100 63 30 40 75 100
B145 150 46 80 88 93 100 120 75 50 50 100 125
B180 185 57 100 108 115 123 144 103 60 75 150 150
B250 265 83 140 155 164 176 212 156 75 100 200 250
B310 320 100 170 188 200 213 256 180 100 125 250 300
B400 420 130 225 247 263 271 352 208 125 150 350 400
B500 520 156 290 306 328 367 416 312 150 200 400 450
B630 630 198 335 368 368 368 440 368 200 250 500 500
No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.
ELECTRICAL IEC LIFE FOR MOTOR CONTROL AC3 440V

Electrical life of contactors
BF110
B180
B115
B145
B250
B310
B400
B630
BF09
B500
BF18
BF25
BF26
BF50
BF65
BF12
BF38
BF40
BF32
BF80
BF95
10
3
MILLION CYCLES
BG 09
2
BG 6
12
BG
0
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
3
10
30
2
25
20
300
200
5
1000
95 100
400
520 600
420 500
[A]
40
6
12
18
50
80
630
26
32
65
38
310
250
110
150
185
2-49
Contactors
IEC DC UTILISATION CATEGORY

POLE CHARACTERISTICS
MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL CURRENT

2 IEC Voltage Contactor IEC Maximum current Ie [A] in categories:
Ue DC1 with L/R 1ms DC3 - DC5 with L/R 15ms
and poles in series and poles in series
Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
24V BG06 9 12 14 -- 6 7 9 --
BG09 12 15 16 16 7 8 10 10
BG12 12 15 16 -- 7 8 10 --
BF09 15 18 20 20 10 13 15 15
BF12 17 20 22 20 12 15 18 15
BF18 17 20 22 22 12 15 18 18
BF25 20 23 23 -- 15 18 22 --
BF26 25 28 28 28 18 20 25 30
BF32 30 32 32 -- 20 25 30 --
BF38 35 36 36 36 24 28 32 32
BF40 40 48 48 – 27 32 40 –
BF50 45 60 60 60 30 35 50 55
BF65 50 70 70 70 35 45 55 60
BF80 70 100 100 100 40 60 80 90
BF95 70 100 100 -- 40 60 80 --
BF110 70 100 100 -- 40 60 80 --
48V BG06 8 11 14 -- 5 7 9 --
BG09 10 14 16 16 6 8 10 10
BG12 10 14 16 -- 6 8 10 --
BF09 13 18 20 20 9 11 15 15
BF12 15 20 22 20 11 13 18 15
BF18 15 20 22 22 11 13 18 18
BF25 18 23 23 -- 13 18 22 --
BF26 21 28 28 28 15 20 25 30
BF32 26 32 32 -- 17 22 28 --
BF38 30 34 34 34 20 25 28 28
BF40 35 48 48 – 23 30 40 –
BF50 40 60 60 60 25 35 50 55
BF65 50 70 70 70 25 40 50 60
BF80 60 100 100 100 30 50 70 90
BF95 60 100 100 -- 30 55 75 --
BF110 60 100 100 -- 30 55 75 --
75V BG06 4 7 8 -- 2 4 5 --
BG09 4 9 10 10 2 5 6 6
BG12 4 9 10 -- 2 5 6 --
BF09 12 17 20 20 8 10 13 15
BF12 13 18 20 20 10 12 15 15
BF18 15 20 20 20 11 13 16 16
BF25 18 23 23 -- 13 16 18 --
BF26 18 25 25 25 13 18 20 25
BF32 22 28 32 -- 15 20 28 --
BF38 23 29 33 33 17 22 28 28
BF40 30 45 48 – 19 27 38 –
BF50 40 60 60 60 22 30 45 55
BF65 50 70 70 70 25 40 50 60
BF80 60 100 100 100 30 50 70 90
BF95 60 100 100 -- 30 50 70 --
BF110 60 100 100 -- 30 50 70 --
2-50
Contactors
IEC Voltage Contactor IEC Maximum current Ie [A] in categories: 2

Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
110V BG06 3 6 8 -- 1 3 4 --
BG09 3 8 10 10 1 4 5 5
BG12 3 8 10 -- 1 4 5 --
BF09 6 12 15 16 2 7 11 12
BF12 6 13 16 16 2 8 12 16
BF18 6 13 16 18 2 8 12 13
BF25 6 16 18 -- 2 10 15 --
BF26 6 22 24 24 2 13 18 20
BF32 8 25 27 -- 2.5 15 20 --
BF38 8 32 34 34 2.5 18 23 23
BF40 8 42 44 – 3 22 27 –
BF50 8 50 55 60 3 25 30 45
BF65 8 60 60 70 3 30 35 50
BF80 8 80 85 100 3 40 60 75
BF95 8 80 85 -- 3 40 60 --
BF110 8 80 85 -- 3 40 60 --
160V BG06 -- 4 6 -- -- 2 3 --
BG09 -- 4 8 8 -- 3 4 4
BG12 -- 4 8 -- -- 3 4 --
220V BG06 - - 1 - - - 0.5 -
BG09 - - 2 2 - - 0.8 0.8
BG12 - - 2 - - - 0.8 -
BF09 4 8 10 12 0.75 1.5 5 7
BF12 4 8 11 12 0.75 1.5 6 7
BF18 4 8 11 13 0.75 1.5 6 8
BF25 4 8 12 -- 0.75 1.5 8 --
BF26 5 12 14 14 0.75 1.5 10 15
BF32 5 14 16 -- 1 3 12 --
BF38 5 20 26 26 1 4 15 15
BF40 6 28 36 – 1 5 17 –
BF50 6 36 45 50 1 5 20 25
BF65 6 36 50 60 1 5 25 30
BF80 6 40 55 70 1 7 35 40
BF95 6 40 55 -- 1 7 35 --
BF110 6 40 55 -- 1 7 35 --
300V BF09 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 5
BF18 -- -- -- 11 -- -- -- 5
BF26 -- -- -- 16 -- -- -- 10
BF38 -- -- -- 25 -- -- -- 12
BF50 -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- 21
BF65 -- -- -- 60 -- -- -- 25
BF80 -- -- -- 70 -- -- -- 35
2-51
Contactors
IEC DC UTILISATION CATEGORY


2 IEC Voltage Contactor IEC Maximum current Ie [A] in categories:
Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
75V B115 160 160 160 160 140 140 140 140
B145 220 220 220 220 160 160 160 160
B180 260 260 260 260 180 180 180 180
B250 350 350 350 350 280 280 280 280
B310 375 375 375 375 310 310 310 310
B400 400 400 400 400 350 350 350 350
B500 650 650 650 650 550 550 550 550
B630 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
110V B115 100 130 130 130 70 100 120 120
B145 110 150 150 150 80 120 140 140
B180 120 170 170 170 90 140 160 160
B250 160 300 300 300 150 250 280 280
B310 195 350 350 350 170 290 310 310
B400 250 400 400 400 200 350 350 350
B500 320 550 600 600 320 550 550 550
B630 460 800 800 800 460 800 800 800
220V B115 -- 100 130 130 -- 80 100 120
B145 -- 130 150 150 -- 90 120 140
B180 -- 150 170 170 -- 100 140 160
B250 -- 250 300 300 -- 200 250 280
B310 -- 300 350 350 -- 230 290 310
B400 -- 350 400 400 -- 280 350 350
B500 -- 450 600 600 -- 450 550 550
B630 -- 700 800 800 -- 700 800 800
330V B115 -- -- 100 130 -- -- 80 120
B145 - - 130 150 -- -- 90 140
B180 -- -- 150 170 -- -- 100 160
B250 -- -- 250 300 -- -- 200 280
B310 -- -- 300 350 -- -- 230 310
B400 -- -- 350 400 -- -- 280 350
B500 -- -- 450 600 -- -- 450 550
B630 -- -- 700 750 -- -- 650 700
460V B115 -- -- -- 100 -- -- -- 80
B145 -- -- -- 130 -- -- -- 90
B180 -- -- -- 150 -- -- -- 100
B250 -- -- -- 250 -- -- -- 200
B310 -- -- -- 300 -- -- -- 230
B400 -- -- -- 350 -- -- -- 280
B500 -- -- -- 450 -- -- -- 450
B630 -- -- -- 700 -- -- -- 700
2-52
Contactors
IEC UTILISATION CATEGORIES DC1, DC3 AND DC5.

CHOICE CRITERIA POLES IN SERIES
The elements to be considered for the contactor choice are: It is important to use contactors with the indicated number of poles in series
-- Rated operational current Ie depending on operating voltage.
-- Rated operational voltage Ue The poles in series can be connected to one single polarity or divided between the 2
-- Utilisation category and L/R time constant two polarities of the circuit indifferently.
-- Eventual verification of electrical life. NOTE. For voltages lower than 30V, the diagrams given in figures 3 and 4 are not
recommendable since voltage drops can take place. In these cases, it is better to
OPERATING CONDITIONS use poles in parallel considering the notes given in the following section.
Indicated current is valid for:
-- Ambient temperature 55°C
-- Operating cycles: up to 120 cy/h with 60% on-load factor
up to 250 cy/h with 30% on-load factor.
Examples of poles in series:

1 POLE 2 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4
POLES IN PARALLEL
It is possible to increase the electrical life by placing poles in series when using The value can be obtained by multiplying the rated current of one pole by the K
voltages which require 1 or 2 poles in parallel. factor given below; e.g.: if one pole carries 10A, three poles in parallel can carry
Poles in parallel do not increase the maximum operational current given in the 10 x 2.2 = 22A.
previous pages; that is, if one pole has a maximum operational current in DC5 of 8A, Therefore, the operating current is the one indicated in the tables, multiplied by the
two poles in parallel, it will always be 8A. K factor given below which takes into consideration the unequal current division on
With poles in parallel, it is possible to increase the rated contact capacity (Ith) only if the various poles.
the contactor opens and closes in no-load conditions or when used as resistance 2 POLES in parallel K = 1.6
shunts. 3 POLES in parallel K = 2.2
In this case, the contact capacity can be increased. 4 POLES in parallel K = 2.8
Examples of poles in parallel:
1 POLE in series and 1 POLE in series and 1 POLE in series and 2 POLE in series and
2 POLES in parallel 3 POLES in parallel 4 POLES in parallel 2 POLES in parallel
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 8
MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL CURRENT OTHER CONDITIONS

See tables on pages 2-50 to 2-52. For different operating conditions or voltage not included among those indicated in
the tables, on pages 2-50 to 2-52, consult Customer Service (Tel. 035 4282422;
E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com).
2-53
Contactors
IEC SELECTION GUIDE FOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT SWITCHING

GENERAL INFORMATION Depending on the number and type of lamps, it is also important to bear in mind the
The elements which are to be considered for the contactor choice are: main discriminating characteristics given below for the contactor choice:
– Type of lamp – Incandescent lamps contactor making capacity
– Power factor (cos) – Lamps not corrected rated contactor current in AC1
2 – With or without power factor correction – Lamps corrected rated contactor current in AC3
– Value of current when switching on and in running conditions. The table below summarises the major characteristics depending on the more
commonly used type of lamps:
Type of lamps Switching on Switching off
Multiple of In cos Multiple of In cos
Incandescent 15 1 1 1
Mixed light 1.3 1 1 1
Fluorescent 1.15 - 1.3 0.2 1 0.3 - 0.5 (not corrected)
1 (corrected)
High-pressure mercury vapour 1.5 - 1.75 0.2 1 0.45 - 0.7 (not corrected)
High-pressure sodium vapour 1.3 - 1.5 0.2 1 0.3 - 0.5 (not corrected)
Low-pressure sodium vapour 1 0.2 - 0.5 1 0.2 - 0.5 (not corrected)
Metal halide 1.7 - 2.1 0.2 1 0.4 - 0.5 (not corrected)
LED 20...40 0.6...0.95 1 0.6...0.95
Lamp Lamp Rated Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps for each contactor pole
features power current capacity
BG06 BF09 BF80
BG09 BF12 BF26 BF40 BF95
[W] [A] [μF] BG12 BF18 BF25 BF32 BF38 BF50 BF65 BF110 B115 B145 B180
INCANDESCENT 50/60Hz 60 0.27 - 30 48 92 118 129 203 240 296 370 425 462
220...240V 100 0.45 - 18 28 55 71 77 122 144 177 222 255 277
200 0.91 - 8 14 27 35 38 60 71 87 109 126 137
300 1.4 - 5 9 17 22 25 39 46 57 71 82 89
500 2.3 - 3 5 10 13 15 23 28 34 43 50 54
1000 4.6 - 1 2 5 6 7 11 14 17 21 25 27
MIXED LIGHT 50/60Hz 100 0.45 - 20 33 57 77 88 122 144 177 244 311 377
220...240V 160 0.72 - 12 20 36 48 55 76 90 111 152 194 236
250 1.13 - 8 13 23 30 35 48 57 70 97 123 150
500 2.3 - 4 6 11 15 17 23 28 34 47 60 73
1000 4.6 - 1 3 5 7 8 11 14 17 23 30 36
ELECTRONIC BALLAST FLUORESCENT Single mounting 16 / 18 0.1 (6.8) 48 80 160 220 220 400 450 500 750 1050 1200
32 / 36 0.18 (6.8) 27 44 88 122 122 222 250 277 416 583 666
220...240V 50/60Hz (EVG) 50 / 58 0.27 (10) 17 29 59 82 82 148 166 185 277 388 444
Dual mounting 2x16 / 18 0.18 (10) 26 44 88 122 122 222 250 277 416 583 666
2x32 / 36 0.35 (10) 13 22 45 62 62 114 128 142 214 300 342
2x50 / 58 0.52 (22) 9 15 30 42 42 76 86 96 144 201 230
STANDARD FLUORESCENT Not corrected 15 0.35 - 25 42 74 100 114 157 185 228 314 400 485
220...240V 50/60Hz Single 20 0.37 - 24 40 70 94 108 148 175 216 297 378 459
mounting
40 0.44 - 20 34 59 79 90 125 147 181 250 318 386
65 0.7 - 12 21 37 50 57 78 92 114 157 200 242
115 1.5 - 6 10 17 23 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
140 1.5 - 6 10 17 23 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
Corrected 15 0.11 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 533 533 533
Single 20 0.16 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 533 533 533
mounting
40 0.24 4.5 24 40 62 94 94 200 200 200 458 500 520
65 0.4 7 15 25 40 50 57 125 128 128 275 300 312
115 0.7 18 6 10 15 23 23 50 50 50 133 133 133
140 0.7 18 6 10 15 23 23 50 50 50 133 133 133
DUO circuit 2 x 20 0.26 - 54 57 100 153 153 211 250 307 423 538 653
2 x 40 0.46 - 19 32 56 86 86 119 141 173 239 304 369
2 x 65 0.7 - 12 21 37 57 57 78 92 114 157 200 242
2 x 115 1.3 - 6 11 20 30 30 42 50 61 84 107 130
2 x 140 1.5 - 6 10 17 26 26 36 43 53 73 93 113
In = Rated lamp current.
For 220/240V circuits, either single-phase (between phase and neutral) or 2-wire (between phase and phase), the maximum number of lamps is as per the table.
For three-phase circuits with neutral 380/415V or 220/240V, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
For three-phase 380/415V circuits without neutral, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
Electrical life is 100,000 cycles up to 55°C.
Incorporated capacitor.
Total.
With reference to the AC side of the power supplies.
2-54
Contactors
Lamp Lamp Rated Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps for each contactor pole
features power current capacity
BG06 BF09 BF80
BG09 BF12 BF26 BF40 BF95
[W] [A] [μF]
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR Not corrected 50 0.61 -
BG12
10
BF18
16
BF25 BF32
26 36
BF38 BF50
44 65
BF65 BF110
73 82
B115
122
B145
172
B180
196
2
220/240V 50/60Hz 80 0.8 - 7 12 20 27 33 50 56 62 93 131 150
125 1.2 - 5 8 13 18 22 33 37 41 62 87 100
250 2.2 - 3 4 7 10 12 18 20 22 34 47 54
400 3.4 - 2 3 5 6 7 11 13 14 22 30 35
700 5.5 - 1 3 4 4 7 8 9 13 19 21
1000 8 - 1 2 2 3 5 5 6 9 13 15
Corrected 50 0.29 7 15 25 40 60 60 128 128 128 258 342 342
80 0.42 8 13 22 35 52 53 95 107 112 178 250 285
125 0.7 10 8 14 22 31 35 57 64 71 107 150 171
250 1.3 18 4 7 12 16 19 30 34 38 57 80 92
400 2.1 25 2 4 7 10 11 19 21 23 35 50 57
700 3.6 40 - 2 4 6 6 11 12 13 20 29 33
1000 5.3 60 - 1 3 4 4 7 8 9 14 19 22
380/415V 50/60Hz Not corrected 2000 8 - - 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 8 9
Corrected 2000 5.5 35 - 1 2 2 4 5 5 8 11 13
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR Not corrected 150 1.8 - 3 5 8 12 15 22 25 27 41 58 66
220/240V 50/60Hz 250 3 - 2 3 5 7 9 13 15 16 25 35 40
400 4.7 - 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 15 22 25
600 7.1 - - 1 2 3 3 5 6 6 10 15 16
1000 10.4 - - 1 2 2 3 4 4 7 10 11
Corrected 150 0.83 20 - 9 14 19 21 45 45 45 90 120 120
250 1.5 36 - 5 7 10 11 25 25 25 50 66 66
400 2.4 48 - 3 5 6 7 16 18 18 31 43 50
600 3.5 68 - 2 3 4 4 10 12 12 20 28 34
1000 6.3 120 - 1 1 2 2 6 7 7 11 16 19
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR Not corrected 35 1.5 - 4 6 10 14 18 26 30 33 50 70 80
220/240V 50/60Hz 55 1.5 - 4 6 10 14 18 26 30 33 50 70 80
90 2.4 - 3 4 6 9 11 16 18 20 31 43 50
135 3.1 - 2 3 5 7 8 12 14 16 24 33 38
150 3.2 - 2 3 5 6 8 12 14 15 23 32 37
180 3.3 - 2 3 4 6 8 12 13 15 22 31 36
Corrected 35 0.31 20 - 6 10 14 18 45 45 45 120 120 120
55 0.42 20 - 6 10 14 18 45 45 45 120 120 120
90 0.63 30 - 4 6 9 11 30 30 30 80 80 80
135 0.94 40 - 3 5 7 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
150 1 40 - 3 5 6 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
180 1.2 40 - 3 4 6 8 22 22 22 60 60 60
METAL HALIDE Not corrected 35 0.3 - - 28 50 66 80 100 150 167 250 330 400
220/240V 50/60Hz 70 0.5 - - 16 28 40 50 60 90 100 150 200 240
150 1 - - 8 14 20 25 30 45 50 75 100 120
250 3 - - 3 5 7 9 13 15 16 25 35 40
400 3.5 - - 2 4 6 7 11 12 14 21 30 34
1000 10 - - 1 1 2 2 4 4 5 7 10 12
2000 17 - - - 1 1 2 2 2 4 6 7
Corrected 35 0.17 6 - 33 60 65 65 200 240 260 400 420 440
70 0.28 12 - 20 36 40 40 120 145 155 240 255 265
150 0.6 20 - 9 17 18 18 56 68 74 112 118 120
250 1.5 32 - 5 7 8 10 26 28 28 46 50 53
400 2 35 - 4 5 6 7 20 22 25 35 37 40
1000 5.8 95 - 1 1 2 2 6 7 8 12 12 13
2000 11.5 148 - - - 1 1 3 3 4 6 6 6
380/415V 50/60Hz Not corrected 2000 10.3 - - - - 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 7
3500 18 - - - - - - 1 1 1 2 3 4
Corrected 2000 6.6 60 - - 1 1 1 3 3 4 6 7 7
3500 11.6 100 - - - - - 2 2 2 3 3 4
LED
220...240V 50/60Hz See note Each pole can carry 67% of the rated current AC3
For 220/240V circuits, either single-phase (between phase and neutral) or 2-wire (between phase and phase), the maximum number of lamps is as per the table.
For three-phase circuits with neutral 380/415V or 220/240V, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
For three-phase 380/415V circuits without neutral, the maximum number of lamps controlled by the same contactor is n • 3.
Electrical life is 100,000 cycles up to 55°C.
Usually, each light has its own power supply. If a power supply controls several lights, the number of power supplies must be factored into the calculation. The sum of the rated currents of the power supplies
connected to each pole of the contact must not exceed 67% of the rated current AC-3 of the contactor indicated on page 2-4.
e.g. BF18 has a rated current AC-3 of 18A; it can control 18x0.67=12.06A per pole at most.
2-55
Contactors
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

CHOICE CRITERIA AMBIENT OPERATING CONDITIONS
The contactor during the closing transition is influenced by electrical currents Ambient temperature: 50 °C.
having high frequencies and high amplitudes. For temperatures higher than 50°C up to 70 °C, stated maximum operational power
The frequencies of these currents range between 1 and 10kHz; the amplitudes must ratings are to be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference between the
2 have values lower than the maximum permissible current peak of the contactor to ambient temperature and 50°C.
be used. Operating cycle: 120 cy/h
Electrical life: 100,000 cycles.
Contactor IEC Maximum IEC Fuse IEC maximum operational power

rated permissible maximum at voltages:
current peak operational 220V
400V current voltage 230V 380V 415V 500V
gG 240V 400V 440V 660/690V
Type [A] [A] [V] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar]
BF09 A 12 500 690 16 4.5 7.5 9 10
BF12 A 18 550 690 25 7 12.5 12 14
BF18 A 23 1000 690 32 9 15 16 18
BF25 A 23 1000 690 32 9 15 16 18
BF26 A 30 1400 690 40 11 20 22 22
BF32 A 36 1700 690 50 14 25 27 30
BF38 A 43 1900 690 63 17 30 30 34
BF40 A 50 2500 1000 100 20 35 40 45
BF50 A 58 2500 1000 80 22 40 41 45
BF65 A 65 2500 1000 100 26 45 50 52
BF80 A 75 2500 1000 125 30 50 56 60
BF95 90 3000 1000 125 34 60 65 70
BF110 90 3000 1000 125 34 60 65 70
B115 130 3200 1000 200 50 87 93 115
B145 150 3400 1000 200 57 100 108 130
B180 170 3600 1000 250 65 112 122 150
B250 240 5100 1000 315 91 158 172 210
B310 265 5900 1000 315 105 184 200 245
B400 320 7500 1000 400 122 211 230 280
B500 500 9000 1000 630 190 330 360 430
B630 610 11000 1000 800 230 400 432 520
The use of contactors with the above operational powers is allowable only when the LIMITING INDUCTANCES
peak current, in the installation point of the power factor correction board, is lower The use of limiting inductances is imperative when the system inductances (line
than the values stated in the table. transformer and cables), upstream of the power factor correction panel, are not
If this condition is not verified, it is necessary to use limiting inductances or specific able to maintain the maximum connecting current within the limit value of the
contactors stated on page 2-14. Consult Customer Service (see contact details on contactor used.
inside front cover) to obtain detailed information on the correct use of contactors
without limiting inductances. FAST DISCHARGE RESISTANCES OF CAPACITORS
The use of the contactor, according to the wiring diagram given, allows the fast
discharge of the capacitors as well as the instantaneous disconnection of the
capacitors from the mains when the coil is de-energised.
The resistances, indicated in the following table, guarantee the discharge within a
maximum time of 2 seconds.
L1 L2 L3
FU1
R
0
1
1 3 5 .1 .1
KM1
2 4 6 .2 .2
U V W
Capacitor power Voltage 220-230V Voltage 380-500V

[kvar] [] [W] [] [W]
2.5-5 3900 12 8200 12
10-15 1800 25 4300 25
20-50 1000 50 2200 50
2-56
Contactors
SPECIAL CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS The BFK version, figure 1, is designed for three-phase switching. The peculiarity of
These contactors are equipped with early-make contacts. This special type of this type is in the contacts, suitable to connect limiting resistors, which close only
contact has the purpose of connecting for a very brief interval, 2-3ms, during the for the time needed to limit any in-rush current peak and then reopen to avoid
contactor closing, resistors which limit the connecting current of the capacitors. eventual flow of residual currents through the resistors.
These resistors are then excluded when the closing operation is complete and the 2
current capacity is conveyed to the main contacts. With this type of circuit, it is AMBIENT OPERATING CONDITIONS
possible to obtain minor wear of all the components of the system especially fuses Ambient temperature: 50 °C
and capacitors ensuring a longer life and better reliability. For ambient temperature higher than 50°C up to 70°C, maximum operational power
The contactors are particularly suitable for use in automatic power factor correction ratings, indicated in the table, are to be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference
panels since there is no need of limiting inductances and a source of heat has been between the ambient temperature and 50°C.
eliminated. In this way, these modular electric switchboards can be more compact. Operating cycles: 120 cy/h.
Electrical life: 400,000 cycles.
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
A1 13

Fig. 1
14
A2
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
Auxiliary contact 13-14 is found on

BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A types only.
Contactor Built-in IEC rated IEC fuse Maximum IEC power at 50°C (AC6b)
auxiliary operational current gG
contacts 440V 220V
NO 230V 380V 415V 500V
240V 400V 440V 690V
Type n° [A] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar]
BFK09 A 1 12 16 4.5 7.5 9 10
BFK12 A 1 18 25 7 12.5 14 16
BFK18 A 1 23 40 9 15 17 20
BFK26 A –– 30 40 11 20 22 25
BFK32 A –– 36 63 14 25 27.5 30
BFK38 A –– 43 63 17 30 33 36
BFK50 A –– 58 80 22 38 41 46
BFK65 A –– 65 100 26 45 50 56
BFK80 A –– 75 125 30 50 56 65
BF80K –– 90 125 34 60 65 70
BF110K –– 110 160 45 75 80 100
NOTE: See page 2-14 for order codes.
Consult Customer Service (Tel. 035 4282422; E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com) for the use of contactors to switch within delta connection.
The maximum thermal current Ith of the BF110K contactor is 125A
CHOICE OF CONTACTORS TYPE BFK/BF..K ACCORDING TO cULus LISTING

Contactor Built-in UL/CSA UL/CSA Maximum UL/CSA operational
auxiliary rated current protection fuse power at voltage:
contacts SC/gG
NO (SPST) 440V 240V 480V 600V
Type n° [A] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar]
BFK 09 1 12 16 4.5 9 10
BFK 12 1 18 25 7 14 16
BFK 18 1 23 40 9 17 20
BFK 26 –– 30 40 11 22 27.5
BFK 32 –– 36 63 14 27.5 32
BFK 38 –– 43 63 17 33 36
BFK50 A –– 58 80 22 41 46
BFK65 A –– 65 100 26 50 56
BFK80 A –– 75 125 30 60 65
BF80 K –– 90 125 34 65 70
BF110 K –– 110 160 40 80 100
NOTE: See page 2-14 for order codes.
Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) for information about the use of contactors to switch within delta/wye connection.
2-57
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACHERISTICS BG00 AND BF00

TYPE BG00 BF00 A BF00 D BF00 L
POLE CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
2 Poles n° 4
Conventional free air A 10
thermal current Ith (40°C)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Frequency limit Hz 25...400
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 AC A600
auxiliary contact designation DC Q600 P600
Terminals A 7.5 8.3
B 4 3.5
Screw M3 M3.5
B
A Phillips 2 2
Quick-connect Faston 1x6.35 - 2x2.8 ––
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 1.5...1.8
for contact terminals min-max lbft 0.59-0...74 1.03...1.33
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74
Phillips 2
Conductor section connectable
with 1 or 2 wires AWG stranded n° 18...12 16...10
min ... max Flexible mm2 0.75...2.5 1...6
w/o lug
Flexible c/w boot-lace mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 1...4
ferrule
Flexible c/w mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 1...4
spade lug
Terminal protection according to IEC/EN 60529 IP20
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40...+60 -50...+70
Storage temperature °C -55...+70 -60...+80
Operation position Normal On vertical plane
Allowable ±30°
Fixing Screw or on 35mm DIN rail
The built-in auxiliary contacts are high-conductivity
Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Consult Customer Service for information (Tel. 035 4282422; E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com).
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 0.75mm2 conductor section for BG00 or 1mm2 for BF00.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS BASED ON IEC/EN 60947-5-1 UTILIZATION CATEGORIES AND UL508/CSA C22.2 n°14
IEC/EN IEC/EN Conventional Rated operational current Ie [A] VA rating
designation utilization enclosed thermal at rated operational voltage Ue
category current Ithe
UL designation –– Thermal Maximum Amperes (AC) 60Hz Maximum
continuous VA
test current 120VAC 240VAC 380VAC 480VAC 600VAC
Alternating current [A] Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Direct current Maximum Amperes (DC) Make or Break
125VDC 250VDC 301VDC 400VDC 500VDC 600VDC 300V or less
P600 DC-13 5 1.1 0.55 0.2 0.31 0.27 0.2 138 138
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN.
Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-58
Contactors
TYPE BG00 BF00 A BF00 D BF00 L

AC CONTROL
Rated control voltage at 50/60Hz or 60Hz V 12...575 12...600 –– ––
Operating voltage limits 2
50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 75...115 80...110 –– ––
powered at drop-out % Us 20...55 20...55 –– ––
60Hz pick-up % Us 80...115 80...110 –– ––
drop-out % Us 20...55 20...55 –– ––
60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 75...115 80...110 –– ––
powered at drop-out % Us 20...55 20...55 –– ––
50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 30 75 –– ––
powered at holding VA 4 9 –– ––
60Hz in-rush VA 25 70 –– ––
holding VA 3 6.5 –– ––
60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 30 75 –– ––
powered at holding VA 4 9 –– ––
Dissipation at holding 20°C 50Hz W 0.95 2.5 –– ––
DC CONTROL
Rated control voltage V 6...250 -–– 6...415 6...415
Operating voltage limits pick-up % Us 75...115 –– 70...125 80...110
drop-out % Us 10...20 –– 10...40 10...40
Average consumption at 20°C (in-rush/holding) W 3.2 –– 5.4 2.4
OPERATING TIMES
Average time for Us AC closing NO ms 12...21 8...24 –– ––
control in opening NO ms 9...18 10...20 –– ––
closing NC ms 17...26 17...30 –– ––
opening NC ms 7...17 7...18 –– ––
DC closing NO ms 18...25 –– 54...66 75...91
opening NO ms 2...3 –– 14...17 15...19
closing NC ms 3...5 –– 24...30 24...30
opening NC ms 11...17 –– 47...57 67...81
LIFE
Mechanical AC control cycles 20 million
DC control cycles 20 million
MAXIMUM OPERATING RATE
Mechanical operations cycles/h 3600
2.3W for low-consumption BG00...L version.
NC closing time for BF00 04D is 23-29ms while NC opening time is 40-49 ms.
NC closing time for BF00 04L is 25-31ms while NC opening time is 56-68 ms.
2-59
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BG06, BG09 AND BG12

TYPE BG06 BG09 BG12
2 Power poles n° 3 3-4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 6 6
Operational frequency Hz 25...400 25...400 25...400
Operational Conventional free air A 16 20 20
current thermal Ith (40°C)
AC3 (440V 55°C) A 6 9 12
AC4 (400V) A 3.3 4.0 4.8
Short-time allowable current A 96 96 96
for 10s (IEC/EN 60947-1)
Maximum fuse size gG A 16 20 20
aM A 6 10 16
Making capacity (RMS value) A 92 92 120
Breaking capacity 440V A 72 72 96
at voltage 500V A 72 72 72
690V A 72 72 72
Consumption per m 10 10 10
pole and resistance Ith W 2.6 4 4
(average values)
AC3 W 0.36 0.81 1.44
Terminals A [mm] 7.5 7.5 7.5
B [mm] 4 4 4
B
screw M3 M3 M3
A
Phillips 2 2 2
Quick-connect Faston –– 1x6.35 - 2x2.8 ––
Solder –– PIN for PCB ––
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1 0.8...1 0.8...1
for pole and coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74
Phillips 2 2 2
with 1 or 2 wires min...max
AWG stranded N° 18...12
Flexible w/o mm2 0.75...2.5
lug
Flexible c/w mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5
boot-lace ferrule
Flexible c/w mm2 2x1.5 or 1x2.5
spade lug
Terminal protection to IEC/EN 60529 IP20
AUXILIARY CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
Type of contact n° 1-NO or NC based on configuration
Thermal current Ith A 10
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation AC A600
DC Q600
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -40...+60
Storage temperature °C -55...+70
Operating Normal On vertical plane
position Allowable ± 30°
Rated voltage Ui for BGP... types is 500V.
Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Consult Customer Service for information (Tel. 035 4282422; E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com).
Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 50,000 cycles.
Dimensions and drilling distances are given on page 2-32.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 0.75mm2 conductor section.
NO or NC auxiliary is highly conductive.
Other characteristics are the same as the mechanical characteristics of the poles.
2-60
Contactors
TYPE BG06 BG09 BG12

AC CONTROL
Rated voltage at 50/60Hz, 60Hz V 12...575
powered at drop-out % Us 20...55
60Hz pick-up % Us 80...115
60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 75...115
50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 30
powered at holding VA 4
60Hz in-rush VA 25
holding VA 3
60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 30
Dissipation at 20°C at 50Hz W 0.95
DC CONTROL
Rated control voltage V 6...250
Operating voltage limits pick-up % Us 75...115
Average consumption at 20°C (in rush-holding) W 3.2 3.2 3.2
OPERATING TIMES
Average time for Us closing NO ms 12...21 12...21 12...21
control in opening NO ms 9...18 9...18 9...18
AC
closing NC ms 17...26 17...26 17...26
opening NC ms 7...17 7...17 7...17
closing NO ms 18...25 18...25 18...25
opening NO ms 2...3 2...3 2...3
DC
closing NC ms 3...5 3...5 3...5
opening NC ms 11...17 11...17 11...17
LIFE
Mechanical AC control cycles 20 million
DC control cycles 20 million
Electrical (Ie at 400V AC3) cycles 500,000
Mechanical operations cy/h 3600
2.3W for low-consumption type BG09...L.
continuous VA
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN.
Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-61
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BF09-BF38

TYPE BF09 BF12 BF18 BF25 BF26 BF32 BF38
2 Power poles n° 3-4 3-4 3-4 3 3-4 3 3-4
Rated impulse withstand votage Uimp kV 6
Operational frequency Hz 25...400
Operational Conventional free air A 25 28 32 32 45 56 56(60)
AC3 (440V 55°C) A 9 12 18 25 26 32 38
AC4 (400V) A 4.9 7.9 8.5 10 11.5 13.5 15.5
Short-time allowable current for 10s
(IEC/EN 60947-1) A 110 110 130 160 200 320 320
Max fuse size gG A 25 32 32 50 50 63 63
aM A 10 12 20 25 32 32 40
Making capacity (RMS value) A 90 120 180 250 260 320 380
Breaking capacity 440V A 72 96 144 200 208 256 304
at voltage 500V A 72 96 120 184 184 240 240
690V A 71 94 94 102 168 192 192
Consumption and m 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0
resistance per pole Ith W 1.6 2.0 2.6 2.6 4.0 6.0 6.0
(average values)
AC3 W 0.2 0.4 0.8 1.6 1.4 2.0 2.9
Terminals Type Clamp-screw
A 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 13 13 13
B 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
Screw M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M4
B
A Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Tightening torque Nm 1.5...1.8 1,.5...1.8 1.5...1.8 1.5...1.8 2.5...3 2.5...3 2.5...3
for pole terminal min-max Ibft 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.1...1.5 1.8...2.2 1.8...2.2 1.8...2.2
Tightening torque Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74
Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
AWG stranded n° 16...10 16...10 16...10 16...10 14...6 14...6 14...6
Flexible w/o lug mm2 1...6 1...6 1...6 1...6 2.5...16 2.5...16 2.5...16
Flexible c/w insulated mm2 1...4 1...4 1...4 1...4 1...10 1...10 1...10
boot-lace ferrule
Flexible c/w insulated mm2 1...4 1...4 1...4 1...4 1...10 1...10 1...10
spade lug
Power terminal protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
according to IEC/EN 60529
AUXILIARY CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
Type of contact n° 1-NO or NC based on configuration ––
Thermal current Ith A 10 ––
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 AC A600 ––
designation DC Q600 ––
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 1mm2 conductor section.
IP20 protection on front.
For this other current value, use 16mm2 wire with spade cable terminal.
NO or NC auxiliary is highly conductive. Other characteristics are the same as the mechanical characteristics of the poles.
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT - Magnetic Motor Controllers per CSA certification File 54332 - Class 2411-03, to requirements of B44.1-04/SME A17.5-2004.
Contactors, three or four poles, open type, operating coil 600VAC or less, 380VDC or less.
Maximum horsepower ratings CSA
Type Single phase Three phase General
120V 240V 200-208V 240V 480V 600V use
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A]
BF12 /
1 2 11/2 3 3 71/2 71/2 28
BF25 11/2 3 5 71/2 15 15 32
BF38 3 5 10 10 20 20 55
2-62
Contactors
TYPE BF09 BF12 BF18 BF25 BF26 BF32 BF38

AC CONTROL
Rated voltage at 50/60Hz, 60Hz V 12...600
60Hz pick-up % Us 85...110
60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 80...110
50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 75
60Hz in-rush VA 70
holding VA 6.5
60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 75
powered at 60Hz holding VA 9
Dissipation at holding 20°C 50Hz W 2.5
DC CONTROL - normal and low consumption
Rated control voltage V 6...415
Operating limits
pick-up three-pole from % Us 70
BF...D to % Us 125
four-pole from %Us 70 80
BF...D to %Us 125 125
three and four from % Us 80
pole BF...L to % Us 110
drop-out for all from %Us 10
versions to %Us 40
Average coil consumption BF...D W 5.4
20°C (in rush-holding) BF...L W 2.4
OPERATING TIMES
Average time for AC closing NO ms 8...24 8...24
Us control in opening NO ms 10...20 5...15
closing NC ms 14...28 9...20
opening NC ms 7...18 9...17
DC closing NO ms 54...66 53...65
BF...D opening NO ms 14...17 14...18
types
closing NC ms 24...30 23...28
opening NC ms 47...57 46...56
DC closing NO ms 75...91 76...92
BF...L opening NO ms 15...19 16...20
types
closing NC ms 24...30 25...31
opening NC ms 67...81 63...77
LIFE
Mechanical AC control cycles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(million) DC control cycles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Electrical (Ie at 400VAC3) (million) cycles 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.4
NC closing time for BF...T0A types is 9-25ms while NC opening time is 9-15ms. NC closing time for BF...T0D types is 23-29ms while NC opening time is 40-49ms.
NC closing time for BF...T0A types is 11-29ms while NC opening time is 6-14ms. NC closing time for BF...T0L types is 25-31ms while NC opening time is 56-68ms.
continuous VA
A600 AC-15 10 60 6 30 3 19 1.9 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720
Q600 DC-13 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.15 0.13 0.1 69 69
Value at 301V is valid for UL/CSA up to 600VDC; the others are valid for IEC/EN. Voltage valid for UL/CSA only.
2-63
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS BF40...BF110...

TYPE BF40 BF50 BF65 BF80 BF95 BF110
2 Power poles N° 3 3-4 3-4 3-4 3 3
Rated insulation
voltage Ui V 1000
Rated impulse withstand
voltage Uimp kV 8
Operational frequency Hz 25 ... 400
Operational Conventional free air A 70 90 100 115 125 125
AC3 (440V 55°C) A 40 50 65 80 95 110
AC4 (400V) A 24 28 31 38 43 43
Short-time allowable
current for 10s A 390 390 390 480 760 880
(IEC/EN 60947-1)
Maximum gG A 100 100 125 160 160 160
fuse size aM A 50 50 80 80 100 125
Making capacity (RMS value) A 800 800 1090 1200 1200 1200
Breaking capacity 440V A 800 800 1090 1200 1200 1200
at voltage 500V A 660 660 830 1060 1050 1050
690V A 500 500 630 800 800 800
Consumption and m 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6
resistance per pole Ith W 3.9 8.0 9.7 7.9 9.4 9.4
(average values)
AC3 W 1.3 2.0 3.4 3.8 5.4 7.3
Terminals Type Double lug clamp terminal Lug clamp terminal
B
B
A
A
A [mm] 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 12.3 12.3

B [mm] 11 11 11 11 12 12
Screw M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
Metric Allen 4 4 4 4 4 4
Tightening torque Nm 4...5
for pole terminal min-max Ibft 2.95...3.69
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1
for coil terminals min-max lbft 0.59...0.74
Phillips 1
(1 conductor for AWG N° 18...2 14...2/0
BF80...110) Flexible w/o
lug mm2 1.5...35 1.5...35 1.5...35 1.5...35 6...50 6...50
Flexible c/w
lug mm2 1.5...35 1.5...35 1.5...35 1.5...35 6...50 6...50
Power terminal protection
according to IEC/EN 60529 IP20 front
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
As per IEC/EN 60947-1 designation. In addition to the main terminal which has dimensions as mentioned above, there is a second terminal entry 12.3x3.8mm for flexible busbars.
ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT - Magnetic Motor Controllers per CSA certification File 54332 - Class 2411-03, to requirements of B44.1-04/SME A17.5-2004.
Contactors, three or four poles, open type, operating coil 600VAC or less, 380VDC or less.
Maximum horsepower ratings CSA
Type Single phase Three phase General
120V 240V 200-208V 240V 480V 600V use
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A]
BF65 3 10 15 15 40 50 110
2-64
Contactors
TYPE BF40 BF50 BF65 BF80 BF95 BF110

AC CONTROL
Rated voltage at 50/60Hz, 60Hz V 12...600 (20...250 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 12...600
50/60Hz coil 50Hz pick-up % Us 80...110 80...110
powered at drop-out % Us 20...55 20...55
60Hz pick-up % Us 85...110 85...110
drop-out % Us 40...55 40...55
60Hz coil 60Hz pick-up % Us 80...110 80...110
powered at drop-out % Us 20...55 20...55
50/60Hz coil 50Hz in-rush VA 210 (60...125 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 220
powered at holding VA 15 (1.7...2.3 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 18
60Hz in-rush VA 195 (60...125 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 200
holding VA 13 (1.7...2.3 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 15
60Hz coil 60Hz in-rush VA 210 220
powered at holding VA 15 18
Dissipation at 20°C 50Hz W 5 (1.7...2.3 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 6
DC CONTROL
Rated voltage V 20...250 12...600
Operating voltage pick-up % Us 80...110 80...110
limits drop-up % Us 20...55 10...25
Average consumption 20°C W 60...125 / 1.7...2.3 15/15
(in rush-holding)
OPERATING TIMES
Average time closing NO ms 12...28 (75...105 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 13...28
for Us AC
opening NO ms 8...22 (40...70 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 6...19
control in
closing NO ms 40...65 (65...100 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 60...90
DC
opening NO ms 30...60 (40...80 electronically controlled AC/DC coil) 7...12
LIFE
Mechanical AC control cycles 15 15 15 15 15 15
(million) DC control cycles 15 15 15 15 15 15
Electrical (Ie at 400V in AC3) (million) cycles 1.5 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.2 0.8
For electronically controlled AC/DC coils 80% of Us min. and 110% of Us max.
For electronically controlled AC/DC coils 20% of Us min. and 55% of Us max.
2-65
Contactors
IEC OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS B115 - B1600...

TYPE B630
B115 B145 B180 B250 B310 B400 B500 B630 B1250 B1600
1000
2 Power poles n° 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
Rated impulse withstand votage Uimp kV 8
Operational frequency Hz 25-400
Operational Conventional free air
current thermal Ith (40°C) A 160 250 275 350 450 550 700 800 1000 1250 1600
AC3 (440V 55°C) A 110 150 185 265 320 420 520 630 – – –
AC4 (400V) A 47 57 65 92 110 133 175 210 – – –
Short-time allowable current for 10s
(IEC/EN 60947-1) A 1100 1300 1500 2200 2900 3600 4050 5040 5600 6500 8300
Maximum fuse size gG A 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1000 1250 1600
aM A 125 160 200 250 400 400 500 630 – – –
Making capacity (RMS value) A 1100 1500 1850 2750 3150 4200 5000 6300 6300 6300 6300
Breaking capacity 440V A 1300 1500 1850 2500 3000 4000 5000 6300 6300 6300 6300
at voltage 500V A 1100 1400 1600 2250 2700 3400 4500 5600 5600 5600 5600
690V A 880 1200 1480 2200 2520 3360 4000 5000 5000 5000 5000
1000V A 600 800 1000 1500 1700 2300 2700 3400 3400 3400 3400
Consumption and m 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.07 0.07
resistance per pole Ith W 7.7 14.5 20.3 24.5 40.5 52.0 68.6 90 140 110 180
(average values)
AC3 W 4.0 6.8 9.7 12.5 20 32 35.0 56 – – –
Terminals A mm 15 20 20 25 25 25 35 40 60 80 80
B
(0.6”) (0.8”) (0.8”) (1”) (1”) (1”) (1.4”) (1.6”) (2.4”) (3.1”) (3.1”)
B mm 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 10 10
A (0.16”) (0.16”) (0.16”) (0.2”) (0.2”) (0.2”) (0.23”) (0.23”) (0.23”) (0.39”) (0.39”)
Screw
+ hex
nut M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10 M12 2-M12 2-M12 2-M12
10 13 13 17 17 17 17 19 19 19 19
mm (0.39”) (0.51”) (0.51”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.75”) (0.75”) (0.75”) (0.75”)
Quick-connect (coil) Faston 1x6.35mm (0.25”) or 2x2.8mm (0.11”)
Coil with G371 Phillips 2 (Ø7mm/0.3in)
Pole tightening torque Nm 10 18 18 35 35 35 35 55 55 55 55
lbft 7.4 13.3 13.3 25.8 25.8 25.8 25.8 40.6 40.6 40.6 40.6
Coil tightening torque with G371 fitted Nm 1
lbft 0.74
Maximum conductor section mm 20x3 25x3 25x3 30x4 30x5 30x5 50x5 60x5 60x5 100x5 100x5
1 or 2 bars (0.2x0.12”) (1x0.12”) (1x0.12”) (1.2x0.16”) (1.2x0.2”) (1.2x0.2”) (2x0.2”) (2.4x0.2”) (2.4x0.2”) (4x0.2”) (4x0.2”)
N° 1 wire
with lug mm2 70 120 150 240 -- -- -- -- – – –
N° 2 wire
with lug mm2 -- -- -- -- 150 150 240 240 – – –
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -50...+70 -20...+60
Storage temperature °C -60...+80 -30...+80
Operating Normal Vertical
Fixing Screw
Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Consult Customer Service for information (Tel. 035 4282422; E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com).
Spanner/wrench size.
G371: Adapter to transform coil faston terminals into screw type.
2-66
Contactors
TYPE B630
B115 B145 B180 B250 B310 B400 B500 B630 B1250 B1600
1000
AC CONTROL
Supply voltage Either in AC/DC Only AC
2
Rated control voltage V 24...480 24...480 24...480 24...480 24...480 24...480 48...480 48...480 48...480 110/240 110/240
Operating pick-up % Us 80...110 80...110 80...110 80...110 80...110 80...110 80...110 80...110 80...110 80...110 80...110
voltage limits drop-out % Us 20...60 20...60 20...60 20...60 20...60 20...60 20...60 20...60 20...60 20...60 20...60
Consumption in-rush VA/W 300 300 300 300 300 300 400 400 400 800 800
at 20°C holding VA/W 10 10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 45 45
Dissipation at 20°C W 10 10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 40 40
OPERATING TIMES
Making ms 60...100 60...100 60...100 80...120 80...120 80...120 110...180 110...180 110...180 120...210 300...450
Breaking ms 25...60 25...60 25...60 30...75 30...75 30...75 60...100 60...100 60...110 70...130 70...130
Life
Mechanical (million) AC/DC cycles 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5
Electrical (million) (Ie at 400V in AC3) cycles 1.1 1.1 1 1 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 – – –
Mechanical operations cy/h 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
PARTICULAR CHARACTERISTICS
Indicator For contactor open or closed status
Safety feature Closing operations are prevented without arc chutes
CONTROL CIRCUIT UTILISATION CONTACTORS WITH MECHANICAL LATCH

The input electronic circuit of the contactor coil B115-B1600 is designed and tested Contactors B115-B630 type, can have mechanical latch included or can be
according to IEEEC 62.41 and can withstand a 10 kV impulse voltage (1.2/50μs) predisposed, to be completed with mechanical latch, see pages 2-4 and 2-6 (3-pole
with 50 Joule energy. version) or 2-8 and 2-10 (4-pole version).
For higher values, the use of an auxiliary step-down voltage transformer is Technical data of mechanical latch G495 type is stated on page 2-26.
recommended.
2-67
Contactors
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK BETWEEN CONTACTORS SIDE BY SIDE B115-B630

The G355 type in Fig. 1, can interlock contactors of the same size or of a different This interlock cannot be used with B1250 or B1600 contactor.
one (e.g.: B115 interlocked to B630). Consult Customer Service (see contact details on inside front cover) to interlock
B630 1000 three-pole contactors.
2 MECHANICAL INTERLOCK BETWEEN CONTACTORS ONE ON TOP OF THE OTHER
B115......B1600... (Fig. 1, 2 and 3)
It is G356... type, which is provided in six types to allow different fixing The tables below indicate the interaxis which can be obtained with the various
interaxis of contactors. interlock types; with terminal protections (INTERAXIS A) and without terminal
Contactors of the same size can be interlocked as well as different sizes. protection (INTERAXIS B ).
INTERAXIS A [mm] - For contactors with terminal protection (Fig. 1)
KM1 B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500-B630
KM2 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500
B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630
B180 B400 B180 B400 B180 B400
G356 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
G356 2 286...305 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
G356 3 305...345 330...345 --- 330...345 --- --- --- --- ---
G356 4 345...385 345...385 375...385 345...385 372...385 --- 375...385 --- ---
G356 5 390...425 390...425 390...425 390...425 390...425 420...425 390...425 420...425 ---
G356 6 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500
INTERAXIS B [mm] - For contactors without terminal protection (Fig. 2)

KM1 B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500-B630
KM2 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500
B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630
B180 B400 B180 B400 B180 B400
G356 1 225...265 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
G356 2 265...305 265...305 --- 265...305 265...305 --- --- --- ---
G356 3 305...345 305...345 305...345 305...345 305...345 305...345 305...345 305...345 ---
G356 4 345...385 345...385 345...385 345...385 345...385 345...385 345...385 345...385 345...385
G356 5 390...425 390...425 390...425 390...425 390...425 390...425 390...425 390...425 390...425
G356 6 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500 470...500
To interlock two contactors B630 1000, use type G356 6 only. Interaxis B is 470-500mm for B630 1000, B1250 or B1600.
To interlock two contactors B1250 or B1600, it is imperative to use two pieces of The B1250 or B1600 cannot be interlocked with the other types of the B series.
type G356 6 (fig. 3), one fixed on the left side and the other on the right.
KM1
KM1
B
G356 6 G356 6
B
G356...
A
G356...
B
KM2
KM2
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
2-68
Contactors
Horizontal interlock between contactors side by side B115 to B630 1000.

It is G355 type and can interlock both contactors of equal size and contactors of
different sizes (e.g. B115 can be interlocked with B630).
For contactor B630 1000 (three-pole), contact our Customer Service office.
This interlock cannot be applied to contactors B1250-B1600. 2
With mechanical interlock:
– horizontal G355 – vertical G356/...
B115-B630
B115-B180
B250-B400
B500-B630 1000
With mechanical interlock:

– horizontal G355 – vertical G356/...
B115-B630
B115-B180
B250-B400
B500-B630 1000
2-69
FOR BG SERIES MINI-CONTACTORS FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS FOR B SERIES CONTACTORS

• Type RF9, phase failure sensitive, • Type RF38, phase failure sensitive, • Type RF200 and RF420, phase failure
manual resetting manual or automatic resetting sensitive, manual or automatic resetting
• Type RFA9, phase failure sensitive, • Type RFN38, non phase failure sensitive, • Type RFN200 and RFN420, non phase
automatic resetting manual or automatic resetting failure sensitive, manual or automatic
• Type RFN9, non phase failure sensitive, • Type RF82 and RF95, phase failure sensitive, resetting.
manual resetting manual resetting
• Type RFNA9, non phase failure sensitive, • Type RFA82 and RFA95, phase failure
automatic resetting. sensitive, automatic resetting
• Type RFN82 and RFN95, non phase failure
sensitive, manual resetting
• Type RFNA82 and RFNA95, non phase failure
sensitive, automatic resetting.
Page 3-11
THERMISTOR PROTECTION RELAY

• 24VDC and 24 to 240VAC supply types.
RF38 features FRONT PROTECTION COVER OF CLEAR IDENTIFICATION OF THERMAL

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS OVERLOAD RELAY MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC
A sealable protection cover is RESETTING
available. When fitted on to the The RF38 thermal
relay front, it precludes all possible overload relay is supplied
adjuster tampering and involuntary configured for manual
activation of the “Reset” and resetting. Breaking the
“Stop” buttons of the thermal plate below the “Reset” button allows for the
overload relay. automatic
resetting configuration.
FIXING EASE OF THE THERMAL

OVERLOAD RELAY SEALABLE RELAY COVER
While the thermal overload A handy closing flap
relay is being linked to the feature excludes any
contactor, its auxiliary contact tampering of the thermal
fits on and connects to the coil overload relay adjuster.
terminal by rigid terminal.
Complete relay fixing is done in
a single operation, with no need
of other connections.
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS 3
Thermal overload relays for currents

between 0.09 and 420A
Phase failure sensitive and non
phase failure sensitive versions
Automatic and/or manual resetting
Independent or direct mounting on
contactor
Thermistor protection relay.
SEC. - PAGE
Thermal overload relays
For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................ 3 - 2
For BF series contactors .................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
For B series contactors ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 8
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 10
Electronic relay
Thermistor protection relay ............................................................................................................................................... 3 - 11
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 3 - 12
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 3 - 13
TYPE OF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

Type of contactor Phase failure/single phase sensitive Non phase failure / Pages
non single phase sensitive
P ROTECTION
Manual/hand Automatic Manual/hand Automatic
reset reset reset reset
BG06...BG12 RF9 RFA9 RFN9 RFNA9 3-2 and 3-3
BF09...BF38 RF38 RFN38 3-4...3-6
BF40...BF80 RF82 RFA82 RFN82 RFNA82 3-5 and 3-7
BF95...BF110 RF95 RFA95 RFN95 RFNA95 3-4...3-7
AND
B115...B180 RF200 RFN200

3-8 and 3-9
B250...B400 RF400 RFN400
M OTOR C ONTROL
For BF80 contactors ...A... and ...E... type.

Motor protection relays
for BG series mini-contactors
Phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
Three poles (three phase) [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BG06, BG09, BG12 mini-contactors.
11 RF9 015 0.09...0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.116
3 11 RF9 023 0.14...0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.116
11 RF9 033 0.2...0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.116
11 RF9 05 0.3...0.5 1 2 3 1 0.116
11 RF9 075 0.45...0.75 1 2 3 1 0.116 0.37
11 RF9...
11 RF9 1 0.6...1 2 4 3 5 0.116 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RF9 1V5 0.9...1.5 2 4 6 5 0.116 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RF9 2V3 1.4...2.3 4 6 10 5 0.116 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RF9 33 2...3.3 4 10 10 5 0.116 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RF9 5 3...5 6 16 15 5 0.116 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RF9 75 4.5...7.5 8 20 25 5 0.116 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RF9 10 6...10 10 32 30 5 0.116 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RF9 15 9...15 16 40 45 5 0.116 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
11 RFA9 015 0.09...0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.116
11 RFA9 023 0.14...0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.116
11 RFA9 033 0.2...0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.116
11 RFA9 05 0.3...0.5 1 2 3 1 0.116
11 RFA9 075 0.45...0.75 1 2 3 1 0.116 0.37
11 RFA9... 11 RFA9 1 0.6...1 2 4 3 1 0.116 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFA9 1V5 0.9...1.5 2 4 6 1 0.116 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFA9 2V3 1.4...2.3 4 6 10 1 0.116 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFA9 33 2...3.3 4 10 10 1 0.116 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFA9 5 3...5 6 16 15 1 0.116 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFA9 75 4.5...7.5 8 20 25 1 0.116 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFA9 10 6...10 10 32 30 1 0.116 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFA9 15 9...15 16 40 45 1 0.116 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
NOTE: Two-pole (single phase) versions are available on request. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
Add the letter “S” in the order code e.g. 11RF9015 is three pole; check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
11RFS9015 two pole. range.
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line consumption.
starting is considered.
NOTE: To facilitate connection between the auxiliary NC

contact of the RF...9 thermal relay and terminal A2 of the
contactor, insert the conductor into the appropriate conduit
as shown.
RF9...
RFA9...

c
U
L C E C
u S A C
Type s A C C
RF9... - RFA9...
Certified products.
cULus – UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601)
as Auxiliary Devices – Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open
type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical
short circuit rating; the trip current is 120% FLA.
CSA – CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary
Devices for use with magnetic contactors.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

3-2 page 3-10 page 2-32 and 3-12 page 3-13 pages 3-14 and 15
for BG series mini-contactors
Non phase failure / Order code Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt Three-phase IEC motor powers
non single phase sensitive range IEC UL per
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
MANUAL RESETTING.
11 RFN9 015 0.09...0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.123
11 RFN9 023 0.14...0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.123
3
11 RFN9 033 0.2...0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.123
11 RFN9 05 0.3...0.5 1 2 3 1 0.123
11 RFN9 075 0.45...0.75 1 2 3 1 0.123 0.37
11 RFN9...
11 RFN9 1 0.6...1 2 4 3 1 0.123 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFN9 1V5 0.9...1.5 2 4 6 1 0.123 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFN9 2V3 1.4...2.3 4 6 10 1 0.123 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFN9 33 2...3.3 4 10 10 1 0.123 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFN9 5 3...5 6 16 15 1 0.123 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFN9 75 4.5...7.5 8 20 25 1 0.123 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFN9 10 6...10 10 32 30 1 0.123 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFN9 15 9...15 16 40 45 1 0.123 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
11 RFNA9 015 0.09...0.15 0.25 –– –– 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 023 0.14...0.23 0.5 –– 1 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 033 0.2...0.33 0.5 1 1 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 05 0.3...0.5 1 2 3 1 0.123
11 RFNA9 075 0.45...0.75 1 2 3 1 0.123 0.37
11 RFNA9... 11 RFNA9 1 0.6...1 2 4 3 1 0.123 0.37 0.37 0.55
11 RFNA9 1V5 0.9...1.5 2 4 6 1 0.123 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.75
11 RFNA9 2V3 1.4...2.3 4 6 10 1 0.123 0.37 0.55-0.75 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1-1.5
11 RFNA9 33 2...3.3 4 10 10 1 0.123 0.55 1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5 1.5 2.2
11 RFNA9 5 3...5 6 16 15 1 0.123 0.75-1.1 1.5 1.5-2.2 2.2 2.2 3-3.7
11 RFNA9 75 4.5...7.5 8 20 25 1 0.123 1.5 2.2-3 3-3.7 3-3.7 3-3.7 4
11 RFNA9 10 6...10 10 32 30 1 0.123 2.2 3.7-4 4 3.7-4 4-5.5 ––
11 RFNA9 15 9...15 16 40 45 1 0.123 3.2 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5 –– ––
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
across the line starting is considered. range.
No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
consumption.
NOTE: To facilitate connection between the auxiliary NC

contact of the RFN...9 thermal relay and terminal A2 of the
contactor, insert the conductor into the appropriate conduit
as shown.
RFN9...
RFNA9...

c
U
L C E C
u S A C
Type s A C C
RFN9... - RFNA9...
Certified products.
short circuit rating; the trip current is 120% FLA.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 3-10 page 2-32 and 3-12 page 3-13 page 3-14 and 15 3-3
for BF series contactors
aM gG pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF09...BF38 contactors.
Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base.
3 RF38 0016 0.1...0.16 0.25 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06
RF38 0025 0.16...0.25 0.5 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06 0.06 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.09-0.12
RF38 0040 0.25...0.4 0.5 1 3 1 0.160 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18
RF38 0063 0.4...0.63 1 2 3 1 0.160 0.09 0.12-0.18 0.12-0.18 0.18 0.18 0.25
RF38 0100 0.63...1 2 4 3 5 0.160 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.25-0.37 0.37-0.55
RF38 0160 1...1.6 2 4 6 5 0.160 0.18-0.25 0.37-0.55 0.37-0.55 0.55 0.55-0.75 0.75
RF38... RF38 0250 1.6...2.5 4 6 10 5 0.160 0.37 0.75 0.75 0.75-1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5
RF38 0400 2.5...4 4 6 15 5 0.160 0.55-0.75 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.1 1.5-2.2 2.2-3
RF38 0650 4...6.5 8 16 25 5 0.160 1.1-1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2-3 3 4
RF38 1000 6.3...10 10 20 40 5 0.160 1.5-2.2 3-4 4 4 4-5.5 5.5-7.5
RF38 1400 9...14 16 32 50 5 0.160 3 5.5 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5-7.5 11
RF38 1800 13...18 25 40 70 5 0.160 4 7.5 7.5-9 9 11 15
RF38 2300 17...23 25 50 90 5 0.160 5.5 11 9-11 11 11 18.5
RF38 2500 20...25 32 50 100 5 0.160 5.5 11 11 11 15 22
RF38 3200 24...32 40 63 120 1 0.160 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 30
RF38 3800 32...38 40 63 150 1 0.160 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 30
UL RK5 fuse class for RF38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types. No standard powers ratings exist; select relay according to current
consumption.
NOTE: Two pole (single phase) versions are available on request. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
Add the letter “S” in the order code e.g. RF381000 is three pole; RFS381000 two check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
pole. range.
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line Certifications and compliance
starting is considered.
Register of
c shipping
U L
L C E C R
u S A C O
Tipo s A C C S
RF38 –– ––
Certified products.
short circuit rating up to 82A FLA range and 10000 Amps RMS
for 95A and 110A FLA range; the trip current is 120% FLA.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

OVERLOAD RELAY
While the thermal overload relay is
being linked to the contactor, its
auxiliary contact fits on and
connects to the coil terminal by
rigid terminal.
Complete relay fixing is done in a
single operation, with no need of
other connections.

3-4 page 3-10 page 2-32, 2-33 and 3-12 page 3-13 pages 3-14 and 15
aM gG pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
MANUAL RESETTING.
Direct mounting on BF40...BF80 contactors (BF80 ...A...
and ...E... type).
Complete with G261 links.
Independent mounting with G270 base.
3
RF82 3300 20...33 40 63 110 1 0.365 7.5 11-15 11-15 15-18.5 15-18.5 22-25
RF82 4200 28...42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
RF82 5000 35...50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
RF82 6500 46...65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
RF82 RF82 8200 60...82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
MANUAL RESETTING.
11 RF95 3 82 60...82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RF95 3 95 70...95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RF95 3 110 90...110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
and ...E... type).
11 RF95 3... Independent mounting with G270 base.
RFA82 3300 20...33 40 63 110 1 0.365 7.5 11-15 11-15 15-18.5 15-18.5 22-25
RFA82 4200 28...42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
RFA82 5000 35...50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
RFA82 6500 46...65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
RFA82 8200 60...82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFA95 3 82 60...82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
RFA82 11 RFA95 3 95 70...95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFA95 3 110 90...110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
UL RK5 fuse class for RF38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
NOTE: Two pole (single phase) versions are available on request. range.
Add the letter “S” in the order code e.g. RF828200 is three pole; RFS828200 two
pole. Certifications and compliance
The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on
the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line Certifications obtained:
starting is considered. Register of
c shipping
U L
L C E C R
u S A C O
11 RFA95 3... Tipo s A C C S
RF82 –– ––
RFNA82 –– ––
RF95
RFA95 ––
Certified products.
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

OVERLOAD RELAY
rigid terminal.
other connections.

page 3-10 page 2-32, 2-33 and 3-12 page 3-13 pages 3-14 and 15 3-5
non single phase range IEC UL per
aM gG pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
sensitive [A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
Three poles (three phase) MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING.
Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base.
3 RFN38 0016 0.1...0.16 0.25 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06
RFN38 0025 0.16...0.25 0.5 –– 1 1 0.160 0.06 0.06 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.09-0.12
RFN38 0040 0.25...0.4 0.5 1 3 1 0.160 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18
RFN38 0063 0.4...0.63 1 2 3 1 0.160 0.09 0.12-0.18 0.12-0.18 0.18 0.18 0.25
RFN38 0100 0.63...1 2 4 3 1 0.160 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.25-0.37 0.37-0.55
RFN38 0160 1...1.6 2 4 6 1 0.160 0.18-0.25 0.37-0.55 0.37-0.55 0.55 0.55-0.75 0.75
RFN38...
RFN38 0250 1.6...2.5 4 6 10 1 0.160 0.37 0.75 0.75 0.75-1.1 1.1 1.1-1.5
RFN38 0400 2.5...4 4 6 15 1 0.160 0.55-0.75 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.1 1.5-2.2 2.2-3
RFN38 0650 4...6.5 8 16 25 1 0.160 1.1-1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2-3 3 4
RFN38 1000 6.3...10 10 20 40 1 0.160 1.5-2.2 3-4 4 4 4-5.5 5.5-7.5
RFN38 1400 9...14 16 32 50 1 0.160 3 5.5 5.5 5.5-7.5 5.5-7.5 11
RFN38 1800 13...18 25 40 70 1 0.160 4 7.5 7.5-9 9 11 15
RFN38 2300 17...23 25 50 90 1 0.160 5.5 11 9-11 11 11 18.5
RFN38 2500 20...25 32 50 100 1 0.160 5.5 11 11 11 15 22
RFN38 3200 24...32 40 63 125 1 0.160 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 30
RFN38 3800 32...38 40 63 150 1 0.160 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 22 30
UL RK5 fuse class for RFN38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types. No standard power ratings exist; select relay according to current
consumption.
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment
across the line starting is considered. range.

c
U
L C E C
u S A C
Type s A C C
RFN38 ––
Certified products.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

3-6 page 3-10 page 2-32, 2-33 and 3-13 page 3-13 pages 3-14 and 15
aM gG pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
MANUAL RESETTING.
and ...E... type).
3
RFN82 4200 28...42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
RFN82 5000 35...50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
RFN82 6500 46...65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
RFN82 8200 60...82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
RFN82 MANUAL RESETTING.
11 RFN95 3 82 60...82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFN95 3 95 70...95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFN95 3 110 90...110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
and ...E... type).
11 RFN95 3... RFNA82 4200 28...42 50 80 150 1 0.365 9-10 15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25 30-33
RFNA82 5000 35...50 50 100 175 1 0.365 10-11 22 25 25 30 37-40
RFNA82 6500 46...65 80 125 200 1 0.365 15-18.5 25-30 30-33 30-33 33-40 45-55
RFNA82 8200 60...82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFNA95 3 82 60...82 100 200 250 1 0.365 22 33-40 37-45 37-45 45-55 59-75
11 RFNA95 3 95 70...95 100 200 350 1 0.365 22-25 40-45 45-51 45-55 55-63 75-80
11 RFNA95 3 110 90...110 125 200 350 1 0.365 30 55 55 55 75 90
RFNA82 UL RK5 fuse class for RFN38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types. The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be range.
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct,
across the line starting is considered.
c
U
L C E C
u S A C
Type s A C C
RFN82 ––
RFNA82 ––
11 RFNA95 3...
RFN95
RFNA95
Certified products.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

OVERLOAD RELAY
rigid terminal.
other connections.

page 3-10 page 2-32, 2-33 and 3-13 page 3-13 page 3-14 and 15 3-7
for B series contactors
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
Independent screw fixing or direct mounting on contactors:
B115-B145-B180 using G372 links.
3 B250-B310-B400 using G373 links.
RF200 100 60...100 100 160 500 1 2.150 18.5-25 33-51 37-55 37-59 45-63 59-92
RF200 125 75...125 125 200 500 1 2.150 22-37 40-63 45-63 51-75 55-80 75-110
RF200 150 90...150 160 250 500 1 2.150 25-45 51-80 55-80 55-92 63-100 92-140
RF200 200 120...200 200 315 500 1 2.150 37-59 75-100 75-100 75-110 92-140 129-184
B145-B180 using G375 links
B250-B310-B400 using G376 links
RF420 250 150...250 250 400 800 1 2.460 45-75 92-132 92-147 100-150 110-162 140-220
RF420 300 180...300 315 500 800 1 2.460 55-92 100-162 110-162 129-184 129-198 180-280
RF420 420 250...420 500 630 800 1 2.460 75-110 129-198 147-220 150-220 180-280 250-368
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be NOTE: For 1000V powers, consult Customer Service for information;
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, see contact details on inside front cover.
RF200... - RF420... across the line starting is considered.
The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
range.
RELAYS FOR B500 AND B630 CONTACTORS

MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING. Certifications and compliance
B115-B400 Consult Customer Service for the relative order codes and Certifications obtained:
detailed information; see contact details on inside front cover. c
U
L E
u A
Type s C
RF200
RF420
Certified products.
G372 as Auxiliary Devices – Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open
G373
G375 type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical
G376 short circuit rating up to 150A FLA range, 10000 Amps RMS
for 200A up to 300A FLA range and 18000 Amps for the 420A;
the trip current is 120% FLA.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
RF200
RF420

3-8 page 3-10 pages 2-34, 35 and 3-12 page 3-13 pages 3-14 and 15
for B series contactors
aM gG K5 pkg 230V 400V 415V 440V 550V 690V
B250-B310-B400 using G373 links. 3
RFN200 100 60...100 100 160 500 1 2.150 18.5-25 33-51 37-55 37-59 45-63 59-92
RFN200 125 75...125 125 200 500 1 2.150 22-37 40-63 45-63 51-75 55-80 75-110
RFN200 150 90...150 160 250 500 1 2.150 25-45 51-80 55-80 55-92 63-100 92-140
RFN200 200 120...200 200 315 500 1 2.150 37-59 75-100 75-100 75-110 92-140 129-184
B145-B180 using G375 links.
RFN420 250 150...250 250 400 800 1 2.460 45-75 92-132 92-147 100-150 110-162 140-220
RFN420 300 180...300 315 500 800 1 2.460 55-92 100-162 110-162 129-184 129-198 180-280
RFN420 420 250...420 500 630 800 1 2.460 75-110 129-198 147-220 150-220 180-280 250-368
NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be NOTE: For 1000V powers, consult Customer Service for information;
selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, see contact details on inside front cover.
RFN200... - RFN420... across the line starting is considered.
The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always
range.
RELAYS FOR B500 AND B630 CONTACTORS.

MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING. Certifications and compliance
B115-B400 Consult Customer Service for the relative order codes and Certifications obtained:
detailed information; see contact details on inside front cover. c
U
L E
u A
Type s C
RFN200
RFN420
Certified products.
G372 as Auxiliary Devices – Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open
G373
G375 type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical
G376 short circuit rating up to 150A FLA range, 10000 Amps RMS
for 200A up to 300A FLA range and 18000 Amps for the 420A;
the trip current is 120% FLA.

UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
RFN200
RFN420

page 3-10 pages 2-34, 35 and 3-12 page 3-13 pages 3-14 and 15 3-9
Add-on blocks and accessories for thermal overload relays
Order code For relay Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per ELECTRICAL RESET G228
pkg Control circuit voltage
n° [kg] AC (50/60Hz) V 12...550
Set of links for direct contactor mounting. Power consumption in AC VA 300
11 G372 RF...200 on B115-B145-B180 1 0.250 Minimum reset time ms 20
11 G373 contactor B250-B310-B400 1 0.360 Terminals Faston 6.3x0.8
3 11 G375 RF...420 on B145-B180 1 0.313 NOTE: Coils can remain supplied for a maximum interval of
RFX38 02 11 G376 contactor B250-B310-B400 1 0.500 500ms; 3 consecutive operations are allowed, followed by a
5 minute interval. Reset only if at least 1min has passed
Protection cover for thermal overload relay-contactor assembly. from overload tripping.
RFX38 02 RF38 on contactor BF09- 10 0.014 It is recommended to use the wiring diagram on page 3-13.
BF12-BF18-BF25
RFX38 03 RF38 on contactor BF26- 10 0.014 INDEPENDENT MOUNTING
BF32-BF38 – Conductor cross section with one cable:
• 6...10mm2 / AWG 8 for RFX38 04
Protection shrouds for power terminals. • 35mm2 / AWG 2 for G270
11 G262 RF...95...3 10 0.003 – Tightening torque:
11 G361 RF...200 6 0.026 • 2...2.5Nm / 1.5...1.8lbft for RFX38 04
• 3.9Nm / 2.88lbft for G270.
11 G363 RF...420 6 0.046
RFX38 03 Independent mounting. Certifications and compliance
Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting. Certifications obtained:
RFX38 04 RF...38 5 0.082 c
U
11 G270 RF...82 - RF...95 10 0.148 L C E
Electrical reset. u S A
11 G228 RF...9 - RF...82 - RF...95 5 0.072 Tipo s A C
Sealing device. G361 ––
11 G262
RFX38 01 RF...38 - RF...200 - RF...420 10 0.002 G363 ––
11 G233 RF...9 - RF...82 - RF...95 1 0.006 G372 ––
Electric button NO. G373 ––
11 G244 RF...9 - RF...82 - RF...95 10 0.011 G375 ––
Marking element. G376 ––
11 RB6 RF...9 - RF...82 - RF...95 100 0.003 G270 ––
Set of 100 alphanumeric symbol. RFX38 04 ––
3958 RF...9 - RF...82 - RF...95 1 0.002 Certified products.
Front IP20 protection is warranted to contactor-thermal relay connections. cULus – UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601)
Independent mounting base for any RF95 relay. as Auxiliary Devices for thermal overload relays.
Remove the links fixed on RF...95 and use those supplied with the base. CSA – CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Kits for
Replace with voltage digit. industrial control equipment.
RFX38 04 Standard voltages are:
– AC 50/60Hz 24V / 48V / 110-125V / 220-240V / 380-415V.
Replace with the required alphanumeric symbol. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1,
Each package contains 100 pieces of the same symbol. UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Combinations G372
G373
G375
11 G228 11 G244 G376
G262
(for RF...95 3)
G270
G361
G363
RF...200
RF...420
RFX38 01
G233
RF...82
RFX38 04 RF...95
G228
RF...9 G244
3958...
RB6
RF...38
RFX38 01

3-10 page 3-12 page 3-13 pages 3-14 and 15
Add-on blocks and accessories for thermal overload relays.
Electronic relay and accessory
Protection cover for thermal overload relay-contactor assembly
BF26...BF38
BF09...BF25
RFX38 02
RFX38 03
RF...38
RF...38
Thermistor protection relay Order code Rated auxiliary Qty Wt. General characteristics
supply voltage per The DRPT is a thermal protection relay for motors
pkg equipped with thermistor PTC sensors immersed in the
[V] n° [kg] winding heads. The maximum number of thermistors to
be used is limited by the resistance of all the sensors
DC supply (version for 35mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715). connected in series; total ohmic value is not to exceed
31 DRPTC 24 24VDC 1 0.269 1.5kΩ at 25°C.
AC supply (version for 35mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715). The DRPT type has fail-safe operation: the protective
feature trips even in the case the PTC circuit is
31 DRPT 24 24VAC 1 0.269 disconnected or there is a lack of voltage.
31 DRPT 110 110VAC 1 0.269 Resetting is manual or automatic.
31 DRPT 220 220...240VAC 1 0.269
Accessories. – Supply circuit
Order code Description Qty Wt • Rated frequency: 50-60Hz for AC types only
per • Operational limits: 0.85...1.1 Us
31 DRPT... pkg • Maximum dissipation: 2.5W
n° [kg] • Connection: permanent
– Measuring circuit
31 CE106 Adapter for screw 10 0.008 • Type of connectable PTC sensor: According to
fixing of DRPT relay DIN 44081
on mounting plate. • Total PTC resistance at 25°C: ≤1.5kΩ
Galvanic isolation between supply and measuring circuits does not exist. • Tripping resistance: 2.7...3.1kΩ
• Resetting resistance: 1.5...1.8kΩ
• Voltage at PTC terminals: ≤ 2.5VDC
– Remote resetting
• Control: NC contact opening
• Contact voltage: 5VDC
• Current consumption: about 1mA
– Relay output
• Arrangement: 1 relay with 2 changeover contacts
• Rated operational voltage Ue: 250VAC
• Conventional free air thermal current Ith: 5A
• Designation to IEC/EN 60947-5-1: B300
• Mechanical life: 50x106 cycles
• Electrical life (with rated load): 2x105 cycles
– Indications
• Green LED indicator for power ON
• Red LED indicator for relay state TRIP
– Connections
• Conductor section 2x1.5mm2 with ferrule (max)
• Tightening torque: 0.8-1.2Nm
– Ambient conditions
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C
• Storage temperature: -30...+80°C
– Housing
• Snap on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
• For screw fixing, use CE106 adapter
• Degree of protection
– IP40 housing
– IP20 terminals.

Certifications obtained: EAC.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5.

page 3-12 page 3-13 3-11
ACCESSORIES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS

RFX38 04 base c/w RF...38 thermal relay G270 base c/w RF...82 and RF...95 thermal relay
45 88.4 55
(1.77”) (3.48”) 102
(2.16”)
34 (4.01”)
7.9 14.6 .2 83 9.7 16.5 .2
(0.31”) (0.57”) (1.34”) Ø4 16”) (3.27”) (0.38”) (0.65”) 43 Ø4 16”) 95.4
(0. (1.69”) (0. (3.75”)
(2.89”)
(2.77”)
73.5
(3.35”)
70.3
(3.11”)
85
79
7.9 14.6
(0.31”) (0.57”)
11 16.5
(0.43”) (0.65”)
THERMAL RELAYS WITH LINKS

RF...200 with G372 and G373
127.5 166.1
(5.02”) (6.54”)
40 40
23.8 (1.57”) 122
(0.94”) (1.57”)
(4.80”)
G372
G373
(1.52”)
38.6
.4
Ø5 21”)
(0.
(6.77”)
172
(2.91”)
(4.46”)
113.4
74
M8
20 56.5
(0.79”) (2.22”)
40 40
(1.57”) (1.57”)
RF...420 with G375 and G376

145 165.4
(5.71”) (6.51”)
25 47.5 47.5 153.3
(0.98”) (1.57”) (1.57”) (6.03”)
G375
G376
(1.76”)
44.8
.4
Ø5 21”)
(0.
(7.46”)
189.6
(4.77”)
(2.91”)
121.2
74
M1
25 0 56.8
(0.98”) (2.24”)
47.5 47.5
(1.57”) (1.57”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS RF...9, RF...82 and RF...95
G228... reset G244 button
19 10
13.3 (0.39”)
(0.75”) (0.52”)
(1.05”)
(1.41”)
26.7
(1.41”)
35.8
35.8

DRPT CE106 adapter
45 100 22.5 10
(1.77”) (3.94”) (0.88”) (0.39”)
(3.11”)
(3.70”)
(3.30”)
79
94
84
Ø4.5
(0.18”)
3-12
Wiring diagrams
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR BG MINI-CONTACTORS

RF9 - RFN9 RFA9 - RFNA9
RESET
TEST
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5
96 98 2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
96 98 2
T1
4
T2
6
T3
3
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR BF CONTACTORS
RF38 - RFN38 RF82 - RFN82 - RF95 - RFN95 RFA82 - RFNA82 - RFA95 - RFNA95
RESET
RESET
STOP
TEST
TEST
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5 95 97 1 3 5
96 98 2 4 6 96 98 2 4 6 96 98 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR B CONTACTORS

RF200 - RFN200
RF420 - RFN420 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
RESET
STOP
TEST
95 97
1 3 5
2 4 6
96 98
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS RF9 - RF95

Electric reset G228 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5
BF...
A2 2 4 6
R
RESET
TEST
E1 G228... 95 97 1 3 5
RF...
E2 96 98 2 4 6
L
L1
T1 T2 T3

DRPT 24VDC
24VAC C Automatic Manual Remote
Reset Reset Reset
110VAC
Set point
220...240VAC
L1 Hysteresis
Remote
L2 reset
L3 A1
F2 S1 A2
F1
TEST
1 3 5 A1 T1 T2 S1 11 21 RESET
K1 K1 T2
S1
2 4 6 A2 DRPT 12 14 22 24
ON
S2
TRIP
12
S3 K1 11
M1
14
Rmax =1.5kΩ (25°C) 22

K1 21
24
3-13
Phase failure/single phase sensitive manual reset RF9 RF38 RF82 RF95 RF200 RF420
Phase failure sensitive automatic reset RFA9 RFN38 RFA82 RFA95 RFN200 RFN420
Non phase failure/non single phase sensitive manual reset RFN9 RFN82 RFN95
Non phase failure/non single phase sensitive automatic reset RFNA9 RFNA82 RFNA95
POWER CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 690 1000 1000
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8 6 8 8 6 6
3 Frequency limit Hz 0...400 0...400 0...400 0...400 50...60 50...60
Operational range from A 0.09 0.1 14 14 60 150
to A 15 38 82 110 200 420
Tripping class 10A
Particular characteristics Test button - Trip indicator
Connection Direct With current
transformers
Yoke
Terminals Type Screw and washer clamp Screw and flat washer
Screw M4 M4 M5 M5 M8 M10
Terminal width mm 9.8 12.6 9 9 20 25
Phillips n° 2 2 2 2 13mm 18mm
Tightening torque Nm 2.3 2...2.5 3.9 3.9 18 35
for power terminals lbft 1.7 1.5...1.8 2.88 2.88 13.3 25.9
Maximum conductor section connectable
AWG N° 10 8 2 2 -- --
Flexible w/o lug mm2 6 10 35 35 -- --
Flexible c/w lug mm2 10 6 -- -- 150 2 x 150
Bar mm -- -- -- -- 25 x 3 30 x 5
Dissipation per phase W 0.7...2.4 0.7...2.4 2.0...4.2 2.0...4.2 0.7...2.4 0.7...2.4
AUXILIARY CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
Available NO n° 1
contacts NC n° 1
IEC rated insulation voltage V 690
IEC conventional free air A 10
thermal current Ith
Terminals with Screw M3.5
screw and washer Terminal width mm 8
Phillips n° 1 2 1 1 2 2
Maximum conductor section connectable
Flexible w/o lug mm2 2.5
Flexible c/w lug mm2 2.5
Tightening torque Nm 1 0.8...1 1 1 0.8...1 0.8...1
for auxiliary terminals lbft 0.74 0.59...0.74 0.74 0.74 0.59...0.74 0.59...0.74
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation B600-P600 B600-R300 B600-P600 B600-P600 B600-R300 B600-R300

AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature °C -20...+55 -25...+60 -20...+55 -20...+55 -25...+60 -25...+60
Storage temperature °C -55...+70 -50...+70 -55...+70 -55...+70 -50...+70 -50...+70
Compensation temperature °C -15...+55 -20...+60 -15...+55 -15...+55 -20...+60 -20...+60
Operation position Normal On vertical plane
Allowable ±30°
Mounting On contactor or separately
With manual and automatic resetting.
For currents higher than 420A, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
Standard supplied.
Metric wrench/spanner.
C600-R300 for automatic reset type.
3-14
TRIP CHARACTERISTIC FOR RF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS (AVERAGE TIME)

Three-phase balanced operation Two-phase operation (phase failure/single phase)
RF9 RF38 RF82 RF95 RF9 RF38 RF82 RF95

RFA9 RFN38 RFA82 RFA95 RFA9 RFA82 RFA95
RFN9 RFN82 RFN95
RFNA9 RFNA82 RFNA95
Opening time [s] Opening time [s] 3

10000 10000
2h 2h
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100 100
1min 1min
COLD COLD
HOT HOT
10 10
1
1 x Ie [A] 1.15 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A]
1.05 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10
1 10
RF200 RF420 RF200 RF420

RFN200 RFN420
Opening time [s] Opening time [s]

10000 10000
2h 2h
1h 1h
30min 30min
1000 1000
10min 10min
5min 5min
2min 2min
100
100 COLD
1min
1min
COLD
HOT
HOT 10
10
1
1 1.15 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A]
1.05 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x Ie [A] 1 10
10
1
Tripping times can have a ±20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve values above.
3-15
Page 4-2 Page 4-5
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

• Motor ratings up to 95A 440V in IEC AC3 duty • For three-phase motor control 9...25A 440V /
• General use up to 65A / motor rating up to 4...12.5kW 400V, in IEC AC3 duty and up to
52A 600V per UL/CSA 15HP 600V per UL/CSA
• Versions with Start-Stop/Reset buttons or Reset • Versions with built-in or external mechanical
button interlock
• Versions with and without thermal relay • Complete with rigid connections
• Versions with motor protection circuit breaker. • PCB version 9A 440V / 4kW 400V in IEC AC3
duty; 5HP 300V per UL/CSA.
Page 4-5 Page 4-6
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES STAR-DELTA STARTERS OPEN FRAME

• For 20A loads at ≤40°C in IEC AC1 duty • Suitable for three-phase motor control,
• For 20A general use per UL/CSA 16A...690A 440V / 7.5kW...375kW 400V
• With built-in mechanical interlock. ratings in IEC AC3 duty.
Page 4-7 Page 4-8
STAR-DELTA STARTERS IN NON-METALLIC EMPTY NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES

ENCLOSURE • Versions without pushbuttons, with Reset
• Suitable for three-phase motor control, button only or Start-Stop/Reset buttons
16...60A 440V / 7.5kW...30kW 400V ratings in • For starters, with pushbuttons and metal
IEC AC3 duty. plate
• Suitable to contain BG mini-contactor or
BF09A to BF110 contactors, up to 110A
440V rating in IEC AC3 duty; up to 52A at
600V for UL/CSA.
ELECTROMECHANICAL STARTERS AND ENCLOSURES 4
Direct-on-line starters in
non-metallic enclosure complete
with or without thermal relay
Versions with RESET or
START/STOP pushbuttons
Non-metallic enclosures for
customer-assembled starters
Reversing and changeover
contactor assemblies
Star-delta starters, open frame and
in non-metallic enclosure versions.
SEC. - PAGE
Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line - Non reversing
Enclosed with thermal relay ............................................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Enclosed without thermal relay .......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Enclosed with motor protection circuit breaker ................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Combinations .................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 10
Reversing contactor assemblies
With BG series mini-contactors ....................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
With BF series contactors ................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 5
Changeover contactor assemblies
With BG series mini-contactors ....................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Star-delta starters
Open frame ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Enclosed ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Non-metallic enclosure for starters .................................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Empty non-metallic enclosures
Enclosures ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4 - 8
Accessories and spare parts .............................................................................................................................................. 4 - 8
Combinations .................................................................................................................................................................... 4 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4 - 16
P ROTECTION
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 4 - 20
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Electromechanical starters and enclosures
Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line.
Non reversing three phase
Enclosed with thermal Order code Relay IEC technical Qty Wt Components
overload relay adj characteristics per Starter enclosure Contactor Thermal Auxiliary
range (≤440V) pkg relay contact
Ie kW block
[A] [A] [kW] n° [kg]
Starters with Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons .
M0 P009 121 0.6-1 1 0.18-0.25 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 1 ––
M0 P009 121V5 0.9-1.5 1.5 0.37 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 1V5 ––
M0 P009 122V3 1.4-2.3 2.3 0.55-0.75 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 2V3 ––
4 M0 P009 1233 2-3.3 3.3 1.1 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 33 ––
M0 P...12 M0 R...12 M0 P009 125 3-5 5 1.5-2.2 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 5 ––
M0 P009 1275 4.5-7.5 7.5 2.2-3 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 75 ––
M0 P009 1210 6-10 10 3-4 1 0.760 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 10 ––
M0 P012 1215 9-15 12 5.5 1 0.760 M0 PA BG12 10A RF9 15 ––
M1 P009 12A4 0.63-1 1 0.25 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0100 ––
M1 P009 12A5 1-1.6 1.6 0.37-0.55 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0160 ––
M1 P009 12A6 1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0250 ––
M1 P009 12A7 2.5-4 4 1.1-1.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0400 ––
M1 P...12 M1 R...12
M1 P009 12A8 4-6.5 6.5 2.2-3 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 0650 ––
M1 P009 12A9 6.3-10 10 3-4 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 1000 ––
M1 P009 12B0 9-14 13 5.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 1400 ––
M1 P018 12B1 13-18 18 7.5 1 1.040 M1 PA BF18 10A RF38 1800 ––
M2 P025 12B2 17-23 23 11 1 1.220 M2 PA BF25 10A RF38 2300 ––
M2 P025 12B3 20-25 25 11 1 1.220 M2 PA BF25 10A RF38 2500 ––
M2 P032 12B4 24-32 32 15 1 1.300 M2 PA BF32 00A RF38 3200 G418 10
M25 P038 12B5 32-38 38 18.5 1 2.880 M25 PA BF38 00A RF38 3800 G418 10
M2 P...12 M2 R...12 M3 P050 12B6 35-50 50 18.5-22 1 3.760 M3 PA BF50 00A RF82 5000 G418 10
M3 P065 12B7 45-65 65 30 1 3.760 M3 PA BF65 00A RF82 6500 G418 10
M3 P080 12B8 60-82 80 37-45 1 3.760 M3 PA BF80 00A RF82 8200 G418 10
M3 P095 12B9 70-95 95 45 1 3.760 M3 PA BF95 00 RF95 3 95 G418 10
Starters with Reset pushbuttons .
M0 R009 121 0.6-1 1 0.18-0.25 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 1 ––
M0 R009 121V5 0.9-1.5 1.5 0.37 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 1V5 ––
M0 R009 122V3 1.4-2.3 2.3 0.55-0.75 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 2V3 ––
M0 R009 1233 2-3.3 3.3 1.1 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 33 ––
M25 P038 12 M0 R009 125 3-5 5 1.5-2.2 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 5 ––
M0 R009 1275 4.5-7.5 7.5 2.2-3 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 75 ––
M0 R009 1210 6-10 10 3-4 1 0.720 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 10 ––
M0 R012 1215 9-15 12 5.5 1 0.720 M0 RA BG12 10A RF9 15 ––
M1 R009 12A4 0.63-1 1 0.25 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0100 ––
M1 R009 12A5 1-1.6 1.6 0.37-0.55 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0160 ––
M1 R009 12A6 1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0250 ––
M1 R009 12A7 2.5-4 4 1.1-1.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0400 ––
M1 R009 12A8 4-6.5 6.5 2.2-3 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 0650 ––
M25 R038 12 M1 R009 12A9 6.3-10 10 3-4 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 1000 ––
M1 R009 12B0 9-14 13 5.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 1400 ––
M1 R018 12B1 13-18 18 7.5 1 0.995 M1 RA BF18 10A RF38 1800 ––
M2 R025 12B2 17-23 23 11 1 1.165 M2 RA BF25 10A RF38 2300 ––
M2 R025 12B3 20-25 25 11 1 1.165 M2 RA BF25 10A RF38 2500 ––
M2 R032 12B4 24-32 32 15 1 1.260 M2 RA BF32 00A RF38 3200 G418 10
M25 R038 12B5 32-38 38 18.5 1 2.600 M25 RA BF38 00A RF38 3800 G418 10
M3 R050 12B6 35-50 50 18.5-22 1 3.410 M3 RA BF50 00A RF82 5000 G418 10
M3 R065 12B7 46-65 65 30 1 3.410 M3 RA BF65 00A RF82 6500 G418 10
M3 R080 12B8 60-82 80 37-45 1 3.410 M3 RA BF80 00A RF82 8200 G418 10
M3 R095 12B9 70-95 95 45 1 3.410 M3 RA BF95 00 RF95 3 95 G418 10
M3 P...12
Complete order code with coil voltage digit (if 50/60Hz) or with voltage digit
followed by 60 (if 60Hz). Certifications and compliance
Standard voltages are as follows: Refer to page 4-3 for details.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V). Special M3... versions
Example: M0 R009 12 024 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type Refer to page 4-3 for details.
enclosure with Reset button, 9A/AC3 contactor with 24VAC
50/60Hz coil and 0.6-1A thermal overload relay.
M0 P009 12 024 60 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type UL/CSA HP ratings
enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset buttons , 9A /AC3 See page 4-24.
contactor with 24VAC 60Hz coil and
0.6-1A thermal overload relay.
Protection fuses are to be mounted externally by the user.
M3 R...12
Combinations Dimensions Wiring diagrams

4-2 pages 4-10 to 15 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20
Enclosed without thermal Order code Maximum operating Qty Wt Components

overload relay current (≤440V) per Starter enclosure Contactor Thermal Auxiliary
pkg standard standard relay to contact
[A] n° [kg] supplied supplied purchase standard
Starters with Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons . separately supplied
M0 P009 10 10 1 0.667 M0 PA BG09 10A RF9 ––
M0 P012 10 12 1 0.667 M0 PA BG12 10A RF9 ––
M1 P009 10 13 1 0.910 M1 PA BF09 10A RF38 ––

4
M1 P018 10 18 1 0.910 M1 PA BF18 10A RF38 ––
M0 P...10 M0 R...10
M2 P025 10 25 1 1.060 M2 PA BF25 10A RF38 ––

M2 P032 10 32 1 1.162 M2 PA BF32 00A RF38 G418 10
M25 P038 10 38 1 2.360 M25 PA BF38 00A RF38 G418 10
M3 P050 10 50 1 3.110 M3 PA BF50 00A RF82 G418 10

M1 P...10 M1 R...10 M3 P065 10 65 1 3.110 M3 PA BF65 00A RF82 G418 10
M3 P080 10 80 1 3.110 M3 PA BF80 00A RF82 G418 10
M3 P095 10 95 1 3.110 M3 PA BF95 00 RF95 3 G418 10
Starters with Reset pushbutton .
M0 R009 10 10 1 0.627 M0 RA BG09 10A RF9 ––
M0 R012 10 12 1 0.627 M0 RA BG12 10A RF9 ––
M1 R009 10 13 1 0.867 M1 RA BF09 10A RF38 ––

M1 R018 10 18 1 0.867 M1 RA BF18 10A RF38 ––
M2 P...10 M2 R...10
M2 R025 10 25 1 1.020 M2 RA BF25 10A RF38 ––

M2 R032 10 32 1 1.110 M2 RA BF32 00A RF38 G418 10
M25 R038 10 38 1 2.320 M25 RA BF38 00A RF38 G418 10
M3 R050 10 50 1 3.070 M3 RA BF50 00A RF82 G418 10

M3 R065 10 65 1 3.070 M3 RA BF65 00A RF82 G418 10
M3 R080 10 80 1 3.070 M3 RA BF80 00A RF82 G418 10
M25 P038 10 M3 R095 10 95 1 3.070 M3 RA BF95 00 RF95 3 G418 10
Complete order code with coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with voltage digit For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-2 or 3-3.
followed by 60 if 60Hz. For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-4.
Standard voltages are as follows: For thermal overload relay selection, refer to pages 3-4 or 3-5.
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 /
575 60 (V). Operational characteristics
Example: M0 R009 10 024 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type – Cable entry:
enclosure with Reset button, 9A /AC3 contactor with 24VAC • M0/M1… - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 on enclosure
50/60Hz coil. top and bottom
M0 P009 10 024 60 1 for direct-on-line starter in M0 type • M2… - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 or PG16/M25 on
enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset buttons , 9A /AC3
contactor with 24VAC 60Hz coil. enclosure top and bottom
Protection fuses are to be mounted externally by the user. • M25… - 2 knockouts PG16/M25-PG29/M32 on
M25 R038 10 enclosure top and bottom
• M3… - Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by customer
– Ambient conditions:
– Degree of protection: IP65 for all; type 4/4X industrial
control environment for M1 / M2 / M25... and M3...
UL versions.
Special M3... versions

In addition to standard-indicated versions, cULus
certified starters are available up to 52A motor control or
65A general use rating max.
Add suffix UL to the order code,
M3 P...10 e.g. M3 P050 10 024UL.
UL/CSA HP ratings
See page 4-24.

Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus – File E93602) and CSA certified for
Canada and USA (cCSAus – File 94157) as Magnetic
Motor Controllers, enclosed type, for all M0-M1-M2-
M25P/R… starters and M3P/R50-65…UL types as
indicated in “Special M3” above.
M3 R...10 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

pages 4-10 to 15 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20 4-3
Direct-on-line starters – Full voltage across the line.
Enclosed with motor Order code Relay IEC technical Qty Wt General characteristics
protection circuit breaker adj characteristics per The M2 P009 11... starters are composed of an IP65
range (≤440V) pkg plastic enclosure where the following devices are
Ie kW mounted:
[A] [A] [kW] n° [kg] – a motor protection circuit breaker type SM1R... with
the short circuit and overload protection function
M2 P009 11A4 0.63-1 1 0.25 1 1.450 – a contactor with start / stop function of the motor
M2 P009 11A5 1-1.6 1.6 0.37-0.55 1 1.450 – 2 push-buttons for the start and stop
M2 P009 11A6 1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75 1 1.515 – a mushroom push-button for the emergency stop
– a padlockable rotary actuator, that operates the circuit
M2 P009 11A7 2.5-4 4 1.1-1.5 1 1.515
4 M2 P009 11A8 4-6.5 6.5 2.2-3 1 1.515
breaker, for the isolation.
M2 P009 11A9 6.3-10 10 3-5 1 1.515 These starters are easily and quickly installable. They are
especially suitable to operate the motor of smaller
M2 P009 11B0 9-14 13 5.5 1 1.515 machines where there is no electrical panel.
Complete order code with coil voltage digit (if 50/60Hz) or with voltage digit Inside the enclosure, other components can be added
followed by 60 (if 60Hz). like timers, level relays, protection relays, etc.
Standard voltages are as follows:
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / Operational characteristics
575 60 (V). – M2… - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 or PG16/M25 on
Example: M2 P009 11 400 A8 for direct-on-line starter in M2 type with enclosure top and bottom
reset and reset/emergency button, 9A/AC3 contactor with
M2 P009 11.... 400VAC 50/60Hz coil and motor protection circuit breaker – Ambient conditions:
4...6.5A. • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
– Degrre of protection: IEC IP65, type 4/4X for UL
version.

IEC/EN 60947-4-1.

4-4 pages 4-10 to 15 pages 4-16 page 4-20
Reversing and changeover contactor assemblies
Reversing contactor Order code IEC Max. IEC Built-in Qty Wt General characteristics
assemblies Ie (AC3) power auxiliary per REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
≤440V AC3 contacts pkg Supplied complete, ready for quick mounting.
≤55°C 400V at The various versions are composed as follows:
≤55°C BGR... Screw termination, external mechanical
[A] [kW] NO NC n° [kg] interlock BGX50 00, power and auxiliary wiring.
BGT... Screw termination, built-in mechanical interlock
AC COIL. and power wiring only.
Terminals: clamp screw. BGTP... Rear PCB solder pin termination, built-in
External interlock with power and auxiliary wiring. mechanical interlock only.
11 BGR09 01 A 9 4 0 1 1 0.394 No thermal overload relay can be directly mounted to
BG... reversing contactor assemblies.
4
11 BGR... 11 BGR12 01 A 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.394
BFA... Screw termination, mechanical interlock
BFA009 42 9 4.2 0 1 1 0.760 BFX50 02 and power wiring.
BFA012 42 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.760 The thermal overload relay RF38... can be directly
BFA018 42 18 7.5 0 1 1 0.760 mounted to BFA... reversing contactor assemblies; for
selection, refer to section 3.
BFA025 42 25 12.5 0 1 1 0.760
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
Built-in interlock with power wiring only. Supplied complete, ready for quick mounting as follows:
11 BGT09 10 A 9 4 1 0 1 0.380 BGC09 T4 Four-pole contactors with built-in mechanical
11 BGT12 10 A 12 5.7 1 0 1 0.380 interlock. No power or auxiliary wiring included.
Rear terminals: PCB solder pins. Operational characteristics
Built-in interlock only. Type Maximum IEC operational power
11 BGTP09 01 A 9 4 0 1 1 0.400 at ≤55°C (AC3)
230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
DC COIL. [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
BFA... Terminals: clamp screw.
External interlock with power and auxiliary wiring. BGR09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5
BGT09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 5
11 BGR09 01 D 9 4 0 1 1 0.460
BGTP09 2.2 4 4.3 4.5 5 –
11 BGR12 01 D 12 5.7 0 1 1 0.460
BGR12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5
Built-in interlock with power wiring only. BGT12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5
11 BGT09 10 D 9 4 1 0 1 0.445 BFA009 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.2
11 BGT12 10 D 12 5.7 1 0 1 0.445 BFA012 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10
Rear terminals: PCB solder pins. BFA018 4 7.5 9 9 10 10
11 BGT... Built-in interlock only. BFA025 7 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 11
11 BGTP09 01 D 9 4 0 1 1 0.460 at ≤40°C (AC1)
BGC09 T4 8 14 14 15 16 22
Maximum UL/CSA horsepower rating
Single phase Three phase
120V 240V 208V 240V 480V 600V
[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP]
BGR09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 5
BGT09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 5
BGTP09 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 -
11 BGTP... BGR12 ½ 1½ 3 3 7½ 10
BGT12 ½ 1½ 3 3 7½ 10
Changeover contactor Order code IEC Operating UL/CSA Qty Wt BFA009 ¾ 2 3 3 5 7½
current (AC1) General per BFA012 1 2 5 5 7½ 10
assemblies Use pkg BFA018 1 3 5 5 10 15
≤40°C ≤55°C ≤60°C BFA025 2 3 7½ 7½ 15 15
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] NOTE: BGR09, BGT09, BGR12, BGT12… types are UL Listed for USA
AC COIL. and Canada as “Magnetic Motor Controller – Reversing Contactors”. All
these are rated 20A general (purpose) use and suitable for use on a
Terminals: clamp screw. circuit capable of delivering more than 5kA symmetrical. Amps at 600V
Built-in interlock only. max when protected by fuses class K5 rated no more than 30A.
BGTP09 type is UL Recognized for USA and Canada as “Magnetic
11 BGC09 T4 A 20 18 15 20 1 0.365 Motor Controller – Component – reversing contactors”. Max HP
rating up to 300VAC only; rated 20A general (purpose) use.
DC COIL. BGC… types are UL Listed for USA and Canada as “Magnetic Motor
Terminals: clamp screw. Controller – Changeover contactor”.
11 BGC09 ... Built-in interlock only. No coil change or replacement is possible for any BG… types.
11 BGC09 T4 D 20 18 15 20 1 0.450 Add-on blocks

Refer to section 2, pages 2-16 and 2-18.
Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed Special add-on auxiliary contacts 11 BGX11 11 or
by 60 if 60Hz.
Standard voltages are as follows:
11 BGX11 12 must be used on the left-side contactor of
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V the BGT reversing assemblies.
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / For the right-side contactor, normal 11 BGX10... types of
575 60 (V). auxiliary contacts can be used instead.
Example: 11 BGR09 01 A024 for reversing contactor assembly with Refer to page 2-16 for details.
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 1 NC auxiliary contact each
and 24VAC 50/60Hz coil. Certifications and compliance
11 BGR09 01 A024 60 for reversing contactor assembly with Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 1 NC auxiliary contact each (File E93602) for BGR09, BGT09, BGR12, BGT12, BFA...
and 24VAC 60Hz coil.
Complete order code with coil voltage digit.
and BGC... (see NOTE above).
Standard voltages are: UL Recognized, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602
-- DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V. Component), for BGTP09; products having this type of
Example: 11BGC09 T4 D012 is a changeover contactor assembly with marking are intended for use as components of complete
2 mini-contactors BG09 having 4 main poles each and 12VDC
coil. workshop-assembled equipment.
One auxiliary contact for each contactor. Compliant with standards IEC/EN 60947-1,
Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
consult Customer Service; see contact details on front inside cover.
Add-on blocks Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

pages 2-16 and 2-17 pages 4-17 and 18 page 4-20 pages 2-48 to 2-67 4-5
Star-delta starters
Open frame Order code Three-phase Thermal Qty Wt Operational characteristics

motor control. overload per IEC standard motor powers
Max IEC relay
operating pkg
current (≤440V) 230V 400V 440V 500V
[A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
Complete star-delta starters, open frame, for starting
time up to 12s and a maximum of 30 operations/hour.
BFA009 70 16 No 1 1.700 4 7.5 7.5 7.5
4 BFA012 70 22 No 1 1.700 5.5 11 11 11
BFA018 70 28 No 1 1.700 7.5 15 11 11
BFA025 70 35 No 1 1.800 11 18.5 18.5 22
BFA026 70 43 No 1 1.800 11 22 22 25
BFA032 70 50 No 1 1.900 15 25 25 25
BFA009...BFA025
BFA038 70 60 No 1 1.900 15 30 30 30
BFA050 70 85 No 1 5.200 25 45 45 59
BFA065 70 110 No 1 5.200 30 59 63 75
BFA080 70 140 No 1 6.265 40 75 80 100
21 DYF95 E 145 Yes 1 6.265 40 75 80 100
21 NYF115 220 Yes 1 19.000 63 110 129 147
21 NYF145 260 Yes 1 19.000 80 132 162 185
21 NYF180 310 Yes 1 19.000 92 160 185 210
21 NYF250 480 Yes 1 22.650 145 250 280 315
21 NYF310 530 Yes 1 22.650 160 295 335 368
21 NYF400 690 Yes 1 25.000 220 375 425 450
Thermal relay adjustment range

Choose the thermal relay adjustment range considering a value
equal to 58% of rated motor current (Ie).
Example: Ie=100A; 58% Ie=58A.
The suitable relay range is 46-65A.
During the setup, the relay is to be regulated at 58A.
For NYF... type
For DYF... type
Digit defining Relay IEC aM NYF
Digit defining Relay IEC aM DYF thermal adj fuses starters
thermal adj fuses starters relay range range A A 115 145 180 250 310 400
relay range range A A 50 65 80 95 100 60-100 200
42 28-42 80 125 75-125 250
50 35-50 100 150 90-150 315
65 46-65 125 200 120-200 400
82 60-82 160 250 150-250 500
95 70-95 200 300 180-300 630
Complete order code with the coil voltage digit or 420 250-420 800
the coil voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz.
Standard voltage are as follows: Components
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / Starter Contactors Thermal Time relay Auxiliary contacts fitted Rigid
230 60 (V). overload on contactor: connections
Example: BFA009 70 024 for BFA009 star-delta Line Delta Star relay Line Delta Star
starter with 24VAC 50/60Hz power
supply. BFA009 70 BF09 10A BF09 01A BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31
BFA009 70 024 60 for BFA009 star- BFA012 70 BF12 10A BF12 01A BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31
delta starter with 24VAC 60Hz power
supply. BFA018 70 BF18 10A BF18 01A BF12 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31
The thermal overload relay is not included and
BFA025 70 BF25 10A BF25 01A BF18 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31
must be purchased separately.
Refer to the example given under Thermal relay BFA026 70 BF26 00A BF26 00A BF18 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32
adjustment range, for a correct choice and then to
page 3-4 for the order code. BFA032 70 BF32 00A BF32 00A BF25 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32
The thermal overload relay is included. Replace with BFA038 70 BF38 00A BF38 00A BF25 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32
digit of thermal relay; see tables above, under
Thermal relay adjustment range. BFA050 70 BF50 00A BF50 00A BF32 00A (RF82) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 ––
To be mounted by the customer.
BFA065 70 BF65 00A BF65 00A BF32 00A (RF82) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 ––
Fuses for type 1 co-ordination. For type 2
co-ordination, consult Customer Service; see BFA080 70 BF80 00A BF80 00A BF50 00A (RF82) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 ––
contact details on inside front cover.
TM ST with auxiliary supply 24...240VAC. DYF95 E BF95 00 BF95 00 BF50 00A RF95 3 TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 ––
TM ST A440 with auxiliary supply 380...440VAC. NYF115 B115 00 B115 00 BF65 00 RF200 TM ST G350 G354 BFX10 11 ––
NYF145 B145 00 B145 00 BF80 00 RF200 TM ST G350 G354 BFX10 11 ––
NOTE: For higher powers and voltages, or
suitable for heavy-duty starting (centrifugal NYF180 B180 00 B180 00 B115 00 RF200 TM ST G350 G354 G354 ––
fans, mills, crushers) that is with starting NYF250 B250 00 B250 00 B145 00 RF420 TM ST G350 G354 G354 ––
time exceeding 12s, consult Customer
NYF310 B310 00 B310 00 B180 00 RF420 TM ST G350 G354 G354 ––
Service; see contact details on inside front
cover. NYF400 B400 00 B400 00 B250 00 RF420 TM ST G350 G354 G354 ––
Reference stardards
Compliant with stardards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-9.

4-6 page 4-18 pages 4-21 to 23
Star-delta starters.
Non-metallic enclosure for starters
Enclosed starters Order Three-phase motor Qty Wt Operational characteristics

control. per IEC standard motor powers
Max IEC operating pkg
current (≤440V) 230V 400V 440V 500V
[A] n° [kg] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
Star-delta starters in enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset
buttons. Starting time up to 12s and a maximum of
30 operations/hour.
M3 P009 70 16 1 3.540 4 7.5 7.5 7.5
M3 P012 70 22 1 3.540 5.5 11 11 11 4
M3 P018 70 28 1 3.540 7.5 15 11 11
M3 P025 70 35 1 3.650 11 18.5 18.5 22
M3 P026 70 43 1 3.650 11 22 22 25
M3 P...70... - M3 PA70 M3 P032 70 50 1 3.800 15 25 25 25
M3 P038 70 60 1 3.800 15 30 30 30
With switch disconnector, rotary door-coupling handle – Cable entry: Smooth surface; can be drilled by
GAX61 and Start and Stop/Reset buttons. customer
M3 P009 73 16 1 3.700 – Ambient conditions:
M3 P012 73 22 1 3.700 • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
M3 P018 73 28 1 3.700 – Degree of protection: IEC IP65 for M3P…; UL Type 1,
M3 P025 73 35 1 3.800 12, 4/4X for M3…UL versions.
Complete order code with the coil voltage digit
or the coil voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz. M3 P026 73 43 1 3.800
Standard voltage are as follows: Special M3... versions
M3 P032 73 50 1 4.300 In addition to standard-indicated versions, cULus
-- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V
-- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 M3 P038 73 60 1 4.300 certified starters are available up to 52A motor control
/ 230 60 (V). rating max. This is also valid for the enclosure with
Example: M3P009 70 024 for M3P009 star- Enclosure for star-delta starter, complete with Start and
Stop/Reset buttons, metal plate fixed with piece of general use rating of 65A.
delta starter with 24VAC 50/60Hz
power supply. 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail. Add suffix UL to the order code, e.g. M3 PA70UL.
M3P009 70 02460 for M3P009
star-delta starter with 24VAC 60Hz M3 PA70 –– 1 2.240 Certifications and compliance
power supply. Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada
The thermal overload relay is not included and
(File E93602), as Magnetic Motor Controllers - Enclosed
must be purchased separately.
Choose the thermal relay adjustment range (starters) and - Enclosures for M3...PUL types.
considering a value equal to 58% of rated motor Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
current (Ie). IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14 for starters;
Example: Ie=10A; 58% Ie = 5.8A. The suitable UL 508A for M3P A70UL.
relay range is 4-6.5A, set at 5.8A, so the order
code to select is RF380650).
Refer to page 3-4 for the order codes available.
Suitable for BFA...70 starters. Maximum available space inside M3P...70/73 with star-delta starters BFA...70...
TM ST with auxiliary supply 24...240VAC;
TM ST A440 with auxiliary supply 380...400VAC.
NOTE: For higher powers and voltage

ratings or suitable for heavy-duty starting
(centrifugal fans, mills, crushers) that is
with starting time exceeding 12s, consult
Customer Service; see contact details on 80.5
inside front cover.
146
125.5 73.5
66.5
Components
Type Enclosure Contactors T/o Time Auxiliary contacts fitted Rigid Switch
relay relay on contactor: connec- disconnector
Line Delta Star Line Delta Star tions
M3P009 70/73 M3 PA70 BF09 10A BF09 01A BF09 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 –– BFX10 11 BFX31 31 GA016 A
M3P026 70/73 M3 PA70 BF26 00A BF26 00A BF18 10A (RF38) TM ST BFX10 20 BFX10 11 BFX10 11 BFX32 32 GA063 SA
For M3P...73 types

page 4-15 page 4-19 page 4-21 4-7
Accessories and spare parts
Empty enclosures Order code Contactor type Thermal Degree Qty Wt Enclosure Maximum operating current
relay of per type (≤440V)
protect. pkg A
n° [kg] M0... 12
Enclosures with Start-Stop/Reset pushbuttons. M1... 18
M0PA BG06, BG09, RF9 IP65 1 0.490 M2... 32
BG12
M24N 38
M1PA BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.545
BF18A M25... 38
4 M2PA BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.715 M3... 110
BF32A General characteristics
M25PA BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.990 Enclosures are supplied with the following accessories:
M...PA M3PA BF40A, BF50A, RF82 IP65 1 1.900 Accessory Type of enclosure
BF65A, BF80A, RF82
M25 RA
M25 PA
M0 RA
M1 RA
M2 RA
BF95, BF110 RF95 3
M0 PA
M1 PA
M2 PA
Enclosures with Reset pushbutton. Description Type
M0RA BG06, BG09, RF9 IP65 1 0.445 Contact MX 20P 1
BG12 holder MX 21P 1 1 1
M1RA BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.500
BF18A Buttons: LPC B1176 1 1 1 1
- Start/Reset LPC B2104 1 1 1 1
M2RA BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.670 - Start
BF32A LPC B1113 1 1 1 1
M25RA BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.970 Contact for LPX C10 1 1 1 1
M3RA BF40A, BF50A, RF82 IP65 1 1.850 Start button
BF65A, BF80A, RF82 Stop/Reset MX 10P 1 1
M...RA BF95, BF110 RF95 3 button MX 11P 1 1
Enclosures without external pushbuttons. extension
MX 12P 1 1 1 1
M0N BG06, BG09, RFA9 IP65 1 0.405 Unused hole MX 01 1 1 1 1
BG12 threaded plug
M1N BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 1 0.460 – M3 PA enclosure: 2 Start and Stop/Reset
BF18A pushbuttons, 2 G285 auxiliary terminals and 1 MX30
M2N BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 1 0.640 mounting plate
BF32A – M3 RA enclosure: 1 Reset pushbutton,
M24N BG.../ IP65 1 0.625 2 G285 auxiliary terminals and 1 MX30 mounting plate
BF09A...BF25A – M3N enclosure: Supplied without accessories to be
purchased separately including MX 30 mounting plate.
M25N BF38A RF38 IP65 1 0.940
M...N Enclosures can house the following devices:
M3N BF40A, BF50A, RF82 IP65 1 1.800 M0 = BG… with/without RF9
BF65A, BF80A, RF82 M1 = BF09A-BF12A-BF18A with/without RF38
BF95, BF110 RF95 3 M2 = BF25A-BF26A-BF32A, assemblies BFA…42
To be purchased separately; refer to page 2-4 for contactor choice. with/without RF38
To be purchased separately. M24N = BF25A-BF26A-BF32A, assemblies BGR/BGT/BGC
Refer to pages 3-2 to 8 for thermal overload relay choice.
For use of the overload relay in the M24N, consult Customer Service; see and BFA…42 without overload
contact details on inside front cover. M25 = BF26…BF38A, assemblies BGR/BGT/BGC and
MX 31 metal mounting plate included. BFA…42 with/without overload
MX 30 metal mounting plate included. M3 = BF40…BF110 and all assemblies with/without
To install eventual pushbuttons, selectors and/or other control
accessories, use the series and mount the relay contact overload.
elements on the cover using the LPX AU120 mounting adapter. See
section 7. Operational characteristics:
– Cable entry:
• M0/M1//M2… - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 on
Accessories and Order code Description Qty Wt enclosure top and bottom
per • M24N/M25… - 2 knockouts PG16/M25-PG29/M32
spare parts pkg on enclosure top and bottom
• M3… - Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by customer
n° [kg] – Ambient conditions:
MX 01 Threaded plug for unused holes, 10 0.007 • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
grey RAL7035 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
MX 10P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010 – Degree of protection: IEC IP65 for all; UL Type 1, 12,
rod for M0 enclosure 4/4X for M0/M1/M2/M24N/M25… types and M3…UL
versions.
MX 11P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010
rod for M1 enclosure Special M3… versions
In addition to standard-indicated versions, cULus
MX 20P MX 12P Stop/Reset button extension 5 0.010 certified starters and enclosures are available up to 52A -
MX 21P rod for M2 enclosure motor control and 65A general use rating max (MX30
MX 20P Mounting base for LPX C... 5 0.014 plate, earth/ground and neutral terminal plates are always
contact on M0 enclosure included in this case).
MX 21P Mounting base for LPX C... 5 0.014 Add suffix UL to the order code of enclosures
contact on M1, M2, M25 e.g. M3N UL.
enclosure Certifications and compliance
MX 30 Metal mounting plate for M3N 1 0.500 Certifications obtained: EAC for all; for M3NUL type, UL
Listed for USA and Canada (cULus – File E300050) as
MX 31 Metal mounting plate for M24N 1 0.400 Industrial control panels; for M0/M1/M2PA/RA/N and
and M25 enclosures other M3…UL types, UL Listed for USA and Canada
(cULus – File E93602) under magnetic motor controllers
as Polymeric enclosures - and CSA certified for Canada
and USA (cCSAus – File 94157) as Non-metallic
enclosures. UL/CSA pending for M24N and M25… types.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN
60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA CS22.2 n°14; UL 508A and CSA

4-8 pages 4-10 to 15 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20
M...PA EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M0PA M1PA M2PA M25PA M3PA
M3PA
M...RA EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M0RA M1RA M2RA M25RA M3RA
M3RA
M...N EMPTY ENCLOSURES
M0N M1N M2N
M24N M25N M3N
Metal mounting Metal mounting Metal mounting plate

plate MX31 plate MX31 MX 30
(standard supplied) (standard supplied) (to purchase separately)

pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20 4-9
M...P... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M0 P009 12... M0 P009 10... M1 P009 12... M1 P009 10... M2 P025 12... M2 P025 10...
M0 P012 12... M0 P012 10... M1 P018 12... M1 P018 10... M2 P032 12... M2 P032 10...
M...R... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M0 R009 12... M0 R009 10... M1 R009 12... M1 R009 10... M2 R025 12... M2 R025 10...
M0 R012 12... M0 R012 10... M1 R018 12... M1 R018 10... M2 R032 12... M2 R032 10...
M25... STARTERS, ENCLOSED M2... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M25 P03812... M25 P03810... M25 R03812... M25 R03810... M2 P00911
M3... STARTERS, ENCLOSED

M3 P050 12... to M3 P050 10... to M3 R050 12... to M3 R050 10... to
M3 P095 12... M3 P095 10... M3 R095 12... M3 R095 10...

4-10 pages 4-16 and 17 page 4-20
Maximum combinations for M0... and M1... starters in 2) Middle position 2 The STOP/RESET button is mounted in this position,
enclosure Based on the enclosure type, in this position, the except for the enclosure without buttons.
For the fitting of add-on blocks and electronic relays in user finds either the Start button or threaded plug. This button activates the thermal overload relay via a
the starters, consult our Customer Service; see contact Various actuators can be fitted in this mechanical actuator.
details on inside front cover. position, such as flush or extended buttons, In eventual applications without thermal overload
The enclosure cover can be equipped with various types selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated below. relay, this button can be removed and the hole
of actuators and pilot lights, per following details: To fit the actuators, the mounting base, type MX 20 closed up by the threaded plug MX 01.
1) Upper position 1 for M0 enclosure, or type MX 21P for M1 enclosure,
The cover must be drilled in this position, with a must also be purchased. The contact or LED
22.5mm hole, by the user and LPL..., LPM... and elements are snapped onto this mounting base.
LPC ZS... pilot light can be fitted. No adapter or base is needed for LPL..., LPM... and 4
To fit the LPL... (not type 8 LP2T IL…P) pilot light LPC ZS...
head, the mounting base, type MX 20P for M0 3) Lower position 3
enclosure or type MX 21P for M1 enclosure, must
also be purchased. The LED element is snapped onto
this mounting base.
No adapter or base is needed for LPL..., LPM... and
LPC ZS...
m
.5m
17 1 x
LPX LP...
LPX LE...
Time relay TM... LPX LPS...
Protection relay PMV10 A440
LPL...
Level control relay LVM25 240 LPX C0... LPX C0...
Priority change relay LVMP 05 LPX C1... LPX C1...
(one only relay on the left LPX CS... LPX CS...
of the contactor)
MX 20P (M0) LPM...
MX 21P (M1) LPC ZS...
MX 01
1 LPC BL...
LPC QL...
2
LPC B...
LPC Q...
3
LPC S3...
MO... M1...
LPC S...
LPC SL1...
BF09A
BF12A
BF18A LPC B7...
LPC BL7...
BG...
LPC B73...
RF9 RF38

pages 4-16 page 4-20 4-11
Maximum combinations for M2... starters in enclosure 2) Middle position 2 This button activates the thermal overload relay via a
For the fitting of add-on blocks and electronic relays in Based on the enclosure type, in this position, mechanical actuator. In eventual applications without
the starters, consult our Customer Service; see contact the user finds either the Start button or threaded thermal overload relay, this button can be removed
details on inside front cover. plug. and the hole closed up by the threaded plug MX 01.
The enclosure covers can be equipped with various Various actuators can be fitted in this Various actuators can be fitted in this
types of actuators and pilot lights, per following details: position, such as flush or extended buttons, position, such as flush or extended buttons,
1) Upper position 1 selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the side selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the drawing
The cover must be drilled in this position with a figure. below. To fit the actuators (not required for
22.5mm hole by the user; LPL..., LPM... or LPC ZS... To fit the actuators (not required for 8 LP2T IL…P 8 LP2T IL…P pilot light), the mounting base type
pilot light can be fitted. pilot light), the mounting base type MX 21P must MX 21P must also be purchased. The contact or LED
4 To fit the LPL... pilot light, the mounting base type also be purchased. elements are snapped onto this mounting base.
MX 21P must also be purchased. The LED element is The contact or LED elements are snapped onto this No adapter or base is needed for LPL..., LPM... and
snapped onto this mounting base. mounting base. LPC ZS...
No adapter or base is needed for LPL..., LPM... and No adapter or base is needed for LPL..., LPM... and 4) Upper position 4
LPC ZS... LPC ZS... The cover must be drilled in this position
3) Lower position 3 with a 22.5mm hole by the user whenever an
The STOP/RESET button is mounted in this position, external handle is needed for a switch
except for the enclosure without buttons. disconnector fitted in the enclosure.
mm x1
35 PMV20/30/40/50/55/70... protection relay
PMF20 A... protection relay GAX63
or PMA20/30... protection relay GAX63 B
m LMV20... level control relay GAX68
.5m (one relay only on right side of the contactor) GAX68 B
17
2 xx
ma
LPX LP...
LPX LE...
LPX LPS...
Time relay TM... LPL...
Protection relay PMV10 A440
Level control relay LVM25 240 LPX C0... LPX C0...
Priority change relay LVMP 05 LPX C1... LPX C1...
(two relays or one only on left LPX CS... LPX CS...
and one on right side LPM
of the contactor) LPC ZS...
MX 21P
4 MX 01
1 LPC BL...
LPC QL...
2
LPC B...
LPC Q...
3
MX 21P
M2... M2... M2... LPC S3...
BF25A n°2 BF09A n°2 BF18A BF09A BF25A

BF26A n°2 BF12A n°2 BF25A BF12A BF26A
BF32A BF18A BF32A LPC S...
LPC SL1...
LPC B7...
LPC BL7...
ON
I
GAX7 090
OFF
BFX50 02 LPC B73...
GA016 A
GA025 A
RF38 RF38 RF38 GA032 A LPC B6...

4-12 pages 4-17 page 4-20
Maximum combinations for starters in M24N enclosure

In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, various other electromechanical devices can be fitted. The cover of the
M24N enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments, switch disconnectors GA016A…GA040A and GA063SA type.
No contact blocks or other additional accessories can be mounted on the contactor face of AC BF series; they can only be fitted on the contactor side since the cover is
shallow.
Eventually pushbuttons, selector switches and/or other control accessories of the series can be used and contact or LED elements can be mounted directly
inside on the cover with the LPX AU120 mounting adapter; refer to section 7.
The wall fixing holes and the cover closing

captive screws are positioned outwards with
4
respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees the
protection degree of the enclosure against
infiltrations liquid (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X).
The base has ribbing which facilitates the

fixing of DIN rails, metal mounting plates and
electronic printed boards.
Grid references, marked by letters and numbers,

are engraved on the interior surface of the cover.
This grid allows to quickly identify the exact
drilling points where pushbuttons, handles or
pilot lights will be mounted.
A safety sealing system keeps the cover and

base together to avoid inopportune opening and
tampering.
Available space for fitting other electrical or electronic devices
103
156
82,6
M24N M24N M24N M24N

BG06 BF09A...BF25A BGR... - BGT... - BGC... without overload BF09A BF12A
BG09 without overload n° 2 BF09A n° 2 BF12A BF18A BF25A
BG12 n° 2 BF18A n° 2 BF25A with GA016A...GA040A and GA063SA
without overload All without overload
BFA...42 without overload
BFX50 02
ON
I
OFF
BFX50 01

pages 4-17 page 4-20 4-13
Maximum combinations for starters in M25… enclosure

In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, various other electromechanical devices can be fitted. The cover of the
M25 enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments, switch disconnectors GA016A…GA040A and GA063SA type.
Possible contact blocks or other additional accessories can be mounted on the contactor face of AC or DC BF series or on the contactor side since the cover is deep.
Eventually pushbuttons, selector switches and/or other control accessories of the series can be used and contact or LED elements can be mounted directly
inside on the cover with the LPX AU120 mounting adapter; refer to section 7.
MX 31 internal metal mounting plate is standard-supplied.
The wall fixing holes and the cover closing

captive screws are positioned outwards with
4 respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees the
protection degree of the enclosure against liquid
infiltrations (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X).

Grid references, marked by letters and numbers,

are engraved on the interior surface of the cover.
This grid allows to quickly identify the exact
drilling points where pushbuttons, handles or
pilot lights will be mounted.

base together to avoid inopportune opening and
tampering.
103
156
156
148
37,5
M25...038... M25... M25... M25...

BF38 BF26 - BF32 BGR... - BGT... - BGC with or without overload RF9 BF09 BF12 BF18
with or without with or without n° 2 BF26 - n° 2 BF32 - n° 2 BF38 with or without BF26 BF32 BF38
overload overload overload RF38 with GA016A...GA040A and GA063SA
BFA...42 with or without overload RF38
BFX50 02
ON
I
OFF
RF38... RF38...
RF38...
BF09A...BF38A with
BFX50 01

4-14 pages 4-17 page 4-20
Direct-on-line starters
Maximum combinations for starters in M3… enclosure

In addition to a direct-on-line, full voltage across the line, starter or reversing contactor assembly, star-delta starters can be installed as illustrated at the lower right as well as
various other electromechanical devices. The cover of the M3 enclosure can be used across the entire surface to mount pushbuttons, measuring instruments or switch
disconnectors GA016A…GA125A, etc.
MX 30 internal metal mounting plate is standard supplied with M3P… and M3R… types; not included with the M3N, it can be purchased separately.
With the specifically designed hinges, the cover

remains attached to the base, fully open, while
the wiring work is being carried out. By
applying slight pressure on the hinges, the
cover can be released from the base.
4
The cover closing captive screws and the wall M3...
fixing holes are positioned outwards with
respect to the sealing gasket. This guarantees
the protection degree of the enclosure against M3 P050 12...
liquids infiltrations (IEC IPX5 / UL Type 4X). M3 P095 12...

base together to avoid inopportune opening
and tampering.
Grid references, marked by letters and

numbers, are engraved on the interior surface
of the cover. This grid allows to quickly
identify the exact drilling points where
pushbuttons, handle or pilot lights will be
mounted.
A properly predrilled metal mounting plate

(MX 30 standard supplied except for M3N)
permits to quickly and precisely fix equipment
in place.

80.5
146
125.5 73.5
66.5
M3... M3... M3...

n° 1 BF40 n° 1 BF80 n° 2 BF40 n° 2 BF65 n° 2 BF95 n° 1 BF40 n° 1 BF65 n° 1 BF95
+ n° 1 GA...
n° 1 BF50 n° 1 BF95 n° 2 BF50 n° 2 BF80 n° 2 BF110 n° 1 BF50 n° 1 BF80 n° 1 BF110
n° 1 BF65 n° 1 BF110
RF82 RF82
RF95 RF82
RF95 RF95

pages 4-17 page 4-20 4-15
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS - EMPTY ENCLOSURES

M0 M1
140.4 155.4
(5.53”) (6.12”)
88 133.3 88
148.3
(3.46”) (5.25”) (3.46”)
44 44 (5.84”)
(1.73”) Ø4.5 119.5 (1.73”) Ø4.5 134.5
(0.18”) (4.70”) (0.18”) (5.29”)
4
(6.89”)
(7.24”)
175
184
(7.95”)
(7.60”)
202
193
49
(1.93”)
(0.76”)
49
19.4
(1.93”)
(0.76”)
19.4
PG13.5 / M20 knockouts
on top and bottom
PG13.5 / M20 knockouts
on top and bottom
M2 M2 P009 11
189.5 (7.46”)
162.3 (6.39”) 162.3 (6.39”)
110 (4.33”) 110 (4.33”)
169.4 (6.70”) 169.4 (6.70”)
55 (2.16”) 55 (2.16”)
Ø4.5 (0.18”) 148.5 (5.85”) Ø4.5 (0.18”) 148.5 (5.85”)
(1.18”)
Ø30
234 (9.21”)
234 (9.21”)
225 (8.86”)
225 (8.86”)
60 (2.36”) 60 (2.36”)
(0.90”)
(0.90”)
22.8
22.8
PG13.5 / M20 PG13.5 / M20

PG16/M25 PG16/M25
knockouts on top and bottom knockouts on top and bottom
4-16
M24N M25
165 (6.50”)
175 (6.89”) 98.5 (3.88”) 175 (6.89”) 158,5 (6.24”)
148,5 (5.85”)
210 (8.27”)
210 8.27”)
4
52 (2.05”)
52 (2.05”) Drilling for surface fixing Ø 4.5
Drilling for surface fixing Ø 4.5
(0.18”) (0.18”)
(1.10”)
(1.10”)
153.5 (6.04”) 153.5 (6.04”)
28
28
PG16 / M25
PG16 / M25 PG29 / M32
PG29 / M32
148,5 (5.85”)
knockouts on top
knockouts on top and bottom
and bottom 184 (7.24”)
184 (7.24”)
M3
187 (7.36”)
177 (6.97”)
Drilling for surface fixing
13 220 (8.66”) 170 (6.69”)
(0.51”) Ø 6.2 (0.24”)
178 (7.01”)
280 (11.02”)
238 (9.37”)
REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

BGR... BGT...
88 88
(3.46”) (3.46”)
”)
(0 Ø4
4.4 4.4 6
”)
(0 Ø4
.16
4.4 4.4
.16
(0.17”) (0.17”) (0.24”) (0.17”) (0.17”)

(1.97”)
(2.28”)
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
50
58
58
50
8.5 9.7 34.9 56 56

(2.20”) 9.7 8.5 34.9
0.33”) (0.38”) (1.37”) (0.33”) (1.37”) (2.20”)
(0.38”)
8.5 8.5
(0.33”) (0.33”)
8.5 8.5
(0.33”) (0.33”)
BGTP... BFA...42
88 4.4 4.4
(0 4.2
”)
(3.46”) (0.17”) (0.17”) 90 90

.16
Ø
(3.54”) (3.54”)
(0.05”)
Ø1.4❶
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
(2.09”)
58
50
53
(3.27”)
(2.79”)
83
71
9.7 8.5 56
(0.38”) (0.33”) (2.20”)
8.5 5.6
(0.33”) (0.22”)
8.5 Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm (0.07-0.08”). 35
(0.33”) (1.38”)
4-17
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES

BGC09 T4...
88
(3.46”)
”)
(0 Ø4
4.4 4.4
.16
(0.17”) (0.17”)
(2.28”)
(1.97”)
58
50
9.7 8.5 34.9 56
4 (0.38”)
8.5
(0.33”)
(0.33”) (1.37”) (2.20”)
8.5
(0.33”)
STAR-DELTA STARTERS OPEN FRAME

BFA... 70...
197.5
(7.77”)
152.5
(6.00”) 11 B
(0.43”) STARTER TYPE A B
BFA009 70 130.5 (5.14”) 109.5 (4.31”)
10 BFA012 70 130.5 (5.14”) 109.5 (4.31”)
(0.39”)
BFA018 70 130.5 (5.14”) 109.5 (4.31”)
(3.54”)
BFA025 70 130.5 (5.14”) 109.5 (4.31”)

90
BFA026 70 135 (5.14”) 119 (4.68”)

A
BFA032 70 135 (5.14”) 119 (4.68”)

BFA038 70 135 (5.14”) 119 (4.68”)
BFA050 70 173 (6.81”) 142 (5.59”)
BFA065 70 173 (6.81”) 142 (5.59”)
BFA080 70 183 (7.20”) 142 (5.59”)
DYF...
250 141
(9.84”) (5.55”)
(0.63”)
15 (0.59”) 15 (0.59”)
16.1
(5.55”)
(6.22”)
141
158
(1.94”)
49.4
NYF...
A C
STARTER TYPE A B C
NYF115 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF145 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF180 340 (13.38”) 870 (34.25”) 195 (7.68”)
NYF250 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
NYF310 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
NYF400 440 (17.32”) 1000 (39.37”) 235 (9.25”)
B
4-18
STAR-DELTA STARTERS IN ENCLOSURE - EMPTY ENCLOSURE FOR STAR-DELTA STARTERS

187
M3P...70 - M3 PA70 (7.96”)
177
(6.97”)
280 170
(11.02”) (6.69”)
4
(8.66”)
220
(0.51”)
13

Ø 6.2 (0.24”)
238 (9.37”)
205
(8.07”)
178 (7.01”)
(5.75”)
(7.28”)
146
185
244
(9.61”)
M3P...73 193 (7.60”)

280 (11.02”)
170 (6.69”)
220 (8.66”)
(0.51”)
13

280 (11.02”)
Ø 6.2 (0.24”)
238 (9.37”)
170 (6.69”)
192.9 (7.59”)
178 (7.01”)
4-19
Wiring diagrams
DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS IN ENCLOSURE

M...P M...R M2 P00911...
Diagram 1 - Incorporated button Diagram 2 - External button control Diagram 3 - Incorporated button control Diagram 4 - Power
control for 3-phase motors for 3-phase motors and rotary actuator for 3-phase motors connection for 1-phase
motors
LINE LINE LINE LINE
6 6 L1 L2 L3
5 5
4 A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5 13 (53) A1
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5 13 (53)
L1
1
L2
3
L3
5
I
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
A2 14 (54) A2 14 (54)
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
1 1 T1 T2 T3 6
4 3
95 97 95 97
5
O R L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 13
96 98 96 98
2
A2 2 4 6 14
I T1 T2 T3
E 4 3 2 4 6
2 4 6 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
O
LOAD LOAD LOAD
2
I
I = Start; O = Stop/Reset R = Reset; I = Start; O = Stop
2 4 6
T1 T2 T3
LOAD
I = Start; O = Stop; E = Emergency Stop
DIAGRAM 2:
Connect the eventual two-wire control (e.g. automatism) between terminal 3 of the contactor and terminal 96 of the thermal overload relay.
IMPORTANT
-- Remove jumpers 5 and 6 and connect the auxiliary line to terminals A1 and 3 for a control circuit with a voltage value different than the supply.
-- Remove jumper 5 and connect the neutral to terminal A1 for a control circuit between phase and neutral.
-- SINGLE-PHASE SUPPLY
The main circuit must be configured according to Diagram 3 in the case of a single-phase line or motor.
-- FUSES
A set of three fuses must be connected upstream of the starter in the event no appropriate protection is included in the system.
REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY

BGR... BGT...
A1 A1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 21 1 3 5 13 13 1 3 5
KM1 KM2 KM1 KM2

A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 22 2 4 6 14 14 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
A2 A2
BFA...42 BGTP09...
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
A1 L1 L2 L3 21 A1 L1 L2 L3 21 A1 21 1 3 5 1 3 5 21 A1
1 3 5 1 3 5
KM1 KM2 KM1 KM2

2 4 6 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
A2 22 A2 22 A2 22 2 4 6 2 4 6 22 A2
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
4-20
Wiring diagrams
CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY

BGC09...
L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4
A1 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 A1
KM1 KM2
A2 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 A2
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
4
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME AND ENCLOSED
BFA009...039 - M3P009...038 70
LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
KM2 KM3 KM1

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
BFA009 70... BFA025 70 BFA26 70 - BFA038 70

M3P009 70...M3P025 70 M3P026 70...M3P038 70
21 21
S1 S1
22 22
13 53 13 53
S2 KM2 S2 KM2
14 54 14 54
1 1
63 13 63 13
KM2 KM1 KM2 KM1
64 14 64 14
17 17 17 17
KT1 KT1
(TM ST) (TM ST)
18 28 18 28
4 6 7 4 6 7
96 22 62 96 62 62
KM3 KM1 KM3 KM1
96 21 61
96 61 61
3 5 3 5
FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1 FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2 (TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
95 A2 A2 A2 A2 95 2 A2 A2 A2 A2
2
95 95
L L
4-21
Wiring diagrams
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME BFA050...BFA080 - DYF95

LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1 L2 L3
4 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
KM2 KM3 KM1

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
21
S1
22
13 53
S2 KM2
14 54
63 13
KM2 KM1
64 14
17 17
KT1
(TM ST)
18 28
96 62 62
KM3 KM1
96 61 61
FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
95 A2 A2 A2 A2
95
L
4-22
Wiring diagrams
STAR-DELTA STARTERS, OPEN FRAME NYF...
1 3 5
KM1
2 4 6
4
1 3 5
KM3
2 4 6
1 3 5
KM2
2 4 6
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 LINE
...V - ...Hz
FR1
2 4 6
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
U2 U1
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
95
95
FR1
96
96
21
S1
22
13 33
S2 KM2
14 34
13 53
KM2 KM1
14 54
17 17
KT1
(TM ST)
18 28
62 62
KM3 KM1
61 61
KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
A2 A2 A2 A2
4-23
Direct-on-line starters – Full voltage across the line.
Non reversing
CONFIGURATIONS FOR USA AND CANADA. NOTE: The HP / FLA values vary from one motor
to another; if possible, always verify the HP and
Order code T/O MAX UL/CSA HP RATINGS INDICATED ON STARTER FLA (or rated current) on the motor nameplate.
for magnetic motor starters RELAY (based on t/o relay adj range) Enclosure UL Type 1, 12, 4 and 4X industrial
in non-metallic enclosure ADJ control environment for M1, M2, M25 and
with 2 push buttons RANGE Single phase Three phase M3…UL versions; designation of control units
can be:
[A] 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V N – without push buttons
R – with reset button only
M0P0091 0.6 - 1 - - - - ½ ½ P – per table, with start-stop push buttons
M0P0091V5 0.9 - 1.5 - - - - ¾ ¾ S – with start selector and stop push button.
Consult Customer Service for any other
M0P0092V3 1.4 - 2.3 - - - ½ 1 1 combination required (e.g. with other type of
4 M0P00933 2 - 3.3 - ¼ ¾ 1½ ½ 2 contactors, contactor assemblies or definite-
purpose version, different overload version or
M0P0095 3-5 - ½ 1 1 3 3 range, additional pilot lights, extra electrical or
electronic elements); see contact details on inside
M0P00975 4.5 - 7.5 - ¾ 1½ 2 5 5 front cover. Refer to below for specified
M0P00910 6 - 10 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 5 standard configurations.
M0P01215 9 - 15 ½ 1½ 3 3 7½ 10 Complete the order code by indicating:

M1P009A4 0.63 - 1 - - - - - ½ – 10 if required without thermal overload
relay
M1P009A5 1 - 1.6 - - - - ½ ¾ – 12 if required with three-phase overload
relay
M1P009A6 1.6 - 2.5 - - ½ ½ 1 1½ – 13 if required with single-phase overload
M1P009A7 2.5 - 4 - - ¾ ¾ 2 3 relay
– 15 if required with automatic reset of
M1P009A8 4 - 6.5 ¼ ½ 1 1½ 3 5 overload relay for M0 types
M1P009A9 6.3 - 10 ½ 1½ 2 3 5 7½ – 17 if required with disconnect switch for
M2 and M3 types
M1P009B0 9 - 14 ¾ 2 3 3 5 7½ – 42 if required with reversing contactor
combination for M2 and M3 types.
M1P012B0 9 - 14 1 2 5 5 7½ 10 Complete the order code by indicating coil
M1P018B1 13 - 18 1 3 5 5 10 15 voltage required:
– 02460 for 24V 60Hz
M2P025B2 17 - 23 1½ 3 5 7½ 15 15 – 04860 for 48V 60Hz / 42V 50Hz
M2P025B3 20 - 25 2 3 7½ 7½ 15 15 – 12060 for 120V 60Hz / 110V 50Hz
– 22060 for 220V 60Hz / 200V 50/60Hz
M2P026B2 17 - 23 1½ 3 5 7½ 15 20 – 23060 for 230V 60Hz / 220V 50Hz
– 46060 for 460V 60Hz / 400V 50Hz
M2P026B3 20 - 25 2 5 7½ 7½ 15 20 – 57560 for 575V 60Hz.
M2P026B4 24 - 32 2 5 7½ 7½ 15 20 Maximum HP ratings per UL and CSA can be
different when definite-purpose contactors are
M2P032B4 24 - 32 3 7½ 10 10 20 25 considered. Consult with Customer Service for
M25P038B5 32 - 38 3 7½ 10 15 30 30 further information; see contact details on
inside front cover.
M3P050B6UL 35 - 50 3 10 10 15 30 40 Short circuit protective device – This enclosed
starter is suitable for use on a circuit capable
M3P065B7UL 46 - 65 - - 15 15 40 60 of delivering not more than 5,000rms
M3P080B8 60 - 82 - - 25 30 60 75 symmetrical amperes, 600V max, when
protected with Class RK5 type, Fuse size 200A.
M3P095B9 70 - 95 - - 30 30 60 75 Maximum UL ratings is 52A for motor control
and 65A for general use.
Short circuit protective device – This enclosed
starter is suitable for use on a circuit capable
of delivering not more than 10,000rms
symmetrical amperes, 600V max, when
protected with Class RK5 type, Fuse size 225A.
No CSA or UL certification. Indicated values
correspond to UL/CSA magnetic contactor
ratings and for indication and reference
purposes only.
– CSA certified for Canada and USA (cCSAus -
File 94157) as Magnetic Motor Controllers at
max 600VAC, max 15HP per single phase,
max 60HP three phase, max 125A with
general purpose enclosure.
– UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File
E93602) as Magnetic Motor Controllers –
Enclosed.
Markings:
Line (voltage and frequency value)
Amps (overload adjustment range)
Max HP (horsepower value)
Control (coil and frequency value)
Caution: Bonding between conduits must be
provided.
4-24
Typical full-load current values of single and three phase electric motors
THREE-PHASE POWER RATINGS Rated motor current

200V 230V 220-240V 380-415V 400V 440-480V 500V 550-600V 690V
[HP] [kW] [A] [A] [A] [A] {A] [A] [A] [A] [A]
- 0.37 - 1.9 - - 1.1 - 0.88 - 0.64
1/2 - 2.5 - 2.2 1.3 - 1.1 - 0.9 -
- 0.55 - 2.6 - - 1.5 - 1.2 - 0.87
3/4 - 3.7 - 3.2 1.8 - 1.6 - 1.3 -
1 - 4.8 - 4.2 2.3 - 2.1 2 1.7 -
- 0.75 - 3.3 - - 1.9 - 1.5 - 1.1
- 1.1 - 4.7 - - 2.7 - 2.2 - 1.6 4
1-1/2 - 6.9 - 6 3.3 - 3 - 2.4 -
2 - 7.8 - 6.8 4.3 - 3.4 - 2.7 -
- 1.5 - 6.3 - - 3.6 - 2.9 - 2.1
- 2.2 - 5.5 - - 4.9 - 3.9 - 2.8
3 - - 11.3 - - 6.5 - 5.2 - 3.8
- 4 - 15 - - 8.5 - 6.8 - 4.9
5 - 17.5 - 15.2 9.7 - 7.6 - 6.1 -
- 5.5 - 20 - - 11.5 - 9.2 - 6.7
7-1/2 - 25.3 - 22 14 - 11 - 9 -
10 - 32.2 - 28 18 - 14 - 11 -
- 7.5 - 27 - - 15.5 - 12.4 - 8.9
- 11 - 38 - - 22 - 17.6 - 12.8
15 - 48 - 42 27 - 21 - 17 -
20 - 62.1 - 54 34 - 27 - 22 -
- 15 - 51 - - 29 - 23 - 17
- 18.5 - 61 - - 35 - 28 - 21
25 - 78.2 - 68 44 - 34 - 27 -
- 22 - 72 - - 41 - 33 - 24
30 - 92 - 80 51 - 40 - 32 -
40 - 120 - 104 66 - 52 - 41 -
- 30 - 96 - - 55 - 44 - 32
- 37 - 115 - - 66 - 53 - 39
50 - 150 - 130 83 - 65 - 52 -
60 - 177 - 154 103 - 77 - 62 -
- 45 - 140 - - 80 - 64 - 47
- 55 - 169 - - 97 - 78 - 57
75 - 221 - 192 128 - 96 - 77 -
100 - 285 - 248 165 - 124 - 99 -
- 75 - 230 - - 132 - 106 - 77
- 90 - 278 - - 160 - 128 - 93
125 - 359 - 312 208 - 156 - 125 -
- 110 - 340 - - 195 - 156 - 113
150 - 414 - 360 240 - 180 - 144 -
- 132 - 400 - - 230 - 184 - 134
200 - 552 - 480 320 - 240 - 192 -
- 160 - 487 - - 280 - 224 - 162
250 - - - 604 403 - 302 - 242 -
- 200 - 609 - - 350 - 280 - 203
300 - - - 722 482 - 361 - 289 -
- 250 - 748 - - 430 - 344 - 250
350 - - - 828 560 - 414 - 336 -
400 - - - 954 636 - 477 - 382 -
- 315 - 940 - - 540 - 432 - 313
450 - - - 1030 - - 515 - 412 -
- 355 - 1061 - - 610 - 488 - 354
500 - - - 1180 786 - 590 - 472 -
SINGLE-PHASE POWER RATINGS Rated motor current

[HP] [A] at 120V [A] at 240V
1/10 3 1.5
1/8 3.8 1.9
1/6 4.4 2.2
1/4 5.8 2.9
1/3 7.2 3.6 The information in the chart has been obtained from the IEC/EN 60947-4-1 standards.
1/2 9.8 4.9 The kW ratings are preferred rated values according to IEC 60072-1 (primary series)
3/4 12.8 6.9 at 50/60Hz while Horsepower and corresponding current values are according to
1 16 8 UL 508 Industrial Control Standard at 60Hz.
1-1/2 20 10
2 24 12 The full load current values listed are for motors running at standard speeds with
normal torque characteristics. Motors which are non-standard, such as low speed,
3 34 17
high torque or other special applications may have higher full load currents.
5 56 28
7-1/2 80 40 Caution: For accurate and reliable motor protection, motor nameplate current should
10 100 50 be used to obtain actual motor full load amps for all motors.
15 135 68 The information given is for indication and reference purposes only.
4-25
ADXC ADXL... ADX...

• Two phase control • Two phase control • Three phase control
• IEC rated starter current Ie 12...45A • Reduced voltage starter with torque control • Reduced voltage starter with torque control
• IEC rated motor power 5.5...22kW at 400VAC and and built-in bypass relay and built-in bypass contactor up to 245A
9...37kW at 600VAC • For standard and severe duty • For severe duty, IEC starting current 5•Ie
• UL/CSA ratings 3 to 25HP at 400VAC and • Rated operational voltage 208...600VAC • Rated operational voltage 208...500VAC
10 to 40HP at 600VAC • IEC rated starter current le 30....320A (ADX...B) 208...415VAC (ADX...)
• Built-in bypass relay • IEC rated motor power 15...160kW (400VAC); • IEC rated starter current Ie 17...1200A
• Total protection against over temperature and 18.5...200kW (500VAC) • IEC rated motor power 7.5...710kW
wrong phase sequence • UL/CSA rated motor power 15...200HP (400VAC)
• Initial voltage, ramp up and ramp down time (380-415VAC); 25...300HP (550-600VAC) • Maximum starting current limitation
adjustable on front • Maximum starting current limitation • PC remote control supervision
• LED indication for starter status • PC remote control • Modbus-RTU and property ASCII
• DIN rail mount and only 45mm wide. • Programming, data download and diagnostics communication protocols
via optical port • Backlit LCD display.
• Parameter programming via NFC
• Modbus-ASCII, Modbus-RTU and Modbus-TCP
communication protocols
• Backlit LCD display.
Guide for selecting the best device

ADXC ADXL ADX
Controlled phases 2 2 3
Built-in bypass
(up to 245A)
Built-in display and keypad ––
Languages –– 6 4
View measurements ––
Torque control ––
Adjustable current limit ––
Dynamic braking –– ––
Kick Start function ––
Motor overload electronic protection ––
Motor protection PTC input ––
Protection against phase reversal
Protection against phase inversion
Protection against locked rotor ––
Protection against thyristor overtemperature
Protection against low load ––
Programmable alarm functions ––
Programmable digital inputs ––
Programmable analog inputs ––
Programmable digital outputs ––
Programmable analog output ––
Monitoring communication via RS485 ––
Programming communication ––
Event log ––
Motor hour counter ––
Startup counter ––
Clock calendar –– ––
Remotable external keypad ––
Standard
Optional
–– Not available
SOFT STARTERS 5
12A to 1200A soft starter ratings

Standard and severe duty types
Internal bypass contactor up to 320A
rating
Startup with torque control, voltage
ramp or current limit
Integrated total motor protection
Clock calendar
Digital control and adjustment
RS232 and RS485 for monitoring
and remote control
Modbus-RTU and proprietary ASCII
communication protocols.
SEC. - PAGE
Soft starters
Type ADXC... 2 phase control ........................................................................................................................................... 5 - 4
Type ADXL... 2 phase control ........................................................................................................................................... 5 - 5
Type ADX... 3 phase control ............................................................................................................................................. 5 - 6
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5 - 7
Software ........................................................................................................................................................................... 5 - 8
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 5 - 10
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 5 - 12
Technnical characteristics ............................................................................................... 5 - 13
P ROTECTION
CONTROL AND
M OTOR
Soft starters
ADXL SERIES
SIMPLE, EFFICIENT AND SAFE MOTOR
CONTROL
5 SIMPLE
The new ADXL soft starter series is equipped with a backlit LCD
display with icons and NFC connectivity, for a simple configuration,
possible also via smartphones and tablets. They are ideal for simple
“plug and play” applications, thanks to the installation AUTO SET
wizard, and for high-performance applications, with control and
protection during the motor startup and operation.
EFFICIENCY
After the start-up is completed, the soft starter closes the internal
bypass contacts and reduces energy consumption.
SAFETY
ADXL built-in functions allow to protect the connected motor and the
starter; it’s capable of monitoring the motor thermal status, to
manage the thermal protection, and its internal temperature, in order
to protect the SCR from overtemperature. Furthermore, a motor
overtemperature protection can be enabled through an external PTC
temperature sensor.
AUTO SET EASY SETUP

Upon startup, the soft starter launches a user wizard to simplify the setup. The user The ADXL series soft starters are equipped with NFC technology to simplify the
can set the device through 4 simple parameters: parameter setting procedure. Using a compatible smartphone or tablet, the user,
– language: it is possible to choose the text view by selecting the preferred even with the soft starter turned off, can download, save and edit the parameter
language. The available languages are: English, Italian, French, Spanish, menu using the LOVATO configurator app. The device front includes an optical
Portuguese, German; port compatible with the CX01 dongles, to connect via USB it to the PC through the
– motor current size: the motor nominal current (can be set between 50 and software, and the CX02 dongles, for Wi-Fi connection to the PC or the
100% of the starter size); app.
– application type: it includes predefined setups for the most common
applications: centrifugal pump, fire pump, conveyor belt, fan, mixer and general
purpose. By selecting one type, the soft starter automatically updates the
parameter programming to adapt to the requested application.
– soft starter duty level: the same application, based on the load connected to the
motor, can be more or less heavy-duty. ADXL is capable of automatically
adapting to standard or heavy-duty startups by adjusting the related parameters
based on the user selection.
Expert users can customize the settings through the complete parameter menu.
ADXL:
from start-up
to operation
in 4 steps
5-2
Soft starters
TORQUE CONTROL USER INTERFACE

The new two-phase control range includes the torque control. This motor starter A backlit icon display shows the data to the user in a clear and immediate way.
solution allows to perform gradual accelerations and decelerations, with • Alarm texts available in 6 languages (ENG-ITA-FR-ES-POR-DE)
consequent significant reduction of mechanical faults and wear of the transmission • 6 icons indicate the default setup in use: centrifugal pump, fire pump, conveyor
devices. belt, fan, mixer and general purpose;
• Two graphic bars show the motor and thyristors temperature;
Circuit limit
• Two alphanumeric displays allow to view texts and measures;
• A status bar shows the starter, start, bypass, stop status.
Maximum motor torque
100 %
Rated motor torque [%]
Torque
ramp
5
Starting torque
Ramp time
Starting Run Stopping

Time [s]
PASSWORD
KICK START Access to the soft starter parameters can be protected by user customizable
This function allows to start the motor when the initial torque is not sufficient passwords. There are two access levels, user and advanced.
to overcome friction forces; it transmits a high torque during the very first Furthermore, it’s possible to block the serial communication using the remote
moments of the startup. control password.
100 %
Maximum motor torque RS485 COMMUNICATION AND REMOTE KEYPAD
Starting torque All ADXL series soft starters are equipped with a slot to house the EXC1042
MiniCard, an expansion dedicated to the RS485 communication. RS485
communication can be used to connect the EXCRDU1 remote keypad, to view the
Rated motor torque [%]
Torque measures or to perform the setup through the touch screen installed on the front
ramp panel.
Kick start
Ramp time
Starting
Time [s]
FIRE PUMP PRESET SETUP F

While choosing the application in the AUTO SET wizard, it’s possible to select the
fire pump function. This parameter setting is optimized to start fire pumps
overriding all alarms and protections. In this situation, the main priority is the
pump start-up, without considering the possible consequences for the pump
starter and motor.
INPUTS, OUTPUTS, LIMITS AND REMOTE VARIABLES

The input and output functions are preset with the most common settings; the user
can easily edit the preset configuration to adapt the soft starter to the application
needs. All inputs and outputs can be edited. There are three types of programmable
internal variables:
– limit thresholds;
– remote variables;
– user alarms.
MAINTENANCE COUNTERS
ADXLs have two counters dedicated to count the number of start-ups and the
motor operation hours. It is possible to set a threshold for the operation hours;
when this threshold is exceeded, a dedicated alarm is triggered. MONITORING AND REMOTE CONTROL
Through the optional EXC1042 communication module and compatibility with the
COOLING FAN supervision and energy management software , setup and remote
The fan is supplied as an accessory for sizes from 30 to 115A, while it is built-in for control software , it’s possible to constantly monitor all the measures
all larger sizes. In order to increase its life span, the fan is activated only when available on the Modbus, the soft starter status and edit the setup parameters.
necessary. Furthermore, the ADXL is capable of checking the fan conditions; any
blocks or faults are signalled through two specific alarms.
DIN MOUNT GUIDE

For sizes from 30 to 115A, the EXP8003 accessory is available to mount the soft
starter on a 35mm DIN rail.
5-3
Soft starters
Two phase control
ADXC type Order code IEC rated Rated motor Qty Wt General characteristics
starter power per ADXC… is a compact type of soft starter, 45mm wide
current ≤40°C pkg and easy to use, for three phase squirrel-cage induction
Ie IEC UL/CSA motors; soft starts and soft stops rated motor load
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] currents up to 45A.
It is based on a current limiting starting methodology to
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 400VAC motor control. limit the maximum starting current. ADXC… reduces the
Auxiliary supply: starter 110…400VAC (L1-L2-L3 inputs); start mechanical stress on motor shafts, gearboxes and drive
command 110...400VAC (A1-A2 terminals). belts.
ADXC 012 400 12 5.5 5 1 0.500 Ramp up, ramp down and initial voltage time settings can
ADXC 016 400 16 7.5 7.5 1 0.500 be independently adjusted by built-in potentiometers.
Main features are:
ADXC 025 400 25 11 10 1 0.500 – For three phase induction motors up to 22kW / 25HP
5 ADXC 032 400
ADXC 037 400
32
37
15
18.5 20
15 1
1
0.500
0.700
at 400VAC and 37kW / 40HP at 600VAC
– Maximum input voltage: 400VAC 50/60Hz for ADX…
400…; 600VAC 50/60Hz for ADXC…600…
ADXC 045 400 45 22 25 1 0.700 – Built-in bypass relay
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 400VAC motor control. – Wrong phase sequence and over temperature
ADXC 012... Auxiliary supply: starter 110…400VAC (L1-L2-L3 inputs); start protection
ADXC 032... command 24VAC/DC (A1-A2 terminals). – Alarm for wrong phase sequence; line voltage and/or
ADXC 012 400 24 12 5.5 5 1 0.500 frequency out of limits (over and undervoltage);
overcurrent, over temperature, irregular ramp up and
ADXC 016 400 24 16 7.5 7.5 1 0.500 current flow during bypass; motor voltage unbalance
ADXC 025 400 24 25 11 10 1 0.500 – Simple setup and installation
ADXC 032 400 24 32 15 15 1 0.500 – 2 relay outputs for alarms (NC) and bypass closing
(NO) for ADXC…600 R2
ADXC 037 400 24 37 18.5 20 1 0.700 – 35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715)
ADXC 045 400 24 45 22 25 1 0.700 – Ideal for hydraulic lifts, conveyor belts, compressors,
With built-in bypass relay. Three-phase 600VAC motor control. pumps, hoisting devices, blowers, fans, mixers.
Auxiliary supply: starter 100…240VAC (A1-A2 separate
1-phase); start command 100...240VAC (ST terminals). Operational characteristics
With 2 relay outputs. – Two phase control
– Input voltage L1-L2-L3:
ADXC 012 600 R2 12 9 10 1 0.500 • 220...400VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC…400 and
ADXC 016 600 R2 16 11 15 1 0.500 ADXC…400 24
ADXC 025 600 R2 25 20 20 1 0.500 • 220...600VAC -15%…+10% for ADXC…600 R2
– Frequency range: 50/60Hz ±10% self-configurable
ADXC 037... ADXC 032 600 R2 32 22 30 1 0.500 – Self powered for ADXC…400… types
ADXC 045... ADXC 037 600 R2 37 30 30 1 0.700 – Separate single phase auxiliary power supply A1-A2:
ADXC 045 600 R2 45 37 40 1 0.700 100...240VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC…600 R2
– Start command:
For operating temperature higher than 40°C, derate starter power; see • A1-A2 24VAC/DC -15%…+10% (ADXC…400 24)
values given in the technical characteristics on page 5-13, in Rated
current In per IEC/FLA current per UL. • A1-A2 110…400VAC -15%...+10% (ADXC…400)
• ST 100…240VAC -15%...+10% (ADXC…600 R2)
Current control – Ramp up time: 1-20 seconds
ADXC… gradually increases the current – Ramp down time: 0-20 seconds
Starting
current
limit at 75% ramp-up time if the motor – Initial voltage: 0-85%

speed has yet to reach rated value, to – 3 indication LEDs “alarm” (red – alarm conditions with
avoid locked rotor state before time diverse number of flashes), “ramp/bypass” (yellow –
elapsing. flashing in ramp phase / constantly on with bypass relay
connected) and “supply” (green – constantly on with
power supply flow)
Time [s]
– Degree of protection: IEC IP20.
ts
At 75% ramp-up Certifications and compliance
time setting
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
(cULus – File E223223) under Solid State Motor
Typical settings
The following settings are standard ones for the
Type of Initial Accel. Decel. Controllers as reduced voltage starters; EAC and CCC
different applications; they are for indication and application voltage time time pending completion at time of catalogue printing.
reference purposes only. [%] [s] [s] Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
After the installation, it is recommended to always IEC/EN 60947-4-2, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
parameterise the soft starter with the motor Hydraulic lift 40 2 0
connected to find the best settings and then test it.
Piston compressor 40 3 0
Initial voltage adjustment is the first operation
followed by the ramp-up time setting and the Screw compressor 50 10 0
ramp-down time is last, if any is required.
Scroll compressor 40 1 0
(with revolving spiral)
Low inertia fan 40 10 0
High inertia fan 40 15-20 0
Pump 40 10 10
ADXC... adjustments
Centrifugal blower 40 5 0
Conveyor 50 1 5
A
A Initial voltage: 0-85% of the motor control power.
B B Ramp up time: 1-20 seconds. Initial to maximum load voltage time.
C C Ramp down time: 0-20 seconds. Maximum to no load voltage time.

5-4 page 5-10 page 5-12 page 5-13
Soft starters
Two phase control
ADXL... types Order code IEC Rated motor Qty Wt General characteristics
rated power per The new series of ADXL soft starters allow control the
starter ≤40°C pkg start and stop of three-phase asynchronous motors on
current IEC (400V) two-phases with built-in bypass. ADXLs are equipped
Ie with a backlit display with icons and NFC technology, for
a simple configuration, possible also from smartphones
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg]
and tablets. ADXLs are ideal for simple “plug and play”
For standard and heavy-duty applications. applications, thanks to the installation wizard, and for
With built-in bypass relay. high-performance applications, with control and
Auxiliary supply: 100...240VAC. protection during the motor start-up and operation.
Rated operational voltage 208...600VAC The ADXLs include protection features for the starter and
ADXL 0030 600 30 15 20 1 2.100 motor, and it’s possible to enable specific alarms to
signal maintenance needs, such as the number of
ADXL 0045 600 45 22 30 1 2.100 startups performed or the operation hours of the motor.
ADXL 0060 600 60 30 40 1 2.100
It has the following main features:
5
ADXL 0075 600 75 37 50 1 2.900 – Backlit LCD display
ADXL 0030 600...ADXL 0060 600 ADXL 0085 600 85 45 60 1 2.900 – Texts available in 6 languages (ENG-ITA-FR-ES-POR-DE)
– IEC rated starter current Ie from 30 to 320A
ADXL 0115 600 115 55 75 1 2.900 – IEC rated motor power 15...160kW (400VAC) and
ADXL 0135 600 135 75 100 1 18.5...200kW (500VAC)
ADXL 0162 600 162 90 125 1 – UL/CSA rated motor power 15...200HP (380-415VAC)
and 25...300HP (550-600VAC)
ADXL 0195 600 195 110 150 1 – Voltage ramp startup
ADXL 0250 600 250 132 200 1 – Torque control
– Kick start
ADXL 0320 600 320 160 250 1
– Limited maximum starting current
Contact our Customer Service office; see contact details or inside front – Free wheel or controlled stop
cover. – Built-in bypass relay
– Optical port for programming data download and
diagnostics through the software and app
IEC ratings ≤40°C (50Hz)
– NFC technology for parameter programming through
Order code Starter Motor power the app
current 230V 400V 500V – Optional RS485 communication
Ie – Modbus-ASCII, Modbus-RTU and Modbus-TCP
ADXL 0075 600...ADXL 0115 600
[A] [kW] [kW] [kW]
– Supervision and energy management software
ADXL 0030 600 30 7.5 15 18.5 .
ADXL 0045 600 45 11 22 30 Operational characteristics
ADXL 0060 600 60 15 30 37 – Two phase control
ADXL 0075 600 75 22 37 45 – Input voltage: 208...600VAC ±10%
– Network frequency 50 or 60Hz ±10% self-configurable
ADXL 0085 600 85 22 45 55 – 100...240VAC auxiliary power supply
ADXL 0115 600 115 37 55 75 – Signalling LED: power supply startup or bypass phase,
alarm
ADXL 0135 600 135 37 75 90
– Three programmable outputs: 1 changeover contact
ADXL 0162 600 162 45 90 110 2 normally open contacts
ADXL 0195 600 195 55 110 132 – 2 programmable digital inputs
– 1 programmable digital input, that can be used as PTC
ADXL 0250 600 250 75 132 160 – Protection rating: IP00.
ADXL 0320 600 320 90 160 200
Displayed measures:
Maximum current, L1 current, L2 current, L3 current,
%-torque, average line voltage, total active power, total
IEC ratings ≤40°C (60Hz) PF, motor thermal status, starter temperature.
Protections
ADXL 0135 600...ADXL 0162 600 Order code Starter Motor power
– Motor: thermal protection, PTC protection, locked
current 208V 220- 380- 440- 550- rotor, current asymmetry, startup too long, minimum
FLA 240V 415V 480V 600V torque
[A] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] – Power supply: no power supply, phase loss, wrong
phase sequence and out-of-range frequency
ADXL 0030 600 28 10 10 15 20 25 – Starter: overtemperature, overcurrent, SCR fault,
ADXL 0045 600 44 10 15 25 30 40 bypass relay fault, temperature sensor fault and fan
ADXL 0060 600 60 20 20 30 40 50 fault.
ADXL 0075 600 75 25 25 40 50 60 Certifications and compliance
Certificates pending: cULus; EAC.
ADXL 0085 600 83 25 30 50 60 75
ADXL 0115 600 114 40 40 60 75 100 IEC/EN 60947-4-2, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
ADXL 0135 600 130 40 50 75 100 125
ADXL 0162 600 156 50 60 75 125 150
ADXL 0195 600 192 60 60 100 150 200
ADXL 0250 600 248 75 100 150 200 250
ADXL 0320 600 320 100 125 200 250 300
Preferred rated values according to IEC 60072-1 (primary series).
Horsepower and currents values according to UL 508 (60Hz).
Accessories and software Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

page 5-7 and 8 page 5-10 page 5-12 page 5-14 5-5
Soft starters
Three phase control
ADX type Order code IEC IEC rated motor Qty Wt General characteristics
rated power ≤40°C per ADX... is a three-phase control soft starter used to start and
starter IEC UL508 pkg gradually stop three-phase asynchronous squirrel-cage
current 440V 440/ motors. The startup can be performed through a voltage
Ie 480V ramp with torque control and limitation of the maximum
[A] [kW] [Hp] n° [kg] startup current.
The integrated bypass contactor (only for ADX...B types)
For standard duty (starting current 5•Ie). drastically limits dissipation, as a result, equipment for
With built-in bypass contactor. electric panel cooling ventilation can be eliminated and the
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208...240VAC; start command enclosure size can be reduced as well. It’s equipped with
24VDC RS232 and RS485 interfaces.
51 ADX 0017B 17 7.5 10 1 7.900
CONTROL
51 ADX 0030B 30 15 20 1 8.000 During starting: Torque control acceleration, current limit
5 51 ADX 0045B 45 22 30 1 8.300 control and booster.
51 ADX 0060B 60 30 40 1 14.900 During stopping: Torque control deceleration, dynamic
braking and free-wheel.
51 ADX 0075B 75 37 50 1 14.900 In emergency conditions: Starting without protection
51 ADX 0085B 85 45 60 1 14.900 direct-on-line starting using integrated bypass contactor.
51 ADX 0017B...51 ADX 0045B 51 ADX 0110B 110 55 75 1 15.700 Remote control: PC supervision by connection with
RS232/RS485 converter, modem or GSM modem.
51 ADX 0125B 125 55 100 1 15.700 Automatic call function (Autocall) in case of alarm
51 ADX 0142B 142 75 100 1 34.000 conditions by sending a message to a cellular phone
51 ADX 0190B 190 90 150 1 37.000 (SMS-Short Message Service) and/or to a mailbox.
Proprietary ASCII and Modbus-RTU communication
51 ADX 0245B 245 132 200 1 37.000 protocols.
For severe duty (starting current 5•Ie).
Predisposed for external bypass contactor. KEYPAD OPERATIONS
Auxiliary supply: starter Us 208...240VAC; start command – Backlit LCD 2-line 16-character display
24VDC – Multilanguage capability (Italian, English, French,
Spanish)
51 ADX 0310 310 160 250 1 50.000 – Basic, advanced and function programming menus
51 ADX 0365 365 200 300 1 50.000 – Keypad stop and start
51 ADX 0470 470 250 400 1 90.000 – Motor and mains parameter readings:
• line voltage values (L-L)
51 ADX 0568 568 315 450 1 90.000 • phase current
51 ADX 0640 640 355 500 1 110.000 • active and apparent power values per phase
51 ADX 0820 820 400 600 1 170.000 • power factor per phase
• kWh
51 ADX 1200 1200 710 900 1 185.000 – Time sequential events log
– Clock calendar with backup battery.
PARTICULAR FUNCTIONS
Digital inputs and programmable relay outputs. Analog
input (0...10V, 0...20mA or 4...20mA) for ramp
51 ADX 0060B...51 ADX 0085B acceleration and/or deceleration, motor start and stop
control thresholds, programmable relay enable and disable
control thresholds. Analog output
(0...10V, 0...20mA or 4...20mA) for current, torque, motor
thermal status and power factor readings.
Input programming for second motor.
PROTECTION
– Motor: Dual thermal protection class (one during
starting phase and the other during running) or by PTC
sensor, locked rotor, current asymmetry, minimum
torque and starting time too long
– Auxiliary voltage: Voltage value too low
– Power voltage: Phase failure, phase sequence and
frequency out of limits
– Control inputs and analog output: Static 24VDC
short-circuit protection with automatic resetting.
– Starter: Overcurrent, high temperature, SCR and
bypass contactor malfunction.
– Three phase control
– Input voltage:
• 208...500VAC ±10% (ADX...B)
• 208...415VAC ±10% (ADX...)
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz ±5%
– Auxiliary supply voltage: 208...240VAC ±10%
– Auxiliary consumption: 20VA
– Rated starter current Ie:
• 17A...245A (ADX...B)
51 ADX 0110B...51 ADX 0125B • 310A...1200A (ADX...)
– Motor current: 0.5...1 Ie
– Overload current:
• 105% Ie for ADX...B
• 115% Ie for ADX...
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; CCC for ADX 0110B
and ADX 0125B types only.
Compliant with standard: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
208-600VAC ±10% on request.
Voltages on request: higher than 415V to 690V maximum.
Accessories and software Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

5-6 pages 5-7 and 9 page 5-11 page 5-12 page 5-15
Soft starters
Accessories
Accessories for ADXL... Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

types code per Communication devices to connect LOVATO Electric
pkg products to:
n° [kg] – Personal computer (PC)
– Smartphones
CX 01 USB connection dongle 1 0.090 – Tablets.
PC ADXL with optical
connector for programming, CX 01
data download, diagnostics and This USB/optical dongle, complete with cable, allows the
CX 01 frontal connection of products compatible with PCs
firmware update
without having to disconnect the power supply from the
CX 02 Wi-Fi connection dongle 1 0.090 electric panel.
PC ADXL for data download, The PC identifies the connection as a standard USB.
programming, diagnostics and
CX 02
EXC RDU1
cloning
Remote keypad, LCD display 1 0.360
Via Wi-Fi connection, compatible LOVATO Electric 5
CX 02 products can be viewed on PCs, smartphones and tablets
with touchscreen, 128 x 112 with no need for cabling.
pixel, IP65 protection, 3m cable
For dimensions, wiring diagrams and technical
EXC 1042 RS485 communication board 1 0.010 characteristics, consult the manuals available online in
EXC CON 01 RS485/Ethernet converter, 1 0.400 the Download section of the following website:
12…48VDC, including DIN www.LovatoElectric.com
mounting guide kit
EXC M3G 01 RS485 gateway/3G modem, 1 0.340 EXC RDU1
9.5…27VAC/9.5…35VDC, Through the EXC RDU1 remote keypad, it is possible to
including antenna and edit the ADXL programming, view the motor measures,
EXC RDU1 operational data and alarms and turn off the alarms.
programming cable
– 100...240VAC / 12...24VDC double power supply
EXP80 03 DIN guide mount kit 1 0.145 – 128x112 pixel touchscreen LCD display
for ADXL0030...ADXL0115 – Built-in buzzer
EXP80 04 Fan for ADXL0030...ADXL0115 1 0.030 – Static output (SSR) to signal general alarms
(codes ADXL0075...ADXL0115 – Opto-isolated RS485 communication port
max. of two EXP80 04 fans) – Conductor cross section: 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12 AWG;
18...12 AWG for UL/CSA)
– Tightening torque: 0.56Nm (4.5lbin)
– Compatible with ADXL...
EXC 1042 EXP 8003 – 3m cable.

Remote keypad Order code Description Qty Wt Pending certification: cULus.
for ADX... types per Reference standards: IEC/EN 61010-1:2001,
pkg IEC/EN 61000-6-2:2005, EN 61000-4-3:2006,
EN 61000-6-3:2001, UL508, C22.2 n° 14-95.
n° [kg]
51 ADX TAST Remote keypad 1 0.350 ADX TAST remote keypad
96x96mm, 2x16 backlit The flush-mount ADX TAST remote keypad is identical to
LCD, 208-240VAC supply the one on board the soft starter except for the start and
c/w 3m/10ft long stop controls of the motor, which are permanently
connecting cable disabled. With this keypad, starter setup can be
conducted, motor readings and operating data displayed
31 PA 96X96 Protective cover (IP54) 1 0.077 and data and parameter transfer (ADX remote keypad)
51 C2 PC ADX connecting 1 0.090 made as well.
cable, 1.8m/6ft long A backup copy of the starter data and parameter setup is
51 ADX TAST obtainable with the transfer functions.
51 C3 PC GSM modem 1 0.210
connecting cable, It is supplied standard with a 3m long cable and suitable
1.8m/6ft long connectors to complete the link to the ADX RS485 port.
Accessories for ADX... 51 C4 PC 4 PX1 1 0.147 Advantages

converter drive – Flush mount
types connecting cable, – Messages in selectable language
1.8m/6ft long – Readings display
51 C5 ADX Analog modem 1 0.111 – Parameter setup
connecting cable, – Two-way data and parameter transfer.
1.8m/6ft long
51 C6 ADX 4 PX1 1 0.102 Operational characteristics
converter drive – Auxiliary supply voltage: 208...240VAC ±10%
connecting cable, – Power consumption: 6.9VA
1.8m/6ft long – Dissipation: 3.2W
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
51C4 51 C7 ADX GSM modem 1 0.101 – RS485 port: RJ4/4 connector
connecting cable, – Supply: Removable 3-pole 2.5 mm2 terminal block.
1.8m/6ft long – Display: 2 line, 16 character backlit LCD
51 C8 ADX remote keypad 1 0.080 – LED indication (3): POWER, RUN and FAULT
connecting cable, – Keys (6) ENTER/START, RESET/STOP,
3m/10ft long PREVIOUS, NEXT, and
4 PX1 RS232/RS485 converter 1 0.600 – Ambient conditions
drive, opto-isolated, • Operating temperature: -10...+60°C
220...240VAC • Storage temperature: -20...+70°C
(or 110...120VAC) – Flush mount enclosure
– Degree of protection on front: IP41; IP54 with
Consult Customer Service for modem details; see contact details on protective cover.
4PX1 inside front cover.
RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud-rate maximum,
automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision, 220...240VAC ±10% Certifications and compliance
supply (110...120VAC available on request). Certifications obtained: EAC.
Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 61000-6-1 and
IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for 4 PX1 types.
Dimensions
page 5-12 5-7
Soft starters
Software
For ADXL... General characteristics

By using the software, the quick setup of the soft
configuration and remote control software starter can be carried out via PC, avoiding possible
parameter programming errors.
The parameter programming of ADXL… soft starters can
also be PC saved and quickly uploaded into another
device requiring the same programming.
It allows the following operations:
– Graphical and numerical display of measurements
– Soft starter status
– Access all setup parameters
– Saving / loading parameters
– Highlighting of changed values
5 – Resetting to default values.
software allows to remotely control and

supervision and energy management software monitor the soft starters. The software structure
and applications are based on MS SQL relational
databases and the data can be consulted via the most
common browsers. It is an extremely versatile system
that can be accessed via intranet network, VPN
or internet by several users/units at the same time.
For details, consult section 27 or our Customer Service
office; see contact details on inside front cover.
APP for smartphones and tablets

The application allows the user to set the
soft starter, view the alarms, send commands, read the
measures, download the events and submit the data
collected via e-mail. The connection is made by Wi-Fi
APP
with a smartphone or tablet using the CX 02 device.
It is iOS and Android compatible.
APP for smartphones and tablets

The ADXL soft starters are equipped with built-in NFC
technology. Using the LOVATO application it is
possible to program the parameters and save them on
smartphones and tablets. Available only for Android
devices.
APP
5-8
Soft starters
Software
For ADX... Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per – Display of all the monitored data by the ADX starter
pkg – Virtual ADX keypad with access to all functions
– Parameter adjustment, only accessible with password,
n° [kg] saving on disc and subsequent reloading on ADX
starter
51 ADX SW PC-ADX remote control 1 0.550 – Display of starter events log showing time and date
software with proprietary entry
ASCII and Modbus-RTU – Graphic display of monitored data during operation
protocols and a set of – Connection through RS232/RS485 converter or
connecting cables 51 C2, modem
51 C3, 51 C5, 51 C7 for – GSM-modem management with SMS or e-mail
communications via transmission
RS232 port, analog
or GSM modem
– AUTOCALL function for automatic PC call
– Program configuration in 4 languages (Italian, English,
5
Spanish and French)
51 ADX SW The remote control software consents to the PC supervision
– Easy installation and setup.
of all ADX soft starter functions, including: parameter setup,
real-time readout display, graphics of monitored parameter
Advantages
data during operation and starter events log display, each
– GSM network management for inaccessible
with time and date entry.
applications where there are no telephone lines
The PC-ADX connection is made by cable via the RS232 port,
– Call management during alarm conditions for SMS or
RS232/RS485 converter, analog or GSM modem.
email transmission
The RS232 port is not suitable for permanent connections.
– No limit for remote control distance
The connection via modem permits the ADX starter to advise
– Possibility of remote motor starting
alarm conditions, that is an automatic link to the remote PC.
– Reduction of service time
GSM modem represents the ultimate solution for unmanned
– Reduction of maintenance and downtime.
applications or where there are no telephone lines.
Interesting communication features are available with this
type of modem, such as:
– SMS (Short Message Service): At alarm conditions, the
ADX can send its ID and alarm code, with time and date
entry. The advantage is the possibility of reaching service
people, without delay, wherever they are located.
– Email (via Internet): a message with the same structure as
mentioned above can be transmitted to a specified
mailbox. The advantages of this type of message with
respect to the SMS are that any communication, received
through Internet mail server, is permanent and a vast
number of these can be received and reviewed at any
time.
Example of main window frame using 51 ADX SW remote control software
5-9
Soft starters
SOFT STARTER
ADXC 012...ADXC 032...
45 (1.77”) 109.8 (4.32”) Ø5.2 (0.20”)
ADXC
30 60
35mm
125 (4.92”)
105 (4.13”)
115 (4.53”)
DIN rail
0 85%
5 10
t
1 20s IEC/EN
60715
5 10
ALARM t
0 20s
RAMP / BYPASS
SUPPLY
F1 F2
5 ❶
106 (4.17”) ❶ 2 x M5
ADXC 037...ADXC 045...

153.8 (6.05”) 36
45 (1.77”) (1.42”)
❶
5.2 (0.20”)
4.8 (0.19”)
®
ADXC
121 (4.76”)
30 60
35mm
U
132 (5.20”)
125 (4.92”)
105 (4.13”)
123 (4.84”)
0 85%
5 10
t DIN rail
1
5
20s
10
IEC/EN
ALARM
0 20s
t
60715
RAMP / BYPASS
SUPPLY
6.46 (0.25”)
12 11/21 24 F1 F2 ST
150 (5.90”) ❶ 2 x M5
ADXL 0030 600...ADXL 0060 600
75 (2.95”) 170 (6.69”)

220 (8.66”)
206 (8.11”)
56 (2.20”)
ADXL 0075 600...ADXL 0115 600

95 (3.74”)
226 (8.90”)
214 (8.42”)
71 (2.79”) 180 (7.09”)
5-10
Soft starters
ADX 0017 B...ADX 0125 B

A C
TYPE A B C D E
ADX 0017B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0030B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0045B 157 (6.18”) 372 (14.64”) 223 (8.78”) 131 (5.16”) 357 (14.05”)
ADX 0060B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0075B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0085B 157 (6.18”) 534 (21.02”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 517 (20.35”)
ADX 0110B 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
B
E
ADX 0125B 157 (6.18”) 584 (22.99”) 250 (9.84”) 132 (5.20”) 567 (22.32”)
ADX 0142 B...ADX 0245 B

A C
TYPE A B C D E
ADX 0142B 273 (10.75”) 600 (23.62”) 285 (11.22”) 230 (9.05”) 560 (25.20”)
ADX 0190B 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
ADX 0245B 273 (10.75”) 680 (26.77”) 310 (12.20”) 230 (9.05”) 640 (25.20”)
B
E
D
ADX 0310...ADX 1200
A C
B
E
F
TYPE A B C D E F
ADX 0310 640 (25.20”) 600 (23.62”) 380 (14.96”) 620 (24.41”) 400 (15.75”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0365 640 (25.20”) 600 (23.62”) 380 (14.96”) 620 (24.41”) 400 (15.75”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0470 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0568 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0640 790 (31.10”) 650 (25.59”) 430 (16.93”) 770 (30.31”) 450 (17.72”) 100 (3.94”)
ADX 0820 910 (35.83”) 950 (37.40”) 442 (17.40”) 830 (32.68”) 920 (36.22”)
ADX 1200 910 (35.83”) 950 (37.40”) 442 (17.40”) 830 (32.68”) 920 (36.22”)
❶ Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
5-11
Soft starters
REMOTE KEYPAD
EXC RDU1 Cutout ADX TAST Cutout
31
(1.22”)
92
96 (3.78”) 24 19 92 (3.62”) 9 (3.62”)
(0.94”) (0.75”) 96 10 (0.35”)
(0.39”) 63
90.8 (3.57”) (3.78”) (2.48”)
96 (3.78”)
92 (3.62”)
PA96X96
(3.54”)
(3.62”)
(3.78”)
90
92
96
5
Wiring diagrams
ADXC...400 ADXC...24 ADXC...600 R2
ADXL...600
L1 L2 L3 L N
Q2
Q1
FU1
A2
KM1
KM1
A1
11
A1
24
34
14
12
21
A1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
A2
PROG. OUT.
PROG. IN. RS485

FAN +
FAN -
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
IN1
IN2
IN3
B
C
SB2
SB1
ADX...B ADX...
L1 L2 L3 L N L1 L2 L3 L N
Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2
FU1 A2
FU1 KM1
A1
8 A1
A2 K1
KM1 KM1 7
A1 A1 A1
PROG. OUT.
C1
A1
B1
L1
1/L1
N1
3/L2
5/L3
N
L
K1 K2 K3 K4
PROG. OUT. A1 A1
PE
D
5/L3
N
L
1/L1
3/L2
PROG. IN.
PROG. IN.
KM1
0-20 mA
0-20 mA
START
START
K1 K2 K3 K4
STOP
STOP
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
PROG. IN.
PROG. IN.
A2
PE
0-20 mA
C2
0-20 mA
B2
START
START
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6
STOP
STOP
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
SB2
PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6
SB2
0 1 500R
1/2W
SB1
SA1
0 1 500R
0...10VDC
1/2W
SB1
SA1
0...10VDC
5-12
Soft starters
ADXC... types
TYPE ADXC012 ADXC016 ADXC025 ADXC032 ADXC037 ADXC045

With built-in bypass relay
Motor Type Asynchronous three phase
Power at 220…240VAC 3kW / 3HP 4kW / 5HP 5.5kW / 7.5HP 9kW / 10HP 9kW /10HP 11kW / 15HP
(40°C) at 380…415VAC 5.5kW / 5HP 7.5kW / 7.5HP 11kW / 10HP 15kW / 15HP 18.5kW /20HP 22kW / 25HP
at 440…480VAC 5.5kW 7.5HP 9kW / 10HP 11kW / 15HP 18.5kW / 20HP 22kW / 25HP 22kW / 30HP
at 550…600VAC 9kW / 10HP 11kW /15HP 20kW / 20HP 22kW / 30HP 30kW / 30HP 37kW / 40HP
Supply voltage Input voltage Ue (L1-L2-L3) 220…400VAC -15…+10% (ADXC…400…); 220…600VAC -15…+10% (ADXC…600R2)
Start command Uc A1-A2: 24VAC/DC -15...+10% (ADXC…40024);
A1-A2: 110…400VAC -15…+10% (ADXC…400);
ST: 100…240VAC -15…+10% (ADXC…600R2)
Auxiliary power Us A1-A2: 100…240VAC -15%...+10% for ADXC…600R2 (Self powered for ADXC…400… from L1-L2-L3)
5
Frequency 50/60Hz ±10% self-configurable
Undervoltage recovery 174VAC (ADXC…)
Overvoltage recovery 466VAC (ADXC…400…); 700VAC (ADXC…600R2)
Control input current 0.4…1mA (ADXC…40024); 0.5…5mA (ADXC…400); 0.4…3mA (ADXC…600R2)
Number of controlled phases 2
Starting / stopping method Current limitation
Number of starts/hour at 40°C 20 10 10
(Overload cycle: (Overload cycle: (Overload cycle:
AC53B: 3-5: 175) AC53B: 4-6: 354) AC53B: 3.5-5: 355)
Minimum load current 1A 1A 5A 5A 5A 5A
Rated current In at 40°C IEC 12A 16A 25A 32A 37A 45A
(according to IEC test results) at 50°C IEC 11A 15A 23A 28A 34A 40A
at 60°C IEC 10A 13.5A 21A 24A 31A 34A
FLA current at 40°C UL 12A 17A 25A 32A 32A 41A
(based on UL test results) at 50°C UL 11A 15A 23A 28A –– ––
at 60°C UL 10A 14A 21A 24.3A –– ––
Motor protection Wrong phase sequence
Cooling system Natural
Status indication LEDs 1 red ALARM; 1 yellow RAMP/BYPASS; 1 green SUPPLY
STARTUP SETTINGS
Acceleration ramp 1…20 seconds
Deceleration ramp 0…20 seconds
Startup voltage 0…85%
RELAY OUTPUTS (ADXC…600R2 only)
NC alarm contact (11, 12) / NO bypass contact (21, 24) 3A 250VAC / 3A 30VDC
INPUT POWER CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS (L1, L2, L3, T1, T2, T3)
Number and type of terminals 6 fixed M4 screw
Conductor cross section (min…max) 2.5…10mm² (AWG 2x10…2x14)
Tightening torque /Tool 2.5Nm (22lbin) / Pozidriv 2
Cable stripping length 8mm/0.31”
AUXILIARY SUPPLY CONNECTIONS (A1, A2)
Number and type of terminals 9 fixed M3 screw
Conductor cross section (min…max) 0.5…1,5mm² (AWG 10…18)
Tightening torque / Tool 0.65Nm (5.3lbin) / Pozidriv 0
AUXILIARY CONNNECTIONS (11, 12, 21, 24, ST, F1, F2)
Type of terminals M3 screw
Conductor cross section (min…max) 0.05…1.5mm² (with cable terminal) (AWG 14…12)
Tightening torque / Tool 0,45Nm (4lbin) / Pozidriv 0
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 630VAC (ADX…400…); 690VAC (ADXC…600R2)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20°C…+40°C with no derating; >40°C…+60°C with derating (see IEC/UL rated current values given above)
Storage temperature -40°C…+80°C
Relative humidity <95% non condensing at 40°C
Maximum pollution degree 2
Installation category III
Maximum altitude 1000m
HOUSING
Mounting Screw fixing on mounting plate or on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
IEC degree of protection IP20
For ADXC...600R2 types.
5-13
Soft starters
ADXL... types
TYPE (with 2 controlled phases) ADXL...600

Motor Type Asynchronous three phase squirrel cage
Power 18.5...200kW (500VAC)
25...300HP (550/600VAC)
Rated current 30...320A
Supply voltage Power circuit 208...600VAC ±10%
Auxiliary power Us 100...240VAC±10%
Frequency 50 or 60Hz ±5% self-configurable
Cooling system natural ADXL0030600...ADXL0115600
forced ADXL0135600...ADXL0320600
Optional ADXL0030600...ADXL0115600
5 PROTECTIONS
Auxiliary supply Voltage too low
Power supply Lack of line voltage, lack of phase, out-of-range frequency,
minimum and maximum voltage and phase sequence
Motor Overload at starting (trip class 2, 10A, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40),
overload during running (trip class 2, 10A, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30), locked rotor, current asymmetry,
minimum torque and maximum starting time
Starter Overcurrent and high temperature
STARTUP AND STOP SETTINGS
Startup Torque ramp with current limit, Voltage ramp with current limit,
Constant torque with current limit
Stop Torque ramp, voltage ramp, free-wheel stop
Braking ––
DISPLAY AND PROGRAMMING
Using the built-in keyboard and display, PC with CX01 and CX02,
App NFC Configurator, App SAM1 with CX02 and remote keyboard with EXC1042
Display Backlit icon LCD display
Measure view Maximum current, L1 current, L2 current, L3 current, torque, line voltage, total PF, thermal status
motor, starter temperature, active power, motor counter, startup counter
Other views Operational status, events, alarms, measures
LED “POWER”, “RUN” and “FAULT”
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number of inputs 3
Input type 2 input with dry contact - 1 input with dry contact or PTC
Input function OFF, motor startup, motor stop, free-range stop, motor preheating, local control,
alarm disabling, thermal status reset, keyboard lock, motor selection, user alarm
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 3
Output arrangement - 2 NA: 3A 250V~ AC1 - 3A 30V= AC1
- 1 changeover: NO contact 5A 250V~ AC1 - 5A 30V= ; NC contact 3A 250V~ AC1 - 3A 30V=
Output functions OFF, motor powered, ramp completed, global alarm, limits, remote variable, Axx alarm
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
NFC, front optical port, optional RS485 (EXC1042)
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Clock ––
Operational data memory Startup counter, motor operation counter
and maintenance counter
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+40°C (up tp 60°C with derating)
Storage temperature -30°...+80°C
Maximum altitude 1000m (higher up with derating)
Operating position Vertical ±15°
HOUSING
Mounting Screw-mount on panel or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) with EXP8003 accessory for
ADXL0030 600...ADXL0115 600
5-14
Soft starters
ADX... types
TYPE ADX...B ADX...

(with 3 controlled phases) (with integrated bypass contactor) (prearranged for external bypass contactor)
Motor Type Asynchronous three phase squirrel cage
Power 7.5...132kW (ADX...B) 160...710kW
Rated current 17...245A (ADX...B) 310...1200A
Supply voltage Power circuit 208...500VAC ±10% standard 208...415VAC ±10% standard
(208...600VAC ±10% on demand) (other voltages up to 690VAC maximum demand)
Auxiliary power Us 208...240VAC ±10% 208...240VAC ±10%
Frequency 50 or 60Hz ±5% self-configurable
Cooling system Natural ADX0017...45B ––
Forced ADX0060...245B All types
PROTECTION
5
Auxiliary supply Voltage too low
Power supply Phase failure, frequency out of limits, minimum and maximum,
voltage and phase sequence, 24VDC static short circuit
Motor Overload at starting (trip class 2, 10A, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, and 40),
overload during running (trip class 2, 10A, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30), locked rotor, current asymmetry,
minimum torque and maximum starting time
Starter Overcurrent and high temperature
Analog inputs and outputs Protection against 24VDC short-circuit
STARTUP AND STOP SETTINGS
Startup Torque ramp with maximum current control
Stop Torque control free-range or deceleration
Braking DC dynamic with external relay
DISPLAY AND PROGRAMMING
By incorporated or remote keypad or PC
Display Backlit LCD 2x16 character
Selectable languages Italian, English, French, Spanish
Measure view Voltage, current, cos, torque, power (kVA, kW and kvar) and energy consumption
Other views Operating status, events, alarms, event log, data
LED “POWER”, “RUN” and “FAULT”
DIGITAL AND ANALOGUE INPUTS
Number of inputs 4
Input type 24VDC (no need for external feeder)
Fixed functions 2 for starting and stopping/reset
Multifunction input (digital) Free-wheel stopping, external alarm, motor preheat, on board control, alarm inhibition, thermal protection,
manual reset, cascade starting and keypad lock
Multifunction input (analog) Motor protection via PTC probes, acceleration and/or deceleration ramp via analog input,
analog input thresholds for motor starting and stopping, analog input thresholds for
programmable relay enable and disable, PT100 input thresholds for motor starting and stopping
and PT100 input thresholds for programmable relay enable and disable
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 4
Output arrangement 1 NO+NC: 5A 250V~ AC1 General alarm
3 NO: 5A 250V~ AC1 Programmable
Output functions Motor in running mode, started motor, braking, current threshold triggering, maintenance schedule,
cascaded startup, PROG-IN thresholds, Axx alarm
ANALOG OUTPUT
Format configuration 0...20mA, 4...20mA or 0...10V
Associated source Current, torque, motor thermal status and power factor
COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
RS232 Setup and remote control
RS485 Used for remote keypad only
VARIOUS FUNCTIONS
Clock Calendar-clock with back-up battery
Event memory 20 sequential storing of alarms/events with date and hour
Operational data memory Energy consumption counter, startup counter, motor operation counter
and maintenance counter
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -10...+45°C (higher up to maximum +45...+55°C, with derating)
Storage temperature -30°...+70°C
Maximum altitude 1000m (higher up with derating)
Operating position Vertical ±15°
HOUSING
Mounting Screw-mount on panel
IEC IP20 for ADX0017B...ADX0125B types only.
5-15
Pag. 6-3 and 4 Pag. 6-5
VE1 AND VFNC3 TYPES VLB3 TYPE

• Single-phase 200...240VAC supply • Three-phase 400...480VAC supply
• Three-phase motor power, 0.2...2.2kW / • Three-phase motor power, 0.4...30kW /
0.25...3HP ratings at 230VAC 0.54...40HP ratings at 400VAC
• Compliant with standard IEC/EN 61800-3, cat. C1 • Compliant with standard IEC/EN 61800-3, cat.
or cat. C2 without external filters C1 or cat. C2 without external filters
• Optional three-phase motor inductances for • Integrated dynamic braking circuit
VFNC3. • Optional three-phase motor inductances
• Optional braking resistors
• Parameter programming also via USB and Wi-Fi
modules.
Pag. 6-6 Pag. 6-7
VFS15 TYPE VFPS1 TYPE

• Three-phase 380...500VAC supply • Three-phase 380...480VAC supply
• Three-phase motor power, 0.4...15kW / • Three-phase motor power 18.5...630kW /
0.5...20HP ratings at 400VAC 25...1000HP ratings at 400VAC
• Compliant with standard IEC/EN 61800-3, cat. • Compliant with standard IEC/EN 61800-3, cat.
C1 or cat. C2 without external filters C1 or cat. C2 without external filters
• Integrated dynamic braking circuit • Integrated dynamic braking circuit up to 220kW
• Optional three-phase motor inductances • Optional three-phase motor inductances
• Optional braking resistors. • Optional braking resistors.
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES 6
Versions for single-phase up to

2.2kW / 3HP and three-phase up to
630kW / 1000HP
Special function for pump and fan
control using PID algorithm
Active earth leakage protection
EMC suppressor built-in all
versions
Selectable motor control mode:
V/f, vector, energy saving
Selectable digital and analog input
and output functions.
SEC. - PAGE
Variable speed drives
VE1 single-phase type ....................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
VFNC3 single-phase type ................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 4
VLB3 three-phase type ...................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 5
VFS15 three-phase type ..................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
VFPS1 three-phase type .................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 7
Accessories
Three-phase inductances ................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 8
Braking resistors ............................................................................................................................................................... 6 - 8
Other accessories .............................................................................................................................................................. 6 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 6 - 10
P ROTECTION
AND
M OTOR C ONTROL
Description VE1 VFNC3 VLB3 VFS15 VFPS1

1-phase 1-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase
Three-phase motor power (kW) normal load –– –– 0.75...37 (400V) 0.75...18 (400V) ––
6 heavy load 0.2...2.2 (240V) 0.2...2.2 (240V) 0.4...30 (400V) 0.4...15 (400V) 18.5...630 (400V)
Method of control
Constant torque V/f
Sensorless vector ––
Automatic torque boost
Variable torque (for pump and fan)
Energy saving
Vector with encoder feedback –– –– ––
Maximum output frequency 650Hz 400Hz 599Hz 500Hz 500Hz
Overload 150% for 60s 150% for 60s 150% for 60s 150% for 60s 120% for 60s
Serial communications RS485 n° 1 n° 1 n° 1 n° 1 n° 2
Protocols Modbus-RTU, Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-RTU,
Modbus-ASCII ProfiNET, canOPEN, PROFIBUS PROFIBUS
Ethercat, ProfiBUS,
EthernetIP
Digital inputs (inputs marked with can be configured as analog 5 4+1 5 6+2 6+1
or digital)
Digital outputs 1 1 2 2 3
Analog inputs (inputs marked with can be configured as analog 1 1 2 1+2 2+1
or digital)
Analog outputs 1 1 1 1 2
Sequencer (frequency/time cycles) –– –– ––
Onboard potentiometer –– ––
Auto-tuning –– ––
PID adjustment
PID SLEEP function
PID WAKE-UP function –– –– ––
FIRE function –– –– –– ––
Frequency potentiometer ––
3-wire motor running
DC braking ––
Preset speed frequency 8 15 15 15 15
Pump and fan functions
Auto-speed adjustment ––
Motor PTC thermistor input –– ––
S.T.O. (Safe Torque Off) per EN ISO 13849-1 cat. 3 –– –– Optional ––
6-2
Single phase
VE1 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per VE1 is a high-performance compact drive, with V/f torque
at 240V pkg control and boost, featuring advanced functions such as
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] the built-in PID control and sequences. It is versatile,
easy to install and program and can be used in numerous
Single-phase supply 200...240VAC 50/60Hz. applications. It has a digital display to simplify
Three-phase motor output 240VAC max. parameterising which can also be done remotely using
Built-in EMC suppressor, cat. C2. the RS485 port. Motor speed can be adjusted with the
12VDC pNp digital inlets; version with 24VDC pNp inlets front potentiometer or by using one of the preset V/f
available upon request. curves, each provided with dedicated acceleration and
VE1 02 A240 1.8 0.2 0.25 1 1.200 deceleration ramps.
VE1 04 A240 2.6 0.4 0.5 1 1.200 It can be used in general applications such as automatic
door controls, on conveyor belts, assembly, packaging
VE1 07 A240 4.3 0.75 1 1 1.200 and packing machinery, or for pump and fan control.
VE1 15 A240 7.5 1.5 2 1 1.800
VE1 22 A240 10.5 2.2 3 1 1.800 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
– Front potentiometer 6
– Voltage signals: 0...10V
VE1... VE1... M – Current signals: 4...20mA
– 8 preset speeds
– RS485 serial signals.
V/f CURVE PROGRAMMING SPECIAL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS

VE1 can handle 3 V/f preset curves and one – 5 digital multifunction inputs
programmed by the user. Sequencer – PNP 12VDC connection; 24VDC on request.
The user can program frequency-time cycles made up
3 V/f preset curves of a maximum of 8 steps, each characterised by motor PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
I – General use speed, rotation direction and step duration. – 1 programmable relay
(V)%
The sequence cycle can be carried out in diverse – 1 analog 0...10V.
100
modes:
− One single cycle with final motor stopping PROTECTION
B=10%, C=8% − One single cycle with final motor running at last – Overload
speed set – Overvoltage
Conveyor belts and − Repeat cycles with no pause. – Minimum voltage
B assembly machinery
C The sequence cycle can be stopped at any moment. – Output short circuit
– Earth/ground leakage dispersion
1 2.5
(3.0)
50 650 Hz
(60)
– Over-temperature
– Restart after momentary power loss, with
II – High initial torque programmable number of attempts.
(V)%
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
100
– PID adjustment with sleep and wake-up functions
B=15%, C=10.5% – Sequencer (work cycles)
– Motor control: V/f constant torque, variable
B Hoisting/lifting, grinders/ torque, programmable motor start and stop curves
C mills and agitators PID control (1 programmable by user)
In some applications, such as pumps or fans, the – Hour counter: Motor running hours and power supply
1 2.5 50 650 Hz output frequency of the drive is defined by the target to on hours.
(3.0) (60)
keep pressure or flow constant. Typically, by using the
III – Variable curve analog input, feedback is monitored and, with the PID Operational characteristics
offset control, the motor drive sets motor speed to – Input voltage: 200...240VAC single phase
(V)% obtain the target set-point. – Output voltage: 0...240VAC three phase
100 B=25%, C=7.7% VE1 PID control also includes the following functions: – Rated operational current: 1.8...10.5A
− Sleep: When the PID output frequency is lower than – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
Pumps and fans a programmed limit, that is the motor speed is close – Output frequency: 0...650Hz
B to the allowable minimum when propulsion is not – Current voltage: 150% for 60s
needed, the motor drive completely stops the motor – IEC degree of protection: IP20
C
for energy saving. – Ambient conditions
1 2.5 50 650 Hz − Wake-up: During sleep phase, when the PID output • Operating temperature: -10…+40°C (up to 50°C
(3.0) (60)
frequency is higher than the programmed limit, the with forced ventilation or 20% output current
BOOST motor drive picks up motor control again at a derating)
Torque boost can be applied on all preset curves with suitable speed to reach the target set-point without • Maximum altitude: 1000m
up to 10% a manual starting. • Relative humidity: 95%.
Voltage to overcome very high inertia load conditions.
PID calculated frequency Certifications and compliance
(V)%
Generated frequency Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada
100 (cULus – File E360929) as Power Conversion Equipment.
01-10
Each function also has a programmable delay time to Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61800-5-1,
B
avoid inopportune and repetitive start-stop motor IEC/EN 61800-3 cat. C2, IEC/EN 60721-3-3, UL 508 C,
cycles. CSA C22.2 n° 14
C
1 2.5 50 Hz Hz
(3.0) (60)
1 Programmable V/f curve

The user can customise a curve by defining 4 voltage / Wake up
delay
frequency points.
delay
(V)%
V4 (Vmax) Sleep
V3 (Vmid2)
V2 (Vmid1)
V1 (Vmin)
t
Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 650.00
Accessories Dimensions
pages 6-8 and 9 page 6-10 6-3
Single phase
VFNC3 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per VFNC3 is an ultra-compact drive with high performance
at 240V pkg and extremely reliable (printed circuit surface protection
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] per IEC/EN 60721-3-3).
Easily installed, VFNC3 is equipped with a front display
Single-phase supply 200...240VAC 50/60Hz. and innovative jog dial control, which simplifies the
Three-phase motor output 240VAC max. programming and control pocesses of the drive and
Built-in EMC suppressor, cat. C1. motor. The on-board RS485 interface permits an overall
VFNC3S 2002 PLW 1.4 0.2 0.25 1 1.100 remote control (supervision and communication
VFNC3S 2004 PLW 2.4 0.4 0.5 1 1.260 protocols). VFNC3 can be used in simple applications
such as extractor fans, ventilators, conveyor belts,
VFNC3S 2007 PLW 4.2 0.75 1 1 1.348 machine tools, car washes, fitness equipment, but also in
VFNC3S 2015 PLW 7.5 1.5 2 1 1.960 applications of intermediate complexity, such as pumps,
VFNC3S 2022 PLW 10 2.2 3 1 1.985 waterworks.
The vector control and the possibility to enable the motor
Operation up to 50°C without derating. auto-tuning warrants efficiency and high torques even
with very low operating frequencies.
6
M SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
VFNC3... VFNC3... Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
– Front jog dial control (potentiometer)
– External potentiometer: 1...10kΩ
– Voltage signal: 0...10V
– Current signal: 4...20mA
– Remote keypad option
– 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
– RS485 serial signals.
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
– Selectable pNp or nPn I/O logic
– 4 digital multifunction inputs
– 1 digital configurable as analog input.
“Side by Side”
Standard installation with PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
installation
gaps between one drive and – 1 relay with changeover contact
Multiple units can be
the next one. – 1 static configurable as analog 0...10V/4...20mA.
installed without side clearance
for space saving. PROTECTION
– Overcurrent and overvoltage
– Input phase loss
– Output phase loss
– Motor drive overload
– Motor overload
– Output short circuit
– Motor stall.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
– PID function for pump and fan application
– Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
different motor controls
– Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
– 15 viewable frequency values
– Start-up DC injection
– DC injection braking
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, sensorless vector,
variable torque.
– Input voltage: 200...240VAC single-phase
– Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 1.4...10A
– Output frequency: 0.1...400Hz
– Frequency modulation: 2...16kHz
– Current overload: 150% for 60s; 200% for 0.5s
– IEC degree of protection: IP20
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C (50°C with non
derating)
• Maximum altitude: 3000m (with derating)
• Relative humidity: 5...95% (with no condensing).

(File E204788) as Power Conversion Equipment;
CSA certified for Canada (File 231252) as Motor
Controllers - Miscellaneous.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61800-5-1,
IEC/EN 61800-3 - first environment cat. C1,
IEC/EN 60721-3-3, UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
6-4 pages 6-8 and 9 page 6-10
Three phase
VLB3 type Order code Out- 3-phase motor Qty Weight General characteristics
put power at per VLB3 is a compact drive with three-phase supply input.
cur- 400VAC pkg. It is ideal for general applications and, in particular, to lift
rent with heavy and manage pumps and fans, thanks to several specific
load built-in functions (S Curve, PID, torque squared control).
It does not require any space for side ventilation, allowing
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg]
to install several side-by-side drives. The user interface,
Three-phase supply 400...480VAC 50/60Hz. which comprises built-in keyboard and display, allows to
Three-phase motor output max. 480VAC. access the setting parameters easily, thanks to the use of
Built-in EMC suppressor, cat. C1. extended texts describing the functions and codes. Using
Built-in display and RS485 communication port. the USB or Wi-Fi connection accessories, the
VLB3 0004 A480 1.3 0.4 0.5 1 0.850 programming, monitoring and diagnostics can be
performed using a PC. The RS485 communication port
VLB3 0007 A480 2.4 0.75 1 1 1.100 with built-in RTU modbus and EMC filter complete the
VLB3 0015 A480 3.9 1.5 2 1 1.380 hardware supply. The logic unit can be replaced with one
of the VLB... codes, obtaining a different communication
VLB3 0022 A480 5.6 2.2 3 1 1.380
port.
VLB3 0040 A480 9.5 4 5 1 2.450
SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
6
VLB3 0055 A480 13 5.5 7.5 1 2.450 – External potentiometer: 0…10kΩ
VLB3 0075 A480 17 7.5 10 1 3.950 – Voltage signals: -10…10VDC (two-pole)
VLB3 0110 A480 23.3 11 15 1 3.950 – Current signals: 0/4…20mA
– Buttons on front keyboard
VLB3 0150 A480 32 15 20 1 10.650 – Remote control panel
VLB3 0185 A480 40 18.5 25 1 10.650 – 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
VLB3... – Motopotentiometer
VLB3 0220 A480 47 22 30 1 10.650
– Setting via modbus protocol (RS485).
VLB3 0300 A480 66 30 40 1 10.650
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS/OUTPUTS
– pNp or nPn connections
Operational characteristics for standard load – 5 digital inputs
Type Output 3-phase motor – 1 digital output, 1 changeover relay output
current power at 400VAC with – 2 voltage analog inputs -10…10VDC (two-pole) or
standard load current analog inputs 0/4…20mA
VLB3 0004 A480 1.5A 0.75kW 1HP – 1 voltage analog output 0…10VDC (two-pole) or
current analog output 0/4…20mA.
VLB3 0007 A480 2.7A 1.5kW 2HP
PROTECTIONS
VLB3 0015 A480 4.5A 2.2kW 3HP
– Overcurrent
The drive efficiency is 25% VLB3 0022 A480 6.4A 4kW 5HP – Output short circuit and earth/ground leakage
higher than the reference value – Overvoltage
VLB3 0040 A480 10.9A 5.5kW 7.5HP
for the IE1 class. – Undervoltage
VLB3 0055 A480 15A 7.5kW 10HP – Phase loss
VLB3 0075 A480 19.6A 11kW 15HP – Motor heat overload (I2t)
VLB3 0110 A480 27.1A 15kW 20HP – Motor PTC heat protection
– Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
VLB3 0150 A480 36.9A 18.5kW 25HP – Overspeed
VLB3 0185 A480 46.1A 22kW 30HP – Speed reverse.
VLB3 0220 A480 54.2A 30kW 40HP FUNCTIONS
VLB3 0300 A480 76.1A 37kW 50HP – Speed or torque control
Operation up to 45°C without power derating. – V/f linear or squared curves
Heavy-duty load: 150% overload for 60s. – Open or closed ring vector control
Standard load: 120% overload for 60s. – Energy-saving ECO control
– S curves
– Quick speed search
– Access to DC bus
– DC braking and DC injection at start
Accessories for VLB3 Order code Description Qty Wt – Built-in PID with sleep and wake-up thresholds
per – Programmable frequency/time cycles
pkg. – Ideal for asynchronous or permanent magnet motors
n° [kg] – Different parameter configurations
– User menu (favorite parameters)
VLBX C01 Display and keyboard 1 0.032 – Safe Torque Off (STO) input accessory class SIL 3
VLBX P01 Door-mount installation kit 1 0.032 (EN62061 / EN61800-5-2).
VLBX C02 USB communication module 1 0.032 Operational characteristics
VLBX C01 VLBX C02 VLBX C03 Wi-Fi communication module 1 0.032 – Input voltage: 400...480VAC three-phase
VLBX SM S.T.O. (Safe Torque Off) module 1 0.032 – Rated operational current: 1.3…66A
– Mains frequency: 45...65Hz
VLBX L01 Logic unit with can OPEN 1 0.209 – Output frequency: 0...599Hz
VLBX L02 Logic unit with ProfiBUS 1 0.209 – Frequency modulation: 2...16kHz
– Current overload: 150% for 60s; 200% for 0.5s
VLBX L03 Logic Unit with ProfiNET 1 0.209 – IEC degree of protection: IP20
(available upon request) – Ambient conditions
VLBX L04 Logic Unit with Ethercat 1 0.209 • Operating temperature: -10...+60°C (45°C without
(available upon request) derating)
VLBX L05 Logic Unit with EthernetIP 1 0.209 • Maximum altitude: 3000m (with power derating)
(available upon request) • Relative humidity: 5...95% (with no condensing)
– Side-by-side installation
– Built-in EMC suppressor (EN61800-3)
motor cable length:
up to 3m for cat. C1; up to 20m for cat. C2
– IE2 efficiency level (EN50598-2).
Certifications obtained: cULus, CSA, EAC.
Compliant with standards: EN61800-5-1, UL61800-5-1,
VLBX L... CSA 22.2 No. 274.
pages 6-8 and 9 pages 6-10 to 12 6-5
Three phase
VFS15 type Order code Output 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
current motor power per The high quantity of functions available and the construction
at 400V pkg characteristics allow to use the VFS15... speed drive in
heavy load many fields: waterworks and methane piping ducts,
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] cement, paper, chemical and petrochemical industries.
The EASY function key allows direct switching to a
Three-phase supply 380...500VAC 50/60Hz . customised menu with typical programming parameters
Three-phase motor output 500VAC max. for a dedicated application in order to quickly reach them
Built-in EMC suppressor, cat. C3. for eventual consultation or changes.
VFS15 4004 PLW 1.5 0.4 0.5 1 1.800 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
VFS15 4007 PLW 2.3 0.75 1 1 1.800 Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
VFS15 4015 PLW 4.1 1.5 2 1 1.800 – Front potentiometer
– External potentiometer: 1...10kΩ
VFS15 4022 PLW 5.5 2.2 3 1 3.200 – Voltage signal: 0...10V
VFS15 4037 PLW 9.5 4 5 1 3.200 – Current signal: 4...20mA
VFS15 4055 PLW 14.3 5.5 7.5 1 5.500 – Keypad on front
6 VFS15 4075 PLW 17 7.5 10 1 5.500
– Remote keypad option
– 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
VFS15 4110 PLW 27.7 11 15 1 8.400 – RS485 serial signals.
VFS15...
VFS15 4150 PLW 33 15 20 1 8.400 PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
– Selectable pNp or nPn I/O logic
Operational characteristics for normal load conditions – 6 digital multifunction inputs
Type Current 3-phase motor power – 2 digital configurable as analog input.
at 400VAC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
with standard load – 1 relay with changeover contact and 1 relay with NO
VFS15 4004 PLW 2.1A 0.75kW 1HP contact; 1 transistor and 1 analog configurable as
0...10VDC or 4...20mA.
VFS15 4007 PLW 3A 1.1kW 1.5HP
PROTECTION
VFS15 4015 PLW 5.4A 2.2kW 3HP – Overcurrent and overvoltage
VFS15 4022 PLW 6.9A 3kW 4HP – Input and output phase loss
VFS15 4037 PLW 11.1A 5.5kW 7.5HP – Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
– Drive overtemperature and excessive torque
VFS15 4055 PLW 17A 7.5kW 10HP – Earth/ground fault.
VFS15 4075 PLW 23A 11kW 15HP SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
VFS15 4110 PLW 31A 15kW 20HP – PID function for pump and fan application
VFS15 4150 PLW 38A 18.5kW 25HP – Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
Operation up to 50°C without derating.
Heavy-duty load: 150% overload for 60s. – Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
Standard load: 120% overload for 60s. – 15 viewable frequency values
200-240VAC three-phase version available on request; consult Customer – DC-Bus access for DC power supply
Service for details; see contact details on inside front cover. – Capacitor pre-charge circuit
– Integrated dynamic braking circuit; optional external
braking resistor
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, variable torque,
VFS15... M sensorless vector
– Automatic motor torque boost control
– Logic “Myfunction” mode permits to combine among
each other inputs, outputs and drive states including
ON/OFF delay timing, to elaborate more complex
functions and comparators
– DC injection braking
– Auto-tuning
– Frequency potentiometer (speed adjustment via 2
external pushbuttons)
– Quick parameter search and programming
– Sequential starting control for sets of motors
– SLEEP function: automatic motor stopping after
continuous running at minimum frequency
– Start-up DC injection
“Side by Side” – OVERRIDE function for summing analog VIA-VIB inputs.
installation
Standard installation
Multiple units can be
with gaps between one Operational characteristics
installed without side clearance
drive and the next one. – Input voltage: 380...500VAC three-phase
for space saving. – Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 1.5...38A three-phase
– Output frequency: 0...500Hz
– Current overload for 60s: 120% for normal load;
150% for heavy load
– Low speed torque: 200% 0.3Hz
– IEC degree of protection: IP20;
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C (50°C without
derating)
• Maximum altitude: 1000m
• Relative humidity: 20-93% (with no condensing).
Certifications and complience
Controllers - Miscellaneous; AS C-tick.
Compliant with standards: EN 50178, IEC/EN 61800-3 -
first environment cat. C2 or second environment cat. C3,
UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
6-6 pages 6-8 and 9 pages 6-12 and 13
Three phase
VFPS1 type Order code Out- 3-phase Qty Weight General characteristics
put motor per VFPS1 is a motor drive combining the most advanced
cur. power pkg. and optimised mode for energy saving with a compact
at 400VAC and complete line as well as a function software
[A] [kW] [HP] n° [kg] dedicated to pump and fan applications.
The built-in EMC filters and the DC reactors supplied with
Three-phase supply 380...480VAC 50/60Hz. the drive allow to significantly reduce the generated
Three-phase motor output 480VAC max. harmonic distortions and to limit the input current to a
Built-in EMC suppressor, cat. C3. maximum value of 1.1 times the output current.
VFPS1 4185 PLWP 41 18.5 25 1 22.200 QUICK mode provides for a customised menu of 32
VFPS1 4220 PLWP 48 22 30 1 23.700 specific parameters for a single application, inhibiting
access to all the other parameters.
VFPS1 4300 PLWP 66 30 40 1 32.500
VFPS1 4370 PLWP 79 37 50 1 32.800 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by:
VFPS1 4450 PLWP 94 45 60 1 54.000 – External potentiometer: 1...10kΩ
VFPS1 4550 PLWP 116 55 75 1 54.000 – Voltage signal: 0 to 10V or -10 to +10V
VFPS1 4750 PLWP 160 75 100 1 54.000 – Current signal: 4...20mA or 0...20mA 6
– Keypad on front
VFPS1 4900 PCWP 179 90 125 1 100.000 – Remote keypad option
VFPS1 4110K PCWP 215 110 150 1 100.000 – 15 preset speeds via digital inputs
Three-phase supply 380...440VAC 50Hz/380...480VAC 60Hz. – RS485 serial signals.
VFPS1...
Three-phase motor output 440/480VAC max. PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
Built-in EMC suppressor, cat. C3. – Selectable pNp or nPn I/O logic
VFPS1 4132K PCWP 259 132 200 1 127.000 – 6 digital multifunction inputs
VFPS1 4160K PCWP 314 160 250 1 138.000 – 1 digital configurable as analog input.
VFPS1 4220K PCWP 427 220 350 1 161.000 PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
VFPS1 4250K PCWP 481 250 400 1 194.000 – 1 with relay (changeover contact)
– 2 static of which 1 programmable with pulse train
VFPS1 4280K PCWP 550 280 450 1 204.000 – 2 analog 0...10VDC o 0...20mA o 4...20mA
VFPS1 4315K PCWP 616 315 500 1 204.000
PROTECTION
VFPS1 4400K PCWP 759 400 600 1 302.000 – Overcurrent and overvoltage
VFPS1 4500K PCWP 941 500 700 1 320.000 – Output short circuit and earth/ground leakage
VFPS1 4630K PCWP 1181 630 1000 1 462.000 – Drive, motor and braking resistor overload
– Drive overtemperature
Operation up to 50°C without derating. – Motor stall
Consult Customer Service for details; see contact details on inside front
cover. – Too low torque.
240VAC three-phase available on request except for VPS1 4110 KPCWP
type. SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
– PID function for pump and fan application
– Dual set of independent parameters and ramps for two
VFPS1... M – Automatic restarting and instantaneous speed tuning
– 15 viewable frequency values
– DC-Bus access for DC power supply
– Built-in DC reactor for reduced harmonic content at
input
– DC braking board standard-supplied up to 220kW/
350HP rating; optional external braking resistors
– DC injection at starting
– Motor control: constant torque V/f, variable torque,
torque boost with automatic starting, sensorless
vector, vector control in closed-loop conditions
– Auto-tuning
– Frequency potentiometer; speed adjustment via
2 external push buttons
– SLEEP function: automatic motor stopping after
continuous running at minimum frequency
– FIRE control function: specified speed maintained
even in alarm conditions
– Built-in PTC thermistor input.
– Output voltage: ≤ input voltage
– Rated operational current: 41...1181A
– Mains frequency: 50/60Hz ±5%
– Output frequency: 0.5...500Hz
– Current overload: 120% for 60s, 135% for 2s
– IEC degree of protection: IP00 for all except
VFPS1 4185 PLWP with IP20; IP55 on request
• Operating temperature: -10...+60°C (50°C without
derating)
• Maximum altitude: 1000m without derating; up to
3000m with derating
• Relative humidity: 20...93% (with no condensing).
Controllers - Miscellaneous; AS C-tick.
IEC/EN 61800-3 - first environment cat. C2 or second
environment cat. C3, UL508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
pages 6-8 and 9 pages 6-13 and 14 6-7
Accessories
Three-phase inductances Order code Ie Induc- Output Qty Weight General characteristics
tance per VLBX L590 three-phase inductance applies to VLB3...
pkg. drives, from 22kW or 30 kW.
[A] [mH] [kW] n° [kg] The three-phase inductances, IND type, can be connected
to the drives type VFNC3..., VFS11... and VFPS1... in the
Inductances for VLB3... drives. following ways:
VLBX L590 50 0.59 22...30 1 8.350 – Drive input, to reduce the harmonic content upstream,
Inductances for VF... drives. with consequent reduction of the input current
absorbed by the drives;
IND2020 12 1 0.75...4 1 1.850 – Drive output, to reduce the voltage peaks generated by
IND2030 25 0.6 5.5...11 1 2.670 the drive towards the motor, or when several parallel
IND3040 50 0.2 15...22 1 7.220 motors are simultaneously controlled by the drives.
Inductances can be applied also on the input of drives
IND4040 100 0.15 30...45 1 14.410 with single-phase power supplies.
IND4075 150 0.08 55...75 1 21.680 For the correct choice, select the inductance with Ie
IND4090 300 0.04 90...110 1 27.000 current rating equal to or greater than the rated current of
the drive they will be used with.
6 IND... IND5060 400 0.03 132...160 1 37.600
IND5080 600 0.02 220...250 1 45.000 Operational characteristics IND...type
IND7070 800 0.016 280...315 1 62.000 – Class: H
– Current: 12-800A
For more information on the size of the inductances for currents higher – Ambient conditions:
than 800A, consult our Customer Service; see contact details on inside
• Operating temperature: -25...+100°C.
front cover.
Operational characteristics VLBX L... type

Reference standards
Braking resistors Order code Output Resis- Output Qty Wt General characteristics
tance per Braking resistors can be connected to drives in order to
pkg. absorb the power generated during the motor stop phase.
[W] [Ω] [kW] n° [kg] Operational characteristics
Resistors for VLB3... drives. – Maximum applicable voltage: 1000V
VLBX R390 100 390 0.4...0.75 1 0.260 – Connection: With 250mm cable for ROF; directly on the
resistor terminal for ROPPE
VLBX R180 200 180 1.5...2.2 1 0.630 – IEC degree of protection: IP54 for R0F; IP20 for ROPPE.
VLBX R047 200 47 4...5.5 1 0.500
VLBX R027 200 27 7.5...11 1 0.500 Reference standards
VLBX R018 800 18 15 1 4.200 IEC/EN 60664-1.
VLBX R015 800 15 18.5...22 1 4.200
VLBX R007 1900 7.5 30 1 9.500
Resistors for VF... drives.
ROF20150 200 150 0.4...0.75 1 0.220
ROF20100 200 100 1.5...2.2 1 0.210
ROF35060 350 60 3.7...5.5 1 0.610
ROF50035 500 35 7.5 1 0.773
ROF80030 800 30 11...15 1 1.570
ROPPE11430 1300 30 18.5 1 3.856
ROPPE12515 2200 15 22...30 1 5.200
ROF... ROPPE14008 4000 8 37...75 1 6.780
ROPPE... ROPPE24003 8000 3 90...220 1 11.000
For inverters with output higher than 220kW, consult our Customer
Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Dimensions
6-8 page 6-15
Accessories
Others Order code Description Qty Wt Compliance

per Compliant with standards: EN 50178, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
pkg. IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for MITOS... and RKP....
n° [kg]
For VE1... drives.
VEX C00 Connecting cable for VE1 1 0.080
RS485 port with PC USB
port, 1.8m long
For VFNC3…-VFS15…-VFPS1… drives.
MITOSVT6 Remote control panel with 1 0.200
functions: motor running,
VEX C00 inverse rotation, speed
adjustment and quantities
control. IP65.
16 character-2 line display.
Cable excluded 6
MITOSVT6ECO Remote control panel for 1 0.200
quantities retention and
control of a system (PID:
pressure, temperature, etc).
IP65.
16 character-2 line display.
MITOS Cable excluded
RJ45SH05000 RJ45 wire for MITOS... 1 0.140
connection RKP002Z and
USB001Z on the drive.
5m long
RKP002Z Remote control panel 1 0.280
with functions: motor
running, speed adjustment,
quantities control and
parameter setting. IP20.
4 character-7 segment
display. Cable excluded
USB001Z Drive programming 1 0.260
module
For VFNC3…-VFS15…-VFPS1… -VLB3... drives.
LPC PA001 1kOhm potentiometer 10 0.040
1 turn, complete with
operating knob.
IP66, IP67 and IP69K.
51 PT25H101K 1kOhm potentiometer 1 0.100
10 turns, complete with
operating knob
LPC PA...
The VE1 programming software is standard supplied with the cable.
RJ45 cable to be purchased separately; order code RJ45SH05000.
For USB001Z module PC USB port connection, use a normal USB
cable, USB1.1/2.0 compatible, type A-B connection, maximum
recommendable length 1m only.
Consult our Customer Service to request the drive remote control
software; see contact details on inside front cover.
Dimensions
page 6-15 6-9
SINGLE-PHASE DRIVES
VE1 02 A240 - VE1 04 A240 - VE1 07 A240 VE1 15 A240 - VE1 22 A240
63 (2.48”) 139.2 (5.48”) 108 (4.25”) 147.3 (5.80”)

131 (5.16”)
122 (4.80”)
131 (5.16”)
121 (4.76”)
141 (5.55”)
141 (5.55”)
6 61 (2.40”) 136 (3.35”) 108 (4.25”)
144.2 (5.68”)
72 (2.83”)❶ 118 (4.64”)❶
In a control panel when more than one VE1 is installed side by side, provide sufficient air circulation space, of at least 5cm between each, in order to ensure proper cooling effect.
VFNC3S 2002 PLW...VFNC3S 2007 PLW VFNC3S 2015 PLW - VFNC3S 2022 PLW
72 (2.83”) 105 (4.13”)

60 (2.36”) A 93 (3.66”) 156 (6.14”)
Ø5
(0.20”) Ø5
(0.20”)
118 (4.64”)
143 (5.63”)
142 (5.59”)
B
5 5
(0.20”) (0.20”)
TYPE A B
VFNC3S 2002PL W 102 (4.01”) 131 (5.16”)
VFNC3S 2004PL W 121 (4.76”) 118 (4.64”)
VFNC3S 2007PL W 131 (5.16”) 118 (4.64”)
THREE-PHASE DRIVES
VLB3 0004 A480 VLB3 0007 A480
60 (2.36”) 130 (5.12”) 60 (2.36”) 130 (5.12”)
155 (6.10”)
180 (7,09”)
214 (8.42”)
214 (8.42”)
(1.22”)
31
6-10
VLB3 0015 A480 - VLB3 0022 A480 VLB3 0040 A480 - VLB3 0055 A480
60 (2.36”) 130 (5.12”) 90 (3.54”) 130 (5.12”)
278 (10.94”)
250 (9.84”)
278 (10.94”)
250 (9.84”)
6
VLB3 0075 A480 - VLB3 0110 A480

120 (4.72”) 130 (5.12”)
244 (9.61”)
305 (12.01”)
6-11
VLB3 0150 A480 - VLB3 0185 A480 - VLB3 0220 A480 - VLB3 0300 A480
C A
B
D
TYPE A B C D
VLB3 0150 A480 222 (8.74”) 347 (13.66”) 204.5 (8.05”) 366 (14.41”)
VLB3 0185 A480 222 (8.74”) 347 (13.66”) 204.5 (8.05”) 366 (14.41”)
VLB3 0220 A480 222 (8.74”) 347 (13.66”) 204.5 (8.05”) 366 (14.41”)
VLB3 0300 A480 230 (9.05”) 450 (17.72”) 250 (9.84”) 520 (20.47”)
THREE-PHASE DRIVES
VFS15 4004 PLW - VFS15 4007 PLW - VFS15 4015 PLW
(0.20”)
5
Ø5 107 (4.21”) 153 (6.02”) 7.5

(0.20”) (0.29”)
STATUS
RUN
%
PRG
MON
Hz
RUN STOP
EASY MODE
121.5 (4.78”)
130 (5.12”)
.5
R2
13 (0.51”)
93 (3.66”)
VFS15 4022 PLW...VFS15 4037 PLW

2 - Ø5
(0.25”)
140 (5.51”) 160 (6.30”)

6.5
(0.20”) 7.5
(0.29”)
170 (6.69”)
157 (6.18”)
(0.55”)
14
2-R2.5
7 126 (4.96”)
(0.27”)
6-12
VFS15 4055 PLW - VFS15 4075 PLW

(0 Ø11 . 5
.43 R2
”)
(0.31”)
8
150 (5.90”) 170 (6.69”) 7.5
(0.20”)
(0.29”)
Ø5
STATUS
RUN
%
PRG
MON Hz
RUN STOP
210 (8.27”)
220 (8.66”)
EASY MODE
6
(0.47”)
12
2-R2.5
10 130 (5.12”)
(0.39”)
VFS15 4110 PLW - VFS15 4150 PLW

(0 Ø14 R3
.55
(0.35”)
”)
9
180 (7.09”) 190 (7.48”) 7.5

(0.27”)
(0.29”)
7
310 (12.20”)
295 (11.61”)
STATUS
RUN
%
PRG
MON Hz
RUN STOP
EASY MODE
(0.79”)
20
2-R3
10 160 (6.30”)
(0.39”)
THREE-PHASE DRIVES
VFPS1 4185 PLWP VFPS1 4220 PLWP...VFPS1 4370 PLWP
Ø6 Ø6
A (0.24”) C (0.24”) C
A
B
E
B
E
F
D Fig. 1 Fig. 2
D
TYPE Fig. A B C D E F
VFPS1 4185 PLWP 1 230 (9.05”) 409 (16.10”) 191 (7.52”) 210 (8.27”) 386 (15.20”) 16 (0.63”)
VFPS1 4220 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 420 (16.53”) 212 (8.35”) 206 (8.11”) 403 (15.87”) —
VFPS1 4300 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 550 (21.65”) 242 (9.53”) 206 (8.11”) 529 (20.83”) —
VFPS1 4370 PLWP 2 240 (9.45”) 550 (21.65”) 242 (9.53”) 206 (8.11”) 529 (20.83”) —
6-13
VFPS1 4450 PLWP...VFPS1 4750 PLWP

A C
Ø9
(0.35”)
Fig. 3
VFPS1 4900 PCWP

VFPS1 4110K PCWP...VFPS1 4630K PCWP
A C
Ø11.5
(0.45”)
B
E
Fig. 4
TYPE Fig. A B C D E
VFPS1 4450 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4550 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4750 PLWP 3 320 (12.60”) 630 (24.80”) 290 (11.42”) 280 (11.02”) 605 (23.82”)
VFPS1 4900 PCWP 4 310 (12.20”) 680 (26.77”) 375 (14.76”) 250 (9.84”) 650 (25.59”)
VFPS1 4110 KPCWP 4 310 (12.20”) 680 (26.77”) 375 (14.76”) 250 (9.84”) 650 (25.59”)
VFPS1 4132 KPCWP 4 350 (13.78”) 782 (30.79”) 375 (14.76”) 298 (11.73”) 758 (29.84”)
VFPS1 4160 KPCWP 4 330 (12.99”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 285 (11.22”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4220 KPCWP 4 430 (16.93”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 350 (13.78”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4250 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4280 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4315 KPCWP 4 585 (23.03”) 950 (37.40”) 377 (14.84”) 540 (21.26”) 920 (36.22”)
VFPS1 4400 KPCWP 4 880 (34.64”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 831 (32.71”) 1120 (44.09”)
VFPS1 4500 KPCWP 4 880 (34.64”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 831 (32.71”) 1120 (44.09”)
VFPS1 4630 KPCWP 4 1108 (43.62”) 1150 (45.27”) 377 (14.84”) 1065 (41.93”) 1120 (44.09”)
6-14
ACCESSORIES
Three-phase inductances
IND...
Type A B C D E ØF
IND2020 115 (4.53”) 80 (3.15”) 125 (4.92”) 78 (3.07”) 55 (2.16”) 5.5 (0.22”)
IND2030 115 (4.53”) 90 (3.54”) 125 (4.92”) 78 (3.07”) 65(2.56”) 5.5 (0.22”)
IND3040 170 (6.69”) 115 (4.53”) 190 (7.48”) 115 (4.53”) 85 (3.35”) 6.5 (0.25”)
C
IND4040 240 (9.45”) 135 (5.31”) 230 (9.05”) 146 (5.75”) 80 (3.15”) 8.5 (0.33”)
IND4075 240 (9.45”) 170 (6.69”) 220 (8.66”) 146 (5.75”) 105 (4.13”) 8.5 (0.33”)
IND4090 240 (9.45”) 195 (7.68”) 220 (8.66”) 146 (5.75”) 120 (4.72”) 8.5 (0.33”)
ØF ØF
IND5060 350 (13.78”) 170 (6.69”) 325 (12.79”) 240 (9.45”) 105 (4.13”) 12.5 (0.49”)
D E IND5080 350 (13.78”) 190 (7.48”) 325 (12.79”) 240 (9.45”) 125 (4.92”) 12.5 (0.49”)
A B IND7070 440 (17.32”) 200 (7.87”) 420 (16.53”) 245 (9.64”) 120 (4.72”) 12.5 (0.49”)
6
Braking resistors Remote control panel
ROF... MITOS...
B B
D E D
55 (2.16”)
65 (2.56”)
D B
Ø
120 (4.72”) 31
(1.22”)
36
(1.42”)
Cutout
C
C
A
L
107 (4.21”)
C
56 (2.20”)
Ø
Ø Ø
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Type ROF 20 ROF 35 ROF 50 ROF 80

Fig. 1 2 2 3
A 192 (7.56”) 169 (6.65”) 299 (11.77”) 240 (9.45”)
B 30 (1.18”) 80 (3.15”) 80 (3.15”) 80 (3.15”)
C 180 (7.09”) 140 (5.51”) 180 (7.09”) 254 (10”)
D 25 (0.98”) 20 (0.79”) 20 (0.79”) 52 (2.05”)
E –– 45 (1.77”) 45 (1.77”) ––
L –– –– –– 275 (10.83”)
Ø 5 (0.20”) 5 (0.20”) 5 (0.20”) 6 (0.24”)
Braking resistors Remote control panel

ROPPE... RKP002Z
80 (3.15”)
C
115 (4.53”)
(0.64”)
16.2
(0.36”
9.2
Ø6.5
(0.25”)
E D
A B Cutout
Type ROPPE 114 ROPPE 125 ROPPE 140 ROPPE 240

A 386 (15.20”) 506 (19.92”) 626 (24.64”) 626 (24.64”)
63 (2.48”)
B 107 (4.21”) 107 (4.21”) 107 (4.21”) 197 (7.75”)

(0.64”)
C 260 (10.24”) 260 (10.24”) 260 (10.24”) 260 (10.24”)

16.4
D 80 (3.15”) 80 (3.15”) 80 (3.15”) 160 (6.30”)

E 366 (14.41”) 486 (19.13”) 606 (23.86”) 606 (23.86”)
(0.41”)
10.4
35.9 4.6
(1.41”) (0.18”)
98 (3.86”)
6-15
Page 7-4 to7 and 11 Page 7-8 and 12 Page 7-9 and 12
7-28 to 30 and 33 7-31 and 34 7-32 and 35
BUTTON ACTUATORS Ø22mm DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH SELECTOR SWITCHES Ø22mm
• Spring return flush, extended and shrouded ACTUATORS Ø22mm • Short lever
• Push-push flush and extended • Double touch with or without indicator • Long lever
• Mushroom-head • Triple touch. • Key
• Mechanical reset • Knob
• Illuminated. • Illuminated.
Page 7-13 to 15 Page 7-16 to 24 Page 7-25

7-38 to 43
PILOT LIGHTS Ø22mm ADD-ON ELEMENTS, CONTROL STATIONS
• Monoblock LED. ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR • 1 to 6 holes option without actuators
PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES • Complete units with 1 button.
MONOBLOCK BUZZERS Ø22mm • Mounting adapter
• Continuous or pulse tone. • Contact elements
• LED integrated elements
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES Ø22mm • Lamp holders
• USB • Labelling and label holders
• RJ45. • Bulbs.
Page 7-14 Page 7-37

7-36
POTENTIOMETERS Ø22mm METAL JOYSTICKS Ø22mm
• Potentiometer included in the product with • 2 directions
graduated scale. • 4 directions
• Metal potentiometer drives with: • 2 directions with mechanical interlock
– graduated scale • 4 directions with mechanical interlock
– variable index. • Complete with contact elements.
PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES 7
Simple and snap on installation

Highly conductive contacts
Robust for severe ambient
conditions
Contact operation: double breaking
action, direct opening operation
and self cleaning.
SEC. - PAGE
Ø22mm series
Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 4
Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 4
Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................ 7 - 5
Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ........................................................................................................... 7 - 5
Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 7
Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return ................................................................................................. 7 - 8
Selector switch actuators ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 9
Selector switch actuator knobs ....................................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Illuminated button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................................... 7 - 11
Illuminated push-push button actuators ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 11
Illuminated mushroom-head actuators .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 11
Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ......................................................................................... 7 - 12
Illuminated selector actuators .......................................................................................................................................... 7 - 12
Pilot light heads .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 13
Monoblock LED pilot lights, steady light ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 13
Monoblock potentiometers ............................................................................................................................................. 7 - 14
Monoblock buzzers ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 15
USB-RJ45 communication interfaces ............................................................................................................................. 7 - 15
Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 16
Mounting adapter and contact, LED, test elements ........................................................................................................ 7 - 20
series control stations ..................................................................................... 7 - 25
8 LM Ø22mm metal series
Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 28
Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 28
Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................ 7 - 29
Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ........................................................................................................... 7 - 29
Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 30
S IGNALLING
Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return ................................................................................................ 7 - 31

Selector switch actuators ............................................................................................................................................... 7 - 32
Illuminated button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................................... 7 - 33
Illuminated push-push actuators .................................................................................................................................... 7 - 33
Illuminated mushroom-head actuators .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 34
Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ......................................................................................... 7 - 34
Illuminated selector actuators ........................................................................................................................................ 7 - 35
AND
Pilot light heads .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 - 36

Potentiometer drives ....................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 36
Joysticks ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7 - 37
C ONTROL
Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 38

Mounting adapter and contact - lamp holder - test elements .......................................................................................... 7 - 41
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 7 - 46
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 7 - 51
Pushbuttons and selector switches
Ø22mm series
QUALITY TOUCH! HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION IP66, IP67 and

IP69K
The actuators have been tested to guarantee a degree of protection per
IEC/EN IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X, appropriate for use even in
extreme ambient conditions.
ELEGANT STYLE AND ERGONOMIC DESIGN

All the series elements have an ergonomic design and, at the same
10mm time, particular care has been given to minimum detail aesthetics.
LOW ACTUATOR PROFILE
LONG ACTUATOR MECHANICAL LIFE
The external actuator bezel has a low profile and
High performance characteristics assure 5,000,000 cycle mechanical
reduced front thickness.
life for spring-return actuators, 1,000,000 for double and triple touch
units and 300,000 for emergency-stop types.
7 MATERIALS RESISTANT TO OILS, SOLVENTS

AND HYDROCARBONS
USAGE AT EXTREME TEMPERATURE

CONDITIONS
Operation temperature range between -25° and +70°C.
CUSTOMISING CAPABILITY
To simplify stock management, the series includes actuators without cap or lens and
separate caps and lenses for quick installation or replacement on spring return and
cULus, EAC, RINA and CCC
push-push types; all these are sold as accessories. CERTIFICATIONS.
QUICK AND EASY ACTUATOR REDUCED DIMENSIONS AND CONTACT ELEMENTS

INSTALLATION INTERAXIS
30
Click! (1.18”)
30
(1.18”)
40 (1.57”)
40 (1.57”)
- Miniaturised size
- High electric conductivity - 5V 1mA
- Up to 9 contact elements can be
- The mounting adapter and the installed
actuators each have clearly visible - Available versions: Front and base
- Actuator fixing on the mounting reference indications making the mount with screw terminals while
Ø22.3
surface, through a Ø22mm/0.87” snap-on fitting between the two (0.88”) front-mount only with faston and
drilled hole, is obtained using its easy and intuitive. spring-clamp terminals
threaded ring, easily rotated by Minimum pitch: - Contact operation: double breaking
hand or by socket spanner/wrench. - 30x40mm/1.18x1.57” between action, direct (positive) action
Click!
drillings for two actuators on a operation and wiping effect.
mounting surface
- 30x55mm/1.18x2.16” between
drillings for two double and HIGH-LUMINOSITY LED ELEMENTS
triple-touch actuators or when
spring clamp contacts are used.
43mm (1.69”)
- Electrical contact and LED elements
- There is an anti-rotation fastener, are snapped onto the mounting
duly sized to avoid actuator rotation adapter. - Miniaturised size
on the mounting surface and to give - The activation of the middle - Long electrical life: 100,000h
an orientation reference point for contacts is standard supplied on all - Versions for base mounting and with
users during panel installation and non-illuminated spring return and screw or spring-clamp terminals
during contact fitting on the push-push button or selector switch - Overvoltage protection
actuator. actuators. - Withstand vibrations
- This anti-rotation fastener collapses - Protection against stray currents in
inside the gasket to allow fitting also - Total depth, from the external wiring
when drilled holes are round without mounting surface to the end of the - Flickering phenomenon reduction
reference index. first contact element is just - Steady and flashing light versions
- The sealing gasket for the actuator 43mm/1.69”. - Supply voltages:
mounting surface has a gripping • 12...30VAC/DC
action (suction effect) offering • 85...140VAC
additional adhesion properties. • 185...265VAC
- Test elements installed beside and
connected with the relative LED
element allow checking if all LED
elements of the installation are
working properly.
7-2
Ø22mm series
DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH EMERGENCY STOP ACTUATORS SELECTOR SWITCH ACTUATORS PILOT LIGHTS
ACTUATORS
- Lever design assures excellent grip

- Protection rating IP66, IP67, IP69K
and UL Type 4X for LED monoblock
- IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X pilot lights and pilot light heads.
degree of protection - Long life and low consumption.
- Double touch button actuators, with
- Actuator structure suitable to warrant
2 flush or 1 flush and 1 extended
direct opening operation with
buttons
mechanical latching for emergency MONOBLOCK BUZZERS
- Triple touch button actuators with
stopping per ISO 13850 and IEC/EN
2 flush and middle extended butons
60947-5-5.
- Versions with or without indicator.
- Auto-monitor contact elements are - High visibility on front or side and
available with functions to: actuator inscription shows exact 7
• Constantly control the correct switch position
installation (mounting adapter and
MECHANICAL RESET BUTTONS
NC contact with the actuator) and
proper operation of the NC contact
• Open the circuit in the case of - Continuous or pulse-tone monoblock
malfunctions (e.g. the contact buzzers in a single product.
detaches from the mounting - IP40 version (90dB/10cm) and IP66,
adapter due to strong vibrations or IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X, version
shock). (80dB/10cm) available.
- Use of Ronis keys

- Rod adjustment directly on acutator COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
front (1...4mm/0.04...0.16”).
- There is a green line around the

actuator body to spot when the
emergency stop is at rest or
activated.
- Use of Ronis keys - Activation of the middle contacts is
- Various accessories available (e.g. standard supplied on 2 and 3
yellow E-stop disks, padlockable position selector switches.
protection and rubber actuator
boots).
- Up to 6 contact elements can be
mounted
MONOBLOCK POTENTIOMETERS
- Protection rating IP65, UL Type 4X.
- USB and RJ45 for Ethernet types
SHROUD
with data transmission in both
ADAPTER FOR DIN RAIL MOUNTING directions.
- USB type 3.0 (backward compatible
with USB 2.0).
PLASTIC CONTROL STATIONS

- Potentiometer included in the
product.
- Protection rating IP66, IP67 and
IP69K and UL Type 4X.
- Resistance values from 1 to 500kΩ.
- Suitable for all Platinum and 8 LM2T

mushroom-head latch buttons,
- Permits the fitting of the Platinum
guarantees protection against
and 8 LM2T series buttons on DIN
accidental on-board machinery
rail, in panels and modular boxes.
contact.
Only 35mm/1.38” wide (2 modules).
- IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X

protection degrees.
- Empty pushbutton stations with 1 to
6 way option and complete control
stations with various mushroom-
head stop buttons
- Quick installation and wiring ease
with the relative base-mount contact
and LED elements, snap in place on
the base
- Installation of screw and spring-
clamp terminal contact and LED
elements also on the internal cover
surface.
7-3
Ø22mm series
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

spring return per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Flush (without mounting adapter). Spring return. • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPC B102 Black 10 0.025 – Degree of protection:
LPC B103 Green 10 0.025 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
• Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC B104 Red 10 0.025
LPC B105 Yellow 10 0.025 Materials
LPC B10... Polyamide.
LPC B106 Blue 10 0.025
LPC B108 White 10 0.025 Mechanical endurance
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Operating force: <0.5kg/1.1lb (actuator).
Mechanical life:
LPC B202 Black 10 0.027
– Spring return actuators: 5,000,000 cycles
LPC B203 Green 10 0.027 – Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles.
LPC B204 Red 10 0.027
Mounting adapter
LPC B205 Yellow 1 0.027
See page 7-20.
7 LPC B20... LPC B206 Blue 1 0.027 Type: LPX AU120.
LPC B208 White 1 0.027 Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling
with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also
Shrouded (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
on the cover of LPZ control stations.
LPC B302 Black 10 0.027 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC B303 Green 10 0.027
Contact elements for spring-return button actuators
LPC B304 Red 10 0.027
See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24.
Type Termination
LPC B306 Blue 1 0.027
LPC B30... Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
LPC B308 White 1 0.027 adapter (to purchase separately).
Up to 9 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left, middle
and right, one behind the other.
Push-push button Order code Colour Qty Wt They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
per pkg LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator.
actuators
n° [kg] 1NO LPX C10 Screw
Flush (without mounting adapter). LPX CF10 Faston
Push on-push off. LPXCS10 Spring clamp
LPC Q102 Black 10 0.025 1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC Q103 Green 10 0.025 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPC Q104 Red 10 0.025 LPX CF01 Faston
LPC Q105 Yellow 1 0.025 LPX CS01 Spring clamp
LPC Q10... LPC Q106 Blue 1 0.025 1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC Q108 White 1 0.025 Base mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
Extended (without mounting adapter). See example on page 7-27.
Push on-push off.
Up to 3 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator.
LPC Q202 Black 10 0.027
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC Q203 Green 10 0.027
1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC Q204 Red 10 0.027
LPC Q205 Yellow 1 0.027 Contact elements for push-push button actuators
LPC Q20...
LPC Q206 Blue 1 0.027 See page 7-20.
Type: LPX C10A (1EM)
LPC Q208 White 1 0.027
LPX C01 (1NC)
Use contact elements LPX C10A (EM) and LPXC01 (NC) only. Contacts snap onto the adapter and also internally on the
Contact elements LPX C10 (NO) and LPX C01D (LB) cannot be fitted on
these actuators. cover surface of LPZ control stations.
For the number of contacts that can be fitted, see the indication here to the Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left, middle
side. and right, one behind of the other; up to 3 elements per
control station actuator.
All these actuators are standard supplied with action plug

for middle contacts.

Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC,
RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Add-on blocks Accessories and spare parts Dimensions

7-4 pages 7-20 to 24 pages 7-16 to 19 page 7-46
Ø22mm series
Mechanical reset buttons, Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

complete unit, per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
n° [kg] – Fine rod adjustment (1-4mm/0.04-0.16”) on front with
spring return screwdriver by removing actuator cap for mechanical
Flush (5.2mm/0.2” stroke). Adjustable length 0-150mm/5.9”. reset buttons
Complete with shaft (without mounting adapter). Spring return. – Ambient conditions:
LPC R1002 Black 10 0.038 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
LPC R1003 Green 10 0.038 • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
– Degree of protection:
LPC R1004 Red 10 0.038 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPC R1196
LPC R1006 Blue 10 0.038 • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC R1196 Blue (RESET) 10 0.038
Mechanical endurance
Extended (5.2mm/0.2” stroke). Adjustable length 0-150mm/5.9”. Operating force: <0.5kg/1.1lb (actuator).
Complete with shaft (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Mechanical life: 5,000,000 cycles.
LPC R2004 Red 1 0.040
Mounting adapter
With “RESET” caption on actuator.
E.g. Not suitable for LPZ control stations. See page 7-20.
Type: LPX AU120.
Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Symbol Colour Qty Wt with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also 7
spring return, with symbol per pkg on the cover of LPZ control stations except for LPC R…
n° [kg] types.
Flush (without mounting adapter). Spring return. The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC B1102 O Black 10 0.025 Contact elements for mechanical reset buttons
LPC B1104 Red 10 0.025 See page 7-20 or 7-23.
LPC B1113 I Green 10 0.025 Type Termination
LPC B1118 White 10 0.025 Front mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter
LPC B1123 II Green 1 0.025 (to purchase separately), if any contacts are needed.
Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left and
LPC B11... LPC B1128 White 1 0.025 right, one behind the other.
LPC B1132 STOP Black 1 0.025 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPC B1134 Red 10 0.025 LPX CF10 Faston
LPC B1142 Black 10 0.025 LPX CS10 Spring clamp

LPC B1148 White 10 0.025 1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC B1152 Black 10 0.025 1NC LPX C01 Screw

LPC B1158 White 10 0.025 LPX CF01 Faston
LPC B1163 START Green 10 0.025 LPX CS01 Spring clamp
LPC B1168 White 1 0.025 1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC B21... LPC B1176 R Blue 1 0.025
LPC B1178 White 1 0.025 Contact elements for spring-return button actuators
See pages 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24.
LPC B1196 RESET Blue 10 0.025
Type Termination
LPC B1502 Black 10 0.025
Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
LPC B1512 Black 10 0.025 adapter (to purchase separately).
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Up to 9 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left, middle
LPC B2102 O Black 10 0.027 and right; one behind the other.
They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
LPC B2104 Red 10 0.027 control stations LPZ, up to 3 elements per actuator.
LPC B2132 STOP Black 1 0.027 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPC B2134 Red 10 0.027 LPX CF10 Faston
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate right or left.
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate up or down. LPX CS10 Spring clamp
1EM LPX C10A Screw
1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
LPX CS01 Spring clamp
1LB LPX C01D Screw
Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
See example on page 7-27.

1NO LPX CB10 Screw
1NC LPX CB01 Screw
The LPC B… actuators are standard supplied with action

plug for middle contacts.

RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

pages 7-20 to 24 pages 7-16 to 19 page 7-46 7-5
Ø22mm series
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Symbol Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

spring return, with symbol per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Spring return (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPCB18 50 0.027 – Degree of protection:
• Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPCB20 OPEN 50 0.027 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPCB21 CLOSED 50 0.027
Materials
LPCB22 50 0.027 Polyamide.
LPCB23 50 0.027
LPC B1253 LPCB25 + 50 0.027 Operating force: <0.5kg/1.1lb (actuator).
LPCB26 – 50 0.027 Mechanical life: 5,000,000 cycles.
LPCB27 50 0.027 Mounting adapter
LPCB28 50 0.027 See page 7-20.
Type: LPX AU120.
LPCB29 50 0.027 Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling
7 LPCB30
ALTO
50 0.027 with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also

BASSO
LPCB31 50 0.027 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.

SX
LPCB32 50 0.027
Contact elements

DX
LPCB33 50 0.027 See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24
LPCB34 MAN 50 0.027 Type Termination
LPCB35 AUTO 50 0.027 Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
adapter (to purchase separately).
LPCB38 TRIP 50 0.027
LPCB39 TEST 50 0.027 and right, one behind the other.
LPCB40 50 0.027
LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator.
LPCB41 50 0.027 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPCB42 50 0.027 LPX CF10 Faston
LPCB43 50 0.027 LPX CS10 Spring clamp
LPCB44 50 0.027 1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPCB45 50 0.027 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
LPCB46 50 0.027
LPCB47 50 0.027
1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPCB48 50 0.027
LPCB49 50 0.027 See example on page 7-27.
LPCB52 50 0.027
LPCB53 50 0.027 1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPCB54 50 0.027 1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPCB55 50 0.027
All these actuators are standard supplied with action plug
LPCB56 START
STOP
50 0.027 for middle contacts.
LPCB57 III 50 0.027
LPCB58 IV 50 0.027 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
LPCB59 50 0.027 (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC,
RINA.
LPCB60 50 0.027 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
LPCB61 50 0.027 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14
LPCB62 50 0.027
LPCB63 50 0.027
LPCB64 50 0.027
LPCB65 50 0.027
LPCB66 50 0.027
LPCB67 50 0.027
LPCB68 50 0.027
LPCB69 50 0.027
Add letter “L” if illuminated type is required.
For the type of actuator, add: 1 for flush or 2 for extended.
Add the actuator colour: 2 black only for non-illuminated type;
3 green, 4 red, 5 yellow, 6 blue, 8 white or 7 transparent for illuminated
version.
Products available on specific request for a minimum multiple quantity
of 50 pieces per type.
Consult Customer Service for assistance; see contact details or inside
front cover.
Symbol indicating dangerous voltage (IEC 60417 5036-a).
Examples of complete order codes:
+
LPC B2 25 8 – extended non-illuminated white pushbutton with symbol
LPC BL1 68 5 – flush illuminated yellow pushbutton actuator with symbol.

Ø22mm series
Mushroom head Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

pushbutton actuators per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
SPRING RETURN. • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). – Degree of protection:
LPC B6142 Black 10 0.033 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
LPC B6143 Green 10 0.033 • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC B6144 Red 10 0.033 Materials
LPC B614... Polyamide.
LPC B6146 Blue 10 0.033 Mechanical endurance
Ø60mm/2.4” (without mounting adapter). Operating force: <0.5kg/1.1lb (actuator).
Mechanical life:
LPC B6162 Black 10 0.038 – Mushroom head spring return buttons: 5,000,000 cycles
LPC B6163 Green 10 0.038 – Mushroom head latch buttons: 300,000 cycles.
LPC B6164 Red 10 0.038 Mounting adapter
LPC B6165 Yellow 10 0.038 See page 7-20.
LPC B674... Type: LPX AU120.
LPC B6166 Blue 10 0.038
Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling 7
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). on the cover of LPZ control stations.
For normal stopping. The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC B6742 Black 10 0.097
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant.
Contact elements
LPC B6744 Red 10 0.097 See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24.
LPC B6344 LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE Type Termination
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter).
For normal stopping. Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
adapter (to purchase separately). For SPRING-RETURN
LPC B6342 Black 10 0.046 types, up to 9 contacts can be fitted: 3 each on the left,
LPC B6344 Red 10 0.046 middle and right, one behind the other.
Ø30mm/1.2” (without mounting adapter). For LATCH types, up to 4 contacts can be fitted.
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
LPC B6634
LPC B6634 Red 10 0.079
1NO LPX C10 Screw
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. LPX CF10 Faston
LPC B6644 Red 10 0.079 LPXCS10 Spring clamp
LATCH, TURN KEY TO RELEASE 1EM LPX C10A Screw
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). Key code n° 455. 1NC LPX C01 Screw
For normal stopping. LPX CF01 Faston
LPC B6644 LPC B6842 Black 10 0.083 LPX CS01 Spring clamp
LPC B6842R Black 1 0.083 1LB LPX C01D Screw
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
LPC B6844 Red 10 0.083 See example on page 7-27.
LPC B6844R Red 1 0.083 Up to 3 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator.
Versions with different key codes. 1NO LPX CB10 Screw
Complete with the numeric code of the key. 1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC B684... The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E.
Example of complete code: LPC B6844R 421E.
AUTO-MONITOR CONTACT with MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH
TYPES only: 2 elements max of this type can be mounted.
Extra two contacts can be fitted on the right.
Normal operation of auto-monitor contact In case of detachment of only the contact element Two elements per actuator can be fixed internally on the
mounted on surface or on cover of control and/or of the mounting adapter with contact cover surface of LPZ control stations of which one auto-
stations element monitor type. No LED element can be installed.
Auto-monitor LPX C01SM Screw (2 stacked in the
With contact type LPX C01SM 1NC middle - LPX AU120
Contact .3-.4 closes when the If the contact LPX C01SM detaches from the actuator pos.1/3-4/6)
.3 .1
LPX AU120 mounting adapter and due to strong vibrations or shock, the equipment can
LPX…SM contact are fitted be restored to operating state only when proper 1NO LPX C10 Screw (2 stacked on the right)
.4 .2
correctly on the mushroom-head mounting of the contact with the actuator is re-
latch actuator. established resulting in contact .3-.4 closing. LPX CF10 Faston (2 stacked on the right)
Contact .1-.2 in series does not or
change state. 1NC LPX C01 Screw (2 stacked on the right)
LPX CF01 Faston (2 stacked on the right)
When the button is fully pressed,
.3 .1
contact .1-.2 opens and remains in AUTO-MONITOR CONTACT with MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH
.4 .2
this state until the button is TYPES only: 2 elements max of this type can be mounted.
released. .3 .1 .3 .1
Contact .3-.4 in series does not Only one of this type per actuator can be fixed internally on
change state. .4 .2 .4 .2
the cover surface of LPZ control stations. No LED element
With contact type LPX C02SM can be installed.
Auto-monitor LPX C02SM Screw (2 stacked )
Contact .3-.4 closes when the If the contact LPX C02SM detaches from the actuator
.3 .1 .1
LPX AU120 mounting adapter and due to strong vibrations or shock, the equipment can 2NC
LPX…SM contact are fitted be restored to operating state only when proper
.4 .2 .2
correctly on the mushroom-head mounting of the contact with the actuator is re- All these actuators are standard-supplied with action plug
latch actuator. established resulting in contact .3-.4 closing.
or
for middle contacts.
Both contacts .1-.2 in series do
not change state.
When the button is fully pressed,
.3 .1 .1
both contacts .1-.2 open and (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC,
.4 .2 .2
remain in this state until the button RINA.
is released.
Contact .3-.4 in series does not .3 .1 .1
.3 .1 .1 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
change state. .4 .2 .2 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
.4 .2 .2

Ø22mm series
Double-touch actuators, Order code Colour Symbols Qty Wt Operational characteristics

Two flush pushbuttons (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
Both spring return. – Degree of protection:
LPC B7112 Black/Red –– 5 0.030 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC B7113 Green/Red –– 5 0.030
LPC B7114 White/Black –– 5 0.030 Materials
Polyamide.
LPC B7122 Black/Red I-O 5 0.030
LPC B7123 Green/Red I-O 5 0.030 Mechanical endurance
Operating force: <0.5kg/1.1lb (actuator).
LPC B7124 White/Black I-O 5 0.030
LPC B71...
Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
LPC B7133 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.030
Mounting adapter
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without mounting
See page 7-20.
adapter). Both spring return.
Type: LPX AU120.
LPC B7212 Black/Red –– 1 0.030 Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling
LPC B7213 Green/Red –– 5 0.030 with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also
7 LPC B7214 White/Black –– 1 0.030
The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC B7222 Black/Red I-O 5 0.030
LPC B7223 Green/Red I-O 5 0.030
Contact elements
LPC B72... LPC B7224 White/Black I-O 1 0.030
See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24.
LPC B7233 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.030
Type Termination
Triple-touch actuators, Order code Symbols Qty Wt For DOUBLE-TOUCH actuators, up to 6 contacts can be
spring return per pkg fitted: 3 on the left, 3 on the right.
n° [kg] For TRIPLE-TOUCH actuators, up to 9 contacts can be
fitted: 3 each on the left, middle and right, one behind the
One middle extended buttons
other. They can also be fitted internally on the cover
(without mounting adapter). Spring return.
surface of LPZ control stations: 2 for double-touch and 3
LPC B7345 5 0.030 elements for triple-touch.
1NO LPX C10 Screw
STOP LPX CF10 Faston
LPXCS10 Spring clamp
1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC B73... LPC B7355 5 0.030 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
STOP LPX CS01 Spring clamp
1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC B7365 5 0.030 See example on page 7-27.
For DOUBLE-TOUCH actuators, 2 contacts need to be
fitted, one on the left and one on the right.
STOP For TRIPLE-TOUCH actuators, 3 contacts need to be
fitted: one each on the left, middle and right.
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC B7375 5 0.030 1NC LPX CB01 Screw

STOP Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Ø22mm series
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

lever positions per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
n° [kg] – Standard key types supplied with key code n° 455
2 position (without mounting adapter). • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
LPC S120 10 0.037 • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPC S121 10 0.037 – Degree of protection:
3 position (without mounting adapter). • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC S130 10 0.037 Materials
LPC S1...
LPC S131 10 0.037 Polyamide.
LPC S132 10 0.037 Mechanical endurance
LPC S133 10 0.037 Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
See page 7-20.
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt Type: LPX AU120.
long lever positions per pkg Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling
n° [kg] with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also
2 position (without mounting adapter). on the cover of LPZ control stations.
7
LPC S220 10 0.040
LPC S221 10 0.040 Contact elements
See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24.
3 position (without mounting adapter).
Type Termination
LPC S230 10 0.040
LPC S231 10 0.040 adapter (to purchase separately). Up to 6 contacts can be
LPC S2... LPC S232 10 0.040 fitted: 2 each on the left, middle and right or 3 each on
LPC S233 10 0.040 the left and right, one behind the other.
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt 1NO LPX C10 Screw
key position per pkg LPX CF10 Faston
n° [kg] LPXCS10 Spring clamp
2 position (without mounting adapter). 1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC S320 10 0.060 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPC S320R 1 0.060 LPX CF01 Faston
LPC S321 10 0.060 LPX CS01 Spring clamp
LPC S321R 1 0.060 1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC S340 10 0.060 Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
LPC S3... LPC S340R 1 0.060 See example on page 7-27.
LPC S330 10 0.060
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC S330R 1 0.060
1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC S331 10 0.060
LPC S331R 1 0.060 Activation of the middle contacts is coupled to the side
LPC S332 10 0.060 contacts; the relative mechanism pins are standard supplied.
LPC S332R 1 0.060
LPC S333 10 0.060
LPC S333R 1 0.060
LPC S350 10 0.060 The middle contact activation, with respect to the right
LPC S350R 1 0.060 and left side contact, can be changed by the user, if
LPC S360 10 0.060 required, by removing one or both mechanism pins.
Consult the relative instructions available online in the
LPC S360R 1 0.060 Downloads section at www.LovatoElectric.com.
LPC S370 10 0.060
LPC S370R 1 0.060 Type of position
LPC S380 10 0.060 Maintained position.
LPC S380R 1 0.060 Spring return position.
LPC S390 10 0.060 • Key extraction position.
LPC S390R 1 0.060
Rotation angles
Versions with different key codes. 2 position 3 position
Complete with the numeric code of the key.
The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E. 45° 45°
90°
Example of complete code: LPC S320 R421E.
Available only on specific request
Contact activation of 2-position selector switch Contact activiation of 3-position selector switch
Special versions
3 3
2 2 Versions with coloured keys are available upon request.
1 Column 1 Column Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
Contacts Contacts
front cover.
1 2 3 1 2 3
A — — — A —
B B — — —
RINA.
C —
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Ø22mm series

positions per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
knob – Ambient conditions:
n° [kg]
2 position (without mounting adapter) • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPC S420 10 0.037 – Degree of protection:
LPC S421 10 0.037 • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
3 position (without mounting adapter). Materials
LPC S430 10 0.037 Polyamide.
LPC S4...
LPC S431 10 0.037 Mechanical endurance
LPC S432 10 0.037 Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
LPC S433 10 0.037 Mounting adapter
See page 7-20.
Type: LPX AU120.
Contact activation of 2-position selector switch Contact activation of 3-position selector switch Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling
3 3 with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also
2 2 on the cover of LPZ control stations.
1 Column 1 Column The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
Contacts Contacts
7 1 2 3 1 2 3 Contact elements
See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24.
A — — — A —
Type Termination
B B — — —
adapter (to purchase separately). Up to 6 contacts can be
C —
fitted: 2 each on the left, middle and right or 3 each on
the left and right, one behind the other.
1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPX CF10 Faston
LPXCS10 Spring clamp
1EM LPX C10A Screw
1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
1LB LPX C01D Screw
See example on page 7-27.

1NO LPX CB10 Screw
1NC LPX CB01 Screw
Activation of the middle contacts is coupled to the side

contacts; the relative mechanism pins are standard supplied.
The middle contact activation, with respect to the right

and left side contact, can be changed by the user, if
required, by removing one or both mechanism pins.
Consult the relative instructions available online in the
Downloads section at www.LovatoElectric.com.
Type of position
Maintained position.
Spring return position.
Rotation angles
2 position 3 position
45° 45°
90°

Certifications obtained:UL Listed for USA and Canada,
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC
(pending), RINA (pending).
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Ø22mm series
Illuminated button Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

actuators, spring return per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
LPC BL103 Green 10 0.025 – Degree of protection:
LPC BL104 Red 10 0.025 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC BL105 Yellow 10 0.025
Materials
LPC BL106 Blue 10 0.025 Polyamide.
LPC BL10...
LPC BL107 Transparent 10 0.025
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Operating force: <0.5kg/1.1lb (actuator).
LPC BL203 Green 10 0.027 Mechanical life:
– Spring-return actuators: 5,000,000 cycles
LPC BL204 Red 10 0.027
– Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles
LPC BL205 Yellow 10 0.027 – Spring-return mushroom-head actuator: 5,000,000
LPC BL206 Blue 10 0.027 cycles
– Latch mushroom-head actuators: 300,000 cycles.
LPC BL207 Transparent 10 0.027
LPC BL20... Mounting adapter 7
See page 7-20.
Type: LPX AU120.
Illuminated push-push Order code Colour Qty Wt Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling
button actuators per pkg with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also
n° [kg] on the cover of LPZ control stations.
Flush (without mounting adapter). The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
Push on-push off.
Contact elements for illuminated spring-return and
LPC QL103 Green 10 0.025 mushroom-head latch actuators
LPC QL104 Red 10 0.025 See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24.
LPC QL105 Yellow 10 0.025 Type Termination
LPC QL10... LPC QL106 Blue 10 0.025 Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
LPC QL107 Transparent 10 0.025 adapter (to purchase separately).
For TYPES LPC BL1/BL2/BL61…up to 6 contacts can be
Extended (without mounting adapter). fitted: 3 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
Push on-push off. For TYPES LPC BL66…up to 4 contacts can be fitted:
LPC QL203 Green 10 0.027 2 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
LPC QL204 Red 10 0.027 They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of
LPZ control stations, up to 2 elements per actuator in
LPC QL205 Yellow 10 0.027 addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC QL206 Blue 10 0.027 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPC QL20...
LPC QL207 Transparent 10 0.027 LPX CF10 Faston
Use contact elements LPX C10A (EM) and LPXC01 (NC) only. LPX CS10 Spring clamp
Contact elements LPX C10 (NO) and LPX C01D (LB) cannot be fitted on
these actuators.
1EM LPX C10A Screw
1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPX CF01 Faston
Illuminated mushroom Order code Colour Qty Wt LPX CS01 Spring clamp
head button actuators per pkg
1LB LPX C01D Screw
n° [kg]
SPRING RETURN. Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). See example on page 7-27.
LPC BL6143 Green 10 0.035 Up to 2 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator
LPC BL6144 Red 10 0.035 in addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC BL6145 Yellow 10 0.035 1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC BL6146 Blue 10 0.035 1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC BL6148 White 1 0.035 Contact elements for illuminated push-push button
LPC BL614... LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE. actuators
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). See page 7-20.
For normal stopping. Type: LPX C10A (1EM)
LPC BL6643 Green 1 0.040 LPX C01 (1NC)
Contacts snap onto LPX AU120 adapter and also
LPC BL6645 Yellow 1 0.040 internally on the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
LPC BL6646 Blue 1 0.040 Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. right, one behind the other; up to 2 elements per control
station actuator in addition to the LED element in the
LPC BL6644 Red 10 0.040 middle position.
LPC BL664... LED light elements

See pages 7-22 to 24.

RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Ø22mm series
Double-touch actuators, Order code Colour Symbol Qty Wt Operational characteristics

spring return, per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
white indicator • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Two flush pushbuttons (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPC BL7112 Black/Red –– 5 0.030 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPC BL7113 Green/Red –– 5 0.030
LPC BL7114 White/Black –– 1 0.030 Materials
Polyamide.
LPC BL7122 Black/Red I-O 5 0.030
LPC BL7123 Green/Red I-O 5 0.030 Mechanical endurance
Operating force: <0.5kg/1.1lb (actuator).
LPC BL7124 White/Black I-O 5 0.030 Mechanical life:
LPC BL71...
LPC BL7133 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.030 – Double-touch: 1,000,000 cycles.
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without mounting – Selector switches: 1,000,000 cycles.
adapter). Both spring return. Mounting adapter
LPC BL7212 Black/Red –– 1 0.030 See page 7-20.
LPC BL7213 Green/Red –– 5 0.030 Type: LPX AU120.
7 LPC BL7214 White/Black –– 1 0.030
Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling
with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also
LPC BL7222 Black/Red I-O 1 0.030 on the cover of LPZ control stations.
LPC BL7223 Green/Red I-O 5 0.030 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator.
LPC BL7224 White/Black I-O 5 0.030 Contact elements
LPC BL72...
See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24.
LPC BL7233 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.030
Type Termination
Illuminated selector Order code Colour Type of Qty Wt
switch actuators positions per pkg.
For DOUBLE-TOUCH TYPES, up to 6 contacts can be
n° [kg] fitted: 3 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
2 position (without mounting adapter). For SELECTOR SWITCHES, up to 4 contacts can be
fitted: 2 each on the left and right, one behind the other.
LPC SL1203 Green 10 0.025
LPC SL1204 Red 10 0.025 LPZ control stations, up to 2 elements per actuator in
LPC SL1205 Yellow 10 0.025 addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC SL1206 Blue 10 0.025 1NO LPX C10 Screw
LPC SL1... LPC SL1208 White 10 0.025 LPX CF10 Faston
LPC SL1213 Green 10 0.025 LPX CS10 Spring clamp
LPC SL1214 Red 1 0.025 1EM LPX C10A Screw
LPC SL1215 Yellow 1 0.025 1NC LPX C01 Screw
LPC SL1216 Blue 1 0.025 LPX CF01 Faston
LPC SL1218 White 10 0.025 LPX CS01 Spring clamp
3 position (without mounting adapter). 1LB LPX C01D Screw
LPC SL1303 Green 10 0.025 Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base.
LPC SL1304 Red 10 0.025 See example on page 7-27.
LPC SL1305 Yellow 10 0.025 Up to 2 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator
in addition to the LED element in the middle position.
LPC SL1306 Blue 10 0.025
1NO LPX CB10 Screw
LPC SL1308 White 10 0.025
1NC LPX CB01 Screw
LPC SL1314 Red 1 0.025 Selector switch type of positions
LPC SL1315 Yellow 1 0.025 Maintained position.
LPC SL1316 Blue 1 0.025 Spring return position.
LPC SL1318 White 10 0.025 Selector switch rotation angles
LPC SL1323 Green 10 0.025 2 position 3 position
45° 45°
LPC SL1324 Red 1 0.025 90°
LPC SL1325 Yellow 1 0.025

LPC SL1326 Blue 1 0.025
LED light elements
LPC SL1328 White 10 0.025 See pages 7-22 to 7-24.
LPC SL1334 Red 1 0.025 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
LPC SL1335 Yellow 1 0.025 (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC,
RINA.
LPC SL1336 Blue 1 0.025
LPC SL1338 White 10 0.025 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Contact activation of 2-position selector switch Contact activation of 3-position selector switch
2 2
1 Contacts 1 Contacts
Column Column
1 2 1 2
A — — A —
B B — —
C —

Ø22mm series
Pilot light heads Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Without mounting adapter. • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPL 3 Green 10 0.024 – Degree of protection:
LPL 4 Red 10 0.024 • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
LPL 5 Yellow 10 0.024
LPL 6 Blue 10 0.024 Materials
LPL... Polyamide.
LPL 7 Transparent 10 0.024
LPL 1187 Transparent 10 0.024 Mounting adapter
With symbol indicating dangerous voltage (IEC/EN 60417 5036-a). See page 7-20.
Type: LPX AU120.
Pilot light heads are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87”
drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/
1.69lbft) also on the cover of LPZ control stations, with
LED element in central position.
7
LED light elements
See pages 7-20 to 7-24.

RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
LED integrated monoblock Order code Rated auxi- LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
pilot lights liary supply colour per pkg – Nominal frequency: 50-60Hz
voltage – Supply voltage: 12VAC/DC, 24VAC/DC, 48VAC/DC,
steady light n° [kg] 110VAC, 230VAC (-15%...+10% Ue)
– Consumption: ≤20mA
LPM LA3 12VAC/DC Green 10 0.021 – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a
LPM LA4 Red 10 0.021 threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on
LPM LA5 Yellow 10 0.021 cover of LPZ control stations
– Electrical life: >30,000 hours
LPM LA6 Blue 10 0.021 – Screw termination
LPM LA7 Transparent 10 0.021 – Side cable entry
LPM LB3 24VAC/DC Green 10 0.021 – Maximum tightening torque: 0.8Nm
LPM...
LPM LB4 Red 10 0.021 • Operating temperature: -5...+40°C
LPM LB5 Yellow 10 0.021 – Degree of protection:
LPM LB6 Blue 10 0.021 • per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K on front; IP20 at rear
• per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K on front.
LPM LB7 Transparent 10 0.021
LPM LD3 48VAC/DC Green 10 0.021 Materials
Polyamide.
LPM LD4 Red 10 0.021
LPM LD5 Yellow 10 0.021 Maximum conductor cross section
1 or 21.5mm2 or AWG16 cables.
LPM LD6 Blue 10 0.021
LPM LD7 Transparent 10 0.021 Wiring diagram
LPM LE3 110VAC Green 10 0.024
LPM LE4 Red 10 0.024 X2 X1
LPM LE5 Yellow 10 0.024
LPM LE6 Blue 10 0.024 Certifications and compliance
LPM LE7 Transparent 10 0.024 Certifications obtained: cULus (pending), EAC, CCC
LPM LM3 230VAC Green 10 0.024 (pending).
LPM LM4 Red 10 0.024 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
LPM LM5 Yellow 10 0.024
LPM LM6 Blue 10 0.024
LPM LM7 Transparent 10 0.024

Ø22mm series
Monoblock potentiometers Order code Resistance value Qty Wt General characteristics

per Monoblock potentiometers are typically used for
pkg. regulating the parameters of many devices (e.g. the speed
n° [kg] of the electric motors through static converters).
The monoblock body design permits direct use of the
LPC PA001 1kΩ 10 0.040 potentiometer by panel fitting with fixing ring and
LPC PA002 2.5kΩ 10 0.040 subsequent tightening of cables into the built-in terminal
LPC PA005 5kΩ 10 0.040 block.
The potentiometer is made with Cermet technology,
LPC PA010 10kΩ 10 0.040 which ensures stable, constant resistance values over
LPC PA050 50kΩ 10 0.040 time. The, UL-certified, range is made for resistance
LPC PA... LPC PA100 100kΩ 10 0.040 values from 1 to 500kΩ. All potentiometers are IP66,
IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X, which means that they can
LPC PA500 500kΩ 10 0.040 be used in demanding ambient conditions.
– Rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
– Impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 4kV
– Potentiometer included in the product
– Monoblock body with 1-turn graduated scale
7 – Any fitting position permitted
– Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a
threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on
the cover of LPZ control stations
– Resistive material: cermet
– Operation: linear
– Resistance tolerance: ±10%
– Max. power: 1W (70°C)
– Mechanical endurance: 25,000 operations
– Mechanical travel: 290°
– Side cable entry
• Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K on front
• Per IEC/EN: IP20 at rear
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K on front.
Materials
Polyamide.
Maximum conductor cross section

Screw terminal connections with three separate
connections:
– Min. cable 0.5mm2 / AWG24
– Max. cable 2.5mm2 / AWG14
– Maximum tightening torque: 0.5Nm/0.37lbft
– Flat-head screwdriver: 0.6x3.5mm/0.02x0.14”.

Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC (pending), RINA
(pending).
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

7-14 page 7-47 page 7-51
Ø22mm series
Monoblock buzzers Order code Voltage Sound Qty Wt General characteristics

intensity per Monoblock buzzers are used as sound indicators in
at 2800Hz pkg. automation systems and on-board machinery in the
production processes.
[V] [dB/10cm] n° [kg] Long life, low consumption values, compact size and the
use of materials, in accordance with the North American
Continuous or pulse tone, IP40 version. market, are the main features of this product.
LPC ZSA 9...15VAC/DC 90 1 0.020 Operational characteristics
LPC ZSB 18...30VAC/DC 90 1 0.020 – Rated frequency: 50…60Hz
– Supply voltage: 9..15VAC/DC, 18..30VAC/DC,
LPC ZSE 85...140VAC/DC 90 1 0.020
85..140VAC/DC, 185..265VAC/DC
LPC ZSM 185...265VAC/DC 90 1 0.020 – Maximum absorption: 20mA-0.30W (type
LPC ZS... Continuous or pulse tone, IP66, IP67, IP69K, UL Type 4X 9..15VAC/DC), 15mA-0.40W (type 18..30VAC/DC),
version. 5.5mA-0.80W (type 85..140VAC/DC), 3.5mA-0.95W
(type 185..265VAC/DC)
LPC ZSAIP 9...15VAC/DC 80 1 0.020 – Minimum activation voltage: >4V (type 9..15VAC/DC),
LPC ZSBIP 18...30VAC/DC 80 1 0.020 >8V (type 18..30VAC/DC), >15V (type
85..140VAC/DC), >25V (type 185..265VAC/DC)
LPC ZSEIP 85...140VAC/DC 80 1 0.020 – Impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 4kV
LPC ZSMIP 185...265VAC/DC 80 1 0.020 – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a
threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on
Pulse-tone sound graph the cover of LPZ control stations
– Service life: 30,000 hours (permanently powered)
7
Hz – Side cable entry
3500 – Ambient conditions:
LPC ZS...IP 3000 0.3s 0.3s 0.3s 0.3s 0.3s • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
2800 – Degree of protection (type LPC ZS...IP):
2500
• per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67, IP69K on front and IP20 at
2000 rear
• per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K on front.
1500 Materials
1000 Polyamide.
500 Screw terminal connections with three separate
0 s
connections:
0 0.6 0.9 – Min. cable 0.5mm2 / AWG24
0.3 1.2 1.5 – Max. cable 2.5mm2 / AWG14
– Maximum tightening torque: 0.5Nm/0.37lbft
– Flat-head screwdriver: 0.6x3.5mm/0.02x0.14”.
(pending).
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
General characteristics
USB and RJ45 Order code Description Qty Wt USB and RJ45 communication interface connectors are
communication interfaces per used in industrial environments, which in recent years
pkg. have seen an increase in the number of connections
n° [kg] between machines, production lines, equipment and
measuring instruments. These interfaces provide the
LPC D01 USB interface, 1 0.018 transmission of data in both directions between the
A/A female type connection various devices.
LPC D03 USB interface, 1 0.018 Operational characteristics
A/B female type connection – Rated insulation voltage for LPCD01, LPCD03, LPCD05:
LPC D05 USB interface, 1 0.018 5VAC/DC
B/A female type connection – Rated insulation voltage for LPCD06: 24VAC
– Interface mechanical endurance: ≥750 insertions
LPC D06 RJ45 interface, 1 0.026 – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a
Ethernet connection type threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on
the cover of LPZ control stations
– Transmission characteristics for LPCD01, D03, D05:
5Gbps (625MB/sec)
LPC D01 – Transmission characteristics for LPCD06: 10 Gigabit
Ethernet IEEE 802.3an-2006
– Rated current for LPCD01, LPCD03, LPCD05: 1.8A
– Rated current for LPCD06: 1.5A
– Insulation resistance: ≥100MOhm
– Contact resistance for LPCD01, LPCD03, LPCD05:
≤30mOhm
– Contact resistance for LPCD06: ≤40mOhm
– USB connector class: 3.0 (backward compatible with
USB class 2.0)
• Per IEC/EN: IP65 on front (with cap mounted)
• Per IEC/EN: IP20 at rear
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K on front (with
cap mounted)
LPC D03 LPC D05
Materials
Polyamide.
(pending).
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 7-47 page 7-51 7-15
Ø22mm series
Accessories and Order code Description Qty per Wt

spare parts pkg.
n° [kg]
LPX A127 Transparent diffuser for 10 0.001
double-touch buttons
LPX A130 Threaded plug for 10 0.007
unused drilled holes (grey)
LPX A140 Action plug for centre 50 0.001
LPX A130 contact
LPX A150 Rod for mechanical reset 10 0.006
button (l =150mm)
LPX A170 Spare standard key set 10 0.008
for selector switches or
mushroom-head buttons,
LPX A140 key code n° 455
LPX A170R Spare key set for selector 1 0.008
switches or mushroom
7 head buttons, LPC...R type
LPX AU00 Threaded ring for actuator 20 0.002
fixing
LPX P01 M20 cable gland with 50 0.012
threaded ring for LPZ
LPX AU00 control stations
LPX B0 Flush-extended spring 10 0.013
return actuator
with no cap
LPX B3 Shrouded spring return 10 0.014
actuator with no cap
LPX Q0 Flush-extended 10 0.013
push-push
actuator with no cap
LPX P01 LPX QL0 Illuminated 10 0.013
flush-extended push-push
actuator with no lens
Flush cap for spring-return actuators.
LPX B102 Black 10 0.002
LPX B103 Green 10 0.002
LPX B104 Red 10 0.002
LPX B105 Yellow 10 0.002
LPX B106 Blue 10 0.002
LPX B0 LPX B108 White 10 0.002
Extended cap for spring-return actuators.
LPX B202 Black 10 0.003
LPX B203 Green 10 0.003
LPX B204 Red 10 0.003
LPX B205 Yellow 10 0.003
LPX B206 Blue 10 0.003
LPX B104 LPX B203 LPX B208 White 10 0.003
Flush lens for illuminated spring-return
actuators .
LPX BL103 Green 10 0.002
LPX BL104 Red 10 0.002
LPX BL105 Yellow 10 0.002
LPX BL106 Blue 10 0.002
LPX BL107 Transparent 10 0.002
LPX BL105 LPX BL206 Extended lens for illuminated spring-return
actuators.
LPX BL203 Green 10 0.003
LPX BL204 Red 10 0.003
LPX BL205 Yellow 10 0.003
LPX BL206 Blue 10 0.003
LPX BL207 Transparent 10 0.003
Versions with different key code. Complete with the numeric code of the
key. The following versions are available: 421E, 458A, 520E, 3131A, 3433E
Example of complete code: LPX A170R421E.
Dimensions
7-16 page 7-47
Ø22mm series
Accessories and spare Order code Description Qty per Wt

parts pkg.
n° [kg]
LPX AU100 Label holder for 50 0.001
engraved plastic
LPX AU109 label
LPX AU109 Engravable silver plastic 50 0.002
label to use with
LPX AU100 holder
LPX AU105 Label holder for 50 0.003
LPX AU100 engraved plastic
LPX AU108 label
LPX AU108 Engravable silver plastic 50 0.002
label to use with
LPX AU105 holder
LPX AU13 Rubber boot for flush 10 0.006
button LPC B1/BL1/R1...
LPX AU14 Rubber boot for buttons 10
LPC B2/3..., LPC BL2...
0.009 7
LPX AU105 and LPC R2...
LPX AU157 Rubber boot for double 10 0.007
and triple-touch buttons,
transparent
LPX AU167 Rubber boot for 10 0.012
mushroom head buttons,
LPC B63/B66/B67/
LPX AU108 BL66... transparent
LPX AU109 LPX AU158 Padlockable protection, 10 0.005
Ø5-8mm locks or
buttons LPC B66/B67/
B68/BL664...; for
LPC B634...
Ø5-6mm/0.2-0.24”
locks only.
LPX AU159 Shroud for buttons 10 0.010
LPC B63...,
LPC B66/67/68/BL666...
LPX DIN Adapter for mounting 10 0.008
LPC... buttons
LPX AU158
on DIN rail 35mm/1.38”
wide (2 modules)
Other accessories
8 LM2T A161 Ø30mm/1.2” hole size 10 0.002
adapter set for 22mm/
0.87” (use 2 per hole)
8 LM2T A185 Yellow selector protection 10 0.004
shroud for knob type only
8 LM2T A200 Socket spanner/wrench 1 0.184
for fixing ring fitting,
8 LM2T A185 metal
For flush and extended push buttons, complete the order code by adding
the digit of the required colour:
2 (black); 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white).
For illuminated push buttons, add only digit 7 (transparent).
Cannot be used when LPX AU100 or LPX AU105 is fitted.
Cannot be used when LPX AU158 is fitted.
Cannot be used when LPX AU167 is fitted.
LPX AU159
LPX DIN
Dimensions
page 7-47 7-17
Ø22mm series
Labels with text for Order code Text Qty Wt General characteristics
LPX AU100 legend holder per pkg The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on
n° [kg] metalised grey polycarbonate background (adhesive).
General use. Special versions
8 LM2T AU206 Blank for writing 50 0.001 Labels in different languages are available.
8 LM2T AU207 Sheet with 108 labels 1 0.005 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
for laser printing front cover.
8 LM2T AU208 Sheet with 108 1 0.005
customized text
8 LM2T AGB230
8 LM2T AGB210 LATCH 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB211 OPEN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB212 STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB213 GENERAL STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB214 STOP RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB215 FORWARD 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB216 CLOSE 50 0.001
7 8 LM2T AGB217 RIGHT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB218 LOWER 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB219 DEACTIVATED 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB220 EMERGENCY 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB221 OFF 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB222 REVERSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB223 ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB237 TRIP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB224 SLOW 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB225 START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB226 RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB226 RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB227 RAISE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB228 LEFT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB229 POWER ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB225 START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB230 STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB214 STOP-RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB231 FAST 50 0.001
For selector switches.
8 LM2T AI232 ARR-MAR 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI233 AUTO-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI234 AUTO-O-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI242 MAN-O-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI235 FWD-O-REV 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI236 ON - OFF. 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI241 MAN-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB232 STOP-START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB236 OFF-ON 50 0.001
International labels for push-buttons.
8 LM2T AU200 O 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU201 I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU202 II 50 0.001
International labels for selector switches.
8 LM2T AU203 O-I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU204 I-II 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU205 I-O-II 50 0.001
Recommended use with LPX AU109 label.
Sheet with 108 adhesive labels.
Complete code with required label text.
Dimensions
7-18 page 7-47
Ø22mm series
Plastic disk for mushroom Order code Text Qty Wt General characteristics
head pushbuttons per pkg. The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic.
n° [kg] Plastic disks cannot be used with LPX AU158 and
LPX AU159 protection.
LPX AU112 EMERGENZA ARRESTO 10 0.005
Ø90mm/3.5”
LPX AU114 EMERGENZA ARRESTO 10 0.003
Ø60mm/2.4”
LPX AU113 EMERGENCY STOP 10 0.005
Ø90mm/3.5”
LPX AU115 EMERGENCY STOP 10 0.003
Ø60mm/2.4”
LPX AU118 ARRET D’URGENCE / 10 0.003
LPX AU113 NOT-AUS/
PARO EMERGENCIA
Ø60mm/2.4”
LPX AU110 Adhesive label 12 0.001
EMERGENCY STOP
(34.5x65mm/1.36x2.56”)
for LPC B63/663/664/
7
67/68/BL66...buttons
LPX AU115
LPX AU110
Dimensions
page 7-47 7-19
Ø22mm series
Mounting adapter Order code Description Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per pkg – Any mounting position allowed.
n° [kg] – All LPX C… types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting
adapter:
LPX AU120 Mounting adapter 10 0.019 • See the combinations given under “Contact
Rear view elements” in the right-hand column for each type of
(reference for element installation) pushbutton and selector switch.
• A maximum of 3 contacts or 2 contacts and 1 LED
element (LPX L… mounted in the middle position)
can be fixed internally on the cover surface of LPZ
LPX AU120 control stations.
– A maximum of 2 LPX C…SM contacts can be installed
on LPX AU120 adapter exclusively on non-illuminated
mushroom-head latch actuators:
• In pos. 1-3 (on the left side only of LPX AU120; refer
to REAR VIEW drawing), one only LPX C01SM or
1 3 2 1° row
LPX C02SM element can be fitted.
4 6 5 2° row • One extra LPX…SM can be installed in pos. 4-6
7 9 8 3° row (stacked behind the LPX…SM on the LPX AU120)
• With LPX C01SM, a maximum of two contacts
7 Contact elements Order code Function Qty Wt LPX C0… or LPX C1… can be fitted on the right
per pkg side in LPX AU120 pos. 2 and 5, one behind the
other.
n° [kg] • On the internal surface of LPZ control station
Screw termination. covers, one only LPX C01SM or LPX C02SM contact
Without mounting adapter. can be mounted on LPX AU120 pos. 1 (on the left).
LPX C10 .3
10 0.011 With LPX C01SM, one extra element LPX C0… or
NO LPX C1… can be fitted on the right (LPX AU120
.4
pos. 2).
.7
LPX C10A 10 0.011 • No LED element can be used with LPX C…SM
EM types.
.8
.1 – Maximum tightening torque for screw terminals:
LPX C... LPX C01 10 0.011 1Nm/0.74lbft
NC
.2 – Ambient conditions:
LPX C01D .5
10 0.011 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
LB • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
.6 – Degree of protection:
Screw termination. Without mounting adapter. • IP20 for screw termination
Auto-monitor contact elements for non-illuminated latch • IP00 for Faston termination.
mushroom-head pushbuttons.
LPX C01SM 1 0.022 General characteristics of contact elements
.3 .1 Wiping effect, dual scraping-oscillating action
1NC
IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
.4 .2
IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
LPX C02SM 1 0.033 Conductivity: 5V 1mA
.3 .1 .1
2NC UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600.
LPX C01SM LPX C02SM .4 .2 .2
Screw termination. IEC/EN operational characteristics in AC15 category:

With mounting adapter. [V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
LPX E10 .3 10 0.029 [A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
NO
.4 IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
LPX E01 .1 10 0.029 [V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
NC
.2 [A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
Faston termination. Short-circuit protection fuse: max calibre: 10A gG/SC.
Without mounting adapter. Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ.
LPX E... LPX CF10 .3 10 0.012 Terminals: Clamp screw with washer.
NO Faston 1x6.35mm(0.25”) or 2x2.8mm(0.11”).
.4
LPX CF01 .1 10 0.012 Stroke of contact elements
NC
.2 EM
Use LPX C10A (EM) or LPX C01 (NC) type only with push-push NO
actuators. NC
Not suitable for push-push actuators. LB
Normally open contact with early-make operation and suitable for
push-push actuators. 1 2 (0.08”) 3 (0.35”) 4 4.8mm
Direct (positive) opening action in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1. (0.04”) (0.19”)
Normally closed contact with late break operation.
1.8 2.8 (0.16”)
(0.07”) (0.11”)
Closed contact Open contact
Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
LPX CF01 LPX CF10 30
(1.18”) Maximum conductor cross section for screw terminals
30
(1.18”) 1 or 2 2.5mm2 or AWG14 cables.
Mechanical and electrical endurance
Operating force: ≤0.5kg/1.1lb (auxiliary contacts).
40 (1.57”)
Electrical life: 1,000,000 cycles for LPXC10/01/E10/01,

LPX C01SM/02SM, LPXCF10/01; 600,000 cycles for
(1.57”)
40
LPXC10A/01D.
Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0) RINA.
(0.88”)
Compliant with standard: IEC/EN 60947-1,
When using Faston, pitch is 85mm/3.35” minimum. IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

7-20 page 7-46 page 7-51
Ø22mm series
Test elements for Order code Description Qty Wt Operational characteristics

steady-light LED elements per – Supply voltage:
pkg • LPX T100 test element:
n° [kg] – 12...30VAC/DC for LPX LEB/LFB/LPB/LPSB...
– 85...140VAC/DC for LPX LEE...
LPX T100 Use with LED elements 10 0.011 – 185...265VAC/DC for LPX LEM...
in AC/DC, types LPX LE… • LPX T101 test element: 85-140VAC
(all), LPX LFB…, LPX LPB • LPX T102 test element: 185-265VAC
and LPX LPSB… – For use with LED elements LPX LPBB/LPBE/LPBM…
LPX T101 Use with LED elements 10 0.011 types, consult Customer Service; see contact details
at 85-140VAC for types on inside front cover
LPX LFE… LPX LPE… and – Electrical life: 100,000 hours
LPX LPSE… – Any mounting position allowed
LPX T... – Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter beside the
LPX T102 Use with LED elements 10 0.011
at 185-265VAC for types LED element or stacked behind contact elements; also
LPX LFM…, LPX LPM… and internally on the LPZ control station cover
LPX LPSM… – Maximum tightening torque for screw terminals:
1Nm/0.74lbft
Whenever test circuits include illuminated actuators connected with – Ambient conditions:
paralleled load, use two LPX T100 for each LED element. • Operating temperature: -25…+70°C
Refer to the wiring diagram below or online in the Downloads section at
www.LovatoElectric.com
• Storage temperature: -40…+85°C 7
With DC supply only for LPX T100 type, the LED element works at full – Degree of protection: IP20.
voltage and brightness while with AC supply for all LPX T… types, the
LED element works at half voltage with reduced brightness level. Mounting adapter
Type: LPX AU120. See page 7-20.
The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
For LPX T100 test element fixed to the mounting surface.
(AC) ~ (– DC) Maximum conductor cross section

1 or 2 2.5mm² or AWG 12 cables.
TEST Wiring Diargram

For LPX T100
X5 X1 X5
LPXT100 For LPX T101 - LPX T102

X1 X5
X1

X1
LPX LE... RINA.
LPX LPB... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
LPX LPSB... IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
LPX LFB...
X2
(AC) ~ (+ DC)
For LPX T101 and LPX T102 test elements
(AC) ~
TEST
LPXT101❸
LPXT102❹
LPXT101❸
X1 X5 LPXT102❹
X1 X5
X1 X5
X1 X1 X1 LPXT101❸
LPXT102❹
LPX LPE... LPX LPE... LPX LPE...
LPX LPM... LPX LPM... LPX LPM...
LPX LPSE... LPX LPSE... LPX LPSE...
LPX LPSM... LPX LPSM... LPX LPSM...
LPX LFE... LPX LFE... LPX LFE...
LPX LFM... LPX LFM... LPX LFM...
X2 X2 X2
(AC) ~
Use with LPX LFE…, LPX LPE… or LPX LPSE… type.

Use with LPX LFM…, LPX LPM… or LPX LPSM… type.
Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams

page 7-20 page 7-46 page 7-51 7-21
Ø22mm series
LED elements Order code Rated supply LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
steady light voltage colour per – Rated frequency: 50-60Hz
pkg. – Auxiliary supply voltage:
[V] n° [kg] • LPX LP… with steady light: 12...30VAC/DC;
85...140VAC; 185...265VAC
Steady light, screw termination. • LPX LE… with steady light: 12...30VAC/DC;
Supplied without mounting adapter. 85...140VAC/DC; 185...265VAC/DC
LPX LP B3 12...30V Green 10 0.016 • LPX LF… flashing light: 18...30VAC/DC;
LPX LP B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016 85...140VAC, 185...265VAC
– Maximum consumption for:
LPX LP B5 Yellow 10 0.016 • LPX LP… steady light and LPX LF… flashing light:
LPX LP B6 Blue 10 0.016 17mA-0.50W (12...30VAC/DC); 20mA-0.40W
LPX LP B8 White 10 0.016 (85...140VAC); 18mA-0.55W (185...265VAC)
LPX LP... • LPX LE… steady light: 11mA-0.33W
LPX LP E3 85...140V Green 10 0.016 (12...30VAC/DC); 5mA-0.72W (85...140VAC/DC);
LPX LP E4 AC Red 10 0.016 3mA-0.67W (185...265VAC/DC)
LPX LP E5 Yellow 10 0.016 – Total protection for LPX LP… and LPX LF… types:
• Against overvoltages
LPX LP E6 Blue 10 0.016 • Against stray currents in wiring
LPX LP E8 White 10 0.016 • To reduce flickering phenomenon
7 LPX LP M3 185...265V Green 10 0.016 • To withstand vibrations
Total protection against overvoltages AC – Minimum activation voltage:
LPX LP M4 Red 10 0.016 • LPX LP... steady light: 4V-1mA (12...30VAC/DC);
and stray currents in wiring, to
LPX LP M5 Yellow 10 0.016 30V-4mA (85...140VAC); 55V-4mA (185...265VAC)
reduce flickering phenomenon
LPX LP M6 Blue 10 0.016 • LPX LE... steady light: 4V-0.5mA (12...30VAC/DC);
and withstand vibrations. 15V-0.4mA (85...140VAC/DC); 35V-0.3mA
LPX LP M8 White 10 0.016 (185...265VAC/DC)
• LPXLF... flashing light: 5V-1.5mA (18...30VAC/DC);
13V-1.5mA (85...140VAC);
Order code Rated supply LED Qty Wt 25V-1.5mA (185...265VAC)
voltage colour per – Simple protection for LPX LE… types
pkg. • Against overvoltages
[V] n° [kg] • To withstand vibrations
– Electrical life: 100,000 hours
Steady light, screw termination. – Snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter in the middle
Supplied without mounting adapter. position for each illuminated actuator, also internally on
LPX LE B3 12...30V Green 10 0.016 the LPZ control station cover
LPX LE B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016 – No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
– Any mounting position allowed
LPX LE B5 Yellow 10 0.016 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/0.74lbft
LPX LE B6 Blue 10 0.016 – Ambient conditions:
LPX LE B8 White 10 0.016 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C (-25...+60°C for
LPX LE...)
LPX LE E3 85...140V Green 10 0.016 • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
LPX LE E4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016 – Degree of protection: IP20.
LPX LE E5 Yellow 10 0.016
LPX LE... Mounting adapter
LPX LE E6 Blue 10 0.016 See page 7-20. Type: LPX AU120.
LPX LE E8 White 10 0.016 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
LPX LE M3 185...265V Green 10 0.016 fixed to the mounting surface.
Simple protection AC/DC
LPX LE M4 Red 10 0.016 Maximum conductor cross section
against overvoltages
LPX LE M5 Yellow 10 0.016 1 or 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
and to withstand
vibrations. LPX LE M6 Blue 10 0.016
Wiring diagram
LPX LE M8 White 10 0.016
X2 X1
LED elements Order code Rated supply LED Qty Wt

voltage colour per Certifications and compliance
flashing light pkg. Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
[V] n° [kg] RINA.
Flashing light, screw termination. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
Supplied without mounting adapter. IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
LPX LF B3 18...30V Green 10 0.016
LPX LF B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016
LPX LF B5 Yellow 10 0.016
LPX LF B6 Blue 10 0.016
LPX LF... LPX LF B8 White 10 0.016
LPX LF E3 85...140V Green 10 0.016
LPX LF E4 AC Red 10 0.016
LPX LF E5 Yellow 10 0.016
LPX LF E6 Blue 10 0.016
LPX LF E8 White 10 0.016
LPX LF M3 185...265V Green 10 0.016
Total protection against overvoltages AC
LPX LF M4 Red 10 0.016
and stray currents in wiring, to
LPX LF M5 Yellow 10 0.016
reduce flickering phenomenon
and withstand vibrations. LPX LF M6 Blue 10 0.016
LPX LF M8 White 10 0.016

7-22 page 7-20 page 7-46 page 7-51
Ø22mm series
Contact elements with Order code Function Qty Wt Operational characteristics

spring-clamp terminals per – Any mounting position allowed
pkg – Elements snap onto LPX AU120 adapter, also
n° [kg] internally on LPZ control station cover with maximum
of 3 LPX CS… contact or 2 LPX CS… contact and
Spring-clamp termination. 1 LPX LPS… LED elements (in middle position) per
Without mounting adapter. actuator
.3
LPX CS10 10 0.010 – No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
NO – See the combinations given under “Contact elements”
.4
.1 in the right-hand column for each type of pushbutton
LPX CS01 10 0.010 and selector switch
NC
LPX CS01 LPX CS10 .2 – Suitable for applications with vibration and/or impact
Not suitable for push-push actuators. work conditions; cable retaining force guaranteed over
Direct (positive) opening action in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1 time in these conditions
– For use with the test elements, see page 7-20
– Wiring also possible after installation with stacked
LED elements steady light Order code Rated supply LED Qty Wt contacts
with spring-clamp terminals voltage colour per – Ambient conditions:
pkg • Operating temperature: -25…+70°C
• Storage temperature: -40…+85°C
[V] n° [kg]
– Degree of protection: IP20. 7
Steady light, with spring-clamp termination.
Without mounting adapter. Mounting adapter
See page 7-20.
LPX LPS B3 12...30VAC/DC Green 10 0.015
Type : LPX AU120.
LPX LPS B4 Red 10 0.015 The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator
LPX LPS B5 Yellow 10 0.015 fixed to the mounting surface.
LPX LPS... LPX LPS B6 Blue 10 0.015 General characteristics
LPX LPS B8 White 10 0.015 CONTACT ELEMENTS
Wiping action and dual scraping-oscillating effect
LPX LPS E3 85...140VAC Green 10 0,015
IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
LPX LPS E4 Red 10 0.015 IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
LPX LPS E5 Yellow 10 0.015 Conductivity: 1mA 5V
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600.
LPX LPS E6 Blue 10 0.015
IEC/EN operational characteristics in AC15 category:
LPX LPS E8 White 10 0.015
[V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
Total protection against LPX LPS M3 185...265VAC Green 10 0.015
[A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
overvoltages and stray currents LPX LPS M4 Red 10 0.015
IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
in wiring, to reduce flickering LPX LPS M5 Yellow 10 0.015
phenomenon and withstand [V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
LPX LPS M6 Blue 10 0.015
vibrations. LPX LPS M8 White 10 0.015
[A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
Short circuit protection fuse: max calibre: 10A gG/SC.
Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ.
Drillings - Minimum recommended distances Terminals: Spring clamps.
30 Stroke of contact elements
(1.18”)
30 NO
(1.18”)
NC
1 1.8 3 4 4.8mm
55 (2.16”)
(0.03”) (0.07”) (0.11”) (0.16”) (0.19”)

55 (2.16”)

Mechanical and electrical endurance of contact elements
Opening force: ≤0,5kg/1.1lb
Electrical life: 1.000.000 cycles for LPX CS10 and LPX CS01.
Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)
Ø0.88” (+0.01, -0) LED ELEMENTS
– Rated frequency: 50-60Hz
– Supply voltage:
Push-in wiring technology for rigid cables or with ferrules only - no screwdriver needed 12...30VAC/DC; 85...140VAC; 185...265VAC
Cable retaining force guaranteed over time even in presence of vibrations and/or impacts – Maximum consumption: 17mA-0.50W (12...30VAC/DC);
Push-in 20mA-0.40W (85...140VAC);
18mA-0.55W (185...265VAC)
technology – Total protection:
• Against stray currents in wiring
• To reduce flickering phenomenon
• To withstand vibrations
– Minimum activation voltage:
4V-1mA (12...30VAC/DC); 30V-4mA (85...140VAC);
55V-4mA (185...265VAC)
– Electrical life: 100,000 hours.
Wiring diagram for LED elements
Wiring with flat-blade screwdriver Cable removal
(for flexible bare cable without terminal) (always using flat-blade screwdriver) X2 X1

1 or 2 2.5mm² or AWG14 cables. For 2.5mm² section, use
rounded cable terminal with metal end at least 10mm
RINA.
4 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 7-20 page 7-46 page 7-51 7-23
Ø22mm series
Contact elements, base Order code Function Qty Wt Operational characteristics

mount on LPZ control per – Any mounting position allowed
pkg – Snap-on mounting into fixing structures of LPZ
stations n° [kg] control station base
– Maximum of 3 LPX CB… contact or 2 LPX CB…
Screw termination. contact and 1 LPX LPB… LED elements (in middle
Direct snap-on mounting on LPZ... control station base. pos. 3) for each actuator of LPZ control stations
LPX CB10 .3 10 0.012 – See the combinations given under “Contact elements”
NO in the right-hand column for each type of pushbutton
.4
.1
and selector switch
LPX CB01 10 0.012 – For use with test elements, consult Customer Service;
NC
.2 see contact details on inside front cover
– Maximum tightening torque for screw terminals: 1Nm
LPX CB... Not suitable for push-push actuators.
Direct opening operation in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Ambient conditions:
• Operating temperature: -25…+70°C
• Storage temperature: -40…+85°C
LED elements, steady light Order code Rated LED Qty Wt – Degree of protection: IP20.
base mount on LPZ control supply voltage color per
pkg.
stations
7 [V] n° [kg] General characteristics
Screw termination. CONTACT ELEMENTS
Steady light. Wiping action and dual scraping-oscillating effect
Direct snap-on mounting on LPZ… control station base. IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
LPX LPB B3 12...30V Green 10 0.016 IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
LPX LPB B4 AC/DC Red 10 0.016 Conductivity: 5V 1mA
LPX LPB B5 Yellow 10 0.016
LPX LPB B6 Blue 10 0.016
[V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
LPX LPB B8 White 10 0.016
LPX LPB... [A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
LPX LPB E3 85...140V Green 10 0.016
AC IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
LPX LPB E4 Red 10 0.016
[V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
LPX LPB E5 Yellow 10 0.016
[A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
LPX LPB E6 Blue 10 0.016
Short circuit protection fuse: max calibre: 10A gG/SC
LPX LPB E8 White 10 0.016 Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ
LPX LPB M3 185...265V Green 10 0.016 Terminals: Clamp screw and washer.
Total protection against AC
overvoltages and stray currents in LPX LPB M4 Red 10 0.016
Stroke of contact elements
wiring, to reduce flickering LPX LPB M5 Yellow 10 0.016
phenomenon and withstand LPX LPB M6 Blue 10 0.016 NO
NC
vibrations. LPX LPB M8 White 10 0.016
1 1.8 3 4 4.8mm
(0.03”) (0.07”) (0.11”) (0.16”) (0.19”)
Mechanical and electrical endurance of contact elements
Opening force: ≤0,5kg/1.1lb
Electrical life: 1,000,000 cycles for LPX CB10 and LPX CB01.
LED ELEMENTS
– Rated frequency: 50…60Hz
– Supply voltage:
12...30VAC/DC; 85...140VAC; 185...265VAC
– Maximum consumption:
17mA-0.50W (12...30VAC/DC); 20mA-0.40W
(85...140VAC); 18mA-0.55W (185...265VAC)
– Total protection:
Mounting position on the LPZ control station base • Against stray currents in wiring
LPX LPB... • To reduce flickering phenomenon
Fixing structures always mounted in • To withstand vibrations
3 pieces LPX CB... middle pos.3 – Minimum activation voltage:
max/actuator • steady light LPX LPB......: 4V-1mA (12...30VAC/DC);
30V-4mA (85...140VAC); 55V-4mA (185...265VAC)
– Electrical life: 100,000 hours.
Wiring diagram for LED elements
X2 X1

1 or 2 2.5mm² or AWG14 cables.
1 A 3 2 1B 3 2 Certifications and compliance

RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Wiring diagrams
7-24 page 7-51
series plastic control stations
Without actuators Order code Description Cover colour Qty Wt General characteristics
per CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATOR
pkg – 1 to 6 holes
n° [kg] – Compact dimensions
LPZ P1 A5 For 1 actuator Yellow 1 0.107 – Easy wiring for base-mount contact and LED elements;
possible use of screw and spring-clamp terminal
LPZ P1 A8 For 1 actuator Grey 1 0.107 contact or LED elements on the inside surface of the
LPZ P2 A5 For 2 actuators Yellow 1 0.152 cover using LPX AU120 mounting adapter
LPZ P2 A8 For 2 actuators Grey 1 0.152 – Numerous cable entries.
LPZ P3 A8 For 3 actuators Grey 1 0.187 CONTROL STATIONS WITH ACTUATOR
LPZ P1 A5 LPZ P4 A8 For 4 actuators Grey 1 0.200 Standard supplied with actuator, label holder and STOP
LPZ P5 A8 For 5 actuators Grey 1 0.240 legend label excluding types with yellow cover, and one
base-mount NC contact.
LPZ P6 A8 For 6 actuators Grey 1 0.290
– Cable entry:
Control station base • LPZ P1… knockouts:
Fixing structures for contact and/or LED elements – M16/PG11 (1 at rear and 1 on left side)
For each actuator: Maximum of 3 contacts or 2 contacts and 1 LED – M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16 (1 each on top and
bottom)
7
• LPZ P2... knockouts:
– M16/PG11 (2 at rear)
– M20/PG13.5 (1 on each side)
– M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16 (1 each on top and
LPZ P2 A5 bottom)
• LPZ P3/P4/P5/P6 A8 knockouts:
– M16/PG11 (2 at rea)
– M20/PG13.5 (2 on each side)
– M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16 (1 each on top and
bottom)
– Tightening torque of cover screws Tmax: 1.8Nm/16lbin
1 A 3 2 1B 3 2 – Ambient conditions:
Easy identification reference • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K
Control station cover For actuator and corresponding contact
and/or LED elements • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4,4X, 12K.
(inside view)
Materials
Polycarbonate.
LPZ P3 A8
Anti-loosening action (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC,
Anti-rotation indents to extend
fixing ring gripping over time RINA.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508A for types without actuators /
UL508 for types complete with actuator, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
With one actuator Order code Control Actuator Qty Wt

station description per
description pkg
n° [kg]
LPZ P1 B8 01 Grey, 1 way Mushroom-head 1 0.150
LPZ P1 A8 button LPC B6744
with STOP legend
LPZ P1 B8 02 Grey, 1 way Mushroom-head 1 0.135
with STOP legend
LPZ P1 B8 02 LPZ P1 B5 02 Yellow, 1 way Mushroom-head 1 0.135
LPZ P1 B5 03 Yellow, 1 way Mushroom-head 1 0.150
Version with red emergency stop, turn to release and yellow cover
compliant with ISO 13850.
LPZ P1 B5 03
Add-on blocks Accessories and spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams

page 7-24 pages 7-16 to 19 page 7-47 and 48 page 7-51 7-25
Ø22mm series
COMBINATIONS FOR PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

SPRING-RETURN BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU120
LPX CS... LPX AU120 LPX C...
LPX C... LPX CF...
LPC B10... LPC B20... LPC B30... LPX CF... LPX CS...
LPC B11... LPC B21... LPX CS... LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX C... LPX AU... LPX CF...
LPX CF... LPX CS...
LPX CS... LPX E...
LPX E...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LPX AU120
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPC Q10... LPC Q20... LPX AU...
7 LPX C10A
LPX C01
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTONS

LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU...
LPC B614... LPC B616... LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTONS LPX C02SM

LPX C01SM
LPX C01SM LPX C02SM

LPX AU120
LPX AU120
LPX AU120
LPX C... LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX CF...
LPC B6634 LPC B634... LPC B664... LPC B674... LPC B684... LPX CS... LPX C... LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX E...
LPX E... LPX AU... LPX AU... LPX AU...
DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPC B71... LPC B72... LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX C...
LPC B73...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
SELECTOR SWITCHES
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120 LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU... LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX CF... LPX CF...
LPC S1... LPC S3... LPC S2... LPC S4... LPX CS... LPX CS...
LPX E... LPX E...
MECHANICAL SPRING-RETURN RESET BUTTONS
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX C... LPX AU...
LPX CF...
LPC R1... LPC R2... LPX CS...
LPX E...
7-26
Ø22mm series
COMBINATIONS FOR ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX L...
LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPC BL10... LPX CF...
LPC BL20...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LPX L...
LPX C10A
LPX C01
LPX T...
LPX AU120
LPC QL10... LPX C10A

7
LPC QL20... LPX AU...
LPX C01
LPX E01
LPX T...
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTON

LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX L...
LPX C... LPX AU120

LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX C...
LPC BL614... LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTON
LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPC BL664... LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX L...
LPX C... LPX AU120

LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX C...
LPC BL71... LPC BL72...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX E...
LPX T...
2 AND 3 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES

LPX L...
LPX C...
LPX CF...
LPX CS...
LPX T... LPX AU120
LPX C...
LPX CF... LPX AU...
LPX CS...
LPC SL12... LPC SL13...
LPX E...
LPX T...
CONTROL STATIONS Example of 2 way control station equipped with selector switch, label holder and label along with pilot light
LPX LPB...
LPX CB... always fitted in middle pos. n°3
1 0 2
1 A 3 2 1B 3 2
7-27
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

8 LM2T B102 Black 10 0.033 – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T B103 Green 10 0.033 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T B104 Red 10 0.033
8 LM2T B10... 8 LM2T B105 Yellow 10 0.033 Materials
8 LM2T B106 Blue 10 0.033 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
8 LM2T B108 White 10 0.033 polycarbonate.
Extended (without mounting adapter). Spring return.
8 LM2T B202 Black 10 0.035 Mechanical endurance
Operating force: 0.8kg/1.7lb (actuator).
8 LM2T B203 Green 10 0.035 Mechanical life:
8 LM2T B204 Red 10 0.035 – Spring-return actuators: 1,000,000 cycles
8 LM2T B205 Yellow 10 0.035 – Push-push actuators: 500,000 cycles.
8 LM2T B20...
7 8 LM2T B206 Blue 10 0.035 Mounting adapter
8 LM2T B208 White 10 0.035 See page 7-41.
Shrouded (without mounting adapter). Spring return. Type: LM2T AU120.
The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
8 LM2T B302 Black 10 0.035 incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
8 LM2T B303 Green 10 0.035 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
8 LM2T B304 Red 10 0.035 rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the
cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B30... 8 LM2T B305 Yellow 10 0.035
8 LM2T B306 Blue 10 0.035 Contact elements for spring-return actuators
8 LM2T B308 White 10 0.035 See page 7-41.
Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
Push-push button Order code Colour Qty Wt LM2T C10A (1EM)
per pkg LM2T C01 (1NC)
actuators LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
n° [kg] LM2T C01D (1LB)
Flush (without mounting adapter). Push on-push off. Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T Q102 Black 10 0.033 Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left, middle
8 LM2T Q103 Green 10 0.033 Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
8 LM2T Q104 Red 10 0.033 the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T Q10... 8 LM2T Q105 Yellow 10 0.033 To use contact elements in the middle position, install the
action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-38.
8 LM2T Q106 Blue 10 0.033
8 LM2T Q108 White 10 0.033 Contact elements for push-push button actuators
Extended (without mounting adapter). See page 7-41.
Push on-push off. Type: LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
8 LM2T Q202 Black 10 0.035 Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T Q20... 8 LM2T Q203 Green 10 0.035 Up to 2 contacts can be fitted: 1 each on the right and left.
8 LM2T Q204 Red 10 0.035 Up to 2 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
the cover surface of LPZ control stations (only one on the
8 LM2T Q205 Yellow 10 0.035 right and/or on the left).
8 LM2T Q206 Blue 10 0.035
8 LM2T Q208 White 10 0.035 Certifications and compliance
Use contact elements EM (8 LM2T C10A) and NC (8LM2T C01) only.
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, RINA,
Contact elements NO (8LM2T C10) and LB (8LM2T C01D) cannot be
fitted on these actuators. For the number of contact elements, refer to LROS, CCC.
indications in the right-hand column. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14

Mechanical reset button, Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

complete unit, spring return per pkg. – Any mounting position allowed
Flush (5.2mm/0.2” stroke). Adjustable length 0-140mm/5.5”. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Spring return (complete with shaft and mounting adapter) – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T R1002 Black 10 0.065 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T R1003 Green 10 0.065 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T R1004 Red 10 0.065 Materials
8 LM2T R1006 Blue 10 0.065 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T R1196 Blue (RESET) 10 0.065 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
Extended (5.2mm/0.2” stroke). Adjustable length
0-140mm/5.5”. Mechanical endurance
8 LM2T R1196 Spring return (complete with shaft and mounting adapter) Operating force: 0.8kg/1.7lb (actuator)
8 LM2T R2004 Red 10 0.067 Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
With “RESET”caption on actuator. Mounting adapter
No contact elements can be fitted.
See page 7-41.
Type: LM2T AU120. 7
Pushbutton actuators, Order code Symbol Colour Qty Wt The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
spring return, with symbol per pkg incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
n° [kg] Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the
Flush (without mounting adapter). Spring return. cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B1102 O Black 10 0.033
8 LM2T B1104 Red 10 0.033 Contact elements for spring-return actuators with
symbols
8 LM2T B1113 I Green 10 0.033 See page 7-41.
8 LM2T B1118 White 10 0.033 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T B1123 II Green 10 0.033 LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
8 LM2T B11... LM2T C10A (1EM)
8 LM2T B1128 White 10 0.033 LM2T C01 (1NC)
8 LM2T B1132 STOP Black 10 0.033 LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
8 LM2T B1134 Red 10 0.033 LM2T C01D (1LB)
Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T B1142 Black 10 0.033 Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left, middle

8 LM2T B1148 White 10 0.033 and right, one behind the other.
8 LM2T B1152 Black 10 0.033 Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B1158 White 10 0.033 To use contact elements in the middle position, install the
8 LM2T B1163 START Green 10 0.033 action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-38.
8 LM2T B1168 White 10 0.033
8 LM2T B21... Certifications and compliance
8 LM2T B1176 R Blue 10 0.033 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
8 LM2T B1178 White 10 0.033 (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, RINA,
8 LM2T B1196 RESET Blue 10 0.033 LROS, CCC.
Compliant with standards: IIEC/EN 60947-1,
8 LM2T B1502 Black 10 0.033 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LM2T B1512 Black 10 0.033
8 LM2T B2102 O Black 10 0.035
8 LM2T B2104 Red 10 0.035
8 LM2T B2132 STOP Black 10 0.035
8 LM2T B2134 Red 10 0.035
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate right or left.
Arrow symbol can be used to indicate up or down.

Mushroom head Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

pushbutton actuators per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T B6142 Black 10 0.037 • Per IEC/EN: IP66 for mushroom buttons (IP65 for
8 LM2T B6143 Green 10 0.037 LM2T B654...)
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K except for
8 LM2T B614... 8 LM2T B6144 Red 10 0.037 8 LM2T B616 which is Type 1, 2, 3R, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T B6145 Yellow 10 0.037 Materials
8 LM2T B6146 Blue 10 0.037 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
Ø60mm/2.4” (without mounting adapter). part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
8 LM2T B6162 Black 10 0.043
8 LM2T B6163 Green 10 0.043 Operating force: 0.8kg/1.7lb (actuator).
8 LM2T B6164 Red 10 0.043 Mechanical life:
8 LM2T B6165 Yellow 10 0.043 – Mushroom head spring return buttons: 1,000,000
cycles
7 8 LM2T B616...
8 LM2T B6166 Blue 10 0.043 – Mushroom head latch buttons: 300,000 cycles.
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE. Mounting adapter
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). See page 7-41.
For normal stopping. Type: LM2T AU120.
8 LM2T B6242 Black 10 0.105 The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
8 LM2T B6244 Red 10 0.105 incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm).
Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
LATCH, TURN TO RELEASE. rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B624... For normal stopping.
8 LM2T B6342 Black 10 0.054 Contact elements
8 LM2T B6344 Red 10 0.054 SPRING RETURN MUSHROOM - HEAD BUTTONS
See page 7-41.
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
For emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant. LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
8 LM2T B6644 Red 10 0.087 LM2T C10A (1EM)
LATCH, TURN KEY TO RELEASE. LM2T C01 (1NC)
8 LM2T B634... LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
For normal stopping. LM2T C01D (1LB)
8 LM2T B6542 Black 10 0.091 Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T B6542G 1 0.091
8 LM2T B6544 Red 10 0.091 Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left, middle
8 LM2T B6544G 1 0.091 Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted the
8 LM2T B6644 Versions with different key codes. cover surface of LPZ control stations.
Complete with the numeric code of the key. The following versions are To use contact elements in the middle position, install on
available: 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510. the action plug LM2T A140 on the actuator; see page 7-38.
Example of complete code: 8 LM2T B6542G505.
LATCH MUSHROOM - HEAD BUTTONS
and right, one behind the other. (for LM2T B624... and
LM2T B6644 max 4 contacts).
Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted the
8 LM2T B654... cover surface of LPZ control stations.

LROS, CCC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Double-touch actuators, Order code Colour Symbols Qty Wt Operational characteristics

Two flush push-buttons (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T B7112 Black/Red none 5 0.044 • Per IEC/EN: IP40.
8 LM2T B7113 Green/Red none 5 0.044 • Per UL/CSA: Type 1.
8 LM2T B7114 White/Black none 5 0:044 Materials
8 LM2T B7122 Black/Red I-O 5 0.044 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T B7123 Green/Red I-O 5 0.044 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
8 LM2T B7124 White/Black I-O 5 0.044
8 LM2T B71... 8 LM2T B7133 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.044 Mechanical endurance
One extended and one flush push-button (without Operating force: 0.8kg/1.7lb (actuator)
mounting adapter). Both spring return. Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
8 LM2T B7212 Black/Red none 5 0.044 Mounting adapter
8 LM2T B7213 Green/Red none 5 0.044 See page 7-41.
8 LM2T B7214 White/Black none 5 0.044 Type: LM2T AU120. 7
8 LM2T B7222 Black/Red I-O 5 0.044 incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
8 LM2T B7223 Green/Red I-O 5 0.044 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
8 LM2T B7224 White/Black I-O 5 0.044 rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the
8 LM2T B72... cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T B7233 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.044
Contact elements
Triple-touch actuators, Order code Symbols Qty Wt See page 7-41.
per pkg. Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
spring return LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
n° [kg] LM2T C10A (EM)
Triple-touch actuator (without mounting adapter). LM2T C01 (1NC)
Spring return. LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
8 LM2T B7345 5 0.044 LM2T C01D (LB)
STOP FOR DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS

Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and
right, one behind the other.
Up to 2 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
8 LM2T B73... 8 LM2T B7355 5 0.044 the cover surface of LPZ control stations, 1 on the left
and right.
STOP FOR TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
Up to 3 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
8 LM2T B7365 5 0.044 the cover surface of LPZ control stations.
STOP Certifications and compliance

LROS, CCC.
8 LM2T B7375 5 0.044 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
STOP


short lever position per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
2 position (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T S120 10 0.049 – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T S121 10 0.049 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T S130 10 0.049 Materials
8 LM2T S1... An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T S131 10 0.049 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
8 LM2T S132 10 0.049 polycarbonate.
8 LM2T S133 10 0.049
Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles.
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt Mounting adapter
long lever position per pkg See page 7-41.
n° [kg] Type: LM2T AU120.
7 2 position (without mounting adapter).
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59”).
8 LM2T S220 10 0.050 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
8 LM2T S221 10 0.050 rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the
cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T S230 10 0.050 Contact elements
See page 7-41.
8 LM2T S231 10 0.050 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T S2...
8 LM2T S232 10 0.050 LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
8 LM2T S233 10 0.050 LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
Selector switch actuators Order code Type of Qty Wt Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
key position per pkg Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and
n° [kg] right, one behind the other.
2 position (without mounting adapter). Up to 2 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on
the cover surface of LPZ control stations, 1 on the left
8 LM2T S320 10 0.079 and right.
8 LM2T S320G 1 0.079 For combination with more than 4 contacts, consult
8 LM2T S321 10 0.079 Customer Service for advice; see contact details on
inside front cover.
8 LM2T S321G 1 0.079
8 LM2T S340 10 0.079 Type of positions
8 LM2T S3... 8 LM2T S340G 1 0.079 Maintained position.
3 position (without mounting adapter). Spring return position.
8 LM2T S330 10 0.080 • Key extraction position.
8 LM2T S330G 1 0.080 Rotation angles
8 LM2T S331 10 0.080 2 position 3 position
45° 45°
8 LM2T S331G 1 0.080 90°
8 LM2T S332 10 0.080
8 LM2T S332G 1 0.080
Special versions
8 LM2T S333 10 0.080 Versions with coloured keys are available upon request.
8 LM2T S333G 1 0.080 Consult our Customer Service; see contact details on
8 LM2T S350 10 0.080 inside front cover.
8 LM2T S350G 1 0.080 Certifications and compliance
8 LM2T S360 10 0.080 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada,
8 LM2T S360G 1 0.080 (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, RINA,
LROS, CCC.
8 LM2T S370 10 0.080 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
8 LM2T S370G 1 0.080 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LM2T S380 10 0.080
8 LM2T S380G 1 0.080 Versions with different key codes.
8 LM2T S390 10 0.080 Complete with the numeric code of the key. The following versions are
available: 501; 502; 503; 504; 505; 506; 507; 508; 509; 510. Example
8 LM2T S390G 1 0.080 of complete code: 8 LM2T S320G505.
Available only on specific request.
Contact activation for 2-position selector switch Contact activation of 3-position selector switch
2 2
1 Column 1 Column
Contacts Contacts
1 2 1 2
A — — A —
B B — —
C —

Illuminated button Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

actuators, spring return per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
Flush with side visibility (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Spring return. – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T BL103 Green 10 0.033 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
8 LM2T BL104 Red 10 0.033 • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T BL105 Yellow 10 0.033 Materials
8 LM2T BL10...
8 LM2T BL106 Blue 10 0.033 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T BL107 Transparent 10 0.033 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
8 LM2T BL203 Green 10 0.035 Mechanical endurance
8 LM2T BL204 Red 10 0.035 Operating force: 0.8kg/1.7lb (actuator).
Mechanical life:
8 LM2T BL205 Yellow 10 0.035 – Spring return buttons: 1,000,000 cycles
8 LM2T BL20... 8 LM2T BL206 Blue 10 0.035 – Push-push buttons: 500,000 cycles.
8 LM2T BL207 Transparent 10 0.035
Mounting adapter 7
See page 7-41.
Type: LM2T AU120.
Illuminated button actuators Order code Colour Qty Wt The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
push-push per pkg incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
n° [kg] Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
Flush with side visibility (without mounting adapter). rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the
Push on-push off. cover of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T QL103 Green 10 0.033 Contact elements for illuminated spring-return buttons
8 LM2T QL104 Red 10 0.033 See page 7-41.
8 LM2T QL105 Yellow 10 0.033 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T QL106 Blue 10 0.033 LM2T C10A (EM)
8 LM2T QL10...
8 LM2T QL107 Transparent 10 0.033 LM2T C01 (1NC)
Extended (without mounting adapter). LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
Push on-push off. LM2T C01D (LB)
8 LM2T QL203 Green 10 0.035 Up to 4 contacts can be fitted, 2 each on the left and right
8 LM2T QL204 Red 10 0.035 one behind the other, when one of the lamp-holders type
8 LM2T QL205 Yellow 10 0.035 LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or
8 LM2T QL20... LM2T M… is used (see page 7-42 or 43).
8 LM2T QL206 Blue 10 0.035 On the cover of LPZ control stations, up to 2 contacts per
8 LM2T QL207 Transparent 10 0.035 actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the right
Use contact elements EM (8LM2T C10A early make) and NC and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
(8LM2T C01) only. LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or
Contact elements NO (8LM2T C10) and LB (8LM2T C01D late break) LM2T M… is used in the middle position.
cannot be used with these actuators. For the number of contact Instead when using lamp-holder LM2T YL... or LM2T
elements, refer to the right-hand column. GL..., up to 2 contacts only can be fitted one behind the
other (see page 7-42).
Contact elements for illuminated push-push buttons

See page 7-41.
Type: LM2T C10A (EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
Up to 2 contact elements can be fitted with one of the
lamp-holders type LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T
ZL230, LM2T L... or LM2T M… (see page 7-40 or 41).
On the cover of LPZ control stations, up to 2 contacts per
actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the right
and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or
LM2T M... is used in the middle position.
Only 1 contact can be fitted with lamp-golders
LM2T YL..., LM2T GL... (see page 7-42).
Lamp-holder elements
See page 7-42 and 43.
Lamps
Maximum recommended power: 1.2W.
See page 7-38.

LROS, CCC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Illuminated mushroom Order code Colour Quantity Wt Operational characteristics

head button actuators per pkg. – Any mounting position allowed
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter).. – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T BL6143 Green 10 0.043 • Per IEC/EN: IP65 for mushroom-head actuators;
8 LM2T BL6144 Red 10 0.043 IP40 for double-touch actuators.
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K except for
8 LM2T BL6145 Yellow 10 0.043 8 LM2T BL71... and 8 LM2T BL72... which are Type 1.
8 LM2T BL614... 8 LM2T BL6146 Blue 10 0.043 Materials
8 LM2T BL6148 White 10 0.043 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
LATCH, PULL TO RELEASE. part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
Ø40mm/1.6” (without mounting adapter). polycarbonate.
8 LM2T BL6243 Green 10 0.105 Mechanical endurance
Operating force: 0.8kg/1.7lb (actuator).
8 LM2T BL6244 Red 10 0.105 Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
8 LM2T BL6245 Yellow 10 0.105 Mounting adapter
8 LM2T BL624... 8 LM2T BL6246 Blue 10 0.105 See page 7-41.
7 8 LM2T BL6248 White 10 0.105 Type: LM2T AU120.
incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
Double touch actuators, Order code Colour Symbol Quantity Wt Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
per pkg. rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the cover
spring return, white of LPZ control stations.
n° [kg]
indicator Contact elements
Two flush pushbuttons (without mounting adapter). See page 7-41.
Both spring return. Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T BL7112 Black/Red none 5 0.044 LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston)
8 LM2T BL7113 Green/Red none 5 0.044 LM2T C10A (1EM)
LM2T C01 (1NC)
8 LM2T BL7114 White/Black none 5 0.044 LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
8 LM2T BL7122 Black/Red I-O 5 0.044 LM2T C01D (1LB)
8 LM2T BL7123 Green/Red I-O 5 0.044 Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T BL7124 White/Black I-O 5 0.044 MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS
8 LM2T BL71...
8 LM2T BL7133 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.044 Can be mounted on the mounting adapter:
One extended and one flush pushbuttons (without – Up to 4 contacts, 2 each on the left and right, one
mounting adapter). Both spring return. behind the other, when one of the lamp-holders:
LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... is
8 LM2T BL7212 Black/Red –– 5 0.044 used or 2 contacts LM2T M... (see page 7-40 or 41).
8 LM2T BL7213 Green/Red –– 5 0.044 – On the cover of LPZ control station, up to 2 contacts
8 LM2T BL7214 White/Black –– 5 0.044 per actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the
right and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
8 LM2T BL7222 Black/Red I-O 5 0.044 LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or
8 LM2T BL7223 Green/Red I-O 5 0.044 LM2T M... is used in the middle position.
8 LM2T BL7224 White/Black I-O 5 0.044 – Up to 2 contacts, one over the other, when one of the
8 LM2T BL72... lamp-holders type: LM2T YL... or LM2T GL... is used (see
8 LM2T BL7233 Green/Red Start/Stop 5 0.044 page 7-40).
Up to 4 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left and right.
Up to 2 contacts per actuator can be internally fitted on the
cover of LPZ control stations, 1 each on the right and/or left
when one of the lamp-holders type LM2T DL400,
LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or LM2T M... is used in
the middle position.
Lamps
See page 7-38.

LROS, CCC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Illuminated selector Order code Colour Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

switch actuators positions per pkg – Any mounting position allowed
2 position (without mounting adapter). • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T SL1203 Green 10 0.025 – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T SL1204 Red 10 0.025 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
IP40 for actuators.
8 LM2T SL1205 Yellow 10 0.025 • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T SL1206 Blue 10 0.025 Materials
8 LM2T SL1... 8 LM2T SL1208 White 10 0.025 An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T SL1213 Green 10 0.025 part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
polycarbonate.
8 LM2T SL1214 Red 10 0.025
8 LM2T SL1215 Yellow 10 0.025 Operating force: 0.8kg/1.7lb (actuator).
8 LM2T SL1216 Blue 10 0.025 Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles.
8 LM2T SL1218 White 10 0.025 Mounting adapter
3 position (without mounting adapter). See page 7-41.
Type: LM2T AU120.
8 LM2T SL1303 Green 10 0.025 The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of 7
8 LM2T SL1304 Red 10 0.025 incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
8 LM2T SL1305 Yellow 10 0.025 Actuators latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the cover
8 LM2T SL1306 Blue 10 0.025 of LPZ control stations.
8 LM2T SL1308 White 10 0.025 Contact elements
8 LM2T SL1313 Green 10 0.025 See page 7-41.
8 LM2T SL1314 Red 10 0.025 Type: LM2T C10 (1NO)
8 LM2T SL1315 Yellow 10 0.025 LM2T C10A (1EM)
8 LM2T SL1316 Blue 10 0.025 LM2T C01 (1NC)
8 LM2T SL1318 White 10 0.025 LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston)
LM2T C01D (1LB)
8 LM2T SL1323 Green 10 0.025 Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter.
8 LM2T SL1324 Red 10 0.025 The following contacts can be fitted on the mounting
8 LM2T SL1325 Yellow 10 0.025 adapter on 2-position illuminated buttons:
– Up to 4 contacts when one of the lamp-holders type
8 LM2T SL1326 Blue 10 0.025 LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or
8 LM2T SL1328 White 10 0.025 LM2T M... is used (see page 7-40 or 41).
8 LM2T SL1333 Green 10 0.025 – On the cover of LPZ control station, up to 2 contacts
per actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the
8 LM2T SL1334 Red 10 0.025 right and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
8 LM2T SL1335 Yellow 10 0.025 LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or
8 LM2T SL1336 Blue 10 0.025 LM2T M... is used in the middle position.
8 LM2T SL1338 White 10 0.025 LM2T YL... or LM2T GL... is used (see page 7-40).
Contact activation of 2-position selector switch Contact activation of 3-position selector switch The following contacts can be fitted on the mounting
2 2 adapter on 3-position illuminated buttons:
1 1 LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or
Contacts Contacts
LM2T M... is used (see page 7-40 or 41).
1 2 1 2
– On the cover of LPZ control station, up to 2 contacts
A — — A — per actuator can be internally fitted, 1 each on the
right and/or left, when one of the lamp-holders type
B B — — LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or
LM2T M... is used in the middle position.
C — NOTE: No lamp-holder type LM2T YL... or LM2T GL... can
be used.
Selector switch type of positions
Maintained position.
Spring return position.
Selector switch rotation angles
2 position 3 position
45° 45°
90°
Lamps
See page 7-38.

LROS, CCC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Pilot light heads Order code Colour Qty Wt Operational characteristics

Without mounting adapter. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T IL103 Green 10 0.024 – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T IL104 Red 10 0.024 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K.
8 LM2T IL105 Yellow 10 0.024
8 LM2T IL10... 8 LM2T IL106 Blue 10 0.024 Materials
An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
8 LM2T IL107 Transparent 10 0.024
8 LM2T IL1187 Transparent 10 0.024 polycarbonate.
With symbol indicating dangerous voltage (IEC/EN 60417 5036-a).
Mounting adapter
See page 7-41.
LM2T AU120 LM2T AL... Type: LM2T AU120.
LM2T AU160 LM2T A160 The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of
Pilot light heads latch onto the mounting adapter by simple
7 rotation through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling also on the cover
of LPZ control stations and exclusively with one of the
following lamp-holders, internally mounted in the middle
position: LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
LM2T DL400 LM2T L... or LM2T M... for each light head.
LM2T FL... LM2T A190
LM2T GL... Lamp-holder elements
LM2T EL400 LM2T AT...
LM2T VL230
LM2T ZL230 Lamps
LM2T T100 Maximum recommended power: 1.2W.
LM2T YL... See page 7-38.
LM2T XL...
LM2T L... Certifications and compliance
LM2T M... Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, EAC, CCC,
The mounting adapter is supplied with LM2T AU120. UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Can be purchased separately. Refer to page 7-38, 7-39 or 42. Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Potentiometer drives Order code Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics

per pkg – Suitable for potentiometers with 6 and 6.3mm/0.24-0.25”
diameter shaft and minimum 40mm/1.6” shaft length
Complete with mounting adapter. • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
8 LM2T P100 With graduated scale 10 0.070 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T P110 With variable index 10 0.070 – Degree of protection: IP65 (warranted by potentiometers
Potentiometer not included. with a cylindrical shaft).
8 LM2T P100 Materials

(with mounting adapter) An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
polycarbonate.
Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles.
Mounting adapter
Standard supply with actuator.
8 LM2T P110 Operators will latch onto the mounting adapter with a
(with mounting adapter) simple twist; not suitable for LPZ control stations.

Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

Joysticks Order code Type of N° auxiliary Qty Wt Operational characteristics

positions elements per – Any mounting position allowed
pkg – LM2T J2... types can be used with LPZ control stations
NO n° [kg – Ambient conditions:
Without mechanical interlock. Complete with auxiliary contact. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Label holder excluded. – Degree of protection:
8 LM2T J200 2 1 0.082 • Per IEC/EN: IP65
• Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K
• IP20 for contact elements.
8 LM2T J201 2 1 0.082

Materials
An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal
parts whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and
8 LM2T J400 4 1 0.104 polycarbonate.
The sealing boot is made of NBR rubber.
8 LM2T J... Mechanical endurance

(without mechanical interlock) 8 LM2T J401 4 1 0.104 Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles.
7
General characteristics of contact elements
Wiping action and dual scraping-oscillating effect.
With mechanical interlock in centre position. IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
Complete with auxiliary contact. Label holder excluded. IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
8 LM2T J210 2 1 0.082
[V] 12 24 48 120 240
[A] 6 6 6 6 3
8 LM2T J211 2 1 0.082
IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
[V] 12 24 48 125 250
[A] 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.27
8 LM2T J410 4 1 0.104
Short circuit protection fuse, max calibre: 10A gG/SC.
Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ.
Terminals: Clamp screw with washer
8 LM2T J411 4 1 0.104 Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/0.74lbft.
Mounting adapter and contact elements

8 LM2T J... The joystick is standard supplied with the mounting
(with mechanical interlock) adapter and contact elements.
Accessories Order code Description Qty Wt incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft).
per The joystick latches onto the mounting adapter by simple
pkg rotation.
n° [kg] Two LM2T CJ... contacts are mounted on joystick
8 LM2T AU101 2-4 directional holder 10 0.004 LM2T J2... type and 4 LM2T CJ... contacts on LM2T J4...
for adhesive legends type.
The mounting adapter and contact elements of
LM2T J2… types can be internally mounted on LPZ
control stations covers.

8 LM2T AU101 Certifications obtained: CCC, EAC, UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
3
65 (2.56”) 2
for LM2T J4... 1
50 (1.97”) 1 2
for LM2T J2... A
A
2
42.4 (1.67”)
D
N
30 1 N
(3.74”)
95
(1.18”)
C
B B
Joystick positions and contact activation A B C D N A B N

LM2TCJ10 1 1
LM2TCJ10
2 instable 2 stable LM2TCJ01 2 2
Ø22.3
(0.88”) LM2TCJ10 3
4 instable 4 stable LM2TCJ01 4
Accessories and spare parts Dimensions

pages 7-38 to 40 page 7-50 7-37
Accessories and Order code Description Qty per Wt

spare parts pkg
n° [kg
8 LM2T A12... Coloured diffuser for 10 0.001
double touch buttons
8 LM2T A130 Threaded plug for unused 10 0.007
drilled holes (black)
8 LM2T A130 8 LM2T A140 Action plug for centre 50 0.001
contact
8 LM2T A150 Rod for mechanical 10 0.006
reset button
(l =140mm/5.5”)
8 LM2T A160 BA9s bulb extractor 10 0.004
8 LM2T A161 Hole size adapter set for 10 0.002
8 LM2T A140
Ø30mm/1.2” to
22mm/0.87” (2 per hole)
8 LM2T A170 Spare key set for 1 0.008
7 selector or mushroom
head button
8 LM2T A170G Spare key set for 1 0.008
G series selector or
mushroom-head button
8 LM2T A185
8 LM2T A185 Selector switch 10 0.004
protection shroud for
short lever
8 LM2T A190 Diffuser for 10 0.003
pilot light
8 LM2T AL... 8 LM2T ALA024 Filament bulb 100 0.002
BA9s 24VAC/DC - 1.2W
8 LM2T ALB024 Filament bulb 100 0.003
BA9s 24VAC/DC - 2W
BA9s 48VAC/DC - 2W
BA9s 130VAC/DC - 2W
8 LM2T ALL006 LED bulb BA9s 10 0.003
6VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
48VAC/DC
8 LM2T ALN130 Neon bulb BA9s 100 0.003
110...125VAC
8 LM2T ALN250 Neon bulb 100 0.003
BA9s 220...250VAC
8 LM2T ALP130 Neon bulb 100 0.003
BA9s 110...125VAC
8 LM2T ALP250 Neon bulb 100 0.003
BA9s 220...250VAC
Complete the order code by adding the digit of the selected colour:
3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white).
Versions with different key code. Complete with the numeric code of the key.
The following versions are available:
501; 502; 503; 504; 505; 506; 507; 508; 509; 510.
Example of complete code: 8 LM2T A170G505.
Coloured key versions are available on request; consult Customer Service;
see contact details on inside front cover.
Add the digit of the selected colour: 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow).
It is advisable to use the same colour of bulb as of the actuator to obtain
adequate light emission.
Neon bulbs emit an amber light and may not be suitable for use with green
or blue pilot lights and illuminated actuators.
Glass with diffuser lens.
Plastic neon bulb.
Dimensions
7-38 page 7-50
Accessories and Order code Description Qty Wt

spare parts per pkg.
n° [kg]
8 LM2T AT... Printed label to be 50 0.001
inserted in pilot lights
and illuminated
pushbuttons
8 LM2T AT... 8 LM2T AU100 Legend holder 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU105 Legend holder (for 50 0.003
8 LM2T AU106 paper or
8 LM2T AU108 plastic
labels)
8 LM2T AU106 Blank paper label for 50 0.002
writing
(for LM2T AU105)
8 LM2T AU107 Transparent protection 50 0.001
for LM2T AU106 label
8 LM2T AU100 8 LM2T AU105 8 LM2T AU108 Blank plastic label for
engraving
50 0.002 7
(for LM2T AU105)
8 LM2T AU13 IP66 boot for 10 0.006
pushbuttons
LM2T B1/R1...
8 LM2T AU108 pushbuttons
8 LM2T AU106 LM2T B2/B3//BL2/R2...
double and triple
buttons (transparent)
8 LM2T AU159 Shroud for buttons 10 0.010
8 LM2T B62/63/65/66...,
8 LM2T BL62...
8 LM2T AU170 LPX DIN Adapter for mounting 10 0.008
8 LM2T... buttons on
DIN rail 35mm/1.38”
wide (2 modules)
8 LM2T AU167 IP66 protective boot 10 0.012
for mushroom head
buttons LM2T B62/B63...
(transparent)
8 LM2T AU170 Actuator gasket 10 0.006
Available only on specific request, consult Customer Service; see contact
To preserve actuators degree of protection (IP65) place their gasket
between legend holder and mounting surface.
For flush and extended push-buttons, complete the order code by adding the
8 LM2T AU159 digit of the required colour: 2 (black); 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue);
7 (transparent); 8 (white).
For illuminated push-buttons, add only digit 7 (transparent).
LPX DIN
Dimensions
page 7-50 7-39
Labels with text for Order code Text Qty per Wt General characteristics
LM2T AU100 legend holder pkg The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on
n° [kg] metalised grey polycarbonate background (adhesive).
General use. Special versions
8 LM2T AU206 Blank for writing 50 0.001 Labels in different languages are available.
8 LM2T AU207 Sheet with 108 labels 1 0.005 Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
for laser printing front cover.
8 LM2T AU208 Sheet with 108 1 0.005
laser-printed labels
8 LM2T AGB230 8 LM2T AI210 LATCH 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI211 OPEN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI212 STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI213 GENERAL STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI214 STOP RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI215 FORWARD 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI216 CLOSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI217 RIGHT 50 0.001
7 8 LM2T AI218 LOWER 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI219 OFF 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI220 EMERGENCY 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI221 OFF 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI222 REVERSE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI223 ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI237 THERMAL TRIP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI224 SLOW 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI225 RUNNING 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB226 RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI226 RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI227 RAISE 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI228 LEFT 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI229 POWER ON 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB225 START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB230 STOP 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB214 STOP-RESET 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI231 FAST 50 0.001
For selector switches.
8 LM2T AI232 STOP-START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI233 AUTO-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI234 AUTO-O-MAN 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI242 MAN-O-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI235 FWD-O-REV 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI236 ON - OFF 50 0.001
8 LM2T AI241 MAN-AUTO 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB232 STOP-START 50 0.001
8 LM2T AGB236 OFF-ON 50 0.001
International labels for pushbuttons.
8 LM2T AU200 O 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU201 I 50 0.001
8 LM2T AU202 II 50 0.001
International labels for selector switches.
8 LM2T AU203 O-I 50 0.001
Recommended use with LM2T AU206 blank label.
Sheet with 108 adhesive labels. 8 LM2T AU204 I-II 50 0.001
Complete code with label text required. 8 LM2T AU205 I-O-II 50 0.001
Plastic disk for mushroom Ordering code Text Qty per Wt General characteristics
pkg The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic.
head pushbuttons It is not possible use plastic disks with protection
n° [kg] 8 LM2T AU159.
8 LM2T AU112 EMERGENCY STOP 10 0.005
Ø90mm/3.5” Special versions
8 LM2T AU113 EMERGENCY STOP 10 0.005 The disk text in different languages is available.
ERGENCY Ø90mm/3.5” Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside
EM front cover.
Ø60mm/2.4”
Ø60mm/2.4”
8 LM2T AU118 ARRET D’URGENCE / 10 0.003
NOT-AUS /
PARO EMERGENCIA
Ø60mm/2.4”
STOP
Dimensions
7-40 page 7-50
Mounting adapter Order code Description Qty Wt Operational characteristics

n° [kg] – The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means
of incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
Only for metal series LM2T actuators. internally on LPZ control stations covers
8 LM2T AU120 Mounting adapter 10 0.019 – Contact elements snap onto the adapter
– Maximum tightening torque for screw terminals: 1Nm
8 LM2T AU120 – Degree of protection:
• IP20 for contacts elements with screw termination
• IP00 for contact elements with Faston termination.
General characteristics of contact elements

Contact elements Order code Function Qty Wt Wiping action and dual scraping and oscillating effect,
per pkg IEC rated insulation voltage: 690V
n° [kg] IEC rated thermal current Ith: 10A
Conductivity: 5V 10mA.
Screw termination. UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 Q600.
Without mounting adapter IEC/EN operational characteristics in AC15 category: 7
.3
8 LM2T C10 10 0.011 [V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600
NO
.4
[A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2
.7
8 LM2T C10A 10 0.011 IEC/EN operational characteristics in DC13 category:
EM
.8
[V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600
.1
8 LM2T C01 10 0.011 [A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1
NC
.2
Short-circuit protection fuse: max. calibre 10A gG/SC
8 LM2T C... 8 LM2T C01D .5
10 0.011 Contact resistance: ≤20mΩ
LB Terminals: Clamp screw with washer
.6
Faston 1-6.35mm/0.25” or 2-2.8mm/0.11”.
Screw termination.
With mounting adapter. Stroke of contact elements
.3 EM
8 LM2T E10 10 0.029
NO NO
.4
.1
NC
8 LM2T E01 10 0.029 LB
NC
.2
1 2 (0.08”) 3 (0.35”) 4 4.8mm
Faston termination (0.04”) 1.8 2.8 (0.16”) (0.19”)
Without mounting adapter (0.07”) (0.11”)
8 LM2T E...
.3 Closed contact Open contact
8 LM2T CF10 10 0.012
NO
.4
.1 Maximum conductor cross section for screw terminals
8 LM2T CF01 10 0.012 1 or 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
NC
.2
Use LM2T C10A (EM) or LM2T C01 (NC) type only with push-push Mechanical and electric endurance
actuators. Not suitable for push-push actuators. Operating force: 0.5kg / 1.1lb (contact elements).
Normally open contact with early make operation. Electrical life: LM2T C10 1,000,000 cycles
Direct (positive) opening action in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-5-1. LM2T CF10 1,000,000 cycles
Normally closed contact with late break operation.
LM2T C01 1,000,000 cycles
LM2T CF01 1,000,000 cycles
Drillings - Minimum recommended distances LM2T C10A 600,000 cycles
8 LM2T CF01
LM2T C01D 600,000 cycles.
50 (1.97”)

42.4 (1.67”)
Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, EAC, CCC,

UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
30 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
(2.56”)
(1.18”) IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

65
8 LM2T CF10
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Using contacts with Faston elements, the minimum vertical pitch is

90mm/3.54”.

page 7-49 page 7-51 7-41
Lamp-holder elements Order code Rated Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

supply bulb per – Operating supply voltage limits for all types:
without mounting adapter voltage supplied pkg -15…+10% Ue
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means
Direct supply. of incorporated screws (Tmax = 0.8Nm/0.59lbft) also
8 LM2T EL400 ≤415VAC/DC No 10 0.011 internally on LPZ control stations covers
– Lamp-holder elements snap onto the adapter
With resistor and diode. – Only lamp-holder elements LM2T DL400,
8 LM2T ZL230 230VAC Yes 10 0.015 LM2T EL400, LM2T T100 and LM2T ZL230 can be
130V (2W) used with LPZ control stations
With transformer
. – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm/1.57lbft
8 LM2T EL400 – Ambient conditions:
8 LM2T ZL230 8 LM2T YL110 110...120VAC Yes 1 0.086 • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C
24V (1.2W) • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
8 LM2T YL230 220...240VAC Yes 1 0.084 – Degree of protection: IP20.
24V (1.2W)
8 LM2T YL400 380...415VAC Yes 1 0.087 Mounting adapter
24V (1.2W) See page 7-41.
Type : LM2T AU120 for LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230,
7 Flashing
. LM2T YL..., LM2T GL... and/or LM2T T100.
8 LM2T GL048 24...48VAC No 1 0.027
8 LM2T GL230 110...230VAC No 1 0.027 Maximum conductor cross section
1 or 2 2.5mm2 or AWG 12 cables.
8 LM2T YL...
8 LM2T GL...
Wiring diagrams
Direct supply With resistor and diode
Lamp-holder elements Order code Rated Type of Qty Wt LM2T EL400 X1 LM2T ZL230 X1
with mounting adapter supply bulb per LM2T DL400
voltage supplied pkg. X2
X2
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] With transformer Flashing
Direct supply. LM2T YL... X1 LM2T GL... X1
8 LM2T DL400 ≤415VAC/DC No 10 0.029 X2 X2
Test element X1
LM2T T100 X5
TEST

8 LM2T DL400 Certifications obtained: RINA, LROS, GOST, CCC,
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
Auxiliary Devices.
Test element Order code Description Qty Wt IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
for lamp-holders without per
pkg.
mounting adapter n° [kg]
Test element for lamp-holders.
8 LM2T T100 Test element 10 0.011
Filament bulb, BA9s U≤130VAC/DC max 2.6W (not supplied); maximum

dimensions 11x28 mm.
For higher voltages, use neon bulbs.
Not suitable for 3-position selectors.
Filament bulb, BA9s (not supplied); maximum dimensions
11x28mm/0.4x1.1”.
Use bulbs with rated voltage equal to that of the power supply.
8 LM2T T100 Suitable for AC duty only.
E.g.: With 8 LM2T FL230, use 110VAC bulbs if power supply is 110VAC and
230VAC bulbs if power supply 230VAC. 2.6W max bulb rating.
MultiLED bulbs must not be fitted.
In case of test circuits for lamp-holders having load in parallel, two
LM2T T100 elements are required for each bulb.
Refer to the wiring diagram attached to the product or consult Customer
Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
In case of neon bulbs, consult Customer Service; see contact details on
inside front cover.
Only use with lamp-holder elements:
• With direct supply
• With resistor and diode

Not suitable for use with test element.

7-42 pages 7-49 and 50 page 7-51
LED elements Order code Supply voltage LED Qty Wt Operational characteristics
steady light colour per – Rated frequency: 50-60Hz
pkg. – Supply voltage:
[V] n° [kg] • Steady light: 12...30VAC/DC; 85...140VAC;
185...265VAC
Screw termination. • Flashing light: 18...30VAC/DC; 85...140VAC,
Supplied without mounting adapter. 185...265VAC
8 LM2T LB3 12…30VAC/DC Green 10 0.016 – Maximum consumption:
8 LM2T LB4 Red 10 0.016 • Steady and flashing light: 17mA-0.50W
(12...30VAC/DC); 20mA-0.40W (85...140VAC);
8 LM2T LB5 Yellow 10 0.016 18mA-0.55W (185...265VAC)
8 LM2T LB6 Blue 10 0.016 – Protection:
8 LM2T L... 8 LM2T LB8 White 10 0.016 • Against overvoltages
• Against stray currents in wiring
8 LM2T LE3 85…140VAC Green 10 0.016 • To reduce flickering phenomenon
8 LM2T LE4 Red 10 0.016 • To withstand vibrations
8 LM2T LE5 Yellow 10 0.016 – Minimum activation voltage:
• Steady light: 4V-1mA (12...30VAC/DC); 30V-4mA
8 LM2T LE6 Blue 10 0.016 (85...140VAC); 55V-4mA (185...265VAC)
8 LM2T LE8 White 10 0.016 • Flashing light: 5V-1.5mA (18...30VAC/DC);
8 LM2T LM3 185…265VAC Green 10 0.016 13V-1.5mA (85...140VAC); 25V-1.5mA 7
(185...265VAC)
8 LM2T LM4 Red 10 0.016 – Electrical life: 100,000 hours
8 LM2T LM5 Yellow 10 0.016 – Snap onto 8 LM2T AU120 mounting adapter in the
8 LM2T LM6 Blue 10 0.016 middle position for each illuminated actuator, also
internally on the LPZ control station cover
8 LM2T LM8 White 10 0.016 – No other element can be stacked behind LED elements
Only LM2T LB… type is suitable for use with LM2T T100 test element. – Any mounting position allowed
– Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm
LED elements Order code Supply voltage LED Qty Wt • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C
flashing light colour per – Degree of protection: IP20.
pkg.
[V] n° [kg]
Mounting adapter
Screw termination. See page 7-39. Type: LM2T AU120.
Supplied without mounting adapter. The adapter is fixed on the mounting surface by means
8 LM2T MB3 18…30VAC/DC Green 10 0.016 of incorporated screws (Tmax=0,8Nm/0.59lbft).
8 LM2T MB4 Red 10 0.016
8 LM2T MB5 Yellow 10 0.016 Maximum conductor cross section
8 LM2T MB6 Blue 10 0.016 1 or 2 2.5mm2 or AWG12 cables.
8 LM2T M... 8 LM2T MB8 White 10 0.016
8 LM2T ME3 85…140VAC Green 10 0.016 Wiring diagram
8 LM2T ME4 Red 10 0.016
8 LM2T ME5 Yellow 10 0.016 X2 X1
8 LM2T ME6 Blue 10 0.016

8 LM2T ME8 White 10 0.016 Certifications and compliance
8 LM2T MM3 185…265VAC Green 10 0.016 Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC, UL Listed for USA and
8 LM2T MM4 Red 10 0.016 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
8 LM2T MM5 Yellow 10 0.016 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14-95.
8 LM2T MM6 Blue 10 0.016
8 LM2T MM8 White 10 0.016
Only LM2T MB… type is suitable for use with LM2T T100 test element.

pages 7-49 and 50 page 7-51 7-43
COMBINATIONS FOR METAL SERIES PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T C... LM2T CF... LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T AU...
LM2T B10... LM2T B20... LM2T B30...
LM2T B11... LM2T B21... LM2T AU170
LM2T AU170
LM2T A140
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS
LM2T C10A LM2T AU120

LM2T C01
LM2T E01 LM2T AU...
7 LM2T Q10... LM2T Q20... LM2T AU170
NORMAL STOPPING MUSHROOM-HEAD BUTTONS

LM2T C... LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T CF... LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T CF... LM2T E... LM2T CF... LM2T E...
LM2T AU120 LM2T AU120
LM2T AU... LM2T AU...
LM2T B614.. LM2T B616... LM2T B634... LM2T B654... LM2T AU170 LM2T AU170
LM2T A140
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTONS

LM2T C...
LM2T C... LM2T CF...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T B624... LM2T B6644 LM2T AU170
LM2T C...
LM2T AU120
LM2T B71... LM2T B72...
TRIPLE-TOUCH BUTTONS
LM2T C...
LM2T AU120
LM2T B73...
SELECTOR SWITCHES
LM2T C...
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T S1... LM2T S2... LM2T S3...

LM2T AU170
7-44
COMBINATION FOR METAL SERIES ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

SPRING-RETURN BUTTONS LM2T L... - LM2T M... LM2T C...
LM2T DL400 - LM2T EL400 LM2T CF...
LM2T ZL230
LM2T C... LM2T C...
LM2T CF... LM2T CF...
LM2T T100 LM2T E...

LM2T YL...
LM2T C...
LM2T GL...
LM2T BL10... LM2T BL20... LM2T CF...
LM2T E... LM2T AU170 LM2T AU170
LM2T T100
PUSH-PUSH BUTTONS LM2T L...

LM2T M...
LM2T EL400
LM2T C10A
LM2T ZL230
LM2T C01
LM2T C10A
LM2T C01
LM2T E01
LM2T AU... LM2T AU... 7

LM2T T100 LM2T YL...
LM2T GL...
LM2T QL10... LM2T QL20... LM2T AU170 LM2T AU170
MUSHROOM-HEAD SPRING-RETURN BUTTON LM2T L... - LM2T M... LM2T C...

LM2T ZL230 LM2T C...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF... LM2T CF...
LM2T T100 LM2T E...

LM2T BL614... LM2T YL...
LM2T C...
LM2T GL...
LM2T CF...
LM2T T100
MUSHROOM-HEAD LATCH BUTTON LM2T L... - LM2T M... LM2T C...

LM2T ZL230
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...

LM2T BL624... LM2T YL...
LM2T C...
LM2T GL...
LM2T CF...
LM2T T100
DOUBLE-TOUCH BUTTONS LM2T L... - LM2T M...

LM2T DL400 - LM2T EL400
LM2T C... LM2T ZL230
LM2T CF...
LM2T T100
LM2T AU120
LM2T C...
LM2T BL71... LM2T BL72... LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T T100
2-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES LM2T C...

LM2T L... - LM2T M... LM2T CF...
LM2T ZL230 LM2T C...
LM2T C...
LM2T CF...
LM2T CF...
LM2T E...
LM2T T100

LM2T YL...
LM2T SL12... LM2T C...
LM2T GL...
LM2T CF...
LM2T T100
3-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCHES LM2T L... - LM2T M...

LM2T C... LM2T ZL230
LM2T CF...
LM2T T100
LM2T AU120
LM2T AU...
LM2T SL13... LM2T C...

LM2T CF...
LM2T E... LM2T AU170
LM2T T100
7-45
series dimensions [mm (in)]
PLATINUM SERIES PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

Flush pushbutton with screw terminal contact or LED or test Flush pushbutton with Faston contact elements Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
elements 30
(1.18”)
30
20.1 20.1 (1.18”)
(0.79”) 67.5 (2.66”) (0.79”)
0,95” (0.02, -0”)

(0.39”)
10
(0.39”)
67.5 (2.66”) 10
24.1 (+0.4, -0)

1-6 max (0.39”) 1-6 max (0.39”)
10
(0.04-0.24” max)
10
40 (1.57”)
(0.04-0.24” max)
62.8 (2.47”)
(1.16”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.5
(1.16”)
(1.38”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.5
(1.38”)
30
35
40 (1.57”)
30
35
ADD-ON
43 ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX AU120
(1.69”) n°1 LPX AU120 ADD-ON
(possible LPX T...) n°1 LPX CF...
ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX C...
n°1 LPX... in middle
pos. on LPX AU120 adapter
3.2 (+0.2, -0) Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.12”(+0.01”, -0”) Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
When Faston contacts are used, the vertical
pitch must be 85mm minimum.
Mushroom-head pushbutton with auto-monitor contacts

LPX C01SM LPX C02SM
7 20.1 20.1
(0.79”)
1-6max 41 45.6 (0.79”) 41 (0.79”) 41

20
1-6max 41
(0.04-0.24”max) (1.61”) (1.79”) (1.61”) (0.04-0.24”max) (1.61”)
(1.61”)
(1.46”)
(1.38”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
(1.46”)
(1.38”)
(1.97”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
37
35
Ø30
(1.18”)
Ø30
30
(1.97”)
Ø30
37
35
50
Ø30
30
50
43 43
(1.69”) LPX C02SM LPX AU120
LPX C01SM LPX AU120 (1.69”)
Flush pushbutton with test element and spring-clamp terminal Drillings – Minimum recommended distances with
contact or LED elements LPX CS... - LPX LPS... spring-clamp terminal contact or LED elements
30
20.1 (1.18”)
(0.79”) 30
(0.39”)
67.5 (2.66”) 10 (1.18”)

1-6 max
0,95” (0.02, -0”)

(0.39”)
10
24.1 (+0.4, -0)

(0.04-0.24” max)
(2.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.18”)
(1.63”)
Ø29.5
41.5
55
30
(2.16”)
55
43 ADD-ON
(1.69”) ELEMENTS
n°1 LPX AU120
(possible LPX T…)
n°1 LPX CS...
n°1 LPX LPS... in middle pos.
of LPX AU120 adapter
3.2 (+0.2, -0) Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)

0.12”(+0.01”, -0”) Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
Spring-return and push-push buttons

10 16.7 14.5
(0.39”) (0.66”) (0.57”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
Flush Push-push Extended Push-push Shrouded Complete with cap or lens.

LPC B1... LPC Q1... LPC B2... LPC Q2... LPC B30...
Illuminated flush LPX Q0 Illuminated extended Illuminated push-push LPX B3
LPC BL1... Illuminated push-push LPC BL2... LPC QL2...
LPX B0 LPC QL1... LPX QL0
Mechanical buttons Mushroom-head button actuators

24.1
24.1 (0.95”)
10.2 16.9 (0.95”)
(0.40”) (0.66”)
(2.36”)
(1.57”)
Ø60
Ø40
(1.16”)
(0.90”)
Ø29.5
Ø22.8
150 (5.90”) 150 (5.90”)

Spring return Spring return
Flush Extended LPC B614... LPC B616...
LPC R1... LPC R2004 Illuminated spring return
LPC BL614...
Mushroom-head latch button actuators

41 36.4 41 24 41 41
(1.61”) (1.43”) (1.61”) (0.94”) (1.61”) (1.61”)
(1.18”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø30
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Turn to release Turn to release

Push-pull Turn to release Turn key to release LPC B6634 LPC B6644
LPC B674... LPC B634... LPC B684... Illuminated turn to release
LPC BL664...
7-46
Selector switch actuators 19.7

(0.77”) 19.7 25.7
27.3 25.2 22.3 32.6 (0.77”) (1.01”)
(1.07”) (0.99”) (0.88”) (1.28”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1 16”)
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
29.5
29.5
Lever Key Long lever Knob
LPC S1... LPC S3... LPC S2... LPC S4...
Illuminated lever
LPC SL1...
Flush double-touch buttons Double-touch buttons with an Triple-touch button with Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
with or without light extended button with or without middle extended button 30
(1.18”)
indicator light indicator 30
16.5
(0.65”) (1.18”)
29.5 29.5 15.7
0,95” (0.02, -0”)

10.2 29.5
(1.16”) 10.2
24.1 (+0.4, -0)

(1.16”) (0.40”) (0.62”) (1.16”)
(0.40”)
(2.16”)
55
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
(2.16”)
55
LPC B71... - LPC B72... - LPC B73...
7
LPC BL71... LPC BL72...
3.2 (+0.2, -0) Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)
0.12”(+0.01”, -0”) Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
Pilot light head LED-integrated Monoblock buzzers Monoblock Communication interfaces LPC D...
monoblock pilot lights potentiometer
10.8
.16 5
.16 5
40.5 11 37.2 15
(1 29.
(0.52”) 83 (3.27”)
(1 29.
37.2
”)
33.2
”)
Ø
(1.59”) (0.43”) (1.29”) (0.59”)

Ø
(1.29”) (1.31”)
(0.75”)
(0.83”) 19.2
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
Ø29.5
29.5
29.5
21
LPL... LPM... LPC ZS... LPC PA...
Threaded plug for Knob selector Label holder Label Label holder Label Plastick disk for mushroom-head pushbuttons
unused drilled holes switch protection
(0.94”)
30 30
(0.49”)
(0.60”)
(0.48”)
Ø24
(1.18”) (1.18”)
12.4
15.3
12.1
28 27 26.5 1.5
21.3 27.5 1.5 (1.04”) (0.06”)
(1.10”) (1.06”)
Ø60 (2.36”)
(1.08”)
(0.59”)
(0.84”) (0.06”)
Ø90 (3.54”)
(0.94”)
15
Ø24
(1.14”)
45 (1.77”)
48 (1.89”)
Ø29
LPX A130 LM2T AU185 LPX AU100 LPX AU109 LPX AU105 LPX AU108
LM2T A...2... LPX AU113 LPX AU115
LPX AU118
Rubber boot for flush Rubber boot for Double/triple button boot Rubber boot for Padlockable protection for Cable gland
buttons extended buttons mushroom-head buttons mushroom-head latch buttons
30.7 16.8
(1.21”) (0.66”) 41.5 49 45
13.7 18.2 (1.63”) CH24
(0.72”) (1.93”) (1.77”)
(0.54”)
55.2 (2.17”)
(0.35”) (1.11”)
(0.25”)
28.1
6.4
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
(1.69”)
Ø31
Ø31
Ø43
(0.33”)
9
8.4
M20
LPX AU13... LPX AU14... LPX AU157 LPX AU167 LPX AU158 LPX P01
Shroud for mushroom-head latch buttons DIN rail adapter

60.15 (2.36”)
59.3 (2.33”)
25.4
(1”)
58.3 (2.29”)
45 (1.77”)
75 (2.95”) 46.8 (1.84”) 35

(1.38”)
LPX AU159 LPX DIN
CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATORS LPZ P2 A5...

LPZ P1 A5... LPZ P2 A8...
60.4 (2.38”)
LPZ P1 A8...
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”)
(0
58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”)
.3 )
(0 4.8
60.4 (2.38”)
)
9”
Ø4 .17”
56 (2.20”)
(0
.1
58 (2.28”)
.3 )
(0 4.8
)
9”
.1
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
105,4 (4.15”)
117 (4.61”)
90 (3.54”)
(1.38”)
4.8
35
Ø22.3 (0.19”)
4.8 (0.19”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
72 (2.83”) Knockout for

.3 )
Knockout for
M16/PG11 M16/PG11
(left side) Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for Knockout for

.3 )
Knockout for M16/PG11 M20/PG13.5

M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16 (one/side)
(on top and bottom)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
7-47
CONTROL STATIONS WITHOUT ACTUATORS

LPZ P3 A8 LPZ P4 A8
72 (2.83”) 60.4 (2.38”) 60.4 (2.38”) 56 (2.20”)
56 (2.20”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 58 (2.28”)
(0
58 (2.28”)
(0
(0 4.8
)
(0 4.8
.3 )
.3 )
)
9”
9”
.1
.1
Knockout for
139.4 /5.49”)
M20/PG13.5
151 (5.94”)
124 (4.88”)
(two/side) Knockout for

M20/PG13.5
174.4 (6.87”)
159 (6.26”)
186 (7.32”)
(two/side)
(1.38”)
35
4.8 (0.19”)
(1.38”)
35
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
4.8 (0.19”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for
.3 )
M16/PG11 Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
Ø4 .17”
Knockout for
(0
(on top and bottom)
.3 )
7 Knockout for
M16/PG11
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
LPZ P5 A8 LPZ P6 A8
60.4 (2.38”) 56 (2.20”) 72 (2.83”) 60.4 (2.38”) 56 (2.20”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 58 (2.28”) 58 (2.28”)
(0
(0
(0 4.8
(0 4.8
)
)
.3 )
.3 )
9”
9”
.1
.1
Knockout for
M20/PG13.5
208.4 (8.20”)
220 (8.66”)
193 (7.60”)
(two/side)
Knockout for
240,4 (9.46”)
225 (8.86”)
252 (9.92”)
M20/PG13.5
(two/side)
(1.38”)
35
4.8 (0.19”)
(1.38”)
35
Ø22.3
(0.88”)
4.8 (0.19”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
Knockout for
.3 )
M16/PG11 Ø22.3
(0.88”)
Ø4 .17”
(0
.3 )

M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16 M16/PG11
(on top and bottom)
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
CONTROL STATIONS WITH ONE ACTUATOR

LPZ P1 B8 01 LPZ P1 B8 02
60.4 (2.38”) 60.4 (2.38”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
72 (2.83”) 72 (2.83”)
(0.19”)
(0.19”)
(0
(0
58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”) 41.4 58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”) 37.2

.3 )
.3 )
4.8
4.8
(1.63”) (1.46”)
60.4 (2.38”)
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
72 (2.83”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40

4.8 M16/PG11 4.8 M16/PG11
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
(0
(0
.3 )
.3 )
(0.19”) (left side) (0.19”) (left side)

M16/PG11 M16/PG11
LPZ P1 B5 02 LPZ P1 B5 03
60.4 (2.38”) 60.4 (2.38”)
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
(0.19”)
(0.19”)
72 (2.83”)
(0
(0
58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”) 37.2 72 58 (2.28”) 56 (2.20”) 41.4

.3 )
.3 )
4.8
4.8
(1.46”) (1.63”)
60.4 (2.38”)
60.4 (2.38”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
72 (2.83”)
72 (2.83”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40

4.8 M16/PG11 4.8 M16/PG11
Ø4 .17”
Ø4 .17”
(0
(0
(left side)
.3 )
.3 )
(0.19”) (0.19”) (left side)

M16/PG11 M16/PG11
Top view for LPZ P1...
Knockout for
M20/M25/PG13.5/PG16
(on top and bottom)
7-48
8 LM Ø22mm metal series dimensions [mm (in)]
METAL PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES 8 LM SERIES

Flush pushbutton with contact or lamp-holder elements (direct Flush pushbutton with Faston contact elements Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
or resistor-diode type) or test element
50 (1.97”)
22.7 30
(0.89”) 43 (1.69”) (1.18”)
(0.39”)
22.7 43 (1.69”) 13.8
(0.39”)
(0.89”) 20.3 (0.54”) 20.3 13.8

1-6 max
10
(0.80”)
10
1-6 max (0.80”) (0.54”)

(0.04-0.24” max)
(1.67”)
(0.04-0.24” max)
42.4
66 (2.60”)
(1.17”)
(1.67”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.8
(1.67”)
(1.17”)
(1.18”)
Ø29.8
42.4
42.4
30
30
65 (2.56”)
ADD-ON n°1 LM2T AU120 n°1 LM2T AU120
ELEMENTS ADD-ON
n°1 LM2T C... - LM2T E... - LM2T T... ELEMENTS n°1 LM2T CF...
n°1 LM2T VL230 - LM2T ZL230
n°1 LM2T DL400... - LM2T EL400
n°1 LM2T L... - LM2T M...
Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)

Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
When Faston contacts are used, the vertical

pitch must be 90mm minimum.
Pushbutton actuators 7
13.8 20.9 20.5
(0.54”) (0.82”) (0.81”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Flush Extended Shrouded

LM2T B1... LM2T B2... LM2T B30...
Push-push Push-push Illuminated flush
LM2T Q1... LM2T Q2... LM2T BL1...
Illuminated extended Illuminated push-push
LM2T BL2... LM2T QL1...
Illuminated push-push
LM2T QL2...
Reset buttons (complete unit)

140 max 13.8 140 max 20.9
(5.51” max) 19.1 (0.54”) (5.51” max) 19.1 (0.82”)
(0.75”) (0.75”)
(1.17”)
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
42.4
42.4
Ø20 Ø20
(0.79”) (0.79”)
LM2T R1... LM2T R2004
Mushroom-head button actuators

29.2
28.5 (1.15”) 29 32.6
(1.12”) (1.14”) 35.5 (1.28”)
(1.40”)
Ø60 (2.36”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
(1.57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Ø40
Spring return Spring return Push-pull Illuminated Turn to release

LM2T B614... LM2T B616... LM2T B624... push-pull LM2T B634...
Illuminated spring return LM2T BL624...
LM2T BL614...
33.8 24.2
(0.95”) 49
(1.33”) (1.93”)
(1 57”)
(1 57”)
Ø40
Ø40
Turn key to release Turn to release

LM2T B654... LM2T B6644
Double-touch actuators with Double-touch actuators with Triple-touch actuators with Drillings - Minimum recommended distances
or without indicator or without indicator middle extended button
2 flush buttons 1 flush and 1 extended button 50 (1.97”)
30
(1.18”)
28.5 28.5 17.4
(1.12”) 12 16
12 (0.63”) (1.12”) 12 (0.68”)
(0.47”) (0.47”) (0 (0.47”)
(1.67”)
42.4
54 (2.12”)
54 (2.12”)
STOP
80 (3.15”)
LM2T B71... LM2T B72... - LM2T B73...

LM2T BL71... LM2T BL72...
Ø22.3 (+0.4, -0)

Ø0.88”(+0.02”, -0”)
7-49
8 LM Ø22mm metal series dimensions [mm (in)]
Selector switch actuators Pilot light head Potentiometer drive
56.8 (2.24”)
27.5 27.5 27.5 23.9 16.5 35
(1.08”) (1.08”) (1.08”) 27.5 (0.94”) (0.65”) (1.38”)
(1.08”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
(1.17”)
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
Ø29.8
(1 17”)
Ø29.8
(1.55”)
(1.17”)
Ø39.4
Ø29.8
Knob Illuminated knob Lever Key LM2T IL1... LM2T P100
LM2T S1... LM2T SL1... LM2T S2... LM2T S3... LM2T P110
Joystick with free actuation lever Joystick with mechanical latch lever
22.7 43 (1.69”) 22.7 43
(0.39”)
(0.39”)
1-6 max 70.5 (2.77”) (0.89”) 1.5 1-6 max 70.5 (2.77”) (0.89”) 1.5
(0.04-0.24” max) (0.06”) (0.04-0.24” max) (0.06”)
10
10
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
(1.16”)
(1.16”)
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
42.4
Ø29.5
Ø29.5
42.4
30
30
7 Only for
LM2T J40 LM2T J20
20.1
(0.79”)
Only for
LM2T J41 LM2T J21
20.1
(0.79”)
LM2T J20... - LM2T J40... LM2T J21... - LM2T J41...
Label holder Label Label holder Label Plastic disk for

mushroom-head pushbuttons
30
29.8 (1.18”)
(1.17”) 27.5 27.5
(0.88”)
27.8
Ø22.5
27.8 (1.08”) (1.08”) ERGENCY
(1.09”) EM
(0.59”)
(1.09”) ERGENCY
15.1
EM
Ø60 (2.36”)
Ø90 (3.54”)
48 (1.89”)
45-6 (1.79”)
(0.88”)
Ø22.5
(0.48”)
12.2
(0.61”)
15.4
(0.49”)
12.4
STOP
STOP
LM2T AU100 LM2T A... LM2T AU105 LM2T AU10...

LM2T AU118
Rubber boot for flush Rubber boot for Double/triple button boot Rubber boot for Threaded plug for Knob selector switch
buttons extended buttons mushroom-head buttons unused drilled holes protection
25 30 20.4
18.1 (1.18”) (0.80”) 35 21.3 27.5
(0.71”) (0.98”)
(1.38”) (0.84”) (1.08”)
(1.31”)
Ø33.4
(1.31”)
Ø33.4
(1.14”)
(1.42”)
55 (2.16”)
Ø29
Ø36
(1.73”)
Ø44
LM2T AU13... LM2T AU14... LM2T AU157 LM2T AU167 LM2T A130 LM2T AU185
Shroud for mushroom-head latch buttons DIN rail adapter
LM2T AU159 LPX DIN
Lamp-holder elements LED steady or flashing light Transformer or flashing

with direct supply or element lamp holder element
resistor and diode
10 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
51.3 (2.02”)
1-6 max
1-6 max 1-6 max (0.04-0.24” max)
(0.04-0.24”max)
(0.99”)
(0.04-0.24”max)
25.2
(1.18”)
(1.18”)
30
30
43 (1.69”)
43 (1.69”) 20.3
20.3 (0.80”)
(0.80”) 1-6 max 20.3
(0.04-0.24”max) (0.80”)
(1.46”)
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
(1.67”)
42.4
42.4
37
42.4
LM2T EL400 LM2T L... - LM2T M... LM2T YL... - LM2T GL...
LM2T DL400 LM2T XL... - LM2T FL...
LM2T ZL230
LM2T VL230
7-50
Wiring diagrams
FOR PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

LPX C10 - LPX E10 - LPX CF10 LPX C10A LPX C01 - LPX E01 - LPX CF01 LPX C01D LPX C01SM LPX C02SM
LPX CS10 - LPX CB10 LM2T C10A LPX CS01 - LPX CB01 LM2T C01D
LM2T C10 - LM2T E10 LPZ P1 B... - LM2T C01
7 1 5 .3 .1 .3 .1
3
8 2 6 .4 .2 .4 .2
4
LPM... LPC ZS... LPX T100 LPX T101 LPC PA...

LPX L... LPX T102
X1 2 2 X1 X1
terminal
Z1
terminal
Z2 7
X5 1 3 X5 X5
terminal
mobile cursor
LM2T EL400 LM2T ZL230 LM2T YL... LM2T GL... LM2T T100 LM2T L...
LM2T DL400 LM2T M...
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X2 X2 X2 X2 X5 X5
TEST
LPC D01 LPC D03
Front door Rear door Front door Rear door
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
shield
shield
shield
shield
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
USB A type USB A type USB A type USB B type
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
LPC D05 LPC D06
Front door Rear door Front door Rear door
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
shield
shield
shield
shield
3 3 RJ45 3 3 RJ45
4 4 4 4
USB B type USB A type
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
7-51
Page 8-2 Page 8-3
SIGNAL TOWERS Ø45mm/1.77” MULTICOLOURED SIGNAL TOWERS

• Signal towers supplied already Ø70mm/2.75”
assembled Ø45mm/1.77” • Modular signal towers Ø70mm/2.75”
• Steady light modules • Steady light multicoloured modules
• Pulsed or continuous sound modules • Pulsed or continuous sound multicoloured
• Built-in LED circuit. modules
• Built-in LED circuit.
Page 8-4 and 5 Page 8-6
SIGNAL TOWERS Ø70mm/2.75” SIGNAL BEACONS Ø62mm/2.44”

• Modular signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” • Signal beacons Ø62mm/2.44”
• Steady, blinking or flashing light modules • Steady or blinking light modules
• Pulsed or continuous sound modules • Pulsed or continuous sound modules
• Incandescent and LED bulbs. • Incandescent and LED bulbs.
SIGNAL TOWERS AND BEACONS 8
Signal towers Ø45mm/1.77”
Supplied already assembled
Steady light and pulsed or
continuous sound modules
Multicoloured signal towers

Ø70mm/2.75”
Modular and combinations up to
5 modules
Steady light and pulsed or
Signal towers Ø70mm/2.75”

Modular and combinations up to
7 modules
Steady or blinking light, pulsed or
Signal beacons Ø62mm/2.44”

Steady or blinking light, pulsed or
continuous sound modules.
SEC. - PAGE
Signal towers and beacons
Signal towers Ø45mm/1.77” .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
Multicoloured signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” .................................................................................................................... 8 - 3
Signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” .......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 4
Signal beacons Ø62mm/2.44” ......................................................................................................................................... 8 - 6
Accessories and spare parts ............................................................................................................................................ 8 - 7
Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 8 - 10
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 8 - 11
S IGNALLING
AND
C ONTROL
Signal towers Order Description Qty per Wt General characteristics

Ø45mm/1.77” code pkg The Ø45mm/1.77” signal towers are supplied completely
n° [kg] assembled with the possibility of up to 3 light modules
with a sound module. The high-brightness LED circuit
Steady light and pulsed or continuous sound light modules. lighting ensures low consumption and long life.
Built-in LED circuit .
8 LT4 K02BG Green, red, 24VDC 1 0.160 Technical characteristics
8 LT4 K03BG Green, red with continuous 1 0.240 – Supply voltage: 24VDC (±10%)
or pulsed sound, – Light module consumption: 37mA per module
24VDC – Sound module consumption: 15mA
– Sound intensity: 80dB/1m, pulsed or continuous
8 LT4 K04BG Green, orange, red, 24VDC 1 0.320 sound
8 LT4 K05BG Green, orange, red with 1 0.400 – Material: polycarbonate
continuous or pulsed – Connections: screw clamp terminals and maximum
sound, 24VDC conductor section 1.5mm2/16 AWG
For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8. – Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin
– Operating temperature: -20…+50°C

8 LT4 K02BG Certifications obtained: cULus (pending), EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-1,UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8
Combinations
8 LT7 BP 01... 8 LT7 TM...

(plastic) (metal)
8 LT4 K05BG 8 LT7 BM 02
8 LT7 BM 01 (metal)
(metal) 8 LT7 BP 02...
(plastic)
Fixing base and extension tubes
8 LT7 BP 03G
For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8.
Accessories and spare parts Dimensions Wiring diagrams

Multicoloured signal Order Description Qty per Wt General characteristics

towers Ø70mm/2.75” code pkg The multicoloured signal towers incorporate the
n° [kg] possibility of up to 3 different colours in a single light
module.
Steady light and pulsed or continuous sound multicoloured In the event of two or more alarms, the multicoloured
light modules. Built-in LED circuit . module lights up in alternating colours corresponding to
8 LT7 3B 9A Green, orange, red, 24VDC 1 0.090 the event. The multicoloured module must always be
8 LT7 3S2B 9A Green, orange, red, 1 0.200 placed last, at the top of the tower, should it be used
with continuous or pulsed together with light modules 8LT7 EL… 8LT7 GL … or
sound 24VDC 8LT7 FL….
8 LT7 3B 9B Blue, orange, red, 24VDC 1 0.090 Technical characteristics
8 LT7 3S2B 9B Blue, orange, red, with 1 0.200 – Supply voltage: 24VDC (±10%)
8 LT7 3S … continuous or pulsed – Light and sound module consumption: 90mA
sound 24VDC – Sound intensity: 90dB/1m
For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8. – Material: polycarbonate
– Number of stackable elements: 4 with 8 LT7 3P
modules, 1 with 8 LT7 3S modules
– Connections: screw clamp terminals and maximum
conductor section 1.5mm2/16 AWG
– Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin
– Operating temperature: -20...+50 °C
8
Certifications obtained: cULus (pending), EAC.
8 LT7 3B … Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Combinations
Cover
(supplied with
8 LT7 CM 01... and 8 LT7 CP 01... module)
8 LT7 3B...
8 LT7 ALB...
(incandescent
bulb)
4 MODULES MAXIMUM 8 LT7 ALL...
(LED bulb)
8 LT7 EL...
8 LT7 GL...
8 LT7 3S...
8 LT7 FL...
MODULE
MAX 1
8 LT7 EL...
8 LT7 GL...
8 LT7 FL...
Connection module
8 LT7 CM 01... (metal)
8 LT7 CP 01... (plastic)
8 LT7 BP 03G
8 LT7 BP 01... 8 LT7 TM...

(plastic) (metal)
8 LT7 BM 02
8 LT7 BM 01 (metal)
(plastic)
8 LT7 BP 03G

page 8-7 and 8 page 8-10 page 8-11 8-3
Signal towers Order Description Qty per Wt General characteristics

Ø70mm/2.75” code pkg Signal towers are fundamental elements in manufacturing
n° [kg] processes for the visual and audible signalling of the
system status.
Steady light modules. BA15d fitting . The signal towers can be assembled by stacking up to
Bulb (8 LT7 ALB... and 8 LT7 ALL...) not included. 7 modules, in the following sequence, starting from the
8 LT7 EL1 Orange 1 0.082 top: red, yellow, orange, blue, green and white.
8 LT7 EL3 Green 1 0.082
8 LT7 EL4 Red 1 0.082 – Maximum operational voltage: 250VAC/DC
8 LT7 EL5 Yellow 1 0.082 – Flash light and sound module consumption:
8 LT7 EL6 Blue 1 0.082 • 8 LT7 FL B... in AC: 135mA
• 8 LT7 FL B... in DC: 75mA
8 LT7 EL8 White 1 0.082 • 8 LT7 FL E... 20mA
Blinking light modules. BA15d fitting . • 8 LT7 FL M... 15mA
Bulb (8 LT7 ALB... and 8 LT7 ALL...) not included. – Material: polycarbonate or anodised aluminium
8 LT7 GL B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 – Number of stackable modules: 7
– Connections: screw clamp terminals and maximum
8 LT7 GL B3 Green, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 conductor section 1.5mm2/16 AWG
8 LT7 GL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 – Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin
8 LT7 GL B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 – Operating temperature: -20…+50°C (12VAC max.
up to +40°C)
8 LT7 GL B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083 – IEC degree of protection: IP65.
8 8 LT7 GL B8 White, 24VAC/DC 1 0.083
8 LT7 GL E1 Orange, 110...120VAC 1 0.083 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
8 LT7 GL E3 Green, 110...120VAC 1 0.083 Canada (cULus - file E318016) as Power Circuit and
8 LT7 GL E4 Red, 110...120VAC 1 0.083 motor-mounted Apparatus - Stackable tower lights.
8 LT7 GL E5 Yellow, 110...120VAC 1 0.083 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LT7 GL E6 Blue, 110...120VAC 1 0.083
8 LT7 GL E8 White, 110...120VAC 1 0.083 Combinations
8 LT7 GL M1 Orange, 230...240VAC 1 0.083
Sound module Cover
8 LT7 GL M3 Green, 230...240VAC 1 0.083 (always on top) (supplied with
8 LT7 S... 8 LT7 CM 01... and
8 LT7 GL M4 Red, 230...240VAC 1 0.083
8 LT7 CP 01... module)
8 LT7 GL M5 Yellow, 230...240VAC 1 0.083
8 LT7 GL M6 Blue, 230...240VAC 1 0.083
8 LT7 GL M8 White, 230...240VAC 1 0.083
Flash light modules. With 4-joule xenon bulb .
7 MODULES MAXIMUM
8 LT7 FL B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092

8 LT7 FL B3 Green, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092
8 LT7 ALB...
8 LT7 FL B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092 8 LT7 EL... (incandescent
8 LT7 FL B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092 8 LT7 GL... bulb)
8 LT7 FL... 8 LT7 ALL...
8 LT7 FL B8 White, 24VAC/DC 1 0.092 (LED bulb)
8 LT7 EL …
8 LT7 GL … 8 LT7 FL E1 Orange, 110...120VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL … 8 LT7 FL E3 Green, 110...120VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL E4 Red, 110...120VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL E5 Yellow, 110...120VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL E6 Blue, 110...120VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL E8 White, 110...120VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL M1 Orange, 230...240VAC 1 0.092
Connection module
8 LT7 FL M3 Green, 230...240VAC 1 0.092 8 LT7 CM 01... (metal)
8 LT7 FL M4 Red, 230...240VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL M5 Yellow, 230...240VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL M6 Blue, 230...240VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 FL M8 White, 230...240VAC 1 0.092
8 LT7 BP 03G
8 LT7 BP 01... 8 LT7 TM...

(plastic) (metal)
8 LT7 BM 02
8 LT7 BM 01 (metal)
(plastic)
8 LT7 BP 03G

Signal towers Order Description Qty per Wt Technical characteristics

Ø70mm/2.75” code pkg – The sound module must always be placed last, at the
n° [kg] top of the tower (it cannot be fitted with an 8 LT7 3...
multicoloured module).
Pulsed or continuous sound modules, grey colour . – Sound module consumption:
8 LT7 S0 BG 24VAC/DC, pulsed 1 0.240 • 8 LT7 S0 B...: 25mA
(90dB). IP54 • 8 LT7 S1 B...: 40mA
8 LT7 S1 BG 24AC/DC, 16 sounds select. 1 0.240 • 8 LT7 S2 B...: 200mA
(max.80dB). IP65 • 8 LT7 S2 E...: 40mA
• 8 LT7 S2 M...: 30mA
8 LT7 S2 BG 24VAC/DC puls. sound 1 0.240 – Material: polycarbonate
(78dB)
8 LT7 S2 EG 110...120VAC or continuous 1 0.240 – Max. number of sound modules: 1 per tower
8 LT7 S … G 8 LT7 S2 MG 230...240VAC (75dB). IP65 1 0.240 – Connections: screw clamp terminals and maximum
Pulsed or continuous sound modules, black colour . – Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin
8 LT7 S0 B 24VAC/DC, pulsed 1 0.240 – Operating temperature: -20…+50°C (12VAC max.
(90dB). IP54 up to +40°C)
8 LT7 S1 B 24AC/DC, 16 sounds select. 1 0.240 – IEC degree of protection: IP65 (IP54 if 8 LT7 S0 B...
(max.80dB). IP65 sound module used).
8 LT7 S2 B 24VAC/DC puls. sound 1 0.240 Certifications and compliance
(78dB)
8 LT7 S2 E 110...120VAC 1 0.240 Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
or continuous
Canada (cULus - file E318016) as Power Circuit and
8 LT7 S …
8 LT7 S2 M 230...240VAC (75dB). IP65 1 0.240
motor-mounted Apparatus - Stackable tower lights. 8
Connection modules and cover (bottom entry). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
8 LT7 CP 01G For plastic tubes, grey colour 1 0.110 IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LT7 CM 01G For metal tubes, grey colour 1 0.120
Combinations
8 LT7 CP 01 For plastic tubes, black colour 1 0.110
8 LT7 CM 01 For metal tubes, black colour 1 0.120 Sound module Cover
(always on top) (supplied with
For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8. 8 LT7 S... 8 LT7 CM 01... and
For 8 LT7 S2 B... = 84.5 dB. 8 LT7 CP 01... module)
For 8 LT7 S2 B... = 82.6 dB.
8 LT7 CM 01 G
7 MODULES MAXIMUM
8 LT7 CP 01 G
8 LT7 ALB...
8 LT7 EL... (incandescent
8 LT7 GL... bulb)
8 LT7 FL... 8 LT7 ALL...
(LED bulb)
8 LT7 CM 01
8 LT7 CP 01
Connection module
8 LT7 CM 01... (metal)
8 LT7 BP 03G
8 LT7 BP 01... 8 LT7 TM...

(plastic) (metal)
8 LT7 BM 02
8 LT7 BM 01 (metal)
(plastic)
8 LT7 BP 03G

page 8-7 and 8 page 8-10 page 8-11 8-5
Signal beacons Order Description Qty per Wt General characteristics

code pkg Signal beacons are fundamental elements in manufacturing
Ø62mm/2.44” processes for the visual and audible signalling of the
n° [kg]
system status.
Steady light modules. BA15d fitting.
Bulb (8 LT7 ALB... and 8 LT7 ALL...) not included. Technical characteristics
8 LB6 EL1 Orange 1 0.060 – Maximum operational voltage: 250VAC/DC
– Sound module consumption: 8 LB6 S2...:150mA
8 LB6 EL3 Green 1 0.060 – Material: polycarbonate
8 LB6 EL4 Red 1 0.060 – Connections: screw clamp terminals and maximum
8 LB6 EL5 Yellow 1 0.060 – Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin
8 LB6 EL6 Blue 1 0.060 – Operating temperature: -20...+40°C
8 LB6 EL8 White 1 0.060 – IEC degree of protection: IP54 (IP30 if used with bases
8 LB6 BP 04, 8 LB6 BP 06, 8 LB6 BP 08...).
Blinking or steady light modules. BA15d fitting.
Bulb (8 LT7 ALB... and 8 LT7 ALL...) not included. Certifications and compliance
8 LB6 GL B1 Orange, 12...48VAC/DC 1 0.060 Certifications obtained: EAC.
8 LB6 GL B3 Green, 12...48VAC/DC 1 0.060 IEC/EN 60947-1.
8 LB6 GL B4 Red, 12...48VAC/DC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL B5 Yellow, 12...48VAC/DC 1 0.060 Combinations
8 LB6 GL B6 Blue, 12...48VAC/DC 1 0.060
8 8 LB6 GL B8 White, 12-48VAC/DC 1 0.060 Light and sound modules
8 LB6 EL... - 8 LB6 GL... - 8 LB6 S2...B...
8 LB6 GL M1 Orange, 24...230VAC 1 0.060
1 3 4 5 6 8
8 LB6 GL M3 Green, 24...230VAC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL M4 Red, 24...230VAC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL M5 Yellow, 24...230VAC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL M6 Blue, 24...230VAC 1 0.060
8 LB6 GL M8 White, 24...230VAC 1 0.060
Light and sound pulsed or continuous sound modules.
Bulb included.
8 LB6 BP 03 8 LB6 BP 05 8 LB6 BP 07...
8 LB6 S2 B1 Orange, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
8 LB6 S2 B3 Green, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
8 LB6 S2 B4 Red, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060 8 LB6 BP 04 8 LB6 BP 06 8 LB6 BP 08...
8 LB6 S2 B5 Yellow, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
8 LB6 S2 B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060
8 LT7 ALB...
8 LB6 S2 B8 White, 24VAC/DC (80dB) 1 0.060 (incandescent
bulb)
8 LT7 TP0100...
8 LT7 ALL...
(LED bulb)
8 LT7 BP 01... 8 LT7 BP 02...

(plastic) (plastic)
Only for sound-light modules.

8 LB6 S2... .
8 LB6 EL...
8 LB6 GL... 8 LT7 BP 03G
8 LB6 S2...
Visual code Red Yellow Orange Blue Green White Interpretation of light and sound signals for signal
towers and beacons
Meaning Danger. Warning and Mandatory Normal No specific Light and sound signals are a fundamental element for
Emergency. Caution. command. situation. meaning. the safety of a system.
Abnormal Regular To avoid incorrect interpretations, a European standard
situation. operation. has been introduced attributing an unambiguous
Sound Fast modulated Continuous Alternating Constant and Other sounds. meaning to visual or audible signals.
repetition or short sound. sound at. prolonged Each colour or sound alarm corresponds to a specific
high-pitch constant tone sound state of operation of the connected system and various
pulsing. after an alarm. levels of warning, as shown in the table to the side,
Correlated Immediate Control Intervention No specific Depending on according to EN 981-IEC/EN 60073 standards.
actions intervention intervention needed for action. the situation. The white module can be assigned a meaning as desired.
to deal with required. mandatory
dangerous action.
situation.

8-6 page 8-7 to 8-9 page 8-11 page 8-11
For signal towers and Order Description Qty per Wt General characteristics
beacons code pkg The assembly operation for the signal towers is simple
n° [kg] and fast and does not require the use of any tools.
The bayonet fitting with slight pressure and simple
Fixing bases. circular movement makes it possible to mount each
8 LT7 BP 01G Horizontal surface 1 0.045 element on top of the previous one. There are specific
mount, plastic grey white marks to indicate the correct alignment.
colour with 100mm/3.94”
extension
8 LT7 BP 02G Vertical wall mount, 1 0.078
plastic, grey colour
8 LT7 BP 03G 90° vertical wall mount, 1 0.080
grey colour
8 LT7 BP 01 Horizontal surface 1 0.045
8 LT7 BP 01G mount, plastic, black
colour with 100mm/3.94”
extension
8 LT7 BP 02 Vertical wall mount, 1 0.078 1 1
plastic, black colour 2
Extension tube for plastic bases.
8 LT7 TP 0100G 100mm/3.94”, grey 1 0.029
colour 2 8
8 LT7 TP 0100 100mm/3.94”, black 1 0.029
colour
8 LT7 BP 01
8 LT7 BP 02G
8 LT7 BP 02
8 LT7 BP 03G
8 LT7 TP0100
8 LT7 TP0100G
Dimensions
page 8-11 8-7
For signal towers Order Description Qty per Wt Technical characteristics

Ø70mm/2.75” code pkg – Consumption of bulb fitted on light modules:
n° [kg] • 8 LT7 ALB A: 420mA
and signal beacons • 8 LT7 ALB B: 210mA
Incandescent bulbs, 5W, BA15d fitting.
Ø62mm/2.44” • 8 LT7 ALB E: 43mA
8 LT7 ALB A 12VAC/DC 10 0.006 • 8 LT7 ALB M: 22mA
8 LT7 ALB B 24VAC/DC 10 0.006 • 8 LT7 ALL A...: <60mA
• 8 LT7 ALL B...: <30mA
8 LT7 ALB E 130VAC/DC 10 0.006 • 8 LT7 ALL E...: <20mA
8 LT7 ALB M 260VAC/DC 10 0.006 • 8 LT7 ALL M...: <20mA.
LED bulbs, BA15d fitting.
Compliance
8 LT7 ALB… 8 LT7 ALL A4 Red, 12VAC/DC 10 0.010 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
8 LT7 ALL A8 White, 12VAC/DC 10 0.010 IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
8 LT7 ALL B3 Green, 24VAC/DC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL B4 Red, 24VAC/DC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL B5 Yellow/Orange, 24VAC/DC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL B6 Blue, 24VAC/DC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL B8 White, 24VAC/DC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL… 8 LT7 ALL E3 Green, 110...120VAC 10 0.010
88 8 LT7 ALL E4 Red, 110...120VAC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL E5 Yellow/Orange, 10 0.010
110...120VAC
8 LT7 ALL E6 Blue, 110...120VAC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL E8 White, 110...120VAC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL M3 Green, 230...240VAC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL M4 Red, 230...240VAC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL M5 Yellow/Orange, 10 0.010
230...240VAC
8 LT7 ALL M6 Blue, 230...240VAC 10 0.010
8 LT7 ALL M8 White, 230...240VAC 10 0.010
Used with yellow or orange light modules.
For signal towers Order Description Qty per Wt

Ø45mm/1.77”, multicoloured code pkg
n° [kg]
signal towers Ø70mm/2.75”
Fixing bases.
8 LT7 BM 01 Horizontal surface mount, 1 0.099
metal, black
8 LT7 BM 02 Wall mount, 1 0.184
8 LT7 BM 01 metal
Extension tubes for metal bases, anodised aluminium.
8 LT7 TM 0100 120mm/4.72” 1 0.016
8 LT7 TM 0200 220mm/8.66” 1 0.024
8 LT7 TM 0300 320mm/12.60” 1 0.048
8 LT7 TM 0400 420mm/16.53” 1 0.064
8 LT7 TM 0500 520mm/20.74” 1 0.080
8 LT7 TM 1000 1020mm/40.16” 1 0.160
8 LT7 BM 02
8 LT7 TM
Dimensions
8-8 page 8-11
For signal beacons Order Description Qty per Wt General characteristics

Ø62mm/2.44” code pkg The assembly operation of the light and sound modules
n° [kg] is simple and fast and does not require the use of any
tools.
Fixing bases for light modules. There are specific white marks to indicate the correct
8 LB6 BP 07G For extension connection, 1 0.020 alignment.
plastic, grey.
Use with fixing bases
8 LP7 BP01G and
8 LP7 BP02G
8 LB6 BP 03 For horizontal mount, 1 0.040
8 LB6 BP07G plastic, black
8 LB6 BP 05 For hole Ø22mm/0.87”, 1 0.040
plastic, black
2
8 LB6 BP 07 For extension connection, 1 0.020 1
plastic, black.
8 LP7 BP01 and
8 LB6 BP03 8 LP7 BP02
Fixing bases for light and sound modules.
8 LB6 BP 08G For extension connection, 1 0.020
plastic, grey. 8
8 LP7 BP01G and
8 LP7 BP02G
8 LB6 BP 04 For horizontal mount, 1 0.040
8 LB6 BP05 plastic, black
8 LB6 BP 06 For hole Ø22mm/0.87”, 1 0.040
plastic, black
8 LB6 BP 08 For extension connection, 1 0.020
plastic, black.
8 LP7 BP01 and
8 LB6 BP07 8 LP7 BP02
8 LB6 BP08G
8 LB6 BP04
8 LB6 BP06
8 LB6 BP08
Dimensions
page 8-11 8-9
SIGNAL TOWERS Ø45mm/1.77”

8 LT4 K02BG 8 LT4 K03BG 8 LT4 K04BG 8 LT4 K05BG
(0 39”)
10
(0.55”)
(0.39”)
14
10
(0.55”)
14
205 (8.07”)
160 (6.30”)
160 (6.30”)
165 (6.50”)
120 (4.72”)
120 (4.72”)
120 (4.72”)
120 (4.72”)
80 (3.15”)
80 (3.15”)
80 (3.15”)
80 (3.15”)
88
40 (1.57”)
40 (1.57”)
40 (1.57”)
40 (1.57”)
(0.47”)
(0.47”)
(0.47”)
(0 47”)
12
12
12
12
26 26
(1.02”) (1.02”) 26 26
(1.02”) (1.02”)
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
(1.77”)
(1.77”)
Ø45 (1.77”)
Ø45 (1.77”)
6 6
Ø31
Ø31
Ø45
Ø45
Ø2 2”) Ø2 2”)
(1.22”)
(1.22”)
(1.0 (1.0
Ø31
Ø31
Ø26 ”) Ø26 ”)
2 2
(1.0 (1.0
Ø4 ) Ø4 )
6” 6”
(0.1 (0.1 Ø4 ) Ø4 )
6” 6”
(0.1 (0.1
MULTICOLOURED SIGNAL TOWERS Ø70mm/2.75” AND SIGNAL TOWERS Ø70mm/2.75”

Light modules Sound modules Bases
8 LT7 EL... 8 LT7 S0 B... 8 LT7 S1... 8 LT7 CM 01...
8 LT7 GL... 8 LT7 3B S2... 8 LT7 S2... 8 LT7 CP 01...
8 LT7 EL... 8 LT7 FL...
(0.63”)
8 LT7 GL... 8 LT7 3B...
16
8 LT7 FL...
8 LT7 S1... Ø 60 (2.36”)
(0.51)
13
8 LT7 S0 B... 8 LT7 S2...
(0.51”)
13
92 (3.62”)
Ø 60 (2.36”)
72 (2.83”)
56 (2.20”)
45.5 (1.79”)
Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”) Ø 70 (2.75”)

473.5
453.9
381.5
325.5
269.5
213.5
157.5
101.5
Ø5
7 8 LT7 CM 01... - 8 LT7 CP 01...
42
48
8-10
SIGNAL BEACONS Ø62mm/2.44”

8 LB6 EL... 8 LB6... 8 LB6... 8 LB6...
8 LB6 GL... with base 8 LB6 BP 03 with base 8 LB6 BP 05 with base 8 LB6 BP 07...
8 LB6 S2... and 8 LB6 BP 04 and 8 LB6 BP 06 and 8 LB6 BP 08 ...
62.5 (2.46”)
62.5 (2.46”)
62.5 (2.46”)
62.5 (2.46”)
17 (0.67”)
(1.22”)
(1.46”)
31
37
(0.92”)
23.5
Ø22
Ø85 (3.35”) (0.87”)
Ø62 (2.44”) Ø62 (2.44”) Ø62 (2.44”) 22.3 (0.88”)
(+0.4,-0 / +0.01, -0”)
Ø5 (0
65 (2.56”)
(1.28”)
32.5
1...4 (0.04...0.16”)
56.3
With slits for light and sound modules 8 LB6 S2...

(22.17”) 8
ACCESSORIES - Bases and extensions
8 LT7 BP 01... 8 LT7 BP 02... 8 LT7 BM 01 8 LT7 BM 02
(0.43”)
Ø25 Ø25 Ø20
22 (0.87”)
11
(0.98”) (0.98”) Ø30 (0.79”) 71 (2.79”)
(0.71”)
(1.18”)
Ø20 Ø20
18
(0.79”) (0.79”) 105 (4.13”)
(0.35”)
20
9
(0.79”)
51 (2.01”)
(0.31”)
109 (4.29”)
Ø5
64.5 (2.54”)
Ø5 70 (2.75”) (0.20”)
122 (4.80”)
(0.20”)
54 (2.12”)
Ø5
(0.20”)
54 (2.12”)
(0.83”)
21
54 (2.12”)
38 (1.50”) 70 (2.75”)
(0.57”)
14.5
Ø67 (2.64”) 54 (2.12”)

(0.31”)
8
Ø70 (2.75”)
54 (2.12”)
Ø5
(0.20”)
54 (2.12”)
8 LT7 TP 0100... 8 LT7 TM... 8 LT7 BP 03G

Ø25 Ø20
(0.43”)
(0.98”) (0.79”)
11
43 (1.69”) 62 (2.44”)
Ø20
(0.87”)
(0.79”) 50 (1.97”)
22
Ø3 (0.12”) Ø12 (0.47”)

Ø70 (2.75”) Ø5 (0.20”)
1020 (40.16”) max
Ø4 (0.16”)
55 (2.16”)
85 (3.35”)
50 (1.97”)
Ø15 (0.59”)
45 (1.77”)
M16
Ø3 (0.12”) Ø6 (0.24”)
Ø38 (1.49”)
122 (4.80”)
Ø4 (0.16”) Ø48 (1.89”)

38 (1.50”)
31 (1.22”)
9 (0.35”)
18 (0.71”)
Ø54 (2.12”) 19 (0.75”)

41 (1.61”)
Wiring diagrams
ASSEMBLED SIGNAL TOWERS Ø45mm/1.77” MULTICOLOURED SIGNAL TOWERS Ø70mm/2.75” SIGNAL BEACONS Ø62mm/2.44”
8 LT4... AND SIGNAL TOWERS Ø70mm/2.75” 8 LB6...
8 LT7...
X1
LT4... LT7 CM 01 - LT7 CP 01
BULB BULB
1 2 3 4 5 A+ A1– C– C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X2
L L
N N
A-C
Connect terminals C and 1 as indicated to power the first module.
If other modules are fitted, the respective terminals must be
A1-C connected accordingly.
8-11
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES METAL LIMIT SWITCHES PREWIRED METAL LIMIT SWITCHES
KB-KC TYPES KM-KN TYPES KP TYPE
• Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KB type • Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KM • Dimensions to EN 50047 stadards
• Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KC type type • 2 metre long cable
• Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing • Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KN • IEC degree of protection IP67.
• Removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact type
blocks • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
• Bi-directional versions • Removable and interchangeable auxiliary
• Unique fixing mechanism of operating head contact blocks
• IEC degree of protection IP65 • Bi-directional versions
• M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry • Unique fixing mechanism of operating head
available. • IEC degree of protection IP65
• M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry
available.
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES METAL LIMIT SWITCHES ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES
T SERIES PL SERIES FOR NORMAL STOPPING
• Dimensions to EN 50041 standards • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic
• Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic • Maximum of 2 auxiliary contacts housing
housing • IEC degree of protection IP40 and IP65 • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
• Heads rotatable in 4 different 90° angle • PG11 cable entry. • IEC degree of protection IP40, IP65 and
positions IP66
• IEC degree of protection IP66 • PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry.
• PG13.5 cable entry.
ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES PLASTIC MICRO SWITCHES FOOT SWITCHES

FOR EMERGENCY STOPPING KS TYPE • Versions with or without protection cover
• Compliant to ISO 13850 standards • Polymer thermoplastic housing • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic
• IEC degree of protection IP65 and IP66 • Changeover contact switch housing
• PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry. • IEC degree of protection IP00 or IP20. • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing
• IEC degree of protection IP54 and IP65
• M20 cable entry.
LIMIT, MICRO AND FOOT SWITCHES 9
Dimensions to EN 50047 standards

Dimensions compatible to
EN 50047
Dimensions to EN 50041 standards
Direct opening action of NC contacts
Extensive range of operating heads
Versions complete with
interchangeable and rotatable heads
Versions with removable and
interchangeable auxiliary contact
blocks.
SEC. - PAGE
Metal and plastic limit switches, K series
(dimensions to/compatible to EN 50047)
Top push rod plunger ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 2
Top roller push plunger ...................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 3
Roller centre push lever ..................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 4
Roller side push lever ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 5
Roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 6
Adjustable roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................ 9 - 8
Ceramic rod lever .............................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 10
Adjustable rod lever ........................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
Wobble stick, omnidirectional ............................................................................................................................................ 9 - 12
Hinge operating ................................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 13
Slotted lever ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 14
Key operated ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 15
Accessories and spare parts .............................................................................................................................................. 9 - 16
Prewired metal limit switches, K series .................................................................................................................... 9 - 18
Plastic limit switches T series (dimensions to EN 50041)
Top push rod plunger and roller lever.................................................................................................................................. 9 - 19
Wobble stick, omnidirectional and key operated ................................................................................................................. 9 - 20
Metal limit switches, PL series
Top push rod plunger, top roller push plunger, roller centre push lever ................................................................................ 9 - 21
Latch and manual release ................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 22
Manual reload and magnetic release .................................................................................................................................. 9 - 22
Bi-directional .................................................................................................................................................................... 9 - 22
Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping ................................................................................................ 9 - 23
S IGNALLING
Rope-pull lever limit switches for emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant ................................................ 9 - 25
Plastic micro switches, K series .................................................................................................................................. 9 - 26
Foot switches, K series .................................................................................................................................................. 9 - 27
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 9 - 28
AND
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 9 - 35

C ONTROL
Limit, micro and foot switches
Limit switches, K series. One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Plunger Qty Wt General characteristics
Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable.
KB A1 S11 KM A1 S11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
Snap action remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB A1 S02 KM A1 S02 2NC Metal 5 configuration with no tools.
Snap action The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB A1 A11 KM A1 A11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
Slow action make
before break Operational characteristics
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB A1 L11 KM A1 L11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KB A... - KM A... Slow action – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB A1 L02 KM A1 L02 2NC Metal 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Slow action – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB A1 L20 KM A1 L20 2NO Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
Slow action • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB A1 L12 KM A1 L12 1NO+2NC Metal 5 • 690VAC for KB-KC types
Slow action • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB A1 L21 KM A1 L21 2NO+1NC Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
Slow action • 6kV for KB-KC types
• 4kV for KM-KN types
9 KB A1 L03 KM A1 L03 3NC
Slow action
Metal 5
– Class II insulation for KB-KC only
– Contact resistance: <10mΩ
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC A1 S11 KN A1 S11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Snap action – Housing:
KC A1 S02 KN A1 S02 2NC Metal 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
Snap action polymer thermoplastic
• KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC A1 A11 KN A1 A11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
Slow action make 1/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
before break – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KC A... - KN A... KC A1 L11 KN A1 L11 1NO+1NC Metal 5 – Operating force: 5N / 1.1lb
Slow action – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC A1 L02 KN A1 L02 2NC Metal 5 – Tightening torque:
Slow action • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
• Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC A1 L20 KN A1 L20 2NO Metal 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Slow action – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Ambient conditions:
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
front cover. • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.

Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC; UL Listed for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Limit switches.
M20 CABLE ENTRY Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
add the letter P at the end of the order CSA C22.2 n° 14.
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N.
E.g. KBA1S11P - KBA1S11N
Forward travel of snap action contacts open K... L02 21-22

Return travel of snap action contacts closed 11-12
0 2.4 6mm
0” 0.09” 0.24”
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 2.4 6mm
0” 0.09” 0.24”
0 1.1 2.3 6mm
0” 0.04” 0.09” 0.24”
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 2.2 3 6mm
21-22 0” 0.09” 0.12” 0.24”
0 1.1 2.3 6mm K... L21 31-32
0” 0.04” 0.09” 0.24”
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 2.4 2.8 6mm
0 1.4 2.5 6mm 0” 0,09” 0.11” 0.24”
0” 0.05” 0.1” 0.24”
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 2.1 3.3 6mm 0 2.2 6mm
0” 0.08” 0,13” 0.24” 0” 0.09” 0.24”

9-2 pages 9-16 and 17 page 9-28 page 9-35
Top roller push plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Ø11x4 n° [kg] installation, easy wiring, simple setup, modularity,
KB B1 S11 KM B1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB B2 S11 KM B2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB B1 S02 KM B1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
Snap action of 45° angles.
KB B2 S02 KM B2 S02 Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB B1 A11 KM B1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB B2 A11 KM B2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
KB B1 L11 KM B1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KB B... - KM B... KB B2 L11 KM B2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB B1 L02 KM B1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB B2 L02 KM B2 L02 Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB B1 L20 KM B1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB B2 L20 KM B2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
• 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB B1 L12 KM B1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB B2 L12 KM B2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KB-KC types
KB B1 L21 KM B1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
• 4kV for KM-KN types 9
KB B2 L21 KM B2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB B1 L03 KM B1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB B2 L03 KM B2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
– Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Housing:
KC B1 S11 KN B1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC B2 S11 KN B2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC B1 S02 KN B1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC B2 S02 KN B2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KC B1 A11 KN B1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action make – Operating force: 5N / 1.1lb
KC B2 A11 KN B2 A11 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
– Tightening torque:
KC B... - KN B... KC B1 L11 KN B1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC B2 L11 KN B2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
• Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC B1 L02 KN B1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC B2 L02 KN B2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC B1 L20 KN B1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Slow action • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
KC B2 L20 KN B2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside
front cover. Certifications and compliance
Ø11x4mm = Ø0.43x0.16”. Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC; UL Listed for USA and
Limit switches.
Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
M20 CABLE ENTRY IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
add the letter P at the end of the order
E.g. KBB1S11P - KBB1S11N
Forward travel of snap action contacts open

K... L02 21-22
0 3.6 10.4mm
0” 0.14” 0.41”
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 3.6 10.4mm
0 2 3.9 10.4mm 0” 0.14” 0.41”
0” 0.08” 0.15” 0.41”
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 3.8 4.7 10.4mm
21-22 0” 0.15” 0.18” 0.41”
0 2 3.9 10.4mm
0” 0.08” 0.15” 0.41” K... L21 31-32
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 3.8 4.7 10.4mm
0 1.9 3.8 10.4mm 0” 0.15” 0.18” 0.41”
0” 0.07” 0.15” 0.41”
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 4.2 5.7 10.4mm 0 3.8 10.4mm
0” 0.16” 0.22” 0.41” 0” 0.15” 0.41”

Roller centre push lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
KB C1 S11 KM C1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB C2 S11 KM C2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB C1 S02 KM C1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
KB C2 S02 KM C2 S02 Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB C1 A11 KM C1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB C2 A11 KM C2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
KB C1 L11 KM C1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KB C2 L11 KM C2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB C1 L02 KM C1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB C... - KM C...
KB C2 L02 KM C2 L02 Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB C1 L20 KM C1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB C2 L20 KM C2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB C1 L12 KM C1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB C2 L12 KM C2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
9 KB C1 L21 KM C1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
KB C2 L21 KM C2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB C1 L03 KM C1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB C2 L03 KM C2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC C1 S11 KN C1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC C2 S11 KN C2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC C1 S02 KN C1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC C2 S02 KN C2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
KC C1 A11 KN C1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KC C2 A11 KN C2 A11 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
KC C1 L11 KN C1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC C2 L11 KN C2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC C... - KN C... • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC C1 L02 KN C1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC C2 L02 KN C2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC C1 L20 KN C1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
KC C2 L20 KN C2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
Limit switches.
E.g. KBC1S11P - KBC1S11N

K... L02 21-22
0 7.4 21mm
0” 0.29” 0.83”
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 7.4 21mm
0 1.8 8.15 21mm 0” 0.29” 0.83”
0” 0.07” 0.32” 0.83”
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 7.8 9.5 21mm
21-22 0” 0.31” 0.37” 0.83”
0 1.8 8.15 21mm
0” 0.07” 0.32” 0.83” K... L21 31-32
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 7.8 9.5 21mm
0 3.9 7.4 21mm 0” 0.31” 0.37” 0.83”
0” 0.15” 0.29” 0.83”
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 7.4 10.2 21mm 0 7.8 21mm
0” 0.29” 0.40” 0.83” 0” 0.31” 0.83”

Roller side push lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
KB D1 S11 KM D1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB D2 S11 KM D2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB D1 S02 KM D1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
KB D2 S02 KM D2 S02 Metal 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB D1 A11 KM D1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB D2 A11 KM D2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5
KB D1 L11 KM D1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KB D2 L11 KM D2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB D1 L02 KM D1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB D... - KM D... Slow action – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB D2 L02 KM D2 L02 Metal 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB D1 L20 KM D1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB D2 L20 KM D2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB D1 L12 KM D1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB D2 L12 KM D2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KB D1 L21 KM D1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
KB D2 L21 KM D2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB D1 L03 KM D1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB D2 L03 KM D2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC D1 S11 KN D1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC D2 S11 KN D2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC D1 S02 KN D1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC D2 S02 KN D2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 1
KC D1 A11 KN D1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KC D2 A11 KN D2 A11 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
KC D1 L11 KN D1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC D2 L11 KN D2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC D... - KN D... • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC D1 L02 KN D1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC D2 L02 KN D2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC D1 L20 KN D1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
KC D2 L20 KN D2 L20 Metal 5 • Pollution degree: 3
front cover.
Limit switches.
E.g. KBD1S11P - KBD1S11N

K... L02 21-22
0 6.9 19.5mm
0” 0.27” 0.77”
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 6.9 19.5mm
0 1.7 7.6 19.5mm 0” 0.27” 0.77”
0” 0.07” 0.30” 0.77”
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 7.25 8.5 19.5mm
21-22 0” 0.28” 0.33” 0.77”
0 1.7 7.6 19.5mm
0” 0.07” 0.30” 0.77” K... L21 31-32
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 7.25 8.5 19.5mm
0 3.7 6.9 19.5mm 0” 0.28” 0.33” 0.77”
0” 0.14” 0.27” 0.77”
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 6.9 9.5 19.5mm 0 7.25 19.5mm
0” 0.27” 0.37” 0.77” 0” 0.28” 0.77”

Limit switches, K series.
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Roller lever plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
KB E1 S11 KM E1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB E2 S11 KM E2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB E3 S11 KM E3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 45° angles.
KB E1 S02 KM E1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB E2 S02 KM E2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB E3 S02 KM E3 S02 Rubber 5
KB E1 A11 KM E1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB E2 A11 KM E2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
before break – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB E3 A11 KM E3 A11 Rubber 5
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB E1 L11 KM E1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KM E2 L11 Slow action Metal 5
KB E1... - KB E2...
KB E2 L11 • A600 Q300 for KB types
KM E1... - KM E2...
KB E3 L11 KM E3 L11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KM types
KB E1 L02 KM E1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 • 690V for KB types
KB E2 L02 KM E2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • 440V for KM types
KB E3 L02 KM E3 L02 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kVAC for KB types
9 KB E1 L20 KM E1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • 4kVAC for KM types
KB E2 L20 KM E2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KB only
KB E3 L20 KM E3 L20 Rubber 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB E1 L12 KM E1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KB E2 L12 KM E2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – Housing:
KB E3 L12 KM E3 L12 Rubber 5 • KB types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
polymer thermoplastic
KB E1 L21 KM E1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KM types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KB E2 L21 KM E2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
KB E3 L21 KM E3 L21 Rubber 5 /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
– Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KB E1 L03 KM E1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Operating torque: 3Ncm / 4.25ozin
KB E3... - KM E3... KB E2 L03 KM E2 L03 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB E3 L03 KM E3 L03 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
• Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
BI-DIRECTIONAL. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KB E1 D02 KM E1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
independent – Ambient conditions:
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0,2”. • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97”x0.39”. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
front cover.
M20 CABLE ENTRY Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, Limit switches.
add the letter P at the end of the order Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
E.g. KBE1S11P - KBE1S11N
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Forward travel of snap action contacts open K... L20 13-14

0 27° 85°
K... S11 21-22
13-14
21-22
K... L12 21-22
31-32
13-14
13-14
0 15° 30° 85°
0 28° 38° 85°
K... S02 11-12
21-22 K... L21 31-32
11-12 23-24
21-22 13-14
0 15° 30° 85° 0 28° 38° 85°
K... A11 25-26 K... L03 11-12

17-18 21-22
31-32
0 14° 27° 85°
0 28° 85°
K... L11 13-14
21-22 K... D02
0 30° 40° 85° 75° 28° 28° 75°
K... L02 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12
0 27° 85°

Roller lever plunger Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
KC E1 S11 KN E1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KC E2 S11 KN E2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KC E3 S11 KN E3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 90° angles.
KC E1 S02 KN E1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KC E2 S02 KN E2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KC E3 S02 KN E3 S02 Rubber 5
KC E1 A11 KN E1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KC E2 A11 KN E2 A11 Slow action make Metal 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
before break – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KC E3 A11 KN E3 A11 Rubber 5
KC E1... - KC E2... KC E1 L11 KN E1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KN E1... - KN E2... Slow action Metal 5
KC E2 L11 KN E2 L11 • A600 Q300 for KC types
KC E3 L11 KN E3 L11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KN types
KC E1 L02 KN E1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 • 690VAC for KC types
KC E2 L02 KN E2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • 440VAC for KN types
KC E3 L02 KN E3 L02 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KC types
KC E1 L20 KN E1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • 4kV for KN types 9
KC E2 L20 KN E2 L20 Slow action Metal 5 – Class II insulation for KC only
KC E3 L20 KN E3 L20 Rubber 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
BI-DIRECTIONAL. – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KC E1 D02 KN E1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 • KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
independent polymer thermoplastic
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0,2”. • KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97”x0.39”. – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – Operating torque: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC E3... - KN E3... front cover. – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
– Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
• Pollution degree: 3

Limit switches.
E.g. KCE1S11P - KCE1S11N

Return travel of snap action contacts closed
K... S11 21-22

13-14 K... L02 21-22
21-22 11-12
13-14 0 27° 85°
0 15° 30° 85°
K... S02 11-12 K... L20 13-14

21-22 23-24
11-12 0 27° 85°
21-22
0 15° 30° 85°
K... D02
K... A11 25-26
75° 28° 28° 75°
17-18
21-22
0 14° 27° 85°
11-12
K... L11 13-14
21-22
0 30° 40° 85°

One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047
Adjustable roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
KB F1 S11 KM F1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB F2 S11 KM F2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB F3 S11 KM F3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 180° angles.
KB F4 S11 KM F4 S11 Rubber 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB F1 S02 KM F1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB F2 S02 KM F2 S02 Snap action Metal 5
KB F3 S02 KM F3 S02 Rubber 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB F4 S02 KM F4 S02 Rubber 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KB F1 A11 KM F1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
Slow action make – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB F2 A11 KM F2 A11 Metal 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
before break
KB F3 A11 KM F3 A11 Rubber 5 • A600 Q300 for KB types
KB F4 A11 KM F4 A11 Rubber 5 • A300 Q300 for KM types
KB F1 L11 KM F1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • 690V for KB types
KB F2 L11 KM F2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • 440V for KM types
KB F3 L11 KM F3 L11 Rubber 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kVAC for KB types
9 KB F... - KM F...
KB F4 L11 KM F4 L11 Rubber 5 • 4kVAC for KM types
KB F1 L02 KM F1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Class II insulation for KB only
KB F2 L02 KM F2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB F3 L02 KM F3 L02 Rubber 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KB F4 L02 KM F4 L02 Rubber 5 – Housing:
KB F1 L20 KM F1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • KB types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
Slow action polymer thermoplastic
KB F2 L20 KM F2 L20 Metal 5 • KM types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KB F3 L20 KM F3 L20 Rubber 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
KB F4 L20 KM F4 L20 Rubber 5 /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KB F1 L12 KM F1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KB F2 L12 KM F2 L12 Slow action Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB F3 L12 KM F3 L12 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
KB F4 L12 KM F4 L12 Rubber 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KB F1 L21 KM F1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
M20 CABLE ENTRY
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, KB F2 L21 KM F2 L21 Slow action Metal 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
add the letter P at the end of the order – Ambient conditions:
KB F3 L21 KM F3 L21 Rubber 5 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
E.g. KBF1S11P - KBF1S11N KB F4 L21 KM F4 L21 Rubber 5 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
KB F1 L03 KM F1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 • Pollution degree: 3
Slow action • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
KB F2 L03 KM F2 L03 Metal 5 • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
KB F3 L03 KM F3 L03 Rubber 5
KB F4 L03 KM F4 L03 Rubber 5 Certifications and compliance
BI-DIRECTIONAL. Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. Limit switches.
KB F1 D02 KM F1 D02 2NC Plastic 5 Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
independent IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0.2”. CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.34”.
Ø50x10mm (Ø1.97x0.35”) with offset alignment.
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
front cover.
Forward travel of snap action contacts open K ... L20 13-14

0 27° 85°
K ... S11 21-22
13-14
21-22
K ... L12 21-22
31-32
13-14
13-14
0 15° 30° 85°
0 28° 38° 85°
K ... S02 11-12
21-22 K ... L21 31-32
11-12 23-24
21-22 13-14
0 15° 30° 85° 0 28° 38° 85°
K ... A11 25-26 K ... L03 11-12

17-18 21-22
0 14° 27° 85° 31-32
0 28° 85°
K ... L11 13-14
21-22 K... D02
0 30° 40° 85° 75° 28° 28° 75°
K ... L02 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12
0 27° 85°

Adjustable roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt General characteristics
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. sturdiness and constant reliability.
KC F1 S11 KN F1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KC F2 S11 KN F2 S11 Snap action Metal 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KC F3 S11 KN F3 S11 Rubber 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
of 180° angles.
KC F4 S11 KN F4 S11 Rubber 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
off. align. remarkable wiring ease.
KC F1 S02 KN F1 S02 2NC Plastic 5
KC F2 S02 KN F2 S02 Snap action Metal 5 Operational characteristics
KC F3 S02 KN F3 S02 Rubber 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KC F4 S02 KN F4 S02 Rubber 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
off. align. – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KC F1 A11 KN F1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Slow action make • A600 Q300 for KC types
KC F2 A11 KN F2 A11 Metal 5 • A300 Q300 for KN types
before break
KC F3 A11 KN F3 A11 Rubber 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KC F4 A11 KN F4 A11 Rubber 5 • 690VAC for KC types
off. align. • 440VAC for KN types
– IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KC F... - KN F... KC F1 L11 KN F1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • 6kV for KC types
KC F2 L11 KN F2 L11 Slow action Metal 5 • 4kV for KN types 9
KC F3 L11 KN F3 L11 Rubber 5 – Class II insulation for KC only
KC F4 L11 KN F4 L11 Rubber 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
off. align. – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KC F1 L02 KN F1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Housing:
KC F2 L02 KN F2 L02 Slow action Metal 5 • KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC F3 L02 KN F3 L02 Rubber 5 • KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KC F4 L02 KN F4 L02 Rubber 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
off. align. 1
KC F1 L20 KN F1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC F2 L20 KN F2 L20 Metal 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC F3 L20 KN F3 L20 Rubber 5 – Tightening torque:
KC F4 L20 KN F4 L20 Rubber 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
off. align. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0.2”. – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.34”.
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Ambient conditions:
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
front cover. • Pollution degree: 3
off. align. = offset alignment. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals

Limit switches.
E.g. KCF1S11P - KCF1S11N

K ... S11 21-22

13-14 K ... L11 13-14
21-22 21-22
13-14 0 30° 40° 85°
0 15° 30° 85°
K ... S02 11-12 K ... L02 21-22

21-22 11-12
11-12 0 27° 85°
21-22
0 15° 30° 85°
K ... L20 13-14
K ... A11 25-26 23-24
17-18
0 27° 85°
0 14° 27° 85°

Ceramic rod lever Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt General characteristics
KB H1 S11 KM H1 S11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
Snap action remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB H1 S02 KM H1 S02 2NC Ceramic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
KB H1 A11 KM H1 A11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
Slow action make remarkable wiring ease.
before break
KB H1 L11 KM H1 L11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
Slow action – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KB H1 L02 KM H1 L02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
Slow action – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB H1 L20 KM H1 L20 2NO Ceramic 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Slow action • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
• A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB H1 L12 KM H1 L12 1NO+2NC Ceramic 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
Slow action • 690VAC for KB-KC types
KB H... - KM H... KB H1 L21 KM H1 L21 2NO+1NC Ceramic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
Slow action – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
9 KB H1 L03 KM H1 L03 3NC
Slow action
Ceramic 5
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KC H1 S11 KN H1 S11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
Snap action – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
KC H1 S02 KN H1 S02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Housing:
Snap action • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC H1 A11 KN H1 A11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 • KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Slow action make – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
before break 1
KC H1 L11 KN H1 L11 1NO+1NC Ceramic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action – Operating torque: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC H1 L02 KN H1 L02 2NC Ceramic 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
Slow action – Tightening torque:
KC H1 L20 KN H1 L20 2NO Ceramic 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Slow action • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC H... - KN H... IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Ambient conditions:
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
front cover. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C

Limit switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
M20 CABLE ENTRY
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
For types with PG13.5 cable entry,
E.g. KBH1S11P - KBH1S11N

K ... L02 21-22
0 27° 85°
K ... S11 21-22
13-14 K ... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 27° 85°
0 15° 30° 85°
K ... L12 21-22
K ... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 28° 38° 85°
21-22
0 15° 30° 85° K ... L21 31-32
23-24
K ... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 28° 38° 85°
0 14° 27° 85°
K ... L03 11-12
K ... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 30° 40° 85° 0 28° 85°

Adjustable rod lever Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt General characteristics
KB L1 S11 KM L1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB L2 S11 KM L2 S11 Snap action Steel 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB L1 S02 KM L1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 configuration with no tools. The heads have axial rotation
Snap action of 90° angles (180° for KC and KN types).
KB L2 S02 KM L2 S02 Steel 5 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB L1 A11 KM L1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB L2 A11 KM L2 A11 Slow action make Steel 5
KB L1 L11 KM L1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KB L2 L11 KM L2 L11 Slow action Steel 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB L1 L02 KM L1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB L... - KM L... – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KB L2 L02 KM L2 L02 Slow action Steel 5 • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB L1 L20 KM L1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB L2 L20 KM L2 L20 Slow action Steel 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB L1 L12 KM L1 L12 1NO+2NC Plastic 5 • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB L2 L12 KM L2 L12 Slow action Steel 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KB L1 L21 KM L1 L21 2NO+1NC Plastic 5
KB L2 L21 KM L2 L21 Slow action Steel 5 – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
KB L1 L03 KM L1 L03 3NC Plastic 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB L2 L03 KM L2 L03 Slow action Steel 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KC L1 S11 KN L1 S11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC L2 S11 KN L2 S11 Snap action Steel 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC L1 S02 KN L1 S02 2NC Plastic 5 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC L2 S02 KN L2 S02 Snap action Steel 5 1
KC L1 A11 KN L1 A11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
Slow action make – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin
KC L2 A11 KN L2 A11 Steel 5 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
before break
KC L... - KN L... KC L1 L11 KN L1 L11 1NO+1NC Plastic 5 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC L2 L11 KN L2 L11 Slow action Steel 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC L1 L02 KN L1 L02 2NC Plastic 5 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC L2 L02 KN L2 L02 Slow action Steel 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC L1 L20 KN L1 L20 2NO Plastic 5 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
KC L2 L20 KN L2 L20 Steel 5 • Pollution degree: 3
BI-DIRECTIONAL. • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
KB L1 D02 KM L1 D02 2NC Plastic 5
independent Certifications and compliance
KB L2 D02 KM L2 D02 2NC Steel 5 Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
M20 CABLE ENTRY independent Limit switches.
add the letter P at the end of the order Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N. IEC/EN 60947-5-1. IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
E.g. KBL1S11P - KBL1S11N
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside CSA C22.2 n° 14.
front cover.

Return travel of snap action contacts closed K ... L20 13-14
23-24
K ... S11 21-22 0 27° 85°
13-14
21-22 K ... L12 21-22
13-14 31-32
13-14
0 15° 30° 85°
0 28° 38° 85°
K ... S02 11-12
21-22 K ... L21 31-32
11-12 23-24
21-22 13-14
0 15° 30° 85° 0 28° 38° 85°
K ... A11 13-14 K ... L03 11-12

21-22 21-22
31-32
0 14° 27° 85°
0 28° 85°
K ... L11 25-26
17-18 K... D02
0 30° 40° 85° 75° 28° 28° 75°
K ... L02 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12
0 27° 85°

Wobble stick, Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt General characteristics

omnidirectional Plastic Metal material per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
KB M1 S11 KM M1 S11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB M2 S11 KM M2 S11 Snap action Semirigid 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB M1 S02 KM M1 S02 2NC Flexible 5 configuration with no tools.
Snap action The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB M2 S02 KM M2 S02 Semirigid 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB M1 A11 KM M1 A11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5
KB M2 A11 KM M2 A11 Slow action make Semirigid 5 Operational characteristics
before break – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
– Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KB M1 L11 KM M1 L11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KB M2 L11 KM M2 L11 Slow action Semirigid 5 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB M1 L02 KM M1 L02 2NC Flexible 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Slow action • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
KB M2 L02 KM M2 L02 Semirigid 5 • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB M1 L20 KM M1 L20 2NO Flexible 5 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KB M2 L20 KM M2 L20 Slow action Semirigid 5 • 690VAC for KB-KC types
• 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB M1... - KM M1... KB M1 L12 KM M1 L12 1NO+2NC Flexible 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
KB M2 L12 KM M2 L12 Slow action Semirigid 5 • 6kV for KB-KC types
9 KB M1 L21 KM M1 L21 2NO+1NC Flexible
Slow action
5
KB M2 L21 KM M2 L21 Semirigid 5 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB M1 L03 KM M1 L03 3NC Flexible 5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB M2 L03 KM M2 L03 Slow action Semirigid 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
– Housing:
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
KC M1 S11 KN M1 S11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 polymer thermoplastic
KC M2 S11 KN M2 S11 Snap action Semirigid 5 • KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
– Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
KC M1 S02 KN M1 S02 2NC Flexible 5 1/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KC M2 S02 KN M2 S02 Snap action Semirigid 5 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KC M1 A11 KN M1 A11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 – Operating torque: 1Ncm/1.42ozin
Slow action make – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC M2 A11 KN M2 A11 Semirigid 5 – Tightening torque:
before break
KC M1 L11 KN M1 L11 1NO+1NC Flexible 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC M2 L11 KN M2 L11 Slow action Semirigid 5 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC M1 L02 KN M1 L02 2NC Flexible 5 – Ambient conditions:
KC M2... - KN M2... Slow action
KC M2 L02 KN M2 L02 Semirigid 5 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
KC M1 L20 KN M1 L20 2NO Flexible 5 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Slow action • Pollution degree: 3
KC M2 L20 KN M2 L20 Semirigid 5 • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
front cover.
Limit switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY
E.g. KBM1S11P - KBM1S11N

K... L02 21-22
0 14°
K... S11 21-22
13-14 K... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 14°
0 4° 14°
K... L12 21-22
K... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 14.5° 30°
21-22
0 4° 14° K... L21 31-32
23-24
K... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 14.5° 30°
0 7,5° 14°
K... L03 11-12
K... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 14° 19° 0 14.5°

Hinge operating Order code Contacts Shaft Qty Wt General characteristics

Plastic Metal features per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
KB P1 L11 KM P1 L11 1NO+1NC Short 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
Slow action cylinder remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB P2 L11 KM P2 L11 1NO+1NC Long 5 configuration with no tools.
Slow action solid The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB P3 L11 KM P3 L11 1NO+1NC Long 5 remarkable wiring ease.
Slow action solid w/
reduction Operational characteristics
KB P1 L02 KM P1 L02 2NC Short 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
Slow action cylinder – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
KB P2 L02 KM P2 L02 2NC Long 5 – B10d: 100,000 cycles
KB P... - KM P... Slow action solid – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB P3 L02 KM P3 L02 2NC Long 5 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
Slow action solid w/ • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
reduction • A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB P1 L12 KM P1 L12 1NO+2NC Short 5 • 690VAC for KB-KC types
Slow action cylinder • 440VAC for KM-KN types
KB P2 L12 KM P2 L12 1NO+2NC Long 5 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
Slow action solid • 6kV for KB-KC types
KB P3 L12 KM P3 L12 1NO+2NC Long 5 • 4kV for KM-KN types 9
Slow action solid w/ – Class II insulation for KB-KC only
reduction – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB P1 L21 KM P1 L21 2NO+1NC Short 5 – Operators of aluminium-zinc alloy
Slow action cylinder – Housing:
KB P2 L21 KM P2 L21 2NO+1NC Long 5 • KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
Slow action solid polymer thermoplastic
KB P3 L21 KM P3 L21 2NO+1NC Long 5 • KM-KN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
Slow action solid w/ – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
reduction /2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KB P1 L03 KM P1 L03 3NC Short 5 – Operating torque: 15Ncm/21.2ozin
Slow action cylinder – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB P2 L03 KM P2 L03 3NC Long 5 – Tightening torque:
Slow action solid • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KB P3 L03 KM P3 L03 3NC Long 5 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC P... - KN P... Slow action solid w/ • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
reduction – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
KC P1 L11 KN P1 L11 1NO+1NC Short 5 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Slow action cylinder • Pollution degree: 3
KC P2 L02 KN P2 L02 1NO+1NC Long 5 • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
Slow action solid • IEC degree of protection: IP65 for body housing.
KC P3 L11 KN P3 L11 1NO+1NC Long 5 Certifications and compliance
Slow action solid w/ Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC; UL Listed for USA and
reduction Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
KC P1 L02 KN P1 L02 2NC Short 5 Limit switches.
Slow action cylinder Compliant with standards: EN 50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
KC P2 L02 KN P2 L02 2NC Long 5 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
M20 CABLE ENTRY
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, Slow action solid CSA C22.2 n° 14.
add the letter P at the end of the order KC P3 L02 KN P3 L02 2NC Long 5
Slow action solid w/
E.g. KBP1L11P - KBP1L11N
reduction
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
front cover.
open
closed
K... L11 13-14 K... L21 31-32
21-22 23-24
0 7° 10° 13-14
0 7° 10°
K... L02 21-22
11-12 K... L03 11-12
0 7° 21-22
31-32
K... L12 21-22 0 7°
31-32
13-14
0 7° 10°

Slotted lever Order code Contacts Qty Wt General characteristics

Plastic Metal per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
KB Q1 L11 KM Q1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 5 The innovative locking bayonet mechanism permits to
KB Q1 L02 KM Q1 L02 2NC Slow action 5 remove and reposition the operating head in the required
KB Q1 L12 KM Q1 L12 1NO+2NC Slow action 5 configuration with no tools.
The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
KB Q1 L21 KM Q1 L21 2NO+1NC Slow action 5 remarkable wiring ease.
KB Q1 L03 KM Q1 L03 3NC Slow action 5
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. Operational characteristics
KC Q1 L11 KN Q1 L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 5 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
KC Q1 L02 KN Q1 L02 2NC Slow action 5 – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
– B10d: 100,000 cycles
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
front cover. • A600 Q300 for KB-KC types
• A300 Q300 for KM-KN types
KB Q... - KM Q... • 440VAC for KM-KN types
9 • 4kV for KM-KN types
– Housing:
• KB-KC types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
– Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
1
– Operating torque: 15Ncm/21.2ozin
– Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KC Q... - KN Q... • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C

Limit switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
M20 CABLE ENTRY

E.g. KBQ1L11P - KBQ1L11N
open
closed
K... L11 13-14 K... L21 31-32
21-22 23-24
0 7° 10° 90° 13-14
0 7° 10° 90°
K... L02 21-22
11-12 K... L03 11-12
0 7° 90° 21-22
31-32
K... L12 21-22 0 7° 90°
31-32
13-14
0 7° 10° 90°

Key operated Order code Contacts Key Qty Wt General characteristics

Plastic shape per The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been
body pkg designed to satisfy requirements comprising quick
KB N1 L11 1NO+1NC Straight 5 0.092 The heads have axial rotation in any of 4 positions at 90°
KB N2 L11 Slow action Angled 5 0.092 angles.
KB N3 L11 Straight “T” 5 0.092 The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring
remarkable wiring ease.
KB N4 L11 Angled “T” 5 0.092
KB N1 L02 2NC Straight 5 0.092 Operational characteristics
KB N2 L02 Slow action Angled 5 0.092 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
KB N3 L02 Straight “T” 5 0.092 – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
KB N4 L02 Angled “T” 5 0.092 – B10d: 100,000 cycles
KB N... – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
KB N1 L12 1NO+2NC Straight 5 0.096
KB N2 L12 Angled 5 0.096 A600 Q600
KB N3 L12 Straight “T” 5 0.096 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V
KB N4 L12 Angled “T” 5 0.096 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 6kV
– Class II insulation
KB N1 L21 2NO+1NC Straight 5 0.096 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KB N2 L21 Slow action Angled 5 0.096 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KB N3 L21 Straight “T” 5 0.096 – Housing and operators in self-extinguishing
double-insulation polymer thermoplastic
KB N4 L21 Angled “T” 5 0.096 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and 9
KB N1 L03 3NC Straight 5 0.096 1/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KB N2 L03 Slow action Angled 5 0.096 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KC N... – Operating force: 8N/1.8lb
KB N3 L03 Straight “T” 5 0.096 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
KB N4 L03 Angled “T” 5 0.096 – Tightening torque:
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
KC N1 L11 1NO+1NC Straight 5 0.107 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KC N2 L11 Slow action Angled 5 0.107 – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
KC N3 L11 Straight “T” 5 0.107 – Ambient conditions:
KC N4 L11 Angled “T” 5 0.107 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
KC N1 L02 2NC Straight 5 0.107 • Pollution degree: 3
KC N2 L02 Slow action Angled 5 0.107 • IEC degree of protection: IP20 for terminals
M20 CABLE ENTRY KC N3 L02 Straight “T” 5 0.107
add the letter P at the end of the order KC N4 L02 Angled “T” 5 0.107 Certifications and compliance
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N. Certifications obtained: EAC, CCC; UL Listed for USA and
E.g. KBN1L11P - KBN1L11N IEC/EN 60947-5-1. Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
The key is standard supplied. Limit switches.
open IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
closed
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
K... L11 13-14 K... L21 31-32
21-22 23-24
0 5 5.5 mm 13-14
0” 0.20” 0.22” in 0 5 5.5 mm
0” 0.20” 0.22” in
K... L02 21-22
11-12 K... L03 11-12
21-22
0 5 mm
0” 0.20” in 31-32
0 5 mm
K... L12 21-22 0” 0.20” in
31-32
13-14
0 5 5.5 mm
0” 0.20” 0.22” in
Accessories and spare Order code Description Qty Wt

parts for key operated per
pkg
switches n° [kg]
K X N1 Straight key 5 0.013
K X N2 Angled key 5 0.013
K X N3 Straight “T” key 5 0.012
K X N4 Angled “T” key 5 0.012
K X N5 Toggle key 5 0.019
KX N1 KX N2
KX N3 KX N4 KX N5

Accessories and spare parts for KB - KC - KM and KN type limit switches
Contact blocks Order Contacts Qty Wt General characteristics

code per The KXB contact blocks can be used with the K series of
pkg limit switches. Combinations of 2 contacts with slow or
n° [kg] snap action and, for KB and KM types only, 3 slow action
KX B S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 10 0.021 contacts are available.
The NC contacts have direct opening operation, a specific
KX B S02 2NC Snap action 10 0.021 safety principle.
KX B A11 1NO+1NC Slow action make before break 10 0.021 The particular four-point contacts warrant high
KX B L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 0.021 conductivity in any sort of application. The removal of the
contacts from the limit switch body provides remarkable
KX B L02 2NC Slow action 10 0.021 wiring ease and reduces installation time as well.
KX B L20 2NO Slow action 10 0.021 The KX C... bodies, complete with auxiliary contacts, can
KX B L12 1NO+2NC Slow action 10 0.026 be used as spare parts for the K series limit switches or
coupled with the KX A... operating heads, to obtain
KX B L21 2NO+1NC Slow action 10 0.026 complete limit switches in the required configurations.
KX B L03 3NC Slow action 10 0.026 The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable to
have the best access. Each body includes the innovative
Not suitable for key operated KBN / KCN, hinged operating KBP / KCP /
KMP / KNP and slotted lever KBQ / KCQ / KMQ / KNQ types. locking bayonet mechanism of the operating head.
K X B...
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to Plastic and metal types are available.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
Not suitable for KC and KN types, KG and KR foot switches. Operational characteristics
– Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
Body complete with Order code Contacts Qty Wt – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
contact block Plastic Metal per – conductivity: 10mA 5V
body body pkg – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
• A600 Q300 for KX CB-KX CC types
9 n° [kg]
• A300 Q300 for KX CM-KX CN types
One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui:
KX CB S11 KX CM S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 10 • 690VAC for KX CB-KX CC types
KX CB S02 KX CM S02 2NC Snap action 10 • 440VAC for KX CM-KX CN types
KX CB A11 KX CM A11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 • 6kV for KX CB-KX CC types
make before break • 4kV for KX CM-KX CN types
KX CB L11 KX CM L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 – Class II insulation for KX CB-KX CC only
KX CB L02 KX CM L02 2NC Slow action 10 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KX CB... - KX CM... – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
KX CB L20 KX CM L20 2NO Slow action 10 – Housing:
KX CB L12 KX CM L12 1NO+2NC Slow action 10 • KX CB-KX CC types - Self-extinguishing
KX CB L21 KX CM L21 2NO+1NC Slow action 10 double-insulation polymer thermoplastic
• KX CM-KX CN types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
KX CB L03 KX CM L03 3NC Slow action 10 – Cable entry: M20 standard supplied; PG13.5 and
Two side cable entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. 1/2 NPT available (see the side note for details)
KX CC S11 KX CN S11 1NO+1NC Snap action 10 – Operating head fixing: Locking bayonet insert
KX CC S02 KX CN S02 2NC Snap action 10 – Tightening torque:
KX CC... - KX CN... KX CC A11 KX CN A11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
make before break • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KX CC L11 KX CN L11 1NO+1NC Slow action 10 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
KX CC L02 KX CN L02 2NC Slow action 10 – Ambient conditions:
KX CC L20 KX CN L20 2NO Slow action 10 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Not suitable for key operated KBN / KCN, hinged operating KBP / KCP / • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
KMP / KNP and slotted lever KBQ / KCQ / KMQ / KNQ types. • Pollution degree: 3
Not suitable for KC and KN types.
M20 CABLE ENTRY Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for US and
For types with PG13.5 cable entry, Canada (File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices for
add the letter P at the end of the order KX C... body types only. UL Recognized for USA and
code while for 1/2 NPT, add N. Canada (cURus - File E93601) as component - Auxiliary
E.g. KXCCL11P - KXCCL11N devices for contact blocks only; products having this type
of marking are intended for use as components of
complete workshop-assembled equipment.
Comply with standards: EN50047, IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, UL508,
Forward travel of snap action contacts open KX ... L02 21-22 CSA C22.2 n° 14.
0 2.1 6mm
0” 0.08” 0.24”
KX ... S11 21-22
13-14 KX ... L20 13-14
21-22 23-24
13-14 0 2.1 6mm
0 0.5 2.3 6mm 0” 0.08” 0.24”
0” 0.02” 0.09” 0.24”
KX ... L12 21-22
KX ... S02 11-12 31-32
21-22 13-14
11-12 0 2.2 2.7 6mm
21-22 0” 0.09” 0.11” 0.24”
0 0.5 2.3 6mm KX ... L21 31-32
0” 0.02” 0.09” 0.24”
23-24
KX ... A11 25-26 13-14
17-18 0 2.2 2.7 6mm
0 1.1 2.1 6mm 0” 0.09” 0.11” 0.24”
0” 0.04” 0.08” 0.24”
KX ... L03 11-12
KX ... L11 13-14 21-22
21-22 31-32
0 2.1 2.9 6mm 0 2.2 6mm
0” 0.08” 0.11” 0.24” 0” 009” 0.24”

9-16 page 9-17 pages 9-28 and 29 page 9-35
Accessories and spare parts for KB, KC, KM and KN type limit switches
Operating heads Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per The KX A... operating heads can be used as spare parts
pkg for the K series limit switches or coupled with the KX C...
n° [kg] bodies to obtain complete limit switches in the required
KX A A1 Top push rod plunger 5 0.013 configurations.
The heads are made of metal and warrant sturdiness and
KX A A1 KX A B1 KX A B2 KX A B1 Plastic top roller push plunger 5 0.020 operating reliability in all conditions.
KX A B2 Metal top roller push plunger 5 0.020 The shape of the coupling section with the body of the K
KX A C1 Plastic roller centre push lever 5 0.020 series switches permits to orient the head in any 45°
angle position while the initial lever and rod position can
KX A C2 Metal roller centre push lever 5 0.020 be adjusted 360° at 15° angle positions.
KX A D1 Plastic roller side push lever 5 0.020 The head fixing to the body is achieved by the innovative
KX A D2 Metal roller side push lever 5 0.023 locking bayonet mechanism so there is no need of tools.
Tightening torque for eventual operating head actuator
KX A C1 KX A C2 KX A E1 Plastic roller lever plunger 5 0.039 fixing is 0.8Nm/7lbin.
KX A E2 Metal roller lever plunger 5 0.048
KX A E3 Rubber Ø50x10mm roller 5 0.055
lever plunger
KX A F1 Adjustable plastic roller lever 5 0.055
Ø19x5mm
KX A D1 KX A D2 KX A F2 Adjustable metal roller lever 5 0.065
Ø19x5mm
KX A F3 Adjustable rubber 5 0.065
Ø50x10mm roller lever
KX A F4 Adjustable offset rubber 5 0.081 9
Ø50x10mm roller lever
KX A H1 Ceramic rod lever 5 0.056
KX A L1 Adjustable plastic rod lever 5 0.043
KX A L2 Adjustable stainless steel 5 0.050
KX A E1 KX A E2 KX A E3 rod lever
KX A M1 Flexible wobble stick 5 0.032
KX A M2 Semirigid wobble stick 5 0.025
Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0,2”.
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97”x0.39”.
KX A F1 KX A F2
KX A F3 KX A F4 KX A H1
KX A L1 KX A L2 KX A M1 KX A M2
Cable glands and cable Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
per The cable glands are in plastic with either M20 or PG13.5
conduit pkg thread and provide to keep the cable in place and
maintain the proper IP protection of the limit switch after
n° [kg] installation.
KX P01 M20 cable gland 50 0.009 Operational characteristics for cable gland
KX P02 PG13.5 cable gland 50 0.009 – Material: Self-extinguishing polyamide
KX P03 M20 rubber cable conduit 50 0.004 – IEC degree of protection: IP68
– Gland seal with cable diameter: 6...12mm/0.24...0.47”.
KX P... KX P03
Compliant with standards: EN 50262, UL508.
Dimensions
pages 9-28 and 29 9-17
Prewired metal limit switches, K series
Order code Contacts Head Cable Qty Wt Operational characteristics

1NO+1NC material length per – 2 meters long cable (5 core, each 0.75mm2/18 AWG)
pkg – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
m n° [kg] – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
TOP PUSH ROD PLUNGER. – conductivity: 10mA 5V
KP A1 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.286 – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation:
KP A1 L11 Slow action Metal 2 1 0.286 B300 R300
– IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400VAC
KP A2 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.302 – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 4kV
KP A2 L11 Slow action Metal 2 1 0.302 – Class I insulation
KP A1... KP A2... TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. – Body housing: aluminium - zinc alloy
KP B1 S11 Snap action Plastic 2 1 0.290 – Operating force/torque:
KP B1 L11 Slow action Plastic 2 1 0.290 • KP A types: 15N/3.4lb
• KP B types: 10N/2.2lb
KP B2 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.290 • KP E, KP F and KP L types: 0.08Nm/0.7lbin
KP B2 L11 Slow action Metal 2 1 0.290 • KP M types: 0.1Nm/0.9lbin
– Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/22.1lbin
KP B3 S11 Snap action Plastic 2 1 0.288 – Ambient conditions:
KP B3 L11 Slow action Plastic 2 1 0.288 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
KP B4 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.296 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
KP B1... KP B2... KP B4 L11 Slow action Metal 2 1 0.296 • IEC degree of protection: IP67 for body housing.
M12 HEAD TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER.
KP B5 S11 Snap action Plastic 2 1 0.308 Certifications and compliance
9 KP B5 L11 Slow action Plastic 2 1 0.308
Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed for USA and
KP B6 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.310 Limit switches.
KP B6 L11 Slow action Metal 2 1 0.310 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
KP B7 S11 Snap action Plastic 2 1 0.310
KP B7 L11 Slow action Plastic 2 1 0.310
KP B3... KP B4...
KP B8 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.310
KP B8 L11 Slow action Metal 2 1 0.310
ROLLER LEVER PLUNGER.
KP E1 S11 Snap action Plastic 2 1 0.336
KP E1 L11 Slow action Plastic 2 1 0.336
KP E2 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.336
KP E2 L11 Slow action Metal 2 1 0.336
ADJUSTABLE ROLLER LEVER.
KP B5... KP B6... KP F1 S11 Snap action Plastic 2 1 0.344
KP F1 L11 Slow action Plastic 2 1 0.344
ADJUSTABLE ROD LEVER.
KP L2 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.342
KP L2 L11 Slow action Metal 2 1 0.342
OMNIDIRECTIONAL WOBBLE STICK.
KP M2 S11 Snap action Metal 2 1 0.298
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
KP B7... KP B8... For prewired switches with 1m long cable only, add suffix 010 at the end
of the order code.
Example: KP A1 S11 010 for prewired switch, top push metal rod
plunger, with 1NO+1NC snap action contacts and 1m long cable.
M12 head fixing.
Roller operation perpendicular to switch body.

KP E1... KP E2... KP A... S11 21-22 KP E... S11 21-22

13-14 KP F... S11 13-14
21-22 KP L... S11 21-22
13-14 13-14
0 1.0 1.9 5mm 0 14° 26° 74°

0” 0.04” 0.075” 0.20”
KP E... L11 21-22
KP A... L11 21-22 KP F... L11 13-14
13-14 KP L... L11
0 27° 45° 74°
0 1.9 3.3 5mm
0” 0.075” 0.13” 0.20”
KP M... S11 21-22
KP B... S11 21-22 13-14
13-14 21-22
21-22 13-14
13-14
0 5° 14°
0 1.7 3.3 8,7mm
KP F1... KP L2... KP M2 S11 0” 0.069” 0.13” 0.34”
KP B... L11 21-22

13-14
0 3.3 5.5 8,7mm

0” 0.13” 0.22” 0.34”

9-18 page 9-30 page 9-35
Plastic limit switches, T series. Dimensions to EN 50041
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Plunger Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg] TS1 01... 21-22
TS2 01... 13-14
Without reset button. 21-22
13-14
TS1 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.120 [mm (in)]
0 6 (0.24”)
Snap action
TL1 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.120 TL1 01... 21-22
TL2 01... 13-14
Slow action [mm (in)]
0 6 (0.24”)
With reset button on front.
TS1 05... 21-22
TS2 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.130 TS2 05... 13-14
Snap action 21-22
13-14
TL2 01 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.130
0 60°
TS1... - TL1... Slow action
TL1 05... 21-22
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to TL2 05... 13-14
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 0 60°
The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards
EN 50041 for dimensions.
The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of
self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent
mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for 9
assembly on machinery or installations in the
general-purpose industrial field as well as saline
environments (for example close by the sea).
The housing sturdiness allows mounting of limit
switches in heavy duty applications.
The double-insulated housing of the limit switch warrants
TS2... - TL2... and protects internal circuits against shocks or impacts
and in industrial environments, against accidental ingress
of tools and accidental contact.
Roller lever Order code Contacts Roller Qty Wt The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
material per the silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL
pkg series have direct (positive) opening action to prevent
n° [kg] sticking or welding.
Without reset button. Operational characteristics
TS1 05 20 A 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.120 – Maximum operating rate: 1200 cycles/h
TS1 05 21 A Snap action Metal Ø20x5 1 0.125 – Switching speed: 0.5...1.5m/s
– Mechanical life: >10 million cycles (100,000 cycles
TS1 05 24 A Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.135 only for reset button versions)
TL1 05 20 A 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.120 – IEC utilisation category:
TL1 05 21 A Slow action Metal Ø20x5 1 0.125 • DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
• AC15 duty: 6A 250V
TL1 05 24 A Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.135 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 6A
With reset button. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
TS2 05 20 AS 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.130 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
Snap action Metal Ø20x5 – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
TS2 05 21 AS 1 0.135 – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
TS2 05 24 AS Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.145 – Operating force: 6N/1.35lb (TS...01 and TL...01)
TS1... - TL1... TL2 05 20 AS 1NO+1NC Plastic Ø20x5 1 0.130 – Operating force: 3Ncm/4.25ozin (TS...05 and TL...05)
Slow action Metal Ø20x5 – TS...05 and TL...05 have axial rotation in any of 4
TL2 05 21 AS 1 0.135 positions (90°)
TL2 05 24 AS Rubber Ø50x10 1 0.145 – TS...05 and TL...05 have lever inclination, 360°
adjustment
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to IEC/EN – Housing cable entry: PG13.5
60947-5-1.
Roller lever plunger limit switches with 30x5mm plastic roller are – Tightening torque:
available and can be ordered substituting the number 20 with 23 in the • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
above-given order codes. • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
Roller lever plunger limit switches with 35x15mm rubber roller are • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
available and can be ordered substituting the number 24 with 22 in the – Conductor section: 1 or 2 2.5mm2 max / 16-14 AWG
above-given order codes.
Ø20x5mm = Ø0.79x0.2”. – Ambient conditions:
Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.39”. • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Ø30x5mm = Ø1.81x0.2”. • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
Ø35x15mm = Ø1.38x0.59”. • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP66

Limit switches.
TS2... - TL2... IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 9-27 page 9-30 page 9-35 9-19
T series plastic limit switches. Dimensions to EN 50041
Wobble stick, Order code Contacts Rod Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
omnidirectional material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg] TS1 09... 21-22
13-14
Without reset button. 21-22
13-14
TS1 09 92 1NO+1NC Flexible 1 0.115
0 36°
Snap action
TL1 09 92 1NO+1NC Flexible 1 0.115 TL1 09... 21-22
13-14
Slow action
0 36°
TL2 10... 21-22

13-14
0 [mm (in)] 4.2 (0.17”)
The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and
manufactured according to European standards
EN 50041 for dimensions.
The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of
self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent
mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for
assembly on machinery or installations in the
general-purpose industrial field as well as saline
TS1... - TL1... environments (for example close by the sea).
The housing sturdiness allows mounting of limit
9 Key operated Order code Contacts Key Qty Wt switches in heavy duty applications.
shape per The double-insulated housing of the limit switch warrants
pkg and protects internal circuits against shocks or impacts
and in industrial environments, against accidental ingress
n° [kg] of tools and accidental contact.
Without reset button. The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
Front key withdrawal . the silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL
TL2 10 10 1NO+1NC Straight 1 0.120 series have direct (positive) opening action to prevent
Slow action Angled sticking or welding.
TL2 10 11 1 0.120
TL2 10 12 Angled “T” 1 0.120 Operational characteristics
TL2 10 13 Straight “T” 1 0.120 – Maximum operating rate: 1200 cycles/h
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – IEC utilisation category:
Version with key withdrawal on the left or on the right is available; replace • DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
the last letter (A) of the order code respectively with S or D
(e.g. TL2 10 10S - left or TL2 10 10D - right). For further assistance, • AC15 duty: 6A 250V
consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 6A
front cover. – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC
The key is standard supplied. – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
– Operating torque: 1Ncm/1.42ozin (TS1 09... and
TL2... TL1 09...)
– Operating force: 8N/1.8lb (TL2 10...)
Order code Description Qty Wt – TL2 10... has axial rotation in any of 4 positions (90°)
per – TL2 10... has vertical or sideways key withdrawal
pkg – Housing cable entry: PG13.5
n° [kg] – Cable connection: Self-releasing screw terminal
Extra keys. • Switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
A 20746 Straight key 10 0.013 • Contact terminals: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
A 20747 Angled key 10 0.013 • Body lid screw fixing: 0.8Nm / 7lbin
P 32753 Angled “T” key 10 0.008 – Ambient conditions:
P 32752 Straight “T” key 10 0.008 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
A 20748 Toggle key 2 0.085 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
A 20746 A 20747 • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP66.

Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Limit
switches.
P 32753 P 32752 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.
A 20748

9-20 page 9-27 page 9-30 page 9-35
Top push rod plunger Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
protection per
closed
pkg
PLN A1 A... 1.5 11.5
IEC n° [kg] 0.06” 0.45”
PLN A1 R... 11-12
PLN A1 A 1NC IP40 1 0.240
[mm (in)]
PLN A1 A W IP65 1 0.240 2.4 20
PLN A1 H... 0.09” 0.79”
PLN A2 A 2NC IP40 1 0.240 PLN A1 HSB... 11-12
PLN A2 A W IP65 1 0.240 [mm (in)]
PLN C1 A 1NO IP40 1 0.240 PLN A2 A... 1.5 6.5
0.06” 0.25”
PLN C1 A W IP65 1 0.240 PLN A2 R... 11-12
PLN...A... PLN C2 A 2NO IP40 1 0.240 21-22
PLN C2 A W IP65 1 0.240 [mm (in)]
PLN A2 H... 2.4 11.5
PLN U1 A 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.240 0.09” 0.45”
PLN A2 HSB... 11-12
PLN U1 A W IP65 1 0.240
21-22
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to [mm (in)]
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 2.2 11.5
PLN C1 A... 0.09” 0.45”
PLN C1 R... 13-14
Top roller push plunger Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt [mm (in)]
protection per PLN C2 A... 4.2 6.4
pkg 0.16” 0.25”
PLN C2 R... 13-14
IEC n° [kg]
PLN A1 R 1NC IP40 1 0.230
23-24
[mm (in)]
9
PLN A1 R W IP65 1 0.230 PLN U1 A... 1.5 11.5
0.06” 0.45”
PLN A2 R 2NC IP40 1 0.230 PLN U1 R... 21-22
PLN A2 R W IP65 1 0.230 13-14
5.9 (0.23”) [mm (in)]
PLN C1 R 1NO IP40 1 0.230 2.4 20
PLN U1 H... 0.09” 0.79”
PLN C1 R W IP65 1 0.230 PLN U1 HSB... 21-22
PLN C2 R 2NO IP40 1 0.230 13-14
PLN C2 R W IP65 1 0.230 10.4 (0.41”) [mm (in)]
PLN...R... PLN U1 R 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.230
PLN U1 R W IP65 1 0.230 The PLN types are for general purpose use. The extensive
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to range of models with numerous of actuators and multiple
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. contact configurations is the optimal solution to the
diverse installation requirements.
Overall simple design, oversize contacts and choice
Roller centre push lever Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt materials ensure durable and safe operation. The metal
protection per alloy housing and resistant thermoplastic actuators
pkg warrant reliable heavy-duty features for any sort of
IEC n° [kg] operating conditions.
The PLN series limit switches are available with IEC IP40
PLN A1 H 1NC IP40 1 0.270 or IP65 degree of protection; this characteristic is
PLN A1 H W IP65 1 0.270 ensured by the use of appropriate sealing gasket.
PLN A2 H 2NC IP40 1 0.270 The IEC IP65 version is easily identified by the “W” suffix
of its order code and can be used in adverse ambient
PLN A2 H W IP65 1 0.270 conditions.
PLN U1 H 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.270
PLN U1 H W IP65 1 0.270 Operational characteristics
With offset roller. – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
PLN A1 HSB 1NC IP40 1 0.290 – IEC utilisation category:
PLN A1 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 • DC13 duty: 10A 24V
PLN...H • AC15 duty: 5A 250V, 3A 400V
PLN A2 HSB 2NC IP40 1 0.290 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
PLN A2 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400VAC
PLN U1 HSB 1NO+1NC IP40 1 0.290 – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
PLN U1 HSB W IP65 1 0.290 – Housing cable entry: PG11 (PLN...W types only
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to complete with cable gland)
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – Cable connection: screw terminal with clamp suitable
for cables up to 2.5mm2 / AWG 14
– Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm / 22.1lbin
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see table
indications).

PLN...HSB W Certifications obtained: IMQ, EAC.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 81-1.

page 9-31 page 9-35 9-21
Latch and manual release Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
protection per (The arrows indicate the closed
pkg direction of operation)
IEC n° [kg] PLN A1 RAG 1 7
0.04” 0.27”
Top roller push plunger. PLN A1 RAG W 21-22
PLN A1 RAG 1NC IP40 1 0.220 [mm (in)]
PLN A1 RAG W 1NC IP65 1 0.230
PL A1 AM 0,5 8
PL A1 AM W
0.02” 0.31”
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 21-22
PL A1 RM [mm (in)]
PL A1 RM W
PLN 978
8 0.5 0.5 8
0.31” 0.02” 0.02” 0.31”
11-12
PLN A1 RAG 21-22
[mm (in)]
Manual reload and Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt General characteristics
magnetic release protection per The PLN limit switches were initially made specifically for
pkg hoisting or lifting duty and then used in other diverse
IEC n° [kg] applications. The type with latch and manual release as
Top push rod plunger. well as the one with manual reload and magnetic release
are designed so the switch remains opened after the
9 PL A1 AM 1NC IP40 1 0.245 switching of the NC contact. In the first instance, the
PL A1 AM W 1NC IP65 1 0.250 contact closing is made by pushing the release button. In
Top roller push plunger. the second case, the reloading is obtained by pushing the
shaft end or else pulling it from the top for the IP65
PL A1 RM 1NC IP40 1 0.250 types.
PL A1 RM W 1NC IP65 1 0.260 The limit switches with dual operation can be replaced by
two standard switches, for the stop control of moving
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to mechanisms with two directions of running (e.g.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
automatic doors). It is equipped with two opposed
PL A1 AM operating mechanisms and one NC contact for each
mechanism (i.e. 2NC).
The simple constructive design, oversize contacts and
careful material combinations warrant safe and constant
operation. The metal-alloy housing and the thermoplastic
mechanism material of first-rate mechanical features
assure reliability and durability with any type of operating
condition.
– IEC utilisation category:
• DC13 duty: 10A 24V
• AC15 duty: 5A 250V, 3A 400V
PL A1 RM W – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– IEC rated insulation voltage: 400VAC
Bi-directional Order code Contacts Degree of Qty Wt – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG/SC quick fuse
protection per – Housing cable entry: PG11 (PL...W and PLN 978 types
pkg only complete with cable gland)
IEC n° [kg] – Cable connection: screw terminal with clamp suitable
for cables up to 2.5mm2/AWG 14
Rod plunger. – Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/22.1lbin
PLN 978 2NC IP65 1 0.265 – Ambient conditions:
independent • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to • Pollution degree: 3
IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see table
indications).

Certifications obtained: IMQ, EAC.
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1.
PLN 978

9-22 page 9-31 page 9-35
Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping
Dimensions to EN 50047 Order code Contacts Ring Qty Wt Type Forward travel of snap action contacts open
material per Return travel of snap action contacts closed
pkg
n° [kg]
Without reset button. RS1 13... 21-22
13-14
RS1 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.090 21-22
13-14
Snap action
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
RS2 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.090
Slow action RS2 13... 21-22
13-14
RS3 13 10 2NO Steel 1 0.090 0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
Slow action
RS3 13... 21-22
11-12
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
TS1 13... 21-22

13-14
21-22
13-14
RS1 13 10 0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
RS2 13 10 TL1 13... 21-22
RS3 13 10 13-14
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
Dimensions to EN 50041 Order code Contacts Ring Qty Wt

material per
pkg The RS and T series limit switches are designed and 9
manufactured according to European standards for
n° [kg] dimensions and operating characteristics.
Without reset button. The double-insulated housing of the limit switch is made
TS1 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.117 of glass-reinforced self-extinguishing polyamide resin to
Snap action protect internal circuits against shocks or impacts and in
industrial environments, against accidental ingress of
TL1 13 10 1NO+1NC Steel 1 0.117 tools and accidental contact.
Slow action The contacts are dimensioned to ensure self cleaning of
the silver-alloy contact surfaces.
– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h for RS...13 10;
1200 cycles/h for T...13 10
– IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V
• AC15 duty: 6A 250V
TS1 13 - TL1 10 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
– Operating force: 25N/5.6lb
– Cable entry: PG11 for RS...13 10;
PG13.5 for T...13 10
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 for RS...13 10;
IP66 for T...13 10.

Limit switches.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 81-1, EN 50041,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 9-27 page 9-32 page 9-35 9-23
Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping
Order code Contacts Degree Operating Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
of force per closed
protection pkg 1,5 11
PLN U1 AT... 0.06” 0.43”
IEC [N] / [lb] n° [kg]
13-14
Without reset button 21-22
PLN U1 AT 1NO+1NC IP40 10 / 2.2 1 0.240 6 [mm (in)]
PLN U1 AT W IP65 10 / 2.2 1 0.240
0.24”
P2L 8...
PLN U1 AT25 1NO+1NC IP40 25 / 5.6 1 0.240 11-12
PLN U1 AT25 W IP65 25 / 5.6 1 0.240 21-22

0 [mm (in)] 10
0.39”
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. P2L 10... 31-32
41-42
13-14
23-24
PLN...AT...W
0 [mm (in)] 10
0.39”
Order code Contacts Degree Operating Qty Wt The PLN and P2L types are limit switches for general
of force per use.
protection pkg The simple constructive design, oversize contacts and
IEC [N] / [lb] n° [kg] careful material combinations warrant safe and constant
Without reset button. operation. The metal-alloy housing and the thermoplastic
mechanism material of first-rate mechanical features
9 P2L8 13 11 1NO+1NC IP65 40 / 9 1 0.459 assure reliability and durability with any type of operating
P2L8 13 12 IP65 120 / 27 1 0.459 condition.
P2L10 13 11 2NO+2NC IP65 40 / 9 1 0.459
P2L10 13 12 IP65 120 / 27 1 0.459 – Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. – IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 10A 24V
• AC15 duty: 5A 250V; 3A 400V
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 10A for PLN
types; 6A for P2L types
P2L... – Cable entry: PG11 (PLN...W and P2L types only
complete with cable gland)
suitable for cables up to 2.5mm2/AWG 14
– Tightening torque for switch fixing: 2.5Nm/2.21 lbin
• IEC degree of protection: IP40 / IP65 (see order code
table indications).

Certifications obtained: IMQ.
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 81-1.

9-24 page 9-32 page 9-35
Rope-pull lever limit switches for emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant.
Order code Contacts Force Qty Wt Type Travel [mm (in)] open
per closed
pkg
[N]/[lb] n° [kg] RS... 11-12
T... 21-22
With reset button.
0 [mm (in)] 6 (0.24”)
RS13 13 10 1NO + 1NC 25/5.6 1 0.092
TL13 13 10 1NO + 1NC 25/5.6 1 0.125 PLN... 11-12
21-22
PLN13 13 11 1NO + 1NC 60/13.5 1 0.248
0 [mm (in)] 8 (0.31”)
P2L13 13 11 1NO + 1NC 40/9 1 0.459
P2L13 13 12 1NO + 1NC 120/27 1 0.459 P2L13... 11-12
21-22
P2L15 13 11 2NO + 2NC 40/9 1 0.459
0 [mm (in)] 10 (0.39”)
P2L15 13 12 2NO + 2NC 120/27 1 0.459
P2L15... 31-32
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to IEC/EN
41-42
60947-5-1.
13-14
Dimensions according with EN50047.
Dimensions according with EN50041. 23-24
0 [mm (in)] 10 (0.39”)
RS13 13 10 TL13 13 10 Example of wiring diagram
MOTOR ROPE General characteristics
M The rope-operated switches for emergency stop are
N
3 mainly suitable for emergency stop or alarm systems for
machinery which occupies a large space. This emergency
CONTACT
stop can be achieved from any point when the rope is
manually pulled each time.
9
ELEMENT
The choice of the body, between plastic and metal, can
START satisfy the most diversified requirements for sturdiness
and size.
ROPE LEVER
STOP SWITCH
R
S – Maximum operating rate: 1800 cycles/h
T – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles
– IEC utilisation category
• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V (10A 24V only for PLN-P2L)
PLN 13 13 11 • AC15 duty: 6A 250V (3A 400V only for PLN-P2L)
– IEC conventional thermal current Ith:
10A for RS, TL and PLN; 6A for P2L
250VAC (400V for PLN-P2L)
– Cable entry: PG11 for RS, PLN and P2L types (PLN
and P2L complete with cable gland); PG13.5 for TL13
only
P2L... • Pollution degree: 3
• IEC degree of protection: IP65 (T type: IP66).
Accessories and Order code Description Qty Wt
per Operation
spare parts pkg
n° [kg]
Accessories.
Normal operation Rope Rope
P33032 P33033 P33032 Rope terminal clamp, Ø5mm 10 0.023 position traction breaking
P33033 Rope eye, Ø5mm 10 0.007
P33034 Turnbuckle M6x60 10 0.061 Certification and compliance
P33035 Eye bolt M8 10 0.030 Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
P33036 Steel rope, Ø5mm 100[m] 4.900 Limit swtches for RS13 and TL13 types only.
P33034
The P33036 rope is sold in 100m/109.4yd roll; Ø5mm = Ø0.2”. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, ISO 13850; also
UL508, CSA-C22.2 n° 14 for RS and TL types.
P33035
P33036

page 9-27 page 9-32 page 9-35 9-25
Plastic micro switches, K series.
Accessories
Order code Contacts Terminals Qty per Wt Operational characteristics

pkg – Maximum operating rate: 240 cycles/min
n° [kg] – Switching speed: 0.01...1m/s
– Operating speed: 0.05...1m/s
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. Pin. – Electrical life: 500,000 cycles
KS A1 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.031 – Mechanical life: 20 million cycles
KS A1 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.031 – IEC conventional thermal current Ith: 15A
KS A1 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.032 A600 P300
KS A1... KS A2... TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. High rod plunger. – conductivity: 10mA 5V
KS A2 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.033 – IEC rating: AC15 240VAC 3A
KS A2 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.033 – Contact resistance: <15mΩ
KS A2 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.034 – Body housing: polymer thermoplastic
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. Low rod plunger. – Operating force:
• KS A1-KS A4 and KS B types: 2.5N/9oz
KS A3 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.033 • KS A9 and KS C3 types: 1.5N/5.4oz
KS A3 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.033 • KS C1 types: 1N/3.6oz
KS A3 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.035 • KS C2 and KS L2: 1.3N/4.7oz
KS A3... KS A4... • KS C9 types: 1.7N/6.1oz
TOP PUSH ROD - METAL PLUNGER. M12 fixing head. • KS L1 types: 6.4N/23oz
KS A4 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.052 • KS L3 types: 0.1N/0.36oz
KS A4 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.052 – Tightening torque:
• For M12 head fixing: 4.9...6.9Nm/3.6...5.1lbft
KS A4 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.053 • For side screws: 0.6...1Nm/0.44...0.74lbft
PUSH BUTTON. • For terminal screws: 0.7...1Nm/0.52...0.74lbft
9 KS A9 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.034 – Ambient conditions:
• Operating termperature: -25...+70°C
KS A9 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.034 • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
KS A9 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.035 • Pollution degree: 3
TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. M12 fixing head. • IEC degree of protection: IP00 or IP20 with terminal
KS A9... KS B1... shroud.
KS B1 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.057
KS B1 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.057 Certifications and compliance
KS B1 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.058 Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
Canada (File E172189) as Industrial Control
TOP ROLLER PUSH PLUNGER. M12 fixing head, 90° roller. Switches - Component; products having this type of
KS B2 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.057 marking are intended for use as components of complete
KS B2 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.057 workshop - assembled equipment.
Compliance with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
KS B2 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.060 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1, UL508,
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 26.6mm/1.05” long lever. CSA C22.2 n° 14.
KS B2... KS C1... KS C1 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.036
KS C1 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.036
KS C1 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.037
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 48.5mm/1.91” long lever.
KS C2 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.037
KS C2... KS C3... ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. 38mm/1.5” long lever.
ROLLER CENTRE PUSH LEVER. One-way roller lever.
KS C9... KS L1... METAL LEVER. 63mm/2.48” long flat lever.
KS L1 S 1NO/NC Solder 10 0.035
KS L1 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.035
KS L1 F 1NO/NC Faston 10 0.037
METAL LEVER. 54mm/2.13” long flat lever.
KS L2... KS L3... KS L2 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.035
METAL LEVER. 168.3mm/6.63” long flat cylindrical lever.
KS L3 V 1NO/NC Screw 10 0.037
ACCESSORIES.
KSS C01 Terminal shroud 10 0.007
KSS C01 KSS CB2 KSS CB2 Terminal shroud with conduit 10 0.015
Suitable only for KS...V.

9-26 page 9-33 page 9-35
Foot switches, K series.
Accessories
Order code Model Contacts Qty Wt General characteristics

Plastic Metal per The KG and KR foot switches are used to control machinery
body body pkg and other equipment, leaving the operator’s hands free to do
n° [kg] other functions. The sturdiness of the metal and plastic body
ONE PEDAL FOOT SWITCHES. With free actuation. and the wide range of the available versions provide the
proper solution for each control need.
KG1 00 S11 KR1 00 S11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 Main features are:
Snap action – Thermoplastic or metal version
KG1 00 L11 KR1 00 L11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 The plastic or metal body gives adequate robustness to
Slow action the foot switch, for installation in all ambient and
KG2 00 S11 KR2 00 S11 With 1NO+1NC 1 application conditions.
KG2 00 ... KR2 00 ... – Versions complete with or without pedal protection cover
KG2 20 ... cover Snap action
The cover assures protection against accidental foot
KG2 00 L11 KR2 00 L11 With 1NO+1NC 1 switch operation, due to sudden tool or heavy material
cover Slow action dropping or other shock or vibration. The type without
With safety lever. cover, open version, is instead immediately accessible
KG1 10 S11 KR1 10 S11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 and is preferred when the most important pedal operation
Snap action is to stop a machine.
– Versions with safety lever
KG1 10 L11 KR1 10 L11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 The safety mechanism prevents unintentional foot switch
Slow action activation and excludes the pedal pressing if the
KG2 10 S11 KR2 10 S11 With 1NO+1NC 1 operator’s foot is not completely in place.
cover Snap action – Stable pedal base
KG1 10 ... KR2 10 ... KG2 10 L11 KR2 10 L11 With 1NO+1NC 1 The foot switch is equipped with rubber feet and metal-
KR2 11 ... cover Slow action reinforced base for a firm and non-sliding position and a
more reliable and safe activation.
KG2 10 S22 KR2 10 S22 With 2NO+2NC 1 9
cover Snap action Operational characteristics
With pedal actuator lock. – Mechanical life: >10 million cycles
KG1 20 S11 KR1 20 S11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 – Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Snap action – Designation to IEC/EN 60947-5-1:
• A600 Q600 for KG types
KG1 20 L11 KR1 20 L11 Open 1NO+1NC 1 • A300 Q300 for KR types
Slow action – Tightening torque for contacts: 1Nm/0.74lbft
KG2 20 S11 KR2 20 S11 With 1NO+1NC 1 – Rated insulation voltage Ui:
cover Snap action • 690VAC for KG types
KG2 20 L11 KR2 20 L11 With 1NO+1NC 1 • 440VAC for KR types
cover Slow action – Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:
• 6kV for KG types
With two-stage safety lever. • 4kV for KR types
KG2 11 S22 KR2 11 S22 With 2NO+2NC 1 – Class II insulation (KG types only)
cover 2-stage – Contact resistance: <10mΩ
KGD 003 - KGD 004 snap action – Short-circuit backup protection: 10A gG fuse
– Cable connection: self-releasing screw terminal
Order code Model Contacts Qty Wt – Housing:
Plastic Metal (for each per • KG types - Self-extinguishing double-insulation
body body pedal) pkg polymer thermoplastic
• KR types - Aluminium-zinc alloy
n° [kg] – Cable entry: M20
TWO PEDAL FOOT SWITCHES. With safety lever on both pedals. – Ambient conditions:
KGD 001 KRD 001 Both 1NO+1NC 1 • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C
w/cover Snap action • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C
KGD 002 KRD 002 Both 2NO+2NC 1 – IEC degree of protection:
w/cover Snap action
• IP20 for terminals
Left pedal with free actuation and right pedal with safety lever. • IP54 for body housing
KGD 003 KRD 003 Left open 1NO+1NC 1 • IP65 available on request (add the letter S at the end
Right Snap action of the order code. E.g. KG1 00 S11 S).
Direct (positive) opening action ; safety
function according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1. w/cover
Consult Customer Service for information; see Certifications and compliance
KGD 004 KRD 004 Left 1NO+1NC 1 Certifications obtained: EAC for foot switches and cURus
contact details on inside front cover.
open Snap action
A possible second contact block can be fitted; for contacts only (see page 9-16 for details).
blocks with only 2 contacts in total can be used. Right 2NO+2NC Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
See accessories below and contact blocks on w/cover Snap action IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 60447.
page 9-16.
Accessories Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

The cable glands are in plastic with either M20 or PG13.5
per
thread and provide to keep the cable in place and maintain
pkg the proper IP protection of the switch after installation.
n° [kg]
Operational characteristics for cable gland
Accessories. – Material: Self-extinguishing polyamide
KGX 01 Kit of elements to activate 10 0.039 – IEC degree of protection: IP68
2° contact block – Gland seal with cable diameter:
6...12mm/0.24”...0.47”.
KGX 02 Contact block mounting 10 0.022
bracket Certifications and compliance
KX P... KX P03 Certifications obtained: EAC.
Cable glands and cable conduit. Compliant with standards: EN 50262, UL508.
A possible second contact block can be fitted on KX P01 M20 cable gland 50 0.009
the left-hand pedal; blocks with only 2 contacts in KX P02 PG13.5 cable gland 50 0.009
total can be used. See accessories below and
contact blocks on page 9-16. KX P03 M20 rubber cable conduit 50 0.004
Dimensions
page 9-34 9-27
LIMIT SWITCHES K SERIES

KB A1... KC A1 KB B1... - KB B2... KC B1... - KC B2...
KM A1... KN A1 KM B1... - KM B2... KN B1... - KN B2...
12.5 Ø11 12.5
(0.49") (0.49") 12.5
(0.43 (0.49")
")
11.5
Ø8 (0.45") Ø11
(1.20")
30.5
(0.78")
(0.31") Ø8 (0.43")
(1.20")
20
30.5
(0.78")
(0.31")
20
Ø4.3 22 Ø4.3
(0.16") 22
(0.16") (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86") Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
Ø4.3 22 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
20 (20) 20
(0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
(0.78")
42 42 (1.65")
(40) 40(1.57")
M20 M20
30 30 50 (1.97") 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 (1.18")
(1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36")
KB C1... - KB C2... KC C1... - KC C2... KB D1... - KB D2... KC D1... - KC D2...

KM C1... - KM C2... KN C1... - KN C2... KM D1... - KM D2... KN D1... - KN D2...
12.5 12.5
(0.49") 12.5 (0.49")
(0.49") 12.5
Ø14
(0.55") Ø14 (0.49")
Ø14
(1.53")
41 (1.61")
(0.55")
(1.61")
(0.55”) Ø14
39
(1.30")
41
(0.55")
33
Ø4.3
(0.16")
Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
22 22
54.5 (2.14")
Ø4.3 22(0.86") Ø4.3 22(0.86")
(0.16")
44 (1.73")
44 (1.73")
(0.86") (0.86")
(0.16") 20 (0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
20 42 (1.65") 20
(0.78") (0.78") 42 (1.65")
9 30 30
40(1.57")
50 (1.97")
M20
30
30 30
40(1.57")
50 (1.97")
M20
30
60 (2.36") (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18")
(1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18")
KB E1... - KB E2... KC E1... - KC E2... KB E3... KC E3...

KM E1... - KM E2... KN E1... - KN E2... KM E3... KN E3...
42 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
69.5 (2.73")
69.5 (2.73")
54 (2.12")
54 (2.12")
Ø19
(0.74") Ø19
(0.74") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
Ø4.3 22 Ø4.3 22
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
22(0.86") (0.16") Ø4.3 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
(0.16") Ø4.3
44 (1.73")
(0.86")
20 (0.16") 20 (0.78") (0.16") 20 (0.78")
(0.78") 20
42 (1.65") (0.78") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 30 30
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 60 (2.36") (1.18")
(1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
KB F1... - KB F2... KC F1... - KC F2... KB F3... KC F3...

KM F1... - KM F2... KN F1... - KN F2... KM F3... KN F3...
42.5 (1.67")
42.5 (1.67")
40 (1.57")
40 (1.57")
81...125 (3.19"...4.92")
68...111 (2.67"...4.37")
66...110 (2.60"...4.33")
84...127 (3.30"... 5")
Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
22(0.86") 22(0.86")
20 (0.78") 20 (0.78")
Ø4.3 22
Ø4.3 (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.16") Ø4.3 (0.16") Ø4.3

44 (1.73")
44 (1.73")
22 (0.16") 20 (0.16")
(0.86") (0.78")
42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
20
(0.78") 40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
30 30 50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
(1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") (1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18")
60 (2.36")
KB F4... KC F4... KB H1... KC H1...

KM F4... KN F4... KM H1... KN H1...
51.5...66.5 (2.02"...2.61")
51.5...66.5 (2.02"...2.61")
Ø10
26
50 (1.97")
(0.39")
81...125 (3.19"...4.92")
(1.02")
50 (1.96")
84...127 (3.30"... 5")
Ø10
26
94 (3.7")
(0.39")
94 (3.70")
Ø50x10 (1.02")
(1.97"x0.39") Ø50x10
(1.97"x0.39")
22(0.86")
20 (0.78")
Ø4.3
22 (0.16") 22
Ø4.3 (0.86") (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.16") Ø4.3 Ø4.3 22(0.86")

44 (1.73")
20
44 (1.73")
(0.16") 20 (0.16")
(0.78") (0.78") 20 (0.78")
42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 (1.18")
(1.18") (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18")
9-28
LIMIT SWITCHES
KB L1... - KB L2... KC L1... - KC L2... KB M1... - KB M2... KC M1... - KC M2...
KM L1... - KM L2... KN L1... - KN L2... KM M1... - KM M2... KN M1... - KN M2...
33.6
(1.32") 33.6
(1.32")
32-208 (1.26"-8.19")
Ø3
(0.12") Ø3
140 (5.51")
(0.12")
32-208 (1.26"-8.19")
140 (5.51")
Ø6
(0.24")
200 (7.87”)
Ø6
200 (7.87”)
(0.23")
22
Ø4.3 22 Ø4.3
54.5 (2.14")
54.5 (2.14")
22(0.86") (0.86") Ø4.3
(0.16") (0.86") Ø4.3 (0.16") 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
44 (1.73")
(0.16") 20 (0.78") 20 (0.16") 20 (0.78")
20 (0.78")
(0.78") 42 (1.65") 42 (1.65")
40(1.57") 40(1.57")
M20 M20
50 (1.97") 30 30 30 50 (1.97") 30
30 30 (1.18") (1.18")
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36")
(1.18")
KB P1... KB P2... KB P3... KC P1... KC P2... KC P3...

KM P1... KM P2... KM P3... KN P1... KN P2... KN P3...
Ø12 (0.47”) Ext.
Ø12 (0.47”) Ext.

Ø8 (0.31”) Int.
Ø8 (0.31”) Int.
9
Ø8 (0.31")
Ø6.9 (0.27")
Ø8 (0.31")
Ø8 (0.31")
(0.27")
(0.31")
20 (0.79")
Ø6.9
Ø8
Ø3.3 (0.13")
(0.78")
Ø3.3 (0.13")
20
31 (1.22")
8.5 31 (1.22")
121 (4.76") 69 (2.71") 8.5
22 (0.33") (0.33”) 121 (4.76") 69 (2.71")
Ø4.3 22
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86") Ø4.3
44 (1.73")
(0.16") 23.1 (20) 23.1
(0.16")
20 (0.91") (0.90")
(0.78") 42
(40)
M20 M20 M20
30 30 50 (1.97") 30 30 30
30 30 M20 (1.18") M20 (1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
(1.18") M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36")
KB Q1 L... KC Q1 L... KB N1... - KB N2...

KM Q1 L... KN Q1 L... KM N1... - KM N2...
5.5 (0.22”)
5.5 (0.22”)
50.1 (1.97”)
50.1 (1.97”)
77 (3.03")
72.6 (2.86”)
72.6 (2.86”)
77 (3,03")
34 (1.34")
(1.52")
38,5
(0.79")
20
(0.78")
20
22 22
Ø4.3 Ø4.3 (0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.86")
54.5 (2.14")
(0.16") Ø4.3 22(0.86") (0.16") 20

44 (1.73")
20 (0.16")
(0.78") 20 (0.78") (0.78")
42 (1.65")
40(1.57")
M20
50 (1.97") 30 30
30 30 (1.18") 30
M20 (1.18") 60 (2.36") (1.18") M20 (1.18")
(1.18")
Keys
KC N... KX N1 KX N2 KX N3 KX N4 KX N5
15 (0.59")
30 (1.18") 30 (1.18")
14 (0.55") 14 (0.55") 22 5x4.2 22 30 (1.18")
5x4.2 )
38.5 (1.51")
(0.87")
(0.37")
(0.87")
(0.37")
(0.2x0.18") (0.2x0.18")
9.5
(1.22")
9.5
43 (1.69")
(1.33")
30.9
34
9x4.6 9x4.6
13 (0.51")
7 (0.28")
17 (0.67")
(0.35x0.18") (0.35x0.18")
11 (0.43")
Ø4.3 22(0.86")
44 (1.73")
(0.16")
12.9 (0.51")
7.1 (0.28")
20 (0.78") Ø4.2
15 (0.59")
42 (1.65") (0.18")
12.9 (0.51")
40(1.57")
M20
50 (1.97") 30 5
60 (2.36") (1.18") (0.2")
Cable glands Cable conduit

KX P01 KX P02 KX P03
1.5 (0.06")
CH24 CH24
(0.22")
(0.35") (1.11")
5.6
(0.35") (1.11")
28.1
28.1
CH24
9
M20
(0.31")
PG13.5 M20
7.9
CH = Spanner/Wrench CH = Spanner/Wrench CH = Spanner/Wrench
9-29
PREWIRED METAL LIMIT SWITCHES, K SERIES

KP A1... KP A2... KP B1... - KP B2... KP B3... - KP B4... KP B5... - KP B6...
(0.47") M12x1
12
20 (0.79")
12
(0.47") (0.47")
M12x1
44.8 (1.76")
")
7")
")
")
7")
34 (1.34")
.17
.17
.17
.1
.1
(1.18")
(1.18")
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
30
30
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
20 20 20 20
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
20
40 (1.58")
(0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79")
30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63")

(1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
KP B7... - KP B8... KP E1... - KP E2... KP F1... KP L2... KP M2...
3 (0.12") 29
(1.14")
34,4
24 18 (0.71") (1.35") 4.5 (0.18")
122 (4.8")
max. 170 (6.69")
(0.94") 7.9 (0.31")
12
48-118 (1.89"-4.65")
M12x1 (0.47") 14 (0.55") 4.5 (0.18")
5.5 (0.22")
52 (2.05")
44.8 (1.76")
7")
")
")
")
")
.17
.17
.17
.17
.1
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
.3
.3
.3
.3
.3
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
Ø4
13.5 (0.49") 17.3 (0.68") 15.8
20 20 20 20
40 (1.58")
20
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
40 (1.58")
(0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79") (0.79")
9
30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63") 30 16 (0.63")
(1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18") (1.18")
PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES, T SERIES

TS1 01... - TL1 01... TS1 05 20 - TL1 05 20 TS1 05 24 - TL1 05 24
61 (2.40")
TS1 05 21 - TL1 05 21
58.5 (2.30")
16
(0.63") Ø50x10
Ø20x5 (1.97x0.39")
77 (3.03")
62 (2.44")
(0.78x0.19")
(1.36")
Rubber
34.5
Plastic
or metal
143 (5.63")
128 (5.03")
100.5 (3.95")
Ø5.3
31
60 (2.36")
30 (0.20") Ø5.3 Ø5.3

(1.22") 31 31
60 (2.36")
(1.18") 30 (0.20") 30 (0.20")

60 (2.36")
(1.18") (1.22") (1.22")

(1.18")
40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 PG13

(0.20x0.28") 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") PG13. 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 PG13.5
43 (1.69")
43 (1.69")
(0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28")
TS1 09... - TL1 09... TL2 10... Keys

P32752 P32753 A20746
16
12
(0.59")
(0.63") 13.5
(0.53") (0.47") 72
(0.78")
15
(2.83")
(0.78")
28.5
20
28.5 (1.12")
(1.10") 20
(1.10")
(1.12")
28
Ø6 (0.23") 28.5
6
Steel
28
(0.24") 15 (1.12")
5 5.5 (0.22") (0.59")
Ø4.5
5 (0.20") Ø4.5 (0.17")
195 (7.67")
(1.18")
(0.17")
30
(0.20") Ø4.5
(1.06")
27
(0.17")
107 (4.21")
A20747 A20748
Ø5.3
Ø5.3 (0.20")
(0.59")
60 (2.36")
31 30 31
60 (2.36")
30 (0.20")
15
(1.22") (1.18") (1.22") 35.5 26

(1.18") 43 (1.69") (1.02")
(1.40")
13
(0.51")
28.5
55 (2.16")
15 Ø4.5
(1.37")
40 (1.57") PG13.5 40 (1.57") PG13.5 (0.59") (0.17") (1.12")

35
5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69")

(0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28")
31.4 50
Ø4.2 (1.24") (1.97")
(0.16")
TS2 01... - TL2 01... TS2 05 20 - TL2 05 20 TS2 05 24 - TL2 05 24

TS2 05 21 - TL2 05 21 61 (2.40")
58.5 (2.3")
Ø20x5 Ø50x10
16 (0.78x0.19") (1.97x0.39")
77 (3.03")
62 (2.44")
(0.63") Plastic Rubber

(1.36")
or metal
34.5
143 (5.63")
128 (5.03")
100.5 (3.95")
Ø5.3 4.3 4.3

(0.17") Ø5.3 Ø5.3
(0.20") 31 0.17") 31
(0.20")
60 (2.36")
30 31 30 30 (0.20")
60 (2.36")
60 (2.36")
(1.18") (1.22") (1.18") (1.22") (1.18") (1.22")
40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") PG13.5 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 43 (1.69") PG13.5 40 (1.57") 5.3x7,3 PG13.5
43 (1.69")
(0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28") (0.20x0.28")
9-30
METAL LIMIT SWITCHES, PL SERIES

PLN...A PLN...AW PLN...R
20.5
(0.81”)
20.5 20.5
(0.81”) (0.81”)
(1.77”)
Ø20
45
(1.10”)
(1.10”) (0.79”)
28
28
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 PG11
PG11 Ø5.2
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
13.5
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”) (1.59”)

84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”)
PLN...RW PLN...H PLN...HW

20.5 20.5
20.5 (0.81”) (0.81”)
(0.81”)
Ø20
(2.05”)
(2.05”)
(1.77”)
52
Ø20 (0.79”)
52
45
(0.79”) Ø20
(0.79”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 9
PG11 Ø5.2 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 40.5 72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(1.59”)
13.5
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”)
84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”) 103.6 (4.08”)
PLN...HSB PLN...HSBW 35 - 50
PLN A1 RAG
35 - 50
(1.38” - 1.97”) (1.38” - 1-97”)
20.5 20.5
(0.81”) 20.5
(0.81”) (0.81”)
(2.34”)
(2.34”)
Ø35
59.5
59.5
(1.81”)
(1.38”) Ø20
46
(0.79”)
Ø35
(1.38”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11 PG11
Ø5.2 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”) (0.20”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 40.5
(0.53”)
72 (2.83”) 40.5 72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
13.5
(1.59”)
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”) 84 (3.31”) (1.59”)

103.6 (4.08”)
PLN A1 RAG W PLN A1 AM PL A1 AM W

20.5
(0.81”) 20.5
20.5 (0.81”)
(0.81”)
(1.18”)
(1.81”)
Ø20
30
46
(1.18”)
(0.79”)
30
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
46
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
35.5
35.5
46
46
PG11
PG11
Ø5.2
PG11 Ø5.2 (0.20”)
Ø5.2 40.5
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(0.20”) (0.20”)
13.5
40.5 40.5 (1.59”)

72 (2.83”) 72 (2.83”) 84 (3.31”)
(0.53”)
(0.53”)
(1.59”)
13.5
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”) 84 (3.31”) 103.6 (4.08”)

103.6 (4.08”)
PL A1 RM PL A1 RMW PLN 978

20.5 20.5
(0.81”) (0.81”)
20.5
(0.81”)
(1.81”)
(1.81”)
Ø20 Ø20
(1.30”)
46
46
(0.79”) (0.79”)
33
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(1.40”)
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
35.5
35.5
46
46
46
PG11
PG11 PG11
Ø5.2 Ø5.2
(1.30”)
Ø5.2
(0.20”) (0.20”)
33
(0.20”) 40.5 40.5

72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
72 (2.83”)
(0.53”)
(1.59”)
13.5
(1.59”)
13.5
84 (3.31”) 84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”) 72 (2.83”) 40.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”)
103.6 (4.08”)
9-31
ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES FOR NORMAL STOPPING

RS1 13... - RS3 13... TS1 13... - TL1 13... PLN...AT
16
15 (0.63")
(0.59") 20.5
(0.81”)
46.5 (1.83")
Ø20
49 (1.93")
Ø20 (0.78")
(1.30”)
(0.78")
33
Ø20
(0.78")
5.3x7,3
Ø4.3 (0.20x0.28")
31
60 (2.36")
30
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(0.16") 22 30
35.5
55 (2.16")
(1.22")
46
(0.86") (1.18") (1.18")
20 PG11
(0.78")
Ø5.2
Ø5.3 (0.20”) 40.5
30.5 40 72 (2.83”)
0.53”)
35 (0.20") 43 (1.59”)
13.5
(1.20") PG11 (1.37") (1.57") PG13.5 84 (3.31”)
(1.69")
PLN...ATW P2L...
20.4
(0.80”)
Ø27
(1.06”)
(2.39”)
60.8
Ø14.5
20.5 (0.57”)
(0.81”)
Ø20
(1.30”)
(0.78")
33
(1.42”)
36
9
(3.19”)
Ø5.2 81
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
35.5
(0.20”)
46
PG11
Ø5.2
(0.77”)
19.5
(0.20”) PG11
72 (2.83”) 40.5
(0.53”)
13.5
84 (3.31”) (1.59”)
72 (2.83”) 48.5
103.6 (4.08”) (1.91”)
84.5 (3.33”)
100.1 (3.94”)
ROPE-PULL SAFETY LIMIT SWITCHES, ISO 13850 COMPLIANT

RS13 13 10 TL13 13 10 PLN13 13 11
16 20.5
15 (0.63") (0.81”)
(0.59")
Ø27
46.5 (1.83")
Ø20 (1.06”)
49 (1.93")
Ø20 (0.78")
(1.75”)
Ø14.5
44.5
(0.79") (0.57”)
5.3x7,3
Ø4.3 (0.20x0.28")
30 31
60 (2.36")
30
(1.40”)
(1.81”)
(0.16") 22 (1.22")
35.5
(1.18")
55 (2.16")
(0.86") (1.18") 46
20
(0.78")
Ø5.2
(0.20”)
Ø5.3
30.5 35 40 43 72 (2.83”) PG11 40.5
(0.53”)
(0.20")
13.5
(1.20") PG11 (1.37") (1.57") PG13.5 (1.69") (1.59”)

84 (3.31”)
103.6 (4.08”)
P2L 13... - P2L 15...

20.5
(0.81”)
Ø27
(1.06”)
(2.62”)
66.5
Ø14.5
(0.57”)
(1.42”)
36
(3.19”)
81
Ø5.2
(0.20”)
(0.77”)
19.5
PG11
72 (2.83”) 48.5
(1.91”)
84.5 (3.33”)
100.1 (3.94”)
9-32
MICRO SWITCHES, K SERIES

KS A1... KS A2... KS A3...
23.3 12.3 (0.40")

Ø2.3 (0.09") 23.4 Ø5.2 (0.2") 23.3 10 (0.39")
(0.51”)
(0.92") Ø4 (0.16")
(0.92") (0.92")
(0.51”)
Ø7.15 (0.28")
(0.51”)
(0.65")
13
16.4
(1.83")
(0.87")
13
27.8
13
(1.83")
22
27.5
(1.83")
(1.83")
27.5
27.5
Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 Ø4.4 Ø4.4
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
KS A4... KS A9...
23.3 M12x1
(0.92") Ø8.3 (0.33")
(0.51”)
(1.52")
(0.51”)
38.6
13
13
(0.79")
(1.83")
20.2
27.5
(1.3")
33
Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 Ø4.4
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
KS B1... KS B2...
23.3 23.3
(0.92")
M12x1
Ø12.5x3.8
(0.92") M12x1
Ø12.5x3.8
9
(0.49"x0.15")
(0.51”)
(0.49"x0.15")
(1.98")
(0.51”)
(1.98")
50.2
50.2
13
13
(1.83")
(1.83")
27.5
27.5
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
KS C1... KS C2... KS C3... KS C9...

.5 26.2
R481.91") Ø9.5x4 .5")
26.2
Ø9.5x4 26.2
(R 26.2 (R1 Ø9.5x4 (1.03") Ø9.5x4
(1.03")
(0.37"x0.16) (1.03") (0.37"x0.16)
(1.03") R38 (0.37"x0.16) R31.9 (0.37"x0.16)
R26.1 (R1.2")
(0.51”)
(0.51”)
(R1.05")
(0.51”)
(1.73")
(0.51”)
(1.47")
(1.47")
37.3
37.3
44
(1.33")
(0.79")
13
(0.79")
13
33.7
20.2
20.2
13
(0.79")
13
(0.79")
(1.3")
20.2
20.2
(1.3")
(1.3")
33
(1.3")
33
33
33
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
Ø4.4 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") Ø4.4
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") 17.5
17.5 49.2 (1.94") (0.69") (0.17")
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") (0.69")
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94")
KS L1... KS L2... KS L3...

17 (0.67")
")
2.5 ")
.5 (
R .13
R63 (R2 168.3 (6.63")
26.2 26.2 R54 26.2
(1.03") (1.03") (1.03")
(0.51”)
(0.51”)
(0.51”)
4.9 (0.19") 4.9 (0.19") 0.96

(1.14")
(1.14")
(1.3")
33
29
13
29
(0.79")
(0.79")
(0.79")
13
13
20.2
20.2
20.2
(1.3")
(1.3")
33
33
(0.63")
Ø4.4 Ø4.4
16
25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") (0.17") 17.5 25.4 (1") 17.5
49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69") 49.2 (1.94") (0.69")
TERMINAL SHROUD
KSS C01 KSS CB2
(0.20")
54 (2.12")
(1.06")
5
27
(1.54")
4.3 (0.17") 21
39.2
(0.83")
25
(0.98")
53 (2.09") 22
(0.79")
20
26 8 68 (2.68") (0.87")
(1.02") (0.31")
9-33
FOOT SWITCHES, K SERIES

KG1
264 (10.40") 150 (5.90")
M20
(3.38")
86
(1.34")
34
KG2
286.6 (11.28") 150 (5.90")
164 (6.46")
M20
(3.38")
86
(1.34")
9
34
KR1
238.7 (9.40") 140 (5.51")
M20
(2.24")
57
(0.98")
25
KR2
250 (9.84") 140 (5.51")
120 (4.72")
M20
(2.95")
75
(0.98")
25
KGD
516.5 (20.33")
286.6 (11.28") 301.2 (11.86")

516.5 (20.33")
166.5 (6.55")
M20
(3.48")
88.5
(1.44")
36.5
286.6 (11.28") 301.2 (11.86")
9-34
Wiring diagrams
LIMIT SWITCHES, KB - KM - KC - KN TYPE

K...S11 K...L11 K...L02 K...S02 K...L20 K...A11 K...L03 K...L12 K...L21
K...D02
Snap action Slow action Slow action Snap action Slow action Slow action Slow action Slow action Slow action
13 21 13 21 11 21 11 21 13 23 17 25 11 21 31 13 21 31 13 23 31
14 22 14 22 12 22 12 22 14 24 18 26 12 22 32 14 22 32 14 24 32
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 2NC 2NC 2NO 1NO + 1NC 3NC 1NO + 2NC 2NO + 1NC
make before break
LIMIT SWITCHES, KP TYPE LIMIT SWITCHES, T TYPE LIMIT SWITCHES, PL TYPE

KP...S11 KP...L11 TS... TL... PLN A1... PLN A2... PLN C1... PLN C2.... PLN U1...
Snap action Slow action Snap action Slow action PLN 978
13 21 13 21 13 21 13 21 11 11 21 13 13 23 13 21
giallo/verde
giallo/verde
marrone
marrone
nero
nero
nero
nero
blu
blu
14 22 14 22 12 12 22 14 14 24 14 22
14 22 14 22
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NC 2NC 1NO 2NO 1NO + 1NC
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 9
LIMIT SWITCHES FOR NORMAL STOPPING

RS1... RS2... RS3... PLN U1AT... PLN U1... P2L8... P2L10...
TS1... TL1...
Snap action Slow action Slow action
13 21 13 21 13 23 13 21 13 21 11 21 13 23 31 41
14 22 14 22 14 24 14 22 14 22 12 22 14 24 32 42
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC 2NO 2NO + 2NC
LIMIT SWITCHES FOR EMERGENCY STOPPING MICRO SWITCHES, KS TYPE

RS13... PLN13... P2L13... P2L15... KS...
TL13...
NF NO
2 3
13 14 11 12 31 32 13 23 31 41
1
21 22 21 22 41 42 14 24 32 42 COM
9-35
Page 10-2 Page 10-12
GX SERIES GN SERIES
• IEC conventional free air thermal current • IEC conventional free air thermal current
Ith 16A...40A ratings Ith 16A...125A ratings
• Square-shaped contact body • Round-shaped contact body
• IEC IP20 degree of protection of contacts • IEC IP00 degree of protection of contacts
• IEC IP65 degree of protection on front, • IEC IP40 degree of protection on front,
standard supplied. standard supplied.
ROTARY CAM SWITCHES 10
Suitable for circuit connection,

changeover, switching on and off as
well as motor starting
Possible special circuit schemes
IEC IP40 or IP65 front degree of
protection
2-screw fixing
Wide range of features.
SEC. - PAGE PAGE

SERIES GX GN
Front mount versions
On/Off switches. U version, front mount .................................................................................................................. 10 - 2 12
Changeover switches with or without O (OFF). U version, front mount ..................................................................... 10 - 3 13
Motor switches. U version, front mount .................................................................................................................. 10 - 4 14
Voltemeter switches. Ammeter switches. U version, front mount ............................................................................. 10 - 5 15
On/Off switches. U11 version, front ring mount with handle operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing .............................. 10 - 6 16
On/Off switches. U12 version, front ring mount with key operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing ................................... 10 - 6 16
On/Off safety switches. U25-U65 version, front mount with red/yellow padlockable handle ...................................... 10 - 6 16
On/Off switches. U47 version, front snap on mount with handle operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing ........................ 10 - 7 ––
On/Off switches. U29D version, front snap on mount with key operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing .......................... 10 - 7 ––
Rear mount versions
On/Off switches. O88-O98-O99 version, door coupling with red/yellow padlock system ........................................... 10 - 8 17
On/Off switches. Changeover switches. Voltmeter switches.
Ammeter switches. O48 version, modular DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mount ............................................................... 10 - 9 ––
Versions in enclosure
On/Off switches. Changeover switches. P version ................................................................................................... 10 - 10 18
Motor switches. P version with rotating handle ....................................................................................................... 10 - 10 18
On/Off switches. P25 version with padlockable handle ............................................................................................. 10 - 10 18
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 10
- 11 19
Special circuit scheme form .............................................................................................................................. 10 - 20 20
Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 10 - 22 23
Wiring diagrams .................................................................................................... 10 - 25 25
S IGNALLING
Technical characteristics ......................................................................................... 10 - 26 26

AND
C ONTROL
Rotary cam switches
GX series
U version Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics

front mount. code current plate per – IEC 16...40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
AC1 size pkg ratings
ON/OFF switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
– Extended mechanical and electrical life
ON/OFF SWITCHES. – Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
GX16 90 U 16 48 1 0.096 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
0
GX20 90 U 1
20 48 1 0.096 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
– IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20
GX32 90 U 32 65 1 0.192 protection of contacts
GX40 90 U 40 65 1 0.194 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91. the order code table; any other on request.
GX16 91 U 16 48 1 0.100 Selection guide
0
GX20 91 U 1
20 48 1 0.100 See page 10-26.
GX32 91 U 32 65 1 0.204
Optional
GX40 91 U 40 65 1 0.206 Enlarged front plate for GX16-GX20 (65x65mm instead
Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. of standard 48x48):
GX16 10 U 16 48 1 0.115 Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
0 E.g. GX16H 10 U.
GX20 10 U 1
20 48 1 0.115
GX40 10 U 40 65 1 0.244 of standard 65x65):
Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92. E.g. GX32H 10 U.
GX16 92 U 16 48 1 0.118
0
GX20 92 U 1
20 48 1 0.122 Special versions
10 GX32 92 U 32 65 1 0.252
In addition to standard types, particular versions are
available with special operating circuit schemes.
GX40 92 U 40 65 1 0.254 See page 10-20.
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9” Example of U version switch mounting
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
Type UL/CSA UL/CSA horsepower ratings Max IEC AC23

general 1 phase 3 phases power [kW]
use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3 4 / 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.

10-2 page 10-11 page 10-22 page 10-25 pages 10-26 and 27
Rotary cam switches
GX series

front mount. code current plate per – IEC 16...40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
Changeover switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
with 0 position. CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITH 0.
– Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
Changeover switches One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 51. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
without 0 position GX16 51 U
0
16 48 1 0.098 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
GX20 51 U
1 2
GX32 51 U 32 65 1 0.210 protection of contacts
GX40 51 U 40 65 1 0.212 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
Two-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 52. the order code table; any other on request.
GX16 52 U 16 48 1 0.120 Selection guide
1 0
2
GX20 52 U 20 48 1 0.120 See page 10-26.
GX32 52 U 32 65 1 0.270
Optional
Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 53. of standard 48x48):
GX16 53 U 16 48 1 0.148 Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
1 0 E.g. GX16H 52 U.
GX20 53 U 2
20 48 1 0.148
GX40 53 U 40 65 1 0.326 of standard 65x65):
Four-pole – 4 wafers – scheme 75. E.g. GX32H 52 U.
GX16 75 U 16 48 1 0.164
0
GX20 75 U
1 2
20 48 1 0.172 Special versions
GX32 75 U 32 65 1 0.378
In addition to standard types, particular versions are 10
GX40 75 U 40 65 1 0.380 See page 10-20.
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITHOUT 0.
One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 54. Example of U version switch mounting
GX16 54 U 2 16 48 1 0.098
GX20 54 U 1 20 48 1 0.098
GX32 54 U 32 65 1 0.212
Two-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 55.
GX16 55 U 2 16 48 1 0.124
GX20 55 U 1 20 48 1 0.124
GX32 55 U 32 65 1 0.266
Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 56.
GX16 56 U 2 16 48 1 0.148
GX20 56 U 1 20 48 1 0.148
GX32 56 U 32 65 1 0.318
Four-pole – 4 wafers – scheme 69.
GX16 69 U 2 16 48 1 0.164 Certifications and compliance
GX20 69 U 1 20 48 1 0.172 Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
GX32 69 U 32 65 1 0.380 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
Front plate size: IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1,
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9” UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3 4 / 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

page 10-11 page 10-22 page 10-25 pages 10-26 and 27 10-3
Rotary cam switches
GX series
U version Order Ith IEC Front Qty Wt. General characteristics

front mount. code AC1 power plate per – IEC 16...40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
IEC AC23A size pkg ratings
Motor switches [A] [kW] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
MOTOR SWITCHES. – Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
Reversing switches. Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 11. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
GX16 11 U 16 5 48 1 0.138 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
0
GX20 11 U
1 2
20 7.5 48 1 0.140 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
– IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
GX32 11 U 32 15 65 1 0.316 of protection of contacts
GX40 11 U 40 65 1
18.5 0.318 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
Pole-changing switches. 4 wafers – scheme 13. the order code table; any other on request.
GX16 13 U 16 5 48 1 0.166 Selection
1 0
2
GX20 13 U 20 7.5 48 1 0.168 See page 10-26.
GX32 13 U 32 15 65 1 0.400
Optional
GX40 13 U 40 18.5 65 1 0.400 Enlarged front plate for GX16-GX20 (65x65mm instead
Star-delta switches. 4 wafers – scheme 12. of standard 48x48): Add “H” after the switch rating in the
GX16 12 U 16 5 48 1 0.176 order code E.g. GX16H 11 U.
Y
0
GX20 12 U 20 7.5 48 1 0.176 Enlarged front plate for GX32-GX40 (90x90mm instead
GX32 12 U 32 15 65 1 0.384 of standard 65x65): Add “H” after the switch rating in the
GX40 12 U 40 18.5 65 1 0.386 order code E.g. GX32H 11 U.
3-pole motor reversing switches with spring return to 0. Special versions
3 wafers – scheme 26. In addition to standard types, particular versions are
GX16 26 U 1 0 2 16 5 48 1 0.148 available with special operating circuit schemes.
10 GX20 26 U 20 7.5 48 1 0.148 See page 10-20.
GX32 26 U 32 18.5 65 1 0.320 Example of U version switch mounting

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 /
3 4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 /
3 4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Valid for motor, voltmeter and ammeter switches:

Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

Rotary cam switches
GX Series

front mount. code current plate per – IEC 16A conventional free air thermal current Ith
Voltmeter switches. [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
Ammeter switches VOLTMETER SWITCHES.
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – 2 wafers – scheme 68. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
GX16 68 U 0
L1N 16 48 1 0.120 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
L2N according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
L3N – IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
of protection of contacts
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 – 2 wafers – scheme 67. – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
GX16 67 U 0 16 48 1 0.124 the order code table; any other on request.
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
Selection
See page 10-26.
For 3 phase to phase voltage and 3 phase voltage readings
3 wafers – scheme 66. Optional
Enlarged front plate for GX16-GX20 (65x65mm instead
GX16 66 U L1-L2
0
L1-N 16 48 1 0.152 of standard 48x48): Add “H” after the switch rating in the
L2-L3 L2-N order code E.g. GX16H 11 U.
L3-L1 L3-N

For 1 phase voltage and 3 phase to phase voltage readings of standard 65x65): Add “H” after the switch rating in the
3 wafers – scheme 60. order code E.g. GX32H 11 U.
GX16 60 U L1N
0
L1-L2 16 48 1 0.143
L2-L3 Special versions
L3-L1 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
AMMETER SWITCHES. See page 10-20. 10
Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings – 5 wafers – scheme 97.
GX16 97 U 0 16 48 1 0.186 Example of U version switch mounting
L3 L1
L2
For L1-L2-L3 readings via 3 CTs – 4 wafers – scheme 98.

GX16 98 U 0 16 48 1 0.144
L3 L1
L2

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3 4 / 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5 Certifications and compliance
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15 Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Valid for motor, voltmeter and ammeter switches:

Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

Rotary cam switches
GX Series
U11 version Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics

front ring mount code current plate per – IEC 16...40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
with handle operation, [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
ON/OFF switches One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
GX16 90 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.100 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
– IEC IP65 front degree of protection for U25 amd U65,
IEC IP40 for U11 and U12; IEC IP20 protection of
Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91. contacts
GX16 91 U11 0 16 –– 1 0.100 – Legend marking for U11 and U12 versions is only for
1
reference while for U25 and U65 types standard
supplied as illustrated in the order code table; any
other on request.
Selection
GX16 10 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.120 See page 10-26.
Optional
Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92. of standard 48x48):
GX16 92 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.123 Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
E.g. GX16H 10 U25.

of standard 65x65):
U12 version Order IEC Front Qty Weight Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
10 front ring mount code current plate per E.g. GX32H 10 U25.
AC1 size pkg
with key operation, [A] [mm] n° [kg]
Special versions
for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF SWITCHES. available with special operating circuit schemes.
ON/OFF switches One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. See page 10-20.
GX16 90 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.122
Example of U25-U65 switch mounting
Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91.

GX16 91 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.122

GX16 10 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.140

GX16 92 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.146
U25-U65 versions Order IEC Front Qty Weight UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
front mount with red/yellow code current plate per
AC1 size pkg Valid for U25-U65 versions:
padlockable handle. [A] [mm] n° [kg] Front plate size:
ON/OFF switches ON/OFF SWITCHES. 48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. 65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
GX16 10 U25 16 48 1 0.125
0
GX20 10 U25 1
20 48 1 0.125
GX32 10 U25 32 65 1 0.254
GX40 10 U65 40 65 1 0.254
GX16 92 U25 16 48 1 0.130
0
GX20 92 U25 1
20 48 1 0.130
GX32 92 U25 32 65 1 0.266
GX40 92 U65 40 65 1 0.266

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3 4 / 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

Rotary cam switches
GX series
U47 version Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics

front snap on mount code current plate per – IEC 20A conventional free air thermal current Ith
with handle operation, [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
ON/OFF switches One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
GX20 90 U47 0
1
20 48 1 0.100 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
protection of contacts.
GX20 91 U47 0 20 48 1 0.100 Selection
1
See page 10-26.
Optional
Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. Enlarged front plate for GX20 (65x65mm instead of
standard 48x48):
GX20 10 U47 0
1
20 48 1 0.120 Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
E.g. GX20H 10 U47.
Special versions
Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92. In addition to standard types, particular versions are
GX20 92 U47 0
1
20 48 1 0.123 available with special operating circuit schemes.
See page 10-20.
Example of U47 switch mounting
U29D version Order IEC Front Qty Weight

front snap on mount code current plate per 10
AC1 size pkg
with key operation, [A] [mm] n° [kg]
ON/OFF switches One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90.
GX20 90 U29D 0
1
20 48 1 0.122

GX20 91 U29D 0
1
20 48 1 0.122

Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
GX20 10 U29D 0 20 48 1 0.140 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
1
UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.

GX20 92 U29D 0
1
20 48 1 0.146

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5

Rotary cam switches
GX series
O88 - 098 versions Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics
rear mount code current plate per – IEC 16...40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
door coupling with [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
red/yellow padlock system. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
ON/OFF switches Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
GX16 10 O88 16 48 1 0.178 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
0
GX20 10 O88 1
– IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
GX32 10 O88 32 65 1 0.320 of protection of contacts
GX40 10 O98 40 65 1 0.320 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92. the order code table; any other on request.
GX16 92 O88 16 48 1 0.182 Selection
0
GX20 92 O88 1
20 48 1 0.182 See page 10-26.
GX32 92 O88 32 65 1 0.320
Optional
GX40 92 O98 40 65 1 0.330 Enlarged front plate for GX16-GX20 (65x65mm instead
of standard 48x48):
E.g. GX16H 10 O88.

of standard 65x65):
Type UL/CSA UL/CSA horsepower ratings Max IEC AC23 Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code
general power [kW] E.g. GX32H 10 O88.
1 phase 3 phases
use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V Special versions
10 GX16 12 3 4 / 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5 See page 10-20.
GX32 32 1/ 1 2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 Example of O version switch mounting

UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Valid for O88-O98 versions:

Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
60x60mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

Rotary cam switches
GX series
O48 version Order IEC Front Qty Weight General characteristics

modular service cover code current plate per – IEC 16A conventional free air thermal current Ith
35mm DIN rail mount. [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
ON/OFF switches. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Changeover switches. One-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 90. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
Voltmeter switches. GX16 90 O48 0
1
16 45x54 1 0.110 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
Ammeter switches – IEC IP40 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 degree
of protection of contacts
Two-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 91. – Suitable for screw fixing or mounting on 35mm DIN
GX16 91 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.110 rail (IEC/EN 60175)
1
– Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
the order code table; any other on request.
Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 10. Selection guide

GX16 10 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.118 See page 10-26.
1
Special versions
Four-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 92. available with special operating circuit schemes.
See page 10-20.
GX16 92 O48 0
1
16 45x54 1 0.125
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES WITH 0. Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers.
One-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 51. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
GX16 51 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.098 UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14. 10
Two-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 52.

GX16 52 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.122

GX16 53 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.150

GX16 75 O48 1 0
2 16 45x54 1 0.170
VOLTMETER SWITCHES.
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – 3 wafers – scheme 68.
GX16 68 O48 0
L1N 16 45x54 1 0.130
L2N
L3N
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 – 3 wafers – scheme 67.

GX16 67 O48 0
L1-L2 16 45x54 1 0.130
L2-L3
L3-L1
For 3 phase to phase voltage and 3 phase voltage readings

3 wafers – scheme 66
GX16 66 O48 L1-L2
0
L1-N 16 45x54 1 0.156
L2-L3 L2-N
L3-L1 L3-N
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings – 5 wafers – scheme 97.
GX16 97 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.196
L3 L1
L2
For L1-L2-L3 readings via 3 CTs – 4 wafers – scheme 98.

GX16 98 O48 0 16 45x54 1 0.150
L3 L1
L2
Front cover size:

45x54mm = 1.8x2.1”

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 /
3 4 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5

Rotary cam switches
GX series
P version in enclosure Orde code IEC Housing Qty Wt General characteristics

with rotating handle. current size per – IEC 16...40A conventional free air thermal current Ith
AC1 pkg ratings
ON/OFF switches. [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
Changeover switches ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Three poles - scheme 10. – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts
GX16 10 P 16 90x90 1 0.330 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
0
GX20 10 P 1
20 90x90 1 0.330 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
– IP65 degree of protection
GX32 10 P 32 110x110 1 0.560 – Top and bottom entry: 4 PG16 threaded knockouts for
GX40 10 P 40 110x110 1 0.560 90x90mm types and 4 PG21 for 110x110mm
ON/OFF SWITCHES. – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
Four poles - scheme 92. the order code table; any other on request.
GX16 92 P 16 90x90 1 0.340 Selection guide
0
1
GX20 92 P 20 90x90 1 0.340 See page 10-26.
GX32 92 P 32 110x110 1 0.575
Special versions
GX40 92 P 40 110x110 1 0.575 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
CHANGEOVER SWICTHES. available with special operating circuit schemes.
Three poles - scheme 53. See page 10-20.
GX16 53 P 16 90x90 1 0.415
1 0
2 Certifications and compliance
GX20 53 P 20 90x90 1 0.415 Certifications obtained: EAC.
GX32 53 P 32 110x110 1 0.710 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
GX40 53 P 40 110x110 1 0.710 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1.
Four poles - scheme 75. Valid for P - P25 versions:
10 GX16 75 P
0
16 90x90 1 0.430 Housing size:
GX20 75 P
1 2
20 90x90 1 0.430 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”
110x110mm = 4.3x4.3”.
GX32 75 P 32 110x110 1 0.760
GX40 75 P 40 110x110 1 0.760
P version in enclosure Order code Ith IEC Housing Qty Wt.

with rotating handle. AC1 power size per
IEC AC23A pkg
Motor switches [A] [A] [mm] n° [kg]
MOTOR SWITCHES.
Three-pole reversing switches - scheme 11.
GX16 11 P 16 5 90x90 1 0.405
1 0
2
GX20 11 P 20 7.5 90x90 1 0.425
GX32 11 P 32 15 110x110 1 0.695
GX40 11 P 40 15 110x110 1 0.700
P25 version in enclosure Orde code IEC Housing Qty Wt

with padlockable rotating current size per
AC1 pkg
handle. [A] [mm] n° [kg]
ON/OFF switches ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Three poles - scheme 10.
GX16 10 P25 0
1
16 90x90 1 0.340
GX20 10 P25 20 90x90 1 0.345
GX32 10 P25 32 110x110 1 0.586
Four poles - scheme 92.
GX16 92 P25 0
1
16 90x90 1 0.350
GX20 92 P25 20 90x90 1 0.350
GX32 92 P25 32 110x110 1 0.605
For indication and reference purposes only - No UL/CSA approval

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GX16 12 3 4 / 1 11/2 3 5 5 6.5
GX20 15 3
/4 11/2 11/2 3 5 5 7.5
GX32 32 11/2 3 3 71/2 15 15 15
GX40 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5

Rotary cam switches
Accessories for GX series
Accessories for Order Description Q.ty Weight

GX switches code per
pkg
n. [kg]
Black operating handle.
7 AO14 For 48x48mm/1.9x19” 1 0.005
front plate 6mm/0.24” for
GX16-GX20
7 A114 For 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” 1 0.010
GX32-GX40 and
GX16H-GX20H
7 AO14 - 7 AR114 - 7 AR214 For 90x90mm/3.5x3.4” 1 0.015
7 A114 - 7 AR214 front plate
7mm/0.28” for
GX32H-GX40H
Black operating lever.
7 A124 For 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” 1 0.020
GX32-GX40 and
GX16H-GX20H
7 AR224 For 90x90mm/3.5x3.4” 1 0.038
GX32H-GX40H
Adjustable door-coupling extension shaft. 70mm/2.8”
7 AR124 - 7 A124 - 7 AR224 long max.
7 APRBP For GX16...GX40 1 0.027 10
IP40 face plate.
GX M1 48x48mm/1.9x1.9” blank 1 0.018
face plate
GX M2 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” blank 1 0.023
7 APRBP face plate
IP40 face plate with legend plate.
GX M5 48x60mm/1.9x2.6” blank 1 0.017
face plate with legend plate
GX M6 65x80mm/2.6x3.1” blank 1 0.033
face plate with legend plate
Padlockable handle.
GX A01 48x48mm/1.9x1.9” red/yellow 1 0.026
0-1 padlockable handle for
2-position GX16-GX20
GX A01H 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” red/yellow 1 0.047
GX M1 - GX M2 0-1 padlockable handle for
GX A11 65x65mm/2.6x2.6” red/yellow 1 0.047
0-1 padlockable handle for
Also suitable for GN series.
GX M5 - GX M6
GX A01 - GX A01H - GX A11
10-11
Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics

front mount. current plate per – IEC 16...125A conventional free air thermal current Ith
ON/OFF switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
ON/OFF SWITCHES. – Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
One pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
7 GN12 90 U 16 48 1 0.075 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN20 90 U 20 48 1 0.077 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
0 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
7 GN25 90 U 1
25 48 1 0.087 Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
7 GN32 90 U 32 65 1 0.173 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN40 90 U 40 65 1 0.173 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN63 90 U 63 65 1 0.200 Selection guide
2 poles - 1 wafer - scheme 91. See page 10-26.
7 GN12 91 U 16 48 1 0.079
Optional
7 GN20 91 U 20 48 1 0.082 IEC IP65 front plate
0
7 GN25 91 U 1
25 48 1 0.094 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN32 91 U 32 65 1 0.186 E.g. 7 GN12 92 U 51.
7 GN40 91 U 40 65 1 0.186 Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
7 GN63 91 U 63 65 1 0.218 48x48)
3 poles - 2 wafers - scheme 10. Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN12H 10 U.
7 GN12 10 U 16 48 1 0.088
7 GN25 10 U 25 48 1 0.116 65x65)
10 7 GN32 10 U
0
1
32 65 1 0.228
Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN32H 10 U.
7 GN40 10 U 40 65 1 0.240
7 GN63 10 U 63 65 1 0.282 Special versions
7 GN125 10 U 125 90 1 0.706 available with special operating circuit schemes.
4 poles - 2 wafers - scheme 92. See page 10-20.
7 GN12 92 U 16 48 1 0.088
7 GN20 92 U 20 48 1 0.098 Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
7 GN25 92 U 0
1
25 48 1 0.122 and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN32 92 U 32 65 1 0.232 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN40 92 U 40 65 1 0.251 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
7 GN63 92 U 63 65 1 0.302 CSA C22.2 n°14.
7 GN125 92 U 125 90 1 0.782
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5
GN25 30 11/2 3 3 5 10 15 11
GN32 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 15
GN40 50 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5
GN63 60 5 10 71/2 15 25 25 30
GN125 130 71/2 15 15 25 50 40 45

10-12 page 10-19 page 10-23 page 10-25 page 10-26 and 27
Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version, front mount. Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics
Changeover switches with current plate per – IEC 16...125A conventional free air thermal current Ith
or without 0 (OFF) [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
CHANGEOVER SWITCH WITH 0 (OFF). – Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 51. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
7 GN12 51 U 16 48 1 0.078 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN20 51 U 20 48 1 0.081 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
1 0 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
7 GN25 51 U 2
25 48 1 0.090 Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
7 GN32 51 U 32 65 1 0.183 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN40 51 U 40 65 1 0.194 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN63 51 U 63 65 1 0.224 Selection guide
Two-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 52. See page 10-26.
7 GN12 52 U 16 48 1 0.095
Optional
7 GN20 52 U 20 48 1 0.098 IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN25 52 U 1 0
2 25 48 1 0.121 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN32 52 U 32 65 1 0.232 E.g. 7 GN12 52 U 51.
7 GN63 52 U 63 65 1 0.302 48x48)
7 GN125 52 U 125 90 1 0.788 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN12H 51 U.
Three-pole - 3 wafers - scheme 53.
7 GN20 53 U 20 48 1 0.115 65x65)
7 GN25 53 U 0 25 48 1 0.152
Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code. 10
1 2 E.g. 7 GN32H 51 U.
7 GN32 53 U 32 65 1 0.285
7 GN40 53 U 40 65 1 0.308 Special versions
7 GN63 53 U 63 65 1 0.377 available with special operating circuit schemes.
7 GN125 53 U 125 90 1 1.036 See page 10-20.
Four-pole - 4 wafers - scheme 75.
7 GN12 75 U 16 48 1 0.123 Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
7 GN20 75 U 20 48 1 0.134 and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN25 75 U 0 25 48 1 0.180 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
1 2
7 GN32 75 U 32 65 1 0.334 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
7 GN40 75 U 40 65 1 0.358 CSA C22.2 n°14.
7 GN63 75 U 63 65 1 0.468
7 GN125 75 U 125 90 1 1.270
CHANGEOVER SWITCH WITHOUT 0 (OFF).
One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 54.
7 GN12 54 U 2 16 48 1 0.079
7 GN20 54 U 1 20 48 1 0.082
7 GN25 54 U 25 48 1 0.096
Two-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 55.
7 GN12 55 U 2 16 48 1 0.093
7 GN20 55 U 1 20 48 1 0.100
7 GN25 55 U 25 48 1 0.122
7 GN12 56 U 2 16 48 1 0.108
7 GN20 56 U 1 20 48 1 0.115
7 GN25 56 U 25 48 1 0.145
7 GN12 69 U 2 16 48 1 0.124
7 GN20 69 U 1 20 48 1 0.134
7 GN25 69 U 25 48 1 0.174
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9” - 60x60mm = 2.6x2.6” - 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5
GN25 30 11/2 3 3 5 10 15 11
GN32 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 15
GN40 50 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5
GN63 60 5 10 71/2 15 25 25 30
GN125 130 71/2 15 15 25 50 40 45

page 10-19 page 10-23 page 10-25 page 10-26 and 27 10-13
Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version Order code Ith IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics

front mount. AC1 power plate per – IEC 16...125A conventional free air thermal current Ith
IEC AC23A size pkg ratings
Motor switches [A] [kW] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
MOTOR SWITCHES. – Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
Three-pole reversing switches - 3 wafers - scheme 11. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
7 GN12 11 U 16 6 48 1 0.105 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN20 11 U 20 7.5 48 1 0.111 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
– IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
7 GN25 11 U 1 0
2
25 11 48 1 0.145 Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
7 GN32 11 U 32 15 65 1 0.278 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
7 GN40 11 U 40 18.5 65 1 0.294 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN63 11 U 63 30 65 1 0.366 Selection guide
7 GN125 11 U 125 45 90 1 0.976 See page 10-26.
Pole changing switches - 4 wafers - scheme 13.
Optional
7 GN12 13 U 16 6 48 1 0.126 IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN20 13 U 20 7.5 48 1 0.134 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
7 GN25 13 U 0 25 11 48 1 0.181 E.g. 7 GN12 13 U 51.
1 2
7 GN32 13 U 32 15 65 1 0.342 Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
7 GN40 13 U 40 18.5 65 1 0.366 48x48)
7 GN63 13 U 63 30 65 1 0.465 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN12H 11 U.
7 GN125 13 U 125 45 90 1 1.301
Star-delta switches - 4 wafers - scheme 12. Enlarged plate for GN32-40-63 (90x90mm instead of
48 1 65x65)
10 7 GN12 12 U
7 GN20 12 U
16
20
6
7.5 48 1
0.124
0.134
E.g. 7 GN32H 11 U.
7 GN25 12 U 0 Y
25 11 48 1 0.175
7 GN32 12 U 32 15 65 1 0.343 Special versions
7 GN40 12 U 40 18.5 65 1 0.366 available with special operating circuit schemes.
7 GN63 12 U 63 30 65 1 0.465 See page 10-20.
7 GN125 12 U 125 45 90 1 1.303
Three-pole reversing switches with spring return to 0 - Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
3 wafers - scheme 26. and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN12 26 U 1 0 2 16 6 48 1 0.106 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN20 26 U 20 7.5 48 1 0.111 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
7 GN25 26 U 25 11 48 1 0.144 CSA C22.2 n°14.
Pole changing switches with reversing (Dahlander) -
6 wafers - scheme 20.
7 GN12 20 U 1
0
1
16 6 48 1 0.161
7 GN20 20 U 2 2
20 7.5 48 1 0.165
7 GN25 20 U 25 11 48 1 0.246
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5
GN25 30 11/2 3 3 5 10 15 11
GN32 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 15
GN40 50 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5
GN63 60 5 10 71/2 15 25 25 30
GN125 130 71/2 15 15 25 50 40 45

Rotary cam switches
GN series
U version, front mount. Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics
Voltmeter switches. current plate per – IEC 16...20A conventional free air thermal current Ith
Ammeter switches [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
VOLTMETER SWITCHES. – Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90°
Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
2 wafers - scheme 68. – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN12 68 U 0
L1N 16 48 1 0.094 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN20 68 U L2N 20 48 1 0.099 – IEC IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see
L3N Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts
– Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN12 67 U 0 16 48 1 0.094 Selection guide
L1-L2
See page 10-26.
7 GN20 67 U L2-L3 20 48 1 0.099
L3-L1
Optional
For 3 phase to phase voltages and 3 phase voltages IEC IP65 front plate
3 wafers - scheme 66. Add “51” at the end of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN12 67 U 51.
7 GN12 66 U L1-L2
0
L1-N 16 48 1 0.116
7 GN20 66 U L2-L3 L2-N 20 48 1 0.116 Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
L3-L1 L3-N
48x48)
For 1 phase voltage and 3 phase to phase voltages E.g. 7 GN12H 68 U.
7 GN12 60 U L1N
0
L1-L2 16 48 1 0.105 Special versions
7 GN20 60 U 20 48 1 0.120 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
10
L2-L3
L3-L1 available with special operating circuit schemes.
See page 10-20.
AMMETER SWITCHES.
Direct L1-L2-L3 reading - 5 wafers - scheme 97. Certifications and compliance
7 GN12 97 U 0 16 48 1 0.132 Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN20 97 U L3 L1 20 48 1 0.148 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
L2 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
L1-L2-L3 reading via 3 current transformers IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
4 wafers - scheme 98. CSA C22.2 n°14.
7 GN12 98 U 0 16 48 1 0.115
7 GN20 98 U L3 L1 20 48 1 0.115
L2
Front plate size:

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”.

use [A] at 400V
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
GN12 15 3 4 / 1 11/2 3 –– –– 5.5
GN20 20 3
/4 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5

Rotary cam switches
GN Series
U11 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics

front ring mount current plate per – IEC 16...125A conventional free air thermal current Ith
with handle operation [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90.
ON/OFF switches 7 GN12 90 U11 0 16 –– 1 0.078 – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
1
7 GN20 90 U11 20 –– 1 0.082 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
Two-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 91. Optional-front plate); IEC IP00 of contacts for U11 and
7 GN12 91 U11 0 16 –– 1 0.080 U12 and IEC IP20 of incoming contacts for U25 and
1
U65 only
7 GN20 91 U11 20 –– 1 0.084 – Legend marking for U11 and U12 versions is only for
reference while for U25 and U65 types standard
Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10. supplied as illustrated in the order code table; any
other on request.
7 GN12 10 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.092
7 GN20 10 U11 20 –– 1 0.095 Selection guide
See page 10-26.
Four-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 92. Optional
7 GN12 92 U11 0
1
16 –– 1 0.094 IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN20 92 U11 20 –– 1 0.100 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN12 92 U25 51.
Enlarged plate for GN32-40-63 (90x90mm instead of

65x65)
U12 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
10 front ring mount current
AC1
plate
size
per
pkg
E.g. 7 GN32H 10 U25.
with key operation [A] [mm] n° [kg] Special versions
for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90. In addition to standard types, particular versions are
ON/OFF switches 7 GN12 90 U12 0 16 –– 1 0.100
1 See page 10-20.
7 GN20 90 U12 20 –– 1 0.104
Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
Two-pole - 1 wafer scheme 91. and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
7 GN12 91 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.108 (File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
7 GN20 91 U12 20 –– 1 0.112 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n°14.
7 GN12 10 U12 0 16 –– 1 0.129 Valid for U25 - U65 versions:
1
Front plate size:
7 GN20 10 U12 20 –– 1 0.135 65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
Four-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 92. For UL/CSA ratings, see page 10-15.
7 GN12 92 U12 0
1
16 –– 1 0.132
7 GN20 92 U12 20 –– 1 0.139
U25-U65 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt

front ring mount with current plate per
AC1 size pkg
red/yellow padlockable [A] [mm] n° [kg]
handle. ON/OFF SWITCHES. Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10.
ON/OFF switches 7 GN12 10 U25 16 65 1 0.161
7 GN20 10 U25 20 65 1 0.165
7 GN25 10 U25 0
1
25 65 1 0.187
7 GN32 10 U25 32 65 1 0.277
7 GN40 10 U65 40 65 1 0.294
7 GN63 10 U65 63 65 1 0.366
7 GN125 10 U65 125 90 1 0.976
7 GN12 92 U25 16 65 1 0.164
7 GN20 92 U25 20 65 1 0.169
7 GN25 92 U25 0
1
25 65 1 0.196
7 GN32 92 U25 32 65 1 0.285
7 GN40 92 U65 40 65 1 0.298
7 GN63 92 U65 63 65 1 0.370
7 GN125 92 U65 125 90 1 0.984

Rotary cam switches
GN Series
O88-O98-O99 version Order code IEC Front Qty Wt General characteristics

rear mount current plate per – IEC 16...125A conventional free air thermal current Ith
door coupling with [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
red/yellow padlock system. ON/OFF SWITCHES.
ON/OFF switches Three-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 10. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
7 GN12 10 O88 16 65 1 0.223 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN20 10 O88 20 65 1 0.226 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
7 GN25 10 O88 0
1
25 65 1 0.252 Optional-front plate); IEC IP20 of incoming contacts
7 GN32 10 O88 32 65 1 0.326 only
7 GN40 10 O98 40 65 1 0.329 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN63 10 O98 63 65 1 0.374
7 GN125 10 O99 125 90 1 0.909 Selection guide
Four-pole - 2 wafers - scheme 92. See page 10-26.
7 GN12 92 O88 16 65 1 0.223 Optional
7 GN20 92 O88 20 65 1 0.233 IEC IP65 front plate
7 GN25 92 O88 0 25 65 1 0.259 Add “51” at the end of the order code.
1
E.g. 7 GN12 92 088 51.
7 GN32 92 O88 32 65 1 0.327
7 GN40 92 O98 40 65 1 0.341 Fixing plate for DIN 35mm rail (IEC/EN 60715)
7 GN63 92 O98 63 65 1 0.391 Add “18” at the end of the order code.
E.g. 7 GN25 10 O 18.
7 GN125 92 O99 125 90 1 0.985
Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65mm instead of
48x48)
Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code. 10
Type UL/CSA UL/CSA horsepower ratings Max IEC AC23 E.g. 7 GN12H 10 068.
use [A] at 400V Enlarged plate for GN32-40-63 (90x90mm instead of
120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V 65x65)
GN12 15 3
/4 1 1 /21
3 –– –– 5.5 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the order code.
GN20 20 3 4 / 2 11/2 3 –– –– 7.5 E.g. 7 GN32H 10 068.
GN25 30 11/2 3 3 5 10 15 11 Special versions
GN32 40 2 5 5 10 15 15 15 In addition to standard types, particular versions are
GN40 50 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5 available with special operating circuit schemes.
See page 10-20.
GN63 60 5 10 71/2 15 25 25 30
GN125 130 71/2 15 15 25 50 40 45 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; CSA certified, for Canada
and USA (File 207767) and UL Listed, for USA
(File E155982), as Manual Motor Controllers.
IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n°14.
Valid for O88 - O98 - O99 - versions:

Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.

Rotary cam switches
GN Series
P version in enclosure Order code IEC Housing Qty Wt General characteristics

with rotating handle. current size per – IEC 16...63A conventional free air thermal current Ith
AC1 pkg ratings
ON/OFF switches. [A] [mm] n° [kg] – Conductivity: 10mA 5V
Changeover switches ON/OFF SWITCHES.
Three-pole - scheme 10. – Silver-alloy dual breaking contacts
7 GN12 10 P 16 75x75 1 0.168 – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function
7 GN20 10 P 20 75x75 1 0.227 according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
0
1
– IP65 degree of protection
7 GN25 10 P 25 75x75 1 0.258 – Top and bottom entry:
7 GN32 10 P 32 90x90 1 0.392 • 4 PG13.5 threaded knockouts for 75x75mm types
7 GN40 10 P 40 110x110 1 0.453 • 4 PG16 threaded knockouts for 90x90mm types
• 4 PG21 threaded knockouts for 110x110mm types
7 GN63 10 P 63 110x110 1 0.766 – Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in
Four-pole - scheme 92. the order code table; any other on request.
7 GN12 92 P 16 75x75 1 0.174
Selection guide
7 GN20 92 P 20 75x75 1 0.222 See page 10-26.
0
1
7 GN25 92 P 25 75x75 1 0.278
7 GN32 92 P 32 90x90 1 0.411 Special versions
7 GN40 92 P 40 110x110 1 0.411 available with special operating circuit schemes.
7 GN63 92 P 63 110x110 1 0.625 See page 10-20.
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES.
Three-pole - scheme 53. Certifications and compliance
7 GN12 53 P 16 75x75 1 0.219 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
7 GN20 53 P 20 75x75 1 0.273 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
10 7 GN25 53 P
1 0
2
25 75x75 1 0.307
Valid for P - P25 versions:
7 GN32 53 P 32 90x90 1 0.500 Housing size:
7 GN40 53 P 40 110x110 1 0.727 75x75mm = 3x3”
7 GN63 53 P 63 110x110 1 0.785 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”
110x110mm = 4.3x4.3”.
Four-pole - scheme 75.
7 GN12 75 P 16 75x75 1 0.226 For indication and reference purposes only
7 GN20 75 P 20 75x75 1 0.289 No UL/CSA approval
1 0
2
7 GN25 75 P 25 90x90 1 0.418 Type UL/CSA Max IEC
7 GN32 75 P 32 90x90 1 0.540 general AC23 power
use [A] [kW] at 400V
7 GN40 75 P 40 110x110 1 0.753
GN12 15 5.5
7 GN63 75 P 63 110x110 1 0.840
GN20 20 7.5
GN25 30 11
P version in enclosure Order code Ith IEC Housing Qty Wt GN32 40 15
with rotating handle. AC1 power size per
IEC AC23A pkg GN40 50 18.5
Motor switches [A] [kW] [mm] n° [kg] GN63 60 30
MOTOR SWITCHES.
Three-pole reversing switches - scheme 11.
7 GN12 11 P 16 5.5 75x75 1 0.216 Type UL/CSA horsepower ratings
7 GN20 11 P 20 7.5 75x75 1 0.271 1 phase 3 phases
0
7 GN25 11 P
1 2
25 11 75x75 1 0.299 120V 230V 200V 230V 480V 600V
7 GN32 11 P 32 15 90x90 1 0.482 GN12 3
/4 1 11/2 3 –– ––
7 GN40 11 P 40 18.5 110x110 1 0.508 GN20 3 4 / 2 11/2 3 –– ––
7 GN63 11 P 63 30 110x110 1 0.750 GN25 11/2 3 3 5 10 15
GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15
GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20
GN63 5 10 71/2 15 25 25
P25 version in enclosure with Order code IEC Housing Qty Wt
padlockable rotating handle. current size per
AC1 pkg
ON/OFF switches [A] [mm] n° [kg]
ON/OFF SWITHCES.
Three-pole - scheme 10.
7 GN20 10 P25 0
1
20 90x90 1 0.313
7 GN25 10 P25 25 90x90 1 0.327
7 GN32 10 P25 32 90x90 1 0.400
Four poles - scheme 92.
7 GN20 92 P25 0
1
20 90x90 1 0.314
7 GN25 92 P25 25 90x90 1 0.339
7 GN32 92 P25 32 90x90 1 0.425

Rotary cam switches
Accessories for GN series
Accessories for Order code Description Qty Wt

GN switches per
pkg
n° [kg]
IEC IP20 finger protection shroud for supply terminals.
For 2 wafers complete with screws and bracket.
7 A0191 For GN12-GN20 1 0.017
7 A0192 For GN25 1 0.021
7 A119U For GN32 U version 1 0.033
7 A119O For GN32 O version 1 0.101
2-piece kit, snap-on fixing for 1 wafer.
7 A1691 For GN40 1 0.005
7 A019... - 7 A169...
7 A119... 7 A1692 For GN63 1 0.006
7 A1693 For GN125 1 0.020
7 A1694 For GN12-GN20 1 0.005
7 A1695 For GN25 1 0.005
Black operating handle.
7 AO14 For 48x48mm front plate 1 0.005
6mm/0.24” for
GN12-GN20-GN25
7 AR114 For 65x65mm front plate 1 0.010
6mm/0.24” for
7 AO14 - 7 AR124 - GN12H-GN20H-GN25H
7 AR114 - 7 A124 -
7 A114 For 65x65mm front plate 1 0.010
7 A114 -
7 AR214
7 AR224
6mm/0.24” for 10
GN32-GN40-GN63
7mm/0.28” for GN125 and
GN32H-GN40H-GN63H
Black operating lever.
6mm/0.24” for
GN12H-GN20H-GN25H
7 A180 - 7 A181 7 A124 For 65x65mm front plate 1 0.020
7mm/0.28” for
GN32-GN40-GN63
8mm/0.31” for GN125 and
GN32H-GN40H-GN63H
7 APRBP 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) base mounting piece for
U version.
7 A180 For GN12...GN25 1 0.011
7 A181 For GN32...GN63 1 0.018
Adjustable door-coupling extension shaft, 70mm/2.8” long
max.
7 APRBP For GN12...GN63 1 0.027
Flexible rubber shroud.
7 A441 - 7 A442 - 7 A443
7 A441 Ø 58mm/2.3”, 70mm/2.8” 1 0.045
long for GN12 to GN25
with 2 elements
7 A442 Ø 58mm/2.3”, 92mm/3.6” 1 0.065
with 4 elements
7 A443 Ø 58mm/2.3”, 125mm/4,9” 1 0.063
with 6 elements
IP40 face plate.
GX M1 - GX M2 GX M1 48x48mm blank face plate 1 0.018
GX M2 65x65mm blank face plate 1 0.023
Padlockable handle.
GX A01 48x48mm red/yellow 0-1 1 0.026
padlockable handle for
2-position GN12-GN20-GN25
GX A01H 65x65mm red/yellow 0-1 1 0.047
padlockable handle for
2-position GN12-GN20-GN25
Front plate size:
GX A11 65x65mm red/yellow 0-1 1 0.047 48x48mm = 1.9x1.9”
GX A01 - GX A01H - GX A11 padlockable handle for 65x65mm = 2.6x2.6”
2-position GN32-GN40-GN63 90x90mm = 3.5x3.5”.
Suitable for GN... types with IEC IP40 (standard supply). For GN...51
types, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details
Raises contact degree of protection from IEC IP00...IP20.
Also suitable for GX series.
10-19
Rotary cam switches
Special circuit scheme form
Order code structure

X U
GG X H • •
• • • • • • • O
N
ENLARGED
TYPE RATING FRONT SCHEME VERSION OPTIONALS
PLATE
GX
IEC Protection: GX GN e.g. U = Front mount
Front = IP65 16A 16A 90 O = Rear mount
Contacts = IP20 20A 20A 91
32A 25A 10 P = In enclosure
GN
IEC Protection : 40A 32A 92
Front = IP40 40A 99
Contacts = IP00 63A 100
125A
10 11 Front mount, with handle operation, for Ø22mm fixing

12 Front mount, with key operation, for Ø22mm fixing
Insert H when an enlarged front plate is required 18 35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715)
GX16 - GX20
GN12 - GN20 - GN25 25 Red-yellow padlockable handle
from 48x48mm to 65x65mm
47 Front mount, with handle operation, for snap on Ø22mm fixing
GX32 - GX40 (up to GX20 and GN25)
GN32 - GN40 - GN63
from 65x65mm to 90x90mm 29D Front mount, with key operation, for snap on Ø22mm fixing
(up to GX20 and GN25)
Front plate size:
48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 48 Modular service cover, 35mm DIN rail mounting
65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in
90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in. 4V Front mount, with 4-screw fixing
51 IP65 front protection, for GN only
65 Red-yellow padlockable handle
88 Door coupling, with red-yellow padlockable handle
(up to GX32, GN32)
(for GX40, GN40, GN63)
(for GN125)
Consult technical instructions I230 on our website for additional information (contact configurations, schemes, plate indications,etc).
Custom-built schemes are available on request; fill out the form on page 10-21.
Example for ordering:

GX16 53 P = Changeover switch, 16A, 3 poles, 3 positions, 3 wafers in 90x90mm, IEC IP65 enclosure.
GN25 H 90 U 51 = On-Off switch, 25A, 1 pole, 2 positions, 1 wafer, with enlarged 65x65mm front plate and IEC IP65 protection, 2-screw fixing.
10-20
Rotary cam switches
Special circuit scheme form
12
11 1
1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25 28 29 32 33 36 37 40 41 44 45 48
10 2
D A
9 3
C B
8 4
7 5
6
2 3 6 7 10 11 14 15 18 19 22 23 26 27 30 31 34 35 38 39 42 43 46 47
Plate
Pos.
indication
7
C
8
10
10
D
11
12
1
A
2
4
B
5
6
Front plate 1 X X X
X
2 X X X
Overlapping Closed contact Open/ Closed Spring
contacts in 2 or more passing contact return
positions contact
BODY SHAPE: Square - GX Round - GN Amp rating ..........................
VERSION: Front mount Rear mount Enclosed Other ....................................
FINISH: Standard Red/yellow padlockable Special ...............................
FIXING: 2 screw 4 screw Snap
Q.ty:.................. Company name and contact details: ........................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................
Maximum 40A ratings for GX series.
Standard suppliled finish is grey front plate while 0-12 indication and the handle are black; any other is considered special.
Also consult technical instructions I230 on the website.
10-21
Rotary cam switches
GX SERIES
Front mount
1...5
(0.2”)
28 (1.1”)
D
A
T
Ø5
I
Drilling for 2-screw fixing L G Rear view
F
Type Dimensions L [mm (in)]
A C D E F G I T 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GX16 U 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 6 12 42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5 85
(1.89”) 1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.67”) (2.00”) (2.34”) (2.67”) (3.01”) (3.35”)
GX16 U25 48 31 45 48 34 23.5 26 12 39.5 48 56.5 65 73.5 82
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.55”) (1.89”) (2.22”) (2.55”) (2.89”) (3.22”)
GX20 U 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 6 12 42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5 85
(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.67”) (2.00”) (2.34”) (2.67”) (3.01”) (3.35”)
GX20 U25 48 31 45 48 34 23.5 6 12 39.5 48 56.5 65 73.5 82
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (1.55”) (1.89”) (2.22”) (2.55”) (2.89”) (3.22”)
GX32 U 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 7 14 47.5 59.5 71.5 83.5 95.5 107.5
(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.87”) (2.34”) (2.81”) (3.29”) (3.75”) (4.23”)
GX32 U25 65 45 58 66 38 26 7 14 48 60 72 84 96 108
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.50”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.89”) (2.36”) (2.83”) (3.30”) (3.77”) (4.25”)
GX40 U 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 7 14 47.5 59.5 71.5 83.5 95.5 107.5
(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.87”) (2.34”) (2.81”) (3.29”) (3.75”) (4.23”)
GX40 U25 65 45 58 66 38 26 7 14 48 60 72 84 96 108
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.50”) (1.02”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (1.89”) (2.36”) (2.83”) (3.30”) (3.77”) (4.25”)
Padlockable handle.
Door coupling O version Coupling and front plate Drilling for 4-screw (4V suffix types)
fixing on the door front plate fixing
E
10 K S 1...5
(0.04...0.20”)
(0.2”)
M
IEC/EN 60715
(0.2”)
Ø5
DIN35
D
A
O
P
C
T T
Ø5
N
G
F Ø5.5
L Rear view (0.22”)
Type Dimensions L [mm (in)]

A C D E F G K M N O P S T 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GX16 O88 48 31 45 48 34 23.5 36 –– 6 52 66.5 45-55 12 40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (1.42”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.47”) (1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”)
GX20 O88 48 31 45 48 34 23.5 36 –– 6 52 66.5 45-55 12 40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5
(1.89”) (1.22”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (1.42”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.47”) (1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”)
GX32 O88 65 45 58 66 38 26 48 –– 7 68 78 45-55 14 48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.49”) (1.02”) (1.89”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.55”) (1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”)
GX40 O98 65 45 58 66 38 26 48 –– 7 68 78 45-55 14 48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7
(2.56”) (1.77”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.49”) (1.02”) (1.89”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.55”) (1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”)
Padlockable handle.
Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Modular mount
45 (1.77”) 45 (1.77”) 1...5 54 (2.12”) L 39 (1.53”) 48 (1.89”)

1...5
(0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”)
45 (1.77”)
45 (1.77”)
(1.10”)
(1.10”)
66.5 (2.62”)
52 (2.05”)
44 (1.73”)
35 (1.38”)
52 (2.05”)
IEC/EN 60715
28
28
DIN35
22.5 L 18.5 30 22.5 L 18.5 23

(0.88”) (0.73”) (1.18”) (0.88”) (0.73”) (0.90”)
Type L [mm (in)] Type L [mm (in)] Type L [mm (in)]

1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers
GX16 35 43.5 52 60.5 GX16 35 43.5 52 60.5 GX16 50 58.5 67
(1.37”) (1.71”) (2.04”) (2.38”) (1.37”) (1.71”) (2.04”) (2.38”) (1.37”) (2.30”) (2.64”)
Snap on mount
GX...U47 GX...U29D
2.5 )
Ø2 .88”
(0
(1.89”)
(1.89”)
48
48
.6 )
R1 06”
.
(0
L 30 28 L 30 32.5
(1.18”) (1.10”) (1.18”) (1.28”)
Type L [mm (in)]

1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers
GX20 35 43.5 52 60.5
(1.37”) (1.71”) (2.04”) (2.38”)
10-22
Rotary cam switches
Mounting in enclosure Drilling for enclosure fixing

A C L F L1 F
M
R
A1
C1
Ø4.5
(0.18”)
Type Enclosure N° of wafers Protection Cable glands

size L L1 A A1 C C1 F M N L L1 degree R
GX16 90x90 1-2 3-5 90 90 79 63 25 19 30 71.3 98.3
IP65 4 PG 16
GX20 (3.54”x3.54”) 1-2 3-5 (3.54”) (3.54”) (3.11”) (2.48”) (0.98”) (0.74”) (1.18”) (2.80”) (3.87”)
GX32 110x110 1-2 3-4 110 110 98.4 83 32 21 39.5 85.5 119.5 28 (1.1”) for ...P25 type.
IP65 4 PG 21
GX40 (4.33”x4.33”) 1-2 3-4 (4.33”) (4.33”) (3.87”) (3.26”) (1.25”) (0.82”) (1.55”) (3.36”) (4.70”) 38.5 (1.52”) for ...P25 type.
GN SERIES Type Dimensions L

Front mount A C D1 D3 E F G J M N 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers
GN12 48 39.5 12 4.3 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 36.1 45.8 55.5 65.2 74.9 84.6
Wafer and front plate fixing on the door (1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.42”) (1.80”) (2.18”) (2.57”) (2.95”) (3.33”)
J GN12 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58 48 65 7 36.6 46.3 56 65.7 75.4 85.1
(2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.28”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.44”) (1.82”) (2.20”) (2.59”) (2.97”) (3.35”)
Ø6 (0.24”)
(1.10”)
GN20 48 39.5 12 4.3 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 36.1 45.8 55.5 65.2 74.9 84.6
A
D1
D1
28
(1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.42”) (1.80”) (2.18”) (2.57”) (2.95”) (3.33”)
C
GN20 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58 48 65 7 36.6 46.3 56 65.7 75.4 85.1

Ø5 (0.2”) (2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.28”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.44”) (1.82”) (2.20”) (2.59”) (2.97”) (3.35”)
2-screw drilling 4-screw drilling for GN125 GN25 48 39.5 12 4.3 26.5 23.5 39 36 48 6 40.5 54.1 67.7 81.3 94.9 108.5
for types up to GN63 and “4V” suffix types only (1.89”) (1.55”) (0.47”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.53”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.59”) (2.13”) (2.66”) (3.20”) (3.74”) (4.27”)
GN25 65
(2.56”)
53
(2.09”)
14
(0.55”)
4.3
(0.17”)
34.5
(1.36”)
26
(1.02”)
58.5
(2.30”)
48
(1.89”)
65
(2.56”)
7
(0.27”)
41
(1.61”)
54.6
(2.15”)
68.2
(2.68”)
81.8
(3.22”)
95.4
(3.75”)
109
(4.29”)
10
1...5
(0.04...0.20”) GN32 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 48 65 7 46.5 61.6 76.7 91.8 106.9 122
J (2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.83”) (2,442”) (3.02”) (3.61”) (4.21”) (4.80”)
GN40 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 48 65 7 46.5 61.6 76.7 91.8 106.9 122
(2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.83”) (2,442”) (3.02”) (3.61”) (4.21”) (4.80”)
GN63 65 53 14 4.3 34.5 26 62 48 65 7 50.3 68.4 86.5 104.6 122.7 140.8
(2.56”) (2.09”) (0.55”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.44”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.98”) (2.69”) (3.40”) (4.12”) (4.83”) (5.54”)
GN125 90 70.5 16 5.3 41.5 28 84 68 90 9 67.3 96.4 125.5 154.6 183.7 212.8
D3 L F (3.54”) (2.77”) (0.63”) (0.21”) (1.63”) (1.10”) (3.31”) (2.68”) (3.54”) (0.35”) (2.65”) (3.79”) (4.94”) (6.09”) (7.23”) (8.38”)
Rear view E
Dimensions for U06 and U25 versions
Door coupling Drillings for wafer and handle fixing

S 1...5
K K
D2 D2
A
D1
D1
K
C
D2
4-screw drilling for wafer 2-screw drilling for handle 4-screw drilling for GN125 E
fixing on rear plate of types up to GN63 handle and “4V suffix” types only L
Type Dimensions L
A C D1 D2 E K S 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers
GN12-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 37.58 (1.48”) 47.1 (1.85”) 56.7 (2.23”) 66.3 (2.61”)
GN20-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 38.1 (1.50”) 47.8 (1.88”) 57.5 (2.26”) 67.2 (2.64”)
GN25-O88 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 38.5 (1.52”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 42.5 (1.67”) 56.1 (2.21”) 65.7 (2.59”) 83.2 (3.27”)
GN32 O... 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 49.2 (1.94”) 62.8 (2.47”) 76.4 (3.00”) 90 (3.54”) 45 (1.77”) for O88 and O98 types .
GN40 O... 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 45.9 (1.81”) 59.5 (2.34”) 73.1 (2.88”) 86.7 (3.41”) 65 (2.56”) for O99 types .
38.5 (1.52”) for O88 and O98 types .
GN63 O... 65 (2.56”) 53 (2.09”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 54.3 (2.14”) 72.4 (2.85”) 90.5 (3.56”) 108.6 (4.27”) 49 (1.93”) for O99 types .
GN125 O... 90 (3.54”) 70.5 (2.78”) 16 (0.63”) 6 (0.24”) 41.5 (1.63”) 68 (2.68”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 74.8 (2.94”) 103.9 (4.09”) 133 (5.23”) 162.1 (6.38”) Padlockable handle.
Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing Front ring mount on Ø22mm drilling, 2-screw fixing
”)
”)
(0 1.6
(0 1 . 6
.06
.06
R
1...5 1...5
(0.04...0.20”) (0.04...0.20”)
38 (1.50”)
38 (1.50”)
28 L 30
(1.10”) 22.5 (1.18”) 28 22.5 L 23
(0.88”) (1.10”) (0.88”) (0.90”)
Type L [mm] Type L [mm]
1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers
GN12 41.5 (1.63”) 51.1 (2.01”) 60.7 (2.39”) 70.3 (2.77”) GN12 41.5 (1.63”) 51.1 (2.01”) 60.7 (2.39”) 70.3 (2.77”)
GN20 42.1 (1.66”) 51.8 (2.04”) 61.5 (2.42”) 71.2 (2.80”) GN20 42.1 (1.66”) 51.8 (2.04”) 61.5 (2.42”) 71.2 (2.80”)
GN25 46.5 (1.83”) 60.1 (2.37”) 73.7 (2.90”) 87.3 (3.44”) GN25 46.5 (1.83”) 60.1 (2.37”) 73.7 (2.90”) 87.3 (3.44”)
10-23
Rotary cam switches
Mounting in enclosure Drilling for enclosure fixing

A C L F L1 F
M
R
A1
C1 D
Type Enclosure N° of wafers Protection Conduits

size L L1 A A1 C C1 D F M N L L1 degree R
GN12 1-2 3-4
75x75 75 75 64 50 4.5 19 14 28 57.5 79.8
GN20 1-2 3-4 IP65 4 PG 13.5
(2.95x2.95”) (2.95”) (2.95”) (2.51”) (1.96”) (0.17”) (0.74”) (0.55”) (1.10”) (2.26”) (3.14”)
GN25 1 2-3
GN20 1-3 4-6
GN25 90x90 1-2 3-4 90 90 63 79 4.5 25 19 30 71.3 98.3
IP65 4 PG 16
GN32 (3.54x3.54”) 1-2 3-4 (3.54”) (3.54”) (2.48”) (3.11”) (0.17”) (0.98”) (0.74”) (1.18”) (2.80”) (3.87”)
GN40 1 2-3
GN32 1-3 4-5
GN40 110x110 1-2 3-4 110 110 98.4 83 4.5 32 21 39.5 85.5 119.5
IP65 4 PG 21 28 (1.1”) for P25 type with padlockable handle.
GN63 (4.33x4.33”) 1-2 3-4 (4.33”) (4.33”) (3.87”) (3.27”) (0.18”) (1.25”) (0.82”) (1.55”) (3.37”) (4.70”)
GN125 1 2 38.5 (1.52”) for P25 type with padlockable handle.
10
10-24
Rotary cam switches
Wiring diagrams
90 - One-pole ON/OFF switch 91 - Two-pole ON/OFF switch 10 - Three-pole ON/OFF switch 92 - Four-pole ON/OFF switch
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
Number of wafers: 1 Number of wafers: 1 Number of wafers: 2 Number of wafers: 2

Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60°
51 - 1-pole changeover / 52 - 2-pole changeover / 53 - 3-pole changeover / 75 - 4-pole changeover /

double throw switch with 0 double throw switch with 0 double throw switch with 0 double throw switch with 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
2 2 2 2

54 - 1-pole changeover / 55 - 2-pole changeover / 56 - 3-pole changeover / 69 - 4-pole changeover /

double throw without 0 double throw without 0 double throw without 0 double throw without 0
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1

10
11 - 3-pole reversing switch 13 - Pole-changing switch with 0 (Dahlander)
1 0 1 0
2 2
Number of wafers: 3 Number of wafers: 4

Switching angle: 60° Switching angle: 60°
12 - Star-delta switch 26 - Reversing switch, spring return to 0

Y 1 0 2
0

20 - Pole-changing switch with reversing (Dahlander)
0
1 1
2 2
Number of wafers: 6
Switching angle: 60°
68 - Phase-neutral voltmeter switch 67 - Phase-phase voltmeter switch 66 - Phase-phase phase-neutral 60 - Changeover / double throw switch
voltmeter changeover / double throw 1 phase phase-neutral, 3 phase-phase voltages
0 0
L1N L1-L2
0 0
L2N L2-L3 L1-L2 L1-N L1N L1-L2
L3N L3-L1 L2-L3 L2-N L2-L3
L3-L1 L3-N L3-L1

Switching angle: 30° Switching angle: 30° Number of wafers: 3 Number of wafers: 3
97 - Ammeter switch direct reading or via current transformer 98 - L1-L2-L3 current changeover / double throw switch
0
0
L3 L1
L3 L1
L2
L2
Number of wafers: 5
Switching angle: 90° Number of wafers: 4
Switching angle: 90°
10-25
Rotary cam switches
SELECTION GUIDE UTILISATION

The choice of a rotary cam switch and the relative type are based on the functional diagram MAIN SUPPLY DISCONNECTING SWITCH WITH
and the type of application as well. EMERGENCY-STOP OPERATION:
– Red operating handle with yellow background
IEC standards provide a comprehensible and quick classification of the most frequent – Lockable in open position (OFF).
utilisation categories:
AC1: Connection and disconnection of non-inductive or slightly inductive loads EMERGENCY-STOP SWITCH
(cos 0.95) – Red operating handle with yellow background
AC21: Resistance furnaces – Independent operation and the breaking of the load circuit of switching devices before
AC3: Starting and switching off motors during running the opening of its main contacts
AC23A: Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads – Rated capacity is to be sufficient in order to break the sum of the rated operating
AC15: Control of electromagnetic loads currents of all the connected equipment
– Breaking capacity equal to the current of the largest motor when stalled (locked rotor)
For DC applications. the rotary cam switches are used for the switching of minor loads or together with the total of the normal running currents of the other motors or loads.
in control circuits. such as:
DC13: Control of electromagnets MAIN SUPPLY DISCONNECTING SWITCH
DC21A: Switching of resistive loads – Used to disconnect all live electrical equipment from the power supply circuit
DC23: Switching of highly inductive loads – Contact clearance distance is to comply with
IEC/EN 60947-3 standards
Other prescriptions and recommendations concerning the use of cam switches as auxiliary – Provided with a means in order to be locked in the OFF position
equipment of electrical machines are given in IEC/EN 60204-1 standards and specifically as – Selection of current breaking according to IEC AC1 and AC21 utilisation categories.
given under utilisation.
10 TYPE GX16 GX20 GX32 GX40 GN12 GN20 GN25 GN32 GN40 GN63 GN125
Rated insulation voltage
Ui IEC/EN V 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
UL/CSA V 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Uimp IEC/EN 60947-3 kV 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8
Conventional free air thermal
current Ith IEC/EN A 16 20 32 40 16 20 25 32 40 63 125
UL/CSA (general purpose use)
A 12 15 32 40 15 20 30 40 50 60 130
Rated operating
voltage (switch disconnect) V 440 440 440 440 480 480 480 480 480 480 690
Operatioanl impulse
voltage (switch disconnect) kV 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6
Maximum fuse size for 10kA A 20 20 40 40 16 20 25 32 40 63 125
short-circuit protection 25kA A 16 16 35 35 10 16 25 32 40 63 100
In (gG)
50kA A – – 32 35 – – – 32 40 63 100
63kA A – – – 35 – – – – 40 63 100
Short-time
withstand current
Icw 1sec A 250 250 800 800 200 250 400 800 1000 1600 2100
Rated operational current
Ie AC1/AC21A (IEC/EN) A 16 20 32 40 16 20 25 32 40 63 125
110V A 10 10 25 25 10 10 16 25 25 32 40
AC15 (IEC/EN) 220...230V A 8 8 20 22 8 8 12 20 22 25 28
380...400V A 4 6 10 12 4 6 8 10 12 15 15
660...690V A 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 4 5
Motor power for switches
in AC utilisation categories
AC3 (IEC/EN) 220...230V kW 3.5 3.7 7.5 7.5 2.5 3 5.5 7.5 8 11 18.5
3 phases 380...440V kW 4.5 5.5 11 15 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 37
500...690V kW 5.5 5.5 11 15 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 33
1 phase (2 poles) 110V kW 0.55 0.75 1.8 2.2 0.8 0.8 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5
220...230V kW 1.5 1.8 3.5 4.4 1.5 2.2 3 4 6.5 6.5 11
380...440V kW 2.2 3 5.5 7 2.2 3 5.5 6.5 8 11.5 15
AC23A (IEC/EN) 220...230V kW 3.7 4 8 9 3 5 6.5 8 8 12.5 30
3 phases 380...440V kW 6.5 7.5 15 18.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45
500...690V kW 7.5 7.5 15 15 7.5 7.5 11 18.5 22 30 37
1 phase (2 poles) 110V kW 0.75 0.75 2.2 3 0.8 0.8 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5
220...230V kW 1.8 2.2 3.5 5.2 1.7 2.5 3.7 4 6 7.5 11
380...440V kW 3 3.5 6 7.5 3 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 12.5 15
Valid for systems with earthed neutral, overvoltage category III, pollution degree 3.
10-26
Rotary cam switches
TYPE GX16 GX20 GX32 GX40 GN12 GN20 GN25 GN32 GN40 GN63 GN125
Motor power for
direct-on-line control 120V HP 1.5 1.5 3 5 – – – – – – –
(UL/CSA-DOL) 230V HP 3 3 7.5 10 3 3 – – – – –
3 phases
480V HP 5 5 15 15 – – 10 15 20 25 50
600V HP 5 5 15 15 – – – – – – 40
1 phase (2 poles) 120V HP 0.75 0.75 1.5 2 – – – – – – –
230V HP 1 1.5 3 5 – – – – – – –
Motor power for switches in DC
utilisation categories
1 contact 48V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125
DC21A 60V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 50 80
Ie 110V A 4 4 5 6 4 4 4 6 6 8 10
220V A 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.9 1 1.2
440V A 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 - - - - -
DC23A 24V A 16(1) 20(1) 32(1) 40(1) 10(1) 20(1) 25(1) 32(1) 40(1) 50(1) 125(1)
48V A 16(2) 20(2) 32(2) 40(1) 10(2) 20(2) 25(2) 32(2) 40(2) 50(2) 125(2)
Ie 60V A 16(3) 20(3) 32(3) 40(3) 10(3) 20(3) 25(3) 32(3) 40(3) 50(3) 125(3)
No. of contacts connected in 110V A 10(3) 10(3) 15(3) 20(3) 5(3) 10(3) 12(3) 15(3) 20(3) 25(3) 50(3)
series are indicated in brackets 220V A 7(4) 8(4) 12(4) 12(4) 5(4) 8(4) 10(4) 12(4) 12(4) 15(4) 20(4)
24V A 16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125
DC13 48V A 14 16 25 32 10 16 20 25 32 40 100
60V A 12 12 16 16 8 12 16 16 16 28 50
Ie 110V A 0.8 1 3 3 1 1 1.5 3 3 3.3 4
10
220V A 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - -
440V A 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 - - - - -
Power dissipation W/pole 0.6 0.6 1.6 1.6 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.5 2.0 3.4 6.3
Mechanical life cycles 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 3x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 5x106 1x106
Terminal screw M 3 3 4 4 3 3 3.5 4 4 5 2x5
Tightening torque max Nm 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2 0.5 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2 2 2
Conductor cross section max. r/f 2 mm2 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/6 10/6 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 4/4 6/4 10/6 16/10 50/50
2 AWG 14/14 14/14 8/10 8/10 14/16 12/14 10/12 8/10 8/10 6/8 1/0 / 1/0
r: rigid/solid min. r/f 2 mm2 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 1.5/1.5 1.5/1.5 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 1.5/1.5 1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5
f: flexible/stranded
2 AWG 20/20 20/20 16/16 16/16 20/20 20/20 20/20 16/16 16/16 14/14 14/14
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
10-27
Page 11-4 Page 11-16 Page 11-24
GA SERIES GE SERIES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS

16A TO 160A (AC21A) 50A TO 1600A (AC21A) UP TO 850A 1000VDC (DC21B)
• Switch disconnectors with direct operating • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors • Direct operating and door coupling
handle and door coupling version • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors versions
• Switch disconnectors door mount version with NFC, NH and BS type fuse holders • Switch disconnectors in non-metallic
• Switch disconnectors in non-metallic • Three and four-pole changeover switches; enclosure.
enclosure add-on motorised control unit available.
• Changeover switches in non-metallic
enclosure.
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 11
16A to 1600A ratings

Versions: direct operating handle,
door coupling, door mount and in
plastic enclosure
Wide range of accessories
Types for photovoltaic applications
up to 850A 1000VDC (DC21B)
Changeover switches in
polycarbonate enclosure.
SEC. - PAGE
GA series 16A to 160A
Three-pole switch disconnectors .............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 4
Fourth pole add on...................................................................................................................................................................... 11 - 4
Add-on blocks and accessories ................................................................................................................................................. 11 - 5
Empty enclosures .................................................................................................................................................................... 11 - 11
Enclosed switch disconnectors ................................................................................................................................................. 11 - 12
Enclosed changeover switches .................................................................................................................................................. 11 - 14
GE series 50A to 1600A
Three-pole switch disconnectors .............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 16
Three-pole switch disconnectors with fuse holder .................................................................................................................... 11 - 16
Four-pole switch disconnectors ............................................................................................................................................... 11 - 17
Four-pole switch disconnectors with fuse holder ...................................................................................................................... 11 - 17
Three-pole changeover switches .............................................................................................................................................. 11 - 18
Four-pole changeover switches ................................................................................................................................................. 11 - 18
Add-on blocks and accessories ................................................................................................................................................. 11 - 19
For photovoltaic applications ....................................................................................................................................... 11 - 24
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 11 - 26
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 11 - 30
I SOLATION
AND
P ROTECTION
Switch disconnectors
Overview
GA series
16A to 160A
DIRECT OPERATING HANDLE AND DOOR MOUNT VERSION

DOOR COUPLING VERSION
36mm/1.42” width 70mm/2.75” width 36mm/1.42” width 70mm/2.75” width
AC21A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 63A 80A 100A 125A 160A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 80A 100A 125A
Three pole
4th pole - simultaneous closing
4th pole - early make
Three-pole for photovoltaic

applications
Fuse holder
Mechanical 6-8 pole coupling system
Mechanical interlock

for line switching
11
ENCLOSED VERSION - IEC/EN TYPE IP65 ENCLOSED VERSION UL/CSA TYPE 4/4X
WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE
AC21A690V (IEC/EN) 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 63A 80A 100A 125A 160A 16A 25A 32A 40A 63A 63A 80A 100A 125A 160A
General use 600VAC (UL/CSA) 16A 25A 32A 40A 60A 60A 100A 100A 100A ––
Enclosure width Enclosure width
100mm/3.94” 175mm/6.89” 220mm/8.66” 100mm/3.94” 175mm/ 220mm/8.66”
6.89”
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
Three pole
Four pole
Enclosure width
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES 175mm/6.89” 220mm/8.66”
Three pole
Four pole
GE series Switch disconnectors Changeover switches

50A to 1600A
DIRECT OPERATING AND DOOR COUPLING VERSION

AC21A 50A 125A 160A 200A 250A 315A 400A 500A 630A 800A 1000A 1250A 1600A
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 50A TO 1600A
Three and four pole
Three and four pole

with NFC fuse holder
Three and four pole

with NH fuse holder
Three and four pole

with BS fuse holder
Four-pole for photovoltaic

applications
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES 160A TO 1600A
Three and four pole
Motorised control unit
11-2
GA series
VERSATILITY!
COMPACT SIZE CERTIFICATIONS
The three-pole 16A to 63A switch The 16A to 63A types are listed for Canada
disconnectors, are made up of a single unit and the USA, certified according to
body, merely 36mm/1.42” wide, while the 63A UL508/CSA C22.2 n° 14.
to 160A ratings, of another body size of only The 63A to 125A types are listed for
70mm/2.75” wide. Canada and the USA, certified according
to UL98A/CSA C22.2 n° 4.
ACCESSORY FLEXIBILITY
Mounting and removal of the fourth pole and
add-on blocks are simple and quick operations
with no need for tools.
VERSIONS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC

APPLICATIONS
The GA... and GD type switch disconnectors are
suitable for both small domestic installations as
well as those with a large number of solar cells.
Use up to 1000V in DC21B category.
SIDE MOUNT ADD-ON FOURTH POLE 6 AND 8 POLE VERSION IP65 PADLOCKABLE HANDLES SWITCH STATUS INDICATION
Simultaneous closing or early-make Mechanical coupling systems are Wide range of selector or pistol grip The switch open or closed state is
contact operation of the fourth pole available for the 16A to 160A switch handles, with screw or ring fixing. clearly and unequivocally seen at a
with respect to the switch disconnectors with direct operating All handles are equipped with built-in distance thanks to the simple and
disconnector poles. handle to provide 6/8 pole padlockable mechanism. modern design of the handles.
disconnectors or a mechanical
interlock mechanism for the line
The selector handle GAX63... snaps
onto the door mount switch
11
changeover function (I - 0 - II). disconnectors in 16A to 40A ratings, DIN RAIL FIXING
The enclosed switches are cULus with no need for tools. Switch disconnector mounting on
certified. and removal from the 35mm DIN rail
are done by simply pressing it
downwards with no need for tools.
ANTI-SLIDE INSERT FOR DIN RAIL

ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS
Only one add-on block suitable for all
the 9 ratings of switch disconnectors,
having simultaneous closing with the
switch disconnector poles. There are
versions with an early-break NO
contact with respect to the switch FUSE HOLDERS HANDLE ADAPTABILITY
disconnector. The extensive number of fixing holes
in the front handle plate can replace
MAXIMUM COMBINATIONS switch disconnectors, normally found A rubber pad insert prevents the
Mounting up to 4 auxiliary contacts out in the field, without having to drill sliding of switch disconnectors on the
or 1 fourth pole and 3 auxiliary others. DIN rail even when out of tolerance or
contacts (2 blocks always on the right mounted vertically.
and 2 on the left side) of each switch
A three-pole fuse holder can be added
disconnector. The earth and neutral to 16A to 32A switch disconnectors,
terminals and fuse holder also can be TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY
with direct operating handle, to Terminals are suitable to accept any
added. provide a single compact unit. type of cable: flexible, rigid, AWG
Access to the fuse can be made only wire. The terminals can withstand
when the disconnector is in OFF high tightening torques.
position.
UL508A HANDLE VERSION
In compliance with UL508A HIGH IEC CAPABILITY IN AC23
REDUCED HANDLE THICKNESS standards, which require internal The rated currents Ie in AC23 at
GAX61 and GAX 61 B handles are panel inspection by authorised 690VAC are the highest of the
only 23mm thick. personnel with power applied, category.
selector and pistol handles are
9mm/0.35” available with defeatable feature of
the door coupling when the switch
disconnector is closed, i.e. in ON MODULARITY
DOOR COUPLING HANDLE WITH position. The switch disconnectors can be
FRONT DIMENSIONS 48X48MM mounted in modular panels.
The GAX68 and GAX68B handles can
be used in panels and boxes of
limited dimensions.
23mm/0.90”
11-3
Three-pole switch Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics
disconnectors tional free air operational per – 16A to 160A
thermal current Ie pkg – Available versions:
current Ith • Direct operating
AC21A AC22A (690V) • Door mount
(690V) AC23A (415V) • Door coupling. Use switch disconnector with direct
[A] [A] n° [kg] operating handle and separately purchase the handle
and shaft extension for this version.
Direct operating version, complete with black handle. See pages 11-8 and 10.
For door coupling version, separately purchase the handle – Compact and modular size
and shaft extension (see page 11-8 and 11-10). – Screw or 35mm DIN rail fixing
GA016 A 16 16 1 0.146 – Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
GA025 A 25 25 1 0.146 Operational characteristics
GA032 A 32 32 1 0.146 – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
– Rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
GA016 A... GA063 A... GA040 A 40 40 1 0.146 – Electrical life in AC21A:
GA040 A GA160 A GA063 SA 63 45 1 0.148 • 100,000 cycles GA016...GA040, GAX...40A/C
GA063 SA GA063 A 63 63 1 0.388 • 15,000 cycles GA063 SA, GAX...063SA
• 30,000 cycles GA063...GA125, GAX...063...125A/C
GA080 A 80 80 1 0.388 • 1,500 cycles GA160A, GAX42 160A
GA100 A 100 100 1 0.388 – Mechanical life:
GA125 A 125 125 1 0.388 • 100,000 cycles GA016...GA040 A/C, GA063 SA,
GAX...40A/C, GAX...063SA
GA160 A 160 125 1 0.388 • 30,000 cycles GA063...GA160A,
Door mount version, complete with shaft extension GAX...063...125A/C, GAX42 160A.
(purchase handle separately, see page 11-8).
GA016 C 16 16 1 0.170 Certifications and compliance
GA025 C 25 25 1 0.170
UL508 / CSA C22.2 no. 14
UL98A / CSA C22.2 no. 4

GA032 C 32 32 1 0.170
cULus according to
cULus according to
GA040 C 40 40 1 0.170
11 GA063 C 63 63 1 0.404
KEMA
EAC
GA080 C 80 80 1 0.404
GA100 C 100 100 1 0.404
GA016 C... GA063 C... GA125 C 125 125 1 0.404
GA040 C GA125 C
Type
GA016 A...GA040 A ––
Fourth pole add on Order code IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt
tional free air operational per GA063 SA –– ––
thermal current Ie pack GA016 C...GA040 C ––
current Ith GA063 A...GA125 A –– ––
AC21A AC22A (690V)
(690V) AC23A (415V) GA160 A-GAX42 160A –– –– ––
[A] [A] n° [kg] GA063 C...GA125 C –– ––
Simultaneous closing operation as switch disconnector GAX41 040A-GAX42 040A –– ––
poles. For GA...A version. GAX41 063SA-GAX42 063SA –– ––
GAX42 040A 40 40 1 0.045 GAX41 040C-GAX42 040C –– ––
GAX42 063SA 63 45 1 0.045 GAX41 125A-GAX42 125C –– ––
GAX42 063A 63 63 1 0.126 GAX42 063A...GAX42 125A –– ––
GAX42...A
GAX41...A GAX42 080A 80 80 1 0.126 GAX42 063C...GAX42 125C –– ––
GAX42 063SA GAX42 100A 100 100 1 0.126 Certification obtained.
GAX41 063SA GAX42 125A 125 125 1 0.126
GAX42 160A 160 125 1 0.126 IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, UL98A, CSA C22.2.
For GA...C version.
GAX42 040C 40 40 1 0.045
Strokes of GA poles
GAX42 063C 63 63 1 0.128 (main poles and add-on pole)
GAX42 080C 80 80 1 0.128 Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90°
GAX42 100C 100 100 1 0.128 GA016A/C…GA040A/C - GA063SA 60°
Main poles
GAX42 125C 125 125 1 0.128 GAX42040A/C - GAX42063SA 60°
Early make closing operation with respect to switch Simultaneous closing fourth-pole add on
disconnector poles. For GA...A version. GAX41040A/C - GAX41063SA 55°
Early-make fourth-pole add on
GAX42 040C GAX41 040A 40 40 1 0.046
GA063A/C…GA125A/C, GA160A 55°
GAX41 040C GAX41 063SA 63 45 1 0.046 Main poles
GAX41 125A 125 125 1 0.116 GAX42063A/C…GAX42125A/C, GAX42160A 55°
Simultaneous closing fourth-pole add on
For GA...C version. GAX41125A/C 48°
Early-make fourth-pole add on
GAX41 040C 40 40 1 0.046
OFF ON
GAX41 125C 125 125 1 0.128
For GA016 A...GA040 A only.
For GA063 SA only.
For GA016 C...GA040 C only.
For GA063 A...GA125 A only.
For GA063 C...GA125 C only.

11-4 page 11-5 to 10 page 11-26 page 11-30 page 11-32
Accessories
Add-on blocks Order Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts

code per – Conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A
pack – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600-Q600
n° [kg] – Tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
Auxiliary contacts, simultaneous closing as poles Operational characteristics for other devices
of switch disconnector. – Tightening torque:
GAX10 11A 1NO + 1NC for GA...A, 1 0.030 • GAX31A/C-GAX33A/C terminals:
GA063 SA and GA040 D 1.8…2Nm/16…18lbin
GAX10 11C 1NO + 1NC for GA...C 1 0.030 • GAX32A/C-GAX34A/C terminals: 5…6Nm/45…54lbin
• GAX5000/1-GAX6000/1 fixing: 0.5Nm/4.4lbin;
Auxiliary contacts, early-break operation with respect to extension with handle: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
GAX10 11A GAX10 11C poles of switch disconnector.
GAX11 10EA 1EB (NO) for GA016 A...GA040 A, 1 0.035 Transformation of direct operating version into door
GA063 SA and GA040 D coupling type
GAX12 10EA 1EB (NO) for GA063 A...GA160 A 1 0.035 GA016A...GA040A +
GA016A...GA040A /
GA063SA + GA063SA /
Neutral terminal. GA063A...GA160A +
GA063A...GA160A GA040D + GA040D
65
+ GAX5001 + GAX5000
GAX31 A For GA016 A...GA040 A, 1 0.040
GA063 SA and GA040 D
GAX32 A For GA063 A...GA160 A 1 0.110
GAX31 C For GA016 C...GA040 C 1 0.040
GAX11 10EA GAX32 C For GA063 C...GA125 C 1 0.110 GAX7... ( 5mm)
GAX12 10EA
Earth/Ground terminal.
GAX67B
GAX33 A For GA016 A...GA040 A, 1 0.040
GA063 SA and GA...D 0
II
GAX34 A For GA063 A...GA160 A 1 0.110

I
GAX33 C For GA016 C...GA040 C 1 0.040

GAX34 C For GA063 C...GA125 C 1 0.110 Certifications and compliance
Mechanical interlock for line changeover (I-0-II). 11
UL508 / CSA C22.2 no. 14
UL98A / CSA C22.2 no. 4

GAX50 00 For GA016 A...GA040 A, 1 0.050
cULus according to
cULus according to
GAX3...A GAX3...C GA063 SA, GA040 D and GAX67 B;
5mm/0.2”
EAC
GAX50 01 For GA063 A...GA160 A 1 0.075
and GAX67 B; 5mm/0.2”
Mechanical coupling system for 6-8 pole switch disconnectors.
GAX60 00 For GA016 A...GA040 A, 1 0.050 Type
GA063 SA and GA040 D;
5mm/0.2” GAX10 11A - GAX10 11C ––
GAX50... GAX11 10EA ––
GAX60... GAX60 01 For GA063 A...GA125 A, 1 0.075
7mm/0.3” GAX12 10EA ––
Use GAX7… shaft extensions. GAX31 A – GAX31 C ––
Use GAX66.. handles and GAX7…A extensions for a door coupling version.
Cannot be used with GA160A. GAX32 A – GAX32 C ––
GAX33 A – GAX33 C ––
GAX34 A – GAX34 C ––
GAX50 00 – GAX60 00 ––
GAX50 01 – GAX60 01 ––
Certification obtained.

60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, UL98A, CSA C22.2.
Strokes of GA poles (main poles with auxiliary contacts) Strokes of GA…D types
(main poles and auxiliary contacts)
Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90° Corsa 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90°
GA016A/C…GA040A/C - GA063SA 60° GA040 D 60°
Main poles Main poles
GAX10 11A – GAX10 11C 60° GA042 040D 60°
Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO simultaneous closing fourth -pole add on
NC GAX10 11A 60°
40° Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO
GAX11 10EA Travel 0→1 60° NC
auxiliary contact (1EB NO early-break 40°
with respect to main poles) Travel 1→0 70° GAX11 10EA Travel 0→1 60°
auxiliary contact (1EB NO early-break
with respect to main poles) Travel 1→0 70°
GA063A/C…GA125A/C, GA160A 55°
Main poles
GAX10 11A – GAX10 11C 45°
Auxiliary contacts (1NO+1NC) NO
NC
25°
GAX12 10EA Travel 0→1 55°
auxiliary contact (1EB NO early-break
with respect to main poles) Travel 1→0 65°
OFF ON

page 11-26 page 11-30 page 11-32 11-5
Maximum combinations GA016 A...GA040 A Sequence and maximum combination of add-on blocks on direct operating switch disconnectors.
GA040 D
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 040A GAX41 040A GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 040A GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D GAX42 040D
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 GA016 A –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA025 A 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 A –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– GA040 D 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GAX42 040D can be used with GA040 D switch only.
GA063 SA
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA GAX41 063SA GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 063SA GAX42 063SA
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063 SA –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1
11 1
1
1
1
2
––
––
––
––
––
––
1
––
––
2
––
1
1
1
1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 A...GA160 A
GAX42 063...160A GAX42 063...160A
–– –– 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA063 A –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA080 A 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA100 A –– –– 2 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– GA125 A –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– GA160 A –– –– 2 –– ––
1 1 –– –– –– 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 –– –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA160 A can be fitted with 1 single 4th pole (GAX42160 A) on one side and an auxiliary contact on the other.
GA016 C...GA040 C Sequence and maximum combination of add-on blocks on door mount switch disconnectors.
GAX31 C GAX33 C GAX10 11C GAX41 040C GAX41 040C GAX10 11C GAX33 C GAX31 C
GAX42 040C GAX42 040C
1 1 1 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA016 C 1 1 1 1
1 1 –– 1 GA025 C –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA032 C 1 –– 1 1
1 1 1 –– GA040 C –– 1 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 C...GA125 C
GAX32 C GAX34 C GAX10 11C GAX41 125C GAX41 125C GAX10 11C GAX34 C GAX32 C
GAX42 063...125C GAX42 063...125C
–– –– 1 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– GA063 C 1 1 –– ––
1 1 –– 1 GA080 C –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– GA100 C 1 –– 1 1
–– –– 1 –– GA125 C –– 1 –– ––
1 1 –– –– –– –– 1 1

11-6 page 11-26 page 11-30 page 11-32 and 37
Maximum combinations GA016 A...GA040 A Sequence and maximum combination for mechanical coupling and mechanical interlock for line changeover.
GA040 D
+ GAX50 00 -
GAX60 00
GAX42 040A GAX42 040A
GAX42 040D GAX42 040D
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
1 1 1 –– 1 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 GA016 A + –– –– 2 1 1
GA016 A +
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
GA025 A +
1 1 1 –– 1 GA025 A + –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A + 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA032 A + –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 A + –– 1 1 1 1
GA040 A +
1 1 2 –– –– GA040 D + –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 GA040 D 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GAX42 040D can be used with GA040 D switch only.
GA063 SA
+ GAX50 00 -
GAX60 00
GAX31 A GAX33 A GAX10 11A GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA GAX41 063SA GAX11 10EA GAX10 11A GAX33 A GAX31 A
GAX42 063SA GAX42 063SA
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
1 1 1 –– 1 1 –– 1 1 1 11
1 1 1 –– 1 –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 –– 1 –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063SA + 1 –– 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 –– GA063SA –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 –– –– –– –– 2 1 1
1 1 –– –– 1 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA063 A...GA160 A
+ GAX50 01 -
GAX60 01
GAX42 063...160A GAX42 063...160A
GAX50 01 - GAX60 01
–– –– 1 –– 1 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA063 A + –– –– 2 –– ––
GA063 A +
–– –– 2 –– –– 1 –– 1 –– ––
GA080 A +
–– –– 1 –– 1 GA080 A + –– 1 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA100 A + 1 –– 1 –– ––
–– –– 1 1 –– GA100 A + –– –– 2 –– ––
–– –– 2 –– –– GA125 A + –– 1 1 –– ––
GA125 A +
–– –– 2 –– –– –– –– 2 –– ––
GA160 A +
1 1 –– –– 1 GA160 A 1 –– –– 1 1
1 1 –– –– –– –– –– –– 1 1
GA160A can be fitted with a single auxiliary contact (GAX1011A) per side.
Cannot be used with GA160A

page 11-26 page 11-30 page 11-32 and 37 11-7
Accessories
Handles Order code Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

per – Choice of handle fixing: ring or screw
pkg – Fixing handle interaxis:
no. [kg • GAX61/61B-GAX62/62B-GAX67B:
36x36mm/1.42x1.42” or 48x48mm/1.89x1.89”
DOOR COUPLING VERSION PADLOCKABLE, IP65 (4X). • GAX66/66B: 36x36mm/1.42x1.42”
Red/yellow. • GAX68/68B: 28x28mm/1.10x1.10” or
GAX61 For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C, 1 0.073 36x36mm/1.42x1.42”
GA040 D and GD... Screw fixing. • Compatible with pre-existing drillings of most
Handle with selector common types in the marketplace
flush-mounted . 5mm/0.2” – 1 to 3 padlocks in the Ø4…8mm/0.16...0.31” for all
GAX61 handles (except GAX68 only one Ø4…
GAX62 For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C, 1 0.072
GA040 D and GD... Screw fixing. 8mm/0.16...0.31”)
Handle with selector – Front plate dimensions:
protruding . 5mm/0.2” • GAX61/61B-GAX62/62B-GAX63/63B-GAX64/64B-
GAX67/67B: 65x65mm/2.56x2.56”
GAX63 For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA016 C... 1 0.068 • GAX66/66B: Ø75mm/2.95”
GA040 C, GA040 D and GD... • GAX68/68B: 48x48mm/1.89x1.89”
Ring fixing. Handle with – Tightening torque:
selector protruding . • Fixing ring types: 2.3Nm/20.4lbin
5mm/0.2” • GAX60B: 0.8Nm/7lbin
GAX63 2 Per GA...A, GA063 SA, 1 0.057 • GAX66/66B: 1.5Nm/13.3lbin
GAX62 GA040 D and GD... Ring fixing • All others: 1Nm/9lbin
lowered. Handle with selector – Degree of protection for all: IP65
protruding. 5mm/0.2” – Degree of protection for GAX66/66B: IP66; for UL/CSA
GAX64 For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA040 D 1 0.064 data see detail on page 11-10.
and GD... Ring fixing.
Handle with selector protruding Certifications and compliance
- defeatable (requirement Certifications obtained: cULus for GAX68.
UL508A). 5mm/0.2” See the table on page 11-10.
GAX66 For GA063 A...GA160 A, and 1 0.140
11 GAX60 01. Screw fixing.
Pistol handle - defeatable
GAX66 (req. UL 508A). 7mm/0.3”
GAX68 For GA016 A...GA063 SA, 1 0.060
GA040 D, GA016 C...GA040 C and
GD... Screw fixing. Handle with
selector lowered . 5mm/0.2”
Black.
GAX61 B For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C, 1 0.073
GAX68 GA040 D and GD... Screw fixing.
Handle with selector
flush-mounted . 5mm/0.2”
GAX62 B For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C, 1 0.072
GA040 D and GD... Screw fixing.
Handle with selector
protruding . 5mm/0.2”
GAX63 B For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA016 C... 1 0.068
GA040 C, GA040 D and GD...
GAX63 B Ring fixing. Handle with selector
protruding . 5mm/0.2”
GAX63 1B For GA…A, GA063 SA, GA016 C... 1 0.074
GA040 C, GA040 D and GD...
Ring fixing. Handle with
selector protruding padlockable
in ON pos. (UNI 9490 and
UNI EN 12845) . 5mm/0.2”
GAX63 2B For GA...A, GA063 SA, 1 0.057
GAX63 2B GA040 D and GD... Ring fixing
Low profile lowered. Handle with selector
protruding. 5mm/0.2”
GAX64 B For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA040 D 1 0.064
and GD... Ring fixing. Handle
with selector protruding - defeatable
(requirement UL508A).
5mm/0.2”
GAX66 B For GA063 A...GA160 A and 1 0.140
GAX60 01. Screw fixing.
GAX67 B Pistol handle - defeatable
(req. UL 508A). 7mm/0.3”
GAX67 B For mechanical interlock 1 0.078
GAX50... (I-O-II). 5mm/0.2”
GAX68 B For GA016 A...GA063 SA, 1 0.060
GA04 0 D, GA016 C...GA040 C and
GD... Screw fixing. Handle with
selector lowered . 5mm/0.2”
For GA...A and GA040 D switch disconnectors, ACCESSORIES FOR DOOR COUPLING CONTROL
separately purchase extension GAX7...
Snap-on fixing of GA016 C...GA040 C switch For GAX66 and GAX66 B handles.
disconnectors with the handle. GAX60 B Adaptor 7mm/0.3” per 1 0.010
Separately purchase GAX7…A shaft extension GA063 A...GA160 A
and GAX60 B handle having a 7mm square
section, not required for GAX60 01.
Dimensions
11-8 page 11-27
Accessories
Transformation of direct operating version into door coupling version

GA...A
GA063SA
GA040D
GAX7...
GD025AT2
GD032AT3
GD040AT4 ( 5 mm)
(GAX64/64B)
GAX63/63B
GAX63 1B
GAX63 2/2B
(GAX63/63B) GAX64/64B
(GAX63 1B)
GAX62/62B
GAX61/61B
11
GAX68/68B
C
GA063...160A GAX60B
A
( 5mm) GAX7150A E
E E
GAX7200A D
GAX7300A
( 7mm) D GAX66
E GAX66B
E
D
D
D
Door mount version

GA016C - GA040C
(GAX63/63B)
(GAX631B)
GAX63/63B
GA016C GAX631B
GA040C
GA063C - GA125C
GAX61/61B
GAX62/62B
GAX68/68B
Only for GA016C…GA040C
Dimensions
page 11-27 11-9
Accessories
Shaft extensions Order Characteristics Qty Wt Operational characteristics of fuse holder

Terminal covers code per – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V
pkg – IEC rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
Fuse holders/blocks n° [kg] – The fuse holder/blocks connects directly to the switch
disconnectors
Shaft extension for door coupling handles GAX61...GAX64, – Access to fuses only when the switch disconnectors
GAX68, GAX61 B...GAX64 B, GAX67 B, GAX68 B and are in OFF position.
mechanical interlock type GAX50 00, GAX50 01 and
mechanical coupling GAX60 00.
Terminal covers
GAX7 055 55mm/2.16” long 5mm/0.2” 1 0.012 For switch disconnectors
GAX7 070 70mm/2.75” long 5mm/0.2” 1 0.014
GAX7 090 90mm/3.54” long 5mm/0.2” 1 0.018
GAX7 150 150mm/5.90” long 5mm/0.2” 1 0.032 GA...A
GA063 SA
GAX7... GAX7 200 200mm/7.87” long 5mm/0.2” 1 0.070 GA040D
GAX83
GAX7 300 300mm/11.81” long 5mm/0.2” 1 0.068 GAX84
GAX7 400 400mm/15.75” long 5mm/0.2” 1 0.072
GAX83
GAX7 500 500mm/19.68” long 5mm/0.2” 1 0.090 GAX84
Shaft extension for door coupling handles GAX66, GAX66 B
and mechanical coupling system GAX60 01. GA...C
GAX7 150A 150mm/5.90” long 7mm/0.3” 1 0.090
GAX7... A GAX7 200A 200mm/7.87” long 7mm/0.3” 1 0.112
GAX7 300A 300mm/11.81” long 7mm/0.3” 1 0.160 For fourth pole
Set of 2 one-pole terminal covers for fourth pole. GAX41...A
GAX81 For GAX42 040A, GAX42 063SA, 1 0.009 GAX41 063SA
GAX42...A
GAX42 040C, GAX42 040D, GAX42 063SA
GAX41 040A, GAX41 063A GAX42 040D GAX81
and GAX41 040C GAX82
11 GAX82 For GAX42 063A...GAX42 160A 1 0.012 GAX81

GAX82
Set of 2 three-pole terminal covers.
GAX83 For GA016 A...GA040 A, 1 0.011 GAX41...C
GAX8... GA063 SA, GA016 C...GA040 C GAX42...C
and GA040 D
GAX84 For GA063 A...GA160 A, 1 0.030
GA063 C...GA125 C Certifications and compliance
Fuse holder for switch disconnectors. Certifications obtained:
cULus according to UL98A /

cULus according to UL508 /
GAX39 1 For GA016 A...GA032 A 1 0.132
Suitable for 10.3x38 fuse size
CSA C22.2 no. 14
CSA C22.2 no. 4

GAX39 1UL For GA016 A...GA025 A 1 0.135
Suitable for Class CC fuses
EAC
GAX39 1
Type
GAX61-GAX61 B
GAX62-GAX62 B
GAX63-GAX63 B
GAX63 1B –– ––
GAX63 2-GAX63 2B
GAX64-GAX64 B
GAX66-GAX66 B ––
GAX67 B
GAX68-GAX68 B ––
GAX60 B ––
GAX7 055…GAX7 500
GAX7 150A … GAX7 300A ––
GAX81-GAX83 ––
GAX82-GAX84 ––
GAX39 1 –– ––
GAX39 1UL –– ––
Certification obtained.
NOTE: Types GAX62/62B, GAX63/63B, GAX 632/2B,

GAX64/64B, GAX68/68B, GX67 are UL/CSA Type 1, 2,
3R, 12, 12K, 4, 4X external use when used with types
GA016…40A/C, GA040D and GA063SA while with
GA063…GA125A/C, only UL/CSA Type 1.
Types GAX61/61B and GAX66/66B are UL/CSA Type 1, 4,
4X external use with all GA types.

IEC/EN 60947-3, UL508, UL98A, CSA C22.2.

11-10 page 11-27 page 11-30
Switch disconnectors 16 to 160A
Empty enclosures Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

IEC/EN IP65 type code per – Enclosure material: ABS
pkg – For four-pole types not indicated, separately purchase
n° [kg] corresponding fourth pole GAX42…A and install on
enclosed 3-pole version
For switch disconnectors. – Possible accessories to mount afterwards, if any
With red/yellow handle. Complete with shaft extension. required:
GAZ1 For GA016 A...GA040 A/D 1 0.320 • GAX30 to provide shielded cable connection
GAZ2 For GA063 SA, 1 0.780 continuity (e.g. with static converters)
GA063 A...GA100 A • GAZ016…GAZ040..: 1 contact block both on the
right and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
GAZ3 For GA125 A...GA160 A 1 1.900 installed
With black handle. Complete with shaft extension. • Other types: 2 contact blocks both on the right and
GAZ1 GAZ2 GAZ1 B For GA016 A...GA040 A/D 1 0.320 left disconnector side unless 4th pole is installed
• GAZ125…GAZ160...: if any earth/ground and/or
GAZ2 B For GA063 SA, 1 0.730 neutral terminal required, separately purchase types
GA063 A...GA100 A GAX3… given on page 11−5.
GAZ3 B For GA125 A...GA160 A 1 1.900 – Padlockable handles
Accessory. – Sealable cover
– Tightening torque for cover screws:
GAX 30 Shielded cable fixing kit 1 0.083 • GAZ016…GAZ040… and GAZ1…: 1.3Nm/16lbin
for GAZ1 and GAZ1B • Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin
– Degree of protection: IP65
– Cable entry:
The empty enclosures are supplied with the following • GAZ016..., GAZ040... and GAZ1... types: PG16/M25
accessories: and PG13.5/M20 knockouts
Enclosure GAZ1 GAZ2 GAZ3 • GAZ063SA...GAZ100... and GAZ2... types:
GAZ1B GAZ2B GAZ3B PG16/M25 and PG29/M32 knockouts
GAZ3 Red/yellow handle GAX61 GAX61 GAX61 • GAZ125..., GAZ160... and GAZ3 types: Smooth
surfaces; can be drilled by customer.
Black handle GAX61B GAX61B GAX61B
Extension 1 1 1 Certifications and compliance
Neutral plate terminal 1 1 - Certifications obtained: EAC 11
Earth/Ground plate terminal 1 1 - IEC/EN 60947-1.
GAX30
Empty enclosures Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

code per – Enclosure material: Polycarbonate
UL/CSA Type 4/4X pkg – For four-pole types not indicated, separately purchase
corresponding fourth pole GAX4...A and install on
no. [kg] enclosed 3-pole UL-suffix version
For switch disconnectors. – Possible accessories to mount afterwards, if any
With red/yellow handle. Complete with shaft extension. required:
GAZ1 UL For GA016 A...GA040 A and 1 0.320 • GAX30 to provide shielded cable connection
GA040 D continuity (e.g. with static converters)
• GAZ016…GAZ040..: 1 contact block both on the
GAZ2 UL For GA063 SA 1 0.730 right and left disconnector side unless 4th pole is
With black handle. Complete with shaft extension. installed
GAZ1 B UL For GA016 A...GA040 A and 1 0.320 • Other types: 2 contact blocks both on the right and
GA040 D left disconnector side unless 4th pole is installed
GAZ1 UL – Padlockable handles
GAZ2 B UL For GA063 SA 1 0.730 – Sealable cover
Accessory. – Tightening torque for cover screws:
GAX 30 Shielded cable fixing kit 1 0.083 • GAZ016…GAZ040…UL and GAZ1…UL:
for GAZ1UL and GAZ1BUL 1.3Nm/16lbin
• Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin
– Degree of protection: IP65; UL/CSA Type 4/4X
The empty enclosures are supplied with the following
– Cable entry:
accessories:
• GAZ016…GAZ040…UL and GAZ1…UL types:
Enclosure GAZ1UL GAZ2UL PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20 knockouts
GAZ1BUL GAZ2BUL • GAZ063SA...UL and GAZ2…UL types: PG16/M25
Red/yellow handle GAX61 GAX61 and PG29/M32 knockouts
• GAZ063…GAZ125…UL types: Smooth surfaces;
GAZ2 UL Black handle GAX61B GAX61B can be drilled by customer.
Extension 1 1
Neutral plate terminal 1 1 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; cULus for GAZ016…
Earth/Ground plate terminal 1 1 GAZ125…UL, GAZ1...UL and GAZ2…UL types.
60947-1, UL 508 and CSA C22.2 no. 14 (up to
GAZ063SA…), UL98A and CSA C22.2 n° 4 (for all others).
GAX30

Enclosed switch disconnectors
IEC/EN IP65 Order IEC conventional free air Qty Wt Components

non-metallic enclosure code thermal current Ith per Enclosure Switch Handle
AC21A (690V) pkg disconnector
[A] n° [kg]
THREE POLE.
With red/yellow handle.
GAZ016 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA016 A GAX61
GAZ025 25 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA025 A GAX61
GAZ032 32 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA032 A GAX61
GAZ040 40 1 0.450 GAZ1 GA040 A GAX61
GAZ016...GAZ040... GAZ063 SA 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 GA063 SA GAX61
GAZ063 C 63 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA063 A GAX61
GAZ080 C 80 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA080 A GAX61
GAZ100 C 100 1 1.220 GAZ2 GA100 A GAX61
GAZ125 125 1 2.220 GAZ3 GA125 A GAX61
GAZ160 160 1 2.220 GAZ3 GA160 A GAX61
THREE POLE.
With black handle.
GAZ016 B 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 B GA016 A GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAB 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 B GA063 SA GAX61 B
GAZ063 CB 63 1 1.220 GAZ2 B GA063 A GAX61 B
GAZ063...100 C
GAZ080 CB 80 1 1.220 GAZ2 B GA080 A GAX61 B
11 GAZ100 CB 100 1 1.220 GAZ2 B GA100 A GAX61 B
FOUR POLE. Enclosure Switch 4th pole Handle
With red/yellow handle. disconnector
GAZ016 T4 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61
GAZ063 SAT4 63 1 0.780 GAZ2 GA063 SA GAX42063SA GAX61
GAZ063 CT4 63 1 1.250 GAZ2 GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61
GAZ100 CT4 100 1 1.250 GAZ2 GA100 A GAX42100A GAX61
GAZ125... GAZ160...
FOUR POLE.
With black handle.
GAZ016 T4B 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 B GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAT4B 63 1 0.780 GAZ2 B GA063 SA GAX42063SA GAX61 B
GAZ063 CT4B 63 1 1.250 GAZ2 B GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61 B
GAZ100 CT4B 100 1 1.250 GAZ2 B GA100 A GAX42100A GAX61 B

Enclosed switch disconnectors
UL/CSA Type 4/4X Order IEC conventional Qty Wt Components

non-metallic enclosure code free air thermal current Ith per Enclosure Switch Handle
AC21A (690V) pkg disconnector
[A] n° [kg]
THREE POLE.
GAZ016 UL 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 UL GA016 A GAX61
GAZ063 SA UL 63 1 0.870 GAZ2 UL GA063 SA GAX61
GAZ016...GAZ040...UL
GAZ063 UL 63 1 1.220 GAZ3 GA063 A GAX61
GAZ080 UL 80 1 2.220 GAZ3 GA080 A GAX61
GAZ100 UL 100 1 2.220 GAZ3 GA100 A GAX61
GAZ125 UL 125 1 2.220 GAZ3 GA125 A GAX61
THREE POLE.
With black handle. GAZ1 B UL GA016 A GAX61 B
GAZ016 B UL 16 1 0.450 GAZ1 B UL GA025 A GAX61 B
GAZ040 B UL 40 1 0.450 GAZ2 B UL GA063 SA GAX61 B
GAZ063 SAB UL 63 1 0.870 GAZ3 B GA063 A GAX61 B
GAZ063 B UL 63 1 1.220 GAZ3 B GA080 A GAX61 B
GAZ063 SA UL
GAZ125 B UL 125 1 2.220 Enclosure Switch 4th pole Handle 11
FOUR POLE. disconnector
With red/yellow handle. GAZ1 UL GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61
GAZ016 T4 UL 16 1 0.550 GAZ1 UL GA032 A GAX42040A GAX61
GAZ032 T4 UL 32 1 0.550 GAZ3 GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61
GAZ125 T4 UL 125 1 2.500
FOUR POLE. GAZ1 B UL GA016 A GAX42040A GAX61 B
With black handle.
GAZ1 B UL GA032 A GAX42040A GAX61 B
GAZ016 T4B UL 16 1 0.550
GAZ3 B GA063 A GAX42063A GAX61 B
GAZ032 T4B UL 32 1 0.550
GAZ3 B GA100 A GAX42100A GAX61 B
GAZ063 T4B UL 63 1 1.150
GAZ063 UL - GAZ125 UL GAZ3 B GA125 A GAX42125A GAX61 B
GAZ100 T4B UL 100 1 2.500
For major details contact our Customer Service office; see contact
GAZ125 T4B UL 125 1 2.500 details on inside front cover.
UL/CSA ratings
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Fuse class -

[HP] [HP] use at circuit max rating
600VAC rating at at 600V
600VAC
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] Type - [A]
208V
GAZ016... 1 2 5 5 10 10 16 5 RK5 - 20A
GAZ025... 11/2 3 71/2 71/2 15 20 25 5 RK5 - 30A
GAZ032... 2 5 10 10 20 20 32 5 RK5 - 35A
GAZ040... 2 5 10 15 20 25 40 5 RK5 - 45A
GAZ063S... 2 71/2 10 15 30 30 60 5 RK5 - 45A
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ016 - GAZ063S...UL types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n°14.
UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Manual Motor Controllers while UL designation is “GENERAL PURPOSE
SWITCH. INTERRUPTEUR USAGE GENERAL” and “SUITABLE AS MOTOR DISCONNECT”; GAZ063S... pending.
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Max fuse

[HP] [HP] use at circuit rating
600VAC rating at at 600V
600VAC
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] [A]
208V
GAZ063C... 3 71/2 20 20 40 40 60 10 100
GAZ080... 3 10 25 25 40 40 100 10 100
GAZ100... 5 10 30 30 50 50 100 10 100
GAZ125... 71/2 10 30 30 60 60 100 10 100
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ063C - GAZ125... types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 n°4.
For indication and reference purposes only while cCSAus is pending.
Lower ratings in this same UL/CSA category are available on specific request for volume orders.
For information, consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n°4 standards.

Enclosed changeover switches
UL/CSA Type 4/4X Order IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Components
non-metallic enclosure code tional free air operational per Enclosure Switch Interlock Handle
thermal current Ie pkg disconnectors
current Ith
AC21A AC23B AC23B
(690V) (400V) (500V)
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg]
3-pole line changeover switches I-0-II.
GAZ025 ET6 25 25 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA025A GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ040 ET6 40 40 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA040A GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ063SA ET6 63 45 25 1 1.070 GAZ UL 2x GA063SA GAX5000 GAX67 B
GAZ080 ET6 80 80 63 1 2.950 GAZ3 2x GA080A GAX5001 GAX67 B
Enclosure Switch Interlock Handle
GAZ 025 E...GAZ 063SA E... 4-pole line changeover switches I-0-II. disconnectors
GAZ025 ET8 25 25 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA025A + GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42040A
GAZ040 ET8 40 40 25 1 1.060 GAZ UL 2x GA040A+ GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42040A
GAZ063SA ET8 63 45 25 1 1.070 GAZ UL 2x GA063SA+ GAX5000 GAX67 B
2x GAX42063SA
GAZ080 ET8 80 80 63 1 2.950 GAZ3 2x GA080A+ GAX5001 GAX67 B
2x GAX42080A
2x GAX42125A
11 GAZ 080 E...
GAZ 160 E...
2x GAX42160A
For major details contact our Customer Service office; see contact
– Enclosure material: Polycarbonate
UL/CSA ratings – Possibility of fitting:
• 2 contact blocks both on the right and left side for
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Fuse class - GAZ…ET6 types
[HP] [HP] use at circuit max rating • 1 contact block both on the right and left side for
600VAC rating at at 600V GAZ…ET8 types
600VAC – Padlockable handle complete with extension
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] Type - [A] – Earth and neutral plate terminals
208V – Sealable enclosure cover
– Tightening torque for cover screws: 1.5Nm/13lbin
GAZ025... 11/2 3 71/2 71/2 15 20 25 5 RK5 - 30A – Degree of protection: IP65; UL/CSA type 4/4X
GAZ040... 2 5 10 15 20 25 40 5 RK5 - 45A – Cable entry:
GAZ063S... 2 71/2 10 15 30 30 60 5 RK5 - 45A • GAZ025…GAZ063SA… types: PG16/M25 and
PG29/M32 knockouts
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ025-GAZ040ET... types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n°14.
For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending. • GAZ080… and GAZ160… types: Smooth surfaces;
can be drilled by customer.
Type 1 phase 3 phase General Short- Max fuse Certifications and compliance
[HP] [HP] use at circuit rating Certifications obtained: cULus (except GAZ160E...), EAC.
600VAC rating at at 600V Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-3,
600VAC IEC/EN 60947-1, UL 508 and CSA C22.2 no. 14 (up to
GAZ063SA…), UL98A and CSA C22.2 no. 4 (for all
120V 240V 200- 240V 480V 600V [A] [kA] [A] others except GAZ160E... ).
208V
GA080... 3 10 25 25 40 40 100 10 100
GA125... 71/2 10 30 30 60 60 100 10 100
NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ080-GAZ125ET... types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 N°4.
For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending.
Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n°4 standards so not indicated in UL product marking.

11-14 page 11-29 page 11-30 page 11-32
Maximum combination
Enclosures
GAX10 11A GAX10 11A
GAX81 GAX42 040A GAX81

GAX42 063SA
GAX41 063SA GAX41 040A
oppure GAX42 040D oppure
GAX11 10EA GAX11 10EA
GAX83
GAX83
GAZ016...GAZ040
GAZ016 B...GAZ040 B
GAZ1
GAZ1 B
GAZ063 SA One auxiliary contact block can be fitted on the right and left sides of the
GAZ063 SAB disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed. The earth and neutral plate
GAZ2 terminals are standard supplied on the enclosure base.
GAZ2 B
Two auxiliary contacts blocks can be fitted both on the right and left sides of Sealing eyelet
the disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed. The earth and neutral
plate terminals are standard supplied on the enclosure base.
11
GAX12 10EA
oppure
GAX12 10EA
oppure
GAX34A
GAX34A
GAX32A
GAX10 11A
GAX32A
GAX10 11A
GAX41 125A GAX82

GAX42 063A...
GAX42 125A GAX82
GAX41 125A
GAX42 125A
GAX42 160A
GAX84
GAX84
GAZ063...GAZ100C
GAZ063...GAZ100CB
GAZ2
GAZ2 B
GAZ125
GAZ125 B
GAZ3
GAZ3 B
GAZ160
GAZ160 B
Two auxiliary contact blocks can be fitted both on the right and left sides of the disconnector unless the fourth pole is installed.
Earth and neutral plate terminals are standard supplied on the box base
If any earth/ground and/or neutral terminals are required, type GAX3..., purchase separately.

Three pole
Three pole Order IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles
switch disconnectors code tional free air operational per Refer to the left-hand switch disconnector table for the
thermal current Ie pkg selection of the handle.
current Ith For other accessories see pages 11-19 and 11-20.
AC21A AC23A AC23A
(500V) (400V) (500V) Direct operating Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black Red/yellow
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension .
GE0160 P 160 160 125 1 0.850 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66
GE0160 160 160 125 1 0.850
GE0200 200 160 125 1 0.900
GE0250 250 160 125 1 0.900
GE...
GE0251 250 250 200 1 1.700 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0315 315 315 250 1 1.700
GE0400 400 400 315 1 1.900
GE0630 630 630 500 1 4.200
GE0800 800 800 500 1 4.200
GE1250 1250 1000 800 1 7.600
GE1600 1600 1000 900 1 20.800
Three-pole switch With NFC fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension . Black Black Red/yellow
disconnectors with GE0050 F 50 50 50 1 1.250 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
fuse holder
11 GE0125 F 125 125 125 1 1.700
With NH fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
GE0160 N 160 160 125 1 1.700 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
GE0400 N 400 400 400 1 6.600
GE0800 N 800 630 630 1 13.000
With BS fuse holder . Comando diretto Door coupling
GE... F - GE...N - GE...B
GE0160 B 160 160 160 1 3.500 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0200 B 200 200 200 1 3.500
GE0250 B 250 250 250 1 6.600
GE0400 B 400 400 400 1 6.600
GE0800 B 800 630 630 1 13.000
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is General characteristics
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft – 50A to 1600A
extension is required in this case. – Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
See table on page 11-22 for the types of fuses. – Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
The switch disconnector is standard-supplied with fuse protection shield. GE0160 P on p. 11-19
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection.
250A Ith; 200A AC21A 500V. – Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
• 1000V for GE0160...GE1600, GE0160 P,
GE0250 N/B...GE0800 N/B
• 800V for GE0050 F, GE0125 F, GE0160 N, GE0161 N,
GE0160 B and GE0200 B
– Mechanical life:
• 30,000 cycles for GE0160...GE0250, GE0160 P
• 20,000 cycles for GE0251...GE0400
• 10,000 cycles for GE0500...GE1600, GE0050 F,
GE0125 F, GE0160 N/B...GE0400 N/B
• 5,000 cycles for GE0630 N/B and GE0800 N/B.

IEC/EN 60947-3.
Add-on blocks and accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

11-16 page 11-19 to 23 page 11-30 to 47 page 11-30 page 11-33 to 38
Four pole
Four-pole switch Order IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles
disconnectors code tional free air operational per Refer to the left-hand switch disconnector table for the
current Ith For the other accessories see pages 11-19 and 11-20.
AC21A AC23A AC23A
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black Red/yellow
GE0160 T4P 160 160 125 1 1.000 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66
GE0160 T4 160 160 125 1 1.000
GE0200 T4 200 160 125 1 1.000
GE0250 T4 250 160 125 1 1.000
GE0251 T4 250 250 200 1 1.900 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE...T4... GE0315 T4 315 315 250 1 1.900
GE0400 T4 400 400 315 1 2.100
GE0630 T4 630 630 500 1 4.500
GE0800 T4 800 800 500 1 4.500
GE1250 T4 1250 1000 800 1 7.600
GE1600 T4 1600 1000 900 1 20.800
With NFC fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling

Four-pole switch Separately purchase the handle and shaft extension . Black Black Red/yellow
disconnectors with GE0050 FT4 50 50 50 1 1.550 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
fuse holder GE0125 FT4 125 125 125 1 2.200
With NH fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
11
GE0160 NT4 160 160 125 1 2.200 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N
GE0400 NT4 400 400 400 1 8.000
GE0800 NT4 800 630 630 1 15.000
With BS fuse holder . Direct operating Door coupling
GE... FT4 - GE...NT4-GE...BT4
GE0160 BT4 160 160 160 1 4.000 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0200 BT4 200 200 200 1 4.000
GE0250 BT4 250 250 250 1 4.000
GE0400 BT4 400 400 400 1 8.000
GE0800 BT4 800 630 630 1 15.000
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is General characteristics
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft – 50A to 1600A
extension is required in this case. – 4-pole types (3P+N) with early-make late-break
See table on page 11-23 also for the types of fuses. neutral pole
The switch disconnector is standard-supplied with fuse protection
shield. – Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection. – Screw fixing: 35mm DIN rail mount adapter kit for
250A Ith; 200A AC21A 500V. GE0160 T4P on p. 11-19
– Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
• 1000V for GE0160 T4...GE1600 T4, GE0160 T4P,
GE0250...GE0800 NT4/BT4
• 800V for GE0160 NT4/BT4, GE0050 FT4,
GE0125 FT4, GEO161 NT4, GE0200 BT4
• 30,000 cycles for GE0160 T4...GE0250 T4, GE0160 T4P
• 20,000 cycles for GE0251 T4...GE0400 T4
• 10,000 cycles for GE0500 T4...GE1600 T4,
GE0050 FT4, GE0125 FT4, GE0160...GE0400 NT4/BT4.
• 5,000 cycles for GE0630 BT4/BT4 and GE0800
NT4/BT4.

IEC/EN 60947-3.
Add-on blocks and accessories Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

page 11-19 to 23 page 11-30 page 11-33 to 38 11-17
Changeover switches
Three-pole changeover Order IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles
switches code tional free air operational per Refer to the left-hand changeover switch table for the
AC21A AC23B AC23B
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black
GE0160 E 160 160 125 1 1.800 GEX61E GEX61NC
GE0200 E 200 160 125 1 1.900
GE0201 E 200 160 125 1 4.800 GEX62NE GEX62NC
GE0250 E 250 180 150 1 4.800
GE0315 E 315 200 160 1 5.000
GE...E GE0400 E 400 250 200 1 5.000
GE0500 E 500 400 250 1 11.500 GEX63NE GEX63NC
GE0630 E 630 500 315 1 11.500
GE0800 E 800 630 400 1 11.900
GE1000 E 1000 1000 800 1 21.800 GEX64NE GEX64NC
GE1250 E 1250 1000 900 1 23.600
GE1600 E 1600 1000 900 1 50.000
Four-pole changeover Order IEC conven- IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles
switches code tional free air operational per Refer to the left-hand changeover switch table for the
AC21A AC23B AC23B
11 (500V) (400V) (500V) Direct operating Door coupling
[A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Black Black
GE0160 ET4 160 160 125 1 2.100 GEX61E GEX61NC
GE0200 ET4 200 160 125 1 2.200
GE0201 ET4 200 160 125 1 5.300 GEX62NE GEX62NC
GE0250 ET4 250 180 150 1 5.300
GE0315 ET4 315 200 160 1 5.500
GE0400 ET4 400 250 200 1 5.500
GE...ET4 GE0500 ET4 500 400 250 1 12.600 GEX63NE GEX63NC
GE0630 ET4 630 500 315 1 12.600
GE0800 ET4 800 630 400 1 13.200
GE1000 ET4 1000 1000 800 1 24.300 GEX64NE GEX64NC
GE1250 ET4 1250 1000 900 1 26.700
GE1600 ET4 1600 1000 900 1 55.000
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft General characteristics
extension is required in this case. – 160A to 1600A
– 4-pole types (3P+N) with early-make late-break
neutral pole
– Available versions: direct operating and door coupling
– Screw fixing
– Mechanical life: 30,000 cycles for GE0160 E/ET4 and
GE0200 E/ET4 only; 10,000 cycles for other types.

IEC/EN 60947-3.

11-18 page 11-19 to 23 page 11-30 page 11-33 to 38
Order Description Qty Wt Selection of add-on contacts and accessories

code per Refer to the combinations given on pages 11-21 to 23
pkg and 11-25 for a correct choice based on the switch
n° [kg] disconnector type used.
Auxiliary contacts . General characteristics for auxiliary contacts
GEX10 11 1NA/1NC changeover 1 0.032 IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 16A.
Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0050 F,
GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N and General characteristics for motorised control unit
GE0160 NT4. – IEC rated auxiliary supply voltage: 230VAC/DC
GEX10... – 4 static outputs, 24VDC 120mA total
GEX10 11N 1NA/1NC changeover 1 0.024 – 4 inputs, contacts powered at 24VDC or 5VDC
Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types (500mA) for changeover control (pulsed or
GE0160 E, GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E continuous)
and GE1600 ET4. – RS485 Modbus (only for GEX692, GEX693) serial port
GEX10 11M 1NA/1NC changeover 1 0.016 for control, monitoring, programming
– Padlockable at 0 position
Adapter kit for 35mm DIN fixing. – Programming by position inputs
GEX89 00 For GE...P types only 1 0.040 – 4-digit display for status-error indications.
GEX89 00 Set of terminal covers consisting of pieces given below.
See pages from 11-21 to 11-23 and 11-25 for choice Certifications and compliance
according to switch disconnector type. Certifications obtained: EAC.
Screw fixing. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
IEC/EN 60947-3.
GEX81 01 1-piece set, transparent 1 0.048
sheet covering 4 poles
GEX81 11 2-piece set, each covers two poles 1 0.080
Snap-on fixing.
GEX8... GEX82 01 3-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.090
11
GEX82 03 4-piece set, each covers one pole 1 0.120
Motorised control unit for changeover switches.
Rated auxiliary supply voltage 230VAC/DC.
Complete with control handle, shaft extension and
GEX691C fixing elements.
GEX69 0C For GE0160 E...GE0200 E and 1 3.000
GE0160 ET4...GE0200 ET4
GEX69 1C For GE0201 E...GE0400 E and 1 3.000
GE0201 ET4...GE0400 ET4
GEX69 2 For GE0500 E...GE0800 E and 1 5.340
GE0500 ET4...GE0800 ET4
GEX69 3 For GE1000 E...GE1600 E and 1 5.753
GE1000 ET4...GE1600 ET4
Unsuitable for switch disconnectors type GE0050 F, GE0050 FT4,
GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N, GE0160 NT4, GE0160 E, GE0200 E,
GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and GE1600 ET4.
Changeover contact.
GEX69...
Wiring diagrams
page 11-31 11-19
Handles and shaft extensions
Order Characteristics Qty Wt Certifications and compliance

code per Certification obtained: EAC for all; cULus according to
pkg UL98A/CSA C22.2 no. 4 only for types GAX66… and
n° [kg] GAX7…A.
DIRECT OPERATING LEVER HANDLE. PADLOCKABLE . Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3.
Rotating type with screw fixing on switch disconnector.
Complete with shaft extension. Form and Handle types
GEX6 1D 95mm/3.7” black lever 1 0.340 handle length
GEX6 1E 50mm/2” black lever 1 0.052 GEX61E-GEX65D
GEX...D-GEX...E GEX6 2D 105mm/4.1” black lever 1 0.268 50mm/2”
GEX6 2NE 143mm/5.6” black lever 1 0.266 GAX66-GAX66B
GEX6 3D 245mm/9.6” black lever 1 0.536 65mm/2.6”
GEX6 3NE 176mm/6.9” black lever 1 0.424 GEX61N-GEX61NB
94mm/3.7” GEX61NC
GEX6 4D 360mm/14.2” black lever 1 0.612
GEX6 4NE 396mm/15.6” black lever 1 0.612 GEX61D
GEX6 2NE 95mm/3.74”
GEX6 5D 50mm/2” black lever 1 0.054
GEX6 6ND 115mm/4.5” black lever 1 0.216 GEX62D
GEX6 7ND 143mm/5.6” black lever 1 0.322 105mm/4.1”
GEX6 8ND 396mm/15.6” black lever 1 0.328 GEX66ND-GEX66NB
115mm/4.5” GEX66N
DOOR COUPLING LEVER HANDLE, PADLOCKABLE .
Red/yellow rotating type with screw fixing on door. GEX62NC-GEX62NE
Shaft extension to order separately . 143mm/5.6” GEX67N-GEX67NB
Defeatable (requirement UL508A). GEX67ND
GAX66 GAX66 65mm/2.6” lever. 1 0.075 GEX63NC-GEX63NE
7mm/0.3” . IP66 176mm/6.9”
GEX6 1N 94mm/3.7” lever. 1 0.326 2-hand
7mm/0.3”. IP65
11 245mm/9.6” GEX63D
GEX6 6N 115mm/4.5” lever. 1 0.248
10mm/0.4”. IP65 2-hand
360mm/14.2” GEX64D
GEX6 7N 143mm/5.6” lever. 1 0.302
14mm/0.6”. IP65 2-hand
GEX6 6N GEX6 8N 396mm/15.6” lever. 1 0.312 396mm/15.6” GEX64NC-GEX64NE
14mm/0.6”. IP65 GEX68N-GEX68NB
GEX68ND
DOOR COUPLING LEVER HANDLE, PADLOCKABLE .
Black rotating type with screw fixing on door.
Shaft extension to order separately .
Defeatable (requirement UL508A).
GAX66 B 65mm/2.6”. 7mm/0.3” . IP66 1 0.075
GEX6 1NB 94mm/3.7”. 7mm/0.3”. IP65 1 0.334
GEX6 8N
GEX6 1NC 94mm/3.7”. 7mm/0.3”. IP65 1 0.074
GEX6 2NC 143mm/5.6”. 10mm/0.4”. IP65 1 0.252
GEX6 3NC 176mm6.9”. 14mm/0.6”. IP65 1 0.302
GEX6 4NC 396mm15.6”. 14mm/0.6”. IP65 1 0.488
GEX6 6NB 115mm/4.5”. 10mm/0.4”. IP65 1 0.246
GEX6 7NB 143mm/5.6”. 14mm/0.6”. IP65 1 0.298
GEX6 8NB 396mm15.6”. 14mm/0.6”. IP65 1 0.310
GEX6 7NB SHAFT EXTENSIONS for door coupling handles .
GAX7 150A 150mm/5.9”, 7mm/0.3” 1 0.090
GAX7 200A 200mm/7.9”, 7mm/0.3” 1 0.112
GAX7 300A 300mm/11.8”, 7mm/0.3” 1 0.160
GEX7 162N 177mm/7”, 7mm/0.3” 1 0.056
GAX7...A GEX7 195N 195mm/7.7”, 14mm/0.6” 1 0.248
GEX7 227N 227mm/8.9”, 10mm/0.4” 1 0.154
GEX7 239N 239mm/9.4”, 14mm/0.6” 1 0.310
GEX7 250N 250mm/9.8”, 7mm/0.3” 1 0.084
GEX7... GEX7 345N 345mm/13.6”, 14mm/0.6” 1 0.480
GEX7 375N 375mm/14.7”, 10mm/0.4” 1 0.274
GEX7 387N 387mm/15.2”, 7mm/0.3” 1 0.142
GEX7 536N 536mm/21.1”, 10mm/0.4” 1 0.408
GEX7 535N 535mm/21”, 14mm/0.6” 1 0.784
GEX7 485N 485mm/19.1”, 14mm/0.6” 1 0.930
For the correct choice of See tables on pages 11-19 to 21 and 11-23 for the correct choice based on the
switch disconnector type used.
handles and shaft extensions 2-hand control.
with switch disconnector Use with GAX7...A extension types only.
see tables on pages

11-20 to 23 and 11-25.
11-20
Summary table of combinations - Three and four-pole changeover switches

Type IEC conven- IEC rated Direct Door coupling Extensions for door coupling handles Auxiliary Motorised Terminal covers
tional free air operating handles (the last 3 digits of GEX code indicate contacts control unit for:
thermal current handle lenght in mm/in) 1NO/1NC
current Ith
AC21A AC23B AC23B Black Black Red/yellow Exten. Max panel Line 1 Line 2 Load
(500V) (400V) (500V) section depth
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order Order Order
code code code code code code code code code code
Changeover switches. Three poles.
GE0160 E 160 160 125 GEX61E GEX61NC –– GEX7162N 7mm/ 269/10.59” GEX1011M GEX690C GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 E 200 160 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 342/13.36”
GEX7387N 479/18.86”
GE0201 E 200 160 125 GEX62NE GEX62NC –– GEX7227N 10mm/ 279/10.98” GEX1011 GEX691C GEX8212 GEX8211 GEX8311
GE0250 E 250 180 150 GEX7375N 0.4” 427/16.81”
GE0315 E 315 200 160 GEX7536N 588/23.15”
GE0400 E 400 250 200
GE0500 E 500 400 250 GEX63NE GEX63NC –– GEX7195N 14mm/ 257/10.12” GEX692 GEX8222 GEX8221 GEX8321
GE0630 E 630 500 315 GEX7345N 0.6” 407/16.02”
GE0800 E 800 630 400 GEX7535N 597/23.50”
GE1000 E 1000 1000 800 GEX64NE GEX64NC –– 280/11.02” GEX693 GEX8232 GEX8231 GEX8331
GE1250 E 1250 1000 900 430/16.93”
620/24.41”
GE1600 E 1600 1000 900 –– GEX7239N 14mm/ 579/22.79” GEX1011M GEX8141 –– GEX8141 11
GEX7485N 0.6” 825/32.48”
Changeover switches. Four poles.

GE0160 ET4 160 160 125 GEX61E GEX61NC –– GEX7162N 7mm/ 269/10.59” GEX1011M GEX690C GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 ET4 200 160 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 342/13.36”
GEX7387N 479/18.86”
GE0201 ET4 200 160 125 GEX62NE GEX62NC –– GEX7227N 10mm/ 279/10.86” GEX1011 GEX691C GEX8213 GEX8213 GEX8312
GE0250 ET4 250 180 150 GEX7375N 0.4” 427/16.81”
GE0315 ET4 315 200 160 GEX7536N 588/23.15”
GE0400 ET4 400 250 200
GE0500 ET4 500 400 250 GEX63NE GEX63NC –– GEX7195N 14mm/ 257/10.12” GEX692 GEX8223 GEX8223 GEX8322
GE0630 ET4 630 500 315 GEX7345N 0.6” 407/16.02”
GE0800 ET4 800 630 400 GEX7535N 597/23.50”
GE1000 ET4 1000 1000 800 GEX64NE GEX64NC –– 280/11.02” GEX693 GEX8233 GEX8233 GEX8332
GE1250 ET4 1250 1000 900 430/16.93”
620/24.41”
GE1600 ET4 1600 1000 900 –– GEX7239N 14mm/ 579/22.79” GEX1011M GEX8141 –– GEX8141
GEX7485N 0.6” 825/32.48”
GEX81 01 terminal cover protects the input of both Line 1 and Line 2; nothing else is required for Line 2.
Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

page 11-31 page 11-36 11-21
Summary table of combinations - Three-pole switch disconnectors

Three pole IEC conven- IEC rated Direct Door coupling Extensions for door coupling handles Auxiliary Type of Terminal covers
type tional free air operational operating handles (the last 3 digits of GEX code indicate contacts fuse for:
thermal current Ie handle lenght in mm/in) 1NO/1NC
current Ith
AC21A AC23A AC23A Black Black Red/yellow Exten. Max panel Line Load
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order
code code code code code code code code
Switch disconnectors.
GE0160 P 160 160 125 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66 GAX7150A 7mm/ 214/8.42” GEX1011 ––
GE0160 160 160 125 GAX7200A 0.3” 264/10.39” GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 200 160 125 GAX7300A 364/14.33”
GE0250 250 160 125
GE0251 250 250 200 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0315 315 315 250 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0400 400 400 315 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0500 500 500 400 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/9.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0630 630 630 500 GEX7345N 0.6” 401/15.79”
GE0800 800 800 500 GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1000 1000 1000 800 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
GE1250 1250 1000 800 417/16.42”
607/23.90”
11 GE1600 1600 1000 900 GEX7239N 14mm/ 399/15.71” GEX8141 GEX8141
GEX7485N 0.6” 645/25.39”
Switch disconnectors with NFC fuse holder.
GE0050 F 50 50 50 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 14x51
GE0125 F 125 125 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43” 22x58
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
Switch disconnectors with NH fuse holder.
GE0160 N 160 160 125 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 00 GEX8201 GEX8201
GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43”
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
GE0161 N 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 0 GEX8211 GEX8212
GEX7375N 0.4” 450/11.72”
GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0250 N 250 250 250 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” 1 GEX8221 GEX8222
GE0400 N 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” 2
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 N 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” 3 GEX8231 GEX8232
GE0800 N 800 630 630 435/17.12”
625/24.61”
Switch disconnectors with BS fuse holder.
GE0160 B 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 A4 GEX8211 GEX8212
GE0200 B 200 200 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 450/11.72” B1-B2
GE0250 B 250 250 250 GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0315 B 315 315 315 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” B1-B2-B3 GEX8221 GEX8222
GE0400 B 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” B1-B2-B3-B4
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 B 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” C1-C2 GEX8231 GEX8232
GE0800 B 800 630 630 435/17.12” C1-C2-C3
625/24.61”
The motorised control unit cannot be installed.
Standard supplied with IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2.
Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN rail, GEX89 00 kit is available on page 11-19.
250A Ith; 200A AC21A 500V.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 35mm2 for GE0050 F and of 95mm2 for GE0125 F.
Extension length for type GAX7150A is 186mm/7.32”, type GAX7200A 236mm/9.29” and type GAX7300A 336mm/13.23”.

11-22 page 11-30 page 11-34
Summary table of combinations - Four-pole switch disconnectors

Four pole IEC conven- IEC rated Direct Door coupling Extensions for door coupling handles Auxiliary Type of Terminal covers
type tional free air operational operating handles (the last 3 digits of GEX code indicate contacts fuse for:
current Ith
AC21A AC23A AC23A Black Black Red/yellow Exten. Max panel Line Load
Order [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order
Switch disconnectors.
GE0160 T4P 160 160 125 GEX65D GAX66B GAX66 GAX7150A 7mm/ 214/8.42” GEX1011 ––
GE0160 T4 160 160 125 GAX7200A 0.3” 264/10.39” GEX8101 GEX8101
GE0200 T4 200 160 125 GAX7300A 364/14.33”
GE0250 T4 250 160 125
GE0251 T4 250 250 200 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0315 T4 315 315 250 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0400 T4 400 400 315 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0500 T4 500 500 400 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/9.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0630 T4 630 630 500 GEX7345N 0.6” 401/15.79”
GE0800 T4 800 800 500 GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1000 T4 1000 1000 800 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
GE1250 T4 1250 1000 800 417/16.42”
607/23.90”
GE1600 T4 1600 1000 900 GEX7239N 14mm/ 399/15.71” GEX8141 GEX8141 11
GEX7485N 0.6” 645/25.39”
Switch disconnectors with NFC fuse holder.
GE0050 FT4 50 50 50 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 14x51
GE0125 FT4 125 125 125 GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43” 22x58
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
Switch disconnectors with NH fuse holder.
GE0160 NT4 160 160 125 GEX61D GEX61NB GEX61N GEX7162N 7mm/ 192/7.56” GEX1011N 00 GEX8203 GEX8203
GEX7250N 0.3” 265/10.43”
GEX7387N 402/15.83”
GE0161 NT4 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 0 GEX8213 GEX8213
GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72”
GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0250 NT4 250 250 250 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” 1 GEX8223 GEX8223
GE0400 NT4 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” 2
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 NT4 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” 3 GEX8233 GEX8233
GE0800 NT4 800 630 630 435/17.12”
625/24.61”
Switch disconnectors with BS fuse holder.
GE0160 BT4 160 160 160 GEX62D GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 302/11.89” GEX1011 A4 GEX8213 GEX8213
GE0200 BT4 200 200 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 450/17.72” B1-B2
GE0250 BT4 250 250 250 GEX7536N 611/24.05”
GE0315 BT4 315 315 315 GEX63D GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 271/10.67” B1-B2-B3 GEX8223 GEX8223
GE0400 BT4 400 400 400 GEX7345N 0.6” 421/16.57” B1-B2-B3-B4
GEX7535N 611/24.05”
GE0630 BT4 630 630 630 GEX64D GEX68NB GEX68N 285/11.22” C1-C2 GEX8233 GEX8233
GE0800 BT4 800 630 630 435/17.12” C1-C2-C3
625/24.61”
Standard supplied with IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 95mm2.
Suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN rail, GEX89 00 kit is available on page 11-19.
250A Ith; 200A AC21A 500V.
Standard supplied with IEC IP20 terminal protection warranted by wired equipment with only maximum conductor section of 35mm2 for GE0050 FT4 and of 95mm2 for GE0125 FT4.
Extension length for type GAX7150A is 186mm/7.32”, type GAX7200A 236mm/9.29” and type GAX7300A 336mm/13.23”.

page 11-30 page 11-34 11-23
For photovoltaic applications
GA series switch Order IEC IEC rated Qty Wt General characteristics

disconnectors code conven- operational per – Up to 40A, 1000VDC and 32A, 1200VDC
tional free current Ie pkg – Modular construction
air thermal DC21B – Jumpers for connecting the poles in series supplied as
current Ith standard with disconnectors GD series...
Poles in series – Available versions:
3 poles 4 poles • Direct operating
500V 600V 800V • Door coupling version. Use switch disconnector with
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] direct actuator and separately purchase the handle and
shaft extension for this version. See pages 11-8 to
Switch disconnector complete with black handle. 11-10
GA040 D 40 12 –– –– 1 0.135 – Screw or 35mm DIN rail fixing
GA040 D
Fourth pole. – Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.
GAX42 040D 40 –– 20 15 1 0.040 Operational characteristics
GAX42...D
– Rated insulation voltage for GA...D and GD...
Connection of 4 poles in series.
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page Ui: 1000V (pollution degree 3)
11-37. – Rated insulation voltage for GD...
Ui: 1500V (pollution degree 2)
– Rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV
GD series switch Order IEC IEC rated Qty Wt • 100,000 cycles GA040 D
disconnectors code conven- operational per • 10,000 cycles GD...
tional free current Ie pkg – Operating temperature: -25°C...+55°C
air thermal DC21B – Storage temperature: -40°C...+70°C
current Ith – Degree of protection: IP20.
800V 1000V 1200V
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg] Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed for USA and
Switch disconnector complete with black handle.
Canada (cULus - File E93602) as Manual Motor
GD025 AT2 25 25 16 –– 1 0.100 Controllers, to UL508/CSA C22.2 n° 14 for GA040 D and
GD032 AT3 32 32 32 –– 1 0.110 GAX42 040D.
11 GD040 AT4 GD040 AT4 40 40 40 32 1 0.120
IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508.
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page
11-37.
Strokes of GA…D types (main poles and add-on pole)
Travel 0→1 0° 30° 60° 90°

GA040 D 60°
Main poles
GAX420 40D 60°
Simultaneous fourth-pole add on
IEC/EN IP65 enclosed Order IEC IEC rated Qty Wt Components

GD series switch code conven- operational per Enclosure Switch Handle
tional free current Ie pkg disconnector
disconnectors air thermal DC21B
current Ith
800V 1000V 1200V
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg]
GAZ025 DT2 25 25 16 –– 1 0.450 GAZ1 GD025 AT2 GAX61
GAZ032 DT3 32 32 32 –– 1 1.050 GAZ2 GD032 AT3 GAX61
GAZ016 DT2 GAZ040 DT4 40 40 40 32 1 1.050 GAZ2 GD040 AT4 GAX61
With black handle.
GAZ025 DT2B 25 25 16 –– 1 0.450 GAZ1B GD025 AT2 GAX61B
GAZ032 DT3B 32 32 32 –– 1 1.050 GAZ2B GD032 AT3 GAX61B
GAZ040 DT4B 40 40 40 32 1 1.050 GAZ2B GD040 AT4 GAX61B
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page For further details contact our Customer Service office; see contact
11-37. details on inside front cover.
– Enclosure material: ABS
– Possible accessories to mount afterwards, if any
required:
GAZ040 DT4 • GAX30 to provide shielded cable connection
continuity (e.g. with static converters)
– Padlockable handles
– Sealable cover
– Tightening torque for cover screws:
• GAZ025…: 1.3Nm/16lbin
• Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin.
– Degree of protection: IP65
– Cable entry:
• GAZ025... types: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20
knockouts
• GAZ032... and GAZ040... types: PG16/M25 and
PG29/M32 knockouts.

Certifications obtained: EAC
IEC/EN 60947-1.

11-24 page 11-5 to 10 page 11-31 page 11-37
For photovoltaic applications
Four-pole switch Order IEC IEC rated Qty Wt Selection of handles and accessories
disconnectors code conven- operational current Ie per Refer to the left-hand switch disconnector table for the
tional free DC21B pkg selection of the handle.
air thermal For the other accessories see pages 11-19 and 11-20.
current Ith 220V 800V 1000V
[A] [A] [A] [A] n° [kg]
Direct operating and door coupling versions. Direct operating Door coupling
GE0125 DT4 125 125 125 100 1 1.900 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N
GE0250 DT4 250 250 250 200 1 2.000
GE0315 DT4 315 315 280 250 1 4.000
GE0630 DT4 630 630 600 500 1 4.500 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N
GE0800 DT4 800 800 630 630 1 4.500
GE...DT4 GE1250 DT4 1250 1250 1000 850 1 8.900 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N
Refer to the side table for the selection of the handle. A shaft insert is
standard-supplied with all direct operating handles so no other shaft General characteristics
extension is required in this case. – Up to 850A, 1000VAC
Connection of 4 poles in series. – Available versions:
For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page • Direct operating
11-38.
• Door coupling. Use switch disconnector with direct
actuator and separately purchase the handle and
shaft extension for this version. See page 11-20
– Screw fixing
• 20,000 cycles for GE0125 DT4, GE0250 DT4,
GE0315 DT4
• 10,000 cycles for GE0630 DT4, GE0800 DT4,
11
GE1250 DT4.

IEC/EN 60947-3.
Summary table of combinations - switch disconnectors for photovoltaic applications

Four pole IEC conven- IEC rated Direct Door coupling Extensions for door coupling handles Auxiliary Terminal covers
type tional free air operational operating handles (the last 3 digits of GEX code indicate contacts for:
current Ith DC21B
Black Black Red/yellow Exten. Max panel Line Load

600V 800V 1000V section depth
Order [A] [A] [A] [A] Order Order Order Order [mm/in] Order Order Order
Switch disconnectors for photovoltaic applications.
GE0125 DT4 125 125 125 100 GEX66ND GEX66NB GEX66N GEX7227N 10mm/ 267/10.51” GEX1011 GEX8111 GEX8111
GE0250 DT4 250 250 250 200 GEX7375N 0.4” 415/16.34”
GE0315 DT4 315 315 280 250 GEX7536N 576/22.68”
GE0630 DT4 630 630 600 500 GEX67ND GEX67NB GEX67N GEX7195N 14mm/ 251/19.88” GEX8121 GEX8121
GE0800 DT4 800 700 630 630 GEX7345N 0.6” 401/15.79”
GEX7535N 591/23.27”
GE1250 DT4 1250 1250 1000 850 GEX68ND GEX68NB GEX68N 267/10.51” GEX8131 GEX8131
417/16.42”
607/23.90”

GA SERIES - 16A TO 160A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Direct operating version Door mount version
GA016 A...GA040 A GA016 C...GA040 C GA063 C...GA125 C
GA063 SA GA063 A...GA160 A
GA040 D 36
(1.42”) 52.7 (2.07”) 19.9 70 (2.75”) 48.6 (1.91”) 20.8
(0.78”) (0.82”)
36 5 70 (2.75”) 5 70 (2.75”)
(1.42”) (0.20”) 43.9 (1.73”) 70 (2.75”) (0.20”) 43.9 (1.73”)
55.5 (2.18”)
44.8 (1.76”)
78 (3.07”)
100 (3.94”)
65 (2.56”)
78 (3.07”)
74 (2.91”)
45 (1.77”)
(1.28”)
32.5
100 (3.94”)
94 (3.70”)
(1.77”)
(1.65”)
45
41.9
22 14.2 (0.56”)
(0.87”)
38.2 14.4 (0.57”)

(1.50”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES

For GA016 A...GA040 A, GA063 SA, GA040 D
Auxiliary contacts Fourth pole Mechanical interlock GAX50 00 and
GAX10 11A GAX41 040A - GAX42 040A mechanical coupling system GAX60 00
GAX11 10EA GAX41 063SA - GAX42 063SA 72 (2.83”) 89 (3.50”)
GAX42 040D 27
(1.06”)
Neutral GAX31 A - earth/ground GAX33 A terminals
78 (3.07”)
46.2 (1.82”) 70 (2.75”)
(1.77”)
12 12
45
9 (0.47”) 43.6 (1.72”) (0.47”) 5 43.6 (1.72”)
(0.35”) (0.20”)
72.6 (2.86”)
78 (3.07”)
78 (3.07”)
(1.64”)
(1.28”)
41.6
32.5
GAX50 00 - GAX60 00
11 GAX41 040A, GAX42 040A...

GAX11 10EA
GAX41 063SA, GAX42 063SA,
GAX10 11A GAX42 040D, GAX31 A, GAX33 A
For GA063 A...GA160 A

Auxiliary contacts Fourth pole
GAX10 11A GAX41 125A
GAX12 10EA GAX42 063A...GAX42 160A Mechanical interlock GAX50 01 and
Neutral GAX32 A - earth/ground GAX34 A terminals mechanical coupling system GAX60 01
12 48.9 (1.93”) 140 (5.51”) 89 (3.50”)
23 70 (2.75”)
9 (0.47”) 46.2 (1.82”) (0.90”) 5 43.9 (1.73”)
(0.35”) 27
(0.20”)
(1.06”)
100 (3.94”)
72.6 (2.86”)
(1.77”)
78 (3.07”)
100 (3.94”)
(1.64”)
45
41.6
GAX50 01 - GAX60 01
GAX12 10EA GAX41 125A, GAX42 063A... GAX42 160A,
GAX32 A, GAX34 A
GAX10 11A
For GA016 C...GA040 C For GA063 C...GA125 C

Auxiliary contacts GAX10 11C Fourth pole GAX41 040C - Auxiliary contacts GAX10 11C Fourth pole GAX41 125C -
GAX42 040C GAX42 063C...GAX42 125C
Neutral GAX31 C - Neutral GAX32 C -
earth/ground GAX33 C terminals earth/ground GAX34 C terminals
46.2 (1.82”) 12 43 (1.69”) 8.5 46.2 (1.82”) 23
8.5 (0.90”) 48.6 (1.91”)
(0.47”) (0.33”)
(0.33”)
72.6 (2.86”)
78 (3.07”)
78 (3.07”)
(1.64”)
72.6 (2.86”)
100 (3.94”)
41.6
100 (3.94”)
(1.64”)
41.6
GAX10 11C GAX41 040C - GAX42 040C

GAX31 C - GAX33 C
GAX10 11C
GAX41 125C, GAX42 063C, GAX42 125C,
GAX32 C, GAX34 C
GD SERIES SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Direct operating version
GD025 AT2 GD032 AT3 GD040 AT4
11 11 11
38 (0.43”) 38 (0.43”) 38 (0.43”)
(1.50”) 15 7 (1.50”) 15 7 (1.50”) 15 7
(0.59”) (0.27”) (0.59”) (0.27”) (0.59”) (0.27”)
78 (3.07”)
78 (3.07”)
75 (2.95”)
78 (3.07”)
75 (2.95”)
75 (2.95”)
54 (2.12”) 33 54 (2.12”) 44 (1.73”) 54 (2.12”) 55 (2.16”)

(1.30”)
78.5 (3.09”) 89.5 (3.52”)
67.5 (2.66”)
11-26
Handles
GAX61/61B GAX62/62B
36 (1.42”) 1...4 48 (1.89”)
1...4 (0.04”...0.16”) 36 (1.42”)
(0.04”...0.16”) 28...32
(1.10”...1.26”) 22 35
22 23 65 (2.56”) (0.87”) (1.38”)
65 (2.56”) (0.87”) (0.90”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
65 (2.56”)
(1.10”...1.26”)
61.8 (2.43”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
65 (2.56”)
36 (1.42”)
28...32
Ø3
Ø3 (0.12”)
GAX63/63B GAX63 1B
34.3 35 34.3 35
(1.35”) (1.38”) 3.3 (0.13”) (1.35”) (1.38”) 3.3 (0.13”)
1...4 1...4
65 (2.56”) (0.04”...0.16”) 65 (2.56”) (0.04”...0.16”)
65 (2.56”)
65 (2.56”)
(1.46”)
(1.46”)
(1.29”)
(0.96”)
(1.29”)
(0 96”)
2.5 ) 2.5 )
Ø32.9
Ø32.9
24.3
24.3
37
37
Ø2 .88” Ø2 .88”
(0 (0
Padlockable at ON (≤3 padlocks)

per UNI 9490, UNI/EN 12485
GAX63 2/2B GAX64/64B

5 1...4 3.3 (0.13”) 35.5 1...4
(0.20”) (0.04”...0.16”) (1.40”) (0.04”...0.16”) 3.3 (0.13”)
65 (2.56”) 35 35
(1.38”) 65 (2.56”) (1.38”)
(0.79”)
Ø20
65 (2.56”)
(0.96”)
2.5 )
65 (2.56”)
24.3
Ø2 .88” 2.5 )
(0 Ø2 .88”
(0
(0.87”)
Ø22
GAX66/66B GAX67 B
11
1...4 1...4 48 (1.89”)
(0.04”...0.16”) (0.04”...0.16”) 36 (1.42”)
36 (1.42”) 22 35
98 (3.86”) 46 65 (2.56”) (0.87”)
(1.81”) (1.38”)
60 (2.36”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
36 (1.42”)
65 (2.56”)
48 (1.89”)
Ø66 (2.60”)
Ø48 (1.89”)
36 (1.42”)
75 (2.95”)
2
Ø3 26”)
(1.
Ø3 (0.12”)
Ø4.2 (0.16”)
GAX68/68B
36 (1.42”)
28...32
16 (1.10...1.26”)
48 (1.89”) (0.63”) 21.8
(0.86”)
(1.10...1.26”)
Ø16 (0.63”)
36 (1.42”)
28...32
1...4
(0.04”...0.16”)
Ø3 (0.12”)
Length A [mm (in)] maximum

Shaft extensions for door coupling handles
Extension [mm Type of handle
GAX7... 5 (0.20”) 5 (0.20”) (in)] GAX61... GAX62... GAX63... GAX64... GAX67 B GAX68...
65 (2.56”) A 65 (2.56”) A GAX7055 55 99 97 102 116 97 98.5
(2.16”) (3.90”) (3.82”) (4.01”) (4.57”) (3.82”) (3.88”)
GAX7070 70 114 112 117 131 112 113.5
(2.75”) (4.49”) (4.41”) (4.61”) (5.16”) (4.41”) (4.47”)
65 (2.56”)
GAX7090 90 134 132 137 151 132 133.5

(3.54”) (5.27”) (5.20”) (5.39”) (5.94”) (5.20”) (5.25”)
65 (2.56”)
GAX7150 150 194 192 197 211 192 193.5

(5.90”) (7.64”) (7.56”) (7.75”) (8.31”) (7.56”) (7.62”)
GAX7200 200 244 242 247 261 242 243.5
(7.87”) (9.61”) (9.53”) (9.72”) (10.27”) (9.53”) (9.59”)
GA016 A...GA040 A GAX7... GAX6... GAX7300 300 344 342 347 361 342 343.5
GA063 SA - GA040 D (11.81”) (13.54”) (13.46”) (13.66”) (14.21”) (13.46”) (13.52”)
GAX7... GAX6...
GAX7400 400 444 442 447 461 442 443.5
GA063 A...GA160 A (15.75”) (17.48”) (17.40”) (17.60”) (18.15”) (17.40”) (17.46”)
GAX7500 500 544 542 547 561 542 543.5
(19.68”) (21.42”) (21.34”) (21.53”) (22.09”) (21.34”) (21.40”)
GAX7... used with GAX50 00, GAX50 01 and GAX60 00
A1 A1 [mm (in)] maximum
A1
Extension Length Used with Used with
GAX60 00 GAX50 01 [mm GAX60 00 GAX50 00/GAX50 01
(in)] Type of handle
GAX61... GAX62... GAX63... GAX64... GAX68... GAX67 B
100 (3.94”)
65 (2.56”)
78 (3.07”)
65 (2.56”)
GAX7055 55 116 114 119 133 115.5 114

(2.16”) (4.57”) (4.49”) (4.68”) (5.24”) (4.55”) (4.49”)
GAX7070 70 131 129 134 148 130.5 129
(2.75”) (5.16”) (5.08”) (5.27”) (5.83”) (5.14”) (5.08”)
23 20 GAX7090 90 151 149 154 168 150.5 149
(0.90”) (0.90”) (3.54”) (5.94”) (5.87”) (6.06”) (6.61”) (5.92”) (5.87”)
GA016 A...GA040 A GAX7... GAX6... GAX7... GAX67 B GAX7150 150 211 209 214 228 210.5 209
GA063 SA - GA040 D (5.90”) (8.31”) (8.23”) (8.42”) (8.98”) (8.29”) (8.23”)
GA063 A...GA160 A
GAX7200 200 261 259 264 278 260.5 259
(7.87”) (10.27”) (10.20”) (10.39”) (10.94”) (10.25”) (10.20”)
GAX7300 300 361 359 364 378 360.5 359
(11.81”) (14.21”) (14.13”) (14.33) (14.88”) (14.20”) (14.13”)
GAX7400 400 461 459 464 468 460.5 459
(15.75”) (18.15”) (18.07”) (18.27”) (18.42”) (18.13”) (18.07”)
GAX7500 500 561 559 564 578 560.5 559
(19.68”) (22.09”) (22.01”) (22.20”) (22.75”) (22.07”) (22.01”)
11-27
GAX7...A used with GAX60 B and GAX66/66B GAX7...A used with GAX60 01 and GAX66/66B
88 (3.46”) 46 (1.81”)
46 (1.81”)
73 (2.87”)
98 (3.86”) 20 ±1 20 ±1
5 (0.20”) (0.79”
60 (2.36”) B (0.79” B1
±0.04”) ±0.04”)
GAX6001
min. 10 min. 10
(0.39”) (0.39”)
B B1
(2.60”)
GAX60B
Ø66
Extension Length
75 (2.95”)
with GAX66/66B handle
100 (3.94”)
75 (2.95”)
[mm(in)] [mm(in)] [mm(in)]
GAX7150A 176 118...229 119...205
(6.93”) (4.64”...9.01”) (4.68”...8.07”)
19 GAX7200A 226 118...279 119...255
(0.75”) (8.90”) (4.64”...10.99”) (4.68”...10.03”)
GAX7...A GAX66... GAX7...A GAX66... GAX7300A 326 118...379 119...355
GA063A...GA125A 1...4 (12.83”) (4.64”...14.92”) (4.68”...13.98”)
GA063 A...GA160 A 40
(1.57”) 19 (0.04”...0.16”)
(0.75”)
48 (1.89”) 1...4
19 (0.04”...0.16”)
(0.75”)
Terminal covers
GAX81 - GAX83 GAX82 - GAX84
GAX81 GAX83 3.6 46 (1.81”) GAX81 GAX83 GAX82 GAX84 GAX82 GAX84
(0.39”)
(0.39”)
(0.14”) 12.7 (0.50”) 8.6 (0.34”)
10
36 36 23
10
12 12 70 (2.75”) 20.7 23 70 (2.75”)
(1.42”) (1.42”) 46 (1.81”) (0.90”) (0.81”) 46 (1.81”) 46 (1.81”)
(0.47”) (0.47”) (0.90”)
(1.04”)
(1.04”)
37 (1.46”)
26.4
26.4
(1.47”)
37.3
9.9 (0.39”)
10 (0.39”)
Fuse holder
11 GAX39 1 - GAX39 1UL
80.1 (3.15”)
52.5 (2.07”) 75.2 (2.96”)
ENCLOSED SWITCH DISCONNECTORS AND EMPTY ENCLOSURES

GAZ016...GAZ040... GAZ063 SA...GAZ100 C...
GAZ016...GAZ040...UL GAZ063 SAUL...
GAZ1... - GAZ1...UL GAZ2... - GAZ2...UL
GAZ025D... 121.5 (4.78”)
175 (6.89”) 98.5 (3.88”)
120 (4.72”)
100 (3.94”) 97 (3.82”)
Ø4.5 (0.18”)
167.7 (6.60”)
159 (6.26”)
210 (8.27”)
54 (2.12”)
(0.92”)
23.3

Ø 4.5 (0.18”)
52 (2.05”) 153.5 (6.04”)
PG13.5 / M20
(1.10”)
PG16 / M25
120 (4.72”)
28
knockouts on top
and bottom
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32
knockouts on top
and bottom
184 (7.24”)
11-28
GAZ025 ET6...GAZ063 SAET6 - GAZ025 ET8...GAZ063 SAET8- GAZ032 D... - GAZ040 D... Drilling
175 (6.89”) A
148.5 (5.85”) Ø 4.5 (0.18”)
153.5 (6.04”)
184 (7.24”)
210 (8.27”)
52 (2.05”)
Type A
(1.10”)
28
GAZ032 D... 171.5 (6.75”)

GAZ040 D... 171.5 (6.75”)
PG16 / M25
PG29 / M32 GAZ025 ET... 183.5 (7.22”)
knockouts on top
148.5 (5.85”)
and bottom GAZ063 SAET... 183.5 (7.22”)
11
GAZ125... - GAZ063...UL - GAZ125...UL - GAZ3... - GAZ080 ET6 - GAZ125 ET6 - GAZ160 ET6 - GAZ080 ET8 - GAZ125 ET8 - GAZ160 ET8
A
280 ((11.02”)
172 (6.77”)
Type A
GAZ125 193 (7.60”)
GAZ063...UL 193 (7.60”)
GAZ125...UL 193 (7.60”)
GAZ3... 193 (7.60”)
220 (8.66”)
GAZ080 ET6 208 (8.19”)

GAZ125 ET6 208 (8.19”)
GAZ160 ET6 208 (8.19”)
GAZ080 ET8 208 (8.19”)
GAZ125 ET8 208 (8.19”)
GAZ160 ET8 208 (8.19”)
(0.51”)
13
GAZ125... - GAZ160... - GAZ080 UL...GAZ125...UL - GAZ3...

193 (7.60”)
13 220 (8.66”) 170 (6.69”)
(0.51”)
280 (11.02”)
11-29
Wiring diagrams
OPEN AND ENCLOSED GA SERIES 16A TO 160A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Three-pole disconnectors Fourth pole Four-pole disconnectors
GA016...GA160A/C GAX42... GAX41... GAZ016 T4...GAZ160 T4
GAZ016...GAZ160/B GAZ016 T4UL...GAZ125 T4UL
GAZ016UL...GAZ125UL
LINE Line Line LINE
L1 L2 L3 7 L4 7 L4 L4 (N) L1 L2 L3
8 T4 8 T4
T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
LOAD 7 L4 7 L4
LOAD
8 T4 8 T4
Load Load

Auxiliary contacts Neutral terminal Earth/Ground terminal Fuse holder
GAX10... GAX11... - GAX12... GAX31... - GAX32... GAX33... - GAX34... GAX39 1
57 L1 L2 L3
N PE
13 21
68
67
14 22 N PE
58 T1 T2 T3
11
ENCLOSED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
Three-pole GAZ...ET6 Four-pole GAZ...ET8
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
GE SERIES - 50A TO 1600A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

Three-pole disconnectors Three-pole disconnectors with fuse holders Four-pole disconnectors Four-pole disconnectors with fuse holders
GE0160 - GE1600 GE0050 F - GE0125 F GE0160 T4 - GE1600 T4 GE0050 FT4 - GE0125 FT4
GE0160 P GE0160 N - GE0800 N GE0160 T4P GE0160 NT4 - GE0800 NT4
GE0160 B - GE0800 B GE0160 BT4 - GE0800 BT4
LINE LINE LINE LINE
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 (N) L1 L2 L3 L4 (N) L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
160A TO 1250A CHANGEOVER SWITCHES

Three-pole switches Four-pole switches
GE0160 E - GE0200 E GE0201 E - GE1600 E GE0160 ET4 - GE0200 ET4 GE0201 ET4 - GE1600 ET4
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 LOAD L4 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L4 (N) L1 L2 L3 LOAD
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
T1 T2 T3 T4(N) T1 T2 T3
LINE 2 LINE 2
11-30
Wiring diagrams

Auxiliary contacts Motorised control unit Motorised control unit
GEX10 11 - GEX10 11M - GEX10 11N GEX69 0C - GEX69 1C GEX69 2 - GEX69 3
L L
230VAC/DC 230VAC/DC
N N
3 2
1 2 1 2
Closing pos. II
Closing pos. II
Open all poles
Open all poles

Closing pos. I
Closing pos. I
RS485
Signals
+24VDC
+6VDC
+5VDC
1
AUTO
LOCK
Error
GND
B A
0
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IN OUT
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS GA...D (poles in series to wire)

One-line control Two-lines control
2 poles in series 3 poles in series 4 poles in series 2+2 poles in series
LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE
+ – + – + – + – – +
L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – – LOAD + + LOAD – – LOAD +

– LOAD +
The positive pole fitted on the right side of the disconnector can also be
fitted on the left side; the connections must be changed in consequence.
11
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS GD... (jumpers supplied as standard)
One-line control
GD025 AT2 GD032 AT3 GD040 AT4
+ – – + –
1 3 1 3 5 1 3 5 7
2 4 2 4 6 2 4 6 8
+ – + + – + –
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS GE...DT4 (poles in series to wire)

One-line control
4 poles in series 4 (2+2) poles in series
LINE LINE
+ – + –
L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4
T1 T2 T3 T4 T1 T2 T3 T4
+ LOAD – + LOAD –
11-31
TYPE Three pole GA016... GA025... GA032... GA040... GA063 SA GA063... GA080... GA100... GA125... GA160A
4th pole GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 040... GAX42 063SA GAX42 063... GAX42 080... GAX42 100... GAX42 125... GAX42 160A
CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
IEC conventional free air A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125 160
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 1000
IEC rated impulse withstand kV 8
voltage Uimp
IEC rated operational current Ie
AC21A 400V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125 160
500V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125 160
690V A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125 160
AC22A 400V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125 125
500V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125 125
690V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125 125
AC23A 400V A 16 25 32 40 45 63 80 100 125 125
500V A 16 25 25 25 25 63 63 80 100 100
690V A 16 25 25 25 25 47 47 47 47 47
Power dissipation W/pole 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.0 2.9 1.6 2.6 4.0 6.3 12
IEC rated operational power
AC23A 400V kW 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 45 55 55 55
690V kW 11 22 22 22 22 45 45 45 45 45
IEC reactive power for control kvar 7.5 10 12.5 15 15 25 30 40 50 50
of capacitors 400V
Short circuit protection
11 Rated short-time A rms 800 2500
current (1s) Icw
Conditional short-circuit kA rms 50
current
With fuse class gG A 16 25 32 40 63 63 80 100 125 160
Making capacity AC23A 400V A 400 450 1250
Breaking capacity AC23A 400V A 320 360 1000
Mechanical life cycles 100,000 100,000 30,000
Electrical life (AC21A) cycles 100,000 15,000 30,000 1,500
Terminals type Pillar terminal
B
A mm 5.6 12.4
B mm 6.5 10.4
A
Screw M4 M8
Tool Phillips 2 Metric Allew key 4
Tightening torque Nm 1.8...2 5...6
lbin 16...18 45...54
Conductor section mm2 0.75...16 4...70
min...max AWG 18...6 12...1
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temperature Operating °C -25…+55
Storage °C -40…+70
Mounting position Normal Vertical
Admissible Any
Fixing By screw or on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
11-32
MOUNTING POSITION
The performances, given in this catalogue, have been established with GE series switch disconnectors mounted on a vertical place with line terminals facing upwards and load
terminals facing downwards.
All GE series switch disconnectors can be mounted as illustrated in the following figures without any derating except for position A.
It is not recommended to mount switch disconnectors with the neutral pole facing downwards.
SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
N
0
0
N
N
0
0
N
Pos. A
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES
N
11
II
I
I
N II
II
N
I
II
I
N
Pos. A
MOTORISED CHANGEOVER SWITCHES

Pos. A

Pos. A
Special assembly. Contact our Customer Service office (Tel. +39 035 4282422; E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com) for details.
11-33
GE series 160A to 1600A - Three and four-pole
TYPE 3-pole GE0160P

GE0160 GE0200 GE0250 GE0251 GE0315 GE0400 GE0500 GE0630 GE0800 GE1000 GE1250 GE1600
4-pole GE0160 T4P
GE0160 T4 GE0200 T4 GE0250 T4 GE0251 T4 GE0315 T4 GE0400 T4 GE0500 T4 GE0630 T4 GE0800 T4 GE1000 T4 GE1250 T4 GE1600 T4
IEC conventional free air A 160 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
IEC rated impulse kV 8 12
withstand Uimp
AC21A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
690V A 160 180 180 200 250 250 500 630 800 1000 1000 1600
AC22A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1000 1250
690V A 125 160 160 160 200 200 400 500 500 630 630 1000
AC23A 400V A 160 160 160 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1000 1000
500V A 125 125 125 200 250 315 400 500 500 800 800 900
690V A 80 80 80 160 160 160 250 315 315 500 500 630
IEC reactive power for control of kvar 72 72 72 112 142 180 225 284 284 360 360 450
capacitors 400V sen=0,65
AC23A 400V kW 90 90 90 138 174 220 220 349 443 443 443 554
690V kW 75 75 75 153 153 153 239 300 300 478 478 600
11 Short circuit protection

Rated short-time kA rms 7 12 16 25 50
current (1s) Icw
Conditional short-circuit kA rms 100 72 72
current
With fuse class gG A 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 2x800
Making capacity AC23A 400V A 1600 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000
Breaking capacity AC23A 400V A 1280 2000 2520 3200 4000 5000 6400 8000
Mechanical life cycles 30,000 20,000 10,000
Electrical life (AC23A 400V) cycles 1,000 500
Terminals type Lug terminal or bars
B
A mm 18 26 25 25 30 40 60
B mm 3 4 5 8 10
A
screw M8 M10 M14 M14
Tightening torque Nm 13 18 24 45 55
lbft 10 13 18 33 40
Max. conductor section mm2 95 120 185 240 2x185 2x240 2x300 ––
Max. bar size mm 5-25 5-30 7-25 6-40 2x 5-40 2x 10-50 2x 7-80
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
With protection fuse limiting peak current and specific through energy.
Not suitable for types GE0160 P and GE0160 T4P.
Types GE...P have hex terminals IP20.
4Nm/3lbft only for types GE...P.
The 4-pole types (3P+N) have early-make late-break neutral pole.
11-34
GE series 50A to 800A - Three pole and four pole with fuse holder
TYPE NFC 3-pole GE0050 F GE0125 F - - - - - - - -

4-pole GE0050 FT4 GE0125 FT4 - - - - - - - -
BS 3-pole - - GE0160 B - GE0200 B GE0250 B GE0315 B GE0400 B GE0630 B GE0800 B
4-pole - - GE0160 BT4 - GE0200 BT4 GE0250 BT4 GE0315 BT4 GE0400 BT4 GE0630 BT4 GE0800 BT4
NH 3-pole - - GE0160 N GE0161 N - GE0250 N - GE0400 N GE0630 N GE0800 N
4-pole - - GE0160 NT4 GE0161 NT4 - GE0250 NT4 - GE0400 NT4 GE0630 NT4 GE0800 NT4
IEC conventional free air A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 800 800 800 1000
IEC rated impulse kV 8 8 8 12
withstand Uimp
AC21A 400V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
500V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
690V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 630
AC22A 400V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
500V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 800
690V A 50 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 630
AC23A 400V A 50 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 630 630
500V A 50 125 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 630
690V A 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 400
Power dissipation NFC W/pole 4.7 12.5 –– –– –– –– –– –– –– ––
BS W/pole –– –– 12 –– 13 12 24 29 44 63
NH W/pole –– –– 11,8 13,5 –– 18,7 –– 30 48 57
IEC reactive power for control kvar 18 52 60 60 75 115 150 200 250 325
11
of capacitors 400V
AC23A 400V kW 25 65 90 90 110 132 185 220 355 355
690V kW 42 80 90 110 132 160 200 250 370 370
Spec. through energy I2t kA2s 0.076 0.19 0.19 0.478 0.478 1.6 1.6 1.6 4.6 4.6
Conditional short kA rms 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
circuit current
Making capacity AC23A 400V A 500 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 6300
Breaking capacity AC23A 400V A 400 1000 1280 1600 2000 2600 3200 5100
Electrical life (AC23A 400V) cycles 1,500 1,500 1,000 500
B
A mm – – 20 25 30 35 40 50
B mm – – 3 4 5 6
A
screw M6 M6 M8 M10 M12 4x M8
Tightening torque Nm 3 4 13 24 45 13
lbft 2,2 3 10 18 33 10
Max. conductor section mm2 35 93 95 120 240 2x185 2x240
Max. bar size mm – – 3-25 5-25 6-40 2x 7-50 2x 7-50
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Mounting position
Normal Vertical
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
50kA rms for types GE0160 N and GE0160 NT4.
Types GE...F have hex terminals IP20.
11-35
GE series 160A to 1600A - Three and four-pole switches
TYPE 3-pole GE0160 E GE0200 E GE0201 E GE0250 E GE0315 E GE0400 E GE0500 E GE0630 E GE0800 E GE1000 E GE1250 E GE1600 E
4-pole GE0160 ET4 GE0200 ET4 GE0201 ET4 GE0250 ET4 GE0315 ET4 GE0400 ET4 GE0500 ET4 GE0630 ET4 GE0800 ET4 GE1000 ET4 GE1250 ET4 GE1600 ET4
IEC conventional free air A 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 1000 1000
IEC rated impulse kV 8 12
withstand Uimp
AC21A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
690V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
AC22A 400V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500V A 160 200 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1250
690V A 125 160 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1000
AC23B 400V A 160 160 160 180 200 250 400 500 630 1000 1000 1000
500V A 125 125 125 150 160 200 250 315 400 800 900 900
690V A 80 80 80 100 125 160 250 250 315 630 630 630
Power dissipation W/pole 4 6 8 8,5 13,5 22 28 44,5 72 76 118 128
IEC reactive power for kvar 72 72 83 104 131 166 208 262 333 415 415 450
control of capacitors 400V
AC23A 400V kW 89 89 100 100 125 125 200 200 315 500 525 550
690V kW 76 76 69 86 108 138 173 216 272 544 575 600
11 Rated short-time kA rms 7 7 8 13 25 35
current (1s) Icw
Conditional short-circuit kA rms 100 100 100 72
current
With fuse class gG A 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 2x800
Making capacity AC23A 400V A 1600 1600 3150 4000 6300 8000 10000 10000 10000
Breaking capacity AC23A 400V A 1280 1280 2520 3200 5040 6400 8000 8000 8000
Electrical life (AC22A 400V) cycles 1,000 1,000 1,000 500
B
A mm 18 26 25 35 40 50 60
B mm 3 3 5 6 10
A
screw M8 M10 M12 M14 M14
Tightening torque Nm 13 24 45 55
lbft 10 18 33 40
Max. conductor section mm2 95 120 240 2x240 – – –
Max. bar size mm 4-13 13-18 2x 5-30 2x 6-45 2x 10-60 2x 7-80
(thickness-width)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
With protection fuse limiting peak current and specific through energy.
Value in AC22B.
11-36
GA and GD series for photovoltaic applications
TYPE Three-pole GA040 D GD025 AT2 GD032 AT3 GD040 AT4

4th-pole GAX42 040 D –– –– ––
IEC conventional free air A 40 25 32 40
IEC rated insulation V 1000 1000 / 1500
voltage Ui
IEC rated impulse kV 8
withstand Uimp
DC21B
2 poles in series 300V A 16 25 32 40
110V A 35 25 32 40
220V A 32 25 32 40
500V A 12 25 32 40
400V A 35 25 32 40
500V A 32 25 32 40
600V A 20 25 32 40
700V A 15 25 32 40
750V A 15 25 32 40
800V A 15 25 32 40
1000V A –– 16 32 40
1200V A –– –– –– 32
Power dissipation 1 1.2 2.8 5.8
11
Mechanical life cycles 100,000 10,000
Terminals type Mantle Screw with washer
A mm 5,6 ––
B
B mm 6,5 ––
A Screw M4 ––
Tool Phillips 2 Philips 1
Tightening torque Nm 1.8...2 1.2...1.6
lbin 16...18 10...14
Conductor section min.-max. mm2 0.75...16 1...10
AWG 18...6 18...8
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Maximum altitude m 3.000 2.000
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
1000V pollution degree 3; 1500V pollution degree 2.
11-37
GE series for photovoltaic applications
TYPE 4-pole GE0125 DT4 GE0250 DT4 GE0315 DT4

IEC conventional free air A 125 250 315
IEC rated impulse kV 8
withstand Uimp
DC21B 48V A 125 250 315
4 poles in series 110V A 125 250 315
220V A 125 250 315
400V A 125 250 315
440V A 125 250 315
500V A 125 250 315
600V A 125 250 315
750V A 125 250 290
800V A 125 250 280
850V A 125 240 270
900V A 125 220 260
1000V A 100 200 250
Mechanical life cycles 20,000
B
A mm 20 25 25
B mm 4 4 4
A
vite M8 M10 M10
11 Tightening torque Nm 13 18 18
lbft 10 13 13
Max. bar size mm 7-25
(hickness-width)
Max. conductor section mm2 185
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Admissible Any
Fixing Screw
4Nm/3lbft only for GE0160 DT4P.
GE0160 DT4P has pillar terminal, IP20.
Not suitable for type GE0160 DT4P.
11-38
GE series for photovoltaic applications
GE0630 DT4 GE0800 DT4 GE1250 DT4
630 800 1250
1000
12
630 800 1250

630 800 1250
630 800 1250
630 800 1250
630 750 1250
630 700 1250
630 700 1250
630 650 1050
600 630 1000
600 630 940
600 630 870
500 630 850
10,000
Lug terminal or bars
30 30 40
5 5 8
M10 M10 M14
24 24 45 11
18 18 33
2x 5-40 2x 5-40 2x 10-50
(thickness-width)
2x240 2x240 2x300
-25…+55
-40…+70
3000
Vertical
Any
Screw
4Nm/3lbft only for GE0160 DT4P.
GE0160 DT4P has pillar terminal, IP20.
Not suitable for type GE0160 DT4P.
11-39
Page 12-2 Page 12-2
AC FUSE HOLDERS AC FUSE HOLDERS CLASS CC FOR

• Version without indicator: NORTH AMERICAN MARKET
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N • Version without indicator: 1P, 2P, 3P
• Version with indicator: 1P • Version with indicator: 1P
• For fuses 10x38, 14x51 and 22x58mm • For 10x38mm UL/CSA class CC fuses
IEC class gG or aM. • IEC rated current: 30A
• IEC rated current: 32A, 50A, 100A • IEC rated voltage: 600VAC.
• IEC rated voltage: 690VAC.
Page 12-3 Page 12-3
DC FUSE HOLDERS FOR DC FUSES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC

PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS APPLICATIONS
• Version without indicator: 1P, 2P • 10x38mm, IEC class gPV
• Version with indicator: 1P, 2P • Rated current: 20A
• For 10x38mm IEC class gPV fuses • Rated voltage: 1000VDC.
• IEC rated current: 32A
• IEC rated voltage: 1000VDC
• IEC utilisation category: DC20B.
FUSE HOLDERS AND FUSES 12
Modular size for 10x38, 14x51

and 22x58mm fuses
Finger safe - IEC IP20 degree of
protection against accidental
contact with live parts and with
sealable cover for operators’ safety
Version with status indicator to
quickly determine if the fuse is still
operative or needs to be replaced
UL and CSA certified versions.
SEC. - PAGE
Fuse holders
AC fuse holders................................................................................................................................................................. 12 - 2
DC fuse holders for photovoltaic applications.................................................................................................................. 12 - 3
Fuses for photovoltaic applications .................................................................................... 12 - 3
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 12 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 12 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 12 - 4
I SOLATION
AND
C IRCUIT P ROTECTION
Fuse holders and fuses
AC fuse holders
Fuse holders UL Order code Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics
Recognized and CSA arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Un:
ment pkg • 690VAC (FB01 A 1M excluded)
certified n° n° [kg] • 400VAC (FB01 A 1M only)
– IEC rated current In:
For 10x38mm fuses. • FB01 A 1M: 32A
IEC 32A rated current at 690VAC. • FB01 F: 32A
FB01 F 1P 1P — 1 12 0.066 • FB02 A: 50A
FB01 F 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.065 • FB03 A: 100A
– IEC utilisation category:
FB01 A 1M 1P+N — 1 12 0.062 • FB01 A 1M: AC22B 400V
FB01 F 1N 1P+N — 2 6 0.134 • FB01 F: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
FB01 F 2P 2P — 2 6 0.132 • FB02 A: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
FB01 F 1PL • FB03 A: AC21B 690V
FB01 F... FB01 F 3P 3P — 3 4 0.188 – Suitable for IEC fuse class: gG and aM
FB01 F 3N 3P+N — 4 3 0.260 – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
For 14x51mm fuses.
IEC 50A rated current at 690VAC. Certifications and compliance
FB02 A 1P 1P — 1 6 0.113
(cURus - File E343395)

FB02 A 1PL 1P YES 1 6 0.114
UL Recognized for
USA and Canada
CSA certified
(File 252040
class 3211)
FB02 A 1N 1P+N — 2 3 0.237
FB02 A 2P 2P — 2 3 0.224
FB02 A 3P 3P — 3 2 0.335
FB02 A 3N 3P+N — 4 1 0.460
For 22x58mm fuses. Type
FB02 A 1PL IEC 100A rated current at 690VAC. FB01 F...
FB02 A...
FB03 A 1P 1P — 1 6 0.167 FB02 A... ––
FB03 A 1PL 1P YES 1 6 0.167 FB03 A... ––
FB03 A 1N 1P+N — 2 3 0.354 Certification obtained.
FB03 A 2P 2P — 2 3 0.334
“UL Recognized”: Products having this type of marking
FB03 A 3P 3P — 3 2 0.500
12 FB03 A 3N 3P+N — 4 1 0.720
are intended for use as components of complete
Use with gG/aM class 125A fuses, not dissipating more than 12W power.
NOTE: IEC 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
For FB01 F type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”. UL 4248-1, UL 4248-4, CSA C22.2 n°4248.1,
Current rating: 30A. Voltage rating: 750V max. CSA certified as
“Fuseholder Assemblies”. Current rating: 30A. Voltage rating: 600V max.
CSA C22.2 n°4248.4.
For FB02 A type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”.
Current rating: 50A. Voltage rating: 750V max.
FB03 A 1PL For FB03 A type: UL Recognized as “Fuseholders - Component”.
FB03 A... Current rating: 100A. Voltage rating: 750V max.
Fuse holders Order code Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics
arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Un: 690VAC
ment pkg – IEC rated current In: 32A
– IEC utilisation category: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
n° n° [kg] – Suitable for IEC fuse class: gG and aM
For 10x38mm fuses. – IEC degree of protection IP20.
IEC 32A rated current at 690VAC.
FB01 B 1P 1P — 1 12 0.062 Reference standards
FB01 B 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.064 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60269-1, IEC 60269-2.
FB01 B 1N 1P+N — 2 6 0.127
FB01 B... FB01 B 1PL FB01 B 2P 2P — 2 6 0.128
FB01 B 3P 3P — 3 4 0.185
FB01 B 3N 3P+N — 4 3 0.247
Fuse holders Order code Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics
arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Un: 600VAC
UL Listed and CSA certified ment pkg – IEC rated current In: 30A
for class CC fuses for North n° n° [kg]
– IEC utilisation category: AC22B 500V, AC21B 690V
– Suitable for UL/CSA fuse class: CC
American market For 10x38mm fuses. – IEC degree of protection IP20.
IEC 30A rated current at 600VAC.
FB01 G 1P 1P — 1 12 0.070 Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA (UL - File
FB01 G 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.072 E343395) and CSA certified for Canada only (File 252040
FB01 G 2P 2P — 2 6 0.140 class 6225).
FB01 G 3P 3P — 3 4 0.210 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-1,
IEC 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
NOTE: UL Listed and CSA certified as “Fuseholders, Cartridge Fuse” for UL 4248-1, UL 4248-4, CSA C22.2 n°4248.1,
use with Class CC fuses. Interrupting rating 200,000 Amps rms
symmetrical. Voltage rating 600V. Current rating 30A.
CSA C22.2 n°4248.4.
FB01 G 1PL
FB01 G...

12-2 page 12-3 page 12-4 page 12-4 page 12-5
DC fuse holders for photovoltaic applications.
Accessories
Fuse holders for photovolatic Order code Pole Status DIN Qty Wt Operational characteristics
applications arrange- indicator size per – IEC rated voltage Un: 1000VDC
ment pkg – IEC rated current In: 32A
UL Listed / CSA certified n° n° [kg] – IEC utilisation category: DC20B 1000VDC
– Suitable for IEC fuse class: gPV
For 10x38mm fuses. – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
IEC 32A rated current at 1000VDC.
FB01 D 1P 1P — 1 12 0.064 Certifications and compliance
FB01 D 1PL 1P YES 1 12 0.065 Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA (UL - File
E366062) and CSA certified for Canada (File 252040
FB01 D 2P 2P — 2 6 0.127 class 3211).
FB01 D 2PL 2P YES 2 6 0.130 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-1,
NOTE: UL Listed and CSA certified as “Photovoltaic fuseholders” for use IEC 60269-2, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3,
FB01 D... FB01 D 1PL with Photovoltaic Fuses. Interrupting rating 30,000 DC Amps. Voltage UL 4248-1, UL4248-18, CSA C22.2 n° 4248-1,
rating 1000V. Current rating 30A. CSA C22.2 n° 4248-18.
Fuses for photovoltaic Order code Rated current Qty Wt – IEC rated voltage Un: 1000VDC
applications In per – IEC rated current In: 2...20A
pkg – IEC fuse class: gPV.
[A] n° [kg]
10x38mm fuses. Reference standards
IEC 30kA breaking capacity at 1000VDC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60269-6.
FE01 D... FE01 D 00200 2 10 0.008
FE01 D 00400 4 10 0.008
FE01 D 00600 6 10 0.008
FE01 D 00800 8 10 0.008
FE01 D 01000 10 10 0.008
FE01 D 01200 12 10 0.008
FE01 D 01600 16 10 0.008
FE01 D 02000 20 10 0.008
Accessories Order code Description Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

SUPPLY CONNECTION BUSBARS
12
per
pkg – Central point of power supply: 100A max
– Side point of power supply: 63A max
n° [kg] – Pitch: 18mm/0.7”
FBX 00 Coupling clip for 10x38, 100 0.003 – Busbar section: 10mm2
FBX 00 FBX 01 FBX 02 14x51 and 22x58mm – For paralleling connection
FBX 03 sizes – Length can be cut in shorter sections.
FBX 01 Coupling pin for 100 0.005 See technical characteristics under derating factor of FB01... type
for derating factor.
10x38mm size type
FB01 A1M, FB01 B1P and Fuse holder combinations
FB01 B1PL only FB01...
FBX 02 Coupling pin for 14x51 100 0.008
and 22x58mm sizes FBX 00
P1X 90 33
FBX 03 Coupling pin for 10x38mm 1 0.005
size types FB01 F, FB01 G,
FB01 D only
For FB01 F, FB01 A1M, FB01 B and FB01 G types, AC duty.
P1X 90 31 1-phase connection 10 0.240 FBX 03
busbar for 57 modules in FBX 01
P1X 92 01 P1X 92 02
total, 996mm/39.2” long
P1X 90 32 2-phase connection 10 0.320 FB01... FB02...
busbar for 57 modules in
P1X 90 33 3-phase connection 10 0.474 FBX 00
busbar for 60 modules in
P1X 91 33 P1X 91 30 Kit of 5 isolating covers 10 0.030
for unused busbar
terminals
P1X 91 32 End cap for 2-phase 50 0.001 FBX 02
P1X 90 32 busbar
P1X 91 31 End cap for 1-phase 50 0.001 FB02...
P1X 90 31 busbar
FB03...
P1X 91 33 End cap for 3-phase 50 0.001
P1X 90 33 busbar
P1X 92 01 1-pole terminal for busbar 25 0.011
FBX 00
supply, 25mm²max
conductor
P1X 92 02 1-pole terminal for busbar 25 0.022
supply, 50mm²max
conductor
FBX 02
FB03...

page 12-4 page 12-4 page 12-5 12-3
FB01 F… FB01 G… FB01 D… FB01 A1M FB01 B…

70 (2.75”)
52.5 (2.07”) 79.5 (3.13”) 70 (2.75”)
35 61 (2.40”) 52.5 (2.07”) 79.5 (3.13”)
(1.38”) 56 (2.20”) 35
58 (2.28”) 17.5 61 (2.40”)
17.5 10 (1.38”)
(0.69”) 40 (1.57”) (0.69”) 56 (2.20”)
(0.39”) 17.5 10
(0.69”) (0.39”)
78 (3.07”)
88.8 (3.50”)
84 (3.31”)
(1.77”)
78 (3.07”)
45
45
45
(0.79”)
16.5 (0.65”)
6
(0.24”) 20 3.2 (0.12”) 16.5 (0.65”)
44 (1.73”) 3.2 (0.12”)
40 (1.57”)
53 (2.09”)
74.8 (2.94”)
FB02 A…
106 (4.17”)
79.5 (3.13”)
53 (2.09”)
26.5 100.7 (3.96”)
(1.04”) 76 (2.99”)
110 (4.33”)
45
35.3 (1.39”)
49.5 (1.95”)
FB03 A…
143 (5.63”)
12 107.5 (4.23”)
71.5 (2.81)
102.5 (4.03”)
35.5
(1.40”) 76.5 (3.01”)
126.5 (4.98”)
45
47 (1.85”)
49.5 (1.95”)
FUSES
FE01 D 0...
(0.40”)
10.3
38 (1.50”)
10
(0.39”)
Wiring diagrams
1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N
12-4
TYPE FB01 F... - FB01 A1M FB01 B... FB02 A... FB03 A... FB01 G... FB01 D...
Range AC Class CC (AC) DC
IEC maximum rated current In 32A 50A 100A 30A 32A
IEC maximum rated voltage Un 690VAC; 690VAC 600VAC 1000VDC
400VAC
IEC utilisation category AC22B 500V; AC21B 690V; AC21B 690V AC22B 500V; DC20B 1000VDC
AC22B 400V AC21B 690V
Maximum power dissipation 3W 5W 9.5W 3W 4W
Derating factor of current In 20°C 1
for different ambient temperatures 30°C 0.95
40°C 0.9
50°C 0.8
60°C 0.7
70°C 0.5
Derating factor of current In 1-4 1
for side-by-side fuse holders - 5-6 0.8
number of poles
7-9 0.7
≥10 0.6
Voltage for status indicator 120...690VAC 230...690VAC 120...600VAC 350...1000VDC
CONNECTIONS
Maximum tightening torque 2.5Nm; 2Nm / 22lbin 3Nm / 26lbin 4Nm / 35lbin 2.5Nm / 22lbin
Maximum conductor flexible/stranded 1x16mm2; 1x6mm2 / 8AWG 1x25mm2 / 6AWG 1x35mm2 / 2AWG 1x16mm2 / 8AWG 1x16mm2 / 8AWG
cross section rigid/solid 1x16mm ; 1x10mm / 8AWG
2 2 2
1x35mm / 8AWG 2
1x50mm / 1AWG 2
1x16mm / 8AWG 1x16mm2 / 8AWG
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+70°C
Storage temperature -40...+80°C
Maximum altitude 3,000m
Operation position Any 12
Fixing On 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
Values valid only for FB01 A 1M type. Use with gG/aM class 125A fuses, not dissipating more than 12W power.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR FE01 D... FUSES

TYPE Rated current Power consumption at 0.7 In Power consumption at In Prearcing I2t Total I2t at 1000VDC
[A] [W] [W] [A2s] [A2s]
FE01 D 00200 2 0.78 1.45 0.62 1
FE01 D 00400 4 0.64 1.57 6.9 11
FE01 D 00600 6 0.76 1.84 24 38
FE01 D 00800 8 0.8 1.92 62 99
FE01 D 01000 10 0.94 2.2 10 48
FE01 D 01200 12 0.98 2.4 18 94
FE01 D 01600 16 1.1 2.7 46 110
FE01 D 02000 20 1.2 2.9 118 282
TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS FOR FE01 D 0... FUSES

16A
20A
10A
12A
2A
4A
6A
8A
10000
1000
100
PREARCING TIME [s]
10
0.1
0.01
0.001
1 10 100 1000
PROSPECTIVE CURRENT [A rms]
12-5
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS UP TO 63A MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 80…125A

• 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P and 4P versions • 1P, 2P, 3P and 4P versions
• IEC rated current In: 1…63A • IEC rated current In: 80…125A
• IEC short-circuit breaking capacity Icn: • IEC short-circuit breaking capacity Icn:
10kA (6kA for 1P+N) 10kA
• Trip characteristic curve: Type B, C, D • Trip characteristic curve: Type C, D
• UL 1077 or UL 489 certified versions. • UL 1077 certified versions.
Page 13-11

• Auxiliary and indicator contacts
• Undervoltage trip releases
• Shunt trip releases
• Connection accessories
• UL 1077 or UL 489 certified versions
• Modular 16A socket.
Page 13-12 Page 13-12 Page 13-13
RESIDUAL BLOCKS FOR CIRCUIT RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT
BREAKERS UP TO 63A BREAKERS 25…63A BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT
• 2P, 3P and 4P versions • 2P and 4P versions PROTECTION UP TO 40A
• IEC rated current In: 40 and 63A • IEC rated current In: 25, 40 and 63A • 1P+N versions
• Residual current: 30 and 300mA • IEC rated residual operating current IΔn: • IEC rated current In: 6…40A
• Residual current operating characteristic: 30mA and 300mA • IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA
Type A. • Residual current operating characteristic: • Trip characteristic curve: Type C
Type A, B and AC. • Residual current: 30 and 300mA
• Residual current operating characteristic:
Type AC and A.
MINIATURE AND RESIDUAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS 13
UL 1077 and UL 489 certified

versions
High breaking capacity
Various trip characteristic curves:
Type B, C or D
Wide 1…125A current range
Residuals with trip characteristic
curves type A, AC and B
Accessories available.
SEC. - PAGE
Miniature circuit breakers 1…63A, UL 1077
1P - 10kA, 1 module, curve types B, C and D .................................................................................................................. 13 - 2
1P+N - 6kA, 1 module, curve type C ................................................................................................................................ 13 - 3
1P+N - 6kA, 2 modules, curve type C .............................................................................................................................. 13 - 3
2P - 10kA, 2 modules, curve types B, C and D ................................................................................................................ 13 - 4
Miniature circuit breakers 1...63A, UL 489
1P - 10kA, 1 module ........................................................................................................................................................ 13 - 7
2P - 10kA, 2 modules ....................................................................................................................................................... 13 - 8
3P - 10kA, 3 modules ....................................................................................................................................................... 13 - 9
Miniature circuit breakers 80…125A, UL 1077
1P, 2P, 3P and 4P - 10kA, curve type C ........................................................................................................................... 13 - 10
3P and 4P - 10kA, curve type D ...................................................................................................................................... 13 - 10
Add-on blocks and accessories ................................................................................................................................... 13 - 11
Residual blocks .............................................................................................................................................................. 13 - 12
Residual current operated circuit breakers .............................................................................................................. 13 - 12
Residual current operated circuit breakers with overcurrent protection ........................................................... 13 - 13
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 13 - 14
I SOLATION
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 13 - 14
AND
Miniature and residual circuit breakers
1P - 10kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics

1 module In Icn DIN per These devices are used to protect against short circuits
module pkg and overloads of wiring installations and loads in panel
Type [A] [kA] n° n° [kg] boards, office buildings, stores and similar applications.
Their purpose is circuit protection, circuit isolation and
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-curve load operation controls. They have instantaneous trip
characteristic. characteristics defined as follows:
P1 MB 1P B01 B 1 10 1 12 0.115 – B-curve: instantaneous trip 3…5 times In
P1 MB 1P B02 B 2 10 1 12 0.115 for non-inductive or low inductive loads (heating
resistors, generators, very long wire lines)
P1 MB 1P B04 B 4 10 1 12 0.115 – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In
P1 MB 1P B06 B 6 10 1 12 0.115 for inductive loads (mixed and inductive resistive
P1 MB 1P B10 B 10 10 1 12 0.115 loads with low inrush current)
– D-curve: instantaneous trip 10…14 times In
P1 MB 1P B13 B 13 10 1 12 0.115 for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
P1 MB 1P B16 B 16 10 1 12 0.115 current such as motors).
P1 MB 1P B20 B 20 10 1 12 0.115 Main features include:
– IEC rated current In: 1…63A
P1 MB 1P... P1 MB 1P B25 B 25 10 1 12 0.115 – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P1 MB 1P B32 B 32 10 1 12 0.115 – Contact status with flag indicator
P1 MB 1P B40 B 40 10 1 12 0.115 – Trip characteristic: Curve type B, C and D
– Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on MCB
P1 MB 1P B50 B 50 10 1 12 0.115 left side
P1 MB 1P B63 B 63 10 1 12 0.115 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve
characteristic. Operational characteristics
– Dissipation per pole: 3…13W
P1 MB 1P C01 C 1 10 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V
P1 MB 1P C02 C 2 10 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
P1 MB 1P C04 C 4 10 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC.
P1 MB 1P C06 C 6 10 1 12 0.115 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB 1P C10 C 10 10 1 12 0.115 Certifications obtained: TÜV – Rheinland; UL Recognized
P1 MB 1P C13 C 13 10 1 12 0.115 for USA and Canada (cURus – File E359585) as
“Supplementary Protectors”, designated as Overcurrent
P1 MB 1P C16 C 16 10 1 12 0.115 type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
P1 MB 1P C20 C 20 10 1 12 0.115 only with 125-135% tripping current of amp rating.
P1 MB 1P C25 C 25 10 1 12 0.115 Products having this type of marking are intended for use
13 P1 MB 1P C32 C 32 10 1 12 0.115
as components of complete workshop- assembled
equipment.
P1 MB 1P C40 C 40 10 1 12 0.115 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1,
P1 MB 1P C50 C 50 10 1 12 0.115 IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n°235.
P1 MB 1P C63 C 63 10 1 12 0.115
Single pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve
characteristic.
P1 MB 1P D01 D 1 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D02 D 2 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D04 D 4 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D06 D 6 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D10 D 10 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D13 D 13 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D16 D 16 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D20 D 20 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D25 D 25 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D32 D 32 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D40 D 40 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D50 D 50 10 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1P D63 D 63 10 1 12 0.115
Accessories Dimensions Technical characteristics

13-2 page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15
1P+N - 6kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
1 module In Icn DIN per These devices are used to protect against short circuits
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type, load operation controls. They have characteristics
B-curve characteristic. of instantaneous trip defined as follows:
P1 MB 1M B06 B 6 6 1 12 0.115 – B-curve: instantaneous trip 3…5 times In
P1 MB 1M B10 B 10 6 1 12 0.115 for non-inductive or low inductive loads (heating
P1 MB 1M B16 B 16 6 1 12 0.115 – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In
P1 MB 1M B20 B 20 6 1 12 0.115 for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and inductive
P1 MB 1M B25 B 25 6 1 12 0.115 with low inrush current)
P1 MB 1M B32 B 32 6 1 12 0.115 for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type, current such as motors).
C-curve characteristic. Main features include:
P1 MB 1M C02 C 2 6 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated current In: 2…40A
P1 MB 1M... – Pole width: 9mm/0.35” (0.5 module)
P1 MB 1M C04 C 4 6 1 12 0.115 – Contact status with flag indicator
P1 MB 1M C06 C 6 6 1 12 0.115 – Trip characteristic: Curve type B and C
P1 MB 1M C10 C 10 6 1 12 0.115 – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on left
side
P1 MB 1M C13 C 13 6 1 12 0.115 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 MB 1M C16 C 16 6 1 12 0.115
P1 MB 1M C20 C 20 6 1 12 0.115 Operational characteristics
– Dissipation per pole: 3…7.5W
P1 MB 1M C25 C 25 6 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V
P1 MB 1M C32 C 32 6 1 12 0.115 – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
P1 MB 1M C40 C 40 6 1 12 0.115 – IE rated operational voltage Ue: 230VAC.

Certifications obtained: TÜV Rheinland.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1, IEC/EN 60947-2.
1P+N - 6kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
2 modules In Icn DIN per – IEC rated current In: 1…63A 13
module pkg – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
Type [A] [kA] no. n° [kg] – Contact status with flag indicator
– Trip characteristic: Curve type C
Single pole + neutral, thermal and magnetic trip type, – Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on left
C-curve characteristic. side
P1 MB 1N C01 C 1 6 2 6 0.190 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 MB 1N C02 C 2 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C04 C 4 6 2 6 0.190 – Dissipation per pole: 3…13W
P1 MB 1N C06 C 6 6 2 6 0.190 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V
P1 MB 1N C10 C 10 6 2 6 0.190 – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
– IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC.
P1 MB 1N C16 C 16 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C20 C 20 6 2 6 0.190 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB 1N C25 C 25 6 2 6 0.190 Certifications obtained: TÜV Rheinland.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1, IEC/EN 60947-2.
P1 MB 1N C32 C 32 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N...
P1 MB 1N C40 C 40 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C50 C 50 6 2 6 0.190
P1 MB 1N C63 C 63 6 2 6 0.190

page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15 13-3

2 modules In Icn DIN per These devices are used to protect against short circuits
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-curve load operation controls. They have characteristics
characteristic. of instantaneous trip defined as follows:
P1 MB 2P B06 B 6 10 2 6 0.230 for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and inductive
P1 MB 2P B10 B 10 10 2 6 0.230 with low inrush current)
3 P1 MB 2P B13 B 13 10 2 6 0.230 for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
P1 MB 2P B25 B 25 10 2 6 0.230 – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P1 MB 2P... 4 P1 MB 2P B32 B 32 10 2 6 0.230 – Contact status with flag indicator
– Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on left
P1 MB 2P B50 B 50 10 2 6 0.230 side
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve
characteristic. Operational characteristics
P1 MB 2P C01 C 1 10 2 6 0.230 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V
“Supplementary Protectors”, designated as Overcurrent
P1 MB 2P C16 C 16 10 2 6 0.230 type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
13 P1 MB 2P C32 C 32 10 2 6 0.230
equipment.
P1 MB 2P C40 C 40 10 2 6 0.230 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1,
P1 MB 2P C63 C 63 10 2 6 0.230
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve
characteristic.
P1 MB 2P D01 D 1 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D02 D 2 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D04 D 4 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D06 D 6 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D10 D 10 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D13 D 13 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D16 D 16 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D20 D 20 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D25 D 25 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D32 D 32 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D40 D 40 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D50 D 50 10 2 6 0.230
P1 MB 2P D63 D 63 10 2 6 0.230

13-4 page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15

Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-curve load operation controls. They have characteristics
P1 MB 3P...
P1 MB 3P B25 B 25 10 3 4 0.345 – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
3 5 P1 MB 3P B32 B 32 10 3 4 0.345 – Contact status with flag indicator
– Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on left side
P1 MB 3P B63 B 63 10 3 4 0.345
4 6 Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve Operational characteristics
characteristic. – Dissipation per pole: 3…13W
P1 MB 3P C04 C 4 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C13 C 13 10 3 4 0.345 “Supplementary Protectors”, designated as Overcurrent
type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
P1 MB 3P C25 C 25 10 3 4 0.345 as components of complete workshop- assembled
P1 MB 3P C32 C 32 10 3 4 0.345
equipment.
13
P1 MB 3P C50 C 50 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P C63 C 63 10 3 4 0.345
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve
characteristic.
P1 MB 3P D01 D 1 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D02 D 2 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D04 D 4 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D06 D 6 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D10 D 10 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D13 D 13 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D16 D 16 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D20 D 20 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D25 D 25 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D32 D 32 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D40 D 40 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D50 D 50 10 3 4 0.345
P1 MB 3P D63 D 63 10 3 4 0.345

page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15 13-5

Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, B-curve load operation controls. They have characteristics of
characteristic. instantaneous trip defined as follows:
P1 MB 4P... P1 MB 4P B16 B 16 10 4 3 0.460 current such as motors).
3 5 7 P1 MB 4P B25 B 25 10 4 3 0.460 – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P1 MB 4P B32 B 32 10 4 3 0.460 – Contact status with flag indicator
– Auxiliary contacts and trip releases mounted on left side
4 6 8 P1 MB 4P B63 B 63 10 4 3 0.460
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve Operational characteristics
characteristic. – Dissipation per pole: 3…13W
P1 MB 4P C04 C 4 10 4 3 0.460
type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
P1 MB 4P C25 C 25 10 4 3 0.460 as components of complete workshop- assembled
13 P1 MB 4P C32 C 32 10 4 3 0.460
equipment.
P1 MB 4P C50 C 50 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P C63 C 63 10 4 3 0.460
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve
characteristic.
P1 MB 4P D01 D 1 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D02 D 2 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D04 D 4 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D06 D 6 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D10 D 10 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D13 D 13 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D16 D 16 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D20 D 20 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D25 D 25 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D32 D 32 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D40 D 40 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D50 D 50 10 4 3 0.460
P1 MB 4P D63 D 63 10 4 3 0.460

13-6 page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15
1P - 10kA Order code Curve IEC Rat. N° of Qty Wt General characteristics

1 module In volt. DIN per These devices comply with the UL 489 standard, mostly
mod. pkg used in the North American markets, are designed to
Type [A] [V] n° n° [kg] protect feeder circuits, the part of the system from the
network supply point to the protection device for a
One pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve branch circuit. They can in any case be used on the
characteristic. international market thanks to compliance with the
P1 MB UH 1P C01 C 1 277 1 12 0.133 IEC/EN60947-2 standard as well.
P1 MB UH 1P C01V6 C 1.6 277 1 12 0.133 They have characteristics of tripping instantaneously
defined as follows:
P1 MB UH 1P C02 C 2 277 1 12 0.133 – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In
P1 MB UH 1P C03 C 3 277 1 12 0.133 for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and
P1 MB UH 1P C04 C 4 277 1 12 0.133 inductive with low inrush current)
P1 MB UH 1P C05 C 5 277 1 12 0.133 for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
P1 MB UH 1P C06 C 6 277 1 12 0.133 current such as motors).
P1 MB UH 1P C07 C 7 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P C08 C 8 277 1 12 0.133 – Dissipation per pole: 3…13W
P1 MB... 1P... P1 MB UH 1P C10 C 10 277 1 12 0.133 – Rated voltage 1…32A: 277V (UL489)
P1 MB UH 1P C12 C 12 277 1 12 0.133 – Rated voltage 35…63A: 120V (UL489)
– Rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V (IEC/EN60947-2)
P1 MB UH 1P C13 C 13 277 1 12 0.133 – Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV (IEC/EN60947-2)
P1 MB UH 1P C15 C 15 277 1 12 0.133 – Rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC
P1 MB UH 1P C16 C 16 277 1 12 0.133 (IEC/EN60947-2)
– DC operational voltage: 60V
P1 MB UH 1P C20 C 20 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P C25 C 25 277 1 12 0.133 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB UH 1P C30 C 30 277 1 12 0.133 Certifications obtained: cULus.
Compliant with standards: UL 489, IEC/EN 60947-2.
P1 MB UH 1P C32 C 32 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P C35 C 35 120 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P C40 C 40 120 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P C50 C 50 120 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P C60 C 60 120 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P C63 C 63 120 1 12 0.133
One pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve
characteristic.
13
P1 MB UH 1P D01 D 1 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D01V6 D 1.6 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D02 D 2 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D03 D 3 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D04 D 4 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D05 D 5 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D06 D 6 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D07 D 7 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D08 D 8 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D10 D 10 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D12 D 12 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D13 D 13 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D15 D 15 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D16 D 16 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D20 D 20 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D25 D 25 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D30 D 30 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UH 1P D32 D 32 277 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P D35 D 35 120 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P D40 D 40 120 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P D50 D 50 120 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P D60 D 60 120 1 12 0.133
P1 MB UL 1P D63 D 63 120 1 12 0.133

page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15 13-7
2P - 10kA Order code Cur- IEC Rated N° of Qty Wt General characteristics

2 modules ve In voltage DIN per These devices comply with the UL 489 standard, mostly
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve branch circuit. They can in any case be used on the
P1 MB UH 2P C01 C 1 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 IEC/EN60947-2 standard as well.
P1 MB UH 2P C01V6 C 1.6 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 They have characteristics of tripping instantaneously
defined as follows:
P1 MB UH 2P C02 C 2 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In
P1 MB UH 2P C03 C 3 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and
P1 MB UH 2P C04 C 4 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 inductive with low inrush current)
P1 MB UH 2P C05 C 5 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
P1 MB UH 2P C06 C 6 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 current such as motors).
P1 MB UH 2P C07 C 7 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P C08 C 8 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 – Rated voltage 1…32A: 480Y/277V (UL489)
P1 MB... 2P... P1 MB UH 2P C10 C 10 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 – Rated voltage 40…63A: 240V (UL489)
P1 MB UH 2P C12 C 12 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V (IEC/EN60947-2)
– Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV (IEC/EN60947-2)
P1 MB UH 2P C13 C 13 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 – Rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC
P1 MB UH 2P C15 C 15 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 (IEC/EN60947-2)
P1 MB UH 2P C16 C 16 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 – DC operational voltage: 125V
P1 MB UH 2P C20 C 20 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 Certifications and compliance
P1 MB UH 2P C25 C 25 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 Certifications obtained: cULus.
P1 MB UH 2P C30 C 30 480Y/277 2 6 0.255 Compliant with standards: UL 489, IEC/EN 60947-2.
P1 MB UH 2P C32 C 32 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P C35 C 35 240 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P C40 C 40 240 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P C50 C 50 240 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P C60 C 60 240 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P C63 C 63 240 2 6 0.255
13 Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve

characteristic.
P1 MB UH 2P D01 D 1 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D01V6 D 1,6 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D02 D 2 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D03 D 3 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D04 D 4 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D05 D 5 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D06 D 6 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D07 D 7 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D08 D 8 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D10 D 10 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D12 D 12 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D13 D 13 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D15 D 15 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D16 D 16 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D20 D 20 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D25 D 25 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D30 D 30 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UH 2P D32 D 32 480Y/277 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P D35 D 35 240 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P D40 D 40 240 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P D50 D 50 240 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P D60 D 60 240 2 6 0.255
P1 MB UL 2P D63 D 63 240 2 6 0.255

13-8 page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15
3P - 10kA Order code Cur- IEC Rated N° of Qty Wt General characteristics

3 modules ve In voltage DIN per These devices comply with the UL 489 standard, mostly
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve branch circuit. They can in any case be used on the
P1 MB UH 3P C01 C 1 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 IEC/EN60947-2 standard as well.
P1 MB UH 3P C01V6 C 1.6 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 They have characteristics of tripping instantaneously
defined as follows:
P1 MB UH 3P C02 C 2 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In
P1 MB UH 3P C03 C 3 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and
P1 MB UH 3P C04 C 4 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 inductive with low inrush current)
P1 MB UH 3P C05 C 5 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
P1 MB UH 3P C06 C 6 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 current such as motors).
P1 MB UH 3P C07 C 7 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P C08 C 8 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 – Rated voltage 1…32A: 480Y/277V (UL 489)
P1 MB... 3P... P1 MB UH 3P C10 C 10 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 – Rated voltage 40…63A: 240V (UL 489)
P1 MB UH 3P C12 C 12 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V (IEC/EN60947-2)
– Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV (IEC/EN60947-2)
3 5 P1 MB UH 3P C13 C 13 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 – Rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC
P1 MB UH 3P C15 C 15 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 (IEC/EN60947-2)
P1 MB UH 3P C16 C 16 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 – DC operational voltage: 125V
P1 MB UH 3P C20 C 20 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 Certifications and compliance
4 6 P1 MB UH 3P C25 C 25 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 Certifications obtained: cULus.
P1 MB UH 3P C30 C 30 480Y/277 3 4 0.388 Compliant with standards: UL 489, IEC/EN 60947-2.
P1 MB UH 3P C32 C 32 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P C35 C 35 240 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P C40 C 40 240 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P C50 C 50 240 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P C60 C 60 240 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P C63 C 63 240 3 4 0.388
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve
characteristic.
13
P1 MB UH 3P D01 D 1 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D01V6 D 1,6 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D02 D 2 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D03 D 3 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D04 D 4 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D05 D 5 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D06 D 6 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D07 D 7 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D08 D 8 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D10 D 10 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D12 D 12 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D13 D 13 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D15 D 15 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D16 D 16 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D20 D 20 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D25 D 25 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D30 D 30 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UH 3P D32 D 32 480Y/277 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P D35 D 35 240 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P D40 D 40 240 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P D50 D 50 240 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P D60 D 60 240 3 4 0.388
P1 MB UL 3P D63 D 63 240 3 4 0.388

page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15 13-9
1P, 2P, 3P and 4P - 10kA Order code Curve IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
In Icn DIN per These devices are used to protect against short circuits
Type [A] [kA] no. no. [kg] boards, office buildings, stores and similar applications.
One pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve load operation controls. They have characteristics
P2 MB 1P C080 C 80 10 1.5 9 0.166 – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In
P2 MB 1P C100 C 100 10 1.5 9 0.166 for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and
inductive with low inrush current)
P2 MB 1P C125 C 125 10 1.5 9 0.166 – D-curve: instantaneous trip 10…14 times In
Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and
characteristic. current such as motors).
P2 MB 2P C080 C 80 10 3 4 0.340 Main features include:
P2 MB 2P C100 C 100 10 3 4 0.340 – Pole width: 27mm / 1.06”
P2 MB 1P... P2 MB 2P C125 C 125 10 3 4 0.340 – Contact status with flag indicator
Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve – Trip characteristic: Curve type C and D
characteristic. – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P2 MB 3P C080 C 80 10 4.5 3 0.510 Operational characteristics
P2 MB 3P C100 C 100 10 4.5 3 0.510 – Dissipation per pole: 15…20W
P2 MB 3P C125 C 125 10 4.5 3 0.510 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400V
– IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 6kV
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve – IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC.
characteristic.
for USA and Canada (cURus – File E359585) as
P2 MB 2P... Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve type, for general industrial use, suitable for factory wiring
characteristic. only with more than135% tripping current of amp rating.
P2 MB 3P D080 D 80 10 4.5 3 0.510 Products having this type of marking are intended for use
P2 MB 3P D100 D 100 10 4.5 3 0.510 equipment.
P2 MB 3P D125 D 125 10 4.5 3 0.510 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60898-1,
Four pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve IEC/EN 60947-2, UL 1077, CSA C22.2 n°235.
characteristic.
13 P2 MB 4P D080 D 80 10 6 2 0.510
P2 MB 4P D100 D 100 10 6 2 0.510
P2 MB 4P D125 D 125 10 6 2 0.510
Icn at 230V.
P2 MB 3P...
P2 MB 4P...
3 5 7
4 6 8

13-10 page 13-11 page 13-14 page 13-15
Add-on blocks for miniature Order code Description Qty per Qty Wt General characteristics
circuit breakers 1…63A MCB per – Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm/0.35”
pkg (0.5 module)
n° n° [kg] – Undervoltage and shunt trip release width:
18mm/0.71” (1 module)
Auxiliary contact. – Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB left
P1X 1011 1 changeover contact 1 10 0.040 side only of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release
P1X 1011UH 1 changeover contact 1 10 0.040 directly on MCB side and then 2 contacts of which
for P1 MB U 1 auxiliary and 1 indicator.
Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip. Operational characteristics
P1X 1311 1 changeover contact 1 10 0.040
– IEC rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V; 3A 400V
Undervoltage trip release. (auxiliary contacts).
P1X 14230 230V 50/60Hz 1 8 0.070 Certifications and compliance
Shunt trip release. Certifications obtained: cURus (excluding P1X 14230),
P1X 16230 110…415V 50/60Hz 1 8 0.070 UL (only P1X 14230)
P1X 1011 P1X 16230 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
Not suitable for P1 MB U... CSA C22.2 n° 5.
Add-on blocks for Order code Description Qty per Qty Wt General characteristics
MCB per – Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm/0.35”
miniature circuit breakers pkg (0.5 module)
80...125A n° n° [kg]
– Shunt trip release width: 17.5mm/0.69” (1 module)
– Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB
Auxiliary contact. sides of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release on
P2X 1011 1 changeover contact 1 10 0.040 MCB right side and 2 contacts on the left of which
1 auxiliary and 1 indicator.
Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip.
P2X 1311 1 changeover contact 1 10 0.040 Operational characteristics
Shunt trip release. – Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
– Rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V; 3A 400V
P2X 16230 110…415V 50/60Hz 1 8 0.070 (auxiliary contacts).
Compliance
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
P2X 1311 P2X 16230
Accessories for miniature Order code Description Qty Wt General and operational characteristics 13
circuit breakers per
pkg SINGLE-POLE SUPPLY BUSBAR
– Rated operational voltage Ue: 1000V
n° [kg] – Central point of power supply: 100A max.
P1X 90 31 Single-pole supply busbar 10 0.160 – Side point of power supply: 63A max.
P1X 90 32 Two-pole supply busbar 10 0.320 – Spacing: 17.5mm/0.69”
P1X 90 33 – Busbar section: 10mm²
P1X 90 33 Three-pole supply busbar 10 0.474 – For paralleling connection
P1X 90 34 Four-pole supply busbar 10 0.600 – For 57 modules, 1000mm/39.37” long
P1X 91 30 Kit of 5 isolating covers 10 0.030 (57 1P breakers).
for unused busbar terminals
TWO-POLE, THREE-POLE AND FOUR-POLE
P1X 91 33 P1X 91 31 End cap for P1X9031 50 0.001 SUPPLY BUSBARS
P1X 91 32 End cap for P1X9032 50 0.001 – Rated operational voltage Ue: 690V
P1X 91 33 End cap for P1X9033 50 0.001 – Central point of power supply: 100A max.
– Side point of power supply: 63A max.
P1X 91 34 End cap for P1X9034 50 0.001 – Pitch: 18mm/0.71”
P1X 92 01 Single-pole terminal for 25 0.010 – Busbar section: 10mm²
busbar supply; conductor – For paralleling connection
P1X 92 01 P1X 92 10 P1X 92 02 cross section 25mm² max. – Two-pole: for 56 modules, 1000mm/39.37” long
P1X 92 10 1-pole terminal for supplying 25 0.010 (28 2P breakers)
busbar; conductor cross section – Three-pole: for 57 modules, 1012mm/39.84” long
25mm² max.; left entry (19 3P breakers)
– Four-pole: for 56 modules, 1000mm/39.37” long
P1X 92 02 Single-pole terminal for 25 0.022 (14 4P breakers).
busbar supply; conductor
cross section 50mm² max. PADLOCKABLE ATTACHMENT
P1X 18 10 P2X 18 10
P1X 18 10 Padlockable attachment for 10 0.001 – Max. padlock diameter 5mm/0.20”
breaker control lever P1MB... – Padlockable in ON and OFF
Suitable for P1 MB... P2X 18 10 Padlockable attachment for 10 0.002 – One can be fitted for each pole of the breaker.
Not suitable for P1 MB U... breaker control lever P2MB...
Modular socket Order code Description Qty Wt General and operational characteristics
per – Max. current: 16A
pkg – Connectable section 1.5...10mm2
– Tightening torque: 1.8Nm
n° [kg] – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
P1X7 Modular socket for Italy and 5 0.123 – DIN modules: 2.5.
Germany (Schuko); 16A.
Compliance
Compliant with standards: IEC 60884-1.
P1X7

page 13-14 page 13-14 page 13-15 13-11
Residual blocks and current operated circuit breakers
Residual blocks Order code Type IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
In IΔn DIN per These devices are intended for the protection of people
module pkg against indirect contact (electric shock) and of
[A] [mA] n° n° [kg] installations against fire hazards due to a persistent
earth/ground fault current.
Residual blocks – 2P – type A. They snap onto the P1MB series thermal-magnetic circuit
P1 RA 2P 40 A030 A 40 30 2 1 0.160 breakers; this combination forms a single device to
P1 RA 2P 40 A300 A 40 300 2 1 0.160 protect people, protect against fire and protect lines.
P1 RA 2P 63 A030 A 63 30 2 1 0.160 Operational characteristics
P1 RA 2P 63 A300 A 63 300 2 1 0.160 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400V
Residual blocks – 3P – type A. – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
P1 RA 2P... – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz
P1 RA 3P 40 A030 A 40 30 3.5 1 0.205 – IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400V
P1 RA 3P 40 A300 A 40 300 3.5 1 0.205 – IEC rated residual current for tripping IΔn: 30mA;
P1 RA 3P 63 A030 A 63 30 3.5 1 0.205 300mA.
P1 RA 3P 63 A300 A 63 300 3.5 1 0.205 Certifications and compliance
Residual blocks – 4P – type A. Compliance with standards: IEC/EN 61009-1.
P1 RA 4P 40 A030 A 40 30 3.5 1 0.230
P1 RA 4P 40 A300 A 40 300 3.5 1 0.230
P1 RA 4P 63 A030 A 63 30 3.5 1 0.230
P1 RA 4P 63 A300 A 63 300 3.5 1 0.230
P1 RA 3P...
Residual current operated Order code Type IEC IEC N° of Qty Wt General characteristics
These RCCBs are intended for the protection of people
circuit breakers In IΔn DIN per
module pkg against indirect contact (electric shock) and of
installations against fire hazards due to a persistent
[A] [mA] n° n° [kg] earth/ground fault current. Specifically to prevent electric
Two pole RCCB type AC. shock, RCCBs must be rated with a rated residual current
(IΔn) not exceeding 30mA so that these devices trip in
P1 RC 2P 25 AC030 AC 25 30 2 6 0.185 the case of earth/ground fault only. They usually are
P1 RC 2P 25 AC300 AC 25 300 2 6 0.185 connected in series with thermal-magnetic breakers
which assure short circuit and overcurrent protection too.
P1 RC 2P 40 AC030 AC 40 30 2 6 0.185
P1RC types have a IΔn of either 30mA or 300mA and are
P1 RC 2P 40 AC300 AC 40 300 2 6 0.185 available with three different versions of residual current
tripping, as follows:
13 P1 RC 2P 63 AC030 AC
P1 RC 2P 63 AC300 AC
63 30
63 300 2
2 6
6
0.185
0.185 Type AC – Tripping for earth/ground fault is ensured “for
Two pole RCCB type A. residual sinusoidal alternating currents, suddenly applied
or slowly rising”. It is identified by the symbol:
P1 RC 2P 25 A030 A 25 30 2 6 0.185
Type A – Tripping for earth/ground fault is ensured “for
P1 RC 2P 25 A300 A 25 300 2 6 0.185
residual sinusoidal alternating currents and pulsating
P1 RC 2P 40 A030 A 40 30 2 6 0.185 direct currents, suddenly applied or slowly rising”. In
P1 RC 2P 40 A300 A 40 300 2 6 0.185 addition to the protection given by Type AC, this version
protects against residual current with pulsating
P1 RC 2P... P1 RC 2P 63 A030 A 63 30 2 6 0.185 waveform. This can be caused by circuits connected with
P1 RC 2P 63 A300 A 63 300 2 6 0.185 electronic equipment. The symbol identifying Type A is
the following:
Four pole RCCB type AC.
P1 RC 4P 25 AC030 AC 25 30 4 3 0.326 Type B – tripping is ensured for all conditions already
P1 RC 4P 25 AC300 AC 25 300 4 3 0.326 covered by types AC and A. They also ensure tripping for
high-frequency leakage currents up to 1000Hz and direct
P1 RC 4P 40 AC030 AC 40 30 4 3 0.326 currents. They are particularly suitable for applications
P1 RC 4P 40 AC300 AC 40 300 4 3 0.326 with inverters, UPSs and electric vehicle charging
stations.
P1 RC 4P 63 AC030 AC 63 30 4 3 0.326
The symbol identifying Type B is the following:
P1 RC 4P 63 AC300 AC 63 300 4 3 0.326
Four pole RCCB type A.
Main features include:
P1 RC 4P 25 A030 A 25 30 4 3 0.326
– IEC rated current In: 25A, 40A and 63A
P1 RC 4P 25 A300 A 25 300 4 3 0.326 – Versions: 2P and 4P
P1 RC 4P 40 A030 A 40 30 4 3 0.326 – Type of operation: AC, A and B
– Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69”
P1 RC 4P 40 A300 A 40 300 4 3 0.326
– Contact status with flag indicator
P1 RC 4P...
P1 RC 4P 63 A030 A 63 30 4 3 0.326 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 RC 4P 63 A300 A 63 300 4 3 0.326 Operational characteristics
Two pole RCCB type B. – Dissipation per pole:
• 1.1W for P1RC2/4 P25… type AC or A
P1 RC 2P 40 B030 B 40 30 4 3 0.280
• 2.9W for P1RC2/4 P40… type AC, A or B
P1 RC 2P 40 B300 B 40 300 4 3 0.280 • 7.2W for P1RC2/4P63… type AC, A or B
P1 RC 2P 63 B030 B 63 30 4 3 0.280 • 9.7W for P1RC2/4P80… type B
P1 RC 2P 63 B300 B 63 300 4 3 0.280
Four pole RCCB type B. – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz
P1 RC 4P 40 B030 B 40 30 4 3 0.335 – IEC rated operational voltage Uc: 230VAC for 2P;
230/400VAC for 4P
P1 RC 4P 40 B300 B 40 300 4 3 0.335
– IEC rated residual operating voltage Ue: IΔn: 30mA;
P1 RC 4P 63 B030 B 63 30 4 3 0.335 300mA
P1 RC 4P 63 B300 B 63 300 4 3 0.335 – IEC short-circuit breaking capacity Icn: 10kA
P1 RC 4P 80 B030 B 80 30 4 3 0.335 Certifications and compliance
P1 RC 4P B... Certifications obtained: TÜV SÜD (types AC and A);
P1 RC 4P 80 B300 B 80 300 4 3 0.335
VDE (type B).
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61008-1 (all types);
IEC/EN 62423 (type B).

13-12 page 13-14 page 13-15
Residual current operated circuit breakers with overcurrent protection
1P+N - 10kA Order code Curve IEC IEC IEC DIN Qty Wt General characteristics
2 modules In Icn IΔn per These devices both detect and trip in the event of residual
pkg current and protect circuits in the case of short circuits
Type [A] [kA] [mA] n° n° [kg] and overcurrent. From a practical point of view, they
integrate both functions of MCB and of RCCB.
Single pole + neutral RCBO type AC. They have a C-type trip characteristic (instantaneous trip
P1 RB 1N C06 AC030 C 6 10 30 2 6 0.205 5-10 times In) and are used for inductive loads (mixed
P1 RB 1N C06 AC300 C 6 10 300 2 6 0.205 loads, resistive and inductive with low inrush current).
In addition, they have a rated residual current (IΔn) of
P1 RB 1N C10 AC030 C 10 10 30 2 6 0.205 either 30mA or 300mA and are available with two
P1 RB 1N C10 AC300 C 10 10 300 2 6 0.205 different versions of residual current tripping type AC or
P1 RB 1N C16 AC030 C 16 10 30 2 6 0.205 A as described on page 13-12.
Its main features are:
P1 RB 1N C16 AC300 C 16 10 300 2 6 0.205 – IEC rated current In: 6…40A
P1 RB 1N C20 AC030 C 20 10 30 2 6 0.205 – Version: 1P+N
P1 RB 1N C20 AC300 C 20 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Contact status with flag indicator
P1 RB 1N... – Trip characteristic: Curve type C
P1 RB 1N C25 AC030 C 25 10 30 2 6 0.205 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715).
P1 RB 1N C25 AC300 C 25 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C32 AC030 C 32 10 30 2 6 0.205 Operational characteristics
P1 RB 1N C32 AC300 C 32 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 400V
P1 RB 1N C40 AC030 C 40 10 30 2 6 0.205 – Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV
P1 RB 1N C40 AC300 C 40 10 300 2 6 0.205 – Operating frequency: 50/60Hz
– Rated operational voltage Ue: 230VAC
Single pole + neutral RCBO type A. – Rated residual operating voltage IΔn: 30mA; 300mA
P1 RB 1N C06 A030 C 6 10 30 2 6 0.205 – IEC short-circuit breaking capacity Icn: 10kA
P1 RB 1N C06 A300 C 6 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C10 A030 C 10 10 30 2 6 0.205 Certifications obtained: TÜV Rheinland.
P1 RB 1N C10 A300 C 10 10 300 2 6 0.205 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61009-1.
P1 RB 1N C13 A030 C 13 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C16 A030 C 16 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C16 A300 C 16 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C20 A030 C 20 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C20 A300 C 20 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C25 A030 C 25 10 30 2 6 0.205 13
P1 RB 1N C25 A300 C 25 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C32 A030 C 32 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C32 A300 C 32 10 300 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C40 A030 C 40 10 30 2 6 0.205
P1 RB 1N C40 A300 C 40 10 300 2 6 0.205

page 13-14 page 13-15 13-13
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ACCESSORIES

P1 MB... Add-on contacts Undervoltage and shunt releases
P1X 1011 - P1X 1011 UH - P1X 1311 P1X 14230 - P1X 16230
18 max 36 max 54 max 72 max 60 (2.36”)
(0.71” max) (1.42” max) (2.12” max) (2.83” max) 45 (1.77”)
9 max 18 max
(0.35” max) 66 (2.60”)
(0.71” max) 66 (2.60”)
60 (2.36”)
60 (2.36”)
(1.77” max)
(3.40” max)
86.5 max
45 max
(1.38”)
35
86 (3.38”)
45 (1.77”)
81 (3.19”)
83 (3.27”)
45 (1.77”)
81 (3.19”)
5.5 (0.22”) 5.5 (0.22”)
5.52 (0.22”)
74 max
(2.91” max)
P1 MB UH... - P1 MB UL....
36 max
18 max (1.42” max) 54 max
(0.71” max) 60 (2.36”)
(2.12” max)
47 (1.85”)
116 (4.57”)
(1.77” max)
(1.38”)
45 max
35
5.52 (0.22”)
70 max(2.75” max)
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ACCESSORIES

P2 MB... Add-on contacts Shunt release
P2X 1011 - P2X 1311 P2X 16230
67 max 74 (2.91”)
(2.64” max) 74 (2.91”)
27 max 54 max 81 max 108 max 43 (1.69”)
(1.06” max) (4.25” max) 49.5 max 43 (1.69”)
(2.12” max) (3.19” max) (1.95” max) 32
32
5.5 (0.22”) (1.26”) (1.26”)
9 max 5.4 18 max 5.4
(0.35” max) (0.21”) (0.71” max) (0.21”)
85 max (3.35” max)
13
45 (1.77”)
80 (3.15”)
79 (3.11”)
45 (1.77”)
79 (3.11”)
44 (1.73”)
60 (2.36”)
74.5 (2.93”)
RESIDUAL BLOCKS
P1 RA
35.3 63 (2.48”) 63 (2.48”) 69.2 (2.72”)
(1.39”)
(1.38”)
92 (3.62”)
92 (3.62”)
92 (3.62”)
35
115 (4.53”) 133 (5.24”)

71.3 (2.81”) 69.7 (2.74”)
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT MODULAR SOCKET
P1 RC... BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION P1X7
36 max
(1.42” max)
72 max
(2.83” max)
5.5
(0.22”)
P1 RB...
60 (2.36”) 68.3 (2.69”)
36 max 5.4 45 (1.77”)
60 (2.36”)
(1.42” max) (0.21”)
80 (3.15”)
45 (1.77”)
(1.77” max)
92 (3.62”)
82 max (3.23”)
(1.38”)
45 max
35
45 (1.77”)
50 (1.97”)
61.7 (2.43”)
72mm for type-B residual current breakers. 44 (1.73”)
Wiring diagrams
P1X 1011 - P1X 1011UH - P2X 1011 P1X 1311 - P2X 1311 P1X 14230 P1X 16230 - P2X 16230
13-14
TYPE P1 MB P2 MB P1 RA P1 RC P1 RB
Description Circuit breaker Circuit breaker Residual blocks Residual current Residual current
operated circuit breakers operated circuit breakers
w/ overcurrent prot.
Standards IEC/EN 60898, IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC/EN 61008-1 IEC/EN 61008-1 IEC/EN 61009-1
IEC/EN 60947-2
UL 1077
UL 489
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 440 400 400 400 400
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 6 4 4 4
IEC rated operational in AC V 230 (1P, 1P+N) / 230 (1P) / 230/400V 230 (2P) / 230
voltage Ue 230/400 (2P, 3P, 4P) 230/400 (2P, 3P, 4P) 230/400(4P)
in DC V 60 (1P) / 80 (2P) 60 –– — —
Rated frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Maximum rated current A 63 125 63 40 40
Available rated current for types A 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 80, 100, 125 40, 63 25, 40, 63 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 (80A only type B)
Versions 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 2P, 3P, 4P 2P, 4P 1P+N
Tripping characteristic curve B-C-D C-D –– — C
Instantaneous tripping Curve B: 3...5In
Curve C: 5...10In Curve C: 5...10In — –– Curve C: 5...10In
Curve D: 10...14In Curve D: 10...14In
Residual operation characteristic type — — A AC, A, B AC, A
Rated residual current IΔn mA — — 30, 300 30, 300 30, 300
Short circuit capacity kA 10 (6kA 1P+N) 10 –– 10 (Inc) 10
Mechanical life cycle 20,000 10,000 20,000 20,000 20,000
Maximum tightening torque of terminals Nm 2 3 2 2 2
lbin 15 26 15 15 15
Tool Pz2 Pz2 Pz2 Pz2 Pz2
Conductor section min…max. mm2 1...16 2.5...50 1...16 2.5...35 1...25
AWG 14...6 14...1/0 14...6 14...2 16...3
AMBIENT CONDITIONS 13
Temperature Operating °C -35...+70 -35...+75 -25...+55 -25...+55 -25...+40
Storage °C -40...+80 -40...+80 -35...+60 -35...+60 -35...+60
Max. altitude m 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
Pollution degree 2 3 2 2 2
Mounting 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
TRIP CHARACTERISTICS
Curve B Curve C Curve D
Tripping time [s] Tripping time [s] Tripping time [s]
10000 10000 10000
1000 1000 1000
100 100 100
10 10 10
1 1 1
0,1 0,1 0,1
0,01 0,01 0,01

1 1,45 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 100 1 1,45 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 100 1 1,45 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 100
1,13 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 1,13 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 1,13 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70
Tripping current In [A] Tripping current In [A] Tripping current In [A]
UL489 only P1MBU... version for the operational voltages for these devices refer to the pages for the chosen product.
For the UL489, P1MBU... versions, the following rated current currents are also available: 1.6, 3, 5, 7, 8, 12, 15, 30, 35, 60 A
13-15
Page 14-4 Page 14-4
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2
MONOBLOCK VERSIONS VERSIONS WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE
• 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P • 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
• IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs): 25kA • IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs): 12.5kA
• IEC maximum discharge current Imax • IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs):
(8/20μs): 100kA 60kA
• SPD status indicator • IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20μs):
• Version with output for remote status 10kV/5kA
indication. • Single module status indicator
• Version with output for remote status
indication.
Page 14-4
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 2

VERSIONS WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE
• 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
• IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs):
40kA
• IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA
• Single module status indicator
• Versions with and without output for remote
status indication.
Page 14-5 Page 14-5
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 2 SPARE PLUG-IN CARTRIDGES

FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS • Versions suitable for SPDs:
• Versions with plug-in cartridge: +, -, PE - Type 1 and 2
• IEC maximum operational voltage: 1200VDC - Type 2
• IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs): - Type 2 for photovoltaic applications
40kA • Status indicator for single modules.
• IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA
• Single module status indicator
• Versions with or without output for remote status
indication
• Tested according to EN 50539-11
• UL Recognized versions.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 14
Protection against overvoltage and

high surge conditions caused by
direct or indirect lightning strikes
Types with plug-in cartridge
provide fast servicing capability
Mechanical indicator for visual
failure status signalling of single
modules
Versions with or without output for
remote SPD status indication
Versions for photovoltaic
applications.
SEC. - PAGE
Surge protection devices (SPD)
Type 1 and 2 monoblock .................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 4
Type 1 and 2 with plug-in cartridge ................................................................................................................................ 14 - 4
Type 2 with plug-in cartridge .......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
Type 2 for photovoltaic applications ................................................................................................................................ 14 - 5
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 14 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 14 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 14 - 7
I SOLATION
AND
Surge protection devices
SAFE INSTALLATIONS! Type 1, 2

Type 2
LPZ
protection
zones OA OB 1 2 3
Installation IV III II I
category
Impulse 6kV 4kV 2,5kV 1,5kV

withstand voltage
of equipment
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

The surge arresters commonly defined as SPDs (Surge Protection Devices), are devices designed to protect electric systems and equipment against transient and impulse
overvoltages such as those caused by lightning and by electric switching.
Their function is to divert the discharge or impulse current generated by an overvoltage to earth/ground, thereby protecting the equipment downstream.
SPDs are installed in parallel with the electric line to be protected. At the mains rated voltage, they are comparable to an open circuit and have a high impedance at their ends.
In the presence of an overvoltage, this impedance falls to very low values, closing the circuit to earth/ground.
Once the overvoltage has ended, their impedance rises again rapidly to the initial value (very high), returning to open loop conditions.
The SA1B (monoblock) type protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as well as induced overvoltage conditions. It can be installed in areas with a high risk of direct
14 lightning strikes, inside main distribution boards or nearby sub-distribution boards. With the SA0 plug-in cartridge type, the same features are available with the advantage of
only having to replace the protection cartridge once the SPD blows.
PROTECTION ZONES INSTALLATION CATEGORY

Standards define the LPZs (Lightning Protection Zones), which indicate the For the correct choice of the SPD, the dielectric strength of the equipment to
different zones at risk. These are distinguished among: protect needs to be considered. This level is established by IEC 60664-1
standard.
LPZ 0A: Area outside a building not protected by LPS (e.g. lightning rods) For a 230/400V installation, it specifies:
where a direct lightning strike is possible. In this zone, there is total exposure to
induced electromagnetic fields. Installation category IV: 6kV for devices installed upstream of the distribution
board (for example, delivery point with the distribution system).
LPZ 0B: Area outside a building protected by LPS; therefore, a direct lighting
strike is not possible. In this zone, there is total exposure to induced Installation category III: 4kV for devices being part of the fixed system (for
electromagnetic fields. example, distribution boards, switching devices, isolators, ducting and their
accessories)
LPZ 1: Area inside a building so protected against direct lightning strikes.
In this zone, there is the possibility of very high overvoltages and of induced Installation category II: 2.5kV for non electronic devices (for example,
electromagnetic fields which may be attenuated depending on the degree of household appliances or electric tools)
screening. This zone must be protected by an SPD type 1 at the boundary with
zone LPZ 0A or 0B. Installation category I: 1.5kV for equipment containing “particularly sensitive”
electronic circuits (for example, electronic devices like PCs or TVs)
LPZ 2: Area inside a building (e.g. in a room), in which there is the possibility of
low overvoltages since they are limited by SPDs installed upstream. This zone RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INSTALLATION
must be protected by an SPD type 2 at the boundary with zone LPZ 1.
For correct installation, it is advisable to make connections between the line and
LPZ 3: Area inside a building (e.g. the system connected to a socket in a room) the SPD input (phase or neutral terminals) as well as between the SPD output
characterised by very sensitive equipment, in which there is the possibility of (earth/ground terminal) and the equipotential bonding connection with a
very low overvoltages as they are limited by SPDs installed upstream. maximum 0.5m/20” length of the leads. To reduce the distance, use of the
This zone must be protected by an SPD type 3 at the boundary with zone LPZ 2. so-called “V connection” is admissible.
Fuse Fuse
S S
P a+b <
_ 0.5m/20” P b<
_ 0.5m/20”
D D
b b
EBB EBB
For more details, IEC/EN 62305 standards can be consulted.
14-2
Type 2 DC
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS
Industrial In photovoltaic applications of a
buildings domestic environment or industrial
facility or other similar circumstances,
equipped with lightning rod systems
Housing having a safety distance (S), SPD type 2,
suitable for DC duty, can be used to
DC protect the installation. It is advisable to
install these devices as close as possible
to the photovoltaic panels, consequently
AC in the so-called string boards. If the
AC/DC inverter is far away from the
string boards (indicatively more than
10m/33’ apart), another SPD type 2 DC
needs to be installed next to the inverter
on the DC side. Installation of SPD type
DC 2 suitable of AC duty is also required
downstream of the inverter on the AC
side. For more details, consult specific
AC national standards and/or application
guides issued by local authorities for
solar systems concerning protection
against lightning. The SA2DG… and
SA2DF… types with plug-in cartridges
are suitable for connection in the DC side
of a solar installation and offer protection
against induced overvoltage conditions.
The SA2... type is suitable for installation
downstream of the inverter on the AC
side and in intermediate panels.
BACKUP PROTECTION Impulse current Imp:

Protection against short circuits of SPDs is provided by overcurrent devices Crest value of the current that circulates in the SPD with a 10/350μs waveform
(gL/gG fuses), which should be chosen according to the SPD manufacturer’s (activation must be guaranteed for 20 times without damage). It is used to classify
recommendations. SPDs in test class I.
Iimp
F1 10/350μs
L1 100%
L2
L3
N 14
PE 50%
F2
10%
SA2 3N
10 350 t (μs)
Rated discharge current In:

Crest value of the current that circulates in the SPD with an (8/20μs waveform
(activation must be guaranteed for 20 times without damage). It is used to classify
F1>125A gL/gG → F2 =125A gL/gG
SPDs in test class II.
F1≤125A gL/gG → F2 = not required.
ln
8/20μs
SPD COORDINATION 100%
In order to obtain an effective protection against overvoltage, it is advisable to
install several SPDs coordinated with one another in cascade connection.
For instance, it is advisable to have a Type 1 SPD in the main distribution board, 50%
a Type 2 SPD in the sub-distribution board and a Type 3 SPD near the terminal
equipment to be protected.
In this way, the energy originating from an overvoltage gradually decreases as it
10%
reaches the equipment to protect.
8 20 t (μs)
DEFINITIONS AND RATINGS ACCORDING TO IEC/EN
Maximum continuous voltage Uc:
Maximum value of AC or DC voltage that the SPD is capable of permanently Open circuit discharge voltage Uoc:
withstanding without activating or getting damaged; this is its rated voltage. Crest value of the no-load discharge voltage delivered by the test generation with a
1.2/50μs waveform simultaneously with a short-circuit current of an 8/20μs
Protection level voltage Up: waveform, applied at the SPD terminals. It is used to classify SPDs in test class III.
Maximum value of the voltage between the terminals of the SPD in presence of Uoc
an impulsive overvoltage. It is a fundamental parameter to correctly choose the 1.2/50μs
SPD; it must be taken into account with regards to the impulse voltage of the 100%
equipment to protect.
50%
10%
1.2 50 t (μs)
14-3
Type 1 and 2 Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt Main characteristics
monoblock arrange- output of DIN per The surge protection device type SA1B combines the
ment modules pkg performance of SPD type 1 and 2 into a single product.
(SPDT) n° [kg] It protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as
well as induced overvoltage conditions.
MONOBLOCK VERSION. It can be installed in areas with a high risk of direct
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs) 25kA per pole. lightning strikes, inside main distribution boards or
SA1B 1P A320R 1P YES 2 1 0.275 nearby sub-distribution boards.
SA1B 1N A320R 1P+N YES 4 1 0.390
Operational characterstics
SA1B 2P A320R 2P YES 4 1 0.395 – IEC maximum continuous operating voltage Uc:
SA1B 3P A320R 3P YES 6 1 0.595 320VAC
SA1B 3N A320R 3P+N YES 8 1 0.760 – IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs):
100kA per pole
SA1B 1P A320R SA1B 4P A320R 4P YES 8 1 0.780 – IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs):
25kA per pole
Characteristics – Version with relay output having changeover contact
Type IEC rated IEC voltage pro- Power for remote status indication
voltage Un tection level Up installation – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
[V] [kV] L-N system
Reference standards
SA1B 1P A320R 230 <1.4 TN-C, TN-S, TT Comply with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11.
SA1B 1N A320R 230 <1.4/1.3 TT, TN-S
SA1B 2P A320R 230 <1.4 TN-S
SA1B 3P A320R 230/400 <1.4 TN-C
SA1B 3N A320R 230/400 <1.4/1.5 TT, TN-S
SA1B 4P A320R 230/400 <1.4 TN-S
SA1B 3N A320R For L-PE only.
Type 1 and 2 with Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt Main characteristics
arrange- output of DIN per SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE SA0
plug-in cartridge ment modules pkg It has a plug-in cartridge and combines the performance
of SPD type 1 and 2 into a single product. It is ideal in all
(SPDT) n° [kg] those systems of reduced extent to protect the load side
VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE. downstream of main circuit breaker to terminal
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs) 12.5kA per pole. equipment.
SA0 1P A320R 1P YES 1 1 0.195 It protects against direct and indirect lightning strikes as
well as induced overvoltage conditions. It can be installed
SA0 1N A320R 1P+N YES 2 1 0.365 inside main distribution boards and nearby terminal
14 SA0 2P A320R 2P YES 2 1 0.370 equipment.
SA0 3P A320R 3P YES 3 1 0.540 The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
replaced for quick servicing.
SA0 3N A320R 3P+N YES 4 1 0.670
SA0 4P A320R 4P YES 4 1 0.670 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE SA2
SA0 1P A320R SA0 2P A320R
It is suitable for installation in sub-distribution boards
and nearby terminal equipment.
It protects against indirect overvoltages.
Type 2 with Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
plug-in cartridge arrange- output of DIN per replaced for quick servicing.
ment modules pkg
(SPDT) n° [kg] Operational characteristics
VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE. – IEC maximum continuous operating voltage Uc:
IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs) 40kA per pole. 320VAC/420VDC
– IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs) per
SA2 1P A320 1P NO 1 1 0.140 pole: 60kA (SA0...); 40kA (SA2...)
SA2 1P A320R 1P YES 1 1 0.145 – IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs) per pole:
SA2 1N A320 1P+N NO 2 1 0.240 25kA (SA0...); 20kA (SA2...)
– Versions with or without relay output having
SA2 1N A320R 1P+N YES 2 1 0.245 changeover contact for remote status indication
SA2 2P A320 2P NO 2 1 0.260 – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
SA2 2P A320R 2P YES 2 1 0.265
SA2 2P A320R SA2 3N A320R Reference standards
SA2 3P A320 3P NO 3 1 0.370 Comply with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11.
SA2 3P A320R 3P YES 3 1 0.375
SA2 3N A320 3P+N NO 4 1 0.465 Characteristics
Type IEC rated IEC voltage Power
SA2 3N A320R 3P+N YES 4 1 0.470 voltage protection installation
SA2 4P A320 4P NO 4 1 0.480 Un level Up
SA2 4P A320R 4P YES 4 1 0.485 Un Up
[V] [kV] L-N
SA0/SA2 1P A... 230 <1.5 TN-C, TN-S, TT
SA0/SA2 1N A... 230 <1.5 TT, TN-S
SA0/SA2 2P A... 230 <1.5 TN-S
SA0/SA2 3P A... 230/400 <1.5 TN-C
SA0/SA2 3N A... 230/400 <1.5 TT, TN-S
SA0/SA2 4P A... 230/400 <1.5 TN-S
For L-PE only.

Type 2 for photovoltaic Order code Pole Relay Number Qty Wt Main characteristics
applications with arrange- output of DIN per The surge protection device type SA2 D with plug-in
ment modules pkg cartridge for photovoltaic applications is suitable for
plug-in cartridge (SPDT) n° [kg] installation on the direct-current end of a photovoltaic
installation and protects against induced overvoltage
VERSION WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE. conditions.
EN short-circuit current rating Iscpv 100A. The protection cartridges are plug-in and can be easily
SA2 DG 600M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.320 replaced for quick servicing.
SA2 DG 600M2R +, -, PE YES 2 1 0.325
SA2 DG K00M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.420 – EN maximum continuous voltage Ucpv:
SA2 DG K00M3R +, -, PE YES 3 1 0.425 600VDC, 1000VDC, 1200VDC
EN short-circuit current rating Iscpv 1000A. – Versions with or without relay output having
changeover contact for remote status indication
SA2 DF 600M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.285 – EN degree of protection: IP20.
SA2 DF 600M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.305
SA2 DG... Certifications and compliance
SA2 DF K00M2 +, -, PE NO 2 1 0.410
Certifications obtained: UL Recognized for USA and Canada
SA2 DF K00M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.500 (cURus – File E352471), as Surge-protective Devices –
SA2 DF K20M3 +, -, PE NO 3 1 0.550 Component, Type 4 for use in SPD Type 2 photovoltaic
applications only; for SA2DF600M2, SA2DFK00M2 and
SA2DFK20M3 types. Also UL 1449 and CSA C22.2 n°8 for
cURus certified types mentioned above.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use
as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
Compliant with standards: EN 50539-11 for all.
SA2 DF...
Characteristics
Type EN EN EN voltage
Protection circuit for each module type SA2 DF… rated continuous protection
Self-protected surge protection devices voltage voltage level
Un Ucpv Up
In case of short but intense overvoltage conditions, both the [VDC] [VDC] [kV]
spark gap element (GDT- Gas Discharge Tube) and the
varistor (MOV – Metal Oxide Varistor) simultaneously trigger. SA2 DG 600M2 600 600 <1.9
Current
Limiter GDT In case of weak but prolonged overvoltage conditions, the SA2 DG K00M3 1000 1000 <3.6
current limiter considerably reduces the current flowing SA2 DF 600M2 600 600 <2.0
through the varistor. This technological solution guarantees a
longer varistor life. SA2 DF 600M3 600 600 <3
T/o relay
Ultimately, another particular mechanism of the surge
arrester quickly extinguishes the electric arc during the
SA2 DF K00M2 1000 1000 <4.0
14
SA2 DF K00M3 1000 1000 <4.0
MOV thermal overload tripping phase.
SA2 DF K20M3 1200 1200 <4.0
Accessories and spare parts Order code Description Qty Wt Reference standards
Plug-in cartridges per Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61643-11 for all;
pkg EN 50539-11 for types SAX02 DF... and SAX02 DG...;
n° [kg] UL 1449, CSA C22.2 n° 8 for SAX02 DF 600M2,
SAX02 DF K00M2, SAX02 DF K20M3.
SAX00 P A320 For SA0... types 1 0.100
SAX02 P A320 For SA2... types 1 0.100
SAX00 P A320 SAX02 DF 600M2 For SA2 DF 600M2 type 1 0.100
SAX02 DF 600M3 For SA2 DF 600M3 type 1 0.100
SAX02 DF K00M2 For SA2 DF K00M2 type 1 0.100
SAX02 P A320
SAX02 DG 600M2 For SA2 DG 600... types 1 0.100
SAX02 DG K00M3 For SA2 DG K00... types 1 0.100

page 14-6 page 14-7 page 14-8 14-5
SA1B...A320R
72 (2.83")
90 (3.54")
99 (3.90")
36 (1.42") 72 (2.83") 108 (4.25") 144 (5.67")
SA0...A320R
72 (2.83")
103 (4.05")
90 (3.54")
18 36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 72 (2.83")

(0.71")
SA2...A320
72 (2.83")
94 (3.70")
90 (3.54")
18 36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 72 (2.83")

(0.71")
SA2...A320R
72 (2.83")
14
103 (4.05")
90 (3.54")
18 36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 72 (2.83")

(0.71")
SA2 DG... SA2 DG...R 72 (2.83")

72 (2.83")
90 (3.54")
103 (4.05")
94 (3.70")
90 (3.54")
36 (1.42") 54 (2.12") 36 (1.42") 54 (2.12")
SA2 DF...
72 (2.83")
93 (3.66")
90 (3.54")
36 (1.42") 54 (2.12")
14-6
Wiring diagrams
SA1B 1P A320R SA1B 1N A320R SA1B 2P A320R SA1B 3P A320R

L/N L1 N L1 N L1 L2 L3
PE PE PE PE
RC RC PE RC RC
14 11 12 14 11 12 14 11 12 14 11 12
SA1B 3N A320R SA1B 4P A320R

L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
PE PE
RC RC
14 11 12 14 11 12
SA0 1P A320R SA0 1N A320R SA0 2P A320R SA0 3P A320R SA0 3N A320R SA0 4P A320R
L/N L N L N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
14 14
14 14 14 14
11 11
11 11 11 11
12 12
12 12 12 12
RC RC
RC RC RC RC
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA2 1P A320 SA2 1N A320 SA2 2P A320 SA2 3P A320 SA2 3N A320 SA2 4P A320
14
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA2 1P A320R SA2 1N A320R SA2 2P A320R SA2 3P A320R SA2 3N A320R SA2 4P A320R
14 14 14 14 14 14
11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12
RC RC RC RC RC
RC
PE PE PE PEN PE PE
SA2 DG 600M2 SA2 DG 600M2R SA2 DG K00M3 SA2 DG K00M3R

+ - + - + PE - + PE -
14 14
11 11
12 12
RC RC
PE PE
SA2 DF 600M2 SA2 DF 600M3

SA2 DF K00M2 SA2 DF K00M3
SA2 DF K20M3
PE
T.C. T.C. T.C. T.C. T.C.
PE
14-7
TYPE with relay output SA1B 1P A320R SA1B 1N A320R SA1B 2P A320R SA1B 3P A320R SA1B 3N A320R SA1B 4P A320R
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 1 and 2 (Test class I and II)
IEC rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltageUc VAC / VDC 320
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 50 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 100 25 per pole
IEC max impulse current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 100 100 / 100 100 per pole 100 per pole 100 / 100 100 per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 50 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 100 25 per pole
IEC voltage protection level Up (L-N/N-PE) kV <1.4 <1.4 / <1.3 <1.4 <1.4 <1.4 / <1.5 <1.4
Temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC residual voltage Ures (L-N/N-PE) at 3kA (8/20) kV 1 1 1 1.1 1.1 1.1
IEC follow current If (N-PE) Arms — >100 — — >100 —
Tripping time ta (L-N/N-PE) ns <25 <25 / 100 <25 <25 <25 / 100 <25
Thermal isolation protection Yes
IEC backup protection fuse A 250
(supply>250A) (L-N/N-PE) (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circuit current 50Hz kA 25
Status indicator - operating / failure Colour Green / Red
CONNECTIONS
Terminal tightening torque Nm 3
Maximum conductor section mm2 25 (flexible) / 35 (rigid)
RELAY OUTPUT FOR REMOTE STATUS INDICATION
Type of contact Changeover (NO/NC - SPDT)
Contact capacity A 0.5A at 250VAC; 3A at 125VAC; 0.1A at 250VDC; 0.2A at 125VDC
Contact terminal tightening torque Nm 0.25
Maximum contact conductor section mm2 1.5
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Housing material Thermoplastic, RAL 7035, UL 94 V-0
14
TYPE with relay output SA0 1P A320R SA0 1N A320R SA0 2P A320R SA0 3P A320R SA0 3N A320R SA0 4P A320R
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 1, 2 and 3 (Test class I, II and II)
IEC Rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltage Uc VAC / VDC 320 / 420
IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350) (L-N/N-PE) kA 12.5 12.5 / 50 12.5 per pole 12.5 per pole 12.5 / 50 12.5 per pole
IEC max discharge current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 60 60 / 50 60 per pole 60 per pole 60 / 50 60 per pole
IEC rated discharge current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 25 25 / 30 25 per pole 25 per pole 25 / 30 25 per pole
IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20) kV/kA 10 / 5
IEC voltage level protection Up (L-N/N-PE) kV <1.5 <1.5 / <1.7 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5 / <1.7 <1.5
IEC temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC residual voltage Ures (L-N/N-PE) at 5kA (8/20) kV 0.8 0.8 / 0.2 0.8 0.8 0.8 / 0.2 0.8
IEC backup fuse (supply>160A) (L-N/N-PE) A 160 (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circuit current 50Hz kA 25
Status indicator - operating / failure Colour –– / Red
CONNECTIONS
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
14-8
TYPE without relay output SA2 1P A320 SA2 1N A320 SA2 2P A320 SA2 3P A320 SA2 3N A320 SA2 4P A320
with relay output SA2 1P A320R SA2 1N A320R SA2 2P A320R SA2 3P A320R SA2 3N A320R SA2 4P A320R
SPD per IEC/EN 61643-11 Type 2 (Test Class II)
IEC rated voltage Un VAC 230 230 230 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
IEC maximum continuous voltage Uc VAC / VDC 320 / 420
IEC max discharge current Imax (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 40 40 / 40 40 per pole 40 per pole 40 / 40 40 per pole
IEC rated impulse current In (8/20) (L-N/N-PE) kA 20 20 / 20 20 per pole 20 per pole 20 / 20 20 per pole
IEC voltage protection level Up (L-N/N-PE) kV <1.5 <1.5 / <2 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5 / <2 <1.5
IEC temporary overvoltage (TOV) Ut (L-N for 5s) VAC 335
IEC residual voltage Ures (L-N/N-PE) at 3kA (8/20) kV 0.95 0.95 / 0.1 0.95 0.95 0.95 / 0.1 0.95
IEC backup protection fuse A 125
(supply>125A) (L-N/N-PE) (gL/gG class)
IEC maximum short-circruit current 50Hz kA 25
Status indicator - operating / failure Green / Red
CONNECTIONS
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
14
TYPE without relay output SA2 DF 600M2 SA2 DF 600M3 SA2 DF K00M2 SA2 DF K00M3 SA2 DF K20M3 SA2 DG 600M2 SA2 DG K00M3
with relay output –– –– –– –– –– SA2 DG 600M2R SA2 DG K00M3R
SPD per EN 50539-11 Type 2 (Test class II)
UL Recognized for USA and Canada Yes –– Yes –– Yes –– ––
Rated voltage Un (EN) / MCOV (UL) VDC 600 600 1000 1000 1200 600 1000
Maximum continuous voltage Ucpv (EN/UL) VDC 600 600 1000 1000 1200 600 1000
Maximum discharge current Imax (8/20) EN 40 30 30 40 40 30 30
kA/pole
UL 50 –– 20 –– 50 –– ––
Rated discharge current In (8/20) EN 20 20 20 20 20 15 15
kA/pole
UL 20 –– 10 –– 20 –– ––
Voltage protection level Up (EN) / VPR (UL) kV <2.0 <3.0 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <1.9 <3.6
EN residual voltage Ures at 5kA (8/20) kV 1
Tripping time ta ns <25
EN maximum short-circuit current Iscpv A 1000 100
EN backup protection fuse (Isc>100A) A –– 100A gPV
Status indication – operating / failure Colour – / Red Green / Red
CONNECTIONS
EN degree of protection IP20
Terminal tightening torque Nm 3 (26lbin) 3
Maximum conductor section mm2 1.5...25 (flexible / stranded) / AWG 16...3 - 1.5...35 (rigid / solid) AWG 16...2
Type of contact, if any Changeover (1NO/1NC – SPDT)
Contact terminal tightening torque Nm / lbin 0.25 / 2.2
Maximum contact conductor section mm² / AWG 1.5 / 16
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -40...+80
14-9
Page 15-2 Page 15-2
ONE AND TWO-POLE CONTACTORS THREE AND FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS

• IEC rated current Ith AC1 (400V): • IEC rated current Ith AC1 (400V):
20A and 32A 25A, 32A, 40A and 63A
• IEC rated current AC3 (400V): 9A • IEC rated current AC3 (400V):
• Ideal for domestic and service applications. 8.5A, 22A and 30A
• Ideal for industrial and service applications,
such as office buildings, stores, hospitals,
hotels, etc.
Page 15-3 Page 15-3
ONE AND TWO-POLE CONTACTORS WITH THREE AND FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS

MANUAL CONTROL WITH MANUAL CONTROL
• IEC rated current Ith AC1 (400V): • IEC rated current Ith AC1 (400V): 32A
20A and 32A • IEC rated current AC3 (400V): 8.5A
• IEC rated current AC3 (400V): 9A • Ideal for functional tests and dual pricing
• Ideal for functional tests and dual pricing systems in domestic and service
systems in domestic and service applications.
applications.
MODULAR CONTACTORS 15
Two, three and four-pole versions,

20A to 63A
Very silent during operation or
control stage
Manual control version
Operating flag indicator
Add-on auxiliary contacts.
SEC. - PAGE
Modular contactors
Contactors ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15 - 2
Contactors with manual control ......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 3
Add-on blocks and accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 15 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 15 - 4
I SOLATION
PROTECTION AND
C IRCUIT
Modular contactors
Contactors Order code Rated Configura- Qty Wt General characteristics

auxiliary tion and per – DC powered magnetic core system assuring silent
supply voltage number pkg operation and noise damping during the control phase
of contacts – Overvoltage protection circuit and voltage peak limitation
[V] NO NC n° [kg] of the magnetic core
– Equipped with 2 or 4 closing contacts of equal capacity
One-pole or two-pole. 1 module. Ith 20A. permitting use in power or auxiliary circuits
CN20 11 024 24VAC/DC 1 1 10 0.135 – Operation flag indicator.
CN20 11 220 220...230VAC 1 1 10 0.135 Operational characteristics
CN20 20 024 24VAC/DC 2 –– 10 0.135 Type IEC conventional Operational Protection
CN20 20 220 220...230VAC 2 –– 10 0.135 free-air thermal current fuse
current Ith in AC3 gG (IEC)
One-pole or two-pole. 1 module. Ith 32A. in AC1 ≤400V
CN32 11 024 24VAC/DC 1 1 10 0.135 ≤400V
CN20... CN32 11 220 220...230VAC 1 1 10 0.135 [A] [A] [A]
CN32 11... - CN32 20... One-pole or two-pole.
CN32 20 024 24VAC/DC 2 –– 10 0.135
CN32 20 220 220...230VAC 2 –– 10 0.135 CN20... 20 9 20
Three-pole or four-pole. 2 modules. Ith 25A. CN32... 32 9 32
CN25 10 024 24VAC/DC 4 –– 5 0.260 Three-pole or four-pole.
CN25 10 220 220...230VAC 4 –– 5 0.260 CN25... 25 8.5 25
CN25 01 024 24VAC/DC 3 1 5 0.260 CN32... 32 8.5 32
CN25 01 220 220...230VAC 3 1 5 0.260 CN40... 40 22 63
Three-pole or four-pole. 2 modules. Ith 32A. CN63... 63 30 80
CN32 10 024 24VAC/DC 4 –– 5 0.260 – Noise level:
CN32 10 220 220...230VAC 4 –– 5 0.260 • Closed contactor <20dB
CN25... • Making/breaking operation ≤50dB
CN32 10... - CN32 01... CN32 01 024 24VAC/DC 3 1 5 0.260 – IEC degree of protection: IP20
CN32 01 220 220...230VAC 3 1 5 0.260 – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60175).
Three-pole or four-pole. 3 modules. Ith 40A.
CN40 10 024 24VAC/DC 4 –– 5 0.425 Operational characteristics of contactor-incorporated
CN40 10 220 220...230VAC 4 –– 5 0.425 auxiliary contacts
Type IEC insulation IEC rating (AC15 category)
CN40 01 024 24VAC/DC 3 1 5 0.425 voltage Ui
CN40 01 220 220...230VAC 3 1 5 0.425 230V 400V
Three-pole or four-pole. 3 modules. Ith 63A. [V] [A] [A]
CN63 10 024 24VAC/DC 4 –– 5 0.425 CN20... 440 6 6
CN63 10 220 220...230VAC 4 –– 5 0.425 CN25... 440 6 4
CN40... CN63 01 024 24VAC/DC 3 1 5 0.425 CN32... 440 6 4
15 CN63 01 220 220...230VAC 3 1 5 0.425 CN40... 500 6 4
Other voltages on request. Consult Customer Service; see contact details CN63... 500 6 4
2NC version supplied on request. Certifications and compliance
The last (NC) pole has the same characteristics as the power pole. It can
therefore be used indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power contact. Certifications obtained: EAC.
The fourth NO or NC pole has the same characteristics as the power poles; Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
therefore it can be used indifferently as auxiliary or as power contact. IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.
On request can be supplied: 2NO + 2NC or 4NC power poles. Consult
Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover. Utilisation
Can also operate at 220VDC.
No auxiliary contacts can be mounted. – Lighting systems
– Electric home heating
– Heat pumps
– Conditioning
CN63... – Ventilation
– Civil installations.
Lighting circuit switching

Maximum number of contactors side-by-side See page 15-6.
When contactors are mounted side by side and operate in
continuous service (≥1 hour), spacing is needed between
equipment to consent appropriate cooling.
9mm spacing is required; there is an accessory, called half-
module spacer, order code CNX 80, for this specific type of
mounting. The following table indicates details of the space
needed between each.
Maximum number of contactors to be mounted
side-by-side without spacing; the CNX 80 spacer is required
when the number of pieces is more than the indicated below:
CN20 CN32 CN25 CN40 CN63

Ambient 3 3 3 3 3
temperature
≤40°C
Ambient 2 2 2 3 2
temperature
>40°...55°C
Add-on blocks/Accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

15-2 page 15-3 page 15-4 page 15-4 page 15-5 to 7
Modular contactors
Contactors with manual Order code Rated Configura- Qty Wt General characteristics
auxiliary tion and per – DC powered magnetic core system assuring silent
control supply voltage number pkg operation and noise damping during the control phase
of contacts – Overvoltage protection circuit and voltage peak limitation
[V] NO NC n° [kg] of the magnetic core
– Equipped with 2 or 4 closing contacts of equal capacity
One-pole or two-pole. 1 module. Ith 20A. permitting use in power or auxiliary circuits
CNM20 11 024 24VAC/DC 1 1 10 0.135 – Operation flag indicator
CNM20 11 220 220...230VAC 1 1 10 0.135 – Handle functions
Position A: contactor function
CNM20 20 024 24VAC/DC 2 –– 10 0.135 Position B: contactor permanently switched off, even in
CNM20 20 220 220...230VAC 2 –– 10 0.135 case of coil control voltage is present.
One-pole or two-pole. 1 module. Ith 32A. Position I: contactor closed manually; when the coil is
supplied the handle automatically moves to A position.
CNM32 20 024 24VAC/DC 2 –– 10 0.135
CNM20... - CNM32 20... CNM32 20 220 220...230VAC 2 –– 10 0.135
Three-pole or four-pole. 2 module. Ith 32A. Operational characteristics
Type IEC conventional Operational Protection
CNM32 10 024 24VAC/DC 4 –– 5 0.260 free-air thermal current fuse
CNM32 10 220 220...230VAC 4 –– 5 0.260 current Ith in AC3 gG (IEC)
in AC1 ≤400V
Other voltages on request. Consult Customer Service; see contact details ≤400V
2NC version supplied on request. [A] [A] [A]
The last (NC) pole has the same characteristics as the power pole. It can One-pole or two-pole.
therefore be used indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power contact.
The fourth NO or NC pole has the same characteristics as the power poles; CNM20... 20 9 20
therefore it can be used indifferently as auxiliary or as power contact. CNM32... 32 9 32
On request can be supplied: 2NO + 2NC or 4NC power poles. Consult
Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover. Three-pole or four-pole.
Can also operate at 220VDC.
CNM32 10... No auxiliary contacts can be mounted. CNM32... 32 8.5 32
– Noise level:
• Closed contactor <20dB
• Making/breaking operation ≤50dB
Maximum number of contactors side-by-side – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60175).
When contactors are mounted side by side and operate in
continuous service (≥1 hour), spacing is needed between Operational characteristics of contactor-incorporated
equipment to consent appropriate cooling. auxiliary contacts
9mm spacing is required; there is an accessory, called half- Type IEC insulation IEC rating (AC15 category)
module spacer, order code CNX 80, for this specific type of voltage Ui
mounting. The following table indicates details of the space 230V 400V
needed between each.
[V] [A] [A]
Maximum number of contactors to be mounted CNM20... 440 6 6
side-by-side without spacing; the CNX 80 spacer is required
when the number of pieces is more than the indicated below: CNM32... 440 6 4 15
CNM20 CNM32 Certifications obtained: EAC.
Ambient temperature ≤40°C 3 3 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.
Ambient temperature 2 2
>40°...55°C Utilisation
– Lighting systems
– Electric home heating
– Heat pumps
– Conditioning
– Ventilation
– Civil installations.
Lighting circuit switching

See page 15-6.
Add-on blocks and Order code Characteristics Max Qty Wt Operational characteristics for auxiliary contacts
qty per per – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440VAC
accessories contactor pkg – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 6A
– Minimum switching capacity: 5mA 12V
n° n° [kg] – Conductor section: 1...2.5mm2
Auxiliary contacts. – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm.
CNH 11 1NO + 1NC 1 1 0.044
CNH 20 2NO 1 1 0.044 Certifications obtained: EAC.
Set for terminal protection (also sealable). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1,
CNP 0 For CN20..., 2 1 0.001 IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.
CNM20... and
CNM32...
CNP 1 For CN25... 2 1 0.002
CNH... and CNM32...
CNP 2 For CN40... 2 1 0.003
and CN63...
Not suitable for CN20..., CN32 11..., CN32 20..., CNM20...
Spacer. and CNM32... modular contactors.
CNX 80 1/2 mod. wide 1 10 0.013 Set of 2 pieces.
CNP2

page 15-4 page 15-4 page 15-5 to 7 15-3
Modular contactors
Dimensions (mm [in])
MODULAR CONTACTORS
CN20... - CN32... (one-pole - two-pole) CN25... - CN32... (three-pole - four-pole) CN40... - CN63... (three-pole - four-pole)
60 60 60
(2.36”) (2.36”) (2.36”)
17.5 53.5
(0.69”) 44 35 44 44
(1.73”) (1.38”) (1.73”) (2.1”) (1.73”)
(3.35”)
(3.35”)
(3.35”)
(1.38”)
(1.38”)
(1.77”)
(1.77”)
(1.38”)
(1.77”)
85
85
85
35
35
45
45
35
45
5 5 5
(0.2”) (0.2”) (0.2”)
CNM20... - CNM32... (one-pole - two-pole) CNM32... (three-pole - four-pole)

60 60
(2.36”) (2.36”)
17.5
(0.69”) 44 35 44
(1.73”) (1.38”) (1.73”)
(3.35”)
(3.35”)
(1.77”)
(1.38”)
(1.38”)
(1.77”)
85
85
45
35
35
45
5 5 5 5
(0.2”) (0.2”) (0.2”) (0.2”)
ADD-ON BLOCKS
Contact blocks Spacer
CNH... CNX80
60
(2.36”) 9
(0.35”) 45
44
(1.73”) (1.77”)
(2.58”)
65.5
(3.35”)
(1.77”)
85
45
9
(0.35”)
15
Wiring diagrams
ONE-POLE AND TWO-POLE MODULAR CONTACTORS THREE-POLE AND FOUR-POLE MODULAR CONTACTORS
CN20 11 CN20 20 CN25 01 CN25 10
CN32 11 CN32 20 CN32 01 CN32 10
CNM20 11 CNM20 20 CN40 01 CN40 10
CNM32 20 CN63 01 CN63 10
CNM32 10
A1 1 21 A1 1 3 A1 1 3 5 21 A1 1 3 5 13 (7)
A2 2 22 A2 2 4 A2 2 4 6 22 A2 2 4 6 14 (8)
The NC contact has the same characteristics as the power pole contact. Therefore, it can be used
indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power pole contact.
The fourth pole NO or NC has the same characteristics as the power poles. Therefore, it can be
used indifferently as auxiliary or as power pole contact.
ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS

CNH11 CNH20
63 63
51 53
52 54
64 64
15-4
Modular contactors
TYPE CN20... - CNM20... CN25... CN32... - CNM32... CN32... - CNM32... CN40... CN63...
(one-pole and two-pole) (three-pole and four-pole)
IEC conventional free-air A 20 25 32 32 40 63
thermal current Ith (≤40°C)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui V 230 440 230 440 440 440
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage kV 4 4 4 4 4 4
Uimp
Minimum switching capacity 17V ≥50mA 17V ≥50mA 17V ≥50mA 17V ≥50mA 17V ≥50mA 17V ≥50mA
Avarage coil consumption in-rush and W 2.5 3 2.5 3 5 5
holding
Maximum tightening torque for Nm 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
coil terminals lbft 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.44
Pozidr. PZ1 PZ1 PZ1 PZ1 PZ2 PZ2
Coil conductor section min. mm2 1
max. mm2 2.5
Maximum tightening torque for Nm 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2 2
power terminals lbft 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.48 1.48
Tool PZ1 PZ1 PZ1 PZ1 PZ2 PZ2
Power conductor section min. mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1 1
max. mm2 6 6 6 6 25 25
AC/DC CONTROL CIRCUIT
Operating voltage pick-up % Us 85...110
limits drop-out % Us 20...75
OPERATING TIMES
Avarage time closing NO ms 15...45 15...45 15...45 15...45 15...20 15...20
opening NO ms 25...50 20...70 20...50 20...70 35...45 35...45
LIFE
Mechanical cycles 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000
Electrical (in AC3 duty) cycles 300,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 150,000 150,000
Electrical (in AC1 duty) cycles 200,000 200,000 150,000 150,000 100,000 100,000
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
15
15-5
Modular contactors
LIGHTING CIRCUIT SWITCHING

Lamp features Lamp Rated Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps each contactor pole
power current power 230V 50Hz
[W] [A] [μF] CN20... - CNM20... CN25... CN32... - CNM32... CN40 CN63
INCANDESCENT AND 60 0.26 - 33 37 42 67 83
TUNGSTEN HALOGEN 100 0.44 - 20 22 25 40 50
500 2.17 - 4 4 5 8 10
1000 4.35 - 2 2 3 4 5
COMPACT FLUORESCENT 3 0.04 - 150 200 250 550 700
(ENERGY SAVING) 5 0.06 - 90 120 150 330 420
6 0.07 - 75 100 125 275 350
7 0.08 - 64 86 107 236 300
8 0.09 - 56 75 94 206 263
9 0.1 - 50 67 83 183 233
10 0.11 - 45 60 75 165 210
11 0.12 - 41 55 68 150 191
12 0.13 - 38 50 63 138 175
13 0.14 - 35 46 58 127 162
14 0.15 - 32 43 54 118 150
15 0.16 - 30 40 50 110 140
16 0.18 - 28 38 47 103 131
17 0.19 - 26 35 44 97 124
18 0.2 - 25 33 42 92 117
20 0.21 - 23 30 38 83 105
21 0.22 - 21 29 36 79 100
22 0.23 - 20 27 34 75 95
23 0.24 - 20 26 33 72 91
24 0.25 - 19 25 31 69 88
25 0.26 - 18 24 30 66 84
26 0.27 - 17 23 29 63 81
27 0.124 - 17 22 28 61 78
30 0.15 - 15 20 25 55 70
50 0.24 - 9 12 15 33 42
70 0.312 - 6 9 11 24 30
FLUORESCENT 18 0.37 - 24 30 35 54 86
not corrected 25 0.29 - 30 39 45 69 110
36 0.43 - 20 26 30 47 74
58 0.67 - 13 17 19 30 48
15 FLUORESCENT
corrected
18
25
0.19
0.15
4.5
3.5
7
9
8
10
9
11
49
63
73
94
36 0.29 4.5 7 8 9 49 73
58 0.46 7 4 5 6 31 47
ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT 14 0.08 - 44 59 64 156 225
BALLAST 2x14 0.15 - 23 32 34 83 120
18 0.09 - 39 53 57 139 200
2x18 0.17 - 21 28 30 74 106
21 0.11 - 32 43 46 114 164
2x21 0.22 - 16 22 23 57 82
28 0.14 - 25 34 36 89 129
2x28 0.27 - 13 18 19 46 67
36 0.16 - 22 30 32 78 113
2x36 0.31 - 11 15 16 40 58
40 0.21 - 17 23 24 60 86
2x40 0.42 - 8 11 12 30 43
58 0.25 - 14 19 20 50 72
2x58 0.48 - 7 10 11 26 38
70 0.3 - 12 16 17 42 60
2x70 0.57 - 6 8 9 22 32
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY 50 0.6 - 14 18 20 38 55
VAPOUR 80 0.8 - 10 13 15 29 42
not corrected 125 1.2 - 7 9 10 20 29
250 2.2 - 4 5 6 10 15
400 3.3 - 2 3 4 7 10
700 5.4 - 1 2 3 4 6
1000 7.5 - 1 1 2 3 4
15-6
Modular contactors
Lamp features Lamp Rated Capacitor Maximum number [n] of lamps each contactor pole
power current power 230V 50Hz
[W] [A] [μF] CN20... - CNM20... CN25... CN32... - CNM32... CN40 CN63
HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY 50 0.3 7 4 5 6 31 47
VAPOUR 80 0.4 8 4 5 5 27 41
corrected 125 0.6 10 3 4 4 22 33
250 1.2 18 1 2 2 12 18
400 1.8 25 1 1 1 9 13
700 3.4 40 0 0 1 5 7
1000 4.8 60 0 0 0 4 5
METAL HALIDE 35 0.5 - 18 22 28 43 60
not corrected 70 1 - 10 12 14 23 32
100 1.2 - 8 10 11 19 26
150 1.8 - 5 7 7 12 18
250 3 - 3 4 4 7 10
400 4.6 - 3 3 3 6 9
600 6.2 - 1 2 2 3 4
1000 9.7 - 1 1 1 2 3
2000 12.2 - 0 0 1 1 2
METAL HALIDE 35 0.23 6 5 6 6 36 50
corrected 70 0.42 12 2 3 3 18 25
100 0.55 12 2 3 3 18 25
150 0.77 20 1 1 1 11 15
250 1.26 32 0 1 1 6 9
400 2 45 0 0 0 5 7
600 3 65 0 0 0 3 5
1000 5 85 0 0 0 2 3
2000 10.5 125 0 0 0 1 2
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM 100 1.2 - 7 8 9 25 30
VAPOUR 150 1.8 - 5 6 6 17 22
not corrected 250 3 - 3 4 4 10 13
400 4.4 - 2 2 2 6 8
600 6.2 - 1 1 1 4 5
1000 10.3 - 0 1 1 3 3
HIGH-PRESSURE SODIUM 100 0.55 12 2 3 3 18 27
VAPOUR 150 0.77 20 1 1 2 11 16
corrected 250 1.26 32 0 1 1 6 10
400
600
2
2.9
45
65
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
3
6
5
15
1000 5.1 100 0 0 0 2 3
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM 18 0.4 - 22 27 30 71 90
VAPOUR 35 0.6 - 7 9 10 23 30
not corrected 55 0.6 - 7 9 10 23 30
90 0.9 - 4 5 6 14 19
135 0.9 - 3 4 5 10 13
180 0.9 - 3 4 5 10 13
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM 18 0.35 5 6 7 8 44 66
VAPOUR 35 0.28 20 1 1 2 11 16
corrected 55 0.35 20 1 1 2 11 16
90 0.55 26 1 1 1 8 12
135 0.8 40 0 0 1 4 7
180 1 40 0 0 1 5 8
LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM 35 0.16 - 13 18 21 35 44
VAPOUR 55 0.25 - 8 11 13 22 28
with electronic ballast
LED LIGHTING BALLAST N= N = 2400 / In N = 3800 / In N = 4000A / In N = 11000 / In N = 18000 / In
number of controlled ballasts
In = Ballast rated current in mA
Usually each LED lamp has one ballast.
In event of one ballast supplies several lamps, the calculation has to consider the number of supplied ballasts.
E.G. If the LED lamp ballast input current is 500mA, (consider CN40=11,000/500=22), the maximum number of ballasts admitted per each pole of CN 40 contactor is 22.
15-7
FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION

R1D type R2D type R4D type
• 1 operation threshold • 2 operation thresholds • 2 operation thresholds
• External toroidal transformer • External toroidal transformer • External toroidal transformer
• Adjustable tripping In and delay time. • Configurable fail safe operation • Configurable fail safe operation
• Adjustable tripping In and delay time. • Fault current measurement
• Digital display
R3D type • Flag indicator
• 2 operation thresholds • Shunt tripping circuit
• External toroidal transformer • Adjustable tripping In and delay time.
• Configurable fail safe operation
• Flag indicator
• Adjustable tripping In and delay time.
MODULAR VERSION MODULAR VERSION COMPACT INTERNAL PANEL VERSION

RM1 type RMT type RC type
• 1 operation threshold • 1 operation threshold • 1 operation threshold
• External toroidal transformer • Incorporated toroidal transformer • Incorporated toroidal transformer
• Fixed tripping In and delay time. • Adjustable tripping In and delay time. • Adjustable tripping In and delay time
• 35mm to 110mm diameter.
RM type
• 1 operation threshold
• External toroidal transformer
• Adjustable tripping In and delay time.
Page 16-3 Page 16-3
TOROIDAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS EXTERNAL MULTIPLIER

RT type RX10 type
• Solid core • 10-fold multiplier.
• 35mm to 210mm diameter.
RTA type
• Split core
• 110mm and 210mm diameter.
EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS 16
Modular, flush and internal panel

mount version, with or without flag
indicator, configurable prealarm
indication and fail safe operation
Versions with automatic toroid
connection control
Choice of supply voltage ranges
Adjustable fault current In
Adjustment and choice of tripping
range for both fault current and
delay time.
SEC. - PAGE
Earth leakage relays
With 1 operation threshold ................................................................................................................................................ 16 - 2
With 2 operation thresholds ............................................................................................................................................... 16 - 3
Toroidal current transformers ............................................................................................................................................ 16 - 3
External multiplier ............................................................................................................................................................. 16 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 16 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 16 - 5
I SOLATION
AND
Relays with Order code Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics
1 operation threshold supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – Green power LED indicator (ON)
[V] SPDT n° [kg] – Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
– Front TEST and RESET buttons
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. – Configurable automatic or manual resetting
Flush mount. External CT. – Flush mount 96x96mm housing with transparent cover
R1D 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.280 – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals, IP40 on front
R1D 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.280 with cover.
ADJUSTMENTS FOR R1D
Supply voltage: – Configurable tripping 0.025...0.25A
110...125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC set-point (In): 0.25...2.5A
220...240VAC (50/60Hz) 2.5...25A
380...415VAC (50/60Hz).
25...250A (with external
R1D... multiplier RX10)
– Configurable tripping 0.02...0.5s
delay time (t): 0.2...5s
Certification and compliance
Certification obtained: EAC
Order code Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics

supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – Configurable fail safe operation for RMT type only
[V] SPDT n° [kg] – Green power LED indicator (ON)
– Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. – Front TEST and RESET buttons
Modular, 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail mounting. – Configurable automatic or manual resetting
External CT. Fixed tripping set point and time. – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module, with
RM1 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.175 transparent cover, suitable for fixing on 35mm DIN rail
RM1... RM1 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.175 (IEC/EN 60715)
AC – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals, IP40 on front
with cover.
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD.
Modular, 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail mounting. SETTINGS FOR RM1
External CT. – Selectable tripping set-point (In): fixed 0.3A or 0.5A
31 RM 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.190 – Selectable tripping time (t): fixed 0.02s or 0.5s
31 RM 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.190 ADJUSTMENTS FOR RM AND RMT
– Configurable tripping 0.025...0.25A
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. set-point (In): 0.25...2.5A
Modular, 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail mounting. 2.5...25A
Ø28mm/Ø1.1” incorporated CT. Configurable fail safe. 25...250A (with external
31 RM... multiplier RX10 for RM only)
31 RMT 415 110-240-415V 2 1 0.375 – Configurable tripping 0.02...0.5s
16 Supply voltage:
110...125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC
220...240VAC (50/60Hz) Certification obtained: EAC
380...415VAC (50/60Hz). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-2.
31 RMT...
Order code Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics

supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – Green power LED indicator (ON)
[V] SPDT n° [kg] – Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
– Front TEST and RESET buttons
1 OPERATION THRESHOLD. – Configurable automatic or manual resetting
Compact panel mount. CT incorporated. – Compact housing for fixing on panel mounting plate
31 RC 48 24-48VAC/DC 1 1 0.485 – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals.
31 RC60... 31 RC 415 110-240-415V 1 1 0.485 ADJUSTMENTS FOR RC
Supply voltage: set-point (In): 0.25...2.5A
110...125VAC (50/60Hz)/DC 2.5...25A
220...240VAC (50/60Hz) – Configurable tripping 0.02...0.5s
380...415VAC (50/60Hz).
Replace with the digit of the required diameter (35-60-80-110mm/ delay time (t): 0.2...5s
1.38-2.36-3.15-4.33”).
31 RC110...

Relays with Ordering Rated auxiliary Output Qty Wt General characteristics

2 operation thresholds code supply voltage contacts per – Earth leakage relay type A
pkg – 2 output relays each with changeover contact,
[V] SPDT n° [kg] configurable 2 tripping or 1 tripping and 1 alarm
– Configurable fail safe prealarm and operation
2 OPERATION THRESHOLDS. – Automatic toroid connection control
Flush mount. External CT. Fail safe. – Green power LED indicator (ON)
R2D 415 110-240-415V 2 1 0.395 – Red relay tripped LED indicator (TRIP)
2 OPERATION THRESHOLDS. – Red tripping prealarm LED indicator (ALARM)
Flush mount. External CT. – Front TEST button
Fail safe. Flag Indicator. – Manual resetting by front RESET button or remote
contact closing
R3D 415 110-240-415V 2 1 0.405 – Automatic resetting by remote contact closing or rear
2 OPERATION THRESHOLDS. jumper connection
Flush mount. External CT. – Constant toroid-relay circuit control
R2D... Fault current measurement. Digital display. – Flag indicator (TRIP MEMORY) (R3D-R4D only)
Fail safe. Flag indicator. – Digital fault current measurement and display with
R4D 415 110-240-415V 2 1 0.570 configurable tripping value memory (R4D only)
– Shunt tripping circuit operating test (TCS) (R4D only)
Supply voltage: – Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78”x3.78” housing with
110...125VAC (50/60Hz)
220...240VAC (50/60Hz) transparent cover
380...415VAC (50/60Hz). – IEC degree of protection: IP20 terminals, IP40 on front
with cover.
ADJUSTMENTS FOR R2D and R3D
set-point (In): 0.25...2.5A
2.5...25A
R3D...
multiplier RX10)
– Prealarm set-point: fixed 70%
ADJUSTMENTS FOR R4D
set-point (In): 0.3...3A
3...30A
multiplier RX10)
– Prealarm set-point: fixed 70%
R4D...
16
Toroidal current Order code Diameter Openable Qty Wt. Certification and compliance
transformers per Certification obtained: EAC
pkg Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-2.
[mm/in] n° [kg]
31 RT 35 35/1.38” No 1 0.200
31 RT 60 60/2.36” No 1 0.245
31 RT 80 80/3.15” No 1 0.410
31 RT 110 110/4.33” No 1 0.400
31 RT 210 210/8.27” No 1 1.200
31 RTA 110 110/4.33” Yes 1 0.540
31 RT... 31 RT...
31 RTA 210 210/8.27” Yes 1 1.820
External multiplier Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per – Dimensions: refer to RT35 toroidal transformer on
pkg page 16-4.
– To connect between toroid and relay.
n° [kg]
31 RX 10 10-fold multiplier suitable 1 0.300 Certification and compliance
for R1D, RM, R2D, R3D Certification obtained: EAC
and R4D types only Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-2.
31 RX 10

RELAYS
R1D - R2D - R3D R4D Cutout 91
(3.58”)
96 96 16
56 (0.63”) 85 19
(3.78”) 19 (3.78”) (3.35”)
(2.20”) (0.75”) (0.75”)
R3
(0.12”)
(3.78”)
(3.54”)
(3.58”)
(2.60”)
(3.78”)
(3.54”)
96
90
91
66
96
90
RM1 - RM RMT 67 RC
(2.64”)
67
(2.64”) 105 43 A H
(4.13”) (1.69”)
52 43
(2.05”) (1.69”)
(3.50”)
(1.77”)
89
45
(3.50”)
(1.77”)
89
45
B
D
27 5
(1.06”) (0.20”)
5
(0.20”)
E
Ø
(1 28.
.12 5
”) G
5 (0.20”)
F C
TYPE A B C D E F G H
RC35 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 35 (1.38”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC60 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 60 (2.36”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC80 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 70 (2.75”) 80 (3.15”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
RC110 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 60 (2.36”) 50 (1.97”)
TOROIDAL TRANSFORMERS AND MULTIPLIER

RT35 - RT60 - RT80 - RT110 - RX10 RT210 - RTA210
A H A
H
K
B
D
16
E
5 (0.20”) G
F C
A
G
B
RTA110
K H
E
5 (0.20”)
F C
D
B
With screws, for RTA210 split-core type; fixed structure, without screws, for RT210 type.
E
5 (0.20”) G
F C
A
TYPE A B C D E F G H K
RT35 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) 35 (1.38”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT60 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) 60 (2.36”) 47 (1.85”) 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT80 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 50 (1.97”) 80 (3.15”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT110 150 (5.90”) 160 (6.30”) 50 (1.97”) 110 (4.33”) 70 (2.75”) 110 (4.33”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
RT210 310 (12.20”) 290 (11.41”) 54 (2.12”) 210 (8.27”) 145 (5.71”) 240 (9.45”) 280 (11.02”) 36 (1.42”) 258 (10.16”)
RTA110 180 (7.09”) 150 (5.90”) 45 (1.77”) 110 (4.33”) 75 (2.95”) 110 (4.33”) 38 (1.50”) 25 (0.98”) 145 (5.71”)
RTA210 310 (12.20”) 290 (11.41”) 54 (2.12”) 210 (8.27”) 145 (5.71”) 240 (9.45”) 280 (11.02”) 36 (1.42”) 258 (10.16”)
RX10 100 (3.94”) 110 (4.33”) 50 (1.97”) — — 60 (2.36”) 43 (1.69”) 30 (1.18”) —
16-4
Wiring diagrams
RELAYS
R1D R2D
GRD Line GRD Line
N L1L2 L3 N L1L2 L3
Us Us
12 11 10 8 7 6 5 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R2D
R1D
Trip Trip Alarm/Trip
1 1 5-6 - 24VAC/DC 1 11 1-2 - 24VAC/DC

2 2 5-7 - 48VAC/DC 2 12 1-3 - 48VAC/DC
3 3 13
5-6 - 110-125VAC/DC 4 14 1-2 - 110-125VAC
4
5-7 - 220-240VAC 15 2-3 - 220-240VAC
5-8 - 380-415VAC 16 1-3 - 380-415VAC
Remote
Load Load reset
The coil connection can vary depending on the connected type of device (contactor, breaker with shunt trip release or breaker with undervoltage trip release).
R3D
GRD Line
N L1L2 L3
Us
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R3D
Trip Alarm/Trip
1 11 **
2 12
3 13
4 14 1-2 - 110-125VAC
15 2-3 - 220-240VAC
16 1-3 - 380-415VAC
Flag indicator
Remote **
Load reset
R4D RM - RM1
GRD Line GRD Line
N L1L2 L3 N L1L2 L3
16
Us Us
TCS control
19 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 12 10 7 5 3 1
18 RM
17 R4D
Type Us Us TCS
Wiring Wiring 7-5 - 24VAC/DC
1 16 7-3 - 48VAC/DC
2 17
Trip Alarm/Trip 110-125VAC 1-2 17-18 18 Trip 7-1 - 380-415VAC
R4D 415 220-240VAC 2-3 17-18 7-3 - 220-240VAC
7-5 - 110-125VAC/DC
1 11 ** 380-415VAC 1-3 17-19
2 12 Load
3 13
22 2120
4 14 1-2 - 110-125VAC
TCS
15 2-3 - 220-240VAC
16 1-3 - 380-415VAC
Flag indicator
Remote **
TCS: Shunt circuit test control
Load reset
RMT RC
GRD Line GRD Line
N L1 L2 L3 N L1L2 L3
5-1 - 380-415VAC
5-3 - 220-240VAC
5-4 - 110-125VAC/DC Us
Us
10 11 12 14 15 16 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RMT RC
0-1 - 24VAC/DC
0-2 - 48VAC/DC
0-1 - 110-125VAC/DC
0-2 - 220-240VAC
Trip Trip 0-3 - 380-415VAC
1 3 4 5
Load
Load
16-5
TYPE R1D R2D R3D R4D

DESCRIPTION
Flush mount with Flush mount with transparent Flush mount with transparent Flush mount with display and cover,
transparent cover, cover, 2 operating thresholds cover, 2 operating thresholds 2 operating thresholds - constant
1 operating threshold constant toroid-relay circuit control constant toroid-relay circuit control toroid-relay circuit control
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Toroidal transformer External
(see types given
on page 16-3)
Adjustments
Tripping set-point (In) 0.025...0.25A (x0.1) 0.03...0.3A (x0.1)
0.25...2.5A (x1) 0.3...3A (x1)
2.5...25A (x10) 3...30A (x10)
25...250A (external multiplier) 30...300A (external multiplier)
Prealarm set-point –– 70% In (fixed) 70% In (fixed) 70% In (fixed)
Tripping delay time (t) 0.02...0.5s (tx1) 0.03...0.5s (tx1)
0.2...5s (tx10) 0.3...5s (tx10)
Selection of multiplier for In and t By dip switches
Resetting Configurable automatic Automatic by remote contact closing or rear jumper connection
or manual by Manual by button on front or remote contact closing
button on front
Shunt circuit control –– –– –– Yes
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary voltage Us 24-48VAC/DC ––
(0.85 - 1.1 Us limit) 110...125VAC/DC 110...125/220...240/380...415VAC
220...240/380...415VAC
Rated frequency 50...60Hz
Power consumption (maximum) 4VA
RELAY OUTPUTS
State Normally de-energised Configurable normally Configurable normally Configurable normally
de-energised or de-energised or de-energised or
energised energised energised
Contact arrangement 1 changeover SPDT (trip) 2 changeover SPDT each (configurable: 2 trip or 1 trip and 1 alarm)
Rated contact capacity IEC Ith 5A - 250VAC
Electrical life 3 x 105 cycles
Mechanical life 50 x 106 cycles
INSULATION
Power frequency withstand 2.5kV for 60s
voltage
16 INDICATIONS
Auxiliaty voltage available (ON) Green LED
Relay tripping (TRIP) Red LED
Trip prealarm (ALARM) –– Red LED Red LED Red LED
Mechanical (TRIP MEMORY) –– –– Flag indicator Flag indicator
Shunt circuit tripping (TCS) –– –– –– Red LED
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed Removable, plug-in
Tightening torque maximum 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
Conductor section min...max 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Relative humidity 90%
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing polycarbonate
Type A, sensitive to residual sinusoidal AC and pulsating DC currents.
Remote resetting by removing power for more than 1 second.
Digital display of fault current measurement and tripping value memory.
16-6
RM1... RM... RMT... RC...
Modular with transparent cover, Modular with transparent cover, Modular with transparent cover, Compact,
1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold 1 operating threshold
External External Incorporated Ø28mm/1.1” Incorporated

(see types given on page 16-3) (see types given on page 16-3) 35-60-80-110mm/
1.38-2.36-3.15-4.33”
standard diameter
0.3A or 0.5A only 0.025...0.25A (x0.1) 0.025...0.25A (x0.1) 0.025...0.25A (x0.1)

0.25...2.5A (x1) 0.25...2.5A (x1) 0.25...2.5A (x1)
2.5...25A (x10) 2.5...25A (x10) 2.5...25A (x10)
25...250A (external multiplier)
–– –– –– ––
0.02s or 0.5s only 0.02...0.5s (tx1) 0.02...0.5s (tx1) 0.02...0.5s (tx1)
0.2...5s (tx10) 0.2...5s (tx10) 0.2...5s (tx10)
By dip switches
Configurable A: Automatic or
M: Manual by button on front
––
24-48VAC/DC –– 24-48VAC/DC
110...125VAC/DC
220...240/380...415VAC
50...60Hz
3VA
Normally de-energised Normally de-energised Configurable normally Normally de-energised

de-energised or
energised
1 changeover SPDT (trip) 1 changeover SPDT (trip) 2 changeover SPDT each (both trip) 1 changeover SPDT (trip)
5A - 250VAC
3x105 cycles
50x106 cycles
2.5kV for 60s

16
Green LED
Red LED
––
––
––
Fixed
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG)
-10...+60°C
-20...+80°C
90%
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate
Type A, sensitive to residual sinusoidal AC and pulsating DC currents.
16-7
Page 17-2 Page 17-5
MODULAR TIME RELAYS PLUG-IN AND FLUSH-MOUNT TIME

• Suitable for modular-slot switchboards RELAYS, 48X48MM
• Selectable time ranges on front: • Flush and internal panel mounting
0.1s...100 days • Time ranges: 0.05s...10h
• LED indication • LED indication
• Mounting on 35mm DIN rail • 8 and 11-pin sockets for panel mounting.
• Screw terminals.
TIME RELAYS 17
Modular version for modular-slot

switchboards, also suitable for rear
mounting plate fixing
Plug-in or flush-mount version
Vast range of functions and time
scales
Reliable time and repeat accuracy.
SEC. - PAGE
Modular version
On delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... 17 - 2
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 relay output ....................................................................................................... 17 - 2
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 2 relay outputs ...................................................................................................... 17 - 3
Recycle, independent timings. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................... 17 - 3
Off delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... 17 - 3
For starting. Multiscale. Multivoltage ................................................................................................................................. 17 - 4
For staircase ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17 - 4
Plug-in and flush-mount version, 48x48mm/1.9x1.9”
On delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
On delay. Multiscale. Single voltage ................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage .............................................................................................................................. 17 - 5
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 17 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 17 - 7
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Time relays
Modular version
On delay time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Multiscale. Multivoltage scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage.
range supply voltage pkg On delay, delay on make, with start at relay energising
[V] n° [kg] for TM P
– Electronic time relay, multiscale with 2 normally open
TM P 0.1...1s 24...48VDC 1 0.048 (N/O-SPST) contacts with common pole for
1...10s 24...240VAC TM P A 440.
6...60s – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
1...10min – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
6min...1h 10...100%
1...10h – Green LED indicator for power on
0.1...1 day – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
1...10 days and steady when relay energised
ON only – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module
OFF only – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
TM P A440 0.1...1s 380...440VAC 1 0.090 mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
1...10s IP20 on terminals.
TM P 6...60s
1...10min Certifications and compliance
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices -
Timers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-7.
Multifunction time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale,
Multiscale. Multivoltage. range supply voltage pkg multivoltage
1 relay output [V] n° [kg]
– Enabling input
– 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
TM M1 0.1...1s 12...240V 1 0.086 – Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with
1...10s AC/DC start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising
6...60s with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with
1...10min OFF interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting
6min...1h with ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay;
1...10h relay energising at external contact closing with start
0.1...1 day on break. (f) Pulse on relay energising with start on
1...10 days external contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising
ON only with start on external contact opening. (h) On-off
OFF only delay. Delay on make, with start at external contact
closing, and delay at break, with start at external
contact opening. (i) Internal ON/OFF trigger with relay
contact closing or operating at each closing of an
external contact. (j) Pulse generator, unequal timing
recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and 0.5s ON
TM M1
pulse.
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10...100%
17 – Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay
and steady when relay energised
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for
fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.

Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices -
Timers.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-7.

17-2 page 17-6 page 17-7 and 8 page 17-12
Time relays
Modular version
Multifunction time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Multiscale. Multivoltage. scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage
range supply voltage pkg – Enabling input
2 relay outputs [V] n° [kg] – 2 relay outputs, one with 1 delayed changeover (C/O-SPDT)
contact and the other with 1 normally open (N/O-SPST)
TM M2 0.1...1s 12...240V 1 0.094 contact, programmable as instantaneous or delayed
1...10s AC/DC – Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with
6...60s start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising
1...10min with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with OFF
6min...1h interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with
1...10h ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay
0.1...1 day energising at external contact closing with start on
1...10 days break. (f) Pulse on relay energising with start on external
ON only contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising with start
OFF only on external contact opening. (h) On-off delay. Delay on
make, with start at external contact closing, and delay at
break, with start at external contact opening. (i) Internal
ON/OFF trigger with relay contact closing or operating at
each closing of an external contact. (j) Pulse generator,
TM M2 unequal timing recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and
0.5s ON pulse.
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10...100%
– Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay and
steady when relay energised
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for fixing
on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
IP20 on terminals.
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and Canada
(cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-8.
Recycle time relay, Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Programmable asymmetrical recycle time relay,
independent timings. range supply voltage pkg multiscale, multivoltage. Flasher with independent
Multiscale. [V] n° [kg] timing for ON and OFF intervals
– Enabling input of ON or OFF interval
Multivoltage TM PL 0.1...1s 12...240V 1 0.082 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
1...10s AC/DC – Delay time for OFF (pause) interval, adjustable on
6...60s front by rotary switch: 10...100%
1...10min – Delay time for ON (work) interval, adjustable on front
6min...1h by rotary switch: 10...100%
1h...10h – Green LED indicator for power on
0.1...1 day
1...10 days
– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay 17
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
3...30 days fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
10...100 days – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
IP20 on terminals.
TM PL Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.
Off delay time relay. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Multiscale. scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage. True off
range supply voltage pkg delay; delay on break with start at relay de-energising
Multivoltage [V] n° [kg] – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
TM D 0.06...0.6s 24...240V 1 0.080 10...100%
0.6...6s AC/DC – Green LED indicator for power on
6...60s – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
18...180s fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715)
IP20 on terminals.
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
TM D
Operational diagram
See page 17-9.

page 17-6 page 17-9 page 17-12 17-3
Time relays
Modular version
Time relay for starting. Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Multiscale. scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage for
range supply voltage pkg starting (star-delta, impedance, autotransformer, etc)
Multivoltage [V] n° [kg] of induction motors (squirrel cage), 2 separate
timings
TM ST 0.1...1s 24...48VDC 1 0.090 – 1 relay output with 2 normally open (N/O-SPST)
1...10s 24...240VAC contacts with common pole
6...60s – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch:
1...10min 10-100% for star connection
TM ST A440 0.1...1s 380...440VAC 1 0.090 – Starting and transition (20...300ms time scale - from
1...10s star to delta), time adjustable on front by rotary
6...60s switch
1...10min – Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing during
delay and steady at delay lapsing
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module; suitable for
TM ST IP20 on terminals.

Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-10.
Time relay for staircase Order code Time of Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
scale auxiliary per – Electronic time relay single scale and voltage for
range supply voltage pkg staircase illumination
[V] n° [kg] – 1 relay output with 1 powered normally open
(N/O-SPST) contact
TM LS 0.5...20min 220...240VAC 1 0.080 – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch
– Suitable for 3 or 4-wire systems
– 1 slide switch for timed or constant lighting operation
– Function for one hour lighting and fast switch off
– Connection with up to 50 light-up switches maximum;
≤ 1mA each
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for
TM LS mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
IP20 on terminals.
17 Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices - Timers.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-10.

17-4 page 17-6 page 17-10 page 17-12
Time relays
Plug-in and flush mount version 48x48mm/1.9x1.9”
Accessories
Time relay Order code Time Rated Qty Wt General characteristics

scale auxiliary per TIME RELAY L48TP
range supply pkg – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage.
voltage On delay, delay on make with start at relay energising
[V] n° [kg] – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob
Time relay on delay. – Time range selected by dip switches:
Multiscale and multivoltage. L48TP S: 0.3...3s; 1.2...12s; 10...100s; 7.8...780s.
31 L48TP S 240 0.3...780s 1 0.124 L48 TP M: 18s...3min; 72s...12min; 10...100min;
24VAC/DC 78...780min
110VAC – LED indicators for power on and relay state
31 L48TP M 240 18s...780min 220...240VAC 1 0.124
31 L48TP... – Plug-in housing with 8-pin socket, 31 S8 or 31 L48 P8
– Flush mount bracket 31 L48AP available
Time relay on delay. – IEC protection degree: IP40 on front and IP20 at terminals.
Multiscale and single voltage.
31 L48TPB M24 0.05s...10min 24VAC/DC 1 0.124 Time range setting
31 L48TPB M240 220...240VAC 1 0.124 A B A B A B A B
1 1 1 1
Time relay, multifunction, multivoltage and multiscale. 0 0 0 0
31 L48M M 240 0.05s...10min 24...240V 1 0.135 L48TP S 0.3...3s 1.2...12s 10...100s 7.8...780s
L48TP M 18s...3min 72s...12min 10...100min 78...780min
31 L48M H 240 0.05min...10h AC/DC 1 0.135
31 L48TPB... TIME RELAY T48TPB
– Electronic time relay, multiscale, single voltage,
multifunction
– 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT),
configurable either delay on make or instantaneous
– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob
– Time range selected by dip switches:
0.05...1s; 0.1...10s; 0.6s...1min; 6s...10min
– LED indicators for power on and relay state
– Plug-in housing with 8-pin socket, 31 S8 or 31 L48 P8
31 L48M...
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front and IP20 at terminals.
Accessories for 48x48mm Order code Description Qty Wt Time range setting
time relay per A B A B A B A B
1 1 1 1
pkg 0 0 0 0
n° [kg] L48TPB 0.05...1s 0.1...10s 0.6s...1min 6s...10min
31 S8 8-pin socket for screw 10 0.061
fixing or on 35mm DIN TIME RELAY L48M
rail (IEC/EN 60715). – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage,
Screw terminals multifunction
31 L48 P8 8-pin loose socket. 10 0.040 – Selectable functions: On delay, delay on make with
Screw terminals start at relay energising. On delay, delay on break with
start at relay de-energising. Flasher, starting with OFF
31 S8 31 S11 11-pin socket for screw 10 0.064 interval. Flasher, starting with ON interval. Time relay
fixing or on 35mm DIN resetting is possible on closing of external contact (R)
rail (IEC/EN 60715). connected to terminals 7-6. Possible time relay stopping
Screw terminals storing elapsed time on closing of external contact (M)
31 L48 P11 11-pin loose socket. 10 0.048 connected to terminals 7-5 and then restarting time 17
Screw terminals on its opening. See diagrams on page 17-11
31 L48AP Flush mount bracket 10 0.012 – 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact; both
delayed (SPDT)
N.B. Max. conductor section for sockets: 2x2.5mm2/2x14AWG.
Tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin. – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob
– Time range selected by dip switches:
31 S11
L48M M: 0.05...1s; 0.1...10s; 0.6s...1min; 6s...10min
L48M H: 0.05...1min; 0.1...10min; 0.6min...1h;
1min...10h
– LED indicators for power on and relay state
– Plug-in housing with 11-pin socket, 31 S11 or
31 L48 P11
– IEC protection degree: IP40 on front and IP20 at terminals.
Time range setting

A B A B A B A B
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
L48M M 0.05...1s 0.1...10s 0.6s...1min 6s...10min

L48M H 0.05...1min 0.1...10min 0.6min...1h 1min...10h

Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized, for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E172189) as Industrial
Switches - Timer modules.
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 17-10 and 17-11.

page 17-6 page 17-10 and 11 page 17-13 17-5
Time relays
TIME RELAYS
TM...
17.5 5 58
(0.69”) (0.20”) (2.28”)
43.7
(1.72”)
(4.12”)
(1.77”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
104.7
98.3
45
90
59.9
Ø4.2 (2.36”)
(0.16”)
L48... Cutout
45
(1.77”)
48 76
(1.89”) 14 (2.99”)
(0.55”)
(1.38”)
(1.77”)
(1.89”)
35
45
48
3.5
(0.14”)
L48... with S8 - S11 sockets Cutout

27 45
48 (1.06”)
(1.89”) 76 (1.77”)
(2.99”)
(1.38”)
(2.56”)
(1.89”)
(1.77”)
35
65
48
45
3.5
38 (0.14”)
(1.50”)
ACCESSORIES - SOCKETS
S8 - S11 L48 P8 L48 P11
27
38 (1.06”) 43.5 20.5 47 20.5
(1.50”) (1.71”) (0.81”) (1.85”) (0.81”)
(1.71”)
(1.30”)
(1.85”)
(1.30”)
43.5
33
47
33
(2.56”)
65
17
17-6
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM P On delay. Delay on make, with A1 TM P A440

start at relay energising. A2 On delay. Delay on make, with
A1 15 A1
ON
start at relay energising. A2
ON
A1 17
A2 16 18 18
15 18
16
t 17
A2 18 28
t
28
17
TM M1 On delay. Delay on make, with A1 Pulse on relay energising with start A1

A2
A2
start at relay energising ON
at external contact closing ON
E F E F
D G D G
C H C H
C
B I
C A1
B I
J A J
A
18 S
A1 S 15 15
16 18
t 15
16
t t
A2 16 18
Pulse on relay energising with A1 Pulse on relay energising with start A1

A2 A2
start on energising ON at external contact opening ON
E F
D G E F
D G
C H
C H
B I
A J 18
B I C A1
S
A J
15
16 18
t 15
16
t t
A1 A1
Flasher, starting with OFF (pause) A2
On-Off delay. Delay on make, with A2
interval. Equal timing recycle. ON start at external contact closing, and ON
D
E F
G
delay at break, with start at external
C H contact opening.
C A1
B I
A J E F
18 D G S
15 C H
16 18
t t t t B I
15
(pause) (work) (pause) (work) A J
16
t t t t
Flasher, starting with ON (work) A1 Internal ON/OFF trigger. Relay A1

A2 A2
interval. Equal timing recycle. ON
contact either closes or opens at ON
D
E F
G
each external contact closing.
C H
E F
B I D G
A J
18 C H C A1
S
15 B I
16 A J 18
t t t t 15
(work) (pause) (work) (pause) 16
17
Off delay. Relay energising at A1 Pulse generator. Unequal timing A1
A2 A2
external contact closing with start ON recycle, starting with OFF pulse time ON
on break and 0.5sec ON time.
E F E F
D G D G
C H C A1
S
C H
B I B I
A J A J
18 18
15 15
16 16
t t t
0,5s 0,5s
17-7
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM M2
With instantaneous With delayed
C C
operation programmed operation programmed
A1 S 15 23 A1 S 15 27
23 27 23 27
INST DEL INST DEL
24 28 24 28
A2 16 18 24 A2 16 18 28
D
E F
G
On delay. Delay on make, D
E F
G Pulse on relay energising D
E F
G
On delay. Delay on make, D
E F
G Pulse on relay energising
C H with start at relay energising C H with start on energising C H with start at relay C H with start on energising
B I B I B I B I
A J A J A J energising A J
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
t
D
E F
G Flasher, starting with OFF D
E F
G Flasher, starting with ON D
E F
G Flasher, starting with OFF D
E F
G Flasher, starting with ON
C H (pause) interval. C H (work) interval. C H (pause) interval. C H (work) interval.
B I B I B I B I
A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle A J Equal timing recycle
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C
B
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t t t t t t
23 (pause) (work) (pause) (work) 23
(work) (pause) (work) (pause)
27 27
24 24 28 28
t t t t t t t t
(pause) (work) (pause) (work) (work) (pause) (work) (pause)
D
E F
G Off delay. Relay energising D
E F
G
Pulse on relay energising D
E F
G Off delay. Relay energising D
E F
G
Pulse on relay energising
C
B
H
I
at external contact closing C H with start on external C
B
H
I
at external contact closing C H with start on external
B I B I
A J with start on break A J contact closing A J with start on break A J contact closing
A1 A1
A2 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2
ON ON
ON ON
C A1 C A1
S C A1
S S C A1
S
18 18
15 18 18
15 15 15
16 16
t 16 t 16
17 23
24 23
24
t t
27
28
27
28
t t
D
E F
G
E F
G On-off delay. Delay make, with D
E F
G
E F
G On-off delay. Delay make, with
C H with start on external C H start at external contact closing C H with start on external C H start at external contact closing
B I B I B I B I
A J contact opening A J and delay at break, with start at A J contact opening A J and delay at break, with start at
external contact opening external contact opening
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C A1
S C A1 C A1 C A1
S S S
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t t t t t t t t t t t t
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
D
E F
G Internal trigger ON/OFF. D
E F
G Pulse generator. Unequal D
E F
G Internal trigger ON/OFF. D
E F
G Pulse generator. Unequal
C H Relay contact either closes C H
I
timing recycle, starting C H Relay contact either closes C H
I
timing recycle, starting
B I B B I B
A J or opens at each external A J with ON pulse time A J or opens at each external A J with ON pulse time
contact closing contact closing
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
ON ON ON ON
C A1
S
S C A1 S
S
18 18 18 18
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
t 0,5s t 0,5s t 0,5s t 0,5s
23 23 27 27
24 24 28 28
17-8
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM PL
Flasher, starting with ON interval. Flasher, starting with OFF interval.
Equal timing recycle, ON first Equal timing recycle, OFF first
A1 S 15 A1 A1
A2 A2
ON ON
A2 16 18 A1 A1
S S
18 18
15 15
16 16
W P W P P W P W
W = Work (ON) W = Work (ON)

P = Pause (OFF) P = Pause (OFF)
TM D
True off delay. Delay on break, starting at
relay de-energising
A1 15
A1
A2
ON
A2 16 18
18
15
16
t
17
17-9
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
TM ST
For starting
A1
A1 17 A2
ON
A2 18 28
18
17
start
28
17
transition
LINE
...V - ...Hz
L1 L2 L3
21
S1
22
13 53
S2 KM2
14 54
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
KM2 KM3 KM1

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
13 13
1 3 5 KM2 KM1
14 14
FR1 17 17
2 4 6 KT1
(TM ST)
18 28
95 22 62
U2 U1
KM3 KM1
V2 M V1 95 21 61
W2 3~ W1
FR1 KT1 A1 A1 A1 A1
(TM ST) KM1 KM3 KM2
96 A2 A2 A2 A2
U2 U1
96
V2 M V1
W2 3~ W1
TM LS
Staircase lighting
4-wire connection 3-wire connection Timed lighting Constant lighting
L L
N 3 N 3 N N
ON ON
L/N
17 L
L 4
L
L 4 3
L
>3s >3s >3s
L
N N
4 t t 1h 4
L48TP...
110VAC
220-240VAC
On delay
24VAC/DC
1.2.4
1 2 4 8 ON
7
RELAY 6
8
7 5 6 5
t
L48TPB...
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
110VAC
On delay with both instantaneous c/o contacts 110VAC
On delay with one instantaneous c/o contact and
220-240VAC 240VAC one late-break c/o contact
2 2
2 1 8 ON 2 1 8 ON
7 7
3 3
1 B 1 B
7 4 3 5 6 4 DIP-SWITCH 7 4 3 5 6 4 DIP-SWITCH
A A
RELAY RELAY
6 6
8 8
5 5
t
17-10
Time relays
Wiring diagrams
L48M...
24-240VAC/DC On delay Pulse on relay energising with start on energising

2 1 11 M ON 2 2
5 10 ON
10
R
6 5
M M 5
7 7 7
10 4 3 8 9
6 F F
R 6
7 1 R
t t1 t2 7 1
T (preset time) = T1+T2 9 0 0
9
Contacts “M” and “R” are to be volt RELAY 11 RELAY 11
free (dry). 8 DIP SWITCH DIP SWITCH
8
t1 t2 t
3 3
1 1
4 4
Flasher starting with OFF Flasher starting with ON
ON 2 2
ON
10 10
5 5
M M
7 7
6
F
6 F
R 7 1 R
7
t t t 0 t t t 1
9 9 0
RELAY 11 DIP SWITCH RELAY 11
8 8 DIP SWITCH
t t t t t t t
3 3
1 1
4 4
17
17-11
Time relays
Modular version
TYPE TM P TM P A440 TM M1 TM M2 TM PL TM D TM ST TM LS
DESCRIPTION
On delay On delay Programmable Programmable Asymmetrical True off For starting Staircase
multifunction multifunction timing recycle delay illumination
Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Single scale
Multivoltage Single voltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Single voltage
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated auxiliary supply 24...48VDC 380...440VAC 12...240VAC/DC 24...240VAC/DC 24...48VDC 220...240VAC
voltage Us 24...240VAC 24...240VAC
380...440VAC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz
Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Us
Power consumption (maximum) 1.2VA/0.8W max 19VA/1.7W max 0.6VA/0.3W max 1.1VA/0.8W max 0.6VA/0.3W max 0.1VA/0.1W 1.2VA/0.8W max De-energised
(24...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (12...48VAC/DC) (24...48VAC/DC) (24...48VAC/DC) 5VA/0.5W max
16VA/0.9W max 1.6VA/1.2W max 1.8VA/1.2W max 1.6VA/1.2W max 1.1VA/0.8W 1.6VA/0.9W max Energised
(110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC/DC) (110...240VAC) 12VA/0.8W max
TIMING CIRCUIT
Time setting range Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Single scale
0.1...1s 0.1...1s 0.1...1s 0.1...1s 0.1...1s 0.06...0.6s 0.1...1s 0.5...20min
1...10s 1...10s 1...10s 1...10s 1...10s 0.6...6s 1...10s
6s...60s 6s...60s 6s...60s 6s...60s 6s...60s 6s...60s 6s...60s
1...10min 1...10min 1...10min 1...10min 1...10min 18s...180s 1...10min
6min...1h 6min...1h 6min...1h 6min...1h
1...10h 1...10h 1...10h 1h...10h
0.1...1day 0.1...1day 0.1...1day 0.1...1day
1...10days 1...10days 1...10days 1...10days
ON only ON only ON only 3...30days
OFF only OFF only OFF only 10...100days
Setting accuracy < ±9%
Repeat accuracy < ±0,1% < ±0,5% < ±0,5% < ±0,2% < ±0,5%
Influence of < ±0.01% < ±0.5%
voltage variation
Average variation of at –20°C < ±0.2% < ±0.25%
set delays related
to +20°C condition
Minimum power time –– –– –– –– –– ≥ 200ms –– ––
Minimum ON time — –– 25ms (no maximum limit) — — ≥ 60ms (no max lim.)
Resetting during timing ≥ 100ms ≥ 100ms ≥ 100ms ≥ 100ms ≥ 100ms –– ≥ 100ms ≥ 100ms
time elapsed time ≥ 50ms ≥ 50ms ≥ 50ms ≥ 50ms ≥ 50ms –– ≥ 50ms ––
Immunity time for microbreakings ≤ 50ms –– ≤ 25ms ≤ 15ms ≤ 25ms –– ≤ 40ms ≤ 20ms
RELAY OUTPUTS
Contact arrangement 1 delayed 2 delayed 1 delayed 1 inst./delayed N/O 1 delayed 1 delayed 2 delayed N/O 1 delayed N/O
17 changeover changeover changeover + 1 delayed c/o changeover changeover
Maximum switching voltage 250VAC
IEC conventional free air 8A 8A 8A 8A 8A 5A 8A 16A
thermal current (Ith)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 B300 16A AC1
designation 240VAC
Electrical life (with rated load) 105 cycles
Mechanical life 30x106 cycles
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7...9lbin per UL)
Conductor section min-max 0.2...4mm2 (24...12 AWG; 12...18 AWG per UL)
INSULATION (input-output)
IEC rated insulation voltage 250V
IEC rated impulse withstand 4kV
voltage
IEC power frequency withstand 2kV
voltage
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature –20...+60°C
Storage temperature –30...+80°C
Housing material Self-extinguishing polyamide
For 380...440VAC types: 19VA/1.7W max.
Used at 24...48VDC or 24...240VAC; ≤30ms at 380...440VAC.
NOTE: N/O = normally open / SPST
c/o = changeover / SPDT; inst. = instantaneous.
17-12
Time relays
Plug-in and flush mount version 48x48mm/1.9x1.9”
TYPE L48TP... L48TPB... L48M...

DESCRIPTION
On delay On delay Programmable
multifunction
Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale
Multivoltage Single voltage Multivoltage
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated supply 24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC 24...240VAC/DC
voltage Us 110VAC 220...240VAC
220...240VAC
Rated frequency 50...60Hz
Operating voltage range 0.85...1.1 Us
Power consumption (maximum) 6VA
Power dissipation (maximum)
TIMING CIRCUIT
Time setting range Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale
0.3...3s 0.05...1s 0.05...1s
1.2...12s 0.10...10s 0.1...10s
10...100s 0.6s...1min 0.6s...1min
7.8...780s 6s...10min 6s...10min
18s...3min 0.05...1min
72s...12min 0.1...10min
10...100min 0.6min...1h
78...780min 1min...10h
Setting accuracy ±5%
Repeat accuracy ±0.5%
Influence of voltage variation ±0,5%
Average variation of
set delays in related at –20°C +2%
to 20°C condition at +60°C –3%
Minimum ON time ––
Resetting during operation ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1s
time elasped time ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms
Immunity time for microbreakings ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 2 2
Contact arrangement 1 delayed c/o 2 del. or 1 inst. + 1 del. c/o 2 delayed c/o
Maximum switching voltage 250V
IEC conventional free air thermal current 5A
(Ith) 17
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation B300
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum ––
Conductor section (min-max) ––
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 250V
IEC power frequency withstand voltage ––
Uimp
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 2kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Housing material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Other voltages on request.
Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.
NOTE:
del. = delayed inst. = instantaneous c/o = changeover/SPDT
17-13
Pages 18-4 to 7 Pages 18-8 and 9
VOLTAGE MONITORING RELAYS CURRENT MONITORING RELAYS

• For three-phase systems with or without • For single and three-phase systems
neutral and single-phase systems • Maximum AC/DC current
• Minimum and maximum AC voltage • Minimum or maximum AC/DC current
• Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence • Minimum and maximum AC/DC current.
• Asymmetry
• Minimum and maximum frequency.
Page 18-10 Page 18-11
PUMP PROTECTION RELAYS PHASE SHIFT MONITORING RELAYS

• For single and three-phase systems • For single and three-phase systems
• Minimum cos for dry running protection • Minimum cos
• Maximum AC current • Maximum cos.
• Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence.
Page 18-11 Page 18-12
FREQUENCY MONITORING RELAYS INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNITS

• For single and three-phase systems • Compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21,
• Minimum frequency for low voltage
• Maximum frequency. • Compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-16,
for medium voltage.
PROTECTION RELAYS 18
Modular version for switchgear

panels, also suitable for rear
mounting plate fixing
Minimum and maximum voltage
monitoring relays for single and
three-phase systems, with or
without neutral
Voltage asymmetry, phase
sequence and phase loss control
relays
Minimum and maximum current
monitoring relays
Frequency monitoring relays
Interface protection system units
compliant with Italian standards
CEI 0-21 and CEI 0-16.
SEC. - PAGE
Modular voltage monitoring relays
For three-phase systems, without neutral ........................................................................................................................... 18 - 4
For three-phase systems, with or without neutral ............................................................................................................... 18 - 6
For single-phase systems .................................................................................................................................................. 18 - 7
Modular current monitoring relays
For single systems ..................................................................................................................................................................... 18 - 8
For single and three-phase systems .......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 9
Modular pump protection relays ........................................................................................ 18 - 10
Modular phase shift monitoring relays ................................................................................ 18 - 11
Modular frequency monitoring relays .................................................................................. 18 - 11
Interface protection system units ....................................................................................... 18 - 12
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 18 - 17
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 18 - 18
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Protection relays
Overview
Voltage monitoring relays

for three-phase systems
without neutral
PMV10 PMV20 PMV30 PMV40 PMV50 PMV70

Modular version (1U) (2U) (2U) (2U) (2U) (2U)
Minimum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Phase loss
Incorrect phase sequence
Asymmetry
Page 18-4 18-5 18-5

for three-phase systems
with or without neutral
PMV50N PMV70N PMV80N

Modular version (3U) (3U) (3U)
Minimum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Phase loss
Neutral loss
Asymmetry
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Page 18-6 18-6 18-7
18 Voltage monitoring relay

for single-phase systems
PMV55
Modular version (2U)
Minimum AC voltage
Maximum AC voltage
Page 18-7
18-2
Protection relays
Overview
Current monitoring relays

for single and three-phase systems
PMA20 PMA30 PMA40

Modular version (2U) (2U) (3U)
Maximum AC/DC current
Minimum or maximum AC/DC current
Minimum and maximum AC/DC current
Page 18-8 18-9
Pump protection relay Phase shift monitoring relay

for single and three-phase for single and three-phase
systems systems
PMA50 PMA60
Modular version (3U) Modular version (3U)
Minimum cos for dry running Minimum cos

pump protection Maximum cos
Maximum AC current Page 18-11
Phase loss
Page 18-10
Frequency monitoring relay for Interface protection system compliant with

single and three-phase systems Italian standard CEI 0-16,
for medium voltage
18
PMF20 PMVF30
Modular version (2U) Version Flush mount (96x96mm/3.78x3.78”)
Minimum frequency only Dual threshold voltage/frequency
Maximum frequency only Voltage release
Page 18-11 Page 18-14
Interface protection system compliant with

Italian standard CEI 0-21,
for low voltage
PMVF20 PMVF51
Version Flush mount (96x96mm/3.78x3.78”) Modular (6U)
Dual threshold min and max voltage
Dual threshold min and max frequency
Page 18-12 18-13
18-3
Protection relays
For three-phase systems, Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for phase loss
(phase to phase) pkg and incorrect phase sequence
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
rated value
Three-phase system, without neutral. – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
1 module housing. – Modular DIN 43880 housing: 1 module for PMV10;
PMV10 A440 208...480VAC 1 0.050 2 module for PMV20
2 modules housing. placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
PMV20 A240 100...240VAC 1 0.120 terminals.
PMV20 A575 208...575VAC 1 0.120 Certifications and compliance
PMV20 A600 380...600VAC 1 0.120 Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
PMV10 A440 Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics

to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
• PMV30 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV30 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Minimum AC voltage. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV30 A240 208...240VAC 1 0.130 – Control of phase-to-phase voltages
– Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
PMV30 A575 380...575VAC 1 0.130 rated value
PMV30 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
PMV20... – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“V min” Minimum voltage tripping threshold
80...95% Ue
“Delay” Tripping time 0.1...20s
“Reset delay” Resetting time 0.1...20s.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
PMV30... CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
18 General characteristics
Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt
to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for asymmetry,
(phase-to-phase) pkg phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
– Excellent tripping accuracy
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg]
– TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Three-phase system, without neutral. – Control of phase-to-phase voltages
Asymmetry. Delayed trip. – Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is <70%
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. rated value
PMV40 A240 208...240VAC 1 0.130 – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
PMV40 A575 380...575VAC 1 0.130 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
PMV40 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“Asymmetry” High voltage asymmetry tripping
PMV40... threshold 5...15% Ue
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.

18-4 page 18-17 page 18-18 page 18-30
Protection relays
without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase-to-phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss and incorrect phase
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] sequence
– Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV50 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. • PMV50 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – High tripping accuracy
PMV50 A240 208...240VAC 1 0.130 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
– Control of phase-to-phase voltages
PMV50 A575 380...575VAC 1 0.130
PMV50 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 rated value
– Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 on
terninals.
PMV50... ADJUSTMENTS
“V max” Maximum voltage tripping threshold
105...115% Ue
80...95% Ue
“Delay” for each Tripping time 0.1...20s

Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices.
Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.

(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, incorrect phase
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] sequence and asymmetry
– Configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, without neutral. • PMV70 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage and asymmetry. • PMV70 A575: 380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC
Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV70 A240 208...240VAC 1 0.130 – Control of phase-to-phase voltages
PMV70 A575 380...575VAC 1 0.130
rated value
PMV70 A600 600VAC 1 0.130 – Phase loss tripping time: 60ms
terminals.
PMV70... ADJUSTMENTS 18
105...115% Ue
80...95% Ue
“Delay” for each Tripping delay 0.1...20s
threshold 5...15% Ue.

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-18.
Dimensions Wiring Diagrams Technical characteristics

page 18-17 page 18-18 page 18-31 18-5
Protection relays
For three-phase systems Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
with or without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, neutral loss and
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] incorrect phase sequence
– 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, with or without neutral. • PMV50N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. 120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence. • PMV50N A440: 380-400-415-440VAC (phase-phase)
Instantaneous trip. 220-230-240-254VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV50N A240 208...240VAC 1 0.200 • PMV50N A600: 480-525-575-600VAC (phase-phase)
PMV50N A440 380...440VAC 1 0.200 277-303-332-347VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV50N A600 480...600VAC 1 0.200 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
– Phase loss detection when one of the voltages is
<70% rated voltage
– Phase or neutral loss tripping time: 60ms
– 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMV50N... – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
105...115% Ue
80...95% Ue
“Reset Delay” Resetting time 0.1...20s.

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-19.

(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, phase loss, neutral loss,
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] incorrect phase sequence and asymmetry
– 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Three-phase system, with or without neutral. • PMV70N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
Minimum and maximum AC voltage and asymmetry. 120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Delayed trip. • PMV70N A440: 380-400-415-440VAC (phase-phase)
Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence. 220-230-240-254VAC (phase-neutral)
Instantaneous trip. • PMV70N A600: 480-525-575-600VAC (phase-phase)
PMV70N A240 208...240VAC 1 0.200 277-303-332-347VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV70N A440 380...440VAC 1 0.200 – Excellent tripping accuracy
– TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV70N A600 480...600VAC 1 0.200 – Phase loss detection when one of the voltages is
<70% rated value
18 – Phase or neutral loss tripping time: 60ms
– 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMV70N... – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
105...115% Ue
80...95% Ue
threshold 5...15% Ue.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-19.

18-6 page 18-17 pages 18-19 page 18-31
Protection relays
with or without neutral to control Ue per – Voltage monitoring relay, self powered, for minimum
(phase to phase) pkg and maximum voltage, minimum and maximum
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] frequency, phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect
phase sequence
Three-phase system, with or without neutral. – 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
Minimum and maximum AC voltage, minimum and maximum • PMV80N A240: 208-220-230-240VAC (phase-phase)
frequency. Delayed trip. 120-127-132-138VAC (phase-neutral)
Phase loss, neutral loss and incorrect phase sequence. • PMV80N A440: 380-400-415-440VAC (phase-phase)
Instantaneous trip. 220-230-240-254VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV80N A240 208...240VAC 1 0.200 • PMV80N A600: 480-525-575-600VAC (phase-phase)
277-303-332-347VAC (phase-neutral)
PMV80N A440 380...440VAC 1 0.200
PMV80N A600 480...600VAC 1 0.200 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
rated value
– Phase or neutral loss tripping time: 60ms
PMV80N... – 2 relay outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
– Modular DIN 43880, 3 module
placed in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
105...115% Ue
80...95% Ue
“Hz min/max” Minimum/maximum frequency tripping
threshold 1...10%
“V delay” Tripping time 0.1...20s
“Hz delay” Tripping time 0.1...5s.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-19.
For single-phase systems Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
pkg and maximum voltage
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – 4 configurable rated voltage (Ue):
• PMV55 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC
Single-phase system. • PMV55 A440: 380-400-415-440VAC
Minimum and maximum AC voltage. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
PMV55 A240 208...240VAC 1 0.125 – TRMS measurements (True Root Mean Square)
PMV55 A440 380...440VAC 1 0.125 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
terminals. 18
ADJUSTMENTS
105...115% Ue
PMV55...
80...95% Ue
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-19.

page 18-17 page 18-19 pages 18-30 and 31 18-7
Protection relays
For single-phase systems Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
current supply per – Current monitoring relay for AC/DC maximum current
Ie voltage pkg control, AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary power supply
– Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
[A] [V] n° [kg] transformer (CT)
Single-phase system. – Excellent tripping accuracy
AC/DC maximum current control. – TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply. – Resetting and inhibition input
Automatic or manual reset. – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA20 240 5 or 16A 24...240V 1 0.121 – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
AC/DC placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Imax" Maximum current tripping threshold
5...100% Ie
"Hysteresis" Maximum hysteresis thresold
1...50%
PMA20 240
"Trip delay" Tripping time 0.1...30s
"Inhibition time" Inhibition delay for external input or at
power up 1...60s
“Aut. reset delay” Automatic resetting time 0.1...30s
“Mode” • Rated current 5A or 16A
• Relay output normally energised or
de-energised
• Tripping memory (Latch) On or Off.

Modular ampere monitoring relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-20.
18

18-8 page 18-17 page 18-20 page 18-32
Protection relays
For single and Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
current supply per – Current monitoring relay for AC/DC minimum or
three-phase systems Ie voltage pkg maximum current control; AC/DC multivoltage
auxiliary power supply
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
Single and three-phase system. transformer (CT)
AC/DC minimum or maximum current control. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply. – TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Automatic or manual reset. – Resetting and inhibition input
PMA30 240 5 or 16A 24...240V 1 0.121 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
AC/DC – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Set point" Minimum or maximum current tripping
threshold 5...100% Ie
"Hysteresis" Minimum or maximum hysteresis
PMA30 240 threshold 1...50%
"Trip delay" Tripping time 0.1...30s
"Inhibition time" Inhibition delay for external input or at
power up 1...60s
“Ie” Current scale selection: 5A or 16A
“Mode” • Min or max function
de-energised
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See pages 18-21 and 22.
Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics

current supply per – Current monitoring relay for AC/DC minimum and
Ie voltage pkg maximum current control, AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary
power supply
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
Single and three-phase system. transformer (CT)
AC/DC minimum and maximum current control. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Auxiliary AC/DC power supply. – TRMS current measurements (True Root Mean Square)
Automatic or manual reset. – Automatic or manual resetting (manual resetting by
power removal)
PMA40 240 0.02-0.05- 24...240V 1 0.166 – 2 relay outputs (Min and Max), configurable, each with
0.25-1-5- AC/DC 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
16A – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
PMA40 240 placed in iP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Imax" Maximum current tripping threshold
5...100% Ie
18
"Imin" Minimum current tripping threshold
5...100% Ie
"Trip delay" Minimum and maximum current
tripping time 0.1...30s
"Inhibition time" Inhibition time at power up 1...60s
“Ie” Current scale selection: 20mA, 50mA,
250mA, 1A, 5A or 16A
“Mode” • Separate or common relay outputs
de-energised

Compliant with standards IEC/EN 60255-5,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram

page 18-17 pages 18-21 to 23 page 18-32 18-9
Protection relays
Pump protection relay
For single and Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
three-phase systems current supply per – Pump protection relay against dry running, auxiliary
Ie voltage pkg AC power supply
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Motor under-load and over-current control
– Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
Single and three-phase systems. transformer (CT)
Maximum AC current and minimum cos. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Instantaneous trip. – Voltage control range 80...660VAC
Auxiliary AC power supply. – Current control range 0.1...16A
Automatic or manual reset. – Resetting and enabling consent input
PMA50 A240 5 or 16A 220...240VAC 1 0.251 – 1 relay output relay with 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA50 A415 380...415VAC 1 0.251 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
PMA50 A480 440...480VAC 1 0.251 placed in IP40 enclosure or control board); IP20 at
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Cos min” Minimum costhreshold 0.1...0.99
(under-load/dry running)
PMA50... “Imax” Maximum (over) current threshold
10...100%Ie
"Trip delay" Tripping time for minimum cosand
maximum current 0.1...10s
“Inhibition time” Inhibition delay for external input or at
power up 1...60s
“Aut. reset delay” Automatic reset time OFF...100min
“Mode” • Rated current 5A or 16A
• Single or three phase
• External reset On or Off.

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
18

18-10 page 18-17 pages 18-23 and 24 page 18-33
Protection relays
Phase shift monitoring relays.
Frequency monitoring relays
Phase shift monitoring Order code Rated Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics
relay for single and current supply per – Minimum and maximum phase shift monitoring relay,
Ie voltage pkg AC auxiliary power supply
three-phase systems [A] [V] n° [kg] – Direct connection up to 16A max or by current
transformer (CT)
Single and three-phase systems. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Minimum and maximum cos control. Delayed trip. – Voltage control range 80...660VAC
AC auxiliary power supply. – Current control range 0.1...16A
Automatic or manual reset. – Automatic or manual resetting (manual resetting by
PMA60 A240 16A 220...240VAC 1 0.254 power removal)
PMA60 A415 380...415VAC 1 0.254 – 2 relay outputs (Min and Max), configurable, each with
1 changeover contact (SPDT)
PMA60 A480 440...480VAC 1 0.254 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 module
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
"Cos min” Minimum costhreshold
0.1...0.99 inductive
PMA60...
"Trip delay" Tripping time for minimum cos
0.1...30s
"Cos max” Maximum inductive costhreshold
0.1...0.99
“Trip delay” Tripping time for maximum cos
0.1...30s
“Inhibition time” Inhibition delay at power up 1...60s
“Mode” • Single or three phase
• Relay outputs normally energised or
de-energised
Certificartions and compliance

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
Frequency monitoring Order code Rated voltage Ue Qty Wt General characteristics

relay for single and per – Frequency monitoring relay, self powered, for
pkg minimum and maximum control
three-phase systems [V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Rated frequency selection: 50 or 60Hz
– Tripping threshold for minimum and maximum
Single and three-phase systems. frequency
Minimum and maximum frequency. Delayed trip. – Excellent tripping accuracy
Automatic reset. – 1 relay output, configurable, with 1 changeover
PMF20 A240 220...240VAC 1 0.125 contact (SPDT)
PMF20 A415 380...415VAC 1 0.125 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 2 module
18
terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“Hz max” Maximum frequency tripping threshold
+1...+10%
“Hz min” Minimum frequency tripping threshold
PMF20... -1...-10%
“Reset delay” Resetting time 0.1...20s
“Mode” • Minimum and maximum frequency
• Output relay energised at maximum
frequency
• Output relay energised at minimum
frequency
• Output relay de-energised at maximum
frequency.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
ßCSA C22.2 n° 14.
Operational diagram
See page 18-25.

page 18-17 pages 18-24 and 25 pages 18-33 and 34 18-11
Protection relays
Interface protection system units compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21
For low voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF 20 interface protection system (SPI) unit has been
pkg developed according to the Italian CEI 0-21 standard
[V] [V] n° [kg] prescriptions. It is used when a local generating system
is connected in parallel with the low-voltage electric
Three-phase system, with or without neutral, in low voltage. utility. The controls refer to limits of voltage and
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and frequency monitoring.
frequency protection. In the case when either the voltage or the frequency
Flush mount type. are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
PMVF 20 100...400VAC/ 1 0.568 de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
230VAC 110...250VDC (DDI) trips.
400VAC PMVF 20 is equipped with 4 inputs having the following
PMVF 20 D048 12...48VDC 1 0.580
functions:
PMVF 20... – DDI status feedback
– External signal for frequency selection
(communication network malfunction)
– Local control for frequency selection
– Remote tripping (forced DDI opening independent of
voltage and frequency values).
Also, there are two relay outputs for:
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping – DDI opening and closing
threshold time – Standby device opening (programmable: retentive
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.15Un 0.2s normally energised, retentive normally de-energised
or adjustable pulse).
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.10Un 3s The standby device control is compulsory in installations
(moving mean over 10min) with more than 20kW and consists of a signal, with a
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s 0.5s delay respect to the DDI opening command,
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s transmitted only if the DDI fails and does not complete
the disconnection.
By fitting the EXP10 03 expansion module on the
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping PMVF 20, the following functions can be configured as:
threshold time – Programmable alarm
– Autonomous signalling in case of phase power
High external signal and low local control conditions. unbalance (LSP), only if three CTs are also installed.
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 0.1s
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 0.1s Operational characteristics
– Auxiliary voltage:
Low external signal and high local control conditions. • PMVF 20: 100…400VAC/110…250VDC
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s • PMVF 20 D048: 12…48VDC
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s – Voltage inputs:
• 400VAC (three-phase connection)
High conditions for both external signal and local control. • 230VAC (single-phase connection)
Maximum frequency 81>.S1 50.5Hz 0.1s – Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
Minimum frequency 81<.S1 49.5Hz 0.1s – 4 digital inputs
– Current inputs (optional): Use via CTs with selectable
NOTE: Low conditions for both external signal and local /5A or /1A secondary
control are not taken into consideration by the standard. – Support of EXP series communications ports (USB,
RS232, RS485, Ethernet) see section 28
– Parameter configuration and remote control (only with
Order code Description comunication expansion module) with software
and
– Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”
– IEC degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on
terminals
18 EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF 20. – Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
For independent signal in case of phase power unbalance (LSP). using expansion or external module.
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC
Communication ports. Reference standards
Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-21,
EXP10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface Note for Italian CEI 0-21 standard:
According to standard prescriptions, once the installation
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface is completed, the interface protection must be tested by
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface the installer using a relay test box which controls the trip
EXP10 03
thresholds and timing.
IEC/EN 61850 protocol
The EXP10 18 module will be made available only when Operational diagram
the competent authorities have established the exact See page 18-26.
terms of the supervision and control of the specific
commands (currently under study as specified in the Programming software
Italian CEI 0-21 standard). Since PMVF 20 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
with specific default settings as per the Italian standard
CEI 0-21, it can be put in service immediately without
having to change any programming. Setup editing is
password protected so that parameter settings cannot be
tampered with by unauthorised personnel.
Supervision and energy management software

See section 27.
Configuration and remote control software

See section 27.
Accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

18-12 page 18-16 page 28-2 page 18-17 page 18-26 page 18-36
Protection relays
For low voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF 51 interface protection system (SPI) unit has been
[V] [V] n° [kg] prescriptions. Each is used when a local solar generating
system is connected in parallel with the low-voltage
Three-phase system with or without neutral in low voltage. electric utility. The controls refer to limits of voltage and
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and frequency monitoring.
Modular type with 2 relay outputs. are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
PMVF 51 230VAC 100...240VAC/ 1 0.470 de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
400VAC 110...250VDC (DDI) trips.
PMVF 51 is equipped with 4 inputs having the following
functions:
PMVF 51 – DDI status feedback
– External signal for frequency selection
(communication network malfunction)
– Local control for frequency selection
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping – Remote tripping (forced DDI opening, independent of
threshold time voltage and frequency values).
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.15Un 0.2s Also, there are two relay outputs for:
– DDI opening and closing
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.10Un 3s – Standby device opening (programmable: retentive
(moving mean over 10min) normally energised, retentive normally de-energised
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s or adjustable pulse).
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s The standby device control is compulsory in installations
with more than 20kW and consists of a signal, with a
0.5s delay respect to the DDI opening command,
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-21 Type of protection Tripping Tripping transmitted only if the DDI failed and did not complete
threshold time the disconnection.
PMVF 51 also has two additional relay outputs to
High external signal and low local control conditions. configure as:
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 0.1s – Programmable alarm
Maximum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 0.1s – Autonomous signalling in case of phase power
unbalance (LSP), only if three CTs are also installed.
Low external signal and high local control conditions.
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s Operational characteristics
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s – Auxiliary voltage: 100...240VAC/110...250VDC
– Voltage inputs:
High conditions for both external signal and local control. • 400VAC (three-phase connection)
Maximum frequency 81>.S1 50.5Hz 0.1s • 230VAC (single-phase connection)
Minimum frequency 81<.S1 49.5Hz 0.1s – Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
– 4 digital inputs
NOTE: Low conditions for both external signal and local – Current inputs (optional): Use via CTs with selectable
control are not taken into consideration by the standard. /5A or /1A secondary
– Support of EXM series communications inputs (USB,
Order code Description RS232, RS485, Ethernet) see section 28
– Modular housing:
• PMVF 51: 6 module
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF 51. – Parameter configuration and remote control (only with
Communication ports. comunication expansion module) with software
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface and
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – Degree of protection for both: IP40 on front; IP20 on
terminals
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface – Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
EXM10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface using expansion or external module. 18
EXM10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface
Reference standards
Inputs and outputs. Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-21,
EXM10 01 2 digital opto-isolated inputs and 2 relay IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
outputs 5A 250VAC IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
EXM10... Note for Italian CEI 0-21 standard:
IEC/EN 61850 protocol According to standard prescriptions, once the installation
The EXM10 18 module will be made available only when is completed, the interface protection must be tested by
the competent authorities have established the exact the installer using a relay test box which controls the trip
terms of the supervision and control of the specific thresholds and timing.
commands (currently under study as specified in the
Italian CEI 0-21 standard). Operational diagram
See pages 18-27.
Programming software
Since PMVF 51 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
with specific default factory settings as per the Italian
standard CEI 0-21, it can be put in service immediately
without having to change any programming. Setup
editing is password protected so that parameter settings
cannot be tampered with by unauthorised personnel.

See section 27.

See section 27.

page 18-16 page 28-2 page 18-17 page 18-27 page 18-36 18-13
Protection relays
For medium voltage Order code Rated voltage Qty Wt General characteristics
Control Auxiliary per PMVF 30 interface protection system (PI) unit has been
[V] [V] n° [kg] prescriptions. It is used when a local generating system
is connected in parallel with the medium-voltage utility
Medium-voltage system. distribution grid. The controls refer to limits of voltage
Dual threshold minimum and maximum voltage and and frequency monitoring.
Flush mount type. are out of admissible limits, the SPI must step in by
PMVF 30 Measure- 100...400VAC/ 1 0.566 de-energising a relay output so that the interface device
ments via 110...250VDC (DDI) trips.
PMVF 30 D048 VTs in MV or 12...48VDC 1 0.566 PMVF 30 is equipped with inputs having the following
direct in LV functions:
– DDI status feedback
– Interface protection system exclusion
– Local control
PMVF 30... – Remote tripping (forced DDI opening, independent of
voltage and frequency values).
Voltage threshold per CEI 0-16 Type of protection Tripping Tripping In addition, there are two relay outputs to configure as:
threshold time – DDI opening
Maximum voltage 59.S2 1.2Un 0.6s – Programmable (either as factory default for standby
device opening or to set up as auto reclosing if the
Maximum voltage 59.S1 1.1Un 3s DDI is an automatic circuit breaker).
(moving mean over 10min)
Minimum voltage 27.S1 0.85Un 0.4s Standby device opening
In installations with more than 400kW, the standard
Minimum voltage 27.S2 0.4Un 0.2s specifies there must be a command signal, that releases
Maximum residual 5% 3 Un 25s another standby device, given within 1 second whenever
voltage 59.V0 (59N) the DDI opening fails or malfunctions.
Automatic DDI reclosing
Frequency threshold per CEI 0-16 Whenever an automatic circuit breaker is used as the
Type of protection Tripping Tripping DDI, the PMVF 30 is capable of controlling both the
Frequency protection at voltage choice threshold time opening (according to the installation conditions
Configuration in standard conditions. indicated in the Italian CEI 0-16 standard) and the auto
Maximum frequency 81>.S2 51.5Hz 1s reclosing. The auto reclosing function includes defining
the number of attempts and the time interval between an
Minimum frequency 81<.S2 47.5Hz 4s attempt and the following one as well as generating an
Limited configuration in case of local control or voltage alarm if the closing operation does not take place.
choice condition This function can be carried out through a programmable
Maximum frequency 81>.S1 50.2Hz 0.15s output of the PMVF 30 (unless it is already used for the
standby device operation) or by installing an EXP10 03
Minimum frequency 81<.S1 49.8Hz 0.15s expansion module.
– Voltage choice functions
Maximum residual 5% 3 Un - – Auxiliary voltage:
voltage 59.V0 (59N) • PMVF 30: 100...400VAC/110...250VDC
Minimum direct sequence 70% Un - • PMVF 30 D048: 12...48VDC
voltage 27.Vd – Voltage inputs (connection via VTs in MV or directly in
Maximum inverse sequence 15% Un - LV end):
voltage 59.Vi • Primary: 400...150,000V
• Secondary: 50...500V (for voltage/frequency);
50...150V (for residual voltage measurement)
– Relay outputs 5A 250VAC AC1 / 5A 30VDC
Order code Description – 4 digital inputs
18 – 3 current inputs (for optional measuring): Use via CTs
EXPANSION MODULES FOR PMVF 30. with selectable /5A or /1A secondary
For auto reclosing management of automatic circuit – Support of EXP series communications puts (USB,
breaker (DDI). RS232, RS485, Ethernet); see section 28
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC – Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”
– Parameter configuration and remote control (only with
Communication ports. comunication expansion module) with software
EXP10 18 IEC/EN 61850 interface and
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – Degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals
– Predisposed for IEC/EN 61850 signal supervision
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface using expansion or external module.
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface
EXP10... Reference standards
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface Compliant with standards: Italian CEI 0-16;
IEC/EN 61850 protocol IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
The EXP10 18 module will be made available only when IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
the competent authorities have established the exact
terms of the supervision and control of the specific Operational diagram
commands (currently under study as specified in the See page 18-28.
Italian CEI 0-16 standard). Programming software
Since PMVF 30 is standard-supplied pre-programmed,
with specific default factory settings as per the Italian
standard CEI 0-16, it can be put in service immediately
without having to change any programming. Setup
editing is password protected so that parameter settings
cannot be tampered with by unauthorised personnel.
See section 27.
See section 27.

18-14 pages 18-15 and 16 page 28-2 page 18-17 page 18-28 page 18-37
Protection relays
Accessories
GSM modem for remote Order Description Application requirements

disconnection signal code The Italian CEI 0-16 Standard, in paragraph 8.8.6.5 and
GSM Modem (modular - 4U). annex M, prescribes that electricity production systems
management IP69K exterior aerial with 2.5 m cable. powered by wind or the sun through photovoltaics with a
Compliant with Italian CEI 0-16 power equal to or greater than 100kW, connected to or to
RJ45-USB programming cable (included).
be connected to medium-voltage networks, have a GSM
Standard, paragraph 8.8.6.5 and PMVF GSM 1 9.5...35VDC/9.5...27VAC modem.
annex M, resolution 421/2014 of the The modem must be able to receive the signals sent by the
electricity distributor for the management of generation
AEEGSI disconnection.
Functional characteristics
– Connection to the GSM network for sending and
receiving SMS messages
– Programmable message texts
– Control output controlled by SMS for sending of
intertripping signal to the protection interface
– Digital input for receiving the status of the Interface
Device (DDI) and sending of successful DDI opening
and closing SMSs
– POD management (active user code)
– Management of the list of caller IDs (CLI) up to 50
PMVF GSM 1 callers enabled
– Detection of mobile network coverage
blue LED: GSM status
– Full compatibility with medium-voltage PI LOVATO
Off: Electric PMVF 30: no software/hardware updates or
not supplied programming required
On constantly: – Compatibility with third-party PIs where the remote
green LED: not registered on the disconnection signal is transmitted via digital input (dry
output status network (wrong or contact). For additional information contact our
Off: missing PIN) Customer Service office Tel. + 39 035 4282422;
exit de-energised E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com.
Flashing slowly: network
On: registration OK
exit energised Flashing quickly: MODEM
communication in – 35mm DIN (IEC/EN 60715) rail fixing
progress – 4 modules
– Supply: 9.5...35VDC / 9.5...27VAC
– Consumption: 200mW (5W peak)
– 2 digital outputs 3A 250VAC
Aerial connector – 1 self-supplied digital input
– Housing for 3V and 1.8V SIM card
– SIM PIN management
– Certified according to FCC rules, part 15
RJ45 connector – Back-up battery 320mAh (3.7 V)
for programming – Operating temperature: 0...+45°C; -30...+60°C with
back-up battery disconnected (for disconnection
procedure consult the manual supplied with the
Software product)
To configure the PMVF GSM 1 modem (using the RJ45-USB programming cable included), the PMVF GSM SW – Protection rating: IP40 on front; IP20 on terminals.
software must be used. This can be downloaded freely from the www.LovatoElectric.com website.
The software allows you to set: AERIAL
– the users enabled to exchange messages with the modem – Quad band 850/900/1800/1900MHz
– Exterior IP69K
– the active customer code (POD)
– the functions assigned to the digital outputs and input – 2.5m cable 18
– the texts of the SMS associated with the commands. – Fixing via M10 hole:
Configuration is also possible off-line, creating a file to transfer to the modem at another time. • with adhesive seal
• with threaded pin and nut.
Compliance
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1 (2013-05);
EN 50385; EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1; EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2;
EN 301 511 V9.O.2

page 18-17 page 18-29 18-15
Protection relays
Accessories
Maximum combination for PMVF 20 and PMVF 30 types

In addition to the two standard-supplied modules, another two expansion modules (one per type) can be installed from the following indicated below.
MAX
2 EXP10 03 EXP10 18
Used as: Ethernet interface
1. Phase power unbalance signal (LSP) for according to IEC/EN 61850
PMVF 20 or for auto reclosing control of
circuit breaker for PMVF 30.
2. Programmable alarm.
EXP10 10 EXP10 11 EXP10 12 EXP10 13

USB RS232 RS485 Ethernet
SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT interface interface interface TCP/IP
1 2 3 4 interface
EXM10 18 EXM10 10 EXM10 11

Ethernet interface USB RS232
per IEC/EN 61850 interface interface
EXM10 12 EXM10 13
RS485 Ethernet
interface TCP/IP
interface
Maximum combination for PMVF 51 type
In addition to the standard-supplied module (1), two other
expansion modules (one per type) can be installed from the
indicated types.
18 EXM10 01
Used as:
1. Phase power unbalance signal (LSP).
MAX 2. Programmable alarm.
2
18-16
Protection relays
PROTECTION RELAYS
PMV10... PMV... - PMF20 PMV...N - PMA40... -
PMA20... - PMA30... PMA50... - PMA60...
17.5 5 35.8 5 58.1 (2.29") 5 58 (2.28")

(0.69") (0.20") 58 (2.28") (1.41") (0.20") 43.8 (1.72") 53.5 (2.11") (0.20") 43.7 (1.72")
43.7 (1.72")
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
98.3 (3.87")
)
98.3 (3.87")
98.3 (3.87")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
(
Ø4.2 Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36")
Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36") (0.16")
(0.16")
(0.16")
INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNITS FOR LOW VOLTAGE

PMVF 20...
Cutout
26.3 19 92 (3.62”)
96 (3.78”) (1.03”) 53.2 (2.09”) (0.75”)
99.5 (3.92”)
64.5 (2.54”)
96 (3.78”)
92 (3.62”)
61.5 (2.42”)
EXP 10 03
PMVF 51
63 (2.48”)
43.8 (1.72”)
5 42.7
108 (4.25”) 35.8 35.8 (0.20”)
(1.41”) (1.41”) (1.68”)
105.4 (4.15”)
63.5 (2.50”)
45 (1.77”)
90 (3.54”)
EXM 10... EXM 10... 36.4

(1.43”)
INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNIT FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE

PMVF 30 Cutout
26.3 19 92 (3.62”)
96 (3.78”) (1.03”) 53.2 (2.09”) (0.75”)
18
99.5 (3.92”)
64.5 (2.54”)
96 (3.78”)
92 (3.62”)
61.5 (2.42”)
EXP10...
GSM MODEM FOR REMOTE DISCONNECTION SIGNAL

PMVF GMS 1
71 (2.79”) 48 (1.89”)
90 (3.54”)
63 (2.50”)
45 (1.77”)
18-17
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Voltage monitoring relays for Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence (PMV10 - PMV20 - PMV30 - PMV40 - PMV50 - PMV70)
3-phase systems without neutral Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay
PMV10 - PMV20 - PMV30 - PMV40 L1 L2
PMV50 - PMV70
L2 L1
L1 L3
L2 L3
L3
ON ON
L1 L2 L3
TRMS MAX MAX
MIN MIN
14 12 11
ASYMMETRY ASYMMETRY
11 14 11
14
12 12
Maximum and minimum voltage (PMV30 - PMV50 - PMV70)

Reset delay MAX Delay Reset delay MIN Delay Reset delay
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
L1 - L2 - L3
ON
V MAX
V MIN
14
11
12
Asymmetry (PMV40 - PMV70)

Reset delay Trip delay Reset delay
Set point
asymmetry
Hysteresis
L1 - L2 - L3
On
ASYMMETRY
14
11
12
18
18-18
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Voltage monitoring relays for Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence (PMV50N - PMV70N - PMV80N)
3-phase systems c/w or w/o neutral Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay
PMV50N - PMV70N - PMV80N
L1 L1
L2 L2
L1
L3 L3
L2
L3 N ❶ N
N
ON ON
TRMS
MAX MAX
Min Max MIN MIN

14 12 11 24 22 21
ASYMMETRY ASYMMETRY
14 14
V MIN relay 11 V MIN relay 11
12 12
24 24
V MAX relay 21 V MAX relay 21
22 22
❶ Neutral loss only with VL-N monitoring
Maximum and minimum voltage (PMV50N - PMV70N - PMV80N)

Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay Reset delay
Set up V MAX
Hysteresis
Ue
Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
Ue
ON
V MAX
V MIN
14
V MIN relay 11
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
Asymmetry (PMV70N) Maximum and minimum frequency (PMV80N)

Reset delay Trip delay Reset delay Reset delay MAX delay Reset delay MIN delay Reset delay
Max frequency
Set point asymmetry Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hz
Hysteresis
Min frequency
Ue
ON Ue
ASYMMETRY
Hz
14
V MIN relay 11
12
ON
18
V MAX relay 21 24
22 14
V MIN relay 11
12
V MAX relay 21 24
22
Voltage monitoring relay for 1-phase systems

PMV55
A1 Reset delay MAX Delay Reset delay MIN Delay Reset delay
A2
A1 A2 Set up V MAX
TRMS Hysteresis
14 12 11 Hysteresis
Set up V MIN
V MAX
V MIN
ON
14
11
12
A1
A2
18-19
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Current monitoring relay for 1-phase systems

PMA20 Operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
A1
Single-phase connection with CT A2
L
N O
L A ON
D
C(-)
B1
Reset A1
16A
C Y
METER
Inhibition time
Trip Max current

A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
t >trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
C
Inhibition or
Reset Threshold Max current
Hysteresis Max current
Single-phase direct connection

L
N(-) O Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition
L(+) A
D Positions
C(-)
D E D E
B1
C F C F
14
B G OR B G Relay ON
H H
11
16A A A
12
METER
D E D E
C F C F 14
B G OR B G Relay OFF
11
A H A H
12
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)

A1
A2
ON
Inhibition A1
C Y
Inhibition time
Trip Max current
t < trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay

Threshold Max current
Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition

Positions
18
D E D E
C F C F
Relay ON 14
B G OR B G
A H A H 11
12
D E D E
C F C F
Relay OFF 14
B G OR B G
11
A H A H
12
Operation
Mode Ie Relay Latch
output
A 5A OFF OFF
B ON
C ON OFF
D ON
E 16A OFF OFF
F ON
G ON OFF
H ON
18-20
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Current monitoring relay for Maximum current control operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
single and three-phase systems A1
A2
PMA30
Single-phase connection by CT ON
L
N O
L A Reset A1
D
C Y
C(-)
B1
Inhibition time
16A
METER
Trip Max current
t > trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 Hysteresis Max current
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Positions Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition

Single-phase direct connection
D E
C F
L G
14
N(-) O
B Relay ON
A H 11
L(+) A
D 12
D E
C(-)
C F 14
B1
B G Relay OFF
11
A H
16A 12
METER
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C
Inhibition or
Reset
Maximum current control operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)
A1
Three-phase connection by CT A2
(1 phase control)
L1 L ON
L2 O
A
L3 D
Inhibition A1
C
C(-)
Y
B1
16A
Inhibition time
METER
Trip Max current

A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 Threshold Max current
Inhibition or Hysteresis Max current

C
Reset
Three-phase direct connection Positions Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition
(1 phase control) C
D E
F
14
L B G Relay ON
L1 11
O A H
L2 12
18
A
L3 D D E
C F 14
Relay OFF
C(-)
11
B1
B G
A H 12
16A
METER
Minimum current control operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)

A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 A1
A2
C
Inhibition or
Reset
ON
Operation Reset A1
C Y
Mode Function Relay Latch
output
A Minimum OFF OFF Inhibition time
B current ON
C ON OFF Trip Min current
D ON t > trip delay t > trip delay t < trip delay
E Maximum OFF OFF
Hysteresis Min current
F current ON
Threshold Min current
G ON OFF
H ON
D E
C F 14
B G Relay ON
11
A H
12
D E
C F 14
B G Relay OFF
11
A H
12
18-21
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Minimum current control operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)

A1
A2
ON
Inhibition A1
C Y
Inhibition time
Trip Min current


D E
C F
14
B G Relay ON
H
11
A
12
D E
C F 14
Relay OFF
B G 11
A H 12
Current monitoring relay for

single and three-phase systems Operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
A1
PMA40 A2
Single-phase connection by CT ON
L
N O
L A
D Inhibition time
C(-)
B1
B2
B3
Trip Max current

16A
1A
50mA
t > trip delay t < trip delay

METER Trip Min current
MIN current MAX current
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
Single-phase direct connection Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition

L Positions
N(-) O
L(+) A
Relay 24
D 21
C
D E
F
MAX ON
22
C(-)
G Separate
B1
B2
B3
B
A H
Relay 14
MIN ON 11
16A
1A
50mA
12
METER
Relay 24
18 B
C
D E
F
G
MAX OFF
Separate
21
22
A H
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21 14
Relay 11
MIN OFF
12
D E
C F
Three-phase connection by CT B G Common 14-24
(1 phase control) A H relays ON 11-21
12-22
L1 L
L2 O
A C
D E
F
L3 D
B G Common 14-24
A H
relays OFF 11-21
C(-)
12-22
B1
B2
B3
16A
1A
50mA
METER
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
18-22
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Three-phase direct connection Operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)

(1 phase control) A1
A2
L1 L
L2 O
A
L3 D ON
C(-)
B1
B2
B3
Inhibition time
16A
1A
50mA
METER Trip Max current
MIN current MAX current t > trip delay t < trip delay
Trip Min current
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21 Threshold Max current


Operation
Mode Operation Relay Latch Inhibition
output Positions
A Separate OFF OFF 24
Relay
B relays ON C
D E
F
MAX ON 21
22
C ON OFF B G Separate
A H
D ON Relay 14
11
E Common OFF OFF MIN ON
12
F relays ON
G ON OFF
H ON Relay 24
D E MAX OFF 21
C F
22
B G Separate
A H
14
Relay 11
MIN OFF
12
D E
C F
B G Common 14-24
A H relays ON 11-21
12-22
D E
C F
B G Common 14-24
A H
relays OFF 11-21
12-22
Pump protection - motor under-load/over-current monitoring

PMA50 External reset disabled (OFF)
A1
A2
Three-phase connection by CT
L1 L
L2 O ON
A
L3 D
L2/N
L1/L
Reset A1
B1
L3
C
C
Y
16A 600V
METER Inhibition time
Trip Max current
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11 t < trip delay t > trip delay 18

Trip Min cosϕ
C Enable
t < trip delay t > trip delay
14
Relay
11
Three-phase direct connection 12
L1 L
O Threshold Max current
L2
A Hysteresis Max current
L3 D
L2/N
L1/L
Hysteresis Min cosϕ

B1
L3
C
Threshold Min cosϕ

16A 600V
METER
Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
C Enable
18-23
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Single-phase connection by CT External reset enabled (ON)

L1 L A1
N O A2
A
D
L2/N
L1/L
ON
B1
L3
C
16A 600V
Reset A1
METER C Y
Inhibition time
A1 A2 Y 14 12 11
Trip Max current
C Enable
Trip Min cosϕ

Operation
Mode Ie Connection External 14
reset Relay
11
A 5A 1 phase OFF 12
B ON Threshold Max current
C 3 phase OFF Hysteresis Max current
D ON
E 16A 1 phase OFF
Threshold Min cosϕ
F ON
G 3 phase OFF
Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition Inhib.
H ON
Phase shift monitoring relay

PMA60
Operation with tripping latch (Latch ON)
A1
Three-phase connection by CT A2
L1 L
L2 O
A ON
L3 D
L2/N
L1/L
B1
Inhibition time
C
16A 600V
METER Trip Max cosϕ

MIN cosϕ MAX cosϕ
Trip Min cosϕ
Threshold Max cosϕ
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
Hysteresis Max cosϕ

Threshold Min cosϕ
Three-phase direct connection Inhibition Inhibition Inhibition
L1 L
L2 O
A
L3 D Positions
L2/N
L1/L
D E
B1
C F
C
B G
Relay 24
A H
MAX ON 21
16A 600V
22
METER OR
18 MIN cosϕ MAX cosϕ

B
C
D E
F
G
Relay
MIN ON 11
14
A H 12
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
D E
C F
B G 24
A H Relay
MAX OFF 21
22
OR
C
D E
F Relay 14
B G MIN OFF 11
A H 12
18-24
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Single-phase connection by CT Operation with no tripping latch (Latch OFF)

L1 L A1
N O A2
A
D
L2/N
L1/L
ON
B1
C
16A 600V
Inhibition time
METER
MIN cosϕ MAX cosϕ
Trip Max cosϕ
Trip Min cosϕ
A1 A2 14 12 11 24 22 21
Threshold Max cosϕ
Hysteresis Max cosϕ
Operation Hysteresis Min cosϕ

Mode Connection Relay Latch Threshold Min cosϕ
output
Inhibition
A 1 phase OFF OFF
B ON
C ON OFF Positions
D ON C
D E
F
E 3 phase OFF OFF B G
Relay 24
A H
F ON MAX ON 21
22
G ON OFF OR
D E
H ON C F Relay 14
B G MIN ON 11
A H 12
D E
C F
B G 24
A H Relay
21
MAX OFF 22
OR
C
D E
F Relay 14
B G MIN OFF 11
A H 12
Frequency monitoring relay

PMF20 MAX-MIN, MAX or MIN function MAX function
A1
A2 Reset delay MAX Delay Reset delay MIN Delay Reset delay
A1 A2
F. Detect
Set Hz MAX
Hysteresis
14 12 11 Rated MAX Delay Reset delay

frequency
Hysteresis Set Hz MAX

Hysteresis
Set Hz MIN
Rated
frequency
A1 - A2
Hz MAX A1 - A2
18
Hz MIN Hz MAX
ON ON
14 14
Relay 11 Relay 11
12 12
18-25
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-21 standard - For low voltage
PMVF 20...
Three-phase connection
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 N (OPTION) DDI
TA1
TA2
TA3 GENERATION
Rear view
IN1 – DDI Feedback
IN2 – Frequency window choice ON
1 2
I1 I2 I3
IN3 – Local control OPTIONAL S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
PMVF 20 IN4 – Remote tripping EXP10 03
OUTPUTS
OPTION
OPTION
INPUTS
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
12...48VDC❶ V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
100...400VAC DIGITAL INPUTS
110...250VDC I1 I2 I3
VOLTAGE
CURRENT INPUTS
--- + INPUTS
A1 A2 400VAC 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24
A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
LSP PROGRAMMABLE
STANDBY DEVICE PROTECTION ALARM
DDI ❷
AUXILIARY A1
SUPPLY A2
A1
For PMVF 20 D048 only.
RELAY SUPPLY
250VAC MAX A2 Local control choice.
Activation modes for standby device

P01.05 P01.05 P04.19 P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
22
18
18-26
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-21 standard - For low voltage
PMVF 51
LOW VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 N
(OPTION) DDI
TA1
TA2
TA3 GENERATION
PMVF 51 EXM10 02 OPTIONAL EXM10 01
V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
100 - 240VAC I1 I2 I3
110 - 250VDC VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUTS
--- + INPUTS A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2 A2
A1 A2 400VAC 14 11 12 24 21 22 COM IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 14 11 12 24 21 22 + IN1 IN2 -
STANDBY DEVICE
LSP GLOBAL
DDI PROTECTION ALARM
AUXILIARY A1
REMOTE TRIPPING
WINDOW CHOICE
SUPPLY
LOCAL CONTROL
A2
DDI FEEDBACK
Local control choice.
FREQUENCY

P01.05 P01.05 P04.19 P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
22
18
18-27
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-16 standard - For medium voltage
PMVF 30...
Connection through VTs in Medium Voltage
MEDIUM VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 (OPTION)
Current input wiring not required
by Italian CEI 0-16
To use only with
CT connection (e.g. ARON) DDI
DG
TA1
GENERATION
Rear view
TA2
ON
1 2
I1 I2 I3
TV3 TV4 TV5 TV1 TV2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
OUTPUTS
OPTION
OPTION
INPUTS
IN1 – DDI Feedback
IN2 – Interface protection exclusion
IN3 – Local control A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
IN4 – Remote tripping
(OPTIONAL EXP10 03)
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4

12...48VDC❶
V4 V5 V1 V2 V3 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
100...400VAC
110...250VDC I1 I2 I3 DIGITAL INPUTS
--- + VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT
50 - 500V~ AC MEASUREMENTS
A1 A2 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24
STANDBY DEVICE AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMABLE

RECLOSING ALARM
DDI ❷
AUXILIARY A1
SUPPLY A2
RELAY SUPPLY A1 For PMVF 30 D048 only.

VT in MV for residual voltage measurements.
Direct connection in Low Voltage

MEDIUM VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION LINE
L1 L2 L3 (OPTION)
Current input wiring not required
by Italian CEI 0-16
To use only with
CT connection (e.g. ARON) DDI
DG
TA1
GENERATION
TA2
TV3 TV4 TV5

Rear view
❸
I1 I2 I3
IN1 – DDI Feedback ON
1 2
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
IN2 – Interface protection exclusion

IN3 – Local control
OUTPUTS
OPTION
OPTION
IN4 – Remote tripping
INPUTS
(OPTIONAL EXP10 03)

12...48VDC❶
18 100...400VAC
110...250VDC
V4 V5 V1 V2 V3 S1 S2
I1
S1 S2
I2
S1 S2
I3
OUTPUTS
DIGITAL INPUTS
OUTPUTS
A1/- A2/+ V1 V2 V3 VN
--- + VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT
50 - 500V~ AC MEASUREMENTS
A1 A2 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24
STANDBY DEVICE AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMABLE

RECLOSING ALARM
DDI ❷
AUXILIARY A1
SUPPLY
A2
RELAY SUPPLY A1 For PMVF 30 D048 only.

VT in MV for residual voltage measurements.

P01.05 P01.05 P04.19 P04.17 P01.14
POWER SUPPLY
SPI
V/F OK
14
DDI OUT 1 11
12
DDI INP 1
STANDBY DEVICE
P01.13
24
MODE A 21
(default) 22
24
MODE B 21
22
24
MODE C 21
22
18-28
Protection relays
Wiring diagrams
Interface protection systems compliant with Italian CEI 0-16 standard - For medium voltage
PMVF 30... with PMVF GSM 1
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION NETWORK
L1 L2 L3
Connection through VTs in Medium Voltage
DG DDI
CT1
GENERATION
CT2
TV3 TV4 TV5 TV1 TV2
Direct connection in Low Voltage - Three-phase connection

(OPTIONAL)
Ammeter input wiring
not envisaged by CEI0-16.
To implement only via CT
(e.g. ARON) DDI
DG
CT1
GENERATION
CT2
FEEDBACK TO SPI
FEEDBACK TO GSM
TV3 TV4 TV5
PMVF 30 (OPTIONAL EXP10 03) PMVF GSM 1

12...48 VDC❶ V4 V5 V1 V2 V3 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
100...400 VAC
I1 I2 I3 DIGITAL INPUTS 9.5...27 VAC
110...250 VDC
+ VOLTAGE INPUT CURRENT 9.5...35 VDC
--- MEASUREMENT
50 - 500 V~ AC
A1 A2 11 12 14 21 22 24 + COM - IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 11 12 14 21 22 24 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
BACKUP AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMABLE

RECLOSING ALARM
DDI ❷
AUXILIARY A1
SUPPLY
A2
DDI FEEDBACK
DDI FEEDBACK
SPI SHUT-OFF
LOCAL CONTROL
A1 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
RELAY SUPPLY
INTERTRIPPING
250 VAC MAX A2
For PMVF 30 D048 only. The connections coloured in GREEN, in addition to the GSM
Local control choice. Modem, represent the only wiring necessary for the adaptation.
VT in MV for residual voltage measurements. 18
PMVF GSM 1 modem wiring diagram with other interface protections (PI) with PMVF GSM 1 modem wiring diagram with other interface protections (PI) with
self-supplied remote disconnection input remote disconnection input to be supplied
PMVF GSM 1 PMVF GSM 1
9.5...27 VAC 9.5...27 VAC

9.5...35 VDC 9.5...35 VDC
DDI DDI
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
-Vaux Remote disconnection -Vaux Remote disconnection

and DDI closing and DDI closing
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
SUPPLY AUXILIARY
Auxiliary Auxiliary DDI contact

DDI contact
PI CEI-016 PI CEI-016
+Vaux Auxiliary +Vaux +Vaux Auxiliary supply +Vaux

-Vaux supply -Vaux
Remote disconnection Remote disconnection
and DDI closing control and DDI closing control
Digital input programed +Vaux Digital input programed
as remote disconnection -Vaux as remote disconnection
RELAY SUPPLY
250 VAC max.
3 A max.
The connections coloured in GREEN, in addition to the GSM
Modem, represent the only wiring necessary for the adaptation.
18-29
Protection relays
TYPE Single phase PMV55 — — — —

Three phase — PMV10 PMV20 PMV30 PMV40
Three phase with/without neutral — — — — —
DESCRIPTION
Minimum and Phase loss and Minimum AC voltage, Asymmetry,
maximum AC voltage incorrect phase sequence phase loss and phase loss and
incorrect phase sequence incorrect phase sequence
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated voltage 208...240VAC 208...480VAC 100...240VAC 208...240VAC
to control (Ue) 380...440VAC 208...575VAC 380...575VAC
380...600VAC 600VAC
Maximum voltage set-point 105...115% Ue — — — —
Minimum voltage set-point 80...95% Ue — — 80...95% Ue —
Asymmetry set-point — — — — 5...15%Ue
Minimum and maximum –– –– –– –– ––
frequency set-point
Tripping time 0.1...20s 60ms 0.1...20s
Resetting time 0.1...20s 0.5s 0.1...20s
(0.5s at power up) (0.5s at power up)
Resetting hysteresis 3% 5% 3%
Instantaneous tripping for Ue <70% Ue configured Umin<70% Umax <70% Ue configured <70% minimum Ue
Repeat accuracy < ±0.1% < ±1% < ±0.1% < ±0.1%
POWER SUPPLY
Auxiliary voltage (Us) Self powered
Operating range 0.7...1.2Ue 0.85...1.1Ue 0.7...1.2Ue
Frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Power consumption (maximum) 10VA (208...240VAC) 20VA 28VA 11VA (208...240VAC)
17VA (380...440VAC) 30VA (380...575VAC)
19VA (600VAC)
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.5W 2.2W 2.5W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1
Relay state Normally energised
De-energises at tripping
Contact arrangement 1 changeover SPDT
Rated operational voltage 250VAC
Conventional free-air thermal 8A
current (Ith)
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 B300
designation
Electrical life 105 cycles
18 (with rated load)
Indications 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
and tripping and tripping and tripping
2 red LEDs for tripping 1 red LED for tripping
CONNECTIONS
Terminal tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7...9lbin per UL/CSA)
(maximum)
Conductor section min...max 0.2...4.0mm2 (24...12AWG; 18...12 AWG per UL/CSA)
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 440VAC 480VAC 600VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing polyamide
Power consumption (maximum) at 50Hz.
18-30
Protection relays
— — — — —
PMV50 PMV70 — — —
— — PMV50 N PMV70 N PMV80 N
Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum Minimum and maximum
AC voltage, phase loss and AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage, phase loss, AC voltage and frequency,
incorrect phase sequence incorrect phase sequence neutral loss and incorrect neutral loss, incorrect phase phase loss, neutral loss and
and asymmetry phase sequence sequence and asymmetry incorrect phase sequence
208...240VAC 208...240VAC 208...240VAC 208...240VAC 208...240VAC

600VAC 600VAC 480...600VAC 480...600VAC 480...600VAC
105...15% Ue 105...115% Ue 105...115% Ue 105...115% Ue 105...115% Ue
80...95% Ue 80...95% Ue 80...95% Ue 80...95% Ue 80...95% Ue
— 5...15% Ue — 5...15% Ue ––
–– –– –– –– 1...10% rated frequency
0.1...20s 0.1...20s 0.1...5s frequency

0.1...20s 0.5s 0.1...20s 0.5s 0.5s
(0.5s at power up)
3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 0.5% frequency
<70% Ue configured
< ±0.1%
Self powered
0.7...1.2Ue
50/60Hz ±5%
11VA (208...240VAC) 27VA max
30VA (380...575VAC)
19VA (600VAC)
2.5W 1.9W max
1 2
Normally energised
De-energises at tripping
1 changeover SPDT 2 changeover SPDT
250VAC
400VAC
8A
B300
105 cycles
18
30x106 cycles
1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
and tripping and tripping and tripping
2 red LEDs for tripping 3 red LEDs for tripping 2 red LEDs for tripping
0.8Nm (7lbin; 7...9lbin per UL/CSA - PMV...N excluded)
0.2...4.0mm2 (24...12AWG; 18...12 AWG per UL/CSA - PMV...N excluded)
600VAC
6kV
4kV
–20...+60°C
–30...+80°C
Self-extinguishing polyamide
18-31
Protection relays
TYPE PMA20 PMA30 PMA40

DESCRIPTION
Single-phase Single-phase Single-phase
maximum current minimum or maximum minimum and maximum
monitoring current monitoring current monitoring
AC/DC multiscale AC/DC multiscale AC/DC multiscale
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated current to be monitored Ie 5 or 16A 0.02 - 0.05 - 0.25 - 1 - 5 - 16A
Rated frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Overload capacity 50mA - 1A inputs 16A input
5 Ie for 1s 5 Ie for 1s 5 Ie for 1s
160A for 10ms 10Ie for 10ms 160A for 10ms
Constant 16A Constant 2Ie Constant 16A
Connection Direct or by current transformer
Adjustment Tripping values 5...100% f.s.
Tripping time 0.1...30s
Inhibition time 1...60s
Resetting hysteresis 1...50% 3% fixed
Resetting Automatic / Manual
External input Resetting / Inhibition —
Repeat accuracy ±1% with constant parameters
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary supply voltage Us 24...240VAC/DC
Operating range 0.85...1.1 Us
Power consumption (maximum) 3.2VA 7VA
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.6W 1.7W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 2
Relay state Normally energised / de-energised (selectable)
Contact arrangement 1 changeover contact SPDT each
Maximum switching 400VAC
voltage
IEC conventional free air thermal 8A
current Ith
designation
Electrical life 105 cycles
(with rated load)
Indications 1 green LED 1 green LED for
for power on/inhibition power on/inhibition
18 1 red LED for tripping 2 red LEDs for max/min tripping
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7...9lbin per UL/CSA)
maximum
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 415VAC
IEC power frequency withstand 2.5kV
voltage
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
18-32
Protection relays
Pump protection and phase shift monitoring relays
TYPE PMA50 PMA60

DESCRIPTION
Single and three-phase pump protection Single and three-phase shift control
(motor under-load and over-current control) for minimum and maximum
monitoring for max AC current, min cos cosmonitoring
phase loss and incorrect phase sequence
CURRENT AND COS CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated current Ie 5 or 16A 16A
Overload capacity 5Ie for 1s
160A for 10ms
Constant 16A
Connection Direct or by current transformer
Adjustments End-scale value 5 or 16A 16A
Tripping for MAX current 10...100Ie —
Tripping for cos 0.1...0.99 cos (MIN) 0.1...0.99 cos (MIN and MAX)
Tripping delay 0.1...10s 0.1...30s
Inhibition time 1...60s 1...60s
Automatic resetting OFF...100min —
delay
External input Consent for running/resetting —
Repeat accuracy ±1% with constant parameters
VOLTAGE CONTROL CIRCUIT
Voltage measuring range (Ue) 80...660VAC
Tripping time for phase loss 60ms
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary supply voltage Us 220...240VAC
380...415VAC (maximum voltage for UL/CSA)
440...480VAC
Operating range 0.85...1.1 Us 0.85...1.1 Us
Frequency range 50/60Hz ±5% 50/60Hz ±5%
Power consumption (maximum) 4.5VA 4.4VA
Power dissipation (maximum) 2.3W 2.4W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 2
Relay state Normally energised, Normally energised / de-energised (ON-OFF)
de-energises at tripping (configurable)
Contact arrangement 1 changeover contact SPDT each
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith 8A
Electrical life (With rated load) 105 cycles 18
Indications 1 green LED for power on/inhibition
2 red LEDs for minimum/maximum tripping
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7...9lbin per UL/CSA)
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 2.5kV
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
18-33
Protection relays
Frequency monitoring relay
TYPE PMF20
DESCRIPTION Single-phase minimum and maximum frequency control
FREQUENCY CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated frequency 50 or 60Hz selectable
Operating frequency range 40...70Hz
Adjustment MAX tripping 101...110% operating frequency
MIN tripping90...99% operating frequency
Resetting hysteresis 0.5%
Inhibition time 0.1...20s
Reset delay 0.1...20s
Resetting Automatic
Repeat accuracy < ±0.1%
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Auxiliary supply voltage Us 220...240VAC
380...415VAC
Power consumption (maximum) 10VA (220...240VAC); 17VA (380...415VAC)
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.5W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1
Relay state Normally energised, de-energises at tripping
Contact arrangement 1 changeover contact SPDT
IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith 8A
Indications 1 green LED for power on/tripping
2 red LEDs for min-max tripping
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7...9lbin per UL/CSA)
Conductor section min-max 0.2...4.0mm2 (24...12AWG; 18...12 AWG per UL/CSA)
INSULATION (input - output)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
18 HOUSING
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping with MAX function configured.
18-34
Protection relays
TYPE PMVF 20 PMVF 20 D048

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
Rated control supply voltage Us 100...400VAC/110...250VDC 12...48VDC
Operating limits 90...440VAC/93.5...300VDC 9...70VDC
Frequency 45...55Hz ––
Power consumption AC supply 6VA at 110VAC; 8VA at 230VAC; 11VA at 400VAC ––
DC supply 25mA at 110VDC; 11mA at 250VDC 250mA at 12VDC; 120mA 24VDC; 62mA at 48VDC
Power dissipation AC supply 2.7W at 110VAC; 3W at 220V; 3.9W at 400VAC ––
DC supply 2.6W at 110VAC; 2.8W at 250VDC 3W at 12VDC; 2.9W at 24VDC; 3W at 48VDC
Micro-breaking immunity 50ms at 110VAC ; 200ms at 230VAC 15ms at 12VDC; 30ms at 24VDC; 70ms at 48VDC
Overload category III III
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated operating voltage 400VAC L-L; 230VAC L-N 50Hz
Measuring range 20...480VAC L-L; 10...276VAC L-N
Frequency range 45...55Hz
Overload category IV
CURRENT INPUTS (OPTIONAL)
Rated operational current Ie 1A or 5A in AC programmable
Measuring range For 1A scale: 0.01...1.2A; for 5A scale: 0.01...6A
Type of input Shunts powered by external current transformer (low voltage) 5A max.
Type of measurement RMS
Overload capacity ±20% Ie
Overload peak 50A for 1 second
Burden (per phase) 0.6W
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 2
Type of output 1 changeover contact/SPDT each
Rated operating voltage 250VAC
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation 5A 250VAC AC1 /B300 ; 5A 30VDC
Overload category III
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number and type of inputs 4 negative (NPN)
Input voltage 24VDC isolated
Input current 7mA
SUPPLY/VOLTAGE MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Screw - removable
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...2.5mm² (24...12 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
CURRENT MEASURING CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Screw - fixed
Number of terminals 6 for external CT connections
18
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...4mm² (26...10 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin)
RELAY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...2.5 mm² (24...12 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5 lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS – Input terminals
INPUT CONNECTIONS – COM and auxiliary voltage terminals
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
Version Flush mount 96x96mm / 3.78x3.78”
18-35
Protection relays
TYPE PMVF 51
Rated control supply voltage Us 100...240VAC/110...250VDC
Operating limits 85...264VAC/93.5...300VDC
Frequency 45...55Hz
Power consumption AC supply 4.6VA at 110VAC; 12.5VA at 230VAC
DC supply 23mA at 110VDC; 11mA 250VDC
Power dissipation AC supply 2.5W at 110VAC; 2.7W at 230VAC
DC supply 2.3W at 110VDC; 2.5W at 250VDC
Micro-breaking immunity 50ms at 100VDC; 200ms at 240VDC
Overload category II
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated operating voltage 400VAC L-L; 230VAC L-N 50Hz
Measuring range 20...480VAC L-L; 10...276VAC L-N
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 2
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation For NO contact: 5A 250VAC AC1/C300;
5A 30VDC
For NC contact: 2A 250VAC AC1 / C300;
2A 30VDC
Overload category II
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number and type of inputs 4 positive (PNP)
Input current 7mA
18 Type of terminals Screw - fixed
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
Version Modular 6U
Single insulation between the two outputs. Both outputs must use the same voltage group.
18-36
Protection relays
TYPE PMVF 30
Rated control supply voltage Us 100...400VAC/110...250VDC
Operating limits 90...440VAC/93.5...300VDC
Frequency 45...55Hz
Power consumption AC supply 7.5VA at 110VAC; 10VA at 230VAC; 14VA at 400VAC
DC supply 35mA at 110VDC; 14mA at 250VDC
Power dissipation AC supply 4W at 110VAC; 4.2W at 220V; 5W at 400VAC
DC supply 3.8W at 110VAC; 4W at 250VDC
Micro-breaking immunity 30ms at 110VAC ; 140ms at 230VAC
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated operating voltage 50...500VAC (for voltages/frequency) / 50...150V (for residual voltage measurement)
Measuring range (Un) 400-150,000V (VT primary)
Type of input Shunts powered by external current transformer (low voltage) 5A max.
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 2
UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation 5A 250VAC AC1 /B300; 5A 30VDC
DIGITAL INPUTS
Number and type of inputs 4 negative (NPN)
Input current 7mA
Number of terminals 2 for power supply; 5 for voltage control
Type of terminal Screw - fixed
18
Type and (number) of terminals Screw – removable (3)
Tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5 lbin)
INPUT CONNECTIONS – COM and auxiliary voltage terminals
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
Version Flush mount 96x96mm / 3.78x3.78”
18-37
LEVEL CONTROL RELAYS PROBES, ELECTRODES AND ELECTRODE FLOAT SWITCHES

• For conductive liquids HOLDERS • Versions for grey and dirty water
• Single, dual or multivoltage • Single pole • Versions with PVC and Neoprene cable
• Emptying or filling functions • Three pole. • Emptying or filling functions.
• Multifunctions
• Automatic reset
• Modular and plug-in versions.
Page 19-8
START-UP PRIORITY CHANGE RELAYS

• 2 outputs
• Single or multivoltage
• Modular and plug-in versions.
LEVEL CONTROLS 19
Level monitoring for electrically

conductive liquids
Modular and plug-in versions
Adjustable 2.5…200kΩ sensitivity
Single and three-pole probes
Float switches
Start-up priority change relays.
SEC. - PAGE
Level monitoring relays
Modular version for conductive liquids .............................................................................................................................. 19 - 3
Plug-in version for conductive liquids................................................................................................................................. 19 - 5
Probes, electrodes and electrode holders ............................................................................ 19 - 6
Float switches .............................................................................................................. 19 - 7
Start-up priority change relays
Modular version ................................................................................................................................................................ 19 - 8
Plug-in version .................................................................................................................................................................. 19 - 8
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 19 - 9
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 19 - 10
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 19 - 11
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Level controls
Description LEVEL CONTROL RELAYS PRIORITY CHANGE

RELAYS FOR 2 MOTORS
LVM20 LVM25 LVM30 LVM40 LV1E LV2E LVMP05 LVMP10 CSP2E
Modular version (2U) (1U) (3U) (3U) (1U) (3U)
Plug-in version
(8 pin) (11 pin) (11 pin)
3 detecting electrodes

(MIN, MAX and COM)
5 detecting electrodes

(MIN1, MAX1, MIN2, MAX2 and COM)
Sensitivity adjustment 2.5...50kΩ
Fixed sensitivity: 7…8kΩ
Adjustable sensitivity full-scale value

25-50-100-200 kΩ
Separate sensitivity adjustment for

MAX probe (foam detection)
Emptying function and alarms
Filling function and alarms
Emptying function with Extra-MIN

and/or Extra-MAX alarm relays
Filling function with Extra-MIN

and/or Extra-MAX alarm relays
Emptying function with start

change control
Filling function with start

change control
Tank filling, well drawing functions

and alarm
Filling-emptying adjustment

selector
Programming selector

for 5 different functions
Motor start-up priority change
Motor start-up priority change with

stand-by motor function
Page 19-3 19-4 19-5 19-8
19
Some permitted liquid substances Liquid substances not permitted

Type of liquid Resistivity kΩcm Type of liquid Resistivity kΩcm
Drinking water 5–10 Milk ~1 • Purified water
Well water 2–5 Whey ~1 • Deionised water
River water 2–15 Fruit juices ~1 • Petrol
• Oil
Rainwater 15–25 Vegetable juices ~1
• Liquid gases
Sludge 0.5–2 Soups ~1
• Paraffin
Seawater ~0.03 Wine ~2.2
• Ethylene glycol
Salt water ~2.2 Beer ~2.2
• Paints
Natural/hard water ~5 Coffee ~2.2
• Liquids with a high
Chlorinated water ~5 Suds ~18 percentage of alcohol
Condensed water ~18
N.B. The resistivity values in the table are purely indicative.
19-2
Level controls
Level control relays.
Modular version
Single-voltage relay Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

code supply output per – Used with 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM
voltage contact pack – 2.5…50kΩ adjustable sensitivity
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Double insulation between each supply, electrodes and
output relay circuits
Emptying function. – Fixed probe signal delay: <1s
Automatic reset. – Green LED indicator for power on
LVM20 A024 24VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 – Red LED indicator for output relay state
LVM20 A127 110...127VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 – Modular DIN 43880 housing (2 modules)
LVM20 A240 220...240VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
LVM20 A415 380...415VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.215 IP20 on terminals.

LVM20... Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Level
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 no. 14.
Probes, electrode holders and float switches

Use probes and electrode holders type:
SN1/PS31/PS3S/SCM/CGL or similar (see page 19-6).
For the choice of float switches see page 19-7.
Multi-voltage relay Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

[V] n° [kg] – Insensitivity to stray electrode-cable capacitance
– Programming selector for emptying or filling function
Emptying or filling functions. with fail-safe operation
Automatic reset. – Double insulation between each supply, electrodes and
LVM25 240 24...240VAC/DC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.095 output relay circuits
– Fixed probe signal delay: <1s
– Red LED indicator for output relay state
Order Description Qty Wt – Modular DIN 43880 housing (1 module)
code per – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
pack mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
LVM25 240 n° [kg] IP20 on terminals.
Level control relay LVM25 240 and SN1 electrodes kit.
LVMKIT25 Level control relay LVM25 240 1 0.192 Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
and 2 SN1 probes Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Level
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.

LVMKIT25
19
Dual-voltage relay Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Programming selector for emptying or filling function
with fail-safe operation
Emptying or filling functions. – Double insulation between each supply, electrodes and
Automatic reset. output relay circuits
LVM30 A240 24/220...240VAC 2 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.315 – Adjustable probe signal delay: 1...10s or pump start
LVM30 A415 110...127VAC 2 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.315 delay: 0...300s
380...415VAC – Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Modular DIN 43880 housing (3 modules)
IP20 on terminals.
LVM30...
Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Level
control relays.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.


page 19-10 page 19-11 page 19-14 19-3
Level controls
Modular version
Single-voltage Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Weight Operational characteristics

multifunction relay code supply output per – Use with 5 sensing electrodes, MIN1, MAX1, MIN2,
voltage contacts pack MAX2 and COM
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – 2.5…200kΩ adjustable sensitivity
– Adjustable sensitivity full-scale value: 25-50-100-200kΩ
Emptying or filling functions. – Separate sensitivity adjustment of MAX electrodes for
Multifunctions. foam detection
Automatic reset. – Insensitivity to stray electrode-cable capacitance
LVM40 A024 24VAC 1+1NO 1 0.278 – Programming selector for 5 different functions:
LVM40 A127 110...127VAC 1+1NO 1 0.278 • emptying function and alarms (pos. A)
• filling function and alarms (pos. B)
LVM40 A240 220...240VAC 1+1NO 1 0.278 • emptying function with priority start-up change
LVM40 A415 380...415VAC 1+1NO 1 0.278 control (pos. C)
Two relay outputs; one with c/o (SPDT) and the other with N/O (SPST). • filling function with priority start-up change
pump (pos. D)
• well draining and tank filling and alarms (pos. E)
– Double insulation between each supply, electrodes and
LVM40... output relay circuits
– Adjustable probe signal delay: 1...10s
– Adjustable pump start delay: 0...30min
FUNCTIONS – Green LED indicator for power on
– Red LED indicators for output relay and electrode state
A- Emptying with MIN and/or EXAMPLE OF EMPTYING OPERATION – Modular DIN 43880 housing (3 modules)
MAX alarms. To achieve this type of operation, two electrodes are used – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when
to control the liquid between the fixed limits using MIN1 mounted in housing or electric board with IP40);
B- Filling with MIN and/or MAX and MAX1 and two alarm levels using MIN2 and MAX2. IP20 on terminals.
alarms. When one of the alarm electrodes is wet, the alarm relay is
de-energised. Certifications and compliance
The alarm can be caused by pump malfunction, Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
Tank insufficient pump delivery capacity, MAX control level Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Level
Alarm
failure or MIN level electrode shorted. control relays.
MAX 2
Start With a proper connection, only the MIN alarm or MAX Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5,
MAX 1
MIN 1
Stop alarm can be activated or neither of the two can be IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
Alarm
MIN 2 activated so the relative output contacts can be used for CSA C22.2 n° 14.
COM pump control.
C- Emptying with pump priority EXAMPLE OF EMPTYING OPERATION

change. This operation is obtained by using four electrodes
positioned at four different levels and two relay outputs to
D- Filling with pump priority control two pumps. For example, one can place the four
change. electrodes, MIN1, MIN2, MAX1 and MAX2, in increasing
order from the lowest to the highest levels and must
control the tank emptying. Usually the level is controlled
between the MIN1 and MAX1 levels by starting one of the
Tank
two pumps. This case is different so the pumps can be
MAX 2
maintained at the best efficiency and optimise their wear.
MAX 1 When the liquid wets the MAX2 level and because the first
MIN 2 pump is faulty or else a higher delivery capacity is needed,
MIN 1
COM
the second stand-by pump is activated to back up the first
pump. When the liquid lowers and no longer wets the
MIN2 level, the second pump is stopped and then when
the MIN1 level is no longer wet, the first pump is stopped
too.
19
E- Tank filling and well drawing EXAMPLE.

with alarm. Two electrodes are used in this operation to control the
tank level and another two for the well. One relay is used
to activate the pump while the other for dry running / no
Tank water alarm.
When the well liquid wets the MAX2 level and the liquid
MAX 1
wets the MIN1 tank level, the tank-filling pump is
MIN 1
activated.
COM When the tank MAX1 level is wet, the pump is stopped.
During the tank filling, the pump could stop before the
MAX1 level is wet because the well MIN2 level is no longer
wet.
Should the tank MIN1 level no longer be wet at which the
Tank
pump should restart but the well MIN2 level is also no
MAX 2 longer wet, then the alarm relay is de-energised.
MIN 2
COM

19-4 page 19-10 page 19-12 page 19-14
Level controls
Plug-in version
Single-voltage relay Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

voltage contact pack – 7…8kΩ fixed sensitivity
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Max. relay-electrode cable length: 500m/547yd single-
Emptying or filling functions. core, double insulated cables
Automatic reset. – Mounting on 35mm (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail or 8-pin
31 LV1E 24 24VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.263 plug-in housing
31 LV1E 110 110...120VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.263 – 8-pin plug-in housing (socket S8 or
L48 P8 with G216; see page 19-9)
31 LV1E 230 220...240VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.263 – IEC degree of protection: IP30.
31 LV1E 400 380...415VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.263
31 LV1E...
Dual-voltage relay Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Wt Operational characteristics

voltage contact pack – 7…8kΩ fixed sensitivity
[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] – Red LED indicator for output relay state
– Max. relay-electrode cable length: 500m/547yd single-
Emptying or filling functions. core, double insulated cables
Automatic reset. – Mounting on 35mm (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail or 11-pin
31 LV2E 48 24/48VAC 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266 plug-in housing
31 LV2E 220 110...120VAC/ 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266 – 11-pin plug-in housing (socket S11 or L48 P11 with
220...240VAC G216; see page 19-9)
31 LV2E 400 220...240VAC/ 1 C/O (SPDT) 1 0.266
380...415VAC Certifications and compliance
31 LV2E... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60255-5.

19

page 19-10 page 19-13 page 19-15 19-5
Level controls
Probes and electrode holders for conductive liquids.
Electrodes
Probes and electrode Order Probe Probe Qty Weight General characteristics
holders code included length per SN1 SINGLE POLE PROBES
pack A single pole probe used for level control in wells or
[mm/in] n° [kg] storage tanks. It comprises of an AISI 303 stainless steel
electrode, a plastic (PPOX) holder and a cable gland.
Single pole electrodes. A seal ring and the tightening of the cable gland PG7
11 SN1 yes 100/3.9” 10 0.050 prevent water from entering the cable terminal connector
and causing its oxidation.
Cable connection: screw.
31 SCM 04 yes 43/1.7” 1 0.060 The external cable diameter must be 2.5 to 6mm/Ø0.1 to
31 SCM 50 yes 500/19.7” 1 0.115 0.24” to warrant perfect sealing.
31 SCM 100 yes 1000/39.4” 1 0.162 Maximum connection cable section: 2.5mm2.
Maximum operating temperature: +60°C.
11 SN1 Application: Tanks and deep wells.
31 CGL125 3 yes 327/12.9” 1 0.126
31 CGL125 5 yes 500/19.7” 1 0.158 SCM… PROBES
A single pole probe used for level control on boilers,
31 CGL125 7 yes 700/27.6” 1 0.208 autoclaves and in general where pressure (10 bar
31 CGL125 10 yes 1000/39.4” 1 0.281 maximum) and high temperature (+100°C maximum) are
Three pole electrode. present. It comprises of an AISI 303 stainless steel
electrode embedded in an aluminium oxide body and a
31 PS31 yes 300/11.8” 1 0.120 3/8” GAS threaded metal support holder.
Electrode holder (for 3 rod probes). Cable connection: Threaded rod with nut.
31 PS3S no –– 1 0.184 Application: Tanks, pressurised tanks and boilers.
31 SCM... Total electrode length. CGL125… PROBES
A single pole probe with AISI 302 electrode, used for
level control on boilers and autoclaves and in general
wherever pressure is up to 10 bar maximum.
Threaded coupling: 3/8” GAS.
Cable connection: Threaded rod with nut.
Application: Tanks, pressurised tanks and boilers.
PS31 PROBE
A small electrode holder, complete with three AISI 304
stainless steel probes.
31 CGL125... Particularly suited to small containers whenever pressure
is maximum up to 2 bar.
Threaded coupling: 1/2” GAS.
Faston termination; related lugs supplied.
Application: Tanks and automatic dispensers.
PS3S ELECTRODE HOLDER

A thermoset resin electrode holder to be used with three
probes (rods probes to be ordered separately) and
complete with terminal cover.
31 PS31 Maximum operating temperature: +100°C.
2” GAS threaded coupling.
Cable connection: screw.
Application: tanks.

Certification obtained: EAC.
31 PS3S
19
Electrodes Order Rod probe length Qty Weight General characteristics

code per Stainless steel AISI 304 electrodes with 4M or 6M
pack threaded extremity suitable as extensions for SCM probe
or as rod probe for PS3S electrode holder.
[mm/in] n° [kg] For connecting SCM probes with electrode extension unit
For SCM probes. (ASTA...MM4), see page 19-9.
31 ASTA 46O MM4 460/18.11” 1 0.053
Certification
31 ASTA 96O MM4 960/37.8” 1 0.103 Certification obtained: EAC.
For PS3S electrode holder.
31 ASTA 46O MM6 460/18.11” 1 0.100
31 ASTA 96O MM6 960/37.8” 1 0.210
31 ASTA…
Dimensions
19-6 page 19-10
Level controls
Float switches
For grey water Order Cable Cable Counter- Qty Wt General characteristics
code material length weight Float switches are used in the automation of electrical
included equipment, such as: pumps, solenoid valves, alarms,
[m] n° [kg] motorised sluice gates, etc. All versions feature an
internal changeover contact operated in accordance with
LVFS P1 W 03 PVC 3 Yes 1 0.610 the level of liquid where the float is located. The cables
LVFS P1 W 05 PVC 5 Yes 1 0.830 used are high-quality and offer excellent mechanical and
LVFS P1 W 10 PVC 10 Yes 1 1.410 chemical resistance over time.
The cables are 3x1 type, that is 3 wires with section
LVFS P1 W 15 PVC 15 Yes 1 1.930 1mm2. This allows the user to choose the filling and
LVFS N1 W 05 Neoprene 5 Yes 1 0.880 emptying function during regulator wiring.
LVFS N1 W 10 Neoprene 10 Yes 1 1.510
LVFS N1 W 15 Neoprene 15 Yes 1 2.080 They are used for the civil and industrial control of levels
LVFS N1 W 20 Neoprene 20 Yes 1 2.480 of grey water, e.g. rainwater, groundwater or cooling
water from industry. They are available with PVC and
Filling function This function is achieved by connecting the neoprene cables of various lengths.
black and blue float terminals. The level – Activation angle -45°...+45°
Tank Tank regulator contact closes the lower circuit at – 130g external counterweight included
MAX Stop MAX Stop
minimum level and opens the circuit when – Float casing material: polypropylene
the float reaches the upper maximum level. – Cable A05 VV-F3X1 (PVC) available in lengths of 3, 5,
The MIN and MAX levels can be adjusted by 10 and 15m and cable H07 RN-F3X1 (Neoprene)
Start Start
MIN MIN varying the distance between counterweight available in lengths of 5, 10, 15 and 20m
and float. – Rated cable diameter: 9mm (PVC and Neoprene)
– Relay with changeover contact 10(8)A 250VAC
50/60Hz
45° 45° – Maximum installation depth: 30m
– Maximum pressure: 3bar
Start Stop – Operating temperature: 0…+50°C
– Storage temperature: -20…+70°C
Emptying function This function is achieved by connecting the – IEC degree of protection: IP68
black and brown float terminals. The level – Insulation class: II.
Tank Tank
regulator contact closes the upper circuit at
MAX MAX
maximum level and opens the circuit when Certifications and compliance
Start Start
the float reaches the lower minimum level. Certifications (pending): TÜV.
The MIN and MAX levels can be adjusted by Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60730-1,
Stop Stop
MIN MIN varying the distance between counterweight IEC/EN 60730-2-15.
and float.
45° 45°
Start Stop
For dirty water Order Cable Cable Counter- Qty Wt Operational characteristics
code material length weight These float switches are used for the civil and industrial
control of levels of dirty water, e.g. sewage or waste
[m] n° [kg] water from industry. The float switches comprises of a
one-piece external blow-moulded polypropylene casing,
LVFS N1 B 05 Neoprene 5 Internal 1 1.250 with fixed internal counterweight located in the cable exit
LVFS N1 B 10 Neoprene 10 Internal 1 1.860 area.
LVFS N1 B 15 Neoprene 15 Internal 1 2.460 The regulator contact is positioned centrally in its own
watertight chamber. This is insulated from the external
LVFS N1 B 20 Neoprene 20 Internal 1 3.060 casing by injecting closed-cell foam. This solution further
increases protection against moisture leakage and heat
insulates the watertight chamber housing the contact,
eliminating the creation of condensation. 19
– Activation angle -15°...+15°
– Internal counterweight
Filling function This function uses two floats and is achieved – Float casing material: polypropylene
by connecting the black and blue float – Cable H07 RN-F3X1 (Neoprene) available in lengths of
terminals. The MIN and MAX levels can be 5, 10, 15 and 20m
Tank Tank
MAX adjusted by varying the position of the floats. – Rated cable diameter: 9mm
MAX Stop Stop
– Relay with changeover contact 10(4)A 250VAC
50/60Hz
MIN
Start
MIN
Start – Maximum installation depth: 50m
– Maximum pressure: 5bar
15° 15° – Operating temperature: 0…+40°C
Start Stop – Storage temperature: -20…+70°C
– Insulation class: II.
Emptying function This function uses two floats and is achieved
by connecting the black and brown float Certifications and compliance
terminals. The MIN and MAX levels can be Certifications (pending): TÜV.
Tank Tank
adjusted by varying the position of the floats. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60730-1.
MAX Start MAX Start IEC/EN 60730-2-15.
Stop Stop
MIN MIN
15° 15°
Start Stop
PATENTED
It is possible to use even a single float for black water, adjusting the level in a fixed range of 10cm MAX, a solution which is not
advisable for turbulent waters.
Dimensions
page 19-10 19-7
Level controls
Start-up priority change relays
Modular version Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Weight General characteristics

code supply output per Priority change relays are designed to balance the
voltage contacts pack operating time, and hence the wear of pumps,
[V] n° [kg] compressors, generators, when two units, primary and
stand-by, are installed.
2 outputs. AC and DC supply voltage.
LVMP05 24/48VDC 2N/O (SPST) 1 0.090 Operational characteristics
24...240VAC – Operating limits: 0.85...1.1 Ue
– Connection: permanent
– Red LED indicators for output relay state
– Modular DIN 43880 housing (1 module)
IP20 on terminals.

LVMP05 Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Automatic starting control.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Weight General characteristics

[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] compressors, generators, when two units, primary and
2 outputs. AC supply voltage.
LVMP10 A024 24VAC 2 NO (SPST) 1 0.250 Operational characteristics
LVMP10 A127 110...127VAC 2 NO (SPST) 1 0.250 – Operating limits: 0.85...1.1 Ue
LVMP10 A240 220...240VAC 2 NO (SPST) 1 0.250 – Green LED indicator for power on
LVMP10 A415 380...415VAC 2 NO (SPST) 1 0.250 – Red LED indicators for output relay state
LVMP10... IP20 on terminals.

Canada (cULus-File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Automatic starting control.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Plug-in version Order Auxiliary Type of Qty Weight General characteristics

[V] 50/60Hz n° [kg] compressors, generators, when two units, primary and
2 outputs. AC supply voltage.
19 31 CSP2E 24 24VAC 2 NO (SPST) 1 0.150 Operational characteristics

– Operating limits: 0.85...1.1 Ue
31 CSP2E 110 110VAC 2 NO (SPST) 1 0.150
31 CSP2E 220 220VAC 2 NO (SPST) 1 0.150 – Voltage applied to input contacts: 15VDC not insulated
31 CSP2E 230 230...240VAC 2 NO (SPST) 1 0.150 at power supply.
– Current consumption, input contacts: about 1mA.
– 11-pin plug-in housing (sockets S11 or L48 P11 with
31 G216; see page 19-9).
31 CSP2E... – IEC degree of protection: IP30.


Level controls
Accessories
Accessories Order Description Qty Weight Operational characteristics

code per SOCKETS FOR INSTALLING PLUG-IN LEVEL CONTROL
pack RELAYS.
n° [kg] – max. wire section for sockets: 2x2.5mm2/2x14AWG
– tightening torque: 0.8Nm/7.1lbin.
31 RE213 Coupler unit for SCM 1 0.008
with electrode Certifications and compliance
extension ASTA...MM4 Certifications obtained: EAC.
31 S8 8-pin socket for screw 10 0.061 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61984, IEC/EN 61210,
31 RE213 fixing or mounting on IEC/EN 60999-1.
35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715), used
with LV1E... relay.
Screw terminals.
31 S11 11-pin socket for screw 10 0.064
fixing or mounting
on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715), used
with LV2E... and
31 S8 CSP2E... relays.
Screw terminals.
31 RE014 Relay-socket retention 10 0.001
bracket; S8 or S11
types only.
31 L48 P8 8-pin loose socket. 10 0.040
Screw terminals
31 L48P11 11-pin socket, loose. 10 0.048
Screw terminals
31 G216 Kit for flush mounting 1 0.080
31 S11 socketed relays
19
Dimensions
page 19-10 19-9
Level controls
LEVEL CONTROL AND START-UP PRIORITY CHANGE RELAYS

LVM25... - LVMP05 LVM20... LVM30... - LVM40... - LVMP10 LV1E... - LV2E... - CSP2E...
58 58 58
17.5 5 5 5
(2.28”) (2.28”) (2.28”)
(0.69”) (0.20”) 35.8 (0.20”) 53.5 ( (0.20”)
43.7 (1.41”) 43.7 (2.11”) 43.7
(1.72”) (1.72”) 38 27 70
(1.72”) (1.40”) (2.75”)
(1.07”)
(2.99”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
(4.12”)
(4.12”)
(3.54”)
(3.87”)
(1.77)
(3.87”)
104.7
(1.77)
(4.12”)
(3.54”)
104.7
(3.87”)
98.3
76
(1.77)
104.7
98.3
98.3
90
98.3
45
90
45
90
45
14 (0.55”)
59.9 97
59.9 (2.36”) Ø4.2 Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36”) (3.82”)
Ø4.2 (0.16”) (2.36”)
(LVM25... only) (0.16”) (LVM30... and LVM40... only)
(0.16”)
PROBES AND ELECTRODE HOLDERS FOR CONDUCTIVE LIQUIDS

SN1 SCM... CGL125... PS31 PS3S
19.5 M3.5
8 (0.77”)
(0.31”) 78 28
7 (0.27”) 40 20 (3.07”) (1.10”)
(2.09”)
(1.57”) (0.79”)
(1.85”)
(1.89”)
53
47
48
18 (0.71”)
21 (0.83”)
22 (0.87”) 25 (0.98”)
2" GAS
(0.90”)
(3.94”)
3/8" GAS 1/2" GAS

100
3/8" GAS
23
(1.38”)
35
L
TYPE L TYPE L
(11.81”)
SCM04 43 (1.69”) CGL125 3 327 (12.87”)
300
L
M4 SCM50 500 (19.68”) CGL125 5 500 (19.68”)

7 (0.27”)
SCM100 1000 (39.37”) CGL125 7 700 (27.56”)
CGL125 10 1000 (39.37”)
4 (0.16”)
6 (0.24”)
ELECTRODES Coupler unit

ASTA 460 MM4 ASTA 460 MM6 RE213
ASTA 960 MM4 ASTA 960 MM6
M4 M6 7 (0.27”)
M4
460 (18.11”) 960 (37.79”)
460 (18.11”) 960 (37.79”)
Ø4 Ø6
(0.79”)
(0.16”) (0.24”)
20
M4
7 (0.27”)
M4 M6
FLOAT SWITCHES
LVFS...W... LVFS N1 B...
43 (1.69”)
Ø81 (3.19”)
Cable Ø9 (0.35”)
100 (3.94”) 195 (7.68”)

92 (3.62”)
19
Cable Ø9 (0.35”)
100 (3.94”) 125 (4.92”)

153 (6.02”)
ACCESSORIES
S8 - S11 L48 P8 L48 P11 RE014
38 27 43.5 20.5 47 20.5 16
(1.50”) (1.06”) (1.71”) (0.81”) (1.85”) (0.81”) (0.63”)
(1.85”)
(1.30”)
(1.71”)
(1.30”)
43.5
47
33
33
(2.56”)
65
(3.07”)
78
(2.36”)
60
G216 Cutout 40.5

(1.59”)
48 21 72 39
(1.89”) (0.83”) (2.83”) (1.53”)
(3.38”)
(3.78”)
(2.99”)
86
96
76
Ø4
(0.16”)
19-10
Level controls
Wiring diagrams
Emptying function
LVM20 Emptying function with 3 electrodes Emptying function with 2 electrodes
COM
MAX
COM
MAX
MIN
MIN
LVM20
A1 A2 COM MAX MIN 12 14 11
24VAC
110-127VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
A2 A2
0VAC -MAX ON ON A1
A1
-MIN
-COM
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
Emptying or filling functions

LVM25 Emptying function (DOWN)
Connection with 3 electrodes Connection with 2 electrodes
LVM25
PROBE SIGNAL OR PROBE SIGNAL OR STARTING DELAY ❶
STARTING DELAY ❶ PROBE SIGNAL
COM
MAX
DELAY ❶
MIN
PROBE SIGNAL
COM
MAX
MIN
DELAY ❶
A1 A2 COM MAX MIN 12 14 11
24-240VAC/DC
0VAC -MAX
-MIN SUPPLY SUPPLY
-COM ON ON
RELAY RELAY
LVM30 24 24
❷ 21 21
22 22
LVM30
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
Delay for LVM30 only.

Changeover contact (SPDT) for LVM30 only.
A1 A3 A2 COM MAX MIN 12 14 11 22 24 21
220-240VAC
380-415VAC Filling function (UP)
24VAC Connection with 3 electrodes Connection with 2 electrodes
110-127VAC
0VAC -MAX PROBE SIGNAL OR

STARTING DELAY ❶ PROBE SIGNAL OR STARTING DELAY ❶
-MIN PROBE SIGNAL DELAY ❶
-COM
PROBE SIGNAL OR PROBE SIGNAL
STARTING DELAY ❶
COM
MAX
DELAY ❶
COM
MAX
MIN
19
SUPPLY SUPPLY
ON ON
RELAY RELAY
24 24
❷ 21 21
22 22
RELAY RELAY
14 14
11 11
12 12
Delay for LVM30 only.

Changeover contact (SPDT) for LVM30 only.
19-11
Level controls
Wiring diagrams
Multifunctions. Emptying function + alarms

LVM40
MAX 1
MAX 2
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
LVM40
A2
A1 A2 COM MIN2 MIN1 MAX1 MAX2 13 14 22 24 21 ON A1
24VAC 14
110-127VAC 13
220-240VAC
380-415VAC
-MAX2 24
0VAC -MAX1 21
-MIN1 22
-MIN2
-COM
Filling function + alarms
MAX 1
MAX 2
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
A2
ON A1
14
13
24
21
22
Emptying function + pump start change

MAX 1
MAX 2
MIN 1
MIN 2
COM
A2
ON A1
14
13
5 sec
24
21
22
Filling function + pump start change

MAX 2
MAX 1
MIN 2
MIN 1
COM
A2
ON A1
19 14
13
5 sec
24
21
22
Filling tank and draining well function + alarm

MAX 1
MIN 1
COM
Tank
MAX 2
MIN 2
COM
Well
A2
ON A1
14
Probe signal + starting delay. 13
Probe signal delay. 24

21
22
19-12
Level controls
Wiring diagrams
Emptying function
LV1E Emptying function with 3 electrodes Emptying function with 2 electrodes
LV1E
COM
MAX
COM
MAX
MIN
6 5 1 8 7 2 3 4
24VAC
110-120VAC LV1E LV1E
220-240VAC -MAX 5
5
380-415VAC -MIN 6
6
0VAC -COM
RELAY RELAY
LV2E
LV2E 3 3
4 4
2 2
LV2E LV2E
9-10 9-10
11 11
9 10 11 7 5 6 4 3 1
RELAY RELAY
48VAC
220-240VAC
380-415VAC 3 3
1 1
24VAC 4 4
110-120VAC -MAX
220-240VAC -MIN
0VAC -COM
Priority change relays

LVMP05
A1 13 A1
Relay Relay A2
1 2
ON
A2 14 24
14
13
24
13
LVMP10
2-wire connection
A1 14 24 A2
ON
A1
Relay 1 Relay 2
C1 C
S1
A2 C S1 S2 C R1 R2 13 23
C2 C
C1 C2
S2
13
RELAY 1 14
C1 = Primary 23
C2 = Secondary / Standby RELAY 2 24
DELAY
3-wire connection
A1 14 24
ON
A2
A1 19
Relay 1 Relay 2
C1 C
S1
A2 C S1 S2 C R1 R2 13 23
C3 C
C1 C2 C3 C4 R1
C2 C
S2
C4 C
R2
C1 = Start Primary RELAY 1

13
14
C2 = Start Standby
C3 = Stop Primary 23
RELAY 2
C4 = Stop Standby 24
DELAY
CSP2E
F1 24VAC 110VAC
220VAC 230-240VAC
2 1 11
CSP2E
Relay 1 Relay 2
10 4 6 8 5 7 3 9
C1 C2
FR1 FR2
C1 = PRIMARY
C2 = SECONDARY/STANDBY K1 K2
MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2
19-13
Level controls
TYPE LVM20... LVM25... LVM30... LVM40...

DESCRIPTION
Modular
Automatic reset
Single voltage Multi voltage Dual voltage Single voltage
Application (examples) Emptying Emptying or filling Emptying or filling Multifunctions
function function function
Operating principle Electrical conductivity of liquids

AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Supply voltage Us 24VAC 24...240VAC/DC 24/220...240VAC 24VAC
110...127VAC 110...127/380...415VAC 110...127VAC
220...240VAC 220...240VAC
380...415VAC 380...415VAC
Operating voltage range 0.85...1.1 Ue; 50/60Hz ±5%

Power consumption (maximum) 3.5VA 3VA 5.5VA 4.5VA
Power dissipation (maximum) 1.8W 1.2W 2.8W 2.8W
OUTPUTS
Number of connectable electrodes 3 3 3 5
Type of electrode Electrode and electrode holders: SN1 / SCM / CGL / PS31 / PS3S or similar
Electrode voltage 7.5VAC 5VPP 7.5VAC 5VPP
Sensitivity 2.5...50kΩ 2.5...100kΩ 2.5...50kΩ 2.5...200kΩ
TIME DELAYS
Tripping time (minimum) ≤600ms ≤1s 1s 1s
Resetting time (minimum) ≤750ms ≤1s 1s 1s
Probe tripping delay –– –– OFF...10s 1...10s
Relay energising delay –– –– OFF...300s 0...30min
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 1 1 1 2
Relay state Normally de-energised, energises at tripping
Contact arrangement 1 changeover / SPDT 1 changeover / SPDT 2 changeover / SPDT each 1 changeover / SPDT and
1 with 1 N/O - SPST
Rated utilisation voltage 250VAC
IEC conventional free air thermal 8A
current Ith
designation
Indications 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED indicator for power on green LED indicator for power on
1 red LED for relay state 1 red LED for relay state 1 red LED for relay state 2 red LEDs for relay state
2 red LEDs for probe state
INSULATION
19 IEC rated insulation

voltage Ui
415VAC 240VAC 415VAC 415VAC
IEC rated impulse wihstand 6kV 4kV 6kV 6kV

voltage Uimp
IEC power frequency withstand 4kV 2kV 4kV 4kV
voltage
Double insulation ≤250VAC ≤250VAC ≤250VAC ≤250VAC
Supply/relay/electrode
CONNECTIONS
Tightening torque maximum 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin er UL/CSA)
Conductor section min-max 0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature –20...+60 °C
Storage temperature –30...+80 °C
HOUSING
Typical configuration LVM20 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes LVM25 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes
(examples) LVM30 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes LVM40 + n° 5 SN1 electrodes
Maximum cable length
Double insulaton between supply, electrodes and output relay circuit.
Voltage applied to input contacts, not insulated at power supply.
Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.
19-14
Level controls
LV1E... LV2E... LVMP 05 LVMP 10 CSP2E
Plug-in Modular Modular Plug-in

Automatic resetting Automatic resetting –– –– ––
Single voltage Dual voltage Multistage Single voltage Single voltage
– Minimum-maximum level threshold Priority change relay for motors
– Maintains level between minimum and maximum
– Protection against dry pump running
Electrical conductivity of liquids ––
24VAC 24/48VAC 24...48VDC 24VAC 24VAC

110...120VAC 110...120VAC/220...240VAC 24....240VAC 110...127VAC 110VAC
220...240VAC 220...240VAC/380...415VAC 220...240VAC 230/240VAC
380...415VAC 380...415VAC
0.8...1.1 Ue 50/60Hz
5.5VA 1.6VA 4.8VA 5VA
2.8W 0.9W 3W 3W
3 –– –– ––
Electrode and electrode holders: SN1 / SCM / CGL / PS31 / PS3S / or similar –– –– ––
9VAC (voltage between probes) –– –– ––
7...8 kΩ fixed –– –– ––
≤50ms –– –– ––
≤100ms –– –– ––
–– –– –– ––
–– –– –– ––
1 2 2 2
Normally de-energised, energises at tripping
1 changeover contact / SPDT 1 N/O - SPST 1 N/O - SPST 1 N/O - SPST

380VAC –– –– ––
5A 8A 8A 5A
B300 B300 B300 B300
2.5x105 cycles 105 cycles 105 cycles 105 cycles

6 6 6
50x10 cycles 30x10 cycles 30x10 cycles 30x106 cycles
1 red LED for 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on 1 green LED for power on
relay tripping 1 red LED for relay state 1 red LED for relay state 1 red LED for relay state

19
5kV 4kV 4kV 4kV
2kV 2kV 2.5kV 2.5kV
––
–– 0.8Nm (7lbin; 7-9lbin er UL/CSA) ––

–– 0.2-4.0mm2 (24-12AWG; 18-12 AWG per UL/CSA) ––
-20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
Self-extinguishing polycarbonate Self-extinguishing polyamide Self-extinguishing polyamide Self-extinguishing polycarbonate

LV1E + n° 3 SN1 electrode –– –– ––
LV2E + n° 2 SN1 electrodes + reset button
500m/547yd single-core, double insulated cables –– –– ––
19-15
Page 20-4 Page 20-4
MICRO PLCs EXPANSION AND COMMUNICATION MODULES

• 10 Inputs/Outputs (LRD10...) • 4 digital inputs / 4 digital outputs
• 12 Inputs/Outputs (LRD12...) • Analog inputs, 0...10V or 0...20mA
• 20 Inputs/Outputs (LRD20...) • Analog outputs, 0...10V or 0...20mA
• 12VDC, 24VDC, 24VAC or 100...240VAC • Relay or transistor outputs
power supply • PT100 temperature sensor inputs
• Relay or transistor outputs. • Modbus-RTU protocol slave communication unit
• 24VDC, 24VAC or 100...240VAC power supply.
Page 20-5 Page 20-5
ACCESSORIES STARTER AND TRAINING KITS

• Program backup memory • Complete kit to begin using micro PLCs,
• Programming and supervision software each equipped with LRD relay,
• Power supply unit programming-supervision software and
USB connecting cable
• HMI operator panel with graphic LCD.
• Training kits complete with micro PLC and
inputs/outputs simulation board.
Micro PLCs 20
10, 12 and 20 Input-Output base

modules
Expansion modules with 4 digital
Inputs and 4 digital Outputs
Expansion modules for analog
Inputs-Outputs
Modbus-RTU slave
communication module
RS232/USB serial interface port for
PC, HMI operator panel or program
backup memory connection
On-board programming languages:
Italian, English, Spanish, French,
German, Portuguese and Chinese
PC programming languages:
Italian, English and Spanish.
SEC. - PAGE
Micro PLCs
Base modules .................................................................................................................................................................. 20 - 4
Expansion and communication modules.......................................................................................................................... 20 - 4
Accessories ................................................................................................................. 20 - 5
Starter and training kits .................................................................................................. 20 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 20 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 20 - 7
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Micro PLCs
MICRO PLC - EXCEPTIONAL PERFORMANCE!

SYSTEM CONTROL AND SUPERVISION
- Contact status viewing in simple and small screen display
- Possibility to add the micro PLC to systems integrated on
data networks. By using supervision and energy
management software, a multiclient structure can also be
managed through Web interface.
QUICK CONTROL BOARD INSTALLATION

- Fewer number of components
- Less wiring with minor number of connections.
REPETITIVENESS
- Less errors during panel building
- Considerable time saving.
FLEXIBILITY
- Quick correction of abnormal conditions at final testing
- Fast changes on control boards.
FUNCTION BLOCKS AND MEMORY PROGRAM SIZE

Timer (T) 31 Language
(delay on/off, recycle, pulsing, ...) LADDER (contact scheme) 300 lines
Real Time Clock (RTC) 31 FBD (function blocks) 260 blocks
(daily, weekly, monthly and yearly mode)
Counter (C) 31
Analog comparator (G) 31
User’s pages (H) - 16 characters - 4 lines 31
Auxiliary relay - Scratchpad (M + N memory types) 63 + 63
Arithmetic operation: addition/subtraction and multiplication/division 31 + 31
Data register (DR) 240
Saving can be in memory storage of:
- Auxiliary relay
- Counter value
- Data register.
FUNCTIONS
PWM OUTPUT MULTIPLEXER

Pulse train generation with Selection of 1 of 4 values based
A
programmable pulse time and on the combination of two digital signals
20 frequency
B
C
B
D
HIGH SPEED INPUT SHIFT FUNCTION - activation of pulsed outputs in sequence

Out 1
2
3
Position and speed
detection 4
PID BOOLEAN LOGIC BLOCKS

IN: Heating switch on and required
Output activation based on
temperature setting
a series of digital signals In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4 Out
OUT: Current room temperature
INc: Measured room temperature in an
exact spot
OUTc: Temperature adjusting and
controlling. ... ... ... ...
20-2
Micro PLCs
OPERATOR PANEL LRX P01
HMI INTERFACE
LRX P01 is an HMI operator panel, used with many types of PLCs or
other intelligent controllers equipped with communication port.
By using the HMI, the values of both PLC inner registers and relay status
can be monitored and changed with the keys or LEDs.
In this way, for machinery and equipment functioning results to be simple
and direct.
The LRX SW P01 editor software permits to make dedicated screens by
taking advantage of the graphic display to view bitmaps, bar graphs and
trend lines.
BACKLIGHT 192x64 PIXEL GRAPHIC LCD
Read numerical Static Dynamic

values text text Read status (bits) Commands
Images Display bar graphs and trend lines Write numerical values
COMMUNICATION MODES
LRX P01 supports Modbus-RTU protocol and RS232 or RS485 communication

modes can be chosen.
Micro PLCs Micro PLCs Power Generating set controllers

analyzers
RS232 20
RS485
Soft starters Variable speed Power factor Automatic transfer

drives controllers switch controllers
20-3
Micro PLCs
Base modules Order Auxiliary In/Out Qty Wt General characteristics

code supply per FUNCTIONS
voltage pkg – Addition-Subtraction on variables
n° [kg] – Multiplication-Division on variables
– Comparator on variables
Base modules. – HMI display for parameter viewing and programming
LRD12R D024 24VDC 8/4 relay 1 0.241 – PWM output
LRD12T D024 24VDC 8/4 transistor 1 0.220 – High speed input (1kHz)
– PID function
LRD20R D024 24VDC 12/8 relay 1 0.360 – Multiplexer
LRD12R A024 24VAC 8/4 relay 1 0.250 – Analog ramp
LRD20R A024 24VAC 12/8 relay 1 0.368 – Register transfer (numerical variables and status)
LRD10... – Shift function
LRD10R A240 100...240VAC 6/4 relay 1 0.242 – Boolean logic blocks
LRD12...
LRD20R A240 100...240VAC 12/8 relay 1 0.367 – LRD20R D024 P1 with RS485 port onboard.
LRD20R D012 12VDC 12/8 relay 1 0.360
Base modules with RS485 onboard. – 8A Ith current relay outputs for AC and DC versions
LRD20R D024 P1 24VDC 12/8 relay 1 0.360 – 0.3A 24VDC transistor outputs for DC version
Inputs/Outputs. – 0...10V analog inputs for DC version
– Version: modular for mounting on 35mm DIN rail
(IEC/EN 60715) or M4x15mm screw fixing
– Type of terminal: Screw

Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada
LRD20R D024 P1 (cULus - File E300049), as Programmable Controllers.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61131-2, UL508, CSA
C22.2 n°142.
Expansion and Order Auxiliary In/Out Qty Wt
communication modules code supply per
voltage pkg
n° [kg]
Expansion and communication modules.
LRE02A D024 24VDC 2 analog outputs 1 0.160
0...10V/0...20mA
LRE04A D024 24VDC 4 analog outputs 1 0.160
0...10V/0...20mA
LRE04P D024 24VDC 4 PT100 temp. 1 0.160
sensor inputs
LRE08R D024 24VDC 4/4relay 1 0.171
LRE08T D024 24VDC 4/4 transistor 1 0.151
LRE... LRE08R A024 24VAC 4/4 relay 1 0.180
LRE08R A240 100...240VAC 4/4 relay 1 0.180
LRE P00 Modbus-RTU protocol 1 0.134
communication unit
Inputs/Outputs.
The expansion modules are supplied with connector for base module.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS REFERENCE TABLE

BASE MODULES BASE +
DIGITAL EXPANSIONS
20 Type Power supply Inputs Outputs Max I/O
LRD12RD024 24VDC 6 digital + 2 digital/analog 4 relay 12 + 24
LRD12TD024 24VDC 6 digital + 2 digital/analog 4 transistor 12 + 24
LRD20RD024P1 24VDC 8 digital + 4 digital/analog 8 relay 20 + 24
LRD10RA240 100...240VAC 6 digital 4 relay 10 + 24
LRD20RA240 100...240VAC 12 digital 8 relay 20 + 24
LRD12RA024 24VAC 8 digital 4 relay 12 + 24
LRD20RA024 24VAC 12 digital 8 relay 20 + 24
EXPANSION AND COMMUNICATION MODULES
LRE02AD024 24VDC –– 2 analog ––
LRE04AD024 24VDC 4 analog –– ––
LRE04PD024 24VDC 4 PT100 –– ––
LRE08RD024 24VDC 4 digital 4 relay ––
LRE08TD024 24VDC 4 digital 4 transistor ––
LRE08RA240 100...240VAC 4 digital 4 relay ––
LRE08RA024 24VAC 4 digital 4 relay ––
LREP00 24VDC RS485 Modbus-RTU protocol slave communication unit
Expansion modules supplied at 24VDC.

20-4 page 20-6 page 20-7 page 20-8
Micro PLCs
Accessories Order Description Qty Wt Power supply unit and backup memory general
code per characteristics
pkg – The LRX 1V3 D024 power supply produces a
n° [kg] direct-current voltage to power the LRD base and
expansion modules in circumstances when 24VDC is
LRX M00 Program backup memory 1 0.011 not available in the application. The power supply can
LRX C00 PC (RS232)-LRD 1 0.083 also be used to power eventual 24VDC auxiliary
programming cable circuits.
LRX C03 PC (USB)-LRD 1 0.080 – The LRX M00 backup memory allows to save the
programming cable and user’s program and to simply and quickly transfer it
LRX P01 (RS232)-LRD to the base modules.
LRX 1V3 D024 direct connection
HMI panel LRX P01 general characteristics
LRX SW Programming and 1 0.057 – 24VDC power supply
supervision software – RS232 communication port:
(CD-ROM) • Direct connection to LRD using LRX C00
LRX 1V3 D024 Power supply unit, 1 0.220 • Connection to other devices using a standard
100...240VAC/24VDC, 1.3A D-SUB 9 serial cable
LRX C03 LRX D00 User’s manual Italian 1 0.400 – RS485 communication port
edition (paper) – LRX SW P01 editor software for specific pages and
easy use
LRX D01 User’s manual English 1 0.400 – IEC degree of protection: IP65.
edition (paper) FUNCTIONS
LRX D02 User’s manual Spanish 1 0.400 – Send commands
edition (paper) – Read status
LRX D03 User’s manual French 1 0.400 – Provide static and dynamic texts
edition (paper) – Write variables
LRX P01 – Read variables:
LRX P01 HMI operator panel, 1 0.200 • Numerical value
24VDC, RS232, RS485 • Bar graph
(Modbus-RTU Master) • Trend line.
LRX C02 PC-LRX P01 1 0.180
programming cable Programming
LRX SW P01 LRX P01 editor software 1 0.057 At any time and with extreme simplicity, LRD can be set
(CD-ROM) up and reprogrammed to satisfy new requirements and
LRX C02
improve the operation of a system.
Programming is simple and intuitive and can be done
directly on the base module keypad or by personal
Starter and training kits Order Description Qty Wt computer, connected by LRX C00 (RS232) or LRX C03
code per (USB) interface and using the relative LRX SW software.
pkg With a personal computer, two programming language
n° [kg] locs can be used: FBD (Function Block Diagrams) and
Starter and training kits. LADDER (contact scheme).
Both of the following can be accomplished:
LRDKIT 12R D024 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424 – Simulate the program directly “off-line” on a personal
with LRD12R D024 base computer to test if it runs correctly.
module, LRX SW software – Use the supervision mode to check the project
and LRX C03 cable “on-line”.
LRDKIT 12R A024 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424 There are 8 function keys on front, dedicated to on-
with LRD12R A024 base board adjustment, control and supervision of digital
module, LRX SW software input and output status, analog input values, time and
and LRX C03 cable date entry and the operation status of the micro PLC
LRDKIT 10R A240 LRD starter kit complete 1 0.424 itself.
with LRD10R A240 base
module, LRX SW software Certifications and compliance
and LRX C03 cable Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada
(cULus - File E300049), as Programmable Controllers for
Training kits. power supply and HMI units and base module of kits.
LRD DEM 12R D024 Training kit with 1 0.920 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61131-2, UL508,
LRD12R D024 mounted CSA C22.2 n°142.
on inputs/outputs 20
simulation board
LRD DEM 20R D024 Training kit with 1 1.060
LRD20R D024 mounted
on inputs/outputs
LRD DEM...
simulation board
Maximum combinations
+ - I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4 In pu t X1 X2 X3 X4
4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC 4x AC
L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V L N AC 100~2 40V
Run Run Run Run Run Run Run Run
Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A Ou tput 4 x Re lay / 8A
Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4 Y3 Y4
Base unit 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 PT100 2 outputs, 2 outputs, 4 inputs, RS485
12 inputs + + + temperature 0...10V or 0...10V or 0...10V or Modbus-RTU
+ 4 outputs 4 outputs 4 outputs sensor inputs 0...20mA 0...20mA 0...20mA (slave)
8 outputs
• 24 digital inputs (4 configurable as analog 0...10V input) • 4 analog outputs configurable as 0...10V or 0/4...20mA
• 20 digital outputs (relay, transistor or mixed) • 4 analog inputs configurable as 0...10V or 0/4...20mA
• 4 analog inputs for PT100 temperature sensors • 1 RS485 communication module.
N.B. The sequence and the maximum number of the products given above must be respected for correct operation.

page 20-6 page 20-7 page 20-9 20-5
Micro PLCs
BASE MODULES
LRD10... - LRD12... LRD20...
5 54.6 (2.15”) 5 54.6 (2.15”)
72 (2.83”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”) 126 (4.96”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”)
106 (4.17”)
106 (4.17”)
45 (1.77”)
98 (3.86”)
68 (2.68”)
90 (3.54”)
98 (3.86”)
45 (1.77”)
90 (3.54”)
68 (2.68”)
Ø4.5 Ø4.5
(0.18”) 80 (3.15”)
(0.18”)

LRE... expansion/communication modules
38 5 54.3 (2.14”)
8 (1.50”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”)
(0.31”)
106 (4.17”)
98 (3.86”)
90 (3.54”)
45 (1.77”)
68 (2.68”)
Ø4.5
(0.18”)
ACCESSORIES
LRX1V3 D024 power supply unit
72 (2.83”) 5 52.3 (2.06”)
60 (2.36”) (0.20”) 44.3 (1.74”)
97.9 (3.85”)
106 (4.17”)
45 (1.77”)
68 (2.68”)
90 (3.54”)
Ø4.5
(0.18”)
LRX P01 HMI operator panel Cutout

165 (6.50”)
179.5 (7.07”)
85.5 (3.37”)
101.5(4.00”)
87 (3.42”)
5.5
(0.22”)
163.5 (6.44”)
33
(1.30”)
20
20-6
Micro PLCs
Wiring diagrams
BASE MODULES
LRD12R D024 LRD12T D024 LRD12R A024 LRD10R A240
24VDC DIGITAL 24VDC DIGITAL
24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 24VAC 24VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 + – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT
INPUT INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
+ – + – + – + –
24VDC
LRD20R D012 - LRD20R D024 LRD20R D024 P1

24VDC DIGITAL 24VDC DIGITAL
24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG RS485
+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A1 A2 A3 A4 + – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A B
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG
INPUT INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
12VDC for LRD20R D012.
LRD20R A024 LRD20R A240

24VAC 24VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC L N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT

LRE02A D024 LRE04A D024 LRE04P D024 LRE08R D024
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
+ – + – + – + – X1 X2 X3 X4
DIGITAL INPUT
RELAY OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT PT100 TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
C1 V1 I1 C2 V2 I2 C1 V1 I1 C2 V2 I2 C3 V3 I3 C4 V4 I4 A1 B1 b1 A2 B2 b2 A3 B3 b3 A4 B4 b4
LRE08T D024 LRE08R A024 LRE08R A240

24VDC 24VDC 24VAC 24VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
+ – X1 X2 X3 X4 L N X1 X2 X3 X4 L N X1 X2 X3 X4
DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT

TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
+ – + – + – + –
24VDC
ACCESSORIES
LRX 1V3 D024 LRE P00 LRX P01
100...240VAC 24VDC
L N + –
RS232
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

COM1
20
+ + – – A B S + – A B S
24VDC - 1.3A RS485 24VDC RS485
20-7
Micro PLCs
BASE MODULES LRD... D012 LRD... D024 LRD... A024 LRD... A240
POWER SUPPLY
IEC rated voltage Ue (frequency range) 12VDC 24VDC 24VAC (50...60Hz) 100...240VAC (50...60Hz)
Operating limits 10.4...14.4VDC 20.4...28.8VDC 20.4...28.8VAC (47...63Hz) 85...265VAC (47...63Hz)
Average current consumption 265mA 125mA (LRD12...) 290mA 100mA
185mA (LRD20...)
DIGITAL INPUTS
Rated voltage 12VDC 24VDC 24VAC (50-60Hz) 100-240VAC (50-60Hz)
Input voltage State 0 <2.5VDC <5VDC <6VAC <40VAC
State 1 >7.5VDC >15VDC >14VAC >79VAC
Delay time 0 to 1 4ms 4ms 90ms 50/45ms (Ue=120VAC) -
(0.5ms for high speed) (0.5ms for high speed) 22/18ms (Ue=240VAC)
1 to 0 4ms 4ms 90ms 50/45ms (Ue=120VAC) -
(0.3ms for high speed) (0.3ms for high speed) 90/85ms (Ue=240VAC)
ANALOG INPUTS FOR DC VERSIONS ONLY
Input signal range 0...10V –– ––
Display resolution 0.01V –– ––
Conversion 12bit –– ––
Current consumption at 10VDC <0.17mA –– ––
Input impedance >40kΩ –– ––
Admissible overload 14VDC 28VDC –– ––
Sampling time 5...20ms (LADDER); 2...10ms (FBD) –– ––
Maximum cable length ≤30m/98ft of screened type –– ––
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Type of output / IEC rated current Ith Relay / 8A (LDR...R... / LRE08R... only)
Transistor / 0.3A 24VDC (LRD...T... / LRE08T... only)
Applied voltage Max 265VAC/30VDC (LDR...R... / LRE08R... only)
10...28.8VDC (LRD...T... / LRE08T... only)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Relative humidity 20...90% without condensation
HOUSING
Version Modular for mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or M4x15mm screw fixing
Connections Type of terminal Screw
Conductor section 0.14...2.5mm2 / 26...14AWG
Tightening torque 0.6Nm / 0.4lbft
Maximum cable length ≤100m/328ft
EXPANSION MODULES LRE02A D024 LRE04A D024 LRE04P D024

POWER SUPPLY
IEC rated voltage Ue 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
Operating limits 20.4...28.8VDC 20.4...28.8VDC 20.4...28.8VDC
ANALOGIC INPUTS/OUTPUTS
20 Type of channels 2 outputs configurable 4 outputs configurable 4 inputs for
for voltage or current for voltage or current PT100 temperature sensors
Operating limits 0...10V 0...20mA 0...10V -100...+600°C
Display resolution 0.00...10.00V 0.00...20.00mA 0.00...10.00V -100.0...+600.0°C
Resolution 10mV 40μA 10mV 0.1°C
Accuracy ±2.5% ±2.5% ±1%
Power consumption 70mA 70mA 70mA
COMMUNICATION MODULE LRE P00

IEC rated voltage Ue 24VDC
RS485 connection Isolated
Baud rate 4800...38400bps
Terminator resistor Integrated 120Ohm
Cable length 0.14...1.5mm2 (26...16AWG)
Tightening torque 0.6Nm (5.4lb-in)
20-8
Micro PLCs
HMI OPERATOR PANEL LRX P01

SUPPLY
IEC rated voltage Ue 24VDC
Operating limits 20.4…26.4 VDC (-15%...+10%)
Power consumption 1.9 W
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature 0…+55°C
Storage temperature -40…+70°C
Altitude ≤2000m
Relative humidity 10…95% (non-condensing)
Maximum pollution degree 2 (IEC/EN 61131-3)
Vibration resistance 15g
Shock resistance 0.5g
Conductor section 0.4…3.3 mm² (22-12 AWG)
Tightening torque 1.8 Nm / 10.4 lbin
POWER SUPPLY UNIT LRX 1V3D024

IEC rated voltage Ue 100...240VAC
Current consumption 0.85A
Output current 1.3A, 24VDC
Cable length 0.14...1.5mm2 (26...16AWG)
Tightening torque 0.6Nm (5.4lb-in)
20
20-9
POWER SUPPLIES MODULAR AND DIN RAIL POWER SUPPLIES DIN RAIL MOUNT VERSION REDUNDANCY MODULES
MOUNT VERSIONS • Single, two and three phase • Modular and 35mm DIN rail mount
• Single phase • Output voltage: 24 or 48VDC • Output voltage: 12 or 24VDC
• Output voltage: 12 or 24VDC • Output power: 5...960W. • Output current: 10 or 20A.
• Output power: 10...100W.
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES 21
Versions: modular and 35mm DIN

rail mount
Output voltage adjustment by front
potentiometer
Short-circuit protection
Built-in input voltage surge
suppressor
Used as power supply for DC
electromechanical and electronic
equipment
Redundancy modules
SEC. - PAGE
Modular switching power supplies
Single phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 2
DIN rail mount switching power supplies
Single phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Two phase ......................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Three phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Redundancy modules ..................................................................................................... 21 - 3
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 21 - 4
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 21 - 5
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Switching power supplies
DIN rail mount
Modular version Order code Rated Rated Output Qty Wt General characteristics
output output power per Switching power supplies transform an AC input voltage
voltage current pkg into a DC output one. This type of equipment is used in
[V] [A] [W] n° [kg] industrial and domestic automation fields. The power
supplies are equipped with switching technology offering
Single phase. very high efficiency in an extremely compact size.
PSL1M 010 12 12VDC 0.83 10 1 0.114 Dimensions are compatible with modular consumer
PSL1M 024 12 2 24 1 0.177 panels and its plastic housing is suitable for building
automation installations as well as industrial automation
PSL1M 033 12 2.75 33 1 0.248 applications.
PSL1M 054 12 4.5 54 1 0.311 The wide range of power supply voltages and the choice
PSL1M 072 12 6 72 1 0.443 of DC current outputs provide for the best adaptability to
supply voltage needs of the most common electronic and
PSL1M 010 24 24VDC 0.42 10 1 0.114 electromechanical devices.
PSL1M 010...
PSL1M 024 24 1 24 1 0.177
PSL1M 036 24 1.5 36 1 0.248 Protections:
– Short circuit
PSL1M 060 24 2.5 60 1 0.311 – Overload
PSL1M 100 24 4.2 100 1 0.443 – Input voltage peaks.
Indications:
– LED indicator for low voltage conditions
– LED indicator for power on.
– Rated supply voltage: 100...240VAC
– Rated output voltage: 12VDC for PSL1M...12 types;
24VDC for PSL1M...24 types
PSL1M 033 12 – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
PSL1M 036 24 – Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer
– High efficiency up to 89%
– 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting
– Screw connection terminals
– Modular DIN 43880 housing; number of modules:
• 1 for PSL1M 010...
• 2 for PSL1M 024...
• 3 for PSL1M 033 12 and PSL1M 036 24
• 4 for PSL1M 054 12 and PSL1M 060 24
• 5 for PSL1M 072 12 and PSL1M 100 24
– IEC degree of protection: IP20 on terminals.

Canada (cULus-File E318016) as Power Supplies in power
circuit and motor-mounted apparatus category.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 107-1.
21

21-2 page 21-4 page 21-5 page 21-6
DIN rail mount.
Redundancy modules
Din Rail mount version Order code Rated Rated Output Qty Wt General characteristics
output output power per This type of equipment is used to power supply
voltage current pkg electromechanical and electronic devices with DC control,
[V] [A] [W] n° [kg] such as contactors, time relays, sensors, PLCs, DC
motors, displays, SSRs and other equipment normally
Single phase. found in automation systems and networks.
PSL1 005 24 24VDC 0.21 5 1 0.190
Protections:
PSL1 010 24 0.42 10 1 0.196 – Short circuit
PSL1 018 24 0.75 18 1 0.226 – Overload
PSL1 030 24 1.25 30 1 0.336 – Input voltage peaks.
PSL1 005 24 PSL1 030... PSL1 060 24 2.5 60 1 0.400 Indications:
PSL1 010 24 PSL1 060... PSL1 100 24 4.2 100 1 0.508 – LED indicator for low voltage conditions
PSL1 018 24 – LED indicator for power on.
PSL1 120 24 5 120 1 1.018
PSL1 240 24 10 240 1 1.486 Operational characteristics
– Rated supply voltage:
PSL1 300 24 12.5 300 1 1.496 100...240VAC (PSL1 005...PSL1 100)
PSL1 480 24 20 480 1 2.348 115...230VAC self-configurable (PSL1 120...PSL1 480)
PSL1 030 48 48VDC 0.625 30 1 0.336 400...500VAC (PSL2... and PSL3...)
– Rated output voltage: 24VDC (PSL...24) / 48VDC
PSL1 060 48 1.25 60 1 0.400 (PSL...48)
PSL1 100 48 2.1 100 1 0.508 – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
PSL1 100... PSL1 240... PSL1 120 48 2.5 120 1 1.018 – Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer
PSL1 120... PSL1 300... – PFC function for types:
PSL1 240 48 5 240 1 1.486 PSL1 120 24...PSL3 960 24
PSL1 300 48 6.25 300 1 1.496 PSL1 120 48...PSL3 960 48
PSL1 480 48 10 480 1 2.348 – Parallel connection for types: PSL1 120 24, PSL1 240 24,
PSL1 300 24, PSL1 480 24, PSL2 100 24, PSL3 240 24,
Two phase. PSL3 480 24, PSL3 960 24, PSL1 120 48, PSL1 240 48,
PSL2 100 24 24VDC 4.2 100 1 0.570 PSL1 300 48, PSL1 480 48, PSL2 100 48, PSL3 240 48,
PSL2 100 48 48VDC 2.1 100 1 0.570 PSL3 480 48, PSL3 960 48
– High efficiency up to 92%
Three phase. – 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting
PSL1 480 24 PSL3 120 24 24VDC 5 120 1 0.910 – Screw connection terminals
PSL1 480 48 – Plastic or metal housing depending on type
PSL3 240 24 10 240 1 1.190
PSL3 480 24 20 480 1 1.995
PSL3 960 24 40 960 1 3.672 Certifications and compliance
PSL3 240 48 48VDC 5 240 1 1.190 Canada (cULus-File E318016) as Power Supplies in power
PSL3 480 48 10 480 1 1.995 circuit and motor-mounted apparatus category.
PSL3 960 48 20 960 1 3.672 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1,
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
Two-phase connection is admissible with a 25% output power derating. CSA C22.2 n° 107.1.
PSL3 960...
Redundancy modules Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics

output output per They are used for the redundancy connection of two or
voltage current pkg more power supplies to enhance the reliability of the DC
supply. The redundancy modules ensure a perfect
[V] [A] n° [kg] insulation between the power supplies connected.
PSLRM 10 24 12...24VDC 10 1 0.075
PSLR 20 24 24VDC 20 1 0.210 Indications (only for PSLR 20 24):
– LED indicator for DC voltage within limit
– Alarm relay.
Indications (PSLR 20 24) Operational characteristics

– Rated input voltage:
PSLR M1024
Input Input LED LED Relay Relay 12...24VDC (PSLRM 10 24)
voltage A voltage B A B A B 24VDC (PSLR 20 24)
Within limits Within limits ON ON Energ. Energ. – Rated input current:
Within limits <MIN or >MAX ON OFF Energ. De-energ. 10A (PSLRM 10 24)
20A (PSLR 20 24)
<MIN or >MAX Within limits OFF ON De-energ. Energ. – Maximum input current (for channel): 21
<MIN or >MAX <MIN or >MAX OFF OFF De-energ. De-energ. 8A per 300s(PSLRM 10 24)
16A per 300s (PSLR 20 24)
– Rated output current :
10A (PSLRM 10 24)
20A (PSLR 20 24)
– Maximum output current:
PSLR 2024
16A per 300s (PSLRM 10 24)
30A per 300s (PSLR 20 24)
– Modular housing DIN 43880 2 modules (PSLRM 10 24)
– 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting (PSLR 20 24)
– Screw connection terminals
– Plastic or metal housing depending on type

Certifications obtained: cULus (only for PSLR 20 24), EAC.
IEC/EN 61000-4-2, IEC/EN 61000-4-3, IEC/EN 61000-4-4,
IEC/EN 61000-4-6, IEC/EN 61000-4-8, UL 508 (only for
PSLR 20 24).

page 21-4 page 21-5 page 21-7 21-3
MODULAR SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

PSL1M 010... PSL1M 024... PSL1M 033 12 - PSL1M 036 24
50.6 50.6 50.6
(1.99”) (1.99”) (1.99”)
44 35 44 53 44
18 5.6 (1.73”) (1.38”) 5.6 (2.09”) 5.6 (1.73”)
(1.73”)
(0.71”) (0.22”) (0.22”) (0.22”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
91
45
91
45
91
45
96
96
96
PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 060 24 PSL1M 72 12 - PSL1M 100 24 PSLRM 10 24
50.6 50.6 50.6
(1.99”) (1.99”) (1.99”)
72 44 90 44 35 44
(2.83”) 5.6 (1.73”) (3.54”) 5.6 (1.73”) 5.6
(0.22”) (0.22”) (1.38”) (1.73”)
(0.22”)
(3.58”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(1.77”)
(3.58”)
(1.77”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
(3.78”)
91
91
45
45
91
45
96
96
96
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES
PSL1 005 24 - PSL1 100 24
PSL2 100 24
A C
TYPE A B C
PSL1 005 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 010 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 018 24 22.5 (0.88”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 030... 40.5 (1.59”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
B
PSL1 060... 40.5 (1.59”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)

PSL1 100... 54 (2.12”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL2 100... 54 (2.12”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSLR 20 24 54 (2.12”) 90 (3.54”) 115 (4.53”)
PSL1 120 24 - PSL1 480 24

PSL3...
A C
TYPE A B C
PSL1 120... 64 (2.52”) 124.5 (4.90”) 123.6 (4.87”)
PSL1 240... 83.5 (3.29”) 124.5 (4.90”) 123.6 (4.87”)
PSL1 300... 83.5 (3.29”) 124.5 (4.90”) 123.6 (4.87”)
PSL1 480... 175.5 (6.91”) 124.5 (4.90”) 123.6 (4.87”)
PSL3 120 24 74.3 (2.92”) 124 (4.88”) 118.8 (4.68”)
B
PSL3 240... 89 (3.50”) 124 (4.88”) 118.8 (4.68”)

PSL3 480... 150 (5.90”) 124 (4.88”) 118.8 (4.68”)
PSL3 960... 275.8 (10.86”) 125.9 (4.96”) 120.3 (4.74”)
21
21-4
Wiring diagrams
MODULAR SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

PSL1M 010 12 PSL1M 010 24 PSL1M 024 12 - PSL1M 033 12 PSL1M 024 24 - PSL1M 036 24
PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 072 12 PSL1M 060 24 - PSL1M 100 24
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
L N L N L N L N
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

+ – + – + + – – + + – –
12VDC 24VDC 12VDC 24VDC
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

PSL1 005 24 PSL1 030... PSL1 100... - PSL1 120...
PSL1 010 24 PSL1 060... PSL1 240... - PSL1 300...
PSL1 018 24 PSL1 480...
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 115/230VAC
L N GND L N GND L N GND
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

+ – + + – – RDY + + – – RDY RDY
Open collector
24VDC or 48VDC 24VDC or 48VDC 24VDC or 48VDC
PSL2 100... PSL3 120 24 - PSL3 240...

PSL3 480... - PSL3 900...
400...500VAC 400...500VAC
GND L1 L2 L3 GND
L N
Two-phase connection is admissible with a 25% output power derating.
OUTPUT OUTPUT
+ + – – RDY RDY + + – – RDY RDY
24VDC or 48VDC 24VDC or 48VDC
REDUNDANCY MODULES
PSLRM 10 24 PSLR 20 24
12-24VDC
Vin A+ OK FAIL OK FAIL OK
Vin A+ A+ A+ B+ B+ – – RELAY
A RDY A
Vout + Vin B+ FAIL
Vin B+ RDYA RDYB
OK
Vin – / Vout – RELAY INPUT OUTPUT
OUTPUT RDY B
Vin – Vout – B + + – –
+ + + – – – FAIL RDY RDY
Vout +
24VDC
12-24VDC
21
21-5
MODULAR SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES PSL1M... TYPES

TYPE Single phase PSL1M 010 12 - PSL1M 024 12 - PSL1M 033 12 - PSL1M 054 12 - PSL1M 072 12 -
PSL1M 010 24 PSL1M 024 24 PSL1M 036 24 PSL1M 060 24 PSL1M 100 24
Two phase — — — — —
Three phase — — — — —
— — — — —
INPUT CHARACTERITICS
Rated supply voltage Multivoltage 100...240VAC
Operating range 90...264VAC /
120...375VDC
Consumption ––
PFC ––
Insulation voltage Input/output 3000VAC (4242VDC)
Internal fuse (250VAC) T1A T2A T3A
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage 12VDC (PSL1M...12); 24VDC (PSL1M...24)
Voltage trimming (potentiometer) –– 12...14VDC (PSL1M...12)
24...28VDC (PSL1M...24)
Current 0.83A (PSL1M...12) 2A (PSL1M...12) 2.75A (PSL1M...12) 4.5A (PSL1M...12) 6A (PSL1M...12)
0.42A (PSL1M...24) 1A (PSL1M...24) 1.5A (PSL1M...24) 2.5A (PSL1M...24) 4.2A (PSL1M...24)
Temperature coefficient ±0.03%/°C
Line adjustment ±1%
Load adjustment ±1%
Efficiency 78% (PSL1M...12) 84% (PSL1M...12) 83% (PSL1M...12) 84% (PSL1M...12) 86% (PSL1M...12)
80% (PSL1M...24) 85%(PSL1M...24) 84% (PSL1M...24) 86% (PSL1M...24) 89% (PSL1M...24)
Overload protection 125...185% 120...160% 110...150% 110...150% 110...150%
Short-circuit protection Hiccup Hiccup Fold forward
Ripple noise 50mV
Parallel connection (n° of units) ––
INDICATIONS
LED indicator for power on Yes
LED indicator for low voltage Yes
Power Rdy (Ready) ––
(minimum limit)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Derating (>60°C) 2.5%/°C
HOUSING
Material Plastic
REDUNDANCY MODULES PSLR...

TYPE PSLRM 10 24 PSLR 20 24
INPUTS CHARACTERISTICS
Rated input voltage 12-24VDC 24VDC
Operating range 9…35VDC 21…28VDC
Number of input 2 2
21 Rated input current 10A 20A
Maximum input current (for channel) 8A for 300s 15A for 300s
OUTPUTS CHARACTERISTICS
Output voltage drop 0.5V 0.5V
Rated output current 10A 20A
Maximum reverse voltage 35V 30V
Maximum output current 16A for 300s 30A for 300s
INDICATIONS
DC ON indicator for input A - Yes
DC ON indicator for input B - Yes
Power Rdy (Ready) - Ok if input >20V (±5%) or <30V(±5%)
(minimum limit) Fail if input <20V (±5%) or >30V(±5%)
1A at 30VDC
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -40…+71°C
Storage temperature -40…+85°C
HOUSING
Material Plastic Plastic
21-6
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES PSL... TYPES

PSL1 005 24 PSL1 010 24 PSL1 018 24 PSL1 030 24 PSL1 060 24 PSL1 100 24 PSL1 120 24 PSL1 240 24 PSL1 300 24 PSL1 480 24 — — — — —
PSL1 030 48 PSL1 060 48 PSL1 100 48 PSL1 120 48 PSL1 240 48 PSL1 300 48 PSL1 480 48
— — — — — — — — — — PSL2 100 24 — — — —
PSL2 100 48
— — — — — — — — — — — PSL3 120 24 PSL3 240 24 PSL3 480 24 PSL3 960 24
— — — — — — — — — — — — PSL3 240 48 PSL3 480 48 PSL3 960 48
Multivoltage 100...240VAC Self-configurable 115...230VAC Multivoltage 400...500VAC

90...264VAC / 85...264VAC / 90...264VAC 90...132VAC / 180...264VAC 90...264VAC 340...575VAC
120...375VDC 90...375VDC 120...375VDC 210...375VDC 120...375VDC 480...820VDC
200mA 300mA 500mA 800mA 1.5A 2.4A 2.8A 5.4A/2.2A 6A 6A/3A 750mA 500mA 850mA 1.4A 2.4A
47...63Hz
–– 0.7 0.97 0.55 0.65 0.8
3000VAC (4242VDC)
T2A T3.15A T6.3A T8A T10A T2A T3.15A/500VAC T5A/500VAC
24VDC (PSL...24); 48VDC (PSL...48)

21.6...28.8VDC 24...28VDC 22.5...28.5VDC 22.5...28.5 22.5...28.5VDC
48...55VDC 47...56VDC VDC 47...56VDC
0.21A 0.42A 0.75A 1.25A 2.5A 4.2A 5A 10A 12.5A 20A 4.2A 5A 10A 20A 40A
0.625A 1.25A 2.1A 2.5A 5A 6.25A 10A 5A 10A 20A
0.03%/°C 0.03%/°C
±1% 0.5% ±1% ±0.5% ±1%
±2% 0.5% ±1%
72% 76% 77% 86% 89% 88% 86% 89% 89% 87% 89% 90% 90% 92%
110...135% 110...145% 110...140% 110...150% 110...150% 110...140% 110...145% 120...145% 110...140% 115...135% 120...140% 110...135% 125...145%
Hiccup Fold forward Hiccup Fold forward Hiccup
50mV 50mV 100mV 50mV 100mV 80mV
–– 3 2 –– 2 2 2
Yes
Yes –– –– Yes
–– Yes (transistor output) Yes (relay output) Yes (trans. Yes (relay output)
(18.8VDC) (17.6VDC) output) (17.6VDC)
(60VDC)
-20...+71°C -40...+71°C -35...+71°C -40...+71°C -30...+71°C -40...+71°C -30...+71°C -40...+71°C

-25...+85°C -40...+85°C
2.5%/°C 3.5%/°C
Plastic Metal Plastic Metal

No replacement by user.
Two-phase connection is possible with 25% power derating, except types PSL2 100 24 and PSL3 120 24.
Minimum load of 150mA.
Maximum surrounding temperature of 50°C for use according to UL508.
21
21-7
Page 22-2
SWITCHING BATTERY CHARGERS

MODULAR VERSION
• For lead-acid batteries up to 50Ah rating
• Rated output current:
– 2.5 and 4.5A at 12VDC
– 1.25 and 2.5A at 24VDC
• Electronic lock for shorted battery, reverse
polarity and output overload
• Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions
• Output for alarm remote indication.
Page 22-3 and 4
SWITCHING BATTERY CHARGERS

• For non-sealed and sealed lead-acid
batteries up to 150Ah rating
– 6A and 12A at 12VDC
– 5A and 10A at 24VDC
polarity and output overload
• Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions
• Available versions with NFC technology for
setup and RS485 integrated for setup,
supervision and remote control.
Page 22-5
LINEAR BATTERY CHARGERS

• For lead-acid batteries up to 150Ah rating
– 3A, 6A, 12A at 12VDC
– 2.5A, 5A, 10A at 24VDC
polarity, output overload and disconnected
battery
AUTOMATIC BATTERY CHARGERS 22
Switching and linear technology

1 charging level
Versions for non-sealed and
sealed lead-acid batteries,
1.25 to 12A ratings
Versions with RS485 and NFC
communications integrated
Charging current limitation
selectable.
SEC. - PAGE
Automatic battery chargers for lead-acid batteries
Switching BCF series, modular version .............................................................................................................................. 22 - 2
Switching BCG series ........................................................................................................................................................ 22 - 3
Switching BCG series, communicating version ............................................................................................................... 22 - 4
Linear BCE series .............................................................................................................................................................. 22 - 5
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 22 - 6
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 22 - 6
C ONTROL
AND
A UTOMATION
Automatic battery chargers
Switching BCF series
For lead-acid batteries. Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
Modular version output output per – Switching technology
current voltage pkg – Wide auxiliary supply range
in DC – Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
[A] [V] n° [kg] Protection:
– Mains input fuse
1 charging level. – Battery output fuse
BCF 0250 12 2.5 1 0.332 – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
12 terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload
BCF 0450 12 4.5 1 0.332
– Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
LED indications:
BCF 0125 24 1.25 1 0.332 – Correct output voltage
24 – Reverse battery polarity.
BCF... BCF 0250 24 2.5 1 0.332
U VDC ON BAT LOW RELAY – Auxiliary supply voltage:
Alarms GREEN LED RED LED 100...240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±5%
b Correct output ON OFF Energised – Fixed charging current
Uc
a
voltage – Current limitation
Reverse ON ON Energised – Charging current according to DIN 41773 standards
0.5Uc
polarity – Fixed clamping screw terminal block with captive screws
Short circuit/ OFF OFF De-energised
Ic
Overload Alarm output circuit
I
– Type of output: 3A 250VAC AC1 duty relay, normally
a - constant current charge energised.
b - constant voltage charge Type Maximum power Internal fuse
consumption dissipation mains side
[VA] [W] [W] [A] Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
BCF 0250 12 80 40 6 2 Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies -
BCF 0450 12 150 70 9 2 Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use as
BCF 0125 24 80 39 6 2 components of complete workshop-assembled equipment.
BCF 0250 24 150 77 9 2 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1,
Not replaceable. IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 60950-1,
CSA C22.2 n°60950-1.
22

22-2 page 22-6 page 22-6 page 22-7
Switching BCG series
For non-sealed and sealed Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
output output per – Switching technology
lead-acid batteries current voltage pkg – Wide auxiliary supply range
in DC – High efficiency
– Two charging voltages selectable by DIP-switch
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Boost external control for full battery charging
1 charging level. – Hiccup function for battery recharging when its voltage
BCG 06 12 6 1 0.532 is lower than 50% rated value
12 – Charging current limiting trimmer resistor
BCG 12 12 12 1 0.710 – Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
Protection:
BCG 05 24 5 1 0.532 – Input fuse on AC side
24 – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
BCG 10 24 10 1 0.710 terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload
Accessories. – Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
BCG... BCG X00 Adapter for 35mm DIN rail 1 0.022 LED indications:
vertical mount of – Power on
BCG 06 12 and BCG05 24 – Charging operation (I>30% Ic)
– Overload or short circuit conditions
– Reverse battery polarity.
U
Alarms ON REV ALA CHG RELAY
b GRN RED RED YEL Operational characteristics
Uc – Auxiliary supply voltage:
LED LED LED RED
a 110...240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±10%
Correct output ON OFF OFF OFF Energ. – Charging voltage selectable by DIP-switch
0.5Uc voltage • Non-sealed lead-acid batteries
Charging ON OFF OFF ON Energ. • Sealed lead-acid batteries
Low battery ON OFF ON ON Energ. – Maximum charging current can be set with a trimmer
Ic I on the front: 20...100% of the rated current value
voltage
a - constant current charge – Current limitation
Reverse OFF ON OFF OFF De-energ. – Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards
b - constant voltage charge polarity – IEC degree of protection: IP20.
Short circuit / ON OFF ON OFF De-energ.
Overload Alarm output circuit
Steady light if the charging current is more than approx. 30% of – Type of output: 5A 30VDC duty relay, normally
programmed current value. energised.
Flashing during Hiccup operating conditions.
Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
Type Maximum power Internal fuse Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies -
consumption dissipation Mains side (type T) Component.
[VA] [W] [W] [A] Products having this type of marking are intended for use
BCG 06 12 230 97 14 4 as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
BCG 12 12 284 290 29 6.3 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1,
BCG 05 24 364 158 20 6.3 IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL 60950-1,
BCG 10 24 630 311 41 8 CSA C22.2 n°60950-1.
Not replaceable.
22

page 22-6 page 22-6 page 22-7 22-3
Switching BCG series
communicating version
For non-sealed and sealed Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
lead-acid batteries output output per The BCG battery chargers with the built-in communication
current voltage pkg have integrated functions necessary where is needed the
in DC permanent control of the battery state of charge (SOC):
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Supervision and remote control
– Communication with the compatible devices (ATL 800,
1 charging level. ATL 900, RGK 800, RGK 900) and display the battery
BCG 06 12 RS 6 1 0.582 charger status on dedicated pages
12 – Battery disconnected alarm
BCG 12 12 RS 12 1 0.760
– Double supply for the built-in RS485 communication
that allows a permanent supervision in case of
BCG 05 24 RS 5 1 0.582 emergency
24 – Switching technology
BCG 10 24 RS 10 1 0.760
– Wide auxiliary supply range
Accessories. – High efficiency
BCG...RS BCG X00 Adapter for 35mm DIN rail 1 0.022 – Isolated RS485 communication
vertical mount of – RTU and ASCII Modbus protocols
BCG 06 12RS and – Charging voltage selectable in function of the battery
BCG05 24RS type (Pb – Sealed Pb – Ni-Cd):
U • 12V models: 12...15 VDC
• 24V models: 24...30 VDC
Uc
b Alarms ON REV ALA CHG RELAY – BOOST external command or via Modbus to deep
GRN RED RED YEL charge of the battery
a LED LED LED RED – Hiccup function for battery recharging when its voltage
0.5Uc Correct output ON OFF OFF OFF Energ. is lower than 50% rated value
voltage – Charging current limiting trimmer resistor
– Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715).
Charging ON OFF OFF ON Energ. Protection:
Ic I
Low battery ON OFF ON ON Energ. – Input fuse on AC side
a - constant current charge voltage – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
b - constant voltage charge Reverse OFF ON OFF OFF De-energ. terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload,
polarity battery not connected
– Signalling absence of auxiliary power supply AC
Short circuit / ON OFF ON OFF De-energ. – Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions.
Overload LED indications:
Steady light if the charging current is more than approx. 30% of – Power on
programmed current value. – Charging operation (I>30% Ic)
Flashing during Hiccup operating conditions. – Overload or short circuit conditions
– Reverse battery polarity.
Type Maximum power Internal fuse
consumption dissipation Mains side (type T) Operational characteristics
– Auxiliary supply voltage:
[VA] [W] [W] [A] 110...240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±10%
BCG 06 12RS 230 97 14 4 – Parameters can be set with RS485 or NFC connection:
BCG 12 12RS 284 290 29 6.3 • Current limit: 20...100% of the rated current value
• Charging voltage
BCG 05 24RS 364 158 20 6.3 • Boost voltage
BCG 10 24RS 630 311 41 8 • Boost interval
Not replaceable. • Boost duration
– Current limitation
– Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards
Alarm output circuit

– Type of output: 5A 30VDC duty relay, normally
energised.
App for smartphones and tablets

The app LOVATO Electric , installed on Android
devices with NFC connectivity, allows the user to set the
parameters of BCG ... RS.
For more information see section 27.
supervision and energy management software

– Setup configuration with: See section 27.
• NFC connection and the app LOVATO Electric ;
22 • supervision and energy management software configuration and remote control software
See section 27.
• configuration and remote control software
– Supervision of measures, states and alarms with or
– Automatic and programmable BOOST function
Certifications pending: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and
– Compatibility with automatic transfer switch controllers ATL800, ATL900 and gen-set controllers RGK800 and
Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies -
RGK 900: it is possible to display the battery charger status on dedicated pages of the controllers.
Component.
Products having this type of marking are intended for use
as components of complete workshop-assembled
equipment.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL 60950-1,
CSA C22.2 n°60950-1.

22-4 page 22-6 page 22-6 page 22-7
Linear BCE series
For lead-acid batteries Order code Rated Rated Qty Wt General characteristics
output output per – Linear technology
current voltage pkg – Housing for internal panel mounting by screws.
in DC Protection:
[A] [V] n° [kg] – Mains input fuse (except for BCE 2V5 and BCE 03)
– Battery output fuse
1 charging level. – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery
31 BCE 0312 3 1 1.984 terminals, reverse battery polarity, output overload
31 BCE 0612 6 12 1 4.832 (<0.5 Ue) and disconnected battery.
LED Indications:
31 BCE 1212 12 1 8.690 – Power on
– Charge (I > 0.2 Ic)
31 BCE 2V524 2.5 1 1.992 – Alarm for protection tripping.
31 BCE 0312 31 BCE 0524 5 24 1 4.960 Operational characteristics

31 BCE 2V524 31 BCE 1024 10 1 9.560 – Auxiliary supply voltage:
220...240VAC ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
– Charging current: 30...100% Ie adjustable
Type Maximum power Mains – Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards
consumption dissipation fuse (type) – Current limitation
[VA] [W] [A] – Clamping screw terminal block with captive screws:
• Removable for BCE 03 and BCE 2V5
BCE 0312 117 24 1 (T) ext • Fixed for BCE 05, BCE 06, BCE 10 and BCE 12
BCE 0612 222 46 4 (F) int – IEC degree of protection: IP00.
BCE 1212 400 73 6.3 (F) int
Alarms
BCE 2V524 166 26 1 (T) ext Possible causes of alarm include:
31 BCE 0612 BCE 0524 317 40 4 (F) int – Low battery voltage
31 BCE 0524 BCE 1024 610 66 6.3 (F) int – Battery fuse blown
– Battery not connected
Not supplied; installed by customer. – Battery polarity inverted (reverse polarity).
BCE 2V524 - BCE 0312
These types have a static alarm output for the control of
a relay or indicator, maximum 300mA duty.
DERATING CURVES If it is connected to a relay, this must be normally
energised in absence of alarm. In alarm conditions with
BCE 2V5 - BCE 03 ALARM LED switched on or in absence of supply, the
DERATING CURVE relay de-energises.
100%
BCE 0524 - BCE 0612 - BCE 1024 - BCE 1212
95% 220 These types have a normally energised relay alarm
Charging current
240 230 V AC
V VA
AC C
output. In alarm conditions with ALARM LED switched
90%
on or in absence of supply, the relay de-energises.
85%
Alarm output circuit
80% BCE 2V524 - BCE 0312
31 BCE 1212 – Type of output:
75%
31 BCE 1024 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C • Negative static; NPN transistor
Operating temperature • Maximum voltage applicable to load: +V battery
terminal
U • Maximum output current: 300mA
BCE 05 - BCE 06
• Maximum overload current for 1 second: 2A
b
Uc DERATING CURVE • Dynamic over-voltage protection with inductive load.
a 100%
BCE 0524 - BCE 0612 - BCE 1024 - BCE 1212

0.5Uc 95%
– Type of output
Charging current
230 220
240 VA VA
VA C C
C
90% • Relay: 1 changeover contact (SPDT)
• Rated voltage: 250VAC
Ic I 85% • IEC rated capacity in AC1 duty: 5A 250VAC Ith
• IEC rated capacity in DC13 or DC14 duty: 5A 30VDC
a - constant current charge 80%
• Electrical life: >105 cycles
b - constant voltage charge
75% • Mechanical life: >30x105 cycles.
50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C
Operating temperature The output is not overload or short-circuit protected. It is however
capable of switching on a 3W filament bulb.
BCE 10 - BCE 12
DERATING CURVE Certifications obtained: EAC. 22
100%
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335-2-29.
Charging current
95%
230 220
V VA
AC C
90%
240
VA
C
85%
80%
75%
50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C
Operating temperature

page 22-6 page 22-6 page 22-7 22-5
BCF... BCG 0612 - BCG 0524 - BCG 0612RS - BCG 0524RS Mounting adapter BCG X00
50.6 (1.99”) 162 (6.38”) 35 9
90 (3.54”) 5.6 159 (6.26”)
136 (5.35”) (0.35”)
(1.99”) 44 (1.73”) 63.2 (2.49”) (1.38”)
149 /5.87”)
45 (1.77”)
91 (3.58”)
96 (3.78”)
150.5 (5.92”)
71 (2.79”)
145 (5.71”)
81.5 (3.21”)
80 (3.15”)
BCG 1212 - BCG 1024 - BCG 1212RS - BCG 1024RS BCE 0312 - BCE 2V524
134 (5.27”) 100 (3.94”)
213 (8.38”)
206 (8.11”)
198 (7.79”) POWER ON
CHARGE
ALARM
65 (2.56”)
93 (3.66”)
100 (3.94”)
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
BATTERY
220-240V
BATTERY
FUSE
POWER
ALARM
OUT
145 (5.71”)
151 (5.94”)
- - +
120.5 (4.74”)
BCE 0612 - BCE 0524

192 (7.56”) 140 (5.51”)
POWER ON
130 (5.12”) 63 (2.48”) CHARGE
130 (5.12”)
ALARM
80 (3.15”)
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
BATTERY
220-240V
POWER
ALARM
OUT
FUSE
BATTERY
FUSE
COM NO NC
+
POWER
BCE 1212 - BCE 1024 178 (7.01”)

192 (7.56”) 140 (5.51”)
230 (9.05”)
180 (7.09”)
POWER ON
CHARGE
ALARM
60 70
50 80
40 90
30% 100%
220-240V
BATTERY
POWER
ALARM
FUSE
OUT
BATTERY
FUSE
COM NO NC
POWER
+
-
178 (7.01”)
Wiring diagrams
BCF... BCG... BCG...RS

VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CHARGING CONTROL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CHARGING CONTROL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CHARGING CONTROL
22
AUXILIARY BOARD
FUSE
FUSE
FUSE
RDY RDY L N COM NO NC L N
A B COM NO NC L N PE
BATTERY OUT ALARM SUPPLY BATTERY BOOST OUT ALARM SUPPLY

110-240VAC 110-240VAC
BCE 2V5... - BCE 03... BCE 05... - BCE 06... - BCE 10... - BCE 12... BATTERY RS485 BAT-2 SENSE PT1000 BOOST OUT ALARM SUPPLY
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CHARGING CONTROL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CHARGING CONTROL BCG 0612 - 8A T
FUSE
FUSE
BCG 0524 - 6.3A T 1A T

BCG 1212 - 16A T
BCG 1024 - 12.5A T
LOAD
22-6
TYPE BCG... - BCG...RS BCF... BCE...

Description Single phase automatic battery charger Single phase automatic battery charger
1 charging level for sealed and non-sealed 1 charging level for lead-acid batteries
lead-acid batteries
Supply voltage 110-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±10% 100-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±5% 220-240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±5%
Rated output voltage (Uoc) 12-24VDC
Rated charging current (Ic) 6-12A (12VDC) 2.5-4.5A (12VDC) 3-6-12A (12VDC)
5-10A (24VDC) 1.25-2.5A (24VDC) 2.5-5-10A (24VDC)
CHARGING CYCLE
Reference standards DIN 41773
Diagram U
b
Uc a - constant current charge
a
0,5Uc
b - constant voltage charge
Ic I
End charging voltage Uc For BCG... 12V battery: 13.6VDC (2.27V/cell) 12V battery: 13.8VDC (2.3V/cell)
12V battery with DIP2: 24V battery: 27.2VDC (2.27V/cell) 24V battery: 27.6VDC (2.3V/cell)
– in pos. V1: 13.8V
– in pos. V2: 13.5V (default).
24V battery with DIP2:
– in pos. V1: 27.6V
– in pos. V2: 27.0V (default)
For BCG...RS
12V battery: adjustable 13.5...13.8V
with NFC or RS485
For BCG...RS
24V battery: adjustable 27.0...27.6V
with NFC or RS485
Charging current For BCG... adjustable 20% to 100% Ic Fixed Adjustable 30% to 100% Ic
(using potentiometer/trimpot) (using potentiometer)
For BCG...RS adjustable 20% to 100% Ic
with NFC or RS485
Current limit Yes
Boost +4.4% Uc — —
PROTECTION
Type – Mains supply fuse – Mains supply fuse – Mains supply fuse
– Charging inhibition due to: – Charging inhibition due to: (5, 6, 10, 12A types only)
• Short circuit at battery terminals • Short circuit at battery terminals – Battery output fuse
• Reverse battery polarity • Reverse battery polarity – Charging inhibition due to:
• Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc) • Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc) • Short circuit at battery terminals
• Output overload • Output overload • Reverse battery polarity
• Disconnected battery only for • Low voltage at battery poles (<0.5 Uoc)
communicating version • Disconnected battery
ALARM OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Type of output 1 relay 1 relay Static (NPN transistor) ;
5A 30VDC 3A 250VAC AC1 relay with 1 c/o contact (SPDT),
5A 250VAC
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -30...+55°C -40...+51°C -10...+50°C
(+55...+70°C with 1-5%Ic/°C derating
by trimpot)
Storage temperature -30...+80°C -40...+85°C -30...+80°C
HOUSING
Version Internal panel mount Modular Internal panel mount
IEC degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP00 22
Cooling Natural
Connections Fixed terminals Fixed terminals Removable/plug-in terminals
Fixed terminals
For 2.5A and 3A types only.
For 5, 6, 10 and 12A types only.
22-7
ENERGY METERS DATA CONCENTRATORS

• Single phase, three phase with neutral, • Energy consumption data storage for
three phase with or without neutral network usage
• Direct connection or by current • Connection up to 14 energy meters
transformers equipped with static output
• MID certified versions • Photovoltaic monitoring type
• Versions that can be expanded with EXP... • Expandable with EXP... expansion modules
expansion modules • Built-in RS485 communication port.
• Versions with built-in RS485
communication port.
Page 23-14 Page 23-17
DIGITAL LCD MULTIMETERS AND PORTABLE POWER ANALYZERS

POWER ANALYZERS • IP65 casing
• Graphic or icon LCD • With built-in USB interface
• Version with touch screen • GPRS/GSM communications
• Modular and panel mount types • Available kits of current clamps and cables.
• Remote display
• Versions that can be expanded with EXP...
expansion modules.
Page 23-18 Page 23-27
LED MEASURING INSTRUMENTS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

• Voltmeters, ammeters, frequency • Primary current: 50-4000A
meters, cosphi meters and wattmeters. • Secondary current: 5A
DIGITAL LED MULTIMETERS • Solid and split-core types
• Basic version, with energy meters, with • Instrument and accuracy versions.
2 programmable outputs and built-in
RS485 communication port.
METERING INSTRUMENTS AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 23
Digital voltmeters, ammeters,

wattmeters, frequency meters and
cosphi meters
Digital multimeters and power
analyzers, expandable, with
graphic LCD
Connection to single, two, three
phase systems
Ideal for distribution systems,
electricity cogeneration and
on-board machinery installations.
High measurement accuracy
Totally programmable digital
outputs
RS485, RS232, USB, Ethernet,
Profibus DP serial interface for
remote control and data-logger.
SEC. - PAGE
Energy meters
Single phase .................................................................................................................................................................... 23 - 8
Single phase, MID certified .............................................................................................................................................. 23 - 9
Three phase with or without neutral ................................................................................................................................ 23 - 10
Three phase with neutral, MID certified ........................................................................................................................... 23 - 11
Three phase with or without neutral, UTF certified .......................................................................................................... 23 - 12
Data concentrators
General use ...................................................................................................................................................................... 23 - 13
For photovoltaic control and supervision ........................................................................................................................ 23 - 13
Digital metering instruments
Modular LCD multimeters ............................................................................................................................................... 23 - 14
Flush mount LCD multimeters ......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 16
Flush mount touch-screen LCD power analyzers ............................................................................................................ 23 - 17
Flush mount LED measuring instruments ....................................................................................................................... 23 - 18
Flush mount LED multimeters ......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 20
Modular LED measuring instruments .............................................................................................................................. 23 - 23
Communication devices, protection covers, accessories .......................................................... 23 - 25
Converter gateway, connecting cables ................................................................................. 23 - 26
Current transformers ...................................................................................................... 23 - 27
Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 23 - 30
Wiring diagrams............................................................................................................ 23 - 33
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Metering instruments and current transformers
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
DMG 900 + EXP10 31

Energy Quality
MV/LV per EN 50160
transformer
room
DMG 800 + EXP10 04

Temperature control
DME D310 T2 (MID)

Primary DMG 800 DMG 800
distribution
DMG 700 DMG 600 - DMG 610 (MCC)
M M M M
DMG 800 + EXP… DMG 100

DMG 300 Process and ambient DMG 110
DMG 210 control
Secondary DMG 200
distribution
23 DME D330 DME D310 T2 DME D300 T2 DME D100 T1 DME D115 T1
DME D110 T1 DME D120 T1
DME CD
23-2
LOVATO ELECTRIC
DEVICE MONITORING
Power analyser
+ GSM Modem
Synergy Dial-up connection (modbus ASCII)
Power factor
controller
Multimeter
Automatic transfer
switch
RS485/Ethernet Energy Micro PLC Soft starter VL

Variable Multimeter
converter meter speed
drive
DME energy meter

with pulse output
Ethernet 23
Process and environment data
RS485
Electric
signal
23-3
DMG SERIES MULTIMETERS AND

DME SERIES ENERGY METERS
Energy
quality
verification
Energy
consumption
monitoring
Energy quality analysis

according to EN 50160
Water Pressure
Alarms
PT100 4-20mA
temperature 0-10V
23
Process data collection Control and diagnostic Boolean logic combination
23-4
PHOTOVOLTAIC INSTALLATION MANAGEMENT
DC
AC
Option
for distinct values of:
– imported energy
– exported energy
DMED energy meter:
ENERGY PRODUCED
ELECTRIC LINE
DMED energy meter:

ENERGY CONSUMED
ELECTRIC PULSES
INVERTER STATUS/ALARM
Option for 2 loads Option for Ethernet

disconnection by connection by
DME CD PV1 EXM10 01 EXM10 03
data concentrator views:
– Energy
• Produced
• Consumed
• Exchanged SMARTPHONE APP: PV VIEW
– Self-consuming index
– Inverter alarms.
Enabling / Commands
ETHERNET
Router
Internet
Contactors
23
PRIVILEGED LOADS THAT CAN
LOADS BE MANAGED
Laptop
Supervision option
remoted by cloud
software (see Section 27)
If the distinct values of import and export energy need to be known, a third energy meter should be installed on the in-coming line; the exchanged energy is the difference between import and export energy with the power supplier.
The energy meters can be single or three phase based on the type of installation.
23-5
ENERGY METERS - SINGLE PHASE ENERGY METERS - MULTIMEASUREMENT - SINGLE PHASE
Functions / Measurements DME M100 DME M100 T1 DME D100 T1 DME D110 T1 DME D115 T1 DME D120 T1 DME D121 DME D130
INSTALLATION
Connection Single phase
Direct 32A 32A 40A 40A 40A 63A 63A 63A
Through CT
MV usage
Built-in digital outputs 1 1 1 1 1
Pulse Pulse Programmable Programmable Programmable
Built-in digital inputs
Built-in communication port RS485
Expandible with modules EX... type
MID certified version
Version with UTF certificates
Current/Voltage accuracy ±0.5%

Active energy accuracy Class 1 (versions non MID)
(IEC/EN 62053-21/22 or EN 50470-3) Class B (versions MID)
Degree of protection IP40

MEASUREMENTS
Active energy Total
Partial
Reactive energy Total
Partial
Separate energy count
Import - Export
Voltage
Current
Power Active power

Active power max demand max demand
Power factor only
Frequency
Hour meter
Cos
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)
Detailed hamonic analysis
Page 23-8/9 23-8/9 23-8 23-8/9 23-8
EXPANSION MODULES
Digital inputs/outputs
23 Analog inputs/outputs
Communication ports
Ethernet Gateway function

GPRS-GSM modem
Type of memory
23-6
ENERGY METERS - MULTIMEASUREMENT - 3 PHASE MULTIMETERS - POWER ANALYZERS
DME D300 T2 DME D301 DME D305 T2 DME D330 DMG 100 DMG 200 DMG 300 DMG 600 DMG 610 DMG 700 DMG 800 DMG 900 DMG 900T
DME D310 T2 DMG 101 DMG 210
DMG 110
Three phase Single / Three phase

63A 80A
5-1A 5-1A 5-1A 5A 5-1A 5-1A 5-1A 5A 5-1A 5-1A 5-1A
(DMEM 305 T2)
5A
(DMEM 310 T2)

2 2 2
programm. programm. programm.
(DMG 101)
1 1 1 1 2
programm. programm. programm. programm. programm.
(DMG 101)
RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 or
(DMG 110) (DMG 210) RS232
(only
DME D310 T2)
(only
DME D310 T2)
(only
DME D310 T2)
±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.2% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.5% ±0.2% ±0.2% ±0.2%
Class 1 Class 0,5S Cl. 1-Cl. B Class 0,5S Class 1 Class 1 Class 0,5S Class Class 1 Class 1 Class 0,5S Class 0,5S Class 0,5S
Class B DME D310 T2
Cl. 0.5S
DME D305 T2
IP40 IP40 IP54 IP65

2...15° 2...31° 2...15° 2...15° 2...31° 2...63° 2...63°
23-10 to 12 23-10 23-14 23-15 23-16 23-16 23-17

(only
DME D310 T2)
23
USB USB USB USB USB USB USB
RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485
Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
(only Profibus Profibus
DME D310 T2)

GPRS data connection
(sms, mail, Client FTP)
Data-Logger Data-Logger Data-Logger Data-Logger
(only +
DME D310 T2) Energy Quality
EN 50160 - Class B
23-7
Energy meters
Single phase, non expandable Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
per The energy meters are instruments for energy consumption
pkg measurement in single-phase installations with direct
n° [kg] connection.
Mechanical meter with mechanical display. Operational characteristics
DME M100 32A direct connection, 1U 1 0.084 DME M... (mechanical display)
– Rated supply voltage: 230VAC -20...+15%
DME M100 T1 32A direct connection, 1U 1 0.088 – Direct connection
1 pulse output – 32A maximum current
Digital meter, with LCD screen. – Active energy measurements
DME D100 T1 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.086 – Active energy accuracy: Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21)
1 pulse output, – Mechanical meter with 6+1 digit count
220...240VAC – Flashing LED for consumption indication
DME M100 – Static pulse output for DME M100 T1 only
DME D100 T1 A120 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.086 – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module
1 pulse output, – Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
110...120VAC – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at
DME D110 T1 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.090 terminals.
1 program. static output, multi-
measurements, 220...240VAC DME D110T1–DME D110 T1–DME D115 T1–
DME D120 T1–DME D121–DME D130
DME D110 T1 A120 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.090 – Nominal supply voltage:
1 program. static output, multi- • 220…240VAC for DME D…T1
measurements, 110...120VAC • 110…120AC for DME D…T1 A120
Digital meter with backlight LCD display. – Voltage range:
DME D115 T1 40A direct connection, 2U, 1 0.090 • 187…264VAC for DME D... T1
1 program. static output, multi- • 93…132VAC for DME D…T1 A120
DME D110 T1... – Direct connection
measurements , 220-240VAC
– Maximum current: 40A for DME D100 T1,
DME D120 T1 63A direct connection, 2U 1 0.148 DME D110 T1…, DME D115 T1;
1 program. static output, multi- 63A for DME D120 T1 – DME D121 – DME D130
measurements , 220-240VAC – Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 1
DME D120 T1 A120 63A direct connection, 2U 1 0.148 (IEC/EN 62053-21)
1 program. static output, multi- – Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
measurements, 110...120VAC (IEC/EN 62053-23) except for DME D115 T1
DME D121 63A direct connection, 2U, 1 0.148 – LCD meter : With 5+1 digit count for
RS485 interface multi- DME D100/110 T1…; backlight with 6+1 digit
measurements , 220-240VAC count for DME D115 T1, DME D120 T1, DME D121,
DME D130
– Metrological LED with pulse emission for
DME D115 T1... consumption indication
DME D120 T1... - DME D121 – Clearable partial energy measurement except for
DME D100/110 T1…
– One output: Pulse for DME D100 T1; programmable
Single phase, expandable Order code Description Qty Wt static for all other types
per – Built-in RS485 port for DME D121; compatible with
pkg
n° [kg] – Modular housing, 1 module for DME D100 T1,
DME D110 T1; 2 module for all other types
Digital meter with backlight LCD display. – Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
DME D130 63A direct connection, 2U, 1 0.148 – protection degree: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
multi-measurements,
expandable, 220-240VAC supervision and energy management software
See Section 27.
Order code Description EXM series expansion modules
See Section 28, page 3.
DME D130 EXPANSION MODULES.
DME D130 Certifications and compliance
Inputs and outputs. Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and Canada (File E346886), as Electrical Process Control
2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC Equipment - Energy meters, for DME D... types.
Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61326-1 for DME M...
type; EN 50470-3, IEC/EN 61010-1, UL 61010-1,
Maximum combination CSA C22.2 n°61010-1 for DME D... types.
Multi-measurements:
- Total and partial active energy
DME D130 EXM10 01 - Total and partial reactive energy
- Voltage
23 - Current
MAX - Active and reactive power
1 - Power factor
- Frequency
EXM10 01 - Total and partial hour counter
- Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
Multi-measurements:
- Active power
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
Software and accessories Expansion modules Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics
23-8 pages 23-25 and 26 page 28-3 page 23-30 page 23-33 pages 23-36 and 37
Energy meters
MID certified
Single phase, non Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

expandable, MID certified per The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
pkg for billing purposes between electricity supplliers and
consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
MID Digital meter with LCD display.
n° [kg]
directly connected single-phase installations.
MID is the Measuring Instruments Directive of the
DME D100 T1 MID 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.086 European Union; instruments must be certified
1 pulse output, accordingly whenever used for monetary transactions in
230VAC this territory.
DME D110 T1 MID 40A direct connection, 1U 1 0.090
1 programmable static output, Operational characteristics
multi-measerements , – Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC
230VAC – Voltage range: 187-264VAC 50Hz
– Direct connection
DME D120 T1 MID 63A direct connection, 2U 1 0.148 – Maximum current: 40A for DME D100/110 T1 MID;
1 programmable static output, 63A for DME D120 T1 MID
multi-measerements , – Measurement of 14 electrical parameters for
230VAC DME D110/120 T1 MID
– Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
DME D110 T1 MID (EN 50470-3)
– Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
– LCD meter:
• With 5+1 digit count for DME D100/110 T1 MID
• Backlight with 6+1 digit count for DME D120 T1 MID
consumption indication
– Clearable partial energy measurements (except for
DME D100 T1 MID)
– One output: pulse for DME D100 T1 MID;
programmable static for other types
– Modular housing, 1 module for DME D100/110 T1 MID;
2 module for DME D120 T1 MID
– Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
DME D120 T1 MID – EN protection degree: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.

Certifications obtained: MID Class B, certifications per
module B (type tests) and per module D (production
conformity).
Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3.
Multi-measurements:
- Total and partial reactive energy
- Voltage
- Current
- Active and reactive power
- Power factor
- Frequency
- Total and partial hour counter
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
23

page 23-30 page 23-33 pages 23-36 and 37 23-9
Energy meters
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
neutral, non expandable per The energy meters are digital meters/analyzers of electric
pkg energy for systems with direct three-phase connection
n° [kg] or by CT.
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared
Digital meter for three phase with neutral. beam.
DME D300 T2 63A direct connection, 1 0.360
4U, 2 programmable Operational characteristics
static outputs, – Nominal supply voltage:
multi-measurements • 380...415VAC (L-L) for DME D300 T2,
DME D301 80A direct connection, 4U 1 0.360 DME D310 T2, DME D330 and DME D305
RS485 interface, • 190...415VAC (L-L) for DME D301
multi-measurements – Voltage range:
• 323...456VAC (L-L) for DME D300 T2,
DME D305 T2 Connection by CT /5A, 1 0.332 DME D310 T2, DME D330 T2 and DME D305
DME D300 T2 4U, 2 programmable • 162...456VAC (L-L) for DME D301
static outputs, – Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2 and 80A for
multi-measurements DME D301
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral. – Connection by TA /5A or 1A for DME D310 T2,
DME D330 Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332 DME D330 and DME D305 T2
sec. 4U, RS485 interface, – Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 0,5s
multi-measurements (IEC/EN 62053-22) for DME D301, DME D305 T2 and
DME D330 Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21) for other
types.
– Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
– LCD multifunction meter
consumption indication
DME D330 – Clearable partial active energy measurements
– 1 programmable digital input
– 2 programmable static outputs except DME D330 and
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt DME D301
neutral, expandable per – Built-in RS485 port for DME D330 and DME D301
pkg and optional for DME D310 T2; compatible with
n° [kg] and
– Optic interface for EXM10... expansion modules with
Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral. DME D310 T2
DME D310 T2 Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332 – Modular housing, 4 module
secondary, 2 programmable – Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
static outputs, 4U, LCD – Degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
graphic display multi-
measurements , expandable supervision and energy management software
See Section 27.
configuration and remote control software

Order Description See Section 27.
DME D310 T2
code
EXM series expansion modules
DME D310 T2 EXPANSION MODULES. See page 28-3.
Inputs and outputs.
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated Certifications and compliance
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs Certifications obtained: EAC.
rated 5A 250VAC Compliant with standards: EN 50740-3, IEC/EN 61010-1.
Communication ports. Multi-measurements:
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface - Total and partial active energy
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface - Total and partial reactive energy
- Voltage
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface - Current
EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function - Active and reactive power
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay - Power factor
outputs rated 5A 250VAC - Frequency
- Total and partial hour counter
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup - Average active power (calculation on every last
EXM10 10 reserve energy for data logging 15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
Maximum combination
23
MAX
3
Energy meters
MID certified
Three phase with neutral, Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
non expandable, per The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
pkg for billing purposes between electricity suppliers and
MID certified n° [kg] consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
directly or CT connected three-phase installations.
Digital meter for three phase with neutral.
MID DME D300 T2 MID 63A direct connection, 1 0.360
Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared
beam.
2 programmable static
outputs, Operational characteristics
multi-measurements – Nominal supply voltage: 230VAC (L-N); 400VAC (L-L)
– Voltage range: 187-264VAC (L-N); 323-456VAC (L-L)
– Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2
– Connection by CT /5A for DME D310 T2 MID
– Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
(EN 50470-3)
– Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
(IEC/EN 62053-23)
– LCD multifunction meter
DME D300 T2 MID consumption indication
– Clearable partial energy measurements
– 1 programmable digital input
– 2 programmable static outputs
Three phase with or without Order code Description Qty Wt – Optic interface for EXM10... expansion modules with
per DME D310 T2 MID compatible with and
neutral, expandable, pkg
MID certified n° [kg]
– Modular housing 4 module
– Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
MID Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral.
DME D310 T2 MID Connection by CT /5A 1 0.332
– Degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
secondary, 2 programmable supervision and energy management software

static outputs, LCD See Section 27.
graphic display multi-
measurements , expandable configuration and remote control software
See Section 27.
Order Description EXM series expansion modules

code See page 28-3.
DME D310 T2 MID EXPANSION MODULES.
Inputs and outputs. Certifications and compliance
Certifications obtained: MID Class B (EN 50470-1,
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated EN 50470-3), certifications per module B (type tests)
DME D310 T2 MID EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs and per module D (production conformity).
rated 5A 250VAC Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3.
Communication ports.
Multi-measurements:
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface - Total and partial active energy
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface - Total and partial reactive energy
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface - Voltage
- Current
EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function - Active and reactive power
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay - Power factor
outputs rated 5A 250VAC - Frequency
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup - Total and partial hour counter
reserve energy for data logging - Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
- Maximum demand.
EXM10 10
Maximum combination
MAX
3
23
pages 23-25 and 26 page 28-3 page 23-30 page 23-33 page 23-38 23-11
Energy meters
MID certified – With UTF certificates
Three phase with neutral, non Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics
expandable, MID certified per The DME series energy meters, MID certified, are needed
pkg for billing purposes between electricity suppliers and
n° [kg] consumers and for energy consumption measurement in
directly or CT connected three-phase installations.
Digital meter for three phase with neutral, complete with Expandable with up to 3 EXM series expansion modules
UTF certificates for installations in Italy. interfaced by infrared beam DME D310 F...
DME D300 F MID certified type, 63A 1 0.360 The UTF certificate is required in the case of taxation
direct connection, 4U, in Italy (electricity-generating installations).
2 programmable static
outputs, non expandable, Operational characteristics
multi-measurements, DME D300 F - DME D310 F... of starter kit
complete with UTF certificate – Nominal supply voltage:
230VAC (L-N); 400VAC (L-L)
– Voltage range:
DME D300 F 187…264VAC (L-N); 323…456VAC (L-L)
– Direct connection 63A for DME D300 F
– Connection by CT /5A, standard supplied, for
DME D310 F...
Three phase with or without Order code Description of CTs included Qty Wt – Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class B
neutral, expandable, per (EN 50470-3)
pkg – Reactive energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2
MID certified n° [kg] (IEC/EN 62053-23)
Kit comprising 1 DMED310T2MID type – LCD multifunction meter
MID 4U digital counter and three /5A and class 0.5s – Metrological LED with pulse emission for
current transformers. consumption indication
– Clearable partial energy measurements
DME D310 F060 60/5A type DM1TP0060 1 2.100 – 1 programmable digital input
DME D310 F080 80/5A type DM1TP0080 1 2.200 – 2 programmable static outputs
DME D310 F100 100/5A type DM1TP0100 1 1.900 – Optic interface for EXM 10... series expansion
modules with DME D310 F... compatible with
DME D310 F150 150/5A type DM1TP0150 1 1.900 and
DME D310 F200 200/5A type DM1TP0200 1 1.900 – Modular housing 4 module
DME D310 F250 250/5A type DM1TP0250 1 1.900 – Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied
DME D310 F300 300/5A type DM1TP0300 1 1.900
DME D310 F400 400/5A type DM1TP0400 1 1.900 Multi-measurements
DME D310 F500 500/5A type DM3TP0500 1 2.200 – Total and partial active energy
– Total and partial reactive energy
DME D310 F600 600/5A type DM3TP0600 1 2.200 – Voltage
DME D310 F800 800/5A type DM3TP0800 1 2.200 – Current
DME D310 F1000 1000/5A type DM5TP1000 1 2.400 – Active and reactive power
– Power Factor
DME D310 F1250 1250/5A type DM5TP1250 1 2.400 – Frequency
DME D310 F... DME D310 F1600 1600/5A type DM5TP1600 1 2.400 – Total and partial hour counter
DME D310 F2000 2000/5A type DM5TP2000 1 2.400 – Average active power (calculation on every last
15 minutes)
DME D310 F2500 2500/5A type DM5TP2500 1 2.400 – Maximum demand.
DME D310 F3000 3000/5A type DM5TP3000 1 2.400
DM5T CURRENT TRANSFORMERS…
– Operating frequency: 50…60Hz
– Secondary output current: 5A
– Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
Order code Description – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
– Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40-60Ipn for
1 second
DME D310 F EXPANSION MODULES. – Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5Ith for 1 second
Inputs and outputs. – Insulation (dry type): class E
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated – Screw fixing terminals
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay – Standard supplied sealable terminal covers and fixing
outputs rated 5A 250VAC elements
– EN degree of protection: IP30.
Communication ports.
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface supervision and energy management software
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface See Section 27.
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface configuration and remote control software
EXM10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface See Section 27.
EXM10 10
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 and 2 relay outputs rated
23 5A 250VAC EXM series expansion modules
See page 28-3.
Maximum combination Certifications and compliance

Certifications obtained: MID Class B (EN 50470-1,
EN 50470-3), certifications per module B (type tests)
and per module D (production conformity) for
DME D300 F and DME D310F energy meters.
UTF certificates for the DME D300F and for each
component of the starter kits are standard supplied.
Compliant with standards: EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3 for
DME D300 F and DME D310 T2 MID; IEC/EN 60044-1
MAX for DM5T...
3
Data concentrators
Expandable Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per DME CD is equipped with 8 inputs, which can be increased
pkg up to a maximum of 14 and allows to indirectly interface
n° [kg] devices without communication as long as they have at least
one pulse output.
Data concentrator for general use. It is capable of pulse counting that come in from the outputs
DME CD With 8 programmable 1 0.337 of meters for energy, water, gas and other types of
digital inputs, expandable, consumption: All data is viewed on its display or can also be
for data collection + available for PCs through its built-in RS485 interface using
pulse count from or software.
DMEM100T1 and It can be expanded with up to 3 EXM series modules by
DME D…, RS485 port optical interface.
Data concentrator for photovoltaic applications. With the programmable functions, average values can be
determined for instantaneous quantities, such as power,
DME CD PV1 Programmed for 1 0.340 speed, production rate, gas and water consumption, etc.
installation control and
DME CD - DME CD PV1 data collection+pulse DME CD PV1 is specific for the monitoring of solar
count from two installations and needs to be connected to at least two
DMED minimum, DME D… meters (single or three phase). The user can
RS485 port, available of data, such as energy produced by the generating
expandable installation, energy consumed by loads as well as exchanged
Except DME D100 T1. energy (difference between import and export energy) with
the power supplier.
It is already programmed to automatically calculate the
self-consuming index and autonomy, mean power values,
Order code Description production (total and partial values) and the operating status
of the AC/DC inverter, if it is equipped with digital outputs.
In addition, it can be customised by the user for load
DME CD AND DME CD PV1 EXPANSION MODULES. supervision, using the EXM series expansion modules,
Inputs and outputs. according to the defined logics and on the basis of the
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated energy available.
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs
rated 5A 250VAC Operational characteristics
– Nominal supply voltage: 100...240VAC/110...250VDC
EXM10 02 4 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay – Voltage range: 85...264VAC/93,5...300VDC
outputs rated 5A 250VAC – Backlight graphic LCD
Communication ports. – 8 inputs, expandable with EXM 10… modules up to 14
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – Built-in RS485 communication port
– Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP communication protocol
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – Multifunction display
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface – Clearable total and partial counters for each channel
EXM10 10 – Programmable general counters
EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function
– Calculation of derivative average values
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay – Mathematical operations among counters
outputs, rated 5A 250VAC – Modular housing, 4 module
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
reserve energy for data logging
See Section 27.
Maximum combination configuration and remote control software
See Section 27.
EXM series expansion modules

See page 28-3.

Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL listed for USA and
Canada (cULus – File E346886), as Electrical Process Control
MAX Equipment – Data concentrator for DMECD; pending for
3 DMECDPV1 and DMEKITCDPV1100.
23
Digital measuring instruments.
Starter kits
Modular LCD multimeters Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

non expandable code per DMG... digital multimeters are available with a modular
pkg. housing, 4 module size, and are equipped with a graphic
n° [kg] backlight LCD (except DMG 100/101/110 with icon display)
capable of providing extremely clear, intuitive and flexible
DMG 100 Icon LCD, auxiliary supply 1 0.294 viewing of all electrical parameters of an installation.
100...240VAC/120...250VDC. For DMG 110 and DMG 210 versions, there is a built-in
Multilanguage: Italian, isolated RS485 interface, while DMG 101 features 2
English, French, Spanish, programmable digital inputs and 2 outputs.
Portuguese and German Main measurements:
DMG 101 Icon LCD, auxiliary supply 1 0.294 – Voltage: phase, line and system values
100...240VAC/120...250VDC. – Current: phase values (neutral current calculated)
2 digital inputs and 2 outputs. – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total
Multilanguage: Italian, values
English, French, Spanish, – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
Portuguese and German – Frequency of measured voltage value
DMG 110 Icon LCD, RS485 port, 1 0.294 – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions of all
auxiliary supply measurements
DMG 1... – Maximum demand of power and current values
100...240VAC/120...250VDC.
Multilanguage: Italian, – Asymmetric voltage and current
English, French, Spanish, – Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
Portuguese and German values
– Energy meters for active, reactive and apparent values
DMG 200 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.294 – Hour counter (total and partial, 1 on DMG 200/210,
auxiliary supply 4 programmable on DMG 100/101/110)
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. – Phase energy (DMG 100/110)
Multilanguage: Italian, – Harmonic analysis up to the 15th order (DMG 100/110).
English, French, Spanish
and Portuguese Operational characteristic
DMG 200 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.294 – Auxiliary supply voltage range:
auxiliary supply 85...264VAC / 93,5...300VDC
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. – Maximum rated measurement voltage
Multilanguage: English, Czech, • 600VAC (DMG 100/101/110)
Polish, German and Russian • 690VAC (DMG 200/210)
– Voltage measurement range:
DMG 210 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.300 • 50...720VAC phase-to-phase (DMG 100/101/110)
RS485 port, auxiliary supply • 20...830VAC phase-to-phase (DMG 200/210)
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. – Usage in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
Multilanguage: Italian, transformers
English, French, Spanish – Rated input current: With external CT /5A (also 1A for
DMG 200 - DMG 210 and Portuguese DMG 100/101/110)
DMG 210 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.300 – Current measurement range with CT up to 10,000A
RS485 port, auxiliary supply – Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz
100-240VAC/110-250VDC. – True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
Multilanguage: English, – Accuracy:
Czech, Polish, German • Voltage: ±0,5% (50...720VAC for DMG 1...)
and Russian (50...830VAC) for DMG 2...
• Current: ±0,5% (0,1...1,1In)
• Power: ±1% f.s.
• Frequency: ±0,05%
Starter kits Order code Description Qty Wt • Active energy: Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21)
per • Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
pkg – Non-volatile memory for data storage
n° [kg] – Communication protocol Modbus-RTU and ASCII
DMG KIT 100 060 Composed of one 1 1.035 (only for DMG 210 and DMG 110)
DMG 100 multimeter – Programming and remote control by software
and n°3 CTs 60/5A for (only for DMG 210 and DMG 110; compatible with
Ø22mm cable and software)
– Modular housing, 4 module
DMG KIT 100 100 Composed of one 1 1.035 – Degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals.
DMG 100 multimeter
and n°3 CTs 100/5A for CURRENT TRANSFORMERS OF DMG… KITS
Ø22mm cable – Operating frequency: 50…60Hz
DMG KIT 100 150 Composed of one 1 0.856 – Secondary output current: 5A
DMG 100 multimeter – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
and n°3 CTs 150/5A for – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
Ø23mm cable – Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40…60Ipn for 1
second
DMG KIT 100 250 Composed of one 1 0.856 – Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5Ith for 1 second
DMG 100 multimeter – Insulation (dry type): class E
23 and n°3 CTs 200/5A for
Ø23mm cable
– Faston terminals
– Degree of protection: IP30.
See Section 27.
DMG KIT 100 150
See Section 27.
Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA
and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices -
Multimeter for DMG 1.../DMG 2... types.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4; UL61010-1,
CSA C22.2 n° 61010-1 for DMG 100/110 (DMG 101
pending); UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14 for DMG 200/210;
IEC/EN 60044-1 for transformers of starter kits.
Software and accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Digital measuring instruments
Modular LCD multimeters Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

expandable code per DMG 300 digital multimeters are available with a modular
pkg housing, 4 module size, and are equipped with a graphic
n° [kg] backlight LCD capable of providing extremely clear, intuitive
and flexible viewing of all electrical parameters of a system.
DMG 300 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.320 The very accurate measurements combined with their
harmonic analysis, extreme compactness provide an ideal solution for every
auxiliary supply type of application.
100-240VAC/110-250VDC, Expandable with up to 3 EXM series modules interfaced by
expandable with modules infrared beam.
series EXM... Main measurements:
Multilanguage: Italian, – Voltage: phase, line and system values
English, French, Spanish – Current: phase values (neutral current calculated)
and Portuguese – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total
DMG 300 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.320 values
harmonic analysis, – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
auxiliary supply – Frequency of measured voltage value
DMG 300 100-240VAC/110-250VDC, – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all
expandable with modules measuements
series EXM... – Maximum demand of power and current values
Multilanguage: English, Czech, – Voltage and current asymmetry
Polish, German and Russian – Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
values
– Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to 31° order
– Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
Order Description total values, programmable tariff functions
code – Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
DMG 300 AND DMG 300 L01 EXPANSION MODULES. – Pulse counter for general use: consumption pulse
Inputs and outputs. counting for water, gas, etc. with expansion module only.
EXM10 00 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated Operational characteristics
EXM10 01 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs – Auxiliary supply voltage range:
rated 5A 250VAC 85...264VAC / 93.5...300VDC
EXM10 02 4 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay – Voltage measurement range:
outputs rated 5A 250VAC 20...830VAC phase-to-phase
10...480VAC phase-neutral
Communication ports. – Usage in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
EXM10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface transformers
EXM10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface – Rated input current: With external CT, 5A or 1A
– Current measurement range with CT up to 10,000A
EXM10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface – Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz
EXM10 10 EXM10 13 Ethernet interface with Web server function – True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
EXM10 20 Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay outputs – Accuracy:
rated 5A 250VAC • Voltage: ±0.2% (50-830VAC)
• Current: ±0.2% (0.1-1.1 In)
EXM10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup • Power: ±0.5% f.s.
battery for data logging • Power factor: ±0.5%
• Frequency: 0.05%
• Active energy: Class 0.5S (IEC/EN 62053-22)
Maximum combination • Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
– Non-volatile memory for data storage
– Communication protocol Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP
(only with communication expansion modules)
– Programming and remote control by software
(only with communication expansion modules);
compatible with and software
– Modular housing, 4 module
MAX supervision and energy management software

3 See Section 27.

See Section 27.
EXM10 series expansion modules

See page 28-3.

23
Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Flush mount LCD Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

multimeters, expandable code per DMG 600/610, DMG 700 and DMG 800 digital multimeters
pkg are capable of viewing the measurements with high
n° [kg] accuracy on the wide graphic LCD, which allow to control
energy distribution networks.
DMG 600 Backlight icon LCD 72x46mm 1 0.300 They are available with a flush-mount housing,
harmonic analysis, auxiliary (96x96mm/3.78”x3.78”) and expansion slots to fit plug-in
supply 100…440VAC/120… expansion modules (1 for DMG 600/610 and 4 for
250VDC, front optical port. DMG 700/800), suitable for numerous applications.
Multilanguage: Italian, The main features include an extended power supply
English, French, Spanish, voltage range, high measurement accuracy, expandability
Portuguese and German. and graphic interactive interface for simple use.
DMG 610 Backlight icon 72x46mm 1 0.350 Main measurements:
harmonic analysis, auxiliary – Voltage: phase, line and system values
100…440VAC/120… – Current: phase values (neutral current calculated)
supply 250VDC, built-in RS485 – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total
DMG 600 - DMG 610
front optical serial port. values
Multilanguage: Italian, English, – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
French, Spanish, Portuguese – Frequency of measured voltage value
and German – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all
DMG 700 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.510 measurements
auxiliary supply – Maximum demand of power and current values
100...440VAC/110...250VDC – Voltage and current asymmetry
Multilanguage: Italian, English, – Total harmonic distortion (THD): voltage and current
French, Spanish and Portuguese – Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the 15°
(DMG 600/610) and 31° order (only DMG 800)
DMG 700 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.510 – Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
auxiliary supply total values
100...440VAC/110...250VDC – Programmable tariff functions (only DMG 700/800)
Multilanguage: English, Czech, – Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
Polish, German and Russian – Pulse counter for general use: consumption pulse
DMG 700 - DMG 800...
DMG 800 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.510 counting for water, gas, etc., with expansion module
harmonic analysis, only DMG 700/800.
auxiliary supply
100...440VAC/110...250VDC
– Auxiliary supply voltage range:
Multilanguage: Italian, English,
• 90...484VAC / 93,5...300VDC per DMG 600/610/700/800
French, Spanish and Portuguese
• 9...70VDC per DMG 800 D048
DMG 800 L01 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.510 – Voltage measurement range:
harmonic analysis, 20...830VAC L-L / per DMG 700/800
auxiliary supply 50...720VAC L-L per DMG 600/610
100...440VAC/110...250VDC – Usage in medium and high voltage systems with
Multilanguage: English, Czech, voltage transformers
Polish, German and Russian – Rated input current: By external CT 5A for DMG 700;
DMG 800 D048 Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 0.520 By external CT 5A or 1A for DMG 600/610, DMG 800
harmonic analysis, auxiliary – Frequency measurement range 45...66Hz
supply 12-24-48VDC – True RMS measurements: for voltage and current
– Measurement accuracy for DMG 600/610-DMG 700:
DMG M3 800 01 DMG 800 portable unit in 1 3.300
• Voltage: ±0,5% (50...720VAC per DMG 600/610;
M3N case, prewired,
50...830VAC per DMG 700)
for mobile applications,
• Current: ±0,5% (0,1...1,1In)
with USB port, without
• Power: ±1% f.s.
external cable (see p. 23-26)
DMG M3 800 01 • Frequency: ±0,05%
• Active energy: Classe 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21)
• Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
– Measurement accuracy for DMG 800..:
• Voltage: ±0,2% (50...830VAC)
Order Description
• Current: ±0,2% (0,1...1,1In)
code
• Power: ±0,5% f.s.
DMG600/610, DMG700, DMG800 EXPANSION MODULES • Power factor: ±0,5%
Inputs and outputs. • Frequency: ±0,05%
EXP10 00 4 opto-isolated digital inputs • Active energy: Class 0,5s (IEC/EN 62053-22)
• Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
EXP10 01 4 opto-isolated static outputs
– Non-volatile memory for data storage
EXP10 02 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated – Communication protocol Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC – Compatible with and software
– Flush-mount housing 96x96mm/3.78”x3.78”
EXP10 04 2 opto-isolated analog inputs 0/4-20mA or
– Degree of protection: On front IP54 DMG 600/610;
PT100 or 0-10V or 0...±5V for DMG 800
IP65 all others. All IP20 at terminals.
EXP10 05 2 opto-isolated analog outputs 0/4-20mA or
23 0-10V or 0...±5V for DMG 800 Overall M3N case dimensions: See page 4-17.
EXP10 08 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay supervision and energy management software
outputs rated 5A 250VAC See Section 27.
EXP10...
Communication ports. configuration and remote control software
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface See Section 27.
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface EXP series expansion modules
See page 28-2.
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with web Certifications and compliance
server function Certifications obtained: EAC for all except DMGM380001;
UL listed for USA and Canada (cULus – File E93601), as
EXP10 14 Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface Auxiliary Devices – Multimeters for DMG… types pending
for DMG 800 for DMG600/610 and excluding DMGM380001.
EXP10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1,
reserve energy for data logging for DMG 800 IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22-2 n°14.
Flush mount LCD touch- Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

screen power analyzers, code per DMG 900... expandable digital power analyzers are available
pkg. with a flush-mount housing, 96x96mm/3.78”x3.78”.
expandable n° [kg] The wide graphic touch screen display provides extremely
simple interacting between the device and the user.
DMG 900 Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.566 The high performance of the power analyzers gives very
touch-screen LCD, harmonic accurate measurements and can control energy distribution
analysis, 4 current channels, networks, to detect and prevent energy problems which could
(neutral meas.), compromise quality and supply.
100...440VAC/110...250VDC. The main features include an extensive power supply voltage
Multilanguage: Italian, range, high measurement accuracy, expandability up to 4 plug
English, French, Spanish in expansion modules.
and Portuguese There also is available the DMG 900T measurement
DMG 900 L01 Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.566 transducer which can be used with the DMG 900RD remote
touch-screen LCD, harmonic display. The DMG 900T, without display, is arranged for
analysis, 4 current channels, mounting inside the panel board, on 35mm DIN rail, and is an
(neutral meas.), ideal solution for installations where the measurements of
DMG 900... various multimeters must be remotely viewed.
100...440VAC/110...250VDC.
Multilanguage: English, Czech, The DMG 900RD remote display connected to the DMG 900T
transducer can display the measurements on the panel front
Polish, German and Russian
while power connections remain inside the panel.
DMG 900 D048 Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.580 Main measurements and functions include:
touch-screen LCD, – Voltage: phase, phase-neutral and ground neutral-earth
harmonic analysis, – Supply voltage value (only DMG... D048)
4 current channels, auxiliary – Current: phase values
supply 12-24-48VDC – Neutral current calculated and true values
DMG M3 900 01 DMG 900 portable unit in 1 3.400 – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total values
M3N case, prewired for – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total
mobile applications, with – Cos per phase and total
USB port, without external – Frequency of measured voltage value
cables (see page 23-26) – Voltage and current asymmetry
– Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current
DMG 900T Measurement transducer, 1 0.570 – Harmonic analysis of voltage and current up to the 63° order
harmonic analysis, 4 current – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions for all measurements
channels (neutral meas.), – Maximum demand of power and current values
100...440VAC/110...250VDC, – Energy meters for active, reactive, apparent partial and
RS232 and RS485 ports total values with programmable tariff functions
DMG 900T D048 Measurement transducer, 1 0.590 – Hour counter for programmable total and partial hours
harmonic analysis, 4 current – Pulse counter for general use: consumption pulse
channels (neutral meas.), counting for water, gas, etc., with expansion module only
12-24-48VDC, RS232 – Energy quality analysis to EN 50160 Class B (with
and RS485 ports expansion module).
DMG M3 900 01 Operational characteristics
Remote display for DMG 900T...
DMG 900RD Graphic 128x112 pixel 1 0.396
90...484VAC / 93,5...300VDC for DMG 900 and DMG 900T;
touch screen LCD, with 3m
9...70VDC for DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048
long connecting cable
– Voltage measurement range:
No simultaneous operations of serial ports. 20...830VAC phase-to-phase
Consult Customer Service for information (Tel. 035 4282422; 10...480VAC phase-neutral
E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com) or the instructions manual.
Direct link to DMG 900T dedicated port: powered directly by DMG 900T.
– Usage in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage
transformers
– rated input current: 5A or 1A via CT
– Current measurement range: 0,05...10A o 0,01...1.2A
Order Description – Current measurements via CT up to 10,000A
DMG 900T... code – Frequency measurement range: 45...66Hz / 360...440Hz
– True RMS measurements for voltage and current values
DMG 900 and DMG 900 T EXPANSION MODULES. Accuracy:
Inputs and outputs. • Voltage: ±0,2% (50...830VAC)
EXP10 00 4 opto-isolated digital inputs • Current: ±0,2% (0.1...1.1In)
EXP10 01 4 opto-isolated static outputs • Power: ±0,5% f.s.
• Power factor: ±0,5%
EXP10 02 2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated • Frequency: ±0.05%
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC • Active energy: Class 0.5s (IEC/EN 62053-22)
EXP10 04 2 opto-isolated analog inputs 0/4-20mA or • Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23)
PT100 or 0-10V or 0...±5V – Non-volatile memory for data and event (last 100) storage
– Communication protocol Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP
EXP10 05 2 opto-isolated analog outputs 0/4-20mA or with communication expansion modules only
0-10V or 0...±5V – Programming and remote control by software with
DMG 900RD EXP10 08 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs communication expansion modules only
rated 5A 250VAC – Housing: 96x96mm/3.78”x3.78” flush mount (for
Communication ports. DMG 900... and DMG 900RD) and 35mm DIN rail (for 23
DMG 900T...)
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – Degree of protection: IP65 on front for DMG 900 -
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface DMG 900RD; IP20 at terminals for DMG 900 - DMG 900T.
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface supervision and energy management software
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with Web See Section 27.
server function configuration and remote control software
EXP10 14 Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface See Section 27.
EXP10 15 GPRS/GSM modem, without antenna EXP series expansion modules - See page 28-2.
EXP10... EXP10 30 Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup Certifications and compliance
reserve energy for data logging Certifications obtained: EAC for all except DMG M3...;
EXP10 31 Data storage, with Energy Quality (EN 50160 - UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as
class B), clock-calendar (RTC) with backup Auxiliary Devices-Multimeters for all except DMG M3...
reserve energy for data logging Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2,
IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
Flush-mount LED Order Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics

instruments single phase code measurements output per The DMK 0... instruments are available with flush-mount
pkg housing, 96x48mm/3.78x1.89”.
non expandable n° n° n° [kg] Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
reliable operation even in the presence of harmonics.
Voltmeter.
DMK 00 1 voltage value – 1 0.290 Operational characteristics
1 max voltage value – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC;
DMK 00 R1 1 1 0.323 – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
1 min voltage value
– True RMS measurements
Ammeter. – Max. and Min. measurement storage
DMK 01 1 current value – 1 0.290 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (for
DMK 01 R1 1 max current value 1 1 0.323 DMK...R1 only)
DMK 0... 1 min current value – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.89”
Voltmeter or ammeter. – Terminals: 4mm2
DMK 02 1 voltage or – 1 0.290
current value DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1
1 maximum voltage – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
or current value – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
1 minimum voltage – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
or current value – Accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
Frequency meter.
DMK 03 1 frequency value – 1 0.290 DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1
1 max frequency value 1 – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
DMK 03 R1 1 0.323 – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
1 min frequency value
– Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
Cosphi meter. – Accuracy: ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 04 1 cosphi value – 1 0.290
DMK 04 R1 1 power factor value 1 1 0.323 DMK 02
– Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
The DMK02 can operate as a voltmeter or ammeter. It is duly equipped – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
with two front plates (V and A) which must be fitted by the user
depending on which instrument is required and on the wiring scheme – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
used. – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
Relay output for control and protection functions. – Programmable CT ratio: OFF/5-10,000
– Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1
– Measurement input: 15-660VAC
– Frequency measurement range: 15-65Hz
– Accuracy: ±1 digit
DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1
– Cosphi measurement error: ±0.5° ±1 digit
– Cosphi measurement in 4 quadrants
– Accuracy: ±1° ±1 digit
Control and protection functions

DMK 00 R1
– Voltage loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
– Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
– Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
– Time delay for max-min voltage or voltage loss, phase
loss : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 01 R1
– Current loss: OFF/2-100%
– Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
– Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
– Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 03 R1
– Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
– Minimum frequency: OFF/90-99%
– Time delay for min-max frequency :
0.5-900.0 seconds.
23
DMK 04 R1
– Minimum-maximum cos thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Minimum-maximum PF thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Delay time for max or min threshold :
1-9,000 seconds.

Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-
Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
Independent adjustable delays.

Flush-mount LED Order Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics

code measurements output per The DMK 1... instruments are available with flush-mount
instruments three phase pkg housing, 96x48mm/3.78x1.89”.
non expandable n° n° n° [kg]
Measurements are TRMS values and provide for reliable
operation even in the presence of harmonics.
Voltmeter. Operational characteristics
DMK 10 3 phase voltage values – 1 0.297 – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC;
3 phase to phase – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
DMK 10 R1 1 1 0.330 – TRMS measurements
voltage values
– Max and Min measurement storage
3 maximum phase – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (for
voltage values DMK...R1 only)
3 maximum phase to – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.89”
phase voltage values – Terminals: 4mm2
DMK 1... 3 minimum phase – Degree of protection: IP54 on front; IP20 at terminals.
voltage values DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1
3 minimum phase to – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
phase voltage values – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
Ammeter. – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
– Accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit.
DMK 11 3 phase current values – 1 0.292
3 maximum phase DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1
DMK 11 R1 1 1 0.336 – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
current values
3 minimum phase – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
current values – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
– Accuracy: ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit.
Voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter.
DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1
DMK 15 3 phase voltage values – 1 0.332 – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
DMK 15 R1 3 phase to phase 1 1 0.350 – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
voltage values – Frequency measure range: 45-65Hz
3 phase current values – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
4 active power values, – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
phase and total – Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
3 maximum phase Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
voltage values Power ±1% f.s. ±1 digit.
3 maximum phase to Control and protection functions
phase voltage values DMK 10 R1
3 maximum phase – Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
current values – Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
4 maximum active – Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
power values, – Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
phase and total – Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
– Frequency
3 minimum phase
• Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
voltage values • Minimum frequency: OFF/90-99%
3 minimum phase to • Time delay for max-min voltage, phase loss,
phase voltage values asymmetry and min-max frequency : 0.5-900.0
3 minimum phase seconds.
current values
4 minimum active DMK 11 R1
power values,
phase and total – Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
Connection also to single phase. OFF/110-600%
Relay output for control and protection functions. – Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
– Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss and
asymmetry : 0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 15 R1
– Voltage
• Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
• Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
• Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
• Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
• Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
– Current
• Current loss: OFF/5-85%
• Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
• Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
• Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
• Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
– Power
• Rated power: 1-10,000
• Maximum power: OFF/101-200% 23
• Max. power instantaneous tripping: OFF/110-600%
• Minimum power: OFF/10-99%
– Frequency
• Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
• Minimum frequency OFF/90-99%
• Time delay for max-min voltage, max-min current or
current loss, phase loss, asymmetry and min-max
power : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.

page 23-25 page 23-30 page 23-35 page 23-44 23-19
Flush-mount LED multimeter Order Displayed Qty Wt General characteristics

three phase code measurements per The DMK 16 multimeter is available with flush-mount
pkg housing, 96x48mm/3.78x1.89”.
non expandable n° [kg] Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
DMK 16 3 phase voltage values 1 0.350
3 phase to phase voltage Operational characteristics
values – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC;
3 phase current values – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
4 active power values, phase – True RMS measurements
and total – Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
4 reactive power values, Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
phase and total – Active energy accuracy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-21
DMK 16 4 apparent power values, and IEC/EN 62053-23)
phase and total – Max and Min measurement storage
3 phase power factor values – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
1 frequency value – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
1 active energy value in kWh – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
1 reactive energy value – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.0
in kvarh – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
1 hour counter – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.89”
3 maximum phase voltage – Terminals: 4mm2
values – Degree of protection: IP54 on front; IP20 at terminals.
3 maximum phase to phase
voltage values Certifications and compliance
3 maximum phase current Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
values Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices-
4 maximum active power Multimeters.
values, phase and total Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1,
4 maximum reactive power IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
values, phase and total CSA C22.2 n° 14.
4 maximum apparent power
values, phase and total
3 minimum phase voltage
values
3 minimum phase to phase
voltage values
3 minimum phase
current values
4 minimum active power
4 minimum reactive power
4 minimum apparent power
23

Flush-mount LED Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

multimeter three phase code per The DMK 16 R1 multimeter is available with flush-mount
pkg housing, 96x48mm/3.78x1.89”
non expandable n° [kg] Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
DMK 16 R1 3 phase voltage values 1 0.350
3 phase to phase voltage Operational characteristics
values – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC
3 phase current values – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
4 active power values, phase – True RMS measurements
and total – Accuracy: Voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
4 reactive power values, Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
phase and total – Active energy accuracy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-21
DMK 16 R1 4 apparent power values, and IEC/EN 62053-23)
phase and total – Max and Min measurement storage
3 phase power factor values – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
1 frequency value – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
1 active energy value in kWh – Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz
1 reactive energy value – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.0
in kvarh – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
1 hour counter – 1 relay output with 1 changeover (SPDT) contact
3 maximum phase voltage – Housing: Flush mount 96x48mm/3.78x1.89”
values – Terminals: 4mm2
3 maximum phase to phase – Degree of protection: IP54 on front; IP20 at terminals.
voltage values
3 maximum phase current PROGRAMMABLE RELAY OUTPUT
values – Voltage
4 maximum active power • Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
values, phase and total • Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
4 maximum reactive power • Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
values, phase and total • Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
4 maximum apparent power • Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
values, phase and total – Current
3 minimum phase voltage • Protection inhibition max current: OFF/2-100%
values • Maximum current: OFF/102-200%
3 minimum phase to phase • Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
voltage values OFF/110-600%
3 minimum phase • Minimum current: OFF/5-98%
current values • Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
4 minimum active power – Power factor
values, phase and total • Maximum power factor: 0.10-1.00
4 minimum reactive power • Minimum power factor: 0.10-1.00
values, phase and total – Time delay for max-min voltage, max-min current or
4 minimum apparent power current loss, phase loss, asymmetry and min-max
values, phase and total power factor : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
2 minimum and maximum
power factor values Certifications and compliance
Connection also to single phase.
Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508,
CSA C22.2 n° 14.
23

page 23-25 page 23-30 page 23-35 page 23-44 23-21
Digital metering instruments
Flush mount LED Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

multimeters per DMK 2... digital multimeters are available with flush-mount
pkg. housing, 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”. They monitor and view
non expandable n° [kg] reliable readings of electrical parameters, even in the
47 electrical parameters DMK 20 Basic version, auxiliary 1 0.434
presence of critical operating conditions, such as voltages
and currents with high harmonic content and variable
supply 208...240VAC frequency.
DMK 21 Version with energy 1 0.477 The total and partial hour counter provides an interesting
meters included, auxiliary feature for electric panels of emergency generating sets.
supply 208...240VAC The diversified and accurate measurements give the
DMK 22 Version with energy 1 0.477 multimeters valuable technical and cost effective advantages
meters and RS485 port with respect to traditional analog instrumentation.
included, auxiliary supply DMK2... digital multimeters view 47 electrical parameters:
208...240VAC – Voltage: phase, line and system values
– Current: phase values
– Power: active and reactive values, apparent phase.
– P.F.: power factor per phase
DMK 2... – Frequency (measured voltage frequency)
– HIGH/LOW: instantaneous minimum and maximum
values of each phase voltage and current, total active
power (W), total reactive power (var) and total
apparent power (VA) values
– Total hours: non-volatile clearable log for DMK 20
– Partial hours: non-volatile configurable log for DMK 20
– Active and reactive energy meters for DMK21 and
DMK22 only.
• 154-288VAC for DMK 20
• 177-264VAC for DMK 21-DMK 22
– Voltage measurement range: 60-830VAC phase-phase
30-480VAC phase-neutral
– Current measurement range: 0.05-6A
– Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz
– Programmable CT ratio: 1.0-2,000
– Voltage accuracy: Class 0.5 ±0.35% f.s. (830V)
– Current accuracy: Class 0.5 ±0.5% f.s. (6A)
– Active energy accuracy: Class 2
– Total and partial hour counter (can be used as
maintenance with optical alarm and separate resetting)
(DMK 20)
– HIGH and LOW value functions to read and log
instantaneous voltage, current and power values
– Delayed automatic resetting of default measurements
– Averaging function to slow down repetitive fluctuations
to obtain more stable readouts
– Current connection in ARON configuration by 2 current
transformers (CTs) only
– Single, two, three phase, with or without neutral,
– TRMS measurements
– RS485 serial port, compatible with software
for DMK 22
– Housing: Flush mount 96x96mm/3.78x3.78”

See Section 27.

Multimeters.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n°14.
23
Software and accessories Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Modular LED instruments Order Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics

single phase code measurements output per The DMK 8... instruments are available with modular
pkg housing, 3 module size.
non expandable n° n° n° [kg] Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
Voltmeter.
DMK 80 1 voltage value – 1 0.237 Operational characteristics
DMK 80 R1 1 max voltage value 1 1 0.268 – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC
1 min voltage value – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
Ammeter. – True RMS measurements
– Max and Min measurement storage
DMK 81 1 current value – 1 0.237 – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) for
DMK 81 R1 1 max current value 1 1 0.268 DMK...R1 version only
1 min current value – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 3 modules
DMK 80 DMK 80 R1 Voltmeter or ammeter. – Terminals: 4mm2
DMK 82 1 voltage or current – 1 0.241 – Degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 on
value terminals.
1 maximum voltage
or current value DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1
1 minimum voltage – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
or current value – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
– Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
Frequency meter. – Accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 83 1 frequency value – 1 0.237
DMK 83 R1 1 max frequency value 1 1 0.268 DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1
1 min frequency value – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
Cosphi meter. – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
DMK 81 DMK 81 R1 – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
DMK 84 1 cosphi value – 1 0.241 – Accuracy: ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 84 R1 1 power factor value 1 1 0.272
The DMK82 can operate as a voltmeter or ammeter. It is duly equipped
DMK 82
with two front plates (V and A) which must be fitted by the user – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
depending on which instrument is required and on the wiring scheme – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
used. – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
Relay output with control and protection functions. – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
– Programmable CT ratio: OFF/5-10,000
– Accuracy: Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1
– Measurement input: 15-660VAC
DMK 82 DMK 82
– Frequency measurement range: 50-60Hz ±10%
– Measurement accuracy: ±1 digit
– Accuracy: ±1 digit
DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
– Cosphi measurement error: ±0.5° ±1 digit
– Cosphi measurement in 4 quadrants
– Accuracy: ±1° ±1 digit
Control and protection functions

DMK 80 R1
– Voltage loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
DMK 83 DMK 83 R1 – Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
– Time delay for max-min voltage or voltage loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 81 R1
OFF/110-600%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss :
0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 84 DMK 84 R1 DMK 83 R1

– Time delay for min-max frequency :
23
0.5-900.0 seconds.
DMK 84 R1
– Minimum-maximum cos thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Minimum-maximum PF thresholds in 4 quadrants
– Delay time for max or min threshold :
1-9,000 seconds.

IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.

Modular LED instruments Order Displayed Relay Qty Wt General characteristics

The DMK 7... instruments are available with modular
three phase code measurements output per
housing, 3 module size.
pkg
non expandable Measurements are True RMS values and provide for
n° n° n° [kg] reliable operation even in the presence of harmonics.
Voltmeter. Operational characteristics
DMK 70 3 phase voltage values – 1 0.233 – Auxiliary supply voltage: 220-240VAC
3 phase to phase – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
DMK 70 R1 1 1 0.264
voltage values – True RMS measurements
3 max phase voltage – Max and Min measurement storage
values – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) for
3 max phase to phase DMK...R1 version only
voltage values
– Terminals: 4mm2
3 min phase voltage – Degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 on terminals.
DMK 70 DMK 70 R1 values
3 min phase to phase DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1
voltage values – Voltage measurement range: 15-660VAC
– Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
Ammeter. – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
DMK 71 3 phase current values – 1 0.241 – Accuracy: ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 71 R1 3 max phase current 1 1 0.272 DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1
values – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
3 min phase current – Operating frequency range: 45-65Hz
values – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
Combined voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter. – Accuracy: ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
DMK 75 3 phase voltage values – 1 0.271 DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1
3 phase to phase – Voltage measurement range: 35-660VAC
DMK 71 DMK 71 R1 DMK 75 R1 1 1 0.280
voltage values – Current measurement range: 0.05-5.75A
3 phase current values – Frequency measure range: 45-65Hz
4 active power values, – Programmable VT ratio: 1.00-500.00
phase and total – Programmable CT ratio: 5-10,000
3 maximum phase
– Accuracy: Current ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
voltage values
3 maximum phase to Control and protection functions
phase voltage values DMK 70 R1
3 maximum phase – Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
current values – Maximum voltage: OFF/102-120%
4 max active power, – Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
phase and total – Asymmetry: OFF/2-20%
3 minimum phase – Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
DMK 75 DMK 75 R1 – Maximum frequency: OFF/101-110%
voltage values
3 minimum phase to – Time delay for max-min voltage, phase loss,
phase voltage values asymmetry and min-max frequency :
3 minimum phase 0.0-900.0 seconds.
current values
4 min active power, DMK 71 R1
phase and total – Current loss: OFF/2-100%
Connection also to single phase. – Maximum current instantaneous tripping:
Relay output with control and protection functions. OFF/110-600%
– Time delay for max-min current or current loss and
asymmetry : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
DMK 75 R1
Voltage
– Phase loss or failure: OFF/5-85%
– Minimum voltage: OFF/70-98%
– Phase sequence: OFF/L1-L2-L3/L3-L2-L1
Current
OFF/110-600%
Power
– Rated power: 1-10,000
23 – Maximum power: OFF/101-200%
– Maximum power instantaneous tripping:
OFF/110-600%
– Minimum power: OFF/10-99%
Frequency
– Time delay for max-min voltage, max-min current or
current loss, phase loss, asymmetry and min-max
power : 0.0-900.0 seconds.
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.

23-24 page 23-31 page 23-35 page 23-44
Accessories for measuring instruments
Communication devices Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per Communication devices for connection of LOVATO
pkg Electric products to personal computers, smartphones
n° [kg] and tablets.
CX 01 USB/optical dongle with 1 0.090 CX 01
PC LOVATO Electric product The USB/optical dongle, complete with cable, allows the
connecting cable, for connection of products compatible with PCs without
programming, data download, having to disconnect the power supply from the electric
diagnostics and firmware panel.
CX 01 upgrade The PC identifies the connection as a standard USB.
CX 02 Wi-Fi dongle for PC LOVATO 1 0.090
Electric product programming, CX 02
data download, diagnostics and By Wi-Fi connection, compatible LOVATO Electric
cloning products can be viewed on PCs, smartphones and
CX 03 GSM/GPRS penta-band antenna 1 0.090 tablets with no need for cabling.
(850/900/1800/1900/2100Mhz)
for EXP1015 expansion module CX 03
Antenna compatible with the major part of worldwide
CX 02 mobile networks thanks to the available frequencies at
850/900/1800/1900/2100MHz.
Degree of protection: IP67. Fixing by Ø10mm drilling.
Cable length: 2.5mm
For dimensions, wiring schemes and technical

characteristics, refer to technical instructions in the
Downloads section at:
CX 03 www.LovatoElectric.com
Protection covers Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per When a higher front IP protection degree is needed, the
pkg covers can be installed on the corresponding devices
and also provide a sealing feature.
n° [kg]
PA 96X48 Front protection cover, IEC IP65 1 0.048
for DMK 0/1...
31 PA 96X96 Front protection cover, IEC IP54 1 0.077
for DMK 2...
31 PA96x96
Accessories Order code Description Qty Wt

per
pkg
n° [kg]
EXP80 00 Plastic insert for customising 10 0.005
label fixing for DMG 600/610
EXP80 00 EXM80 04 Set of sealable terminal covers for 1 0.020
DMG 100/101/110/200/210/300
23
23-25
Accessories for measuring instruments
Converter Order code Description Qty Wt General characteristics

per EXC CON 01 CONVERTER
pkg. The EXC CON 01 converter allows “Slave” devices
n° [kg] connected on an RS485 network to interface with a
“Master” featuring Ethernet port:
EXC CON 01 RS485/Ethernet 12…48VDC 1 0.400 – kit comprising converter and DIN rail mounting
converter, including DIN rail accessory;
fixing kit – programming via web interface;
4 PX1 RS232/RS485 galvanically 1 0.600 – power supply not included.
isolated converter supply
220...240VAC 4 PX1 CONVERTER (RS232-RS485)
EXC CON 01 (or 110...120VAC). It can interface “Slave” devices connected in an RS485
Repeater for bus extension bus with a “Master” equipped with RS232 interface port.
RS485 When configured appropriately, it can also be used as
RS485 repeater whenever the devices connected to the
bus are many or the maximum distance among the bus
devices is longer than the allowed.
EXC M3G 01 GATEWAY

The EXC M3G 01 gateway allows “Slave” devices
connected on an RS485 network to interface with a
4 PX1 “Master” via 3G network:
– TCP server connection via 3G or 2G network;
– Transparent operating mode: the data is transferred
Gateway Order code Description Qty Wt from 3G side to serial side and vice versa without
per protocol conversion;
pkg – Parameters that can be set: TCP server remote port
n° [kg] and IP, network operator APN (with username and
password), SIM card PIN (with enablement),
EXC M3G 01 RS485/3G modem, 1 0.340 connection timeout, serial parameters (baud rate from
9.5…27VAC/9.5…35VDC, 1200bps to 115200bps, stop bit, number of
including antenna and characters, parity);
programming cable, length 2.5m – RJ45 port for parameter programming and diagnosis
with a simple software application.
– Compatible with major worldwide mobile phone
networks, thanks to the use of
850/900/1800/1900/2100MHz frequencies.
Protection rating IP67.
Fixing hole Ø10mm. Cable length 2.5m.
EXC M3G 01
CONNECTING CABLES 51 C…
To connect energy meters and/or multimeters with:
Connecting cables Order code Description Qty Wt – Personal computers
per – Modems
pkg. – Bus converters.
n° [kg]
Electrical safety for DMG M3 KIT...
51 C2 For PCmultimeter 1 0.090 (IEC/EN 61010-1 and IEC/EN 611-2-032)
RS232 port, 1.8m long CURRENT CLAMPS
51 C4 For PC4 PX1 1 0.147 – 600V category III
converter drive, 1.8m long – 300V category IV.
51 C5 For analog modemmultimeter 1 0.111 VOLTAGE MEASURING CABLES
RS232 port, 1.8m long – 1000V category III.
51 C4 51 C9 For 4PX 1 converter 1 0.137 Reference standards

driveanalog modem, Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1,
1.8m long IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3.
Current clamp kits for DMG M3…. portable devices
DMG M3 KIT01 Composed by 3 current clamps 1 6.900 For dimensions, wiring schemes and technical
1000/1 and 4 alligator clip characteristics, refer to technical instructions in
cables for voltage Downloads at www.LovatoElectric.com.
measurements
DMG M3 KIT02 Composed by 1 current clamps 1 0.860
1000/1 and 1 alligator clip
cable for voltage
measurements.
DMG M3 KIT... For DMGM3900, if measuring
inputs for neutral-earth/ground
and neutral current are
23 used too
23-26
Current transformers
Solid-core Order code Primary Burden Qty Weight General characteristics

current per The current transformers (CTs) in the DM series are
Ipn cl. 0.5 cl. 1 pkg. installed in an electrical system to reduce the line current to
/5 [A] [VA] [VA] n° [kg] a secondary value of 5A compatible with the ammeter
inputs of the digital multimeters or protection relays.
For Ø22mm/0.87” cable. DM... are instrument transformers in class 1/0.5 without a
DM0T 0050 50 — 1.25 1 0.200 primary winding and are normally used for high primary
DM0T 0060 60 — 1.5 1 0.200 current values starting from 50A.
The number of loops of the primary cable does not
DM0T 0080 80 — 1.5 1 0.200 modify the accuracy but converts the primary current
DM0T 0100 100 — 1.5 1 0.200 value proportional to secondary current.
DM0T 0150 150 — 2 1 0.200
DM0T... For Ø23mm/0.90” cable.
300/5A
For 30x10mm/1.18x0.39”, 25x12.5mm/0.98x0.49”,
20x15mm/0.79x0.59” busbars.
S2
DM2T 0100 100 — 1 1 0.130 L n°=1
DM2T 0150 150 — 1.5 1 0.130 S1
K
300 / 5A standard
DM2T 0200 200 — 2 1 0.130
9
J-2 K
1 loop = 300 / 5A
DM2T 0250 250 — 2.5 1 0.130 P1
-
DM2T 0300 300 1.5 3 1 0.130

DM2T 0400 400 2 3 1 0.130
300:n/5A
For Ø30mm/1.18” cable.
DM2T... 300:1/5A=300/5A
For 40x10mm1.57x0.39”, 30x20mm/1.18x0.79”,
DM3T 0200 200 — 5 1 0.260
300/5A
DM3T 0250 250 — 5 1 0.260
DM3T 0300 300 2.5 5 1 0.260 S2
DM3T 0400 400 2.5 5 1 0.260

L
n°=2
S1
DM3T 0500 500 2.5 5 1 0.260 K
300 / 5A
DM3T 0600 600 5 10 1 0.260 9 2 loops = 150 / 5A
J-2 K
-
P1
DM3T 0800 800 5 10 1 0.260
DM3T... For 80x12,5mm/3.15”x0.49”, 60x30mm/2.36x1.18”, 300:n/5A
300:2/5A=150/5A
DM35T 0800 800 10 15 1 0.460
DM35T 1000 1000 15 20 1 0.460
DM35T 1250 1250 15 20 1 0.460 300/5A
For 100x30mm/3.94x1.18”, 80x50mm/3.15x1,97”, S2
70x60mm/2.75x2.36” busbars. L
n°=3
S1
DM4T 1000 1000 10 20 1 0.700 K
DM4T 1250 1250 15 30 1 0.760 300 / 5A

9
J-2 K 3 loops = 100 / 5A
DM4T 1500 1500 20 30 1 0.760 P1
-
DM35T... DM4T 1600 1600 20 30 1 0.800

DM4T 2000 2000 30 45 1 0.840 300:n/5A
DM4T 2500 2500 35 45 1 0.900 300:3/5A=100/5A
DM4T 3000 3000 45 45 1 0.900
DM4T 3500 3500 50 50 1 0.900 Operational characteristics
– Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
DM4T 4000 4000 50 50 1 0.900 – Secondary output current: 5A
– IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
40-60 Ipn for 1 second
– IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second
– Insulation (dry type): Class E
– Terminals:
DM4T... • Faston for DM2T and DM3T types
• Screw for DM0T, DM4T and DM35T types
– Sealable terminal covers for DM4T and DM35T types
– Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or by screws 23
(fixing elements standard supplied with the product)
• Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C
• Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C.
• Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%.
Reference standards
IEC/EN 61869-1.
Dimensions
page 23-31 23-27
Accuracy solid-core Order code Primary Burden Qty Weight General characteristics
current per The DM...TP type accuracy current transformers (CTs) are
Ipn cl. 0.5s cl. 0.5 pkg. installed in an electrical system to reduce the line current to
/5 [A] [VA] [VA] n° [kg] a secondary value of 5A compatible with the ammeter
For Ø28mm/1.10” cable. DM...TP are accuracy current transformers in class 0.5s
For 30x10mm/1.18x0.39”, 25x12.5mm/0.98x0.49”, without a primary winding and are normally used for high
20x20mm/0.79x0.79” busbar. primary current values starting from 60A.
DM1TP 0060 60 1.5 1.5 1 0.560 The number of loops of the primary cable does not
DM1TP 0080 80 2,5 2,5 1 0.580 modify the accuracy but converts the primary current
value proportional to secondary current.
DM1TP 0100 100 2.5 3.75 1 0.480
DM1TP 0150 150 2.5 3.75 1 0.480
DM1TP...
DM1TP 0200 200 2.5 3.75 1 0.480
300/5A
DM1TP 0250 250 2.5 5 1 0.480
DM1TP 0300 300 2.5 5 1 0.480
DM1TP 0400 400 5 5 1 0.480
n=1
DM1TP 0500 500 5 5 1 0.480
300 / 5A standard
For Ø52mm2.04” cable.
For 60x20mm/2.36x0.79”, 50x25mm/1.97x0.98” busbar. 1 loop = 300 / 5A
DM3TP 0500 500 3.75 5 1 0.700
DM3TP 0600 600 5 10 1 0.700
DM3TP...
DM3TP 0800 800 5 10 1 0.700 300:n/5A
DM3TP 1000 1000 5 10 1 0.700 300:1/5A=300/5A
For 100x20mm/3.94x0.79”, 80x45mm/3.15x1.77” busbar. 300/5A
DM5TP 1000 1000 5 10 1 0.900
DM5TP 1250 1250 7.5 10 1 0.900
DM5TP 1600 1600 7.5 10 1 0.900 n=2
DM5TP 2000 2000 10 15 1 0.900 300 / 5A
DM5TP 2500 2500 10 15 1 0.900 2 loops = 150 / 5A
DM5TP 3000 3000 10 15 1 0.900
Consult Customer Service to inquiry about versions with Italian UTF
DM5TP... certificates.
For Ø33mm cable. For 40x10mm, 30x20mm, 25x25mm busbar.
300:n/5A
300:3/5A=100/5A
Versions with Italian UTF certificates
on request.
300/5A
n=3
300 / 5A
3 loops = 100 / 5A
300:n/5A
300:3/5A=100/5A
– Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
– IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
– Insulation (dry type): Class E
– Screw terminals
– Sealable terminal covers
23 – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or by screws
(fixing elements standard supplied with the product)
• Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C
• Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C.
Reference standards
IEC/EN 61869-1.
Dimensions
23-28 page 23-31
Compact prewired split-core Order code Primary Burden Qty Weight General characteristics
current per The DM...TMA type current transformers (CTs) are
Ipn cl. 0.5 cl. 1 pkg. installed in an electrical system to reduce the line current
/5 [A] [VA] [VA] n° [kg] to a secondary value of 5A compatible with the ammeter
24x24mm/0.94x0.94” hole. Cable supplied as standard, DM...TMA are instrument transformers in class 1 without
length 1m. a primary winding and are normally used for high
DM1TMA 0100 100 –– 1.2 1 0.200 primary current values starting from 100A.
DM1TMA 0150 150 –– 1.2 1 0.200 Operational characteristics
DM1TMA 0200 200 –– 1.2 1 0.200 – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
DM1TMA 0250 250 –– 1.2 1 0.200
DM1TMA...
36x38mm/1.42x1.50” hole. Cable supplied as standard, – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
length 1m. – IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
DM2TMA 0250 250 –– 1.5 1 0.380 40-60 Ipn for 1 second
DM2TMA 0300 300 –– 1.5 1 0.380
– Cable supplied as standard, length 1m.
DM2TMA 0400 400 –– 1.5 1 0.380 – Insulation (dry type): Class E
DM2TMA 0500 500 –– 1.5 1 0.380 – Ambient conditions:
Reference standards
DM2TMA... Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61869-2, IEC/EN 61869-1.
Split-core Order code Primary Burden Qty Weight General characteristics

current per The DM...TA type current transformers (CTs) are
Ipn cl. 0.5 cl. 1 pkg. installed in an electrical system to reduce the line current
to a secondary value of 5A compatible with the ammeter
/5 [A] [VA] [VA] n° [kg] inputs of the digital multimeters or protection relays.
50x80mm/1.97x3.15” hole. DM...TA are instrument transformers in class 0.5/1
DM1TA 0250 250 1 2 1 0.900 without a primary winding and are normally used for
high primary current values starting from 250A.
DM1TA 0300 300 1.5 3 1 0.900
DM1TA 0400 400 1.5 3 1 0.900 Operational characteristics
DM1TA 0500 500 2.5 5 1 0.900 – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz
DM1TA 0600 600 2.5 5 1 0.900 – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn
DM1TA...
DM1TA 0800 800 3 7.5 1 0.900 – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V
DM1TA 1000 1000 5 10 1 0.900 – IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith:
80x80mm/3.15x3.15” hole. – IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second
DM2TA 0250 250 1 2 1 1.050 – Insulation (dry type): Class E
DM2TA 0300 300 1.5 3 1 1.050 – Screw terminals
– Sealable terminal covers
DM2TA 0400 400 1.5 3 1 1.050 – Screw fixing (fixing elements standard supplied with
DM2TA 0500 500 2.5 5 1 1.050 the product)
DM2TA 0600 600 2.5 5 1 1.050 – IEC degree of protection: IP30
DM2TA 0800 800 3 7.5 1 1.050 • Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C
DM2TA...
DM2TA 1000 1000 5 10 1 1.050 • Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C.
80x120mm/3.15x4.72” hole. • Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%.
DM3TA 0500 500 — 4 1 1.250 Reference standards
DM3TA 0600 600 — 5 1 1.250 Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61869-2,
DM3TA 0800 800 3 7.5 1 1.250 IEC/EN 61869-1.
DM3TA 1000 1000 5 10 1 1.250
DM3TA 1250 1250 7.5 15 1 1.250
DM3TA 1500 1500 8 17 1 1.250
80x160mm/3.15x6.30” hole.
DM4TA 2000 2000 15 20 1 3.160
DM4TA 2500 2500 15 20 1 3.340
DM3TA...
DM4TA 3000 3000 20 25 1 3.500
DM4TA 4000 4000 20 25 1 3.760 23
DM4TA...
Dimensions
page 23-32 23-29
ENERGY METERS
Mechanical meter DME M100... Digital meter DME D115 T1 - DME D120 T1... Digital meter DME D300 T2... - DME D300 F - DME D310 F... -
Digital meter DME D100... - DME D110... DME D121 - DME D130 DME D310 T2... - DME D330 - DME D301 - DME D305 T2
Data concentrator DME CD - DME CD PV1...
35.8 5 58 (2.28") 5 58 (2.28")
59.9 (2.35") (1.41") (0.20") 43.7 (1.72") 71.6 (2.82") (0.20") 43.7 (1.72")
17.5
(0.69") 43.8 (1.72")
104.7 (4.12")
104.7 (4.12")
98.3 (3.87")
98.3 (3.87")
45 (1.77")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
85 (3.35")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
5
(0.20") Ø4.2 Ø4.2
(0.16") (0.16")
MULTIMETERS
DMG 100 - DMG 101 - DMG 110 - DMG 200 - DMG 210 - DMG 300 Expansion modules EXM...
63 (2.48")
43.8 (1.72") 11
5 42.7 (1.68") (0.43")
71.6 (2.82") (0.20") 35.8 63 (2.48")
(1.41") 43.8 (1.72")
63.5 (2.50")
105.4 (4.15")
63.5 (2.50")
93.4 (3.68")
45 (1.77")
95 (3.74")
90 (3.54")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
36.4
(1.43")
DMG 600 - DMG 610 DMG 700 - DMG 800... - DMG 900... with expansion modules EXP... Cutout
65 (2.56") 8.5 26.3 19
96 (3.78") 55 (2.16") (0.33") 96 (3.78") 53.2 (2.09") (0.75") 92 (3.62")
(1.03")
99.5 (3.92")
64.5 (2.54")
96 (3.78")
92 (3.62")
EXP 10... 61.5 (2.42")
EXP 10...
Transducer DMG 900T with expansion modules EXP... DMG 900RD remote display Cutout
115 (4.53")
96 (3.78")
20 28.8 24
(0.79") 5 (1.13") (0.94") 19 92 (3.62")
(0.20") 96 (3.78") (0.75")
43.5 (1.71”) 37.3
(1.47”)
101.3 (3.99")
90.8 (3.57")
110 (4.33")
96 (3.78")
92 (3.62")
64.5 (2.54”)
96.3 (3.79”)
91.7 (3.61") EXP 10...

54 (2.12")
91.6 (3.61")
FLUSH-MOUNT METERING INSTRUMENTS

Cutout
Instruments DMK 0... - DMK 1...
9 92 (3.62")
24 (0.35")
96 (3.78") (0.94") 81 (3.19")
45 (1.77")
48 (1.89")
44 (1.73")
23
FLUSH-MOUNT MULTIMETERS
DMK 2... Cutout
14 6 92 (3.62")
(0.55") (0.24")
96 (3.78") 62 (2.44")
92 (3.62")
96 (3.78")
90 (3.54")
23-30
DIGITAL METERING INSTRUMENTS

DMK 7... - DMK 8...
5 58.1 (2.29")
53.5 (2.11") (0.20") 43.8 (1.72")
105.4 (4.15")
99 (3.90")
90 (3.54")
45 (1.77")
Ø4.2
(0.16")
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Solid core DM0T... DM2T... DM3T...
(0.37")
(0.37")
9.5
9.5
32
(1.26”) 52 (2.05") 46.5 (1.83") 71 (2.79") 62.5 (2.46")
(0.49")
12.5
65.5 (2.58")
66 (2.60”)
56.5 (2.22")
81.5 (3.19")
2 3
72.5 (2.85")
Ø2 0")
40 (1.57")
Ø2 7”) 9
(0.
8 (0.
(1.10")
Ø30 ")
(0.59")
28
8
(0.39")
(1.1
15
(1.44")
10
36.5
20 (0.79")
10 (0.39")
44 (1.73”) 30 20 27.5
(1.18”) 25 (0.79") (1.08")
(0.79") 25 44.5 (1.75")
30 (0.98")
(1.18") 30
(1.18")
40 (1.57")
DM35T... DM4T...
104 (4.09") 53 (2.08")
126.5 (4.98”)
Ø6
61.5 (2.42”)
51.5 (2.03”)
6 (2
Ø8 8")
.60
(3.
(1.24”)
(0.49”)
155 (6.10")
”)
12.5
31.5
6
3
51 (2.01")
61 (2.40")
71 (2.79")
81 (3.19")
(1.22")
31
74 (2.91")
31.5
(1.24”) 20 41.5
51.5 (2.03”) (0.79”) (1.63”)
61.5 (2.42”)
51 (2.01")
81.5 (3.21”) 101 (3.98")
105 (4.13”) 121 (4.76")
140 (5.51")
DM1TP0060... - DM1TP0300 DM1TP0400... - DM1TP0500

60 (2.36”)
45 (1.77”)
11.5 (0.45”)
41.5
11 (0.43”)
(1.63”)
98.5 (3.88”)
55 (2.16”)
98.5 (3.88”)
Ø2 Ø3
(1.63”)
(1.24”)
(0.85”)
(0.83”)
(1.04”)
(0.65”)
(1.02”)
(1.24”)
8
41.5
31.5
21.5
3
26.5
16.5
31.5
(1 (1
21
26
.10 .30
”) ”)
(0.63”)
16
11.5 11 6.4 (0.25”)

16.5 (0.45”) 21 (0.43”) 20 40 (1.57”)
(0.65”) 21.5 15.5 (0.61”)
(0.83”) 26.5 (0.79”)
26 (0.85”) 31.5 (1.04”)
(1.02”) 31.5 (1.24”) 41.5
(1.24”) (1.63”)
74.5 (2.93”) 74.5 (2.93”)
DM3TP... DM5TP...
65 (2.56”) 65 (2.56”)
45 (1.77”) 45 (1.77”)
23
127 (5.00”)
52 (2.05”)
61 (2.40”)
Ø5
(0.83”)
2
163.5 (6.44”)
Ø8
(2
101 (3.98”)
45 (1.77”)
81 (3.19”)
21
.05
(0.87”)
5.
”)
5
22
(3
.3
7”
)
20 45 (1.77”)
21 (0.79”) 20 45 (1.77”)
(0.83”) 25 (0.79”)
(0.98”) 54.5 (2.14”) 80.5 (3.17”)
61 (2.40”) 22
(0.87”)
101 (3.98”)
45 (1.77”)
55 (2.16”)
55 (2.16”)
62 (2.44”)
81 (3.19”)
101 (3.98”)
144 (5.67”)
(0.63”)
(0.63”)
16
16
6.4 (0.25”) 6.4 (0.25”)

15.5 (0.61”) 15.5 (0.61”)
23-31
Compact prewired split-core

DM1TMA... DM2TMA...
28 33
(1.10") (1.30")
(0.90")
23
(1.44")
36.5
(0.98")
66.5 (2.62")
25
(1.46")
37
86 (3.38")
(1.71")
43.5
(1.95")
49.5
24 34.5
(0.94") (1.36")
37
45.5 (1.79") (1.46") 42 (1.65")
57.5 (2.26")
Split-core DM1TA... DM2TA... DM3TA...

114 (4.49") 50 (1.97") 142 (5.59") 50 (1.97") 142 (5.59") 50 (1.97")
S2 P2 S2 P2 S2 P2
144 (5.67")
144 (5.67")
80 (3.15")
80 (3.15")
184 (7.24")
120 (4.72")
(1.26")
(1.26")
32
P2
32
P2
52 (2.05") 32 80 (3.15") 32
(1.26") (1.26")
(1.26")
78 (3.07") 109 (4.29")
32
P2
80 (3.15") 32
(1.26")
109 (4.29")
DM4TA...
184 (7.24") 68 (2.68")
(1.26")
47 (1.85")
P2
32
S2
175 (6.89")
245 (9.64")
160 (6.30")
(1.50")
(1.50")
38
38
32
80 (3.15") (1.26")
120 (4.72") 52 (2.05")
23
23-32
Wiring diagrams
ENERGY METERS
Mechanical DME M100 DME M100 T1
L L
230VAC 230VAC
N N
L N L N
5
640 pulses/kWh
METER METER Vce max: 35V
Imax: 20mA
6
L N L N
LOAD LOAD
Digital DME D100 T1... - DME D110 T1... DME D115 T1 - DME D120 T1... - DME D130 DME D121
N N N N
N O1+ O1- N N O1+ O1- N A B
Static Static RS485
LINE LOAD LINE LOAD LINE LOAD

METER METER 220...240VAC METER
L L L L L L
L L L L L L
110-120VAC DMED...A120; 220-240VAC DMED...; 230V 50Hz DMED... T1 MID.
DME D300 T2... - DME D300 F DME D310 T2... - DME D310 F... DME D301
LINE L1 LINE
380-415V (L-L) 380-415V (L-L) L2 190-415V (L-L)
220-240V (L-N) 220-240V (L-N) L3 110-240V (L-N)
Tariff input N Tariff input
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 L1 L2 L3 N T1 T2
L1 L2 L3 N
I3
I1
I2
T1 T2
METER
Static
Static
O1 O2
+ – + – T1 T2 O1+ O1- O2+ O2- L1 L2 L3 TR A B S
L1 L2 L3 Pulse output
LOAD RS485
Pulse output 30VDC 50mA
LOAD 30VDC 50mA
230V 50Hz (L-N), 400V 50Hz (L-L) DMED... T2 MID / DMED... F.
DME D330 - DME D305 T2

Single phase Two phase Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
O CT2 O CT2 O
N A A A
CT3
D N D D
N
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
Three phase without neutral in ARON connection Pulse output 30VDC 50mA
CT1 CT1 for DME D305 T2
L L
CT2 O O Static
A CT3 A
D D
O1+ O1- O2+ O2-
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC
RS485 for DME D330

V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
TR A B S
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE RS485
CURRENT CURRENT
Data concentrator DME CD - DME CD PV1

23
100...240VAC
110...250VDC
100...240VAC
110VDC
SG
TR
A1
A2
T1
T2
A
B
Aux Tariff
Supply Input RS485
2 x 4 groups
Insulated inputs
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
I1.1
I1.2
I2.1
I2.2
I3.1
I3.2
I4.1
I4.2
23-33
Wiring diagrams
MULTIMETERS DMG 100 - DMG 101 - DMG 110 - DMG 200 - DMG 210 - DMG 300
Single phase Two phase Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
O CT2 O CT2 O
N A A A
CT3
D N D D
N
110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...240VAC 100...240VAC 100...240VAC
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3
Three phase without neutral in ARON connection Balanced 3-phase connection with or without neutral
CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L1
CT2 O O L
L2 O
A CT3 A S1 S2
D D L3 A
D
N
110...250VDC 110...250VDC 100...240VAC

100...240VAC 100...240VAC 110...250VDC
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 --
- + V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A B
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE A1 A2 I1 I2 I3
CURRENT CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT RS485
MULTIMETERS DMG 700 - DMG 800... DMG 900...

Single phase Two phase Single phase Two phase
CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L L
O CT2 O O CT2 O
N A A N A A
D N D D N D
12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❷ 12-24-48VDC ❷

110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...440VAC 100...440VAC 100...440VAC 100...440VAC
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
Three phase with or without neutral Three phase with or without neutral
CT1 CT1
L L
CT2 O CT2 O
CT3 A CT3 A
D D
N N
12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❷
110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...440VAC 100...440VAC
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I4
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT CURRENT
Three phase without neutral in ARON connection Three phase without neutral in ARON connection
CT1 CT1 CT1
L L L
CT2 O CT2 O O
A A CT3 A
D D D
12-24-48VDC ❶ 12-24-48VDC ❷ 12-24-48VDC ❷

110...250VDC 110...250VDC 110...250VDC
100...440VAC 100...440VAC 100...440VAC
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4
23
CT1
L
Two phase with neutral. Measurement of Three phase with neutral. Measurement of
O
A
neutral current and neutral-earth voltage neutral current and neutral-earth voltage
CT3
D
CT1 CT1
L L
12-24-48VDC ❶ CT2 O CT2 O
110...250VDC A A
CT4 CT3
100...440VAC N D D
CT4
12-24-48VDC ❷ N
110...250VDC
100...440VAC
12-24-48VDC ❷
110...250VDC
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 100...440VAC
I1 I2 I3
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
CURRENT
A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 A1 A2 V1 V2 V3 V4 VN S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE
For DMG 800... D048 only. CURRENT CURRENT
For DMG 900... D048 only.
23-34
Wiring diagrams
METERING INSTRUMENTS
DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1 DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1 DMK 02
Voltmeter Ammeter
L L L L L L
L O O O
L O L/N A L/N A L/N A
A D D D
L/N
D
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
METER METER METER METER
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 00 R1 For DMK 01 R1
DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1 DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1

Single phase Three phase
L1 L
L2 O
L L3 A
L O N D
L/N A
D
1.3 1.4 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
600V~ 45/65Hz 600V~ 5A~
METER METER
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 03 R1 For DMK 04 R1
DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1 DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1 DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1 DMK 16 - DMK 16 R1

L1 L1 L1
L L L
L1 L2 L2 O L2
L O O
L2 O L3 A L3 A L3 A
L3 A N D N D N D
N D
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
METER METER METER METER
1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3
220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC
For DMK 10 R1 For DMK 11 R1 For DMK 15 R1 For DMK 16 R1
DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1 DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1 DMK 82 DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1

Voltmeter Ammeter
L L L L1 L
L L L
O O O L2 O
L L A A A
O L/N L/N L/N L3 A
D D D N D
L/N A
D
L L/N S1 S2 L L/N S1 S2 L L/N S1 S2 L1 L2 L3 N
600V~ 5A~ 600V~ 5A~ 600V~
METER METER METER METER METER
A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 14 12 11
For DMK 80 R1 For DMK 81 R1 For DMK 70 R1
DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1 DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
Single phase Three phase DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1
L1 L L1 L L1
L2 O L2 L
O
L L3 A L3 A L2 O
L O N D N D L3 A
L/N A N D
D
L L/N L L/N S1 S2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
600V~ I1 I2 I3 COM
600V~ 45/65Hz 5A~ 600V~ 5A~
5A~
METER METER METER
METER
A1 A2 14 12 11 A1 A2 14 12 11 1.1 1.2 3.2 3.1 3.3

220...240VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC A1 A2 14 12 11
For DMK 83 R1 For DMK 84 R1 For DMK 84 R1 220...240VAC
For DMK 71 R1
FLUSH-MOUNT MULTIMETERS
DMK2... DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1
Single phase Two phase Three phase with or without neutral L1
L
L2 O
CT1 L CT1 CT1
L O L1 L L1 L3 A
CT2 O CT2 L N D
A L2 L2
N O
D A CT3
N D L3 A
D
N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 COM
DMK 2... 208...240VAC DMK 2... 208...240VAC
600V~ 5A~
23
DMK 25 12...24VDC DMK 25 12...24VDC DMK 2... 208...240VAC
DMK 25 12...24VDC
METER
L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C
A1 A2 14 13
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT 220...240VAC
For DMK 75 R1
Three phase without neutral in ARON connection

CT1 CT1
L1 L L1 L
CT2 O O
L2 L2
A CT3 A
L3 D L3 D
DMK 2... 208...240VAC DMK 2... 208...240VAC

DMK 25 12...24VDC DMK 25 12...24VDC
L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C L N L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C
AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT
23-35
Single-phase energy meters
TYPE DME M100... DME D100 T1 DME D100 T1 A120 DME D100 T1 MID DME D110 T1 DME D110 T1 A120
Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage(Ue) 230VAC 220...240VAC 110...120VAC 230VAC 220...240VAC 110...120VAC
Operating voltage range 184...264VAC 187...264VAC 93...132VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC 93...132VAC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 60Hz 50Hz 50/60Hz 60Hz
Maximum power consumption <7VA 7VA
Maximum power dissipation − 0,45W
CURRENT
IEC maximum current (Imax) 32A 40A
IEC minimum current (Imin) − 0.25A
IEC rated current (Iref-Ib) 5A 5A
IEC start current (Ist) 20mA 20mA
Transition current (Itr) − 0.5A
ACCURACY
Active energy (per IEC/EN 62053-21) Class 1 Class 1 Class B (EN 50470-3) Class 1
OUTPUTS
LED rate 640 flash/kWh 1000 flash/kWh
Pulse rate 640 pulses/kWh 1000 pulses/kWh
(only for
DME M100 T1)
Pulse duration − 30ms
STATIC OUTPUTS
Pulse rate − 10 pulses/kWh 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh
programmable
Pulse duration − 100ms
External voltage − 10...30VDC
Maximum current − 50mA
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui − 250VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp − 6kV
IEC power frequency withstand voltage − 4kV
SUPPLY/MEASUREMENT CONNECTION CIRCUIT
Type of terminals Fixed Fixed
Conductor section (min...max) 2.5...6mm2 1.5...10mm2 (16...6AWG)
Maximum tightening torque 1.2Nm 1.5Nm (14lbin)

CONNECTION (PULSE OUTPUT/RS485)
Conductor section (min...max) 1...1.5mm2 0.2...4mm2 (24...12AWG)
(only for
DME M100 T1)
Maximum tightening torque 0.6Nm 0.8Nm (7lbin)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -25...+55°C -25...+55°C
Storage temperature -30...+80°C -25...+70°C
Relative humidity − <80%
Maximum pollution degree 2 2
Mechanical environment − − − Class M1 − −
Magnetic environment − − − Class E1 − −
HOUSING
Material Polyamide Polyamide
23
23-36
Single-phase energy meters
DME D110 T1 MID DME D115 T1 DME D120 T1 DME D120 T1 A120 DME D120 T1 MID DME D121 DME D130
Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase Single phase /RS485 Single phase/expandable
230VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC 110...120VAC 230VAC 220...240VAC 220...240VAC

187...264VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC 93...132VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC 187...264VAC
50Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 60Hz 50Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
7VA 7VA 4.8VA
0.45W 0.45W 1.4W
40A 40A 63A 63A

0.25A 0.5A 0.5A
5A 10A 10A
20mA 40mA 40mA
0.5A 1A 1A
Class B (EN 50470-3) Class 1 Class B (EN 50470-3) Class 1
1000 flash/kWh 1000 flash/kWh 1000 flash/kWh

1000 pulses/kWh 1000 pulses/kWh 1000 pulses/kWh
30ms 30ms 30ms
1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh –

programmable programmable
100ms 100ms –
10...30VDC 10...30VDC –
50mA 50mA –
250VAC 250VAC 250VAC

6kV 6kV 6kV
4kV 4kV 4kV
Fixed Fixed Fixed

1.5...10mm2 (16...6AWG) 2.5...16mm2 (14...6AWG; 2.5...16mm2 (14...6AWG;
14...10AWG) 14...10AWG)
1.5Nm (14lbin) 2Nm (26.5lbin) 2Nm (26.5lbin)
Fixed Fixed Fixed

0.2...4mm2 (24...12AWG) 0.5...4mm2 (20...11AWG) 0.5...4mm2 (20...11AWG)
0.8Nm (7lbin) 1.3Nm (12.1lbin) 1.3Nm (12.1lbin)
-25...+55°C -25...+55°C -25...+55°C

-25...+70°C -25...+70°C -25...+70°C
<80% <80% <80%
2 2 2
Class M1 − − − Class M1 − −
Class E1 − − − Class E1 − −
Polyamide Polyamide Polyamide
23
23-37
Three-phase energy meters
TYPE DME D300 T2 DME D300 T2 MID / F DME D310 T2 DME D310 T2 MID / F DME D330
DME D301 DME D305 T2
3 phase with neutral 3 phase with neutral 3 phase c/w and w/o neutral 3 phase c/w and w/o neutral 3 phase c/w and w/o neutral
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage (Ue) 220...240VAC phase-neutral 230VAC phase-neutral 220...240VAC phase-neutral 230VAC phase-neutral 100...240VAC
380...415VAC phase-phase 400VAC phase-phase 380...415VAC phase-phase 400VAC phase-phase 110...250VDC
for DME D300T2
110...240VAC phase-neutral
190...415VAC phase-phase
for DME D301
Voltage range 187...264VAC phase-neutral / 323...456VAC phase-phase 85...264VAC
94...264VAC phase-neutral / 162...456VAC phase-phase (for DME D301) 93.5...300VDC
Rated frequency 50/60Hz 50Hz 50/60Hz 50Hz 45...66Hz
Maximum power consumption 20VA 2.1VA 4.5VA
Maximum power dissipation 1.35W 0.8W 1.7W
CURRENT
IEC maximum current (Imax) 63A - 80A for DME D301 5A 5A
IEC minimum current (Imin) 0.5A 0.05A 0.01A
IEC rated current (Iref-Ib) 10A 5A ––
IEC start current (Ist) 40mA 0,01A ––
IEC transition current (Itr) 1A 0.25A ––
ACCURACY
Active energy (per IEC/EN 62053-21) Class 1 Class B (EN50470-3) Class 1 Class B (EN50470-3) Class 0.5s
TARIFF CIRCUIT INPUT
Rated voltage (Uc) 100...240VAC
Voltage range 85...264VAC
Frequency 50/60Hz
Maximum power consumption 0.25VA
Maximum power dissipation 0.18W
LED
Pulse rate 1000 pulses/kWh
Pulse duration 30ms
STATIC OUTPUTS
Pulse rate 1-10-100-1000 pulses/kWh programmable 0.1-1-10-100 pulses/kWh programmable ––
(except DME D301)
Pulse duration 100ms for 1-10-100 pulses (except DME D301) 100ms ––
60ms for 1000 pulses (except DME D301)
External voltage 10...30VDC (except DME D301) 10...30VDC ––
Maximum current 50mA (except DME D301) ––
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 250VAC 250VAC 690VAC
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV 6kV 9.5kV
IEC power frequency withstand voltage 4kV 4kV 5.2kV
SUPPLY/MEASURMENT CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Conductor section (min...max) 2.5...16mm2 (16...6AWG) 0.2...4mm2 (24...12AWG) for supply/voltage measurement;
0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG) for current measurement
Maximum tightening torque 2Nm (14lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin)
TARIFF CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG) 0.2...4mm2 (24...12AWG)
Maximum tightening torque 0.49Nm (4.4lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin) (0.44Nm / 4lbin for current measurement DME D320)
CONNECTIONS (PULSE OUTPUT/RS485)
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...1.3mm2 (24...16AWG) 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG)
23 Maximum tightening torque 0.15Nm (1.7lbin) 0.44Nm (4lbin)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -25...+55°C -25...+55°C -20...+60°C
Storage temperature -25...+70°C -25...+70°C -30...+80°C
Relative humidity <80% non condensing <80% non condensing <90%
Maximum pollution degree 2 2 2
Mechanical environment –– Class M1 –– Class M1 ––
Magnetic environment –– Class E1 –– Class E1 ––
HOUSING
Material Polyamide Polyamide
23-38
Data concentrators
TYPE DME CD DME CD PV1

AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage (Us) 100...240VAC/110...250VDC
Voltage range 85...264VAC/93.5...300VDC
ENERGY METER INPUTS
Number of inputs 8
Input separation 1 common for every 2 inputs (insulated between each pair 500VRMS)
Type of input Negative (NPN)
Maximum voltage at inputs 15VDC
Maximum input current 18mA (15mA typical)
High input signal 7.6V
Low input signal 2V
Maximum frequency 2000Hz
TARIFF CONTROL CIRCUIT
Rated voltage (Uc) 100...240VAC/110VDC
Voltage range 85...264VAC/93.5...140VDC
Frequency 50/60Hz
RS485 SERIAL INTERFACE
Baud-rate Programmable 1200-38400bps
Insulation 1500VAC towards energy meter inputs. Double insulation towards supply and tariff inputs
INSULATION
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6.5kV
SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...4mm2 (24...12AWG)
Maximum tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin)
TARIFF INPUT CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
RS485 CONNECTION
ENERGY METER INPUT CONNECTIONS
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Relative humidity <90%
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
23
23-39
LCD multimeters and power analyzers
TYPE DMG 100 - DMG 101 - DMG 200 DMG 210 DMG 300
DMG 110
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us 100...240VAC/
110...250VDC
Voltage range 85...264VAC/
93.5...300VDC
Maximum power consumption 3.5VA 3.5VA 4.5VA 3.2VA
Maximum power dissipation 1.2W 1.2W 1.7W 1.3W
Microbreaking immunity 50ms 50ms 50ms 50ms
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Type of input Three phase + neutral
Maximum rated voltage Ue 690VAC phase-phase (400VAC phase-neutral)
Measurement range 20...830VAC phase-phase (10...480VAC phase-neutral)
Method of measurement True RMS
Method of connection Single, two, three phase with or without neutral, balanced three phase systems
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie 5A 5A 5A 1A/5A
Measurement range 0.01...6A 0.01...6A 0.01...6A 0.01...1.2A / 0.01...6A
Method of measurement True RMS
Overload capacity +20% Ie through external CT with 5A secondary
Overload peak 50A for 1s
INSULATION
IEC rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 9.5kV
SUPPLY CIRCUIT/VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal Fixed
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...4.0mm2 (24...12 AWG)
CURRENT MEASUREMENT CIRCUIT AND RS485 CONNECTIONS AND DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Type of terminal Fixed
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Measurement class III
HOUSING
Material Polyamide
RS485 communication port for DMG 110, DMG 210, DMG 610 and DMG 900T only.
For DMG 800 D048, DMG 900 D048 and DMG 900T D048 only.
For DMG 101 only.
23
23-40
LCD multimeters and power analyzers
DMG 600 DMG 610 DMG 700 DMG 800 DMG 900 DMG 900 T
100...440VAC 100...440VAC
120...250VDC 110...250VDC - (12...48VDC)
90...484VAC 90...484VAC
93.5...300VDC 93.5...300VDC - (9...70VDC)
45...65Hz 45...66Hz
9.5VA 3.9VA
3.5W 3.4W
50ms 50ms
Three phase + neutral Three phase + neutral

600VAC phase-phase (300VAC phase-neutral) 690VAC phase-phase (400VAC phase-neutral)
50...720VAC phase-phase (30...360VAC phase-neutral) 20...830VAC phase-phase (10...480VAC phase-neutral)
45...66Hz 45...66Hz 45...66Hz and 360...440Hz
True RMS True RMS
Single, two, three phase with or without neutral, balanced three phase systems
1A/5A 5A 1A/5A 1A/5A

0.01...1.2A / 0.01...6A 0.01...6A 0.01...1.2A / 0.01...6A 0.002...1.2A / 0.01...10A
True RMS True RMS
+20% Ie by external CT with 5A secondary
50A for 1s
600VAC 690VAC
9.5kV 9.5kV
5.2kV 5.2kV
Removable
0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG)
0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
Fixed Fixed
0.2...1.5mm2 (24...12 AWG) 0.5...4mm2 (26...10 AWG); 0.2...1.5mm2 (24...12 AWG) for RS485
0.8Nm (7lbin) 0.8Nm (7lbin)
-20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
<90%
2
III
Polyamide
23
23-41
Measuring instruments
TYPE DMK 00 - DMK 00 R1 DMK 01 - DMK 01 R1

DMK 80 - DMK 80 R1 DMK 81 - DMK 81 R1
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated voltage Us 24VAC
110...127VAC
220...240VAC
380...415VAC
Operating voltage range 0.85...1,1 Us
Rated frequency 50...60Hz ±10%
Maximum power consumption 3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1)
Maximum power dissipation 1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1)
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Rated voltage Ue 600VAC ––
Operating voltage range 15...660VAC ––
Operating voltage range, phase-phase –– ––
Rated frequency 50...60Hz ±10% ––

Method of measuring TRMS ––
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie –– 5A
Measuring range –– 0.05...5.75A
Rated frequency –– 50...60Hz ±10%

Type of input –– Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT 5A max
Type of measuring –– TRMS

Overload capacity –– +20% Ie
FREQUENCY INPUTS
Measuring range and type –– ––
Voltage range –– ––
Input rated voltage –– ––
MEASURING ACCURACY
Measurement conditions cos –– ––
(Temperature +23°C ±1°C) voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit ––
(Relative humidity
45 ±15% R.H.) current –– ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
frequency –– ––
ADDITIONAL ERRORS
Relative humidity ±1 digit 60%...90% R.H..
Temperature ±1 digit -20...+60°C
RELAY OUTPUT FOR DMK... R1 TYPES ONLY
Number and tyoe of contact 1 changeover
Rated voltage 250VAC
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 AC1 8A 250VAC / B300
designation
Electrical life 105
Mechanical life 30x106
INSULATION
Rated insulation voltage Ui 600VAC 415VAC
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Fixed (DMK 8...);
Removable (DMK 0...)
Maximum tightening torque 0.8Nm (7lbin) for DMK 0... / 0.5Nm (4.5lbin) for DMK 8...
23 Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG) for DMK 0...
0.2...4.0mm2 (24...12AWG) for DMK 8...
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
Material Thermoplastic (DMK 0...) / Polyamide (DMK 8...)
On specific request.
23-42
Measuring instruments
DMK 02 DMK 03 - DMK 03 R1 DMK 04 - DMK 04 R1

DMK 82 DMK 83 - DMK 83 R1 DMK 84 - DMK 84 R1
24VAC
110...127VAC
220...240VAC
380...415VAC
0.85...1.1 Us
50...60Hz ±10%
3.3VA 3.3VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1)
1.5W 1.5W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1)
600VAC –– 600VAC
15...660VAC –– ––
–– –– 15...660VAC (DMK...)
25...660VAC (DMK... R1)
50...60Hz ±10% –– 50...60Hz ±10%
TRMS –– TRMS
5A –– 5A
0.05...5.75A –– 0.05...5.75A (DMK...)
0.1...5.75A (DMK... R1)
50...60Hz ±10% –– 50...60Hz ±10%
Shunts connected by –– Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT 5A max external low voltage CT 5A max
TRMS –– TRMS
+20% Ie –– +20% Ie
–– 15...65Hz ±10% TRMS ––

–– 15...660VAC ––
–– 600VAC ––
–– –– ± 1° ±1 digit
±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit –– ––
±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit ––––
–– ±1 digit ––
±1 digit 60%...90% R.H..

±1 digit -20...+60°C
1 changeover
250VAC
AC1 8A 250VAC / B300
105
30x106
600VAC
Fixed (DMK 8...);

Removable (DMK 0...)
0.8Nm (7lbin) for DMK 0... / 0.5Nm (4.5lbin) for DMK 8...
0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG) for DMK 0... 23
0.2...4.0mm2 (24...12AWG) for DMK 8...
-20...+60°C
-30...+80°C
Thermoplastic (DMK 0...) / Polyamide (DMK 8...)

On specific request
23-43
Multimeters
TYPE DMK 10 - DMK 10 R1 DMK 11 - DMK 11 R1 DMK 15 - DMK 15 R1 DMK 16

DMK 70 - DMK 70 R1 DMK 71 - DMK 71 R1 DMK 75 - DMK 75 R1 DMK 16 R1
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated supply voltage Us 24VAC
110...127VAC
220...240VAC
380...415VAC
Operating voltage range 0.85...1.1 Us
Frequency 50...60Hz ±10%
Maximum power consumption 3.3VA (DMK...) 3.3VA (DMK...) 3.3VA (DMK...) 3.6VA (DMK...)
3.6VA (DMK... R1) 3.6VA (DMK... R1) 3.6VA (DMK... R1) 3.9VA (DMK... R1)
Maximum power dissipation 1.5W (DMK...) 1.5W (DMK...) 1.5W (DMK...) 1.8W (DMK...)
1.8W (DMK... R1) 1.8W (DMK... R1) 1.8W (DMK... R1) 2.1W (DMK... R1)
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Rated voltage Ue phase-phase 600VAC –– 600VAC 600VAC
phase-neutral 347VAC –– 347VAC 347VAC
Operating voltage range phase-phase 15...660VAC –– 35...660VAC 35...660VAC
phase-neutral 10...382VAC –– 20...382VAC 20...382VAC
Frequency range 50...60Hz ±10% –– 50...60Hz ±10% 50...60Hz ±10%
Method of measuring TRMS –– TRMS TRMS
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie –– 5A 5A 5A
Measuring range –– 0.05...6A 0.05...5.75A 0.05...5.75A
Frequency range –– 50...60Hz ±10% 50...60Hz ±10% 50...60Hz ±10%
Type of input –– Shunts connected by
external low voltage CT 5A max
Type of measuring –– TRMS TRMS TRMS
Overload capacity –– +20% Ie +20% Ie +20% Ie
MEASURING ACCURACY
Measurement conditions
(Temperature +23°C ±1°C) voltage ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit –– ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit ±0.25% f.s. ±1 digit
(Humidity current –– ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit ±0.5% f.s. ±1 digit
45 ±15% R.H.)
power –– –– 1% f.s. ±1 digit 1% f.s. ±1 digit
energy –– –– –– Class 2
frequency –– –– ±1 digit ±1 digit
RELAY OUTPUT FOR DMK... R1 TYPES ONLY
Number and type of contact 1 changeover 1 changeover 1 changeover 1 changeover
Rated voltage 250VAC 250VAC 250VAC 250VAC
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation AC1 8A 250VAC / B300 AC1 8A 250VAC / B300 AC1 8A 250VAC / B300 AC1 8A 250VAC / B300
Electrical life 105 105 105 105
Mechanical life 30x106 30x106 30x106 30x106
INSULATION
Rated insulation voltage Ui 600VAC 415VAC 600VAC 600VAC
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Removable (DMK 1...); fixed (DMK 7...)
Maximum tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin) for DMK 1...; 0.8Nm (7lbin) for DMK 7...
Conductor section (min...max) 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12AWG) for DMK 0...
0.2...4.0mm2 (24...12AWG) for DMK 7...
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+60°C -20...+60°C -20...+60°C -20...+60°C
Storage temperature -30...+80°C -30...+80°C -30...+80°C -30...+80°C
HOUSING
Material Thermoplastic (DMK 1...) / Polyamide (DMK 7...)
On specific request.
One contact NO for DMK 75 R1.
23
23-44
Multimeters
TYPE DMK 20 - DMK 21 - DMK 22

AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Rated supply voltage Us 208...240VAC
Operating voltage range 154...288VAC for DMK 20
177...264VAC for DMK 21 - DMK 22
Frequency 45...65Hz
Maximum power consumption 5.5VA (Us=240V) for DMK 20 - DMK 21
6VA (Us=240V) for DMK 22
Maximum power dissipation 2.5W (Us=240V) for DMK 20 - DMK 21
2.8W (Us=240V) for DMK 22
Immunity time of microbreakings 20ms
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Maximum rated voltage (Ue) 690VAC phase-phase
(400VAC phase-neutral)
Operating voltage range 60...830V phase-phase
(30...480VAC phase-neutral)
Method of measuring True RMS
Measuring input impedance >1.1M phase-phase and >570k phase-neutral
Method of connections Single phase, two-phase, three-phase,
or balanced three-phase system
Measuring error ±0.25% full scale ±1digit (Class 0.5)
CURRENT INPUTS
Rated current Ie 5A (1A on request)
Measuring range 0.05...6A
Method of measuring True RMS
Overload capacity +20% Ie by external CT with 5A secondary
Overload peak 50A for 1s
Dynamic peak 125A for 10ms
Power consumption <0.6W per phase
Measuring error Class 0.5 ±0.25% f.s. ±1digit
MEASURING ACCURACY
Measurement conditions voltage Class 0.5 ±0.35% f.s. (830V)
(Temperature +23°C ±1°C current Class 0.5 ±0.5% f.s. (6A)
Humidity 45 ±15% R.H.)
active energy Class 2
frequency ––
harmonic distortion ––
OUTPUTS
Relay (1 changeover contact) —
Static (with 1 two-way MOSFET output) —
INSULATION
IEC rated insulation voltage Ui 690V
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminals Removable
Maximum tightening torque 0.5Nm (4.5lbin)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
Material Self-extinguishing black plastic
For DMK 32D 048 only.
23
23-45
DCRM SERIES DCRL SERIES (EXPANDABLE) DCRG SERIES (EXPANDABLE)

• Modular housing • Flush-mount housing: • Flush-mount housing: DCRG 8 - DCRG 8IND
• 2 steps DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 (96x96mm/3.78x3.78”) (144x144mm/5.67x5.67”)
• Settings by front potentiometers DCRL 8 (144x144mm/5.67x5.67”) • 8 steps, expandable with EXP series modules
• 3/5/8 steps, expandable with EXP series (step increment, inputs and outputs,
• 3 LED indications.
modules (step increment, digital outputs, communication ports, GPRS/GSM modem, data
communication ports, etc.) memory, etc.) and with Master-Slave function
• Backlit icon LCD • 128x80 backlit graphic LCD, facilitating data
• Ethernet communication interface (only for reading even in poor lighting conditions and the
DCRL 8) display of system information clearly and
intuitively
• Alarm codes with scrolling texts,
programmable in 6 languages (Italian, English, • Ethernet communication interface
Spanish, French, German and Portuguese) • Texts in 10 languages: Italian, English, Spanish,
• Independent voltage measurement input French, German, Czech, Polish, Russian,
Portuguese and one customisable
• Suitable for low and medium voltage systems
• Voltage measurement input independent of
• Capacitor overload protection
supply input
• Internal panel temperature sensor
• Suitable for low and medium voltage systems
• Voltage and current harmonic-content
• Capacitor overload protection
measurement up to 15th order
• Internal panel temperature sensor
• Front optical USB and Wi-Fi communication
port for PC, smartphone and tablet connection • Voltage and current harmonic-content
measurement up to 31st order
• Programmable alarms
• Suitable for dynamic power factor correction.
• Protection via 2-level password to prevent all
undesired access • Power factor correction by single phase
(SPPFC)
• Compatible with supervision and
energy management software, • Capacitive reactive power factor correction
configuration and remote control software and (DCRG 8IND version)
with the application for Android/iOS. • Front optical USB and Wi-Fi communication port
for PC, smartphone and tablet connection
• Programmable alarms
• Protection via 2-level password to prevent all
undesired access
• Calendar-clock with backup reserve energy.
• Logging of up to 250 events
• Compatible with supervision and
energy management software,
configuration and remote control software and
with the application for Android/iOS.
Page 24-13
THYRISTOR MODULES
• 30, 50, 100kvar
• Suitable for dynamic power factor
correction
• Current flow zero-crossing controlled
connection-disconnection
• Over-temperature protection
• Over-current protectional capacitor
switching.
AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CONTROLLERS
AND THYRISTOR MODULES 24
Microprocessor supervision and
control
Accurate TRMS measurement
circuit
Automatic intelligent adjustment
system
Versions from 2 to 24 steps and up
to 32 with Master-Slave function
Versions with static outputs
Versions for capacitive reactive
power factor correction
Use in cogeneration and medium-
voltage systems
USB, serial, Ethernet
communication interfaces
Modbus-RTU and ASCII
Thyristor modules for dynamic
correction.
SEC. - PAGE
Reactive current control relay
DCRM series ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 8
Automatic power factor controllers
DCRL series ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 9
DCRG series ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 10
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 12
Communication devices ................................................................................................................................................... 24 - 12
Thyristor modules ......................................................................................................... 24 - 13
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 24 - 14
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 24 - 15
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules
DCRL 3 DCRL 5 DCRL 8 DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND

Steps 3 5 8 8
(up to 6 with (up to 8 with (up to 14 with (up to 18 relay outputs with EXP 1006 and EXP10 07)
EXP10 07) EXP10 07) EXP10 07) (up to 24 mixed relay and static outputs with EXP10 01)
ON FRONT/HOUSING
Display Backlit icon LCD 128x80 pixel backlit graphic LCD
Languages 6 10
(scrolling text of alarm codes only) Italian, English, Spanish, French,
Italian, English, Spanish, French, German, Czech, Polish, Russian,
German, Portuguese Portuguese and 1 customisable
Dimensions 96x96mm/ 96x96mm/ 144x144mm/ 144x144mm/
3.78x3.78” 3.78x3.78” 5.67x5.67” 5.67x5.67”
Protection rating IP54 IP54 IP65 IP65
Expandable with EXP… modules
CONTROL/FUNCTIONS
Automatic recognition of current flow direction
4-quadrant operation
Master-Slave function
Independent auxiliary supply input
Three-phase voltage control
Current inputs 1 (by 5A or 1A CTs) 3 (by 5A or 1A CTs)
Dynamic (FAST) power factor correction with EXP10 01 (maximum 16 static outputs)
Power factor correction by single phase
Possibility of connecting inductive steps (DCRG 8IND only)
Medium-voltage usage
Phase-neutral connection in three-phase systems
Analog inputs with EXP10 04
Analog outputs with EXP10 05
Input programmable as function or external temperature sensor with EXP10 04
USB communication interface with EXP10 10 with EXP10 10
RS232 communication interface with EXP10 11 with EXP10 11
Opto-isolated RS485 communication interface with EXP10 12 with EXP10 12
Ethernet communication interface with EXP10 13 (only for DCRL 8) with EXP10 13 and web server function
Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface with EXP10 14
GPRS/GSM modem with EXP10 15
Optical USB communication port on front with CX 01 with CX 01
Optical Wi-Fi communication port on front with CX 02 with CX 02
Fast setting of current transformer
Compatible with configuration and remote control
software
Compatible with supervision and energy
management software
Compatible with App
Calendar-clock with backup reserve power
Data logging memory with EXP10 30
Event logging: alarms, setup changes, etc.
Customisable internal counters
24
24-2
DCRL 3 DCRL 5 DCRL 8 DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND

MEASUREMENTS
Rated measurement voltage 600VAC max 600VAC max
Measurement voltage range 50...720VAC 50...720VAC
Instantaneous cos (power factor displacement)
Instantaneous and average weekly power factor values
Voltage and current
Reactive power to reach set-point and total values
Capacitor overload
Electrical panel temperature
Maximum voltage and current value
Maximum capacitor overload value
Maximum panel temperature value
Maximum capacitor temperature value with EXP10 04 and EXP10 15
Active and apparent power value
Active, reactive, apparent energy
Current and voltage harmonic analysis up to 15th up to 31st
Var-measured value per step
Number of switches for each step
PROTECTIONS
Voltage too high and too low
Current too high and too low
Over compensation (capacitors disconnected and cos
higher than set-point)
Under compensation (capacitors connected and cos
lower than set-point)
Capacitor overload
Capacitor overload on all 3 phases
Over temperature
Mains micro-breaking
Capacitor bank failure
Over maximum n° of switches
Over maximum harmonic distortion level limit
Programmable alarm property
(enable, trip delay, relay energising, etc.)
Capacitor protection with EXP10 16
L1
L2
L3
Automatic power
factor controllers
Fuse holders
Fuse
holders
Contactors
24
Switch
disconnectors
24-3
DCRL series
ESSENTIAL AND PERFORMANCE TOO!

DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION PORT
The optical port on the front permits communication with PCs, smartphones and
tablets through the USB and Wi-Fi standards for carrying out programming,
diagnostics and data download without disconnecting power to the electrical panel.
CX 01
CX 02
USER INTERFACE
The backlit icon LCD ensures excellent legibility as well as the texts for the display of
measurements and description of alarms. The 4 navigation buttons are
for settings and functions.
AN EXPANSION SLOT FOR EXP... SERIES MODULES
EXPANDABLE UP TO 8 STEPS
COMPACT SIZE FIXING SYSTEM EXPANDABILITY

The space taken by the housing does not increase The system of fixing with clips is simple, with a Basic controller functionality can be extended
(96x96x73mm / 3.78x3.78x2.87”) even with the press to click into place and push to ensure hold easily using the EXP series expansion modules:
expansion module fitted. over time. – digital outputs
Correct application of the standard seal and clips in – relay outputs to increase number of steps
the panel ensures a front IP54 protection degree. – opto-isolated USB interface
– opto-isolated RS232 interface
– opto-isolated RS485 interface.
65 8.5
55
MAX
1
SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
- Application for Android and iOS
EXP 10...
- for configuration and remote control
- for supervision and energy
management.
24
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE DCRL SERIES
– WIDE RANGE OF VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS – ALARM MESSAGES IN 6 LANGUAGES
The wide measurement range between 50...720VAC L-L and between The alarm texts can be displayed in Italian, English, French, German, Portuguese
50...415VAC L-N allows the controllers to be used in most applications. and Spanish.
– SUITABLE FOR LOW- AND MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SYSTEMS – DEFECTIVE STEP

The controllers can be used in medium-voltage systems thanks to the The DCRL measures the percentage of residual power for each step, comparing
ability to set a voltage transformer ratio, obtaining measurements regarding it with the value set in the main menu.
the transformer primary value both for adjustment and for the display. The defective step alarm is generated if this value is below the set limit.
24-4
DCRL series
DCRL 8
USER INTERFACE
The backlit icon LCD ensures excellent legibility as well as the texts for the
display of measurements and description of alarms. The 5 navigation buttons
are for settings and functions, while an LED indicates the alarms and the
optical port for communication via USB and Wi-Fi.
EXPANDABLE UP TO 14 STEPS
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION PORT

The optical port on the front permits communication with PCs,
smartphones and tablets through the USB and Wi-Fi standards for
carrying out programming, diagnostics and data download without
disconnecting power to the electrical panel.
TWO EXPANSION SLOTS FOR EXP... SERIES

MODULES
ETHERNET COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

By using the expansion module with EXP 1013.
CUSTOMISATION
An insert for labels customised with text, logos, codes, etc. is available, to be
fixed onto the controller frames.

Reduced profile and depth simplify installation of The fixing system with metal screws guarantees Basic controller functionality can be extended
the power factor controller even in very compact excellent, lasting hold over time. easily using the EXP series expansion modules:
electrical panels. – relay outputs to increase number of steps
The total depth of the controller is 73mm (2.87”) – digital outputs
inside the panel with the expansion modules – opto-isolated RS232 interface
installed. – opto-isolated RS485 interface
– opto-isolated ETHERNET interface.
44 mm
9 mm
44
HIGH PROTECTION RATING

The front of the controller and seal have been
designed to ensure a front protection rating of
IP65.
MAX
137
144
64.5
2
SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
- Application for Android and iOS
73 9 - for configuration and remote control
EXP 10...
- for supervision and energy
management. 24
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE DCRL SERIES
– 5A OR 1A IN THE SAME CONTROLLER – MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
A parameter can enable the controller for use with a 5A or 1A secondary current There are 2 counters: one to count the operating hours for the steps and the
transformer. other for the number of interventions of each step. An alarm
threshold can be set for both counters.
– WHITE BACKLIT DISPLAY
It can be programmed to flash during alarm conditions. – BUILT-IN TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The internal temperature of the controller is monitored constantly by the
– HARMONIC ANALYSIS built-in sensor.
It includes voltage and current THD measurements and single harmonic The user can program the thresholds to activate and stop the cooling fan
measurement up to the 15th order and they can be shown on the display. and/or generate the temperature alarm.
24-5
DCRG series
THE SOLUTION FOR ALL APPLICATIONS!

DCRG 8 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION PORT
The optical port on the front permits communication
with PCs, smartphones and tablets through the USB
and Wi-Fi standards for carrying out programming,
BACKLIT GRAPHIC
diagnostics and data download without disconnecting
LCD
power to the electrical panel.
High-legibility 128x80 pixels,
with adjustable brightness.
CX 01
CX 02
CUSTOMISATION
There is a customisation slot available on the front panel
for the description of the controller by adding texts,
logos, codes, etc.
Trim
44mm
1.73”
9mm
0.35”
MAX
4
Frame profile and reduced total The fixing system with metal Basic controller functionality can be extended easily using the EXP series
depth simplify installation of the screws guarantees excellent expansion modules:
controller also in very compact adhesion over time. - Relay outputs to increase the number of steps
electric panels. - Opto-isolated static outputs (also for dynamic correction)
- Capacitor protection
- Digital and analog inputs and outputs
HIGH PROTECTION DEGREE - Expandable up to 24 mixed outputs
44
(1.73”) The controller front and the rear - Opto-isolated RS232 interface
seal have been designed to warrant - Opto-isolated RS485 interface
an IP54 protection degree. - Opto-isolated ETHERNET interface with web server function
24 - Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface
- GPRS/GSM modem
- Data memory, calendar-clock with backup reserve power for data logging.
137 (5.39”)
144 (5.67”)
64.5 (2.54”)
73 (2.87”) 9
EXP 10... (0.35”)
24-6
DCRG series
SUITABLE FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

USING CONTACTORS AND THYRISTOR
MODULES
INDEPENDENT POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

FOR EACH SINGLE PHASE
CAPACITIVE REACTIVE POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION VIA INDUCTIVE STEP
MANAGEMENT (WITH DCRG 8IND MODEL)
SMS SENDING FOR ALARM CONDITIONS
DATA SENDING BY EMAIL OR FTP SERVER
WEB SERVER FOR DATA READING
STREAMLINE DESIGN
The DCRG controller has an ergonomic design and, at the same time,
particular care has been given to details.
MASTER-SLAVE FUNCTION WEB SERVER FUNCTION GSM/GPRS MODEM SUITABLE FOR MEDIUM-VOLTAGE
The DCRG controller can control the With the EXP10 15 expansion SYSTEMS
outputs of other analog controllers in module, the controller is equipped The controller can be used in
addition to its own steps. In this way, with a GSM/GPRS modem, which it medium-voltage systems thanks to
it offers a Master-Slave architecture. automatically configures. This the ability to set a voltage
Up to 8 slaves can be controlled to simplifies installation and wiring. transformer ratio, obtaining
create a system with a maximum of Once a data-enabled SIM card is measurements regarding the
32 steps. inserted, the controller can send transformer primary value both for
alarm or event SMS and e-mails adjustment and for the display.
By installing the Ethernet expansion and data files can be transmitted to
module EXP10 13, the main FTP servers. SUITABLE FOR DYNAMIC (FAST)
measured values of the controller POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
can be viewed by the most Thanks to the EXP10 01 expansion
common web clients on the market 5A AND 1A BOTH ON THE SAME modules with static outputs,
compatible with Java, with no need CONTROLLER thyristor-based dynamic power
to install any additional software on By configuring an specific factor correction systems can be
the PC. parameter, the controller can be created where the reactive load
Master enabled for use with either a 5A or varies rapidly over time. By taking
1A secondary current transformer. advantage of the built-in relay
outputs as well, a mixed traditional
CAPACITOR PROTECTION (relay) and dynamic system can be
By adding the dedicated EXP10 16 GRAPHS AND TEXTS IN 10 obtained.
expansion module, the DCRG
LANGUAGES INDEPENDENT POWER FACTOR
controller can be equipped with
additional capacitor protection CORRECTION FOR EACH SINGLE
functions. The module can measure PHASE (SPPFC)
the harmonic current values and the In highly unbalanced three-phase
capacitor temperature on-site as systems, power factor correction by
Slave 1 well as detecting malfunction on single phase can be implemented.
any phase. The DCRG controller can monitor
the cos of each single phase and
correct through the joint use of
single- and three-phase capacitor
3 CURRENT INPUTS Display of waveforms, graphs and banks.
- Independent power factor texts in 10 languages: Italian,
correction for each single phase English, Spanish, French, German, CAPACITIVE REACTIVE POWER
- Analysis of all electrical Czech, Polish, Russian, Portuguese FACTOR CORRECTION
measurements in the system and one customisable. (DCRG 8IND).
Slave 2
(multimeter). The DCRG 8IND version can 24
connect both capacitors and
inductors to achieve the desired
cosshould it be necessary to
WIDE RANGE OF RATED VOLTAGE correct the capacitive reactive power
factor as well.
MEASUREMENTS
The wide measurement range SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
between 100...600VAC allows the - Application for Android
controller to be used in most and iOS
applications. - for configuration and
Slave 8 remote control
- for supervision and
energy management.
24-7
Reactive current control relay
DCRM series Order Steps Auxiliary Qty Wt General characteristics

code supply per The DCRM allows the reactive current of a system to be
voltage pkg controlled.
no. [V] n° [kg] It can correct to the best cos value possible, reducing
the request for reactive current from the mains.
Single and three-phase low-voltage systems. It can control the connection of two capacitor banks.
DCRM 2 2 380...415VAC 1 0.284 Each one can be individually enabled and its power can
be set through a dedicated trimmer.
It is also possible to adjust the time for connection and
disconnection of the capacitors, thereby modifying the
reaction speed of the system.
The controller can be used both in three- and single-
DCRM 2 phase wiring.
– Auxiliary supply voltage:
• 380...415VAC standard
• 220...240VAC and 440...480VAC on request
– Rated frequency: 50/60Hz
– 80...528VAC voltage measurement input
– Current measurement input:
• By CT /5A
• Measuring range: 0.1...6A
• Measurement type: true root mean square (TRMS)
• Automatic identification of CT connection polarity
(straight / inverted)
– Relay outputs:
• 2 relays (steps), each with 1 changeover contact
• Rated current: 8A 250VAC (AC1)
• Individual enablement of control of the two relays
– IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (if placed in
IP40 housing and/or electrical panel), IP20 terminals.
ADJUSTMENTS
“C/K Step 1” C/K ratio step 1 (0.15...2)
“C/K Step 2” C/K ratio step 2 (0.15...2)
“Connection delay” Step connection delay 1...60s
“Disconnection delay” Step disconnection delay
0.1...60s
“System configuration” Single- or three-phase
wiring selection.
INDICATIONS
– 1 green LED for power on and inhibition time
– 2 red LEDs for relay connection.

Certifications obained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and
Canada (File E93601), as Auxliary Devices-Modular
ampere monitoring relays (with 415VAC maximum only).
IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3,
UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.
24

24-8 page 24-14 page 24-15 page 24-17
DCRL series Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

code per The DCRL series was developed with advanced
pkg functionality and produced with a dedicated ultra-
n° [kg] compact housing. It combines modern front design with
practical mounting and expandability (EXP… modules).
Single and three-phase low and medium-voltage systems. Its main features are:
DCRL 3 3 steps, expandable up 1 0.340 – Backlit icon LCD with excellent information display
to 6 steps, 100…440VAC – Alarm codes with scrolling texts, programmable in 6
DCRL 5 5 steps, expandable up 1 0.340 languages (Italian, English, Spanish, French, German
to 8 steps, 100…440VAC and Portuguese)
– Connection in single or three phase lines and co-
DCRL 8 8 steps, expandable up 1 0.640 generation systems with 4-quadrant operation
DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 to 14 steps, 100…440VAC – Voltage measurement input independent of supply and
Accessory. which can be used in medium-voltage lines with VTs
EXP80 00 Plastic insert for 10 0.050 – Drastic reduction in the number of switching
customisation operations
label – Balanced use of steps with same power rating
(only for DCRL 8) – Measurement of reactive power installed for each step
– Capacitor over-current protection
– Panel over-temperature protection via internal sensor
Order Description – Accurate micro-breaking protection
code – Vast choice of measurements available, including
EXPANSION MODULES. voltage and current THD with single harmonic analysis
Additional steps. up to the 15th order.
– Wide voltage measurement range
EXP10 06 2 relay outputs to increase number of – High accuracy of true root mean square (TRMS)
DCRL 8 power factor correction steps measurements
EXP10 07 3 relay outputs to increase number of – Front optical USB (CX 01 dongle) and Wi-Fi (CX 02
power factor correction steps dongle) communication port for PC, smartphone and
Inputs and outputs. tablet connection
– Compatible with Ethernet communication modules
EXP80 00 EXP10 03 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC EXP10 13 (only for DCRL 8)
Communication ports. – Compatible with supervision and energy
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface management software, configuration and
remote control software and with the
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface application for Android/iOS.
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface – Customisation with label on front (only for DCRL 8).
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated ETHERNET interface
(only for DCRL 8) Operational characteristics
– Supply:
• Auxiliary voltage: 100…440VAC
• Frequency: 50/60Hz ±10%
EXP 10...
– Voltage input:
• Rated voltage: 600VAC L-L (346VAC L-N)
Snap-in fixing of EXP... expansion modules • Frequency range: 45…65Hz
DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 with 1 module DCRL 8 with 2 modules – Current input:
• Single-phase connection
• Rated current: 1A or 5A, configurable
– Measurements and control:
• Power factor adjustment: 0.5ind.…0.5cap.
• Voltage measurement range: 50…720VAC L-L;
50…415VAC L-N
• Current measurement range: 0.025…1.2A for
1A full scale; 0.025…6A for 5A full scale
• Type of voltage and current measurement: true root
mean square (TRMS).
– Relay outputs (steps):
• DRCL 3: 3 outputs
• DCRL 5: 5 outputs
MAX • DCRL 8: 8 outputs
• Contact arrangement: NO; the last is a changeover
1
• Rated current: 5A 250VAC AC1
– Flush-mount housing:
MAX DCRL 3, DCRL 5 (96x96mm / 3.78x3.78”); DCRL 8
(144x144mm / 5.67x5.67”)
2
– IEC degree of protection:
Backlit icon LCD DCRL 3, DCRL 5 IP54 and DCRL 8 IP65 on front;
Inductive / Automatic Cooling fan IP20 on terminals for all.
capacitive Mode status
Certifications and compliance:
Certifications obtained: UL Listing for USA and Canada
Output status (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Power
Manual mode
factor controllers, EAC, RCM.
24
Step status
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n°14.
Main display
Alarm active
Contactors for power factor correction
Graphic bar See section 2, page 2-14.
Indication of
communication Software: , and
See section 27.
EXP expansion modules

See section 28.
Secondary display Alphanumeric display

page 24-12 page 28-2 page 24-14 page 24-15 page 24-18 24-9
DCRG series Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

code per The DCRG automatic power factor controller satisfies the
pkg technical requirements of modern electrical systems in
no. n° [kg] industry.
It is designed to satisfy them, with the option of
DCRG 8 8 steps, expandable up 1 0.980 extending its functionality by using specific EXP series
to 24 steps, 100…440VAC expansion modules. Mention should also be made of the
DCRG 8IND 8 steps, expandable up 1 0.980 optical communication port as standard, for programming
to 24 steps, 100…440VAC, the controller, diagnostics and data download.
for capacitive reactive The backlit graphic LCD facilitates data reading even in
power factor correction poor lighting conditions and permits the display of
Accessories. system information clearly and intuitively.
Its main features are:
NTC 01 Remote temperature 1 0.150 – 128x80-pixel backlit graphic LCD with texts in 10
sensor, length 3m/3.3yd languages: Italian, English, Spanish, French, German,
DCRG 8 Czech, Polish, Russian, Portuguese and one
Order Description customisable
code – Connection in single and three-phase lines as well as
EXPANSION MODULES three-phase lines with neutral control and
Additional steps. cogeneration systems (4 quadrants)
– Capacitive reactive power factor correction
EXP10 06 2 relay outputs to increase number of (DCRG 8IND)
power factor correction steps – Independent power factor correction for each single
EXP10 07 3 relay outputs to increase number of phase (SPPFC)
power factor correction steps – Use with medium-voltage lines with VTs
Inputs and outputs. – Capability for correct operation even in systems
characterised by high harmonic content
EXP10 00 4 opto-isolated digital inputs – Drastic reduction in the number of switching operations
EXP10 01 4 opto-isolated static outputs to increase – Balanced use of steps with same power rating
number of static steps – Measurement of reactive power installed for each step
EXP10 02 2 digital inputs and 2 opto-isolated static outputs – Recording of the number of connections for each step
– Capacitor over-current protection on all three phases
EXP10 03 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC – Panel over-temperature protection via internal sensor
EXP 10... EXP10 04 2 PT100 opto-isolated analogue inputs, and external sensor
either 0/4...20mA, 0...10V or 0...±5V – Accurate micro-breaking protection
EXP10 05 2 opto-isolated analogue inputs 0/4…20mA, – Current and voltage harmonic analysis
0…10V or 0…±5V – Quick CT programming function
– USB (CX 01 dongle) and Wi-Fi (CX 02 dongle)
EXP10 08 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay
communication port for PC, smartphone and tablet
outputs 5A 250VAC connection
EXP10 16 Capacitor protection with 2 inputs for – Modbus-RTU TCP and ASCII communication protocol
temperature measurement with NTC sensors – Compatible with supervision and energy
and 2 three-phase measurement inputs management software, configuration and
Communication ports. remote control software and with the
application for Android/iOS
EXP10 10 Opto-isolated USB interface – Sending and reception of SMS, sending of e-mails
EXP10 11 Opto-isolated RS232 interface with alarm diagnosis and data files, FTP Client function
EXP10 12 Opto-isolated RS485 interface (with EXP10 15 module).
EXP10 13 Opto-isolated ETHERNET interface with web Operational characteristics
server function – Voltage measurement circuit:
• Auxiliary supply voltage: 100...415VAC
EXP10 14 Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface • Rated frequency: 50/60Hz (±10%)
EXP10 15 GPRS/GSM modem, without antenna – Current measurement circuit:
Other functions. • Single and three-phase input
• Rated current: 5A (1A programmable)
EXP10 30 Data memory, calendar-clock with backup
– Measurements and control:
reserve power for data logging • Power factor adjustment: 0.5ind....0.5cap.
For configuration via software, contact our Customer Service Office • Voltage measurement range: 50...720VAC
(Tel. +39 035 4282422; E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com). • Current measurement range: 0.025...6A
• Temperature measurement range: -30...+85°C
Maximum expandability DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND
• Capacitor overload current measurement range:
DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND EXP10 06 EXP10 07 EXP10 01 TOTAL 0...250%
Controller Module with Module with Module with STEPS • Type of voltage and current measurement: true root
2 relay outputs 3 relay outputs 4 static outputs mean square (TRMS).
– Relay outputs:
Steps no. of modules no. of modules no. of modules Relay Static
• 7 each with NO contact and the last as changeover
8 4 (2 steps) – – 16 – • Rated current: 5A 250VAC AC1
8 2 (2 steps) max. 2 (3 steps) – 18 – – Flush-mount housing (144x144mm / 5.67x5.67”)
– IEC degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on
8 – – max. 4 (4 steps) 8 16
terminals.
Snap-in fixing of 4 EXP... expansion modules Certifications and compliance
24 DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND Certifications obtained: UL Listing for USA and Canada
(cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Electronic
power factor regulator, EAC, RCM (only for DCRG 8).
IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508,
CSA C22.2 n°14.
Contactors for power factor correction
See section 2, page 2-14.
Software: , and
MAX See section 27.
4 EXP expansion modules
See section 28.

24-10 page 24-12 page 28-2 page 24-14 page 24-16 page 24-18
“Master-Slave” power factor correction system with DCRG 8
Master Slave 1
When the correction system is divided into several panels, a

DCRG 8 (Master) controller can control up to 8 DCRG 8 (Slave)
controllers. The “Slave” controllers serve as remote outputs for
the connection of capacitor banks that carry out the “Master”
controller’s commands.
The single controllers are responsible for monitoring the
electrical panel and the capacitor banks in particular, while the
cos reading is centralised in the “Master” panel where the line
arrives. Slave 2
Slave 8
Software and APP General characteristics

By using the software, the quick setup of the
controllers can be carried out via PC, avoiding parameter
configuration and remote control software programming errors.
The parameter programming of a DCRL… or DCRG 8
controller can also be saved on PC and quickly loaded into
another device requiring the same programming.
It permits the following operations:
– System operation monitoring:
• Graphical and numerical display of measurements
• Controller status
– Capacitor efficiency control
• Current kvar measurement for each step
• Counters for the number of connections for each step
• Total hour counter for connection time for each
individual step
• Access all setup parameters
Supervision and energy management software • Saving / loading parameters
• Highlighting of changed values
• Resetting to default values.
The software permits remote control and
supervision of the DCRL... and DCRG 8 controllers.
See section 27 for details.
This software has structures and applications based on
MS SQL relational databases, and the data can be
consulted using the most popular browsers.
It is a highly versatile system, simultaneously accessible
to a large number of users/workstations via intranets, VPN
or Internet.
APP for smartphone and tablet
APP The application allows the user to program the
controller, view alarms, send commands, read
measurements, download statistical data and events and
send retrieved data by e-mail. The connection is made by
Wi-Fi with a smartphone or tablet using the CX 02 device.
It is iOS and Android compatible.
24
24-11
Accessories
Communication devices
Accessories for DCRL and Order Description Qty Wt

DCRG code per
pkg
n° [kg]
51 C2 Connection cable 1 0.090
PCDCRL/DCRG+
EXP10 11
length 1.8m/2yd
PCconverter 4 PX1,
length 1.8m/2yd
DCRL/DCRG+
EXP1011Modem
51 C4 length 1.8m/2yd
DCRG+EXP10 11
converter 4 PX1,
length 1.8m/2yd
PCModem, length
1.8m/2yd
EXC CON 01 RS485/ Ethernet converter, 1 0.400
12...48VDC, including
DIN rail fixing kit
4 PX1 RS232/RS485 converter 1 0.600
drive, galvanically isolated,
220...240VAC (110...120VAC
on request)
EXC M3G 01 RS485 Gateway/3G modem, 1 0.340
9.5…27VAC/9.5…35VDC,
including antenna and
programming cable
Consult our Customer Service for modem details; see contact details on
inside front cover.
Opto-isolated RS232/RS485 analog modem, 38,400 Baud-rate maximum,
automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision, 220...240VAC ±10%
power supply (110...120VAC on request).
Communication devices Order Description Qty Wt General characteristics

code per Communication and connection devices to connect the
pkg DCRL and DCRG power factor controllers to personal
computers, smartphones and tablets.
n° [kg]
CX 01
CX 01 USB/optical dongle 1 0.090
This USB dongle, complete with cable, permits
PCDCRL/DCRG, for
connection of the power factor controller with a PC
programming, data download,
without needing to disconnect the electrical panel supply,
diagnostics and updating
in order to:
firmware
– Program parameters
CX 01 CX 02 Wi-Fi connection device for 1 0.090 – Copy the settings to external units
PCDCRL/DCRG, for – Download data and events
downloading data, programming, – Carry out diagnostics
diagnostics and cloning – Update the firmware.
For DCRG8 type only. The PC identifies the connection as a standard USB.
CX 03 GSM penta-band antenna 1 0.090 CX 02
(850/900/1800/1900/2100MHz) Via Wi-Fi connection, the power factor controllers can be
for EXP10 15 expansion. viewed from PCs, smartphones and tablets without
CX 02 having to connect cables, in order to:
– Program parameters
– Download data and events
– Carry out diagnosis and cloning of the device.
CX 03
Compatible with major worldwide mobile phone
networks, thanks to the use of 850/900/1800/1900/
2100MHz frequencies.
CX 03 IEC degree of protection: IP67.
Fixing hole Ø10mm (0.40”).
24 Cable length 2.5m/2.73yd.
For dimensions, wiring diagrams and technical
characteristics, consult the manuals available online in
the Download section of the following website:
www.LovatoElectric.com
24-12
Thyristor modules
Order Step power Qty Wt General characteristics

code per – suitable for dynamic (fast) power factor correction
pkg – connection at current flow zero-crossing
[kvar] n° [kg] – capacitor over-current protection on connection
– over-temperature protection via built-in sensor.
DCTM3 400 030 Module for 30kvar 1 4.300
step, 400...480VAC Operational characteristics
DCTM3 400 050 Module for 50kvar 1 4.300 – 30kvar, 50kvar and 100kvar steps
step, 400...525VAC – Rated operating voltage:
DCTM3 400 100 Module for 100kvar 1 5.600 • 400...480VAC for DCTM3 400 030
step 400...525VAC • 400...525VAC for DCTM3 400 050 and
DCTM3 400 100
– Auxiliary fan supply voltage: 230VAC (only for
DCTM3 400 100)
Power rating available depending on voltage – Rated frequency: 50/60Hz
DCTM3 400 030 DCTM3 400 050 DCTM3 400 100 – Control circuit: 8...30VDC
– Controlled voltages: 2
Current Ie [A] 43A 72A 144A – Forced ventilation: DCTM3 400 100 only
Voltage Power Power Power – Ambient conditions:
[VAC] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] • Operating temperature: -10...+45°C
400 30 50 100 • Use at higher temperatures with power derating
(see page 24-19)
440 33 55 110 – IEC degree of protection: IP10.
DCTM3 400... 480 36 60 120
525 — 66 131 INDICATIONS
– Auxiliary power on
– Over-temperature alarm
– Trigger LED.
Compliance:
Compliant with standards: EN 50178.
24

page 24-14 page 24-16 page 24-19 24-13
REACTIVE CURRENT CONTROL RELAY

DCRM 2
5 58.1 (2.29")
53.5 (2.11") (0.20") 43.8 (1.72")
104.7 (4.12")
45 (1.77")
90 (3.54")
99 (3.90")
Ø4.2 59.9 (2.36")

(0.16")

DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 Cutout
65 (2.56”) 8.5 92 (3.62”)

96 (3.78”)
55 (2.16”) (0.33”)
92 (3.62”)
96 (3.78”)
EXP 10...
DCRL 8 - DCRG 8... Cutout

138.5 (5.45”)
144 (5.67”) 44
(1.73”) 138.5 (5.45”)
137 (5.39”)
144 (5.67”)
64.5 (2.54”)
73 (2.87”) 9
EXP 10... (0.35”)
THYRISTOR MODULES
DCTM3 400 030 - DCTM3 400 050 DCTM3 400 100
157 (6.18”) 157 (6.18”)
145 (5.71”) 145 (5.71”) 205 (8.07”)
134 (5.27”) 134 (5.27”) 135 (5.31”) 64 (2.52”)
123 (4.84”) 123 (4.84”) 2.5 (0.10”)
200 (7.87”)
200 (7.87”)
170 (6.69”)
120 (4.72”)
170 (6.69”)
120 (4.72”)
253 (9.96”)
24
61 (2.40”)
53 (2.09”)
83 (3.27”) 78 (3.07”)
135 (5.31”) 83 (3.27”)
5 103 (4.05”)
(0.20”)
24-14
Wiring diagrams
REACTIVE CURRENT CONTROL RELAY

DCRM 2
Single-phase connection Three-phase connection
BFK... type BFK... type

contactor contactor
connection connection
IMPORTANT
a. For three-phase connection, the voltage measurement input must be connected
between two phases; the line CT must be connected on the remaining phase.
b. The polarity of the current measurement input is irrelevant.
CAUTION! Always disconnect the power supply when operating on the terminals.

DCRL... with BFK… type contactors
MAINS
L1 L2 L3 DCRL 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUT INPUT AUX
CURRENT VOLTAGE SUPPLY
S1 S2 100-600V 100-440V
1 2 4 5 6 7 15 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18
FU10 FU11
CT1 2x1A 2x1A
QS1 FU1 FU2 FU8
FU9 FU10 R R R
FU9
10A 5A
KM1 KM2 K8
R R R
LOAD TC1
BFK... type
contactor
connection
K1 K2 K8
IMPORTANT
a. For three-phase connection, the voltage measurement input must be connected
between two phases; the line CT must be connected on the remaining phase.
24
24-15
Wiring diagrams

DCRG 8 with BF...K type contactors
MAINS
DCRG8
L1 L2 L3
AUX
SUPPLY
100-240VAC
INPUT
CURRENT VOLTAGE
100-690VAC
0V
/5A
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S2 S2 11 12 L1 L2 L3 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CT1
FU17
QS1
FU1 FU2 FU12
FU13 FU16 FU14 FU15
KM1 KM2 KM12
LOAD BFK... type

contactor
connection
K1 K2 K8
IMPORTANT
a. For three-phase connection, the voltage measurement input must be
connected between two phases; the line CT must be connected on the
remaining phase.
DCRG 8IND
MAINS
DCRG8
L1 L2 L3
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUT AUX
CURRENT VOLTAGE SUPPLY
100-415V~
1/5A~ 100-600V~ 110-250V=
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22
I1 I2 I3 C L1 L2 L3 N nc A1 A2
S1
S2
CT1
FU9
QS1 FU10
FU1 FU2 FU7 FU8
FU11 FU12
FU13 R R
BF...K contactor
BF...K contactor
BF contactor
BF contactor
KM1 KM2 KM7 KM8
R R
LOAD TC1
L1 L2 K1 K2
THYRISTOR MODULES
DCTM3 400...
24
MAINS Auxiliary voltage 230VAC
L1 L2 L3
DCTM3 L N
L1 C1
C1
L3 C3
- + L N
Fan power supply 240VAC input

(DCTM3 400 100 only)
LOAD Control circuit input

8...30VDC
24-16
DCRM series reactive current control relay
TYPE DCRM 2
AUXILIARY SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Rated auxiliary voltage (Us) 380...415VAC standard
220...240VAC and 440...480VAC on request
Maximum power consumption/dissipation 4.4VA / 2.4W
Micro-breaking immunity 17ms
No-voltage release 8ms
VOLTAGE INPUT
Maximum rated voltage Ue 480VAC
Measuring range 80...528VAC
Frequency range 50 or 60Hz ±1% self configurable
Measurement input impedance >1M
Type of connection L1-L2 or -N
CURRENT INPUT
Type of connection By current transformer (CT)
Rated current Ie 5A AC
Measurement range 0.1...6A
Type of input Shunt supplied by external current transformer (low voltage). Max. 5A
Measurement method True RMS value
Overload capacity +20% Ie
Overload peak 10In for 1s
Dynamic limit 160A for 10ms
Burden 0.6W
ADJUSTMENTS
C/K step 1 and 2 OFF / 0.15...2
Connection / disconnection 1...60s
System configuration 3-phase - 1-phase
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of relays 2 (each with 1 changeover)
IEC conventional free air thermal current (Ith) 8A
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 and UL/CSA designation B300
Electrical life with rated load 105 cycles
Rated insulation voltage 480VAC
CONNECTIONS
Maximum tightening torque 0.8Nm (7 lbin; 7-9 lbin according to UL/CSA)
Conductor section min....max. 0.2...4.0mm2 (24...12 AWG; 18...12 AWG according to UL/CSA)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
HOUSING
UL/CSA certification obtained with 415VAC maximum.
24
24-17
DCRL... and DCRG series automatic power factor controllers
TYPE DCRL 3 DCRL 5 DCRL 8 DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND

AUXILIARY SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Rated supply voltage (Us) 100...440VAC 100...415VAC
Operating range 90...484VAC 90...456VAC
Rated frequency 50Hz; 60Hz 50Hz; 60Hz
Maximum power consumption 9.5VA 7VA 27VA
Maximum power dissipation 3.5W 2.5W 105W
(excluding power dissipation from the output contacts)
VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Control voltage 100...600VAC L-L; 100...346VAC L-N 100...600VAC L-L;
100...346VAC L-N
Operating range 50...720VAC L-L; 50...415VAC L-N 50...720VAC L-L;
50...415VAC L-N
Frequency range 45...65Hz 46...65Hz; 360...440Hz
Immunity time for microbreaking <25ms 35ms (110VAC) - 80ms
(220...415VAC)
No-voltage relay release 8ms 8ms
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Rated current Ie Programmable 5A or 1A
Operating range 0.025...6A for 5A full scale; 0.025...1.2A for 1A full scale
Constant overload 1.2Ie
Power consumption 0.6VA
MEASUREMENT DATA
Type of voltage and current measurement True RMS value
Power factor adjustment 0.5ind....0.5cap.
Type of temperature sensor type Internal Internal
+ PT100 with EXP10 04
+ NTC with EXP10 16
Temperature measurement range 0...+212°C 0...+212°C
RELAY OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 3/5/8 (up to 14 with EXP10 06 - EXP10 07) 8 (up to 18 with
EXP10 06 - EXP10 07)
Contact arrangement 2/4/7 NO contacts + 1 changeover 7 NO contacts +
1 changeover
IEC rated current 5A 250V AC1 5A 250V AC1
Maximum current at common contact terminal 10A
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 and UL/CSA designation B300
Electrical life with rated load 105 cycles
STATIC OUTPUTS
Number of outputs –– 4 or 8 with EXP10 01
INSULATION
Rated insulation voltage Ui 600VAC
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 9.5kV
Power frequency withstand voltage 5.2kV
CONNECTIONS
Type of terminal Removable
Conductor section min....max 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12 AWG; 18...12 AWG according to UL)
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -20...+60°C -20...+70°C
Storage temperature -30...+80°C -30...+80°C
HOUSING
Version Flush-mount Flush-mount Flush-mount
96x96mm (3.78x3.78”) 144x144mm (5.67x5.67”) 144x144mm (5.67x5.67”)
Material Polycarbonate Polycarbonate Polycarbonate
24 IEC degree of protection IP54 IP65 IP65
24-18
Thyristor modules DCTM3...
TYPE DCTM3 400 30 DCTM3 400 50 DCTM3 400 100

VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Rated auxiliary voltage (Us) 400...480VAC ±10% 400...525VAC ±10% 400...525VAC ±10%
Rated current Ie 43A 72A 144A
Step power at 400 VAC 30kvar 50kvar 100kvar
Maximum inverse voltage 2200VAC 2800VAC 2800VAC
Number of controlled phases 2 2 2
Auxiliary voltage 230VAC ±10% 230VAC ±10% 230VAC ±10%
Fan supply –– –– 230VAC ±10%
Maximum power consumption 9VA
Control circuit 8...30VDC
(2mA at 12VDC)
Over-temperature protection Yes
Cooling system Natural Natural Forced ventilation
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Operating temperature -10...+45°C (Ie<50A) -10...+45°C (Ie<100A) -10...+45°C (Ie<190A)
-10...+50°C (Ie<48A) -10...+50°C (Ie<90A) -10...+50°C (Ie<180A)
-10...+55°C (Ie<46A) -10...+55°C (Ie<85A) -10...+55°C(Ie<170A)
Altitude 1000 m with no derating; higher up derating 10%/1000m up to 4000m
HOUSING
Material Metal
24
24-19
Page 25-6 Page 25-6
ATL 600 ATL 610

• Management of two power sources • Management of two power sources
• AC power supply • AC and DC power supply
• 6 programmable digital inputs • 6 programmable digital inputs
• 7 programmable relay outputs. • 7 programmable relay outputs
• Real time clock (RTC)
• Expandable with EXP series modules
(inputs and outputs, communication ports).
Page 25-7 Page 25-8
ATL 800 ATL 900

• Management of 2 power sources and 1 tie • Management of 3 power sources and 2 tie
breaker breakers
• AC and DC power supply • AC and DC power supply
• 8 programmable digital inputs • 12 programmable digital inputs
• 7 programmable relay outputs • 10 programmable relay outputs
• Built-in NFC technology • 1 programmable static output
• Real time clock (RTC) • Built-in NFC technology
• Non-priority load management • Real time clock (RTC)
• Closed transition with brief parallel • Non-priority load management
configuration • Closed transition with brief parallel
• Built-in RS485 communication configuration
• Built-in PLC logic • Built-in RS485 communication
• Expandable with EXP series modules • Built-in PLC logic
(inputs and outputs, communication ports). • 4 current inputs
• Expandable with EXP series modules
(inputs and outputs, communication ports).
Page 25-9
ATL DPS1
• Module specifically designed to control
power supply voltage of motorised circuit
breakers and changeover switches
• Continuous monitoring of supply line status
• Management via microcontroller
management.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROLLERS 25
Supervision of two or three
three-phase power sources
Emergency demand supervision for
standby generating set
Tie-breaker management
Control of contactors, motorised
circuit breakers and motorised
changeover switches
Closed transition
Automatic non-priority load
management
Event logging
Remote control and supervision
Front optical port
Built-in NFC technology
Expandable with EXP modules
Communication protocols
Modbus-ASCII, RTU and TCP
Real time clock.
SEC. - PAGE
Automatic transfer switch controllers for 2 power sources
ATL 600 type non expandable for controlling 2 power sources............................................................................................. 25 - 6
ATL 610 type expandable with EXP modules for controlling 2 power sources ...................................................................... 25 - 6
ATL 800 type expandable with EXP modules for controlling 2 power sources and 1 tie breaker ............................................ 25 - 7
Automatic transfer switch controllers for 3 power sources
ATL 900 type expandable with EXP modules for controlling 3 power sources and 2 tie breakers .......................................... 25 - 8
Accessories
Dual power supply module ................................................................................................................................................ 25 - 9
Communication devices, software and accessories ............................................................................................................ 25 - 10
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 25 - 11
Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 25 - 12
E NERGY M ANAGEMENT
Automatic transfer switch controllers
ATL series
ATL 600 ATL 610 ATL 800 ATL 900

POWER SUPPLY
Rated DC supply voltage –– 12/24VDC 12/24/48VDC 12/24/48VDC
Rated AC supply voltage 110...240VAC 110...240VAC 110...240VAC 110...240VAC
Frequency 45...66Hz 45...66Hz 45...66Hz 45...66Hz
FRONT PANEL / HOUSING
Backlit display LCD graphic 128x80 pixel LCD graphic 128x80 pixel LCD graphic 128x80 pixel LCD graphic 128x112 pixel
Languages 5 5 8 8
Size 144x144mm/5.67x5.67” 144x144mm/5.67x5.67” 240x180x45mm/9.45x7.09x1.77” 240x180x45mm/9.45x7.09x1.77”
Degree of protection IP40 / optional IP65 IP40 / optional IP65 IP65 IP65
Expandable with EXP series modules –– 2 modules 3 modules 3 modules
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MEASUREMENT INPUT
Power sources that can be controlled 2 2 2 3
Voltage inputs per line 3 phases + neutral 3 phases + neutral 3 phases + neutral 3 phases + neutral
Rated voltage Ue L-L 100…480VAC 100…480VAC 690VAC 690VAC
Current inputs –– –– –– 4 (by 5A or 1A CTs)
Frequency range 45…65Hz 45…65Hz 45…65Hz 45…65Hz
BUILT-IN DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Number of inputs 6 6 8 12
Number of outputs 7 7 11 11
Contact configuration 6 NO + 1 changeover 6 NO + 1 changeover 4 NO + 3 changeover 6 NO + 4 changeover + 1 SSR
INTERFACE
Programming with NFC technology –– ––
Front optical USB communication port with CX01 with CX01 with CX01 with CX01
Front optical Wi-Fi communication port with CX02 with CX02 with CX02 with CX02
USB communication –– EXP10 10 EXP10 10 EXP10 10
RS232 communication –– EXP10 11 EXP10 11 EXP10 11
RS485 communication –– EXP10 12 (built in) (built in)
Ethernet communication –– EXP10 13 EXP10 13 EXP10 13
Profibus communication –– EXP10 14 EXP10 14 EXP10 14
Communication via Modem –– –– EXP10 15 EXP10 15
Communication via Modbus with automatic battery charger –– ––
type BCG...RS
FUNCTIONS
Number of tie breakers that can be managed –– –– 1 2
Programmable source type (utility or generation)
Closed transition –– ––
Non-priority load management –– ––
Switching management with power thresholds –– –– ––
PLC logic –– ––
Timers –– ––

00 General Catalogue 201617

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

00 General Catalogue 201617

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PagineIniziali 00_GB_Layout 1 31/03/16 13:44 Pagina 1

PagineIniziali 00_GB_Layout 1 31/03/16 13:44 Pagina 2

MOTOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION 0

AUTOMATION AND CONTROL 1

0,2 In(A In0,x

MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT 40–80A CONTACTORS IN AC3

40–50kvar CONTACTORS FOR ADLX SERIES SOFT STARTERS

VLB SERIES VARIABLE SPEED SIGNAL TOWERS Ø45mm AND

PLATINUM SERIES NEW GX SERIES ROTARY

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS FOR GA SERIES 160A SWITCH

UL489 MINIATURE CIRCUIT CLASS B RESIDUAL CURRENT

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE MODULAR CONTACTORS AND

FLOAT SWITCHES 48VDC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

BCG SERIES AUTOMATIC ENERGY METERS

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ATL SERIES AUTOMATIC TRANSFER

DUAL POWER SUPPLY MODULE GENERATING SET

SOFTWARE and APP: SYNERGY GATEWAY AND 3G MODEM

• | CZECH REPUBLIC • | RUSSIA

• | SPAIN • | TURKEY • | UNITED ARAB EMIRATES

innovation and reliability

MAIN TESTS PERFORMED:

EXPERIENCE AND EXPERTISE|

To meet the growing demand for technical

interactive training benches

SM1P... SM1R... SM1RM...

Page 1-5 Page 1-5

SM1PF... LOVATO Electric motor protection circuit

Wide adjustment range

SM1P... SM1R... SM2R... SM3R... SM1RM...

SM1PF... SM1P... SM1R... - SM2R... - SM3R...

Add-on blocks/ Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Certifications and compliance

Certifications and compliance

Add-on blocks/ Accessories - Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Order Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Order code Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

Order Characteristics Qty Wt General and operational characteristics

Dimensions Wiring diagrams Technical characteristics

SM1X13 11 Only suitable for SM1R...

Three-phase connection busbars.

Three-phase connection busbar,

Three-phase connection busbar,

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

SM1P... SM1P... SM1P...

SM1X30 40P SM1X31 41P SM1X32 41P

Rigid SM1R... breaker - contactor connections.

SM1R... SM1R... SM1R...

SM1X30 40R SM1X31 41R SM1X32 41R

For BF09A...BF25A contactors.

Padlockable door coupling handle.

 Mounting also possible with side-mount

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

SM1Z17 01P SM1X14...

Combinations of SM2... and SM3... motor protection circuit breakers

Padlockable door coupling handle.

Dimensions Wiring diagrams

44.8 5.5 43.6

45 (1.77”) 80.4 (3.16”)

SM1X31 41R SM1X31 42R

45 (1.77”) 98.5 (3.88”)

65 (2.56”) 5.5 74.5 (2.93”) min. 56 (2.20”) /

Enclosures SM1Z17 01P and SM1Z17 02P Enclosures SM1Z17 05P

Mounting also possible with side-mount

BFX10 02 2NC 1 5 0.030 IEC conventional free A 10 10 10 0,1

BFX10 02 BFX10 04 G485... G222... BFX50 02 G269 2 G418... G428... BFX12 02

11 G222... 11 G454 BFX79 048 48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 5 0.012

Mounting not possible if front lateral